You are on page 1of 513

EU - VOLUME I I

Product and Application Handbook


Welcome...
... to the European edition of the BAC Product and Application Handbook.
In an era of information transfer, we are excited to make available to you a
unique compilation of industry knowledge and product application details.
This handbook reflects our commitment to facilitate the application of our
products, services and technical resources for higher system efficiency,
environmental responsibility and safe operation. BAC has a rich history in
the design and development of the world's largest range of evaporative
cooling and ice thermal storage products. A specialised hygiene services
initiative is also presented in support of these products. I hope you will find
this publication to be a valuable resource and a service to the industry
because temperature matters.
Sincerely,
Andreas G. Coumnas
Managing Director - Europe
Contents
Baltimore Aircoil Company . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A1
Introduction to Heat Transfer Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A4
Open Cooling Towers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B
Overview & Engineering Considerations . . . . . . . . . .CT - B
Series 3000-D Open Cooling Towers . . . . . . . .S3000-D - B
TXV Open Cooling Towers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .TXV - B
FXT Open Cooling Towers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .FXT - B
RCT Open Cooling Towers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .RCT - B
IMT Open Cooling Towers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .IMT - B
VTL Open Cooling Towers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .VTL - B
VXT Open Cooling Towers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .VXT -B
Closed Circuit Cooling Towers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C
Overview & Engineering Considerations . . . . . . .CCCT - C
FXV Closed Circuit Cooling Towers . . . . . . . . . . . .FXV - C
VXI Closed Circuit Cooling Towers . . . . . . . . . . . . .VXI - C
VFL Closed Circuit Cooling Towers . . . . . . . . . . . .VFL - C
Water Conserving Hybrid Wet-Dry Products . . . . . . .D
Overview & Engineering Considerations . . . . . . . .HWD - D
HXI Hybrid Closed Circuit Cooling Tower . . . . . . . . .HXI - D
HFL Hybrid Closed Circuit Cooling Tower . . . . . . .HFL - D
DFC Dry Cooler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .DFC - D
DFC-AD TrilliumSeries Cooler . . . . . . . . . . . .DFCV-AD - D
DCV-AD TrilliumSeries Condenser . . . . . . . . . .DCV-AD - D
HXC Hybrid Condenser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .HXC - D
Evaporative Condensers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E
Overview & Engineering Considerations . . . . . . . . . .EC - E
VXC Evaporative Condensers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .VXC - E
VCL Evaporative Condensers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .VCL - E
CXV Evaporative Condensers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .CXV - E
TSU ICE CHILLER

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F
Thermal Storage Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .TSU - F
Technical Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G
Connection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .TR - G
Materials of Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .TR - G
Selection Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .TR - G
The Value of Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .TR - G
Selection of Remote Sump Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .TR - G
Filtration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .TR - G
Sound Reduction Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .TR - G
Fundamentals of Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .TR - G
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .TR - G
Plume Abatement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .TR - G
Formulas and Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .TR - G
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .TR - G
Application Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .TR - G
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .TR - G
T
a
b
l
e

o
f

C
o
n
t
e
n
t
s
Table of Contents
A1
Handbook Resources
Color Coded Sections
Vertical Identification Bars
Sectional Icons
Open Cooling Towers
Closed Circuit Cooling Towers
Water Conserving Hybrid Wet-Dry Products
Evaporative Condensers
ICE CHILLER

Thermal Storage Products


Complete Product Brochures featuring
Product Introductions
Benefits
Construction Details
Custom Features & Options
Accessories
Engineering Data
Structural Support
Engineering Specifications
Technical Resources
A2
For more than seven decades Baltimore Aircoil Company has been
dedicated to the development of innovative, cost effective heat transfer
solutions for its customers. This has established BAC as the global leader of
factory assembled evaporative heat rejection and thermal storage
equipment.
Design
Ongoing investment in research and development, combined with sophisticated R&D
laboratory facilities enables BAC to consistently offer technology and products in advance
of new industry demands.
Selection
BAC offers the widest array of factory assembled evaporative heat rejection and
thermal storage equipment in the industry. Breadth of product enables BAC to provide its
customers optimized solutions with regard to their specific needs. Whether an application
calls for open or closed cooling circuits, axial or centrifugal fans, special materials of
construction or unique dimensional considerations, BAC has the solution.
Performance
All BAC products are engineered to minimize lifecycle costs through a combination of
low energy consumption and low maintenance. An extensive array of options addresses
such issues as low sound or low water consumption requirements.
Commitment
Commitment
A3
How can we help?
From employees to partners every action at BAC
centers on you, the customer. Our service philosophy
extends beyond customer service to embody a
total service approach. So from application to
installation to aftermarket needs, whether you
are working with our representatives, the
Product & Application Handbook or using
www.BaltimoreAircoil.com, BAC has a tool to help.
BAC Sales Channel
BAC employs the most extensive and
experienced network of manufacturers
representatives to provide you unrivalled
local support for your specific application
needs. Integrated globally, the BAC
network of representatives facilitates
design support for projects coordinated
on a local, national, or international scale.
BAC Product & Application
Handbook
A revolutionary tool for assisting with
equipment application and selection
requirements, it is the only place to find
critical industry technical and product
information together in one
convenient format.
www. BaltimoreAircoil.com
A proprietary online tool that allows access
to resources and education to assist product
evaluation, comparison and selection.

Product Information

Selections

Equipment Specifications

Technical Information

Rigging and Installation Manuals


A4
Baltimore Aircoil
Open Cooling Towers
Open cooling towers are a proven and cost-effective method of cooling condenser water loops and
industrial processes. In operation, the condenser water (or process water) flows directly over the heat
transfer surface of the open cooling tower. As air is introduced into the tower, a fraction of this water is
evaporated, cooling the remaining water.
Closed Circuit Cooling Towers
Closed circuit cooling towers keep the process fluid clean and contaminant free in a closed loop. This
creates two separate fluid circuits: (1) an external circuit, in which spray water circulates over the coil and
mixes with the outside air, and (2) an internal circuit, in which the process fluid to be cooled circulates inside
the coil. During operation, heat is transferred from the warm fluid in the coil to the spray water, and then to
the atmosphere as a portion of the water evaporates. In addition to chiller applications and industrial process
cooling, closed circuit cooling towers are often used in heat pump loops, where closed loop cooling is
preferred.
Water Conserving Hybrid Wet-Dry Products
Water conserving and hybrid products are usually of the closed circuit type. The hybrid wet-dry products cool
the liquid to be cooled by efficiently combining dry sensible air cooling with evaporative dooling. These
products include two or more distinctive heat transfer surfaces or sections combined into one product
optimising the use of ambient dry and wet bulb temperature. Low water and water treatment cost, vastly
improved opearational safety and virtual elimination of visible plume are the main advantages of intelligent
water saving products.
Evaporative Condensers
When applied to HVAC and light industrial systems, evaporative condensers provide lower condensing
temperatures and compressor kW savings of up to 15 percent compared with traditional systems. In an
evaporative condenser, refrigerant vapor is condensed in a coil, which is continually wetted on the outside
by a recirculating water system. Air is circulated over the coil, causing a small portion of the recirculating
water to evaporate. The evaporation removes heat from the vapor in the coil, causing it to condense.
Ice Thermal Storage Products
Ice thermal storage units are used to build and store cooling in the form of ice during periods of reduced
cooling demand. This way the mechanical refrigeration system need not be sized on peak load but on
"average" conditions. Hence a smaller refrigeration system with lower power requirements and a smaller
refrigerant charge can be selected. Compared to conventional refrigeration systems, ice thermal storage
systems generally have a higher compressor operating efficiency since the compressor will operate
continuously at full capacity and not at fluctuating part load conditions. Ice thermal storage units can either
be of the "internal" or ""external" melt type. For "internal melt" only glycol solutions can be used as
secondary refrigerant. "External melt" ice thermal storage units can use either direct refrigerant feed or
glycol solutions.
Heat Transfer Products
Evaporative cooling products minimize the energy consumption of the entire system by providing lower
operating temperatures than possible with comparably sized air-cooled equipment. BAC has a large selection
of heat transfer products to offer, each of which falls into one of these five main categories:
Need help deciding which
product to use?
Contact your local BAC Balticare
Representative for assistance.
Overview
CT - B 1
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
Open Cooling Towers
Product Group Detail
General Information ................................................................................. B2
Principle of Operation .............................................................................. B2
Configuration ............................................................................................. B2
Water Distribution System ....................................................................... B2
Fan System ................................................................................................. B3
Capacity Range .......................................................................................... B3
Maximum Entering Water Temperature ................................................ B4
Typical Applications .................................................................................. B4
Product Line Overview Table .................................................................. B4
Engineering Considerations ..................................................................... B6
CT - B 2
O
v
e
r
v
i
e
w
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
General Information
Open cooling towers provide evaporative cooling for many types of systems, and the specific
application will largely determine which BAC Cooling Tower is best suited for a project. The
Product Line Overview Table is intended as a general guide. Specialised assistance is available
through your local BAC Balticare Representative.
Principle of Operation
Open cooling towers reject heat from water-cooled systems to the atmosphere. Hot water from the
system enters the cooling tower and is distributed over the wet deck (heat transfer surface). Air is
pulled or pushed through the wet deck, causing a small portion of the water to evaporate.
Evaporation removes heat from the remaining water, which is collected in the cold water basin and
returned to the system to absorb more heat.
Each open cooling tower line, although operating under the same basic principle of operation, is
arranged a little differently. See the schematics on the Product Line Overview Table for product
specific details.
Configuration
There are two main configurations of factory assembled open cooling towers: crossflow and
counterflow. In crossflow cooling towers, the water flows vertically down the wet deck as the air
flows horizontally across it. In counterflow cooling towers, the water flows vertically down the wet
deck as the air flows vertically up it.
Water Distribution System
Open cooling towers employ either gravity distribution or pressurised spray systems to distribute
water over the wet deck surface. Gravity distribution systems, installed on BACs crossflow cooling
towers, feature hot water basins mounted on top of the tower above the wet deck. A series of
metering orifices in the floor of each hot water basin distribute the water as a function of the depth
of the water in the basin. Gravity distribution systems generally require minimal pump head, can
be inspected while the unit is in operation and are easy to access for routine maintenance and
service.
Spray distribution systems, employed on counterflow cooling towers, feature a series of pipes fitted
with spray nozzles mounted inside the tower above the wet deck. These systems typically require
0,15 through 0,5 bar of water pressure at the water inlet and require the unit to be out of service
for inspection and maintenance.
Crossflow Configuration Counterflow Configuration
CT - B 3
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Fan System
The flow of air through most factory assembled evaporative cooling equipment is provided by one
or more mechanically driven fans. The fan(s) may be axial or centrifugal, each type having its own
distinct advantages.
Axial fan units require approximately half the fan motor kilowatt of comparably sized centrifugal fan
units, offering significant life-cycle cost savings.
Centrifugal fan units are capable of overcoming reasonable amounts of external static pressure
(125 Pa), making them suitable for both indoor and outdoor installations. Centrifugal fans are also
inherently quieter than axial fans, although the difference is minimal and can often be overcome
through the application of optional low sound fans and/or sound attenuation on axial fan units. Fans
can be applied in an induced draft or a forced draft configuration.
Induced Draft
The rotating air handling components of induced draft equipment are mounted in the top deck of
the unit, minimizing the impact of fan noise on near-by neighbors and providing maximum
protection from fan icing with units operating in sub-freezing conditions. The air being drawn
through the unit hereby discharges over the inducing fan. The use of corrosion resistant materials
ensures long life and minimizes maintenance requirements for the air handling components.
Forced Draft
Rotating air-handling components are located on the air inlet face at the base of forced draft
equipment whereby fresh air is blown through the unit. This base fan position facilitates easy
access for routine maintenance and service. Additionally, location of these components in the dry
entering air stream extends component life by isolating them from the corrosive saturated
discharge air.
Capacity Range
In the following Product Line Overview Table, product capacity range is called out in terms of water
flow capability at 35C/30C/21C. A nominal cooling tower capacity is defined at 35C entering
water temperature to a 30C leaving water temperature at a 21C entering wet-bulb temperature.
Nominal conditions are typical of conventional HVAC designs but will not apply to all projects.
All water flow capacities shown are for a single cell; multiple cell units can be applied to achieve
larger capacities.
Gravity Distribution Basin Pressurised Spray Distribution
Centrifugal Fans Axial Fans
CT - B 4
O
v
e
r
v
i
e
w
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Maximum Entering Water Temperature
As previously stated, typical HVAC conditions call for an entering water temperature of
approximately 35C. All BAC Cooling Towers are capable of withstanding temperatures of at least
50C with standard fill materials. For applications where the entering water temperature exceeds
50C, check the Product Line Overview Table or consult your local BAC/Balticare representative
to determine whether alternate fill materials are available for your project.
Typical Applications
A list of typical applications is provided in the Product Line Overview Table for your reference.
Product Line Overview Table
1. Air in, 2. Air Out, 3. Hot Water In, 4. Cooled Water out, 5. Water; 6. Wet Deck Surface, 7. Cold Water Basin; 8. Water Distribution System; 9.
Eliminators.
Note: For projects requiring water conservation and/or plume sensitive location, VXT and VTL cooling towers can be
equipped with plume abatement coils (PAC) in combination with 2-way valve arrangement. Refer to your BAC Balticare
representative for more details and selections.
Series 3000-D TXV FXT
Principle of
Operation

Configuration Crossflow Crossflow Crossflow
Water Distribution Gravity Gravity Gravity
Fan System Axial Fan, Induced Draft Axial Fan, Induced Draft Axial Fan, Forced Draft
Capacity Range
(Single Cell)
40 to 260 l/s 10 tot 128 l/s 3 tot 145 l/s
Maximum
Entering Water
Temperature
50 C standard wet deck
55C Alternative wet deck material
50 C standard wet deck
55C Alternative wet deck material
50 C standard wet deck
55C Alternative wet deck material
Typical
Applications
Medium to large HVAC & industrial applications
Replacement of field erected towers
Medium HVAC & industrial
applications
Counterflow unit replacements
Crossflow unit replacements
Tight enclosures & installations
requiring a single air inlet
Small to medium industrial
applications
1
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
3
5
1
2
3
4
6
7
8
9
5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CT - B 5
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Note :
BAC offers heat exchanger skids in combination with most of his open cooling tower products.
These skids are available for both new installations or to retrofit on existing installations. The heat
exchanger skid consists of a plate heat exchanger with pump and interconnecting piping and
appendages. The skids are delivered on a heavy duty frame and with steel panel enclosure. Refer
to your BAC Balticare representative for more details and selections.
RCT IMT VTL VXT
Counterflow Counterflow Counterflow Counterflow
Pressurised Pressurised Pressurised Pressurised
Axial Fan, Induced Draft Axial Fan, Induced Draft Centrifugal Fan, Forced Draft Centrifugal Fan, Forced Draft
40 to 145 l/s 35 to 575 l/s 4 tot 90 l/s 1,6 to 1230 l/s
55C Standard Wet Deck
60C w/Alternate Wet Deck
Materials
55C Standard Wet Deck
65C w/Alternate Wet Deck
Materials
55C Standard Wet Deck
65 C w/Alternate Wet Deck Materials
55C Standard Wet Deck
65C w/Alternate Wet Deck
Materials
Small to medium industrial
applications
Dirty Water applications
Large industrial applications
Replacement of field erected
towers with basinless units
Dirty water applications.
Small to medium HVAC & Industrial
applications
Installations w/extremely low
height requirements
Indoor Installations
High temperature industrial
applications
Tight enclosures & installations requiring
a single air inlet
Small to medium HVAC &
industrial applications
Indoor installations
High temperature industrial
applications
Tight enclosures & installa-
tions requiring a single air
inlet
1
2
3
4
1
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
1
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CT - B 6
O
v
e
r
v
i
e
w
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Engineering Considerations
Location
Units must have an adequate supply of fresh air to the air inlet(s). When units are located adjacent
to building walls or in enclosures, care must be taken to ensure that the warm, saturated discharge
air is not deflected off surrounding walls or enclosures and drawn back to the air inlet(s).
Warning: Each unit should be located and positioned to prevent the introduction of the warm discharge air and the
associated drift, which may contain chemical or biological contaminants including Legionella, into the ventilation
systems of the building on which the unit is located or those of adjacent buildings.
Note: For detailed recommendations on layout, please consult your local BAC Balticare Representative.
For VL and VX products, bottom screens or solid bottom panels may be desirable or necessary for
safety, depending on the location and conditions at the installation site.
Piping and Valves
Piping must be sized and installed in accordance with good piping practice. All piping should be
supported by pipe hangers or other supports, not by the unit. On open systems, in order to prevent
basin overflow at shutdown and to ensure satisfactory pump operation at start-up, all heat
exchangers and as much piping as possible should be installed below the operating level of the
cooling tower.
Some units may require flow balancing valves (supplied by others) at the hot water inlets to
balance the flow to individual inlets and cells. External shutoff valves (supplied by others) may also
be required if the system design necessitates the isolation of individual cells.
When multiple cells are used on a common system, equalizing lines should be installed between
the cold water basins to ensure balanced water level in all cells. It is good engineering practice to
valve the inlet and outlet of each tower separately for servicing. The shut-off valves can be used,
if necessary, to adjust any minor unbalanced condition in water flow to or from the units.
Capacity Control
Variable Frequency Drives (VFD)
Installations which are to be controlled by Variable Frequency Drives (VFD) require the use of an
inverter duty motor as designed IEC 34.1, which recognizes the increased stresses placed on
motors by these drive systems. Inverter duty motors must be furnished on VFD applications in
order to maintain the motor warranty. Fan motors must be furnished with thermal protection (either
PTC sensors or coil thermostats normally open, or normally closed). The motor protection consists
of temperature sensitive cutout devices embedded in the motor windings (minimum 3 per motor).
The minimum fan motor speed during normal operation should not be below 30% of the speed
indicated on the motor nameplate. This corresponds with 15 Hz for a 50 Hz supply and 18 Hz for
a 60 Hz supply.
BAC offers factory installed motor control packages including VFD drives. Refer to the section
"Technical Resources, Motor Controls". Check with your local BAC Balticare representative for
availability.
Warning: When the fan speed is to be changed from the factory-set speed, including through the use of a variable
speed control device, steps must be taken to avoid operating at or near fan speeds that cause a resonance with the
unit or its supporting structure. At start-up, the variable frequency drive should be cycled slowly between zero and
full speed and any speeds that cause a noticeable resonance in the unit should be locked out by the variable speed
drive.
Fan Cycling
Fan cycling is the simplest method of capacity control. The number of steps of capacity control can
be increased using the Baltiguard Fan System, the independent fan motor option, or two-speed
fan motors in conjunction with fan cycling (see the Custom Features & Options section of the
CT - B 7
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
appropriate product line to determine whether the Baltiguard Fan System or the independent fan
motor option are available; two-speed motors are available for all products). These options provide
substantial energy savings when compared to simple fan cycling.
Warning: Rapid on-off cycling can cause the fan motor to overheat. It is recommended that controls be set to allow a
maximum of 6 on-off cycles per hour.
Capacity Control Dampers (VTL and VXT Models Only)
On centrifugal fan models, modulating capacity control dampers are available to provide close
control of the leaving temperature. See Section "Accessories" or contact your local BAC Balticare
representative.
Vibration Cut-out Switch
Vibration cut-out switches are recommended on all axial fan installations. Vibration cut-out
switches are designed to interrupt power to the fan motor and/or provide an alarm to the operator
in the event of excessive vibration. BAC offers both electronic and mechanical vibration cut-out
switches on all cooling towers.
Water Treatment
As water evaporates in the unit, the dissolved solids originally present in the water remain in the
system. The concentration of these dissolved solids increases rapidly and can cause scale and
corrosion. In addition, airborne impurities and biological contaminants, including Legionella, may
be introduced into the circulating water. To control all potential contaminants, a water treatment
program must be employed. In many cases, a simple bleed-off may be adequate for control of
scale and corrosion.
However, biological contamination, including Legionella, can be controlled only through the use of
biocides. Such treatment should be initiated at system startup, after periods of equipment
shutdown, and continued regularly thereafter. Accordingly, it is strongly recommended a biocide
treatment be initiated when the unit is first filled with water and continued regularly thereafter. For
more information, consult the appropriate Operating and Maintenance Manual.
When a water treatment program is employed, it must be compatible with construction materials.
Batch feeding of chemicals into the unit is not recommended. If units are constructed with optional
corrosion resistant materials, acid treatment may be considered; however, the water quality must
be maintained within the guidelines set forth in the Operating and Maintenance Instructions.
Note: Unless a common remote sump is utilised, each cell of a multi-cell installation must be treated as a separate
entity, even if the cold water basins are equalized.
For complete Water Quality Guidelines, see the appropriate Operating and Maintenance
Instruction Manual, available at www.baltimoreaircoil.com. For specific recommendations on water
treatment, contact a competent water treatment supplier.
Sound Levels
Sound rating data are available for all BAC models. When calculating the sound levels generated
by a unit, the designer must take into account the effects of the geometry of the tower as well as
the distance and direction from the unit to noise-sensitive areas. Whisper Quiet fans and intake
and discharge sound attenuation can be supplied on certain models to provide reduced sound
characteristics (see the Custom Features and Options section of the appropriate product line for
details). The Baltiguard

Fan System, two-speed motors, or variable frequency drives can also be


used to reduce sound during periods of non-peak thermal loads. For more information on sound
and how it relates to evaporative cooling equipment, see Section "Technical Resources,
Fundamentals of Sound". For detailed low sound selections, please consult your local BAC
Balticare Representative.
CT - B 8
O
v
e
r
v
i
e
w
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Winterization
When a unit is shut down in freezing weather, the basin water must be protected by draining to an
indoor auxiliary remote sump tank or by providing supplementary heat to the cold water basin.
Supplementary heat can be provided by electric immersion heaters or in some cases, hot water,
steam coils, or steam injectors. All exposed water piping, make-up lines, and spray pumps (if
applicable) that do not drain at shutdown should be traced with electric heater tape and insulated.
For remote sump applications, the spray water pump must be selected for the required flow at a
total head which includes the vertical lift, pipe friction (in supply and suction lines) plus the required
pressure at the inlet header of the water distribution system (14 kPa). A valve should always be
installed in the discharge line from the pump to permit adjusting flow to the unit requirement. Inlet
water pressure should be measured by a pressure gauge installed in the water supply riser at the
spray water inlet, and adjusted to the specified inlet pressure.
Indoor Installations (applicable to VTL and VXT models only)
Many indoor installations require the use of inlet and/or discharge ductwork. Units installed with
inlet ductwork must be ordered with solid-bottom panels. Generally, intake ducts are used
only on smaller units while the equipment room is used as a plenum for larger units. Discharge
ductwork will normally be required to carry the saturated discharge air from the building.
Both intake and discharge ductwork must have access doors to allow servicing of the fan
assembly, drift eliminators, and water distribution system. All ductwork is supplied and installed by
others and should be symmetrical and designed to provide even air distribution across the face of
air intakes and discharge openings. Such ductwork may increase the external static pressure on
the unit, requiring a larger fan motor to be installed. This external static pressure must be quantified
(in Pa) to BAC to allow for suitable fan motor sizing.
Warning: The discharge opening must be positioned to prevent the introduction of discharge air into the fresh air
intakes serving the unit or the ventilation systems of adjacent buildings.
Note: Axial fan units are not suitable for indoor installations.
Safety
Adequate precautions, appropriate for the installation and location of these products, should be
taken to safeguard the public from possible injury and the equipment and the premises from
damage. Operation, maintenance and repair of this equipment should be undertaken only by
personnel qualified to do so. Proper care, procedures and tools must be used in handling, lifting,
installing, operating, maintaining, and repairing this equipment to prevent personal injury and/or
property damage.
Wet Deck Surface Compatibility
BACs standard wet deck is constructed of plastic material. The wet deck surface is compatible
with the water found in most evaporative cooling applications. The maximum allowable water
temperature for each product is as shown in the following table
N/A = not applicable
For applications where the entering water temperature exceeds the limits shown above, contact
your local BAC Balticare Representative for assistance.
Product Line Standard Wet Deck High Temperature Wet Deck FRP
VTL 55C 65C N/A
VXT 55C 65C N/A
S3000D 50C 55C N/A
TXV 50C 55C N/A
FXT 50C 55C N/A
IMT 55C 65C 55C
RCT 55C 60C 55C
Open Cooling Towers
S3000D - B 1
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
S3000D
Product Detail
S3000D Open Cooling Towers .................................................................. B2
Benefits ....................................................................................................... B4
Construction Details .................................................................................. B6
Custom Features and Options .................................................................. B7
Accessories ................................................................................................. B9
Engineering Data ..................................................................................... B12
Structural Support .................................................................................. B17
Engineering Specifications ..................................................................... B21
S3000D - B 2
S
3
0
0
0
D
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
S3000D Open Cooling Towers
Capacity
Single Cell Capacity:
40 260 l/s
General Description
Series 3000D Cooling Towers deliver fully rated thermal performance over a wide range of flow
and temperature requirements. Standard design features satisfy todays environmental concerns,
minimize installation costs, maximize year-round operating reliability, and simplify maintenance
requirements.
Key Features
Low energy consumption
Low installed cost
Easy maintenance
Reliable year-round operation
Long service life
Easy removable high efficient fill as standard
Cold water basin is to be free draining
S3000D - B 3
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
S3000D - B 4
S
3
0
0
0
D
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Benefits
Low Energy Consumption
Evaporative cooling equipment minimises the energy consumption of the entire system
because it provides lower operating temperatures. The owner saves money while conserving
natural resources and reducing environmental impact.
The cooling towers provide the heat rejection required at the lowest possible energy input via:
- High efficiency, low kW axial fans
- High efficiency easy removable heat exchange surface, which provides maximum air/water
contact time at low air pressure drops
- Variable Frequency Drives
Low Installed Cost
Support All models mount directly on two parallel I-beams and ship complete with motors and
drives factory-installed and aligned.
Modular Design Models S3-D728L through S3-D1056L and S3-D1132L through S3-D1301L
ship in two sections to minimise the size and weight of the heaviest lift, allowing for the use of
smaller, less costly cranes.
Reliable Year-Round Operation
Belt Drive System utilizes special corrosion-resistant materials of construction and state-of-
the-art technology to ensure ease of maintenance and reliable year-round performance.
Combined Inlet Shields prevent biological growth from sunlight, act as a filter for air borne
impurities and debris and eliminate water splash out.
Modular Design Combined Inlet Shields
S3000D - B 5
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Easy Removable Fill
The fill removal system allows nesting the fill in place for cleaning or replacement. The fill section
can easily be reached through the access hatch in the hot water basin. Telescopic fill supports
allow for complete fill removal.
Free Draining Cold Water Basin
The sloping cooling tower basin allows for free draining.
Long Service Life
Frame Construction Enables casing panels,
critical links for long service life, to be
constructed of corrosion-resistant, fiberglass
reinforced polyester (FRP).
Materials of Construction Various materials
are available to meet the corrosion resistance,
unit operating life, and budgetary requirements
of any project (see section: Custom Features
and Options for more details).
Easy Maintenance
Easy Cleaning The wet deck surface is elevated above the sloped cold water basin floor to
facilitate flushing of dirt and debris from this critical area.
Hinged Access Doors Provide easy entry to the spacious plenum for routine drive
maintenance.

Removable Fill on Telescopic Fill Supports Sloped Cold Water Basin
S3000D Frame Construction shown without
FRP Panels
Elevated Wet Deck Surface Easy Access to Hot Water Basin
S3000D - B 6
S
3
0
0
0
D
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Construction Details
1. Heavy-Duty Construction
Heavy-gauge Z600 galvanized steel frame
2. FRP Casing Panels
Corrosion resistant
UV resistant finish
Maintenance free
3. Fan Drive System
Premium quality belts
Corrosion resistant sheaves
Heavy-duty bearings
Adapted fan motor for operation in saturated conditions.
4. Low kW Axial Fan
Quiet operation
High Efficiency
Corrosion resistant aluminum
5. Water Distribution System
Low pump head gravity distribution basin
Large orifice, non-clog nozzles
Steel distribution covers
6. BACross II Wet Deck Surface with Integral Drift
Eliminators (Not Shown)
Plastic material
Impervious to rot, decay and biological attack
Designed and manufactured by BAC
7. Combined Inlet Shields
Corrosion Resistant
Easily removable
UV resistant plastic material
8. Cold Water Basin
Sloped cold water basin for easy cleaning
Suction strainer with anti-vortex hood
Adjustable water make-up assembly from inside the unit
9. Hinged Access Doors (Not Shown)
Inward swinging door on each end wall
S3000D - B 7
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Custom Features and Options
Construction Options
Standard Construction:
Steel panels and structural elements are constructed of Z600 heavy-gauge hot-dip galvanized
steel. All external steel panels are protected with the Baltiplus Corrosion Protection. Casing
panels are constructed of UV resistant fiberglass reinforced polyester.
Optional BALTIBOND

Corrosion Protection System:


The BALTIBOND

Corrosion Protection System, a hybrid polymer coating used to extend


equipment life, is applied to all hot-dip galvanized steel components of the unit.
Optional Stainless Steel Cold Water Basin:
A type 304 or 316 stainless steel cold water basin is provided.
Note: See section Technical Resources, Material Options for more details on the materials described above.
Fan Drive System
The low sound fan drive system provides the
cooling air necessary to reject heat from the
system to the atmosphere. The standard fan drive
system consists of two sheaves located on
minimum shaft centreline distances to maximise
belt life. A fan motor, custom engineered for BAC
to provide maximum performance for cooling
tower service, is provided.
Low Sound Operation
The ultra low sound levels generated by Series
3000D Cooling Towers make them suitable for
installation in most environments. For very sound
sensitive installations, the Series 3000D is
available with a Whisper Quiet Fan - option that
significantly reduces the sound levels generated
from the tower.
For extremely sound sensitive installations,
factory designed, tested and rated sound
attenuation is available for both the air inlet and
discharge of Series 3000D Cooling Towers.
No discharge attenuator for units with Whisper
Quiet Fan.
Note: For more information, please refer to the section Technical Resources, Sound Reduction Options.
Fan Drive System
S3000D with Intake and Discharge Attenuator
S3000D - B 8
S
3
0
0
0
D
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Gear Drive System, Externally Mounted Motor
A gear drive system with a TEFC motor mounted outside the airstream is also available on Series
3000D Cooling Towers. A non-corrosive carbon-fiber composite drive shaft with stainless steel
hubs is selected with a 2.0 service factor. The motor and drive shaft ship separately for easy field
installation.
Gear Drive System, Closed-Coupled
Motor
A close-coupled gear drive system is available as
a fan drive option on Series 3000D Cooling
Towers. Both the gear drive and couplings are
selected with a 2,0 service factor. Gear
construction includes a nickel-alloy steel shaft,
casehardened gears, self-lubrication, and a
single piece, gray iron housing. This drive system
ships completely installed and aligned.
Remote Sump Execution
The use of an auxiliary sump within a heated
space is the most satisfactory way to protect
sump water from freezing. When the circulating
pump is shut off, all the water in the water distribution, in suspension and in the sump will drain
freely to the auxiliary sump.
Note: For detailed information on the calculation of the remote sump tank, please refer to the section "Technical Resources, Selection of
Remote Sump Tank".
Combined Inlet Shields
Combined Inlet shields prevent biological growth
from sunlight, act as a filter for air borne impurities
and debris and eliminate water splash out.
High Temperature Wet Deck
If operation above 50C is anticipated, an optional
high temperature wet deck material is available
which increases the maximum allowable entering
water temperature to 55C.
Gear Drive System
Combined Inlet Shields
S3000D - B 9
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Accessories
Ladder, Safety Cage and Handrails
In the event the owner requires easy access to
the top of the unit, the unit can be furnished with
ladder(s) extending from the base of the unit to
the deck of the unit, as well as safety cages, and
handrail packages.
Internal Service Platforms
A galvanized steel internal walkway is available to
provide a permanent working surface for easy
access to the strainer, outlet, and make-up water
assembly. For access to the motor and drive
assemblies on two-piece units, an internal ladder and upper service platform with handrails is
available.

Vibration Cut Out Switch
A factory-mounted vibration cut-out switch is available to effectively protect against equipment
failure due to excessive vibration of the mechanical equipment system. BAC can provide a
vibration cut-out switch in an IP65 enclosure to ensure reliable protection.
Electric Water Level Control Package
The electric water level control replaces the standard mechanical make-up valve when a more
precise water level control is required. This package consists of a float switch mounted in the basin
and a solenoid activated valve in the make-up water line. The valve is slow closing to minimize
water hammer.
Ladder and Safety Cage, Handrails
Internal Platform and Ladder Internal Walkway
S3000D - B 10
S
3
0
0
0
D
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Basin Heaters
Units exposed to below freezing ambient temperatures require protection to prevent freezing of the
water in the cold water basin when the unit is idle. Factory-installed heaters, which maintain the
water temperature at 4C, are a simple and inexpensive way of providing such protection. The
heater package includes the heaters, a thermostat and a low level cut out switch to protect the
heaters if the water level is too low. Standard electric heaters are selected for -18C ambient
temperature.
Extended Lubrication Lines
Extended lubrication lines with grease fittings are
available for lubrication of the fan shaft bearings.
Basin Sweeper Piping
Basin sweeper piping provides an effective
method of preventing sediment from collecting in
the cold water basin of the unit. A complete piping
system, including nozzles, is provided in the unit
basin for connection to side stream filtration
equipment.
Note: For more information, please refer to the section "Technical
Resources, Filtration".
Mechanical Equipment Removal
System
The mechanical equipment removal system is a
lightweight, easy to install system for removal and
installation of fan motor or gearbox. (motors upto
22kW)
Distribution Basin Covers
These covers help prevent the accumulation of
leaves, debris and algae in the hot water
distribution basins.
Model No.
S3000D
Heaters -18C
(kW)
S3-D240 L S3-D379 L 2 x 8
S3-D412 L S3-D527 L 2 x 8
S3-D473 L S3-D672 L 2 x 12
S3-D728 L S3-D1056 L 2 x 12
S3-D583 L S3-D725 L 2 x 14
S3-D1132 L S3-D1301 L 2 x 14
Extended Lubrication Lines
Mechanical Equipment Removal System
S3000D - B 11
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Velocity Recovery Stacks
Velocity recovery stacks are available on the
Series 3000D for incremental thermal
performance increases. This accessory can be
used to gain extra capacity in tight layouts, while
maintaining the same footprint and unit kW. Field
assembly is required.
S3000D with Velocity Recovery Stacks
S3000D - B 12
S
3
0
0
0
D
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Engineering Data
REMARK: Do not use for construction. Refer to factory certified dimensions & weights. This brochure includes data
current at time of publication, which should be reconfirmed at the time of purchase. In the interest of product
improvement, specifications, weights and dimensions are subject to change without notice. Up-to-date engineering
data and more can be found at www.BaltimoreAircoil.com.
Single Cell Units
Model
Operating
Weight
(kg)
Shipping
Weight
(kg)
Heaviest
Section
(kg)
H
(mm)
L1
(mm)
W
(mm)
A
(mm)
Fan
Motor
(kW)
Airflow
(m
3
/s)
S3-D240 L
S3-D272 L
S3-D299 L
6706
6765
6792
3083
3142
3169
3083
3142
3169
2840
2840
2840
2584
2584
2584
5500
5500
5500
2635
2635
2635
7,5
11
15
28,1
32,0
35,0
S3-D333 L
S3-D358 L
S3-D379 L
7151
7164
7187
3296
3310
3332
3296
3310
3332
3247
3247
3247
(3)
2584
2584
2584
5500
5500
5500
3040
3040
3040
15
18,5
22
38,4
41,2
43,7
S3-D412 L
S3-D436 L
8435
8458
3823
3845
3823
3845
3247
3247
(3)
2978
2978
6110
6110
3040
3040
18,5
22
46,5
49,2
S3-D455 L
S3-D482 L
S3-D527 L
8844
8867
8939
3968
3991
4063
3968
3991
4063
3653
3653
(3)
3653
(3)
2978
2978
2978
6110
6110
6110
3450
3450
3450
18,5
22
30
50,3
53,3
58,4
S3-D473 L
S3-D501 L
10483
10506
4626
4649
4626
4649
3473
3473
(3)
3600
3600
6566
6566
3040
3040
18,5
22
53,3
56,4
S3-D552 L
S3-D604 L
S3-D648 L
S3-D672 L
11663
11736
11740
12285
4903
4976
4980
5530
4903
4976
4980
5530
3843
(3)
3843
(3)
3843
(3)
3843
(3)
3600
3600
3600
3600
6566
6566
6566
6566
3450
3450
3450
3450
22
30
37
45
61,1
66,8
71,7
74,4
S3-D728 L
S3-D781 L
S3-D828 L
14555
14560
14660
6251
6256
6351
3959
3963
4059
4920
(3)
4920
(3)
4920
(3)
3600
3600
3600
6566
6566
6566
4715
4715
4715
30
37
45
80,2
86,0
91,1
S3-D872 L
S3-D923 L
S3-D970 L
15904
16004
16585
6583
6678
7264
3995
4091
4676
5733
(3)
5733
(3)
5923
(2)
3600
3600
3600
6566
6566
6566
5530
5530
5530
37
45
55
92,6
98,1
103,2
S3-D985 L
S3-D1056 L
18269
18310
7064
7105
4295
4336
6547
(3)
6737
(2)
3600
3600
6566
6566
6340
6340
45
55
103,1
110,6
S3-D583 L
S3-D618 L
S3-D676 L
S3-D725 L
13756
13779
13852
13856
5480
5502
5575
5580
5480
5502
5575
5580
3653
3653
(3)
3653
(3)
3653
(3)
4245
4245
4245
4245
7328
7328
7328
7328
3450
3450
3450
3450
18,5
22
30
37
64,5
68,4
74,8
80,3
S3-D1132 L 18746 7540 4644 5923
(2)
4245 7328 5530 55 120,1
S3-D1213 L
S3-D1301 L
20112
21151
7968
9007
4867
5906
6737
(2)
6737
(2)
4245
4245
7328
7328
6340
6340
55
75
126,4
135,7
1. Water In; 2. Overflow ND80; 3. Make-up; 4. Water Out; 5. Drain ND50; 6. Access Door; 7. S3-D728 L thru S3-D1056 L and S3-D1132 L thru
S3-D1301 L ship in two sections per cell. The top section is the heaviest and tallest. Top section heights are: S3-D728 L thru S3-D970 L: 3125
mm; S3-D1132 L: 3330 mm; S3-D985 L thru S3-D1056 L: 3533 mm; S3-D1213 L: 3736 mm; S3-D1301 L: 3822mm.
S3000D - B 13
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Double Cell Units
Model
Operating
Weight
(kg)
Shipping
Weight
(kg)
Heaviest
Section
(kg)
H
(mm)
L2
(mm)
W
(mm)
A
(mm)
Fan
Motor
(kW)
Airflow
(m
3
/s)
S3-D240-2 L
S3-D272-2 L
S3-D299-2 L
13412
13530
13584
6166
6284
6338
3083
3142
3169
2840
2840
2840
5290
5290
5290
5500
5500
5500
2635
2635
2635
(2x) 7,5
(2x) 11
(2x) 15
56,2
64,0
70,0
S3-D333-2 L
S3-D358-2 L
S3-D379-2 L
14302
14328
14374
6592
6620
6664
3296
3310
3332
3247
3247
3247
(3)
5290
5290
5290
5500
5500
5500
3040
3040
3040
(2x) 15
(2x) 18,5
(2x) 22
76,8
82,4
87,4
S3-D412-2 L
S3-D436-2 L
16870
16916
7646
7690
3823
3845
3247
3247
(3)
6077
6077
6110
6110
3040
3040
(2x) 18,5
(2x) 22
93,0
98,4
S3-D455-2 L
S3-D482-2 L
S3-D527-2 L
17688
17734
17878
7936
7982
8126
3968
3991
4063
3653
3653
(3)
3653
(3)
6077
6077
6077
6110
6110
6110
3450
3450
3450
(2x) 18,5
(2x) 22
(2x) 30
100,6
106,6
116,8
S3-D473-2 L
S3-D501-2 L
20966
21012
9252
9298
4626
4649
3437
3437
(3)
7321
7321
6566
6566
3040
3040
(2x) 18,5
(2x) 22
106,6
112,8
S3-D552-2 L
S3-D604-2 L
S3-D648-2 L
S3-D672-2 L
23326
23472
23480
24570
9806
9952
9960
11060
4903
4976
4980
5530
3843
(3)
3843
(3)
3843
(3)
3843
(3)
7321
7321
7321
7321
6566
6566
6566
6566
3450
3450
3450
3450
(2x) 22
(2x) 30
(2x) 37
(2x) 45
122,2
133,6
143,4
148,8
S3-D728-2 L
S3-D781-2 L
S3-D828-2 L
29110
29120
29320
12502
12512
12702
3959
3963
4059
4920
(3)
4920
(3)
4920
(3)
7321
7321
7321
6566
6566
6566
4715
4715
4715
(2x) 30
(2x) 37
(2x) 45
160,4
172,0
182,2
S3-D872-2 L
S3-D923-2 L
S3-D970-2 L
31808
32008
33170
13166
13356
14528
3995
4091
4676
5733
(3)
5733
(3)
5923
(2)
7321
7321
7321
6566
6566
6566
5530
5530
5530
(2x) 37
(2x) 45
(2x) 55
185,2
196,2
206,4
S3-D985-2 L
S3-D1056-2 L
36538
36620
14128
14210
4295
4336
6547
(3)
6737
(2)
7321
7321
6566
6566
6340
6340
(2x) 45
(2x) 55
206,2
221,2
S3-D583-2 L
S3-D618-2 L
S3-D676-2 L
S3-D725-2 L
27512
27558
27704
27712
10960
11004
11150
11160
5480
5502
5575
5580
3653
3653
(3)
3653
(3)
3653
(3)
8610
8610
8610
8610
7328
7328
7328
7328
3450
3450
3450
3450
(2x) 18,5
(2x) 22
(2x) 30
(2x) 37
129,0
136,8
149,6
160,6
S3-D1132-2 L 37492 15080 4644 5923
(2)
8610 7328 5530 (2x) 55 240,2
S3-D1213-2 L
S3-D1301-2 L
40224
42302
15936
18014
4867
5906
6737
(2)
6737
(2)
8610
8310
7328
7328
6340
6340
(2x) 55
(2x) 75
252,8
271,4
1. Water In; 2. Overflow; 3. Make-up; 4. Water Out; 5. Drain ND50; 6. Access Door; 7. S3-D728 L thru S3-D1056 L and S3-D1132 L thru S3-
D1301 L ship in two sections per cell. The top section is the heaviest and tallest. Top section heights are: S3-D728 L thru S3-D970 L: 3125 mm;
S3-D1132 L: 3330 mm; S3-D985 L thru S3-D1056 L: 3533 mm; S3-D1213 L: 3736 mm; S3-D1301 L: 3822mm.
S3000D - B 14
S
3
0
0
0
D
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
General Notes
1. Operating weight is for tower with the water level in the cold water
basin at overflow. If a lower operating weight is needed to meet
design requirements, your local BAC Balticare Sales
Representative can provide additional assistance.
2. Heights are for units with belt drive, except for models with motor
of 55 kW and larger where gear drive is standard (= S3-D970 L,
S3-D1056 L, S3-D1132 L, S3-D1213 L and S3D-1301 L).
3. Models with motors of 22 to 45 kW are shipped with an optional
gear drive and may have heights up to 190 mm greater than
shown.
4. Models with optional Whisper Quiet Fan may have heights up to
1000 mm greater than shown.
5. Models with an optional Velocity Recovery Stack can be up to
1500 mm higher.
Connection Sizes
Notes:
1. Top inlet connections are flange stud circles. All other
connections ND100 and smaller are MPT. Connections larger than
ND100 are beveled for welding.
2. On double cell units, connections are the same size but are
located on both ends of the unit.
Model
S3000
Top
Inlet
(mm)
Water
Outlet
(mm)
Make-Up
(mm)
F
(mm)
G
(mm)
J
(mm)
S3-D240 L
S3-D272 L
S3-D299 L
(2x) ND 150
(2x) ND 150
(2x) ND 150
(1x) ND 200
(1x) ND 200
(1x) ND 200
ND 25
ND 25
ND 25
6
6
6
1292
1292
1292
2706
2706
2706
S3-D333 L
S3-D358 L
S3-D379 L
(2x) ND 150
(2x) ND 150
(2x) ND 150
(1x) ND 200
(1x) ND 200
(1x) ND 200
ND 25
ND 25
ND 25
6
6
6
1292
1292
1292
2706
2706
2706
S3-D412 L
S3-D436 L
(2x) ND 150
(2x) ND 150
(1x) ND 200
(1x) ND 200
ND 40
ND 40
30
30
1489
1489
3099
3099
S3-D455 L
S3-D482 L
S3-D527 L
(2x) ND 150
(2x) ND 150
(2x) ND 150
(1x) ND 250
(1x) ND 250
(1x) ND 250
ND 40
ND 40
ND 40
30
30
30
1489
1489
1489
3099
3099
3099
S3-D473 L
S3-D501 L
(2x) ND 200
(2x) ND 200
(1x) ND 250
(1x) ND 250
ND 40
ND 40
30
30
1800
1800
3721
3721
S3-D552 L
S3-D604 L
S3-D648 L
S3-D672 L
(2x) ND 200
(2x) ND 200
(2x) ND 200
(2x) ND 200
(1x) ND 250
(1x) ND 250
(1x) ND 250
(1x) ND 250
ND 40
ND 40
ND 40
ND 40
30
30
30
30
1800
1800
1800
1800
3721
3721
3721
3721
S3-D728 L
S3-D781 L
S3-D828 L
(2x) ND 200
(2x) ND 200
(2x) ND 200
(1x) ND 300
(1x) ND 300
(1x) ND 300
ND 40
ND 40
ND 40
30
30
30
1800
1800
1800
3721
3721
3721
S3-D872 L
S3-D923 L
S3-D970 L
(2x) ND 200
(2x) ND 200
(2x) ND 200
(1x) ND 300
(1x) ND 300
(1x) ND 300
ND 40
ND 40
ND 40
30
30
30
1800
1800
1800
3721
3721
3721
S3-D985 L
S3-D1056 L
(2x) ND 200
(2x) ND 200
(1x) ND 300
(1x) ND 300
ND 40
ND 40
30
30
1800
1800
3721
3721
S3-D583 L
S3-D618 L
S3-D676 L
S3-D725 L
(2x) ND 200
(2x) ND 200
(2x) ND 200
(2x) ND 200
(1x) ND 250
(1x) ND 300
(1x) ND 300
(1x) ND 300
ND 40
ND 40
ND 40
ND 40
15
15
15
15
2116
2116
2116
2116
5010
5010
5010
5010
S3-D1132 L (2x) ND 250 (1x) ND 350 ND 50 15 2116 5010
S3-D1213 L
S3-D1301 L
(2x) ND 250
(2x) ND 250
(1x) ND 350
(1x) ND 350
ND 50
ND 50
15
15
2116
2116
5010
5010
S3000D - B 15
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Sound Attenuation S3-D240 L through S3-D725 L
Model No.
Fan Motor
(kW)
A
(mm)
B
(mm)
Ht
(mm)
Weight Discharge
Attenuator
(kg) (1)
Weight Intake
Attenuator
(kg) (2) (3)
S3-D240 L
S3-D272 L
S3-D299 L
7,5
11
15
2578
2578
2578
1715
1715
1715
3946
3946
3946
350
350
350
340
340
340
S3-D333 L
S3-D358 L
S3-D379 L
15
18,5
22
2578
2578
2578
2121
2121
2121
4351
4351
4351
350
350
350
420
420
420
S3-D412 L
S3-D436 L
18,5
22
3035
3035
2121
2121
4351
4351
400
400
480
480
S3-D455 L
S3-D482 L
S3-D527 L
18,5
22
30
3035
3035
3035
2527
2527
2527
4761
4761
4761
400
400
400
570
570
570
S3-D473 L
S3-D501 L
18,5
22
3340
3340
2121
2121
4351
4351
460
460
580
580
S3-D552 L
S3-D604 L
S3-D648 L
S3-D672 L
22
30
37
45
3340
3340
3340
3340
2527
2527
2527
2527
4761
4761
4761
4761
460
460
460
460
690
690
690
690
S3-D583 L
S3-D618 L
S3-D676 L
S3-D725 L
18,5
22
30
37
3645
3645
3645
3645
2527
2527
2527
2527
4761
4761
4761
4761
550
550
550
550
810
810
810
810
1. Intake Attenuator; 2. Discharge Attenuator; L=Unit Length; W=Unit Width (see engineering data).
S3000D - B 16
S
3
0
0
0
D
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Sound Attentuation S3-D728 L through S3-D1301 L
General Notes Sound Attenuation
1. Discharge attenuator is shipped in one piece, not installed.
2. Intake attenuators are shipped installed for single cell units. For 2
or more cells, consult BAC Balticare Representative.
3. Weight of intake attenuator is total for both attenuators.
4. For correct layout and piping considerations, please refer to your
local BAC Balticare representative.
Remote Sump Data
Refer to the "Technical Resources" section "Selection of Remote Sump" for Remote Sump Data.
Model No.
Fan Motor
(kW)
A
(mm)
B1
(mm)
B2
(mm)
Ht
Weight Discharge
Attenuator
(1)
(kg)
Weight Lower Intake
Attenuator (both)
(2) (3)
(kg)
Weight Upper Intake
Attenuator(both)
(2) (3)
(kg)
S3-D728 L
S3-D781 L
S3-D828 L
30
37
45
3645
3645
3645
994
994
994
2353
2353
2353
6026
6026
6026
480
480
480
270
270
270
640
640
640
S3-D872 L
S3-D923 L
S3-D970 L
37
45
55
3645
3645
3645
1807
1807
1807
2353
2353
2353
6841
6841
6841
480
480
480
500
500
500
640
640
640
S3-D985 L
S3-D1056 L
45
55
3645
3645
2213
2213
2353
2353
7651
7651
480
480
500
500
750
750
S3-D1132L 55 4255 1807 2353 6841 570 580 750
S3-D1213L
S3-D1301L
55
4255
4255
2213
2213
2759
2759
7651
7651
570
570
710
710
880
880
1. Intake Sound Attenuation; 2. Discharge Attenuation; L = Unit Length; W = Unit Width (see engineering data).
S3000D - B 17
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Structural Support
REMARK: Do not use for construction. Refer to factory certified dimensions & weights. This brochure includes data
current at time of publication, which should be reconfirmed at the time of purchase. In the interest of product
improvement, specifications, weights and dimensions are subject to change without notice. Up-to-date engineering
data and more can be found at www.BaltimoreAircoil.com.
The recommended support arrangement for the Series 3000D Cooling Tower, consists of parallel I-beams positioned as shown in the drawings.
Besides providing adequate support, the steel also serves to raise the unit above any solid foundation to assure access to the bottom of the
tower. The Series 3000D may also be supported on columns at the anchor bolt locations as shown the following Plan. A minimum bearing
surface of 100 cm must be provided under each of the concentrated load points (See Note 6 following page). To support a Series 3000D Cooling
Tower on columns, or in an alternate steel support arrangement, consult your BAC Balticare Representative.
Units with and without Sound Attenuation
Single Cell Unit Plan A
1. Outline of unit; 2. Air Inlet Side; 3. Mounting Holes ( 22 mm); 4. Access for Mounting holes required; 5. Additional Anchor Bolts (see note 7).
S3000D - B 18
S
3
0
0
0
D
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Single Cell Unit Plan B
Double Cell Unit Plan C
1. Outline of unit; 2. Air Inlet Side; 3. Mounting Holes ( 22mm); 4. Acces for Mounting Holes Required.
1. Outline of unit; 2. Air Inlet Side; 3. Mounting Holes ( 22mm); 4. Acces for Mounting Holes Required.
S3000D - B 19
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Double Cell Unit Plan D
Model No.
Operating Weight
(1)
(kg)
Shipping
Weight
(1)(2)
(kg)
Weight at bolt
hole location
(1)(2)
(kg)
Length
(L1)
(mm)
Length
(L2)
(mm)
Width
(W)
(mm)
A
(mm)
B
(mm)
C
(mm)
D
(mm)
E
(mm)
S3-D240 L
S3-D272 L
S3-D299 L
6706
6765
6792
3083
3142
3169
1677
1691
1698
2584
2584
2584
5288
5288
5288
5500
5500
5500
3100
3100
3100
4835
4835
4835
29
29
29
2526
2526
2526
178
178
178
S3-D333 L
S3-D358 L
S3-D379 L
7151
7164
7187
3296
3310
3332
1788
1791
1797
2584
2584
2584
5288
5288
5288
5500
5500
5500
3100
3100
3100
4835
4835
4835
29
29
29
2526
2526
2526
178
178
178
S3-D412 L
S3-D436 L
8435
8458
3823
3845
2109
2115
2978
2978
6076
6076
6110
6110
4731
4731
5445
5445
29
29
2920
2920
178
178
S3-D455 L
S3-D482 L
S3-D527 L
8844
8867
8939
3968
3991
4063
2211
2217
2235
2978
2978
2978
6076
6076
6076
6110
6110
6110
4731
4731
4731
5445
5445
5445
29
29
29
2920
2920
2920
178
178
178
S3-D473 L
S3-D501 L
10483
10506
4626
4649
2621
2627
3600
3600
7320
7320
6566
6566
3445
3445
5902
5902
29
29
3542
3542
178
178
S3-D552 L
S3-D604 L
S3-D648 L
S3-D672 L
11663
11736
11740
12285
4903
4976
4980
5530
2916
2934
2935
3071
3600
3600
3600
3600
7320
7320
7320
7320
6566
6566
6566
6566
3445
3445
3445
3445
5902
5902
5902
5902
29
29
29
29
3542
3542
3542
3542
178
178
178
178
S3-D728 L
S3-D781 L
S3-D828 L
14555
14560
14660
6251
6256
6351
3639
3640
3665
3600
3600
3600
7320
7320
7320
6566
6566
6566
3445
3445
3445
5902
5902
5902
29
29
29
3542
3542
3542
178
178
178
S3-D872 L
S3-D923 L
S3-D970 L
15904
16004
16585
6583
6678
7264
3976
4001
4146
3600
3600
3600
7320
7320
7320
6566
6566
6566
3445
3445
3445
5902
5902
5902
29
29
29
3542
3542
3542
178
178
178
S3-D985 L
S3-D1056 L
18269
18310
7064
7105
4567
4578
3600
3600
7320
7320
6566
6566
3445
3445
5902
5902
29
29
3542
3542
178
178
1. Outline of unit, 2. Air Inlet Side; 3. Mounting Holes( 22 mm); 4. Access for Mounting Holes required; 5. Additional Anchor Bolts (see note 7).
S3000D - B 20
S
3
0
0
0
D
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Notes:
1. Weights are for a single cell. To obtain weights for multi-cell units,
multiply by the number of cells.
2. Operating weight and weight loading are for a single cell tower
with water at overflow level in the cold water basin.
3. Support beams and anchor bolts to be selected and installed by
parties other than BAC.
4. All support steel must be level at the top.
5. Beams must be selected in accordance with accepted structural
practice. Maximum deflection of beam under unit to be 1/360 of
span, not to exceed 12 mm.
6. If point vibration isolation is used with multi-cell towers, the
isolators must be located under the support steel, not between the
support steel and the cooling towers.
7. 4 holes required for models S3-D240 L through S3-D725 L. 8
holes required for models S3-D728 L through S3-D1301 L. The 4
additional anchor bolts, for models S3-D728 L through S3-D1301
L, are located 114 mm towards the inside of the unit.
S3-D583 L
S3-D618 L
S3-D676 L
S3-D725 L
13756
13779
13852
13856
5480
5502
5575
5580
3439
3445
3463
3464
4245
4245
4245
4245
8610
8610
8610
8610
7328
7328
7328
7328
3654
3654
3654
3654
6664
6664
6664
6664
43
43
43
43
4159
4159
4159
4159
206
206
206
206
S3-D1132 L 18746 7540 4687 4245 8610 7328 3654 6664 43 4159 206
S3-D1213 L
S3-D1301 L
20112
21151
7968
9007
5028
5288
4245
4245
8610
8610
7328
7328
3654
3654
6664
6664
43
43
4159
4159
206
206
Model No.
Operating Weight
(1)
(kg)
Shipping
Weight
(1)(2)
(kg)
Weight at bolt
hole location
(1)(2)
(kg)
Length
(L1)
(mm)
Length
(L2)
(mm)
Width
(W)
(mm)
A
(mm)
B
(mm)
C
(mm)
D
(mm)
E
(mm)
S3000D - B 21
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Engineering Specifications
1.0 Cooling Tower
1.1 General: Furnish and install _____ factory-assembled, induced-
draft, axial fan, crossflow cooling tower(s) with vertical air discharge,
conforming in all aspects to the specifications, schedules and as
shown on the plans. Overall dimensions shall not exceed
approximately _____ mm long x ______ mm wide x _____ mm high.
The total connected fan kW shall not exceed _____ kW. The cooling
tower(s) shall be Baltimore Aircoil Model ____________.
1.2 Thermal Capacity: The cooling tower(s) shall be warranted by
the manufacturer to cool _____ l/s of water from ______ C to
_____C at _____C entering wet-bulb temperature.
1.3 Corrosion Resistant Construction (standard): Unless
otherwise noted in this specification, all structural members shall be
constructed of heavy-gauge Z600 metric hot-dip galvanised steel with
all edges given a protective coating of zinc-rich compound. All
external surfaces are protected with the BALTIPLUS Corrosion
Protection.
Casing panels shall be constructed of corrosion and UV-resistant
fibreglass reinforced polyester (FRP) to minimise maintenance
requirements and prolong equipment life.
(Alternate 1.3) Corrosion Resistant Construction (optional):
Unless otherwise noted in this specification, all structural members
shall be protected with the BALTIBOND

Corrosion Protection
System. The system shall consist of Z600 metric hot-dip galvanised
steel prepared in a four-step (clean, pre-treat, rinse, dry) process with
an electrostatically sprayed, thermosetting, hybrid polymer fuse-
bonded to the substrate during a thermally activated curing stage and
monitored by a 23-step quality assurance program.
Casing panels shall be constructed of corrosion and UV-resistant
fibreglass reinforced polyester (FRP) to minimise maintenance
requirements and prolong equipment life.
(Alternate 1.3) Type 304 or 316 Stainless Steel Construction: All
structural members, including the structural frame, hot and cold water
basins, distribution covers and fan deck shall be constructed of Type
304 or 316 stainless steel and assembled with stainless steel nut and
bolt fasteners. Fan cylinder shall be galvanised steel protected with
the Baltibond Corrosion Protection System.
Casing panels shall be constructed of corrosion and UV-resistant
fibreglass reinforced polyester (FRP) to minimise maintenance
requirements and prolong equipment life.
1.4 Quality Assurance: The cooling tower manufacturer shall have
a Management System certified by an accredited registrar as
complying with the requirements of ISO-9001:2000 to ensure
consistent quality of products and services.
1.5 Warranty: The manufacturers standard equipment warranty
shall be for a period of not less than one year from date of startup or
eighteen months from date of shipment, whichever occurs first.
2.0 Construction Details
2.1 Structure: The cooling tower shall be constructed with a sturdy
structural frame designed to transmit all wind and mechanical loads
to the equipment anchorage. The frame shall be constructed of
heavy-gauge steel angles and channels.
2.2 Casing Panels: Casing panels shall be constructed of corrosion
and UV-resistant fibreglass reinforced polyester (FRP) to minimise
maintenance requirements and prolong equipment life.
2.3 Cold Water Basin: The cold water basin shall be constructed of
heavy-gauge steel panels and structural members. The basin shall
include a sloping depressed section with drain/clean-out connection.
The basin area under the wet deck surface shall be sloped toward the
depressed section to facilitate cleaning. Standard basin accessories
shall include a brass make-up valve with a large diameter plastic float
for easy adjustment of operating water level.
(Alternate 2.3) Cold Water Basin: The cold water basin shall be
constructed of heavy-gauge Type 304 or 316 stainless steel panels
and structural members. The basin shall include a depressed centre
section with drain/clean-out connection. The basin area under the wet
deck surface shall be sloped toward the depressed section to
facilitate cleaning. Standard basin accessories shall include a brass
make-up valve with a large diameter plastic float for easy adjustment
of operating water level.
2.4 Water Outlet: The cooling tower basin outlet shall be beveled for
welding. The outlet shall be provided with large area lift out strainers
with perforated openings sized smaller than the water distribution
nozzles and an anti-vortexing device to prevent air entrainment. The
strainer and vortex device shall be constructed of the same materials
as the cold water basin to prevent dissimilar metal corrosion.
2.5 Water Distribution System: Hot water distribution basins shall
be the open gravity type and constructed of heavy-gauge Z600 hot-
dip galvanized steel. Basin weirs and plastic metering orifices shall be
provided to ensure even distribution of water over the wet deck
surface. Lift-off distribution covers shall be constructed of heavy-
gauge Z600 metric hot-dip galvanized steel.
3.0 Mechanical Equipment
3.1. Fan(s): Fan(s) shall be heavy-duty, axial flow with aluminum
alloy blades selected to provide optimum cooling tower thermal
performance with minimal sound levels. Air shall discharge through a
fan cylinder designed for streamlined air entry and minimum tip
clearance for maximum fan efficiency. The top of the fan cylinder shall
be equipped with a conical, non-sagging removable fan guard.
(Alternate 3.1) Fan(s): Fan(s) shall be of Whisper Quiet fan design
for ultra low sound consisting of multi-blade aerofoil fan design
constructed of fibreglass reinforced plastic blades.
3.2. Bearings: Fan(s) and shaft(s) shall be supported by heavy-duty,
self-aligning, grease-packed ball bearings with moisture proof seals
and integral slinger collars, designed for a minimum L10 life of 40 000
hours (280 000 Hr. Avg. Life).
3.3. Fan Drive: The fan(s) shall be belt driven with taper lock
sheaves. The belts shall be constructed of neoprene reinforced
polyester cord and be specifically designed for cooling tower service.
3.4. Sheaves: Fan and motor sheave(s) shall be fabricated from
corrosion-resistant materials to minimize maintenance and ensure
maximum drive and powerband operating life.
3.5. Fan Motor: Fan motor(s) shall be totally enclosed fan cooled
(TEFC), reversible, squirrel cage, ball bearing type designed
specifically for cooling tower service. The motor shall be furnished
with special moisture protection on windings, shafts and bearings.
4.0 BACross II Wet Deck Surface and Integral Drift Eliminators
4.1 BACross II Wet Deck Surface and Drift Eliminators: The wet
deck surface and integral drift eliminators shall be formed from self-
extinguishing plastic material and shall be impervious to rot, decay,
fungus and biological attack. The wet deck shall be suitable for
entering water temperatures up to 50C. The wet deck surface shall
be manufactured, tested, and rated by the cooling tower
manufacturer and shall be elevated above the cold water basin to
facilitate cleaning.
S3000D - B 22
S
3
0
0
0
D
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
5.0 Combined Inlet Shield Technology
5.1. Combined Inlet Shields: Combined inlet shields shall be
separate from the wet deck surface and removable to allow easy
access for inspection of the air/water interface at the air inlet side of
the equipment. Combined inlet shields shall prevent UV-light and
debris from entering the unit, as well as prevent water splash out
during fan cycling. They shall be constructed of maintenance free,
corrosion and UV resistant material.
6.0 Access
6.1 Plenum Access: Two hinged access doors shall be provided for
access into the plenum section.
7.0 Sound
7.1 Sound Level: To maintain the quality of the local environment,
the maximum sound pressure levels (dB) measured 15 m from the
cooling tower operating at full fan speed shall not exceed the sound
levels detailed below.
(Alternate) 7.1 Sound Level: To maintain the quality of the local
environment, the cooling tower shall be furnished with an extremely
low sound fan Type Whisper Quiet. Maximum sound pressure levels
(dB) measured 15 m from the cooling tower operating at full fan speed
shall not exceed the sound levels detailed below.
Location 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 dB(A)
Discharge
Air Inlet
End
Open Cooling Towers
TXV - B 1
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
TXV
Product Detail
TXV Open Cooling Tower ........................................................................ B2
Benefits ....................................................................................................... B4
Construction Details .................................................................................. B6
Custom Features and Options .................................................................. B7
Accessories ................................................................................................. B9
Engineering Data ...................................................................................... B11
Structural Support .................................................................................. B14
Engineering Specifications ..................................................................... B15
TXV - B 2
T
X
V
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
TXV Open Cooling Tower
Capacity
Single Cell Capacity:
10 - 128 l/s
General Description
Series 1500 Cooling Towers minimize the operating, installation, and maintenance costs
associated with both new and replacement cooling tower projects. The Series 1500 delivers fully
rated thermal performance over a wide range of flow and temperature requirements. Standard
design features minimize the costs associated with enclosures, support requirements, electrical
service, piping, and rigging.
Key Features
Ideal replacement unit
Single side air inlet
Low energy consumption
Low installed cost
Easy maintenance
Reliable year-round operation
Long service life
TXV - B 3
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
TXV - B 4
T
X
V
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Benefits
Ideal Replacement Unit
Support Steel Units are designed to mount
directly on the existing support steel of many
cooling towers (both cross flow and counter
flow).
Electrical Service Fan motor configurations
can be supplied to match existing wiring.
Enclosures Units fit in most existing
enclosures with little or no modifications due to
the single air inlet design.
Low Energy Consumption
Evaporative Cooling Equipment minimizes the energy consumption of the entire system
because it provides lower operating temperatures. The owner saves money while conserving
natural resources and reducing environmental impact.
TXV provides heat rejection at the lowest possible energy input and maintenance requirements
via:
- High efficiency, low kW axial fans
- High efficiency BACross

Wet Deck, which provides maximum air/water contact time at low


air pressure drops
- Multiple Fan Motor System: independent fan motor and drive assembly per fan, which allows
extra steps of capacity control.
Single air inlet provides installation flexibility
in tight layouts
Counterflow CoolingTower Replacement Replaced by Crossflow units
TXV - B 5
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Low Installed Cost
Single Side Air Inlet Units can be placed
close to solid walls, reducing the size of
enclosures and allowing for more profitable use
of premium space.
Modular Design The modular design
minimizes the size and weight of the heaviest
lift, allowing for the use of smaller, less costly
cranes.
Modular Design All models mount directly
on parallel I-beams and ship complete with
motors and drives factory-installed and aligned.
Easy Maintenance
Easy Cleaning The wet deck surface is elevated above the sloped cold water basin floor to
facilitate flushing of dirt and debris from this critical area.
Hinged Access Doors and Standard Internal Walkway Provide easy entry to the spacious
plenum for routine drive maintenance.
Accessibility Make-up, drain, overflow and optional basin accessories are accessible from
outside the unit.
Reliable Year-Round Operation
Belt Drive System utilizes special corrosion-resistant materials of construction and state-of-
the-art technology to ensure ease of maintenance and reliable year-round performance.
Combined Inlet Shields prevent biological growth from sunlight, act as a filter for air borne
impurities and debris and eliminate water splash out.
Long Service Life
Materials of Construction Various materials are available to meet the corrosion resistance,
unit operating life, and budgetary requirements of any project.
Note: For more information, please refer to the section Technical Resources, Materials of Construction.
The unit shown ships in two pieces to minimize
shipping and rigging costs
TXV - B 6
T
X
V
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Construction Details
1. Heavy-Duty Construction
Z600 hot-dip galvanized steel panels
2. Fan Drive System
Premium quality belts
Corrosion resistant sheaves
Heavy-duty bearings
Adapted fan motor for operation in saturated
conditions.
3. Low kW Axial Fan(s)
Quiet operation
High Efficiency
Corrosion resistant aluminum
4. Water Distribution System
Steel covers in easy to remove sections
Low pump head gravity distribution basin
Large orifice, non-clog nozzles
Integral strainer
5. BACross

Wet Deck Surface with Integral


Drift Eliminators (Not Shown)
Plastic material
Impervious to rot, decay and biological attack
Designed and manufactured by BAC
6. Combined Inlet Shields
Corrosion Resistant
Easily removable
UV resistant plastic material
7. Cold Water Basin
Sloped cold water basin for easy cleaning
Suction strainer with anti-vortex hood
Adjustable water make-up assembly from air inlet
side
Integral internal walkway as standard
8. Hinged Access Doors
Inward swinging door
TXV - B 7
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Custom Features and Options
Construction Options
Standard Construction:
Steel panels and structural elements are constructed of Z600 heavy-gauge hot-dip galvanized steel
protected with the Baltiplus Corrosion Protection on the outside of the unit.
Optional BALTIBOND

Corrosion Protection System:


The BALTIBOND

Corrosion Protection System, a hybrid polymer coating used to extend


equipment life, is applied before assembly to all hot-dip galvanized steel components of the unit.
Optional Stainless Steel Construction:
Steel panels and structural elements are constructed of stainless steel either type 304 or 316.
Optional Water-Contact Stainless Steel Cold Water Basin:
A cost-effective alternative to an all stainless steel unit. The critical components in the cold water
basin and the cold water basin itself are provided in stainless steel. The remaining components are
protected with the BALTIBOND

Corrosion Protection System.


Note: See section Technical Resources, Material of Construction for more details on the materials described above.
Multiple Fan Drive System
All TXV-models are standard equipped with the multiple fan motor system. This system consists of an
independent fan motor and drive assembly per fan with a plenum partition to allow independent
operation of each fan. This standard feature provides 2 steps of capacity control on dual fan units and
3 steps of capacity control on triple fan units, as illustrated below.
Removable Bundled Fill
For installations where it is necessary or
recommended to remove the wet deck surface for
more thorough cleaning and disinfection, removable
bundled fill is available. The fill bundles can be
easily lifted and handled by one person and
therefore provide a simple and secure method of
removing and installing. The bundles can be
dismantled and sheet by sheet can be removed for
inspection and cleaning of both sides. After cleaning
the sheets can be re-bundled and re-installed.
Individual Motor and Drive on each Fan Extra Steps of Capacity Control
Easy Removable Fill Bundles
TXV - B 8
T
X
V
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Low Sound Operation
The low sound levels generated by Series 1500
Units, thanks to the use of high efficiency low
noise fans as standard, make them suitable for
installation in most environments. For very sound
sensitive installations all models are also
available with a Whisper Quiet sound fan option
that significantly reduces the sound levels
generated from the tower with minimal impact on
thermal performance.
For extremely sound sensitive installations,
factory designed, tested and rated sound
attenuation is available for both the air inlet and
discharge.
Note: For more information, please refer to the section Technical Resources, Sound Reduction Options.
Remote Sump Execution
The use of an auxiliary sump within a heated space is the most satisfactory way to protect sump
water from freezing. When the circulating pump is shut off, all the water in the water distribution, in
suspension and in the sump will drain freely to the auxiliary sump.
Note: For detailed information on the calculation of the remote sump tank, please refer to the section "Technical Resources,
Selection of Remote Sump Tank".
Combined Inlet Shields
Combined Inlet shields prevent biological growth
from sunlight, act as a filter for air borne impurities
and debris and eliminate water splash out.
High Temperature Wet Deck
If operation above 50C is anticipated, an optional
high temperature wet deck material is available
which increases the maximum allowable entering
water temperature to 55C.
Sound Attenuators on TXV Cooling Tower
Combined Inlet Shields
TXV - B 9
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Accessories
Ladder, Safety Cage and Handrails
In the event the owner requires easy access to
the top of the unit, the unit can be furnished with
ladder(s) extending from the base of the unit to
the deck of the unit, as well as safety cages, and
handrail packages.
Internal Ladder
For access to the motor and drive assemblies
internal ladders are available on models TXV-292
up to TXV-500 and TXV-310 up to TXV-425.
Internal Service Platforms
For access to the motor and drive assemblies on
models TXV-292 up to TXV-500 and TXV-310 up
to TXV-425 an upper service platform with ladder
and handrails is available.
Electric Water Level Control Package
The electric water level control replaces the standard mechanical make-up valve when a more
precise water level control is required. This package consists of a float switch mounted in the basin
and a solenoid activated valve in the make-up water line. The valve is slow closing to minimize
water hammer.
External Service Platform, Ladder and Safety
Cage
Internal Walkway and Large, Hinged Access
Door
Internal Ladder and Service Platform
TXV - B 10
T
X
V
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Basin Heaters
Units exposed to below freezing ambient temperatures require protection to prevent freezing of the
water in the cold water basin when the unit is idle. Factory-installed heaters, which maintain the
water temperature at 4C, are a simple and inexpensive way of providing such protection. The
heater package includes the heaters, a thermostat and a low level cut out switch to protect the
heaters if the water level is too low. Standard electric heaters are selected for -18C ambient
temperature.
Extended Lubrication Lines
Extended lubrication lines with grease fittings are
available for lubrication of the fan shaft bearings.
Distribution Basin Covers
These covers prevent the accumulation of leaves,
debris and algae in the hot water distribution
pans.
Basin Sweeper Piping
Basin sweeper piping provides an effective
method of preventing sediment from collecting in
the cold water basin of the unit. A complete piping
system, including nozzles, is provided in the unit
basin for connection to side stream filtration
equipment.
Note: For more information, please refer to the section
"Technical Resources, Filtration".
Model No.
TXV
Heater -18C
(kW)
TXV 109 - 154 1 x 6
TXV 177 - 193 1 x 6
TXV 217 - 237 1 x 8
TXV 292 - 333 1 x 8
TXV 354 - 500 2 x 6
TXV 310 - 425 2 x 6
Extended Lubrication Lines
Basin Sweeper Piping
TXV - B 11
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Engineering Data
REMARK: Do not use for construction. Refer to factory certified dimensions & weights. This brochure includes data
current at time of publication, which should be reconfirmed at the time of purchase. In the interest of product
improvement, specifications, weights and dimensions are subject to change without notice. Up-to-date engineering
data and more can be found at www.BaltimoreAircoil.com.
TXV 109 - TXV 237
Model No.
TXV
Operating
Weight
(kg)
Shipping
Weight
(kg)
Heaviest
Section
(kg)
H
(mm)
L
(mm)
W
(mm)
Air Flow
(m
3
/s)
Fan Motor
(kW)
Fluid Inlet
ND (mm)
Fluid Outlet
ND (mm)
Make Up
ND (mm)
TXV 109
TXV 135
TXV 154
3040
3070
3090
1640
1670
1690
1640
1670
1690
3150
3150
3150
2775
2775
2775
2385
2385
2385
16,4
20,8
23,8
(2x) 2,2
(2x) 4,0
(2x) 5,5
150
150
150
200
200
200
25
25
25
TXV 177
TXV 193
3780
3790
1910
1920
1910
1920
3150
3150
3690
3690
2385
2385
27,1
29,8
(2x) 5,5
(2x) 7,5
150
150
200
200
25
25
TXV 217
TXV 237
4600
4610
2290
2300
2290
2300
3150
3150
3690
3690
2985
2985
30,8
33,9
(2x) 5,5
(2x) 7,5
200
200
200
200
40
40
1. Water in; 2. Water out; 3. Make Up; 4. Overflow ND80; 5. Drain ND50; 6.Access Door.
TXV - B 12
T
X
V
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
TXV 292 - TXV 500
TXV 310 - TXV 425
Model
TXV
Operating
Weight
(kg)
Shipping
Weight
(kg)
Heaviest
Section
(kg)
H
(mm)
L
(mm)
W
(mm)
Air Flow
(m
3
/s)
Fan Motor
(kW)
Fluid
Inlet
ND (mm)
Fluid
Outlet
ND (mm)
Make Up
ND (mm)
TXV 292
TXV 314
TXV 333
6090
6110
6130
3100
3120
3140
1720
1740
1760
4385
4385
4385
3690
3690
3690
2985
2985
2985
39,1
42,1
45,6
(2x) 7,5
(2x) 9,0
(2x) 11,0
250
250
250
250
250
250
40
40
40
TXV 354
TXV 402
TXV 441
TXV 500
8560
8570
8610
8710
4040
4050
4080
4180
2260
2270
2300
2400
4525
4525
4525
4525
5520
5520
5520
5520
2985
2985
2985
2985
46,6
53,4
58,8
67,7
(3x) 4,0
(3x) 5,5
(3x) 7,5
(3x) 11,0
250
250
250
250
250
250
250
250
40
40
40
40
1. Water in; 2. Water out; 3. Make Up; 4. Overflow ND80; 5. Drain ND50; 6.Access door.
1. Water in; 2. Water out; 3. Make Up; 4. Overflow ND80; 5. Drain ND50; 6.Access Door.
TXV - B 13
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
General Notes
1. All connections 100 mm and smaller are MPT. Connections
125 mm and larger are bevelled-for-welding.
2. Make-up, overflow, suction, and drain connections can be
provided on end opposite to that shown; consult your BAC
Balticare representative.
3. Models TXV 292 up to 333, TXV 354 up to 500 and TXV 310 up to
425 are shipped in two sections per cell. The top section is the
heaviest and has a height of 2130 mm.
Sound Attenuation
Models TXV 292 up to 333, TXV 354 up to 500 and TXV 310 up to TXV 425: intake attenuators ship in two sections. Indicated weights are total
weights of two sections.
W = Unit Width, see general Engineering Data.
Remote Sump Data
Refer to the "Technical Resources" section "Selection of Remote Sump" for Remote Sump Data.
Model No.
TXV
Operating
Weight
(kg)
Shipping
Weight
(kg)
Heaviest
Section
(kg)
H
(mm)
L
(mm)
W
(mm)
Air Flow
(m
3
/s)
Fan Motor
(kW)
Fluid
Inlet
ND (mm)
Fluid
Outlet
ND (mm)
Make Up
ND (mm)
TXV 310
TXV 340
TXV 365
TXV 385
TXV 425
7160
7170
7200
7210
7310
3370
3380
3400
3410
3510
1770
1780
1800
1810
1910
4790
4790
4790
4790
4790
3690
3690
3690
3690
3690
3610
3610
3610
3610
3610
38,3
42,1
45,4
48,2
53,1
(2x) 5,5
(2x) 7,5
(2x) 9,0
(2x) 11
(2x) 15
250
250
250
250
250
250
250
250
250
250
40
40
40
40
40
Model No Dimensions (mm) Weight (kg)
TXV D H
t
Intake Discharge
TXV 109- 154 1345 3885 190 210
TXV 177 - 193 1345 3885 250 255
TXV 217 - 237 1665 3885 250 270
TXV 292 - 333 1665 5120 400 270
TXV 354 - 500 1500 5260 600 385
TXV 310 - 425 2005 5525 450 310
1. Intake Attenuator; 2. Discharge Attenuator.
TXV - B 14
T
X
V
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Structural Support
REMARK: Do not use for construction. Refer to factory certified dimensions & weights. This brochure includes data
current at time of publication, which should be reconfirmed at the time of purchase. In the interest of product
improvement, specifications, weights and dimensions are subject to change without notice. Up-to-date engineering
data and more can be found at www.BaltimoreAircoil.com.
The recommended support arrangement for units consists of parallel I-beams running the full length of the unit, spaced as shown in the following
drawing. Besides providing adequate support, the steel also serves to raise the unit above any solid foundation to ensure access to the bottom
of the unit. To support units in an alternate steel support arrangement, consult your BAC Balticare Representative.
Units with and without Sound Attenuation
Notes:
1. The recommended support arrangement for the units consists of
parallel I-beams extending the full length of the unit. Supports and
anchor bolts are to be designed and furnished by others.
2. All supporting beams are to be flush and level at top and must be
oriented relative to gage line as shown.
3. Recommended design loads for each unit support beam should be
70% of the total unit operating weight applied as a uniform load to each
of the unit beams. Beams should be designed in accordance with
standard structural practice. For the maximum allowable deflection of
beams under the unit see table.
4. All mounting holes have a diameter of 22 mm at the locations shown.
5. If vibration isolators are used, a rail or channel must be provided
between the unit (and optional attenuator) and the isolators to provide
continuous unit support. Additionally the support beams must be
designed to accommodate the overall length and mounting hole
location of the isolators that may differ from those of the unit. Refer to
vibration isolator drawings for these data.
Model
TXV
Max. Deflection
(mm)
Dimensions (mm)
N of 20 mm
Anchor Bolts
W L A B C
109-154 8 2385 2775 2325 - 255 4
177-193 10 2385 3690 2325 - 255 4
217-333 10 2985 3690 2925 - 255 4
310-425 10 3610 3690 3550 - 255 4
354-500 12 2985 5520 2925 2440 270 8
1. Unit Outline; 2. Air Intake; 3. Mounting holes 22 mm; 4. Unit.
TXV - B 15
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Engineering Specifications
1.0 Cooling Tower
1.1 General: Furnish and install _____ factory-assembled, induced-
draft, axial fan, crossflow cooling tower(s) with single side air entry
and vertical air discharge. Overall dimensions shall not exceed
approximately _____ mm long x ______ mm wide x _____ mm high.
The total connected fan kW shall not exceed _____ kW. The cooling
tower(s) shall be Baltimore Aircoil Model ____________.
1.2 Thermal Capacity: The cooling tower(s) shall be warranted by
the manufacturer to cool _____ l/s of water from ______ C to
_____C at _____C entering wet-bulb temperature.
1.3 Corrosion Resistant Construction (standard): Unless
otherwise noted in this specification, all steel panels and structural
members shall be constructed of heavy-gauge Z600 metric hot-dip
galvanised steel with all edges given a protective coating of zinc-rich
compound and protected with the BALTIPLUS Corrosion Protection.
(Alternate 1.3) Corrosion Resistant Construction (optional):
Unless otherwise noted in this specification, all steel panels and
structural members shall be protected with the BALTIBOND


Corrosion Protection System. The system shall consist of Z600 metric
hot-dip galvanised steel prepared in a four-step (clean, pre-treat,
rinse, dry) process with an electrostatically sprayed, thermosetting,
hybrid polymer fuse-bonded to the substrate during a thermally
activated curing stage and monitored by a 23-step quality assurance
program.
(Alternate 1.3) Type 304 or 316 Stainless Steel Construction: All
steel panels and structural members, including the structural frame,
hot and cold water basins, distribution covers and fan deck shall be
constructed of Type 304 or 316 stainless steel and assembled with
stainless steel nut and bolt fasteners. The fan cylinder shall be
constructed of heavy-gauge Z600 metric hot-dip galvanised steel and
protected with the BALTIBOND

Corrosion Protection System.


1.4 Quality Assurance: The cooling tower manufacturer shall have
a Management System certified by an accredited registrar as
complying with the requirements of ISO-9001:2000 to ensure
consistent quality of products and services.
1.5 Warranty: The manufacturers standard equipment warranty
shall be for a period of not less than one year from date of start-up or
eighteen months from date of shipment, whichever occurs first.
2.0 Construction Details
2.1 Cold Water Basin: The cold water basin shall include a
depressed section with drain/clean-out connection. The basin area
under the wet deck surface shall be sloped toward the depressed
section to facilitate cleaning. Standard basin accessories shall
include a brass make-up valve with a large diameter plastic float for
easy adjustment of operating water level.
2.2 Water Outlet: The cooling tower basin outlet shall be beveled.
The outlet shall be provided with large area lift out strainers with
perforated openings sized smaller than the water distribution nozzles
and an anti-vortexing device to prevent air entrainment. The strainer
and vortex device shall be constructed of the same materials as the
cold water basin to prevent dissimilar metal corrosion.
2.3 Water Distribution System: The distribution system shall be
furnished with a single water inlet. The pipe stub connection shall be
beveled for welding. Plastic metering devices shall be provided to
ensure the uniform distribution of water over the wet deck surface.
3.0 Mechanical Equipment
3.1. Fan(s): Fan(s) shall be heavy-duty, axial flow with aluminum
alloy blades selected to provide optimum cooling tower thermal
performance with minimal sound levels. Air shall discharge through a
fan cylinder designed for streamlined air entry and minimum tip
clearance for maximum fan efficiency. The top of the fan cylinder shall
be equipped with a conical, non-sagging removable fan guard.
(Alternate 3.1) Fan(s): Fan(s) shall be of Whisper Quiet fan design
for ultra low sound consisting of specially shaped aluminium blades
with end caps and flexible hub connection. Air shall discharge through
a fan cylinder designed for streamlined air entry and minimum tip
clearance for maximum fan efficiency. The top of the fan cylinder shall
be equipped with a conical, non-sagging removable fan guard.
3.2. Bearings: Fan(s) and shaft(s) shall be supported by heavy-duty,
self-aligning, grease-packed ball bearings with moisture proof seals
and integral slinger collars, designed for a minimum L10 life of 40 000
hours (280 000 Hr. Avg. Life).
3.3. Fan Drive: The fan(s) shall be belt driven with taper lock
sheaves. The belts shall be constructed of neoprene reinforced
polyester cord and be specifically designed for cooling tower service.
3.4. Sheaves: Fan and motor sheave(s) shall be fabricated from
corrosion-resistant materials to minimise maintenance and ensure
maximum operating life.
3.5. Fan Motor: Fan motor(s) shall be totally enclosed fan cooled
(TEFC), reversible, squirrel cage, ball bearing type designed
specifically for cooling tower service. The motor shall be furnished
with special moisture protection on windings, shafts and bearings.
4.0 BACross

Wet Deck Surface and Drift Eliminators


4.1. Wet Deck Surface and drift Eliminators: The wet deck surface
and integral drift eliminators shall be impervious to rot, decay, and
fungus or biological attack. The wet deck surface shall be
manufactured and performance tested by the cooling tower
manufacturer to provide single source responsibility and assure
control of the final product.
5.0 Combined Inlet Shields
5.1. Combined Inlet Shields: Combined inlet shields shall be
separate from the wet deck surface and removable to allow easy
access for inspection of the air/water interface at the air inlet side of
the equipment. Combined inlet shields shall prevent UV-light and
debris from entering the unit, as well as prevent water splash out
during fan cycling. They shall be constructed of maintenance free,
corrosion and UV resistant material.
TXV - B 16
T
X
V
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
6.0 Access
6.1. Plenum Access: Hinged access doors shall be provided on one
or two sides of the tower for access into plenum section.
7.0 Sound
7.1 Sound Level: To maintain the quality of the local environment,
the maximum sound pressure levels (dB) measured 15 m from the
cooling tower operating at full fan speed shall not exceed the sound
levels detailed below.
Location 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 dB(A)
Discharge
Air Inlet
End
Back
Open Cooling Towers
FXT - B 45
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
FXT
Product Detail
FXT Open Cooling Towers ..................................................................... B46
Benefits ..................................................................................................... B48
Construction Details ................................................................................ B49
Custom Features and Options ................................................................ B50
Accessories ............................................................................................... B51
Engineering Data ..................................................................................... B52
Structural Support .................................................................................. B54
Engineering Specifications ..................................................................... B56
FXT - B 46
F
X
T
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
FXT Open Cooling Towers
Capacity
Single Cell Capacity:
3 - 145 l/s
General Description
FXT Cooling Towers deliver independently verified, fully rated thermal performance over a wide
range of flow and temperature requirements. Standard design features satisfy todays
environmental concerns, minimize installation costs, maximize operating reliability, and simplify
maintenance requirements.
Key Features
Low energy consumption
Low installed cost
Easy maintenance
Long service life
Crossflow design
Forced draught configuration
Single side horizontal air entry
Horizontal air discharge
Aluminium axial fans
Gravity water distribution
FXT - B 47
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
FXT - B 48
F
X
T
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Benefits
Low Installed Cost
All single cell FXT Cooling Towers ship
completely assembled, minimizing installation
time and cost:
- No motors to mount
- No sheaves to align
- No belts to install
- No make-up system to assemble
Easy Maintenance
The interior of the unit is accessible through
circular access doors for adjusting the float valve, cleaning the strainer or flushing the basin
The fan motor is located on the exterior of the unit for easy maintenance and belt adjustment.
On most models, a single threaded bolt and nut assembly further simplifies belt adjustment.
Extended lubrication fittings are located on the exterior of the unit for bearing lubrication.
Long Service Life
Materials of Construction Various materials are available to meet the corrosion resistance,
unit operating life, and budgetary requirements of any project (See section Technical
Resources, Materials of Construction" for more details)
Low Energy Consumption
Evaporative cooling equipment minimizes the energy consumption of the entire system
because it provides lower operating temperatures. The owner saves money while conserving
natural resources and reducing environmental impact.
The FXT provides the heat rejection required at the lowest possible energy input via:
- High efficiency, low kW axial fans
- High efficiency BACross Wet Deck, which provides maximum air/water contact time at low
air pressure drops
- Variable frequency drives
This FXT unit is placed with one lift and ships
fully assembled.
Circular Access Door The Fan Motor is easily accessible at the base of
the unit's exterior
FXT - B 49
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Construction Details
1. Heavy Duty Construction
Z600 hot-dip galvanized steel panels
2. Fan Drive System
V-type belt drive
Heavy-duty bearings
Extended lubrication lines
3. Low kW Axial Fan(s)
Quiet operation
Corrosion resistant aluminum
4. Water Distribution System
Low pump head gravity distribution basin
Large orifice, non-clog nozzles
Steel distribution covers
5. BACross Wet Deck Surface with
Integral Drift Eliminators
Plastic material
Impervious to rot, decay and biological attack
Designed and manufactured by BAC
6. Air Inlet Cylinder
Streamlines air entry for maximum efficiency
7. Inlet Screens
Protection from moving parts
Easily removed for access to fans, bearings, motor
and drives
8. Water Make-Up Valve Assembly
Bronze float valve
Large diameter plastic float
9. Strainer
Anti-vortexing design to prevent air entrainment
10. Access Door
Circular access door
FXT - B 50
F
X
T
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Custom Features and Options
Construction Options
Standard Construction:
Steel panels and structural elements are constructed of heavy-gauge hot-dip galvanized steel
protected with the Baltiplus Corrosion Protection on the outside of the cooling towers.
Optional BALTIBOND

Corrosion Protection System:


The BALTIBOND

Corrosion Protection System, a hybrid polymer coating used to extend


equipment life, is applied to all hot-dip galvanized steel components of the cooling tower.
Note: See section Technical Resources, Material Options for more details on the materials described above.
Fan Drive System
FXT cooling towers are belt-driven. The belts are
easily adjusted by means of a threaded bolt and
nut arrangement.
BACross Wet Deck Surface
An efficient wet deck surface designed,
manufactured and tested by BAC is furnished as
standard in all FXT cooling towers. It is
impervious to rot, decay, biological attack. The
special configuration with integral eliminators
provides maximum air/water contact and low air
pressure drop to ensure efficient heat transfer
while minimizing power requirements.
FXT - B 51
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Accessories
Basin Heaters
Units exposed to below freezing ambient temperatures require protection to prevent freezing of the
water in the cold water basin when the unit is idle. Factory-installed heaters, which maintain the
water temperature at 4C, are a simple and inexpensive way of providing such protection. The
heater package includes the heaters, a thermostat and a low level cut out switch to protect the
heaters if the water level is too low. Standard electric heaters are selected for -18C ambient
temperature.
Electric Water Level Control Package
The electric water level control replaces the standard mechanical make-up valve when a more
precise water level control is required. This package consists of a float switch mounted in the basin
and a solenoid activated valve in the make-up water line. The valve is slow closing to minimize
water hammer.
High Temperature Wet Deck
If operation above 50C is anticipated, an optional high temperature wet deck material is available
which increases the maximum allowable entering water temperature to 55C.
Air Discharge Screens
Wire mesh screens are available to cover the discharge of the tower to prevent debris from
entering the eliminators and cold water basin.
Distribution Basin Covers
Removable covers for the hot water distribution
basins will significantly reduce maintenance and
cleaning requirements of the basins and nozzles.
The covers will have either Baltiplus or Baltibond

Corrosion Protection System to match the
equipment material specification.
Discharge Air Turning Vanes
Discharge air turning vanes are available to direct
the discharge air up and away from the unit. The
turning vanes are installed at the factory on the
discharge of the tower and require no increase in
fan motor kW.
Note: Discharge Air Turning Vanes are not compatible with Air Discharge Screens.
Model
Heaters -18 C
(kW)
FXT 27 - FXT 68 1 x 3
FXT 74 - FXT 86 1 x 4
FXT 97 - FXT 133 2 x 3
FXT 160 - FXT 250 2 x 4
FXT 194 - FXT 266 4 x 3
FXT 320 - FXT 500 4 x 4
Distribution Basin Covers
FXT - B 52
F
X
T
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Engineering Data
REMARK: Do not use for construction. Refer to factory certified dimensions & weights. This brochure includes data
current at time of publication, which should be reconfirmed at the time of purchase. In the interest of product
improvement, specifications, weights and dimensions are subject to change without notice. Up-to-date engineering
data and more can be found at www.BaltimoreAircoil.com.
FXT 27 - FXT 500
1. Drain; 2. Water Outlet; 3. Overflow; 4. Make-Up; 5. Water Inlet; 6. Access Door ; 7. Top of Distribution Box; 8. Metering Orifices; 9. Flow
Divider; *External Screen section only on FXT 211, 250, 422, 500.
FXT - B 53
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
General Notes
1. Unless otherwise indicated, all connections ND 100 and smaller
are MPT and connections ND 125 and larger are beveled for
welding.
2. Operating weight is for tower with water level in the cold water
basin at overflow.
3. Unit height is indicate, for precise value refer to the certified print.
4. Inlet piping must rest on the flow divider. The inlet piping to the
distribution box must be the correct size as indicated in the table.
Model
FXT
Operating
Weight
(kg)
Shipping
Weight
(kg)
Heaviest
Section
(kg)
Air Flow
(m/s)
Fan Motor
(kW)
Fluid Inlet
ND (mm)
Fluid Outlet
ND (mm)
Make Up
ND (mm)
H
(mm)
L
(mm)
W
(mm)
FXT 27
FXT 32
945
950
425
430
425
430
4,85
5,32
(1) 0,75
(1) 1,1
100
100
100
100
15
15
1810
1810
1374
1374
2181
2181
FXT 43
FXT 51
1100
1110
455
465
455
465
7,08
8,11
(1) 1,5
(1) 2,2
150
150
150
150
15
15
2216
2216
1374
1374
2181
2181
FXT 60
FXT 68
1425
1430
555
560
555
560
9,93
11,76
(1) 2,2
(1) 4,0
150
150
150
150
15
15
2216
2216
1832
1832
2181
2181
FXT 74
FXT 88
1920
1925
780
785
780
785
11,03
13,07
(1) 2,2
(1) 4,0
200
200
200
200
25
25
2540
2540
1832
1832
2219
2219
FXT 97
FXT 116
FXT 133
2755
2765
2780
1000
1010
1025
1000
1010
1025
14,68
17,40
19,93
(1) 2,2
(1) 4,0
(1) 5,5
200
200
200
200
200
200
25
25
25
2540
2540
2540
2772
2772
2772
2219
2219
2219
FXT 160
FXT 173
3640
3655
1310
1325
1310
1325
24,10
26,53
(1) 5,5
(1) 7,5
200
200
200
200
25
25
2540
2540
3660
3660
2219
2219
FXT 211
FXT 250
4275
4295
1620
1640
1620
1640
30,22
34,60
(1) 7,5
(1) 11
200
200
200
200
25
25
3356
3356
3660
3660
2219
2219
FXT 194
FXT 232
FXT 266
5505
5525
5565
1995
2015
2055
1000
1010
1030
29,36
34,81
39,85
(2) 2,2
(2) 4,0
(2) 5,5
(2) 200
(2) 200
(2) 200
(2) 200
(2) 200
(2) 200
50
50
50
2540
2540
2540
5556
5556
5556
2219
2219
2219
FXT 320
FXT 346
7285
7320
2615
2650
1310
1325
48,19
53,04
(2) 5,5
(2) 7,5
(2) 200
(2) 200
(2) 200
(2) 200
50
50
2540
2540
7334
7334
2219
2219
FXT 422
FXT 500
8545
8590
3230
3275
1620
1640
60,44
69,19
(2) 7,5
(2) 11
(2) 200
(2) 200
(2) 200
(2) 200
50
50
3353
3353
7334
7334
2219
2219
FXT - B 54
F
X
T
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Structural Support
REMARK: Do not use for construction. Refer to factory certified dimensions & weights. This brochure includes data
current at time of publication, which should be reconfirmed at the time of purchase. In the interest of product
improvement, specifications, weights and dimensions are subject to change without notice. Up-to-date engineering
data and more can be found at www.BaltimoreAircoil.com.
The recommended support arrangement for units consists of parallel I-beams running the full length of the unit, spaced as shown in the following
drawing. Besides providing adequate support, the steel also serves to raise the unit above any solid foundation to ensure access to the bottom
of the unit. To support units in an alternate steel support arrangement, consult your BAC Balticare Representative.
1. Supporting steelwork and anchor bolts are to be selected and
installed by others.
2. All supporting steel must be flush and level at the top and must be
oriented to the gage line as shown in SECTION A-A.
3. Recommended design loads for each beam should be 65% of the
total operating weight applied as a uniform load to each beam.
Beam should be designed in accordance with standard design
practice. Refer to the below table for the maximum allowable
deflection of beams
4. All mounting holes are 16 mm diameter at the locations shown.
5. If continuous vibration isolator rails are used, be certain to allow
for the length of the rails when determining length of supporting
steel. Vibration isolator rails are sometimes longer than the
cooling tower dimensions shown. Refer to vibration isolator
drawings for this information. If point vibration isolation is used,
the isolators should be installed at the mounting hole locations
shown.
Single Cell
Recommended Support
Alternate Support
1. Holes; 2. Outline of Tower; 3. Support Beams (by others); 4. Air Inlet Side.
FXT - B 55
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Double Cell
Model
FXT
A
(mm)
B
(mm)
C
(mm)
P1
(kg)
P2
(kg)
Maximum
Deflection
(mm)
FXT 27
FXT 32
1549
1549
1067
1067
-
-
284
285
189
190
13
13
FXT 43
FXT 51
1549
1549
1067
1067
-
-
330
333
220
222
13
13
FXT 60
FXT 68
1549
1549
1524
1524
-
-
449
450
264
265
13
13
FXT 74
FXT 88
1549
1549
1524
1524
-
-
528
529
432
433
13
13
FXT 97
FXT 116
FXT 133
2181
2181
2181
2438
2438
2438
-
-
-
758
760
765
620
622
626
13
13
13
FXT 160
FXT 173
2181
2181
3353
3353
-
-
1001
1005
819
822
13
13
FXT 211
FXT 250
2181
2181
3353
3353
-
-
1154
1160
983
988
13
13
FXT 194
FXT 232
FXT 266
2181
2181
2181
2438
2438
2438
346
346
346
758
760
765
619
622
626
13
13
13
FXT 320
FXT 346
2181
2181
3353
3353
321
321
1001
1007
820
823
13
13
FXT 422
FXT 500
2181
2181
3353
3353
321
321
1154
1160
983
988
13
13
1. Holes; 2. Outline of Tower; 3. Support Beams (by others); 4. Air Inlet Side
FXT - B 56
F
X
T
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Engineering Specifications
1.0 Cooling Tower
1.1 General: Furnish and install _____ factory-assembled, forced-
draft, axial fan, crossflow cooling tower(s). The tower(s) shall have air
entry on one side only. The tower(s) shall have the fan and all moving
parts located in the dry entering airstream provide greater reliability
and long life. Overall dimensions shall not exceed approximately
_____ mm long x ______ mm wide x _____ mm high. The total
connected fan kW shall not exceed _____ kW. The cooling tower(s)
shall be Baltimore Aircoil Model ____________.
1.2 Thermal Capacity: The cooling tower(s) shall be warranted by
the manufacturer to cool _____ l/s of water from ______ C to
_____C at _____C entering wet-bulb temperature.
1.3 Corrosion Resistant Construction (standard): Unless
otherwise noted in this specification, all steel panels and structural
members shall be constructed of heavy-gauge Z600 metric hot-dip
galvanized steel with all edges given a protective coating of zinc-rich
compound and the exterior protected with the BALTIPLUS Corrosion
Protection.
(Alternate 1.3) Corrosion Resistant Construction (optional): Unless
otherwise noted in this specification, all steel panels and structural
members shall be protected with the BALTIBOND

Corrosion
Protection System. The system shall consist of Z600 metric hot-dip
galvanized steel prepared in a four-step (clean, pre-treat, rinse, dry)
process with an electrostatically sprayed, thermosetting, hybrid
polymer fuse-bonded to the substrate during a thermally activated
curing stage and monitored by a 23-step quality assurance program.
1.4 Quality Assurance: The cooling tower manufacturer shall have
a Management System certified by an accredited registrar as
complying with the requirements of ISO-9001:2000 to ensure
consistent quality of products and services.
1.5 Warranty: The manufacturers standard equipment warranty
shall be for a period of not less than one year from date of startup or
eighteen months from date of shipment, whichever occurs first.
2.0 Construction Details
2.1. Cold Water Basin: The cold water basin shall be constructed of
heavy-gauge Z600 hot-dip galvanized steel. Standard accessories
shall include circular access doors, large-area, lift-out hot-dip
galvanized steel strainers with perforated openings sized smaller
than water distribution nozzle orifices, an integral anti-vortexing hood
to prevent air entrainment, and a brass make-up valve with large
diameter plastic float, arranged for easy adjustment.
2.3. Water Distribution System: Hot water distribution basin shall be
open gravity type and constructed of heavy-gauge, Z600 hot-dip
galvanized steel. Basin weirs and plastic metering orifices shall be
provided to assure even distribution of water over the wet deck
surface. Lift-off distribution cover shall be constructed of heavy-
gauge, Z600 hot-dip galvanized steel.
3.0 Mechanical Equipment
3.1. Fan(s): Fan(s) shall be heavy-duty, axial flow type. Air shall be
drawn into the tower through a fan cylinder designed for streamlined
air entry and minimum fan blade tip clearance for maximum fan
efficiency.
3.2. Bearings: Fan(s) shall be mounted on a horizontal solid steel
shaft supported by two heavy-duty, self-aligning, relubricatable ball
bearings with cast iron housings and designed for minimum L10 life
of 40 000 hours (280 000 Hr. Avg. Life). Extended lubrication lines are
provided for ease of maintenance.
3.3. Fan Drive: Fan(s) shall be driven by V-belts and all moving parts
shall be protected by removable steel screens that shall ship installed
on the unit.
3.4. Fan Motor(s): Fan motor(s) shall be totally enclosed fan cooled
(TEFC), reversible, squirrel cage, ball bearing type, designed
specifically for cooling tower service. The motor shall be furnished
with special moisture protection on windings, shafts and bearings.
4.0 BACross Wet Deck Surface and Drift Eliminators
4.1. Wet Deck Surface and drift Eliminators: The wet deck surface
and integral drift eliminators shall be impervious to rot, decay, and
fungus or biological attack. The wet deck surface shall be
manufactured and performance tested by the cooling tower
manufacturer to provide single source responsibility and assure
control of the final product.
5.0 Access
5.1 Basin Access: Circular access doors shall be provided for easy
access to the make-up water assembly and suction strainer for
routine maintenance.
6.0 Sound
6.1 Sound Level: To maintain the quality of the local environment,
the maximum sound pressure levels (dB) measured 15 m from the
cooling tower operating at full fan speed shall not exceed the sound
levels detailed below.
Location 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 dB(A)
Discharge
Air Inlet
End
Top
Open Cooling Towers
RCT - B 1
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
RCT
.
Product Detail
RCT Open Cooling Tower ........................................................................ B2
Benefits ....................................................................................................... B4
Construction Details .................................................................................. B8
Custom Features and Options ................................................................ B10
Accessories ................................................................................................ B11
Engineering Data ..................................................................................... B12
Structural Support .................................................................................. B16
Engineering Specifications ..................................................................... B19
RCT - B 2
R
C
T
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
RCT Open Cooling Tower
Capacity
Single Cell Capacity:
40 145 l/s
General Discription
Commercial applications demand reliable, cost effective and energy efficient solutions. With an
ever increasing focus on operational reliability and ease of maintenance. It is paramount that
cooling equipment be also easy to inspect, clean & maintain. The RCT cooling tower responds to
all these requirements thanks to built-in design features.
Industrial applications face unique challenges in their processes with varying site conditions. The
RCT cooling tower provides solutions to these challenges by reducing the cost of plant design,
construction, operation and on-going maintenance, whilst improving the standard of quality and
construction, required by medium to heavy industry.
Key Features
Total Lower Installation Costs
Low Noise
Low Height
Superior Pultruded Composite Construction
Superior Maintenance and Cleaning Possibilities
RCT - B 3
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
RCT - B 4
R
C
T
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Benefits
Total Lower Installation Costs
Single or multiplexed configurations, common or segmented basins, partitioned or extended air
inlets and increased capacity control steps, all are but a few examples of the flexible modular
cooling tower design.
The tower can be shipped directly from the factory as a fully assembled unit, as unit modules or
knocked down, to suit diverse and often restricted on-site conditions.
The low shipping weights and modular shipping
options reduce transport and crane costs. Lifting
lugs, provided as standard, offer secure fixing
points for safe crane lifts. Lower installation costs
are achieved due to flanged inlet-outlet
connections, solvent welded drain connections
and threaded make-up, overflow and quick-fill
connections.
Low Noise
The use of high efficiency axial fans as standard,
a smooth faced streamlined air entry fan cylinder
and a minimum tip clearance, all translate into a
low air inlet velocity which in turn ensures noise
levels are minimised. Varying fan powers can
also be achieved within a nominal tower size.
Modular Design Factory Assembled
Total Lower Installation Cost
Low Noise Axial Fan
RCT - B 5
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Low Height
The tower has been designed as a low height counter-flow cooling tower able to accommodate
height sensitive sites, reduce pump head and provide easy access to all of its components.
Superior Pultruded Composite Construction
The use of high strength Pultruded Composite components for primary structure and cladding,
offers many advantages over conventional hand laid or chopped strand fibreglass construction
methods. Pultruded composites possess a superior strength to weight ratio of up to five times that
of chopped strand fibreglass.
Superior Maintenance and Cleaning Possibilities
Access to complete unit interior - The large access panel is fitted with easily removable
knobs. Removing the access panel does not require any tools or dismantling of the tower
structure, providing unequalled access to all of the internal cooling tower components for
inspection, cleaning and maintenance.
Basin Accessible from all Sides - Removal of the louvers, requiring no tools, provides access
to all sides of the smooth faced cold water basin for inspection, cleaning and maintenance.
Low Height Strenght Pultruded Composite
Large Access Door Easy Access to Basin
RCT - B 6
R
C
T
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Easy Access to Float Valve - Access to and adjustment of the float valve is simplified. The
stainless steel suction strainer can easily be inspected, removed and cleaned inside.
Removable Fill - The fill medium can easily be removed for cleaning thanks in part to the ample
accessibility, gained by removal of the access panel, and to the easy to handle removable fill
blocks.
Removable Spray System - Cleaning and inspection of the spray system can be performed in
situ or by removing the spray branch arms. No tools are required for the removal of the branch
arms or the individual water distribution nozzles.
Removable Eliminators - Removal of high efficiency drift eliminators can be accomplished
easily without the removal of other internal components or by having to dismantle the tower
structure. The eliminators rest on supports specifically designed to this purpose.
Easy Access to Float Valve Removable Fill
Removable Spray system Removable Eliminators
RCT - B 7
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Motor Outside Airstream - Units larger than model 2142 include an adjustable motor base
plate for belt tensioning, extended lubrication lines with externally mounted grease nipples are
provided, as standard to ease of scheduled maintenance. Smaller units are supplied as direct
drive units.
Easy Access to Drives - Removal of the fan screen for access to belts and drives is not
required. These drive components are easily accessible through the specially designed belt
guard for inspection adjustment or replacement purposes.
Motor Outside Airstream Easy Access to Drives
RCT - B 8
R
C
T
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Construction Details
1. Fan
Aluminium Axial Fans
Small tip clearance tolerance
Low air inlet velocity
Minimum Noise
2. Drive Train
Easy access to drives and belts for inspection and adjustment.
Stainless steel shaft.
Corrosion resistant cast aluminium sheaves
Heavy-duty bearings
3. Motor
Models RCT-2118 and 2129 utilise direct drive motor.
Larger units have the fan motor outside of the moist discharge air stream and use belt drives.
Belts provide reliability and long service life with low maintenance requirements
RCT - B 9
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
4. Drift Eliminators
UV resistant non-corrosive material, impervious to rot, decay and biological attack
Three distinct changes in air direction to reduce drift loss significantly
Assembled in easy to handle sections, which can be removed for access to the equipment
interior
5. Access Door (not shown)
The larger access door is easily removable to provide complete access to drift eliminators,
spray system and fill
Larger units are equipped with anchor points to secure door when removed
6. Fill
The fill is impervious to rot, decay and resistant to fungus or biological attacks
It consists of high efficiency cross-fluted sheets, solvent welded into lightweight blocks
Blocks are sized for easy handling and removal for cleaning.
7. Water Distribution System
Low pressure, stationery type nozzles
Heavy duty PVC spray branches are grommeted to facilitate removal and cleaning
8. Cold Water Basin
The cold water basin is made of fibreglass reinforced polyester (FRP) and extra reinforced in
critical areas.
Sloped basin sides with smooth internal finish for easy cleaning.
9. Strainer
Stainless steel construction, anti-vortex design.
10. Make-up Assembly
Adjustable water make-up assembly, over flow and quick fill connections are supplied standard.
11. Connections
Flanged inlet and outlet connections
Threaded make-up, overflow and quick fill connections
12. Combined Inlet Shields
Removal of the combined inlet shields provides access to all sides of the cold water basin for
inspection, cleaning and maintenance.
13. Roofdeck
Smooth faced air entry fan cylinders
Close manufacturing tolerances allow small tip clearance providing an increased efficiency.
RCT - B 10
R
C
T
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Custom Features and Options
Construction Options
Standard construction: High strenght pultruded composite components for the primary structure
combined with patented bonded panel to post connection.
Fan Drive System
High efficiency fans with direct drive motors for models RCT-2118 and RCT-2129.
Larger models are belt driven. All belt driven units have extended lubrication lines to the edge of
the fan cylinder.
The mechanical equipment support and fan guard are made of hot dip galvanised steel.
Optional: Mechanical equipment support assembly in SST 304.
Cold Water Basin
The RCT tower cold water basin is constructed of high performance fibreglass reinforced
polyester. The suction connection is flanged.
Optional: Units can be supplied without cold water basin for field assembly on a concrete tank. A
unit supplied without cold water basin excludes basin, suction strainer, drain and make-up
assembly.
Triple fan units are always supplied without cold water basin.
Factory Assembled
The RCT Tower is completely factory-assembled.
Optional: The tower can be shipped in knocked-down version for assembly on site. This enables
overseas transport in containers and significantly reduces transport cost.
Heat Transfer Surface Alternatives
Standard Heat Transfer Surface: The film-
type heat transfer surface supplied as standard
with the cooling towers has been carefully
selected for industrial applications. The 19 mm
spacing between the surface sheets gives
excellent air/water contact with low air pressure
loss. The standard heat transfer surface
provides high thermal efficiency and is
sufficient to avoid clogging in most
environments.
Optional Film-Type Space 12 mm: For
applications where the cooling tower water is
clean, alternative models with 12 mm fill are
available.
Heavy Duty 26 mm Fill Type: Heavier contamination, which results in a heavy accumulation on
the heat transfer surface, requires a higher structural strength than can be accomplished with
film-type. For such situations, a heat transfer surface is available, constructed of heavy-duty
wave formed FRP panels spaced 26 mm apart. With the unique integrated telescopic fill
supports, the FRP fill panels can easily be removed for cleaning.
Combined Inlet Shields
Combined Inlet shields prevent biological growth from sunlight, act as a filter for air borne
impurities and debris and eliminate water splash out.
Telescopic fill supports (only for heavy duty 26
mm Fill Type)
RCT - B 11
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Accessories
Two-Speed Fan Motor
An effective method of adding steps of capacity control and saving energy is the installation of two-
speed fan motors in lieu of the standard single-speed motors. Two-speed motors are ideally suited
for this purpose. At half fan speed the equipment capacity is still about 60% of design whereas the
drawn fan power is only about 20% of the full speed motor power. In addition, at low speed, sound
levels will generally reduce by about 9 dB(A).
Electric Water Level Control Package
The electric water level control replaces the standard mechanical make-up valve when a more
precise water level control is required. This package consists of a float switch mounted in the basin
and a solenoid activated valve in the make-up water line. The valve is slow closing to minimize
water hammer.
Vibration Cut-out Switch
A factory-mounted vibration cut-out switch is available to effectively protect against equipment
failure due to excessive vibration of the mechanical equipment system. BAC can provide a
vibration cut-out switch in an IP65 enclosure to ensure reliable protection.
Basin Heaters
Units exposed to below freezing ambient temperatures require protection to prevent freezing of the
water in the cold water basin when the unit is idle. Factory-installed heaters, which maintain the
water temperature at 4C, are a simple and inexpensive way of providing such protection. The
heater package includes the heaters, a thermostat and a low level cut out switch to protect the
heaters if the water level is too low. Standard electric heaters are selected for -18C ambient
temperature.
Equalising Connection
Whenever cooling towers are installed to operate in parallel, the water level in the basins should
be equalised by means of an equalising connection. The equalising connection can be either a
whole pattern cut out only or a connection to the basin.
Basin Sweeper Piping
Basin sweeper piping provides an effective method of preventing sediment from collecting in the
cold water basin of the unit. A complete piping system, including nozzles, is provided in the unit
basin for connection to side stream filtration equipment.
Note: For more information, please refer to the section "Technical Resources, Filtration".
Model No.
RCT
Heater -18C
(kW)
Single Fan Units Double Fan Units
RCT-2118 / RCT 2129 1 x 5 2 x 5
RCT-2142 / RCT-2156 1 x 6 2 x 6
RCT-2183 / RCT-2208 1 x 6 2 x 6
RCT-2238 / RCT2262 2 x 4 4 x 4
RCT-2299 / RCT-2320 2 x 5 4 x 5
RCT-2368 / RCT-2386 2 x 6 N.A.
RCT-2418 / RCT-2441 2 x 6 N.A.
RCT - B 12
R
C
T
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Engineering Data
REMARK: Do not use for construction. Refer to factory certified dimensions & weights. This brochure includes data
current at time of publication, which should be reconfirmed at the time of purchase. In the interest of product
improvement, specifications, weights and dimensions are subject to change without notice. Up-to-date engineering
data and more can be found at www.BaltimoreAircoil.com.
Single Fan Units - Square Box Sizes
Remarks:
1. Access door is always opposite to inlet connection end.
2. Alternative inlet/outlet and tower configurations are available.
3. Nominal outlet connection size provided.
4. Actual outlet sized to match flow.
5. Models RCT-2118-1 and RCT-2129-1 have direct drive motors.
6. Add 70 mm to H
1
for shipping height of the upper section. The
height of the lower section should be increased by 270 mm.
Model
Shipping
Weight
(kg)
Operating
Weight
(kg)
Fan
Motor
(kW)
Air
Flow
(m
3
/s)
Inlet
ND
(mm)
Outlet
ND
(mm)
Drain
ND
(mm)
Overflow
ND
(mm)
Quick-fill
ND
(mm)
Makeup
ND
(mm)
H
(mm)
H
1
(mm)
L
(mm)
W
(mm)
RCT-2118-1
RCT-2129-1
1000
1000
2675
2675
5,5
7,5
15,4
17,3
150
150
150
150
50
50
50
50
20
20
20
20
3310
3310
N/A
N/A
2284
2284
2284
2284
RCT-2142-1
RCT-2156-1
1250
1250
3375
3375
5,5
7,5
18,5
20,4
150
150
200
200
50
50
80
80
20
20
20
20
3407
3407
2535
2535
2588
2588
2588
2588
RCT-2183-1
RCT-2208-1
1550
1550
4125
4125
7,5
11
23,9
27,2
200
200
200
200
50
50
80
80
20
20
20
20
3427
3427
2555
2555
2893
2893
2893
2893
RCT-2238-1
RCT-2262-1
1800
1800
4850
4850
11
15
31,2
34,2
200
200
200
200
50
50
80
80
40
40
40
40
3728
3728
2735
2735
3198
3198
3198
3198
RCT-2299-1
RCT-2320-1
2100
2100
5700
5700
15
18,5
39,0
41,8
200
200
250
250
50
50
80
80
40
40
40
40
3890
3890
2735
2735
3500
3500
3500
3500
1. Water Inlet; 2. Water Outlet; 3. Drain; 4. Overflow; 5. Make-Up; 6. Quick Fill; 7. Fan Motor.
RCT - B 13
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Single Fan Units - Rectangular Box Sizes
Remarks:
1. Access door is always opposite to inlet connection end.
2. Alternative inlet/outlet and tower configurations are available.
3. Nominal outlet connection size provided.
4. Actual outlet sized to match flow.
5. Add 70 mm to H1 for shipping height of the upper section. The
height of the lower section should be increased by 270 mm.
Model
Shipping
Weight
(kg)
Operating
Weight
(kg)
Fan
Motor
(kW)
Air
Flow
(m
3
/s)
Inlet
ND
(mm)
Outlet
ND
(mm)
Drain
ND
(mm)
Overflow
ND
(mm)
Makeup
ND
(mm)
Quick-fill
ND
(mm)
H
(mm)
H
1
(mm)
L
(mm)
W
(mm)
RCT-2368-1
RCT-2386-1
2700
2700
7300
7300
18,5
22
47,8
50,2
200
200
200
200
50
50
80
80
40
40
40
40
4298
4298
3195
3195
4787
4787
3198
3198
RCT-2418-1
RCT-2441-1
3000
3000
8500
8500
18,5
22
54,3
57,3
200
200
250
250
50
50
80
80
40
40
40
40
4503
4503
3195
3195
5247
5247
3500
3500
1. Water Inlet; 2. Water Outlet; 3. Drain; 4. Overflow; 5. Make-Up; 6. Quick Fill; 7. Fan Motor.
RCT - B 14
R
C
T
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Double Fan Units
Remarks:
1. Access door is always opposite to inlet connection end.
2. Alternative inlet/outlet and tower configurations are available.
3. Nominal outlet connection size provided.
4. Actual outlet sized to match the flow.
5. Models RCT-2118-2 and RCT-2129-2 have direct drive motors.
6. Add 70 mm to H1 for shipping height of the upper section. The
height of the lower section should be increased by 270 mm.
Model
Shipping
Weight
(kg)
Operating
Weight
(kg)
Fan
Motor
(kW)
Air
Flow
(m
3
/s)
Inlet
ND
(mm)
Outlet
ND
(mm)
Drain
ND
(mm)
Overflow
ND
(mm)
Makeup
ND
(mm)
Quick-fill
ND
(mm)
H
(mm)
H
1
(mm)
L
(mm)
W
(mm)
RCT-2118-2
RCT-2129-2
2000
2000
5400
5400
(2x) 5,5
(2x) 7,5
30,8
34,6
(2x) 150
(2x) 150
150
150
(2x) 50
(2x) 50
(2x) 50
(2x) 50
40
40
40
40
3380
3380
N/A
N/A
4548
4548
2284
2284
RCT-2142-2
RCT-2156-2
2500
2500
6800
6800
(2x) 5,5
(2x) 7,5
37,1
40,8
(2x) 150
(2x) 150
200
200
(2x) 50
(2x) 50
(2x) 80
(2x) 80
40
40
40
40
3555
3555
2535
2535
5157
5157
2588
2588
RCT-2183-2
RCT-2208-2
3100
3100
8300
8300
(2x) 7,5
(2x) 11
47,8
54,4
(2x) 200
(2x) 200
200
200
(2x) 50
(2x) 50
(2x) 80
(2x) 80
40
40
40
40
3653
3653
2555
2555
5769
5769
2893
2893
RCT-2238-2
RCT-2262-2
3600
3600
9750
9750
(2x) 11
(2x) 15
62,4
68,4
(2x) 200
(2x) 200
200
200
(2x) 50
(2x) 50
(2x) 80
(2x) 80
40
40
40
40
3915
3915
2735
2735
6377
6377
3198
3198
RCT-2299-2
RCT-2320-2
4200
4200
11450
11450
(2x) 15
(2x) 18,5
78,1
83,5
(2x) 200
(2x) 200
250
250
(2x) 50
(2x) 50
(2x) 80
(2x) 80
40
40
40
40
4096
4096
2735
2735
6982
6982
3499
3499
1. Water Inlet; 2. Water Outlet; 3. Drain; 4. Overflow; 5. Make-Up; 6. Quick Fill; 7. Fan Motor.
RCT - B 15
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Triple Fan Units
Remarks:
1. Access door is always opposite to inlet connection end.
2. Alternative water inlet and tower configurations are available.
3. Triple fan units are not available with common FRP Basin. Only for
installation on concrete basin.
4. Models RCT-2118-3 and RCT-2129-3 have direct drive motors.
5. Add 70 mm to H1 for shipping height of the upper section. The
lower section is shipped knocked down.
Model
Shipping
Weight
(kg)
Operating
Weight
(kg)
Fan Motor
(kW)
Air Flow
(m
3
/s)
Inlet
ND
(mm)
H
(mm)
H
1
(mm)
L
(mm)
W
(mm)
RCT-2142-3
RCT-2156-3
3700
3700
10200
10200
(3x) 5,5
(3x) 7,5
55,6
61,2
(3x) 150
(3x) 150
3318
3318
2535
2535
7731
7731
2588
2588
RCT-2183-3
RCT-2208-3
4700
4700
12400
12400
(3x) 7,5
(3x) 11
71,6
81,6
(3x) 200
(3x) 200
3427
3427
2555
2555
8646
8646
2893
2893
RCT-2238-3
RCT-2262-3
5400
5400
14700
14700
(3x) 11
(3x) 15
93,6
102,6
(3x) 200
(3x) 200
3695
3695
2735
2735
9556
9556
3198
3198
RCT-2299-3
RCT-2320-3
6300
6300
17100
17100
(3x) 15
(3x) 18,5
117,1
125,3
(3x) 200
(3x) 200
3780
3780
2735
2735
10465
10465
3499
3499
1. Water Inlet; 2. Fan Motor; 3. Concrete Basin (by others).
RCT - B 16
R
C
T
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Structural Support
The recommended support arrangement for units consists of parallel I-beams running the full length of the unit, spaced as shown in the following
drawing. Besides providing adequate support, the steel also serves to raise the unit above any solid foundation to ensure access to the bottom
of the unit. To support units in an alternate steel support arrangement, consult your BAC Balticare Representative.
Single Fan - Square Box Sizes
Single Fan - Rectangular Box Sizes
1. Outline of Unit; 2. Mounting holes; 3. FRP Cold Water Basin; 4. Water Inlet Side.
1. Outline of Unit; 2. Mounting holes; 3. FRP Cold Water Basin; 4. Water Inlet Side.
RCT - B 17
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
N/A = Not Applicable
Double Fan Units
RCT
MINIMUM SUPPORT REQUIREMENTS
DIMENSIONS (mm)
MAX. DEFLECTION (mm)
A B C
RCT 2118-1
RCT 2129-1
2198 N/A 2
RCT 2142-1
RCT 2156-1
2502 N/A 2
RCT 2183-1
RCT 2208-1
2806 N/A 2
RCT 2238-1
RCT 2262-1
3112 N/A 3
RCT 2299-1
RCT 2320-1
3416 N/A 3
RCT 2368-1
RCT 2386-1
3112 1594 1346 3
RCT 2418-1
RCT 2441-1
3416 1748 1638 3
RCT
MINIMUM SUPPORT REQUIREMENTS
DIMENSIONS (mm)
MAX. DEFLECTION (mm)
A
RCT 2118-2
RCT 2129-2
2198 4
RCT 2142-2
RCT 2156-2
2502 5
RCT 2183-2
RCT 2208-2
2806 5
RCT 2238-2
RCT 2262-2
3112 6
RCT 2299-2
RCT 2320-2
3416 6
1. Outline of Unit; 2. Mounting holes; 3. FRP Cold Water Basin; 4. Water Inlet Side.
RCT - B 18
R
C
T
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Triple Fan Units - Concrete Sump
Notes:
1. Support beams should be sized in accordance with accepted
structural practice. Maximum deflection of beam under the unit to
be 1mm/m unit length. Beams can be selected for 65% of the
operating weight as a uniform load under each of the two exterior
beams. The centre beam underneath the sloping sump should not
take any of the unit weight as it is merely there to prevent
excessive sump bottom deflection.
2. Supporting steel work and anchor bolts are to be selected and
furnished by others.
3. All supporting steel must be flush and level at the top.
4. If vibration isolator rails are used between tower and supporting
steel, the supporting steel length should meet vibration rail length.
If point isolators are used, they should be mounted under the
supporting steel.
REMARK: Do not use for construction. Refer to factory certified dimensions & weights. This brochure includes data
current at time of publication, which should be reconfirmed at the time of purchase. In the interest of product
improvement, specifications, weights and dimensions are subject to change without notice. Up-to-date engineering
data and more can be found at www.BaltimoreAircoil.com.
RCT
MINIMUM SUPPORT REQUIREMENTS
DIMENSIONS (mm)
MAX. DEFLECTION (mm)
A B C
RCT 2142-3
RCT 2156-3
2222 7742 2592 7
RCT 2183-3
RCT 2208-3
2526 8654 2896 8
RCT 2238-3
RCT 2262-3
2832 9572 3202 9
RCT 2299-3
RCT 2320-3
3136 10486 3506 10
1. Outline of Unit; 2. Water Inlet Side.
RCT - B 19
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Engineering Specifications
1.0 Cooling Tower
1.1 General: Supply and install factory assembled cooling tower of
counter-flow, induced draft, axial fan design. Each cooling tower shall
be guaranteed by the manufacturer to cool ___ litres per second of
water from ___ C (HW) entering water temperature to ___ C (CW)
leaving water temperature at ___ C (WB) entering wet bulb
temperature.
2.0 Construction Details
2.1 Structure: The cooling tower structure and casing shall be
constructed of high strength Pultruded Composite materials. All
pultruded composite components shall be moulded to exacting
standards with UV resistant polyester resins such that UV protection
is afforded throughout the entire embodiment of the components as
well as being an externally applied coating.
2.2. Internal Surfaces: All internal surfaces of the casing, basin, roof
deck and fan cylinder shall have an even and regular smooth faced
finish resulting from either an open moulding or pultruded moulding
process where the faces of these components come into direct
contact with the mould to facilitate easy cleaning. Internal flow coated
surfaces that have not come in contact with the mould shall not be
acceptable.
2.3 Cold Water Basin: The basin shall be constructed of high
performance Fibreglass Reinforced Polyester (FRP) and reinforced in
critical areas. The basin shall have a smooth internal finish and slope
to a center drain for ease of cleaning. All suction, drain, overflow and
quick fill connections shall be furnished as standard. The suction
connection shall be flanged. Easy and complete access shall be
made possible from all sides.
2.4 Air Inlet Louvers: Air Inlet Louvers shall be plastic material,
designed to prevent splash out and minimise the passage of sunlight
to the cooling tower interior. Louvers shall be easily removable
lightweight sections providing easy access for cleaning.
304-grade stainless steel deflector shall be factory fitted at the bottom
of and inside the louvers to direct water away from the louver,
preventing splash out.
2.5 Wet Deck Surface: The film type fill shall be impervious to rot,
decay and fungus or biological attacks. It shall consist of high
efficiency cross-fluted sheets solvent welded into lightweight blocks
sized for easy handling and removal for cleaning.
2.6 Water Distribution System: Water shall be distributed evenly
over the wet deck surface by a low pressure, stationery, non rotating
type water distribution system incorporating heavy duty PVC spray
branches and plastic spray nozzles held into place with snap rubber
grommets.
2.7 Strainer: The cold water basin strainer shall be a 304-grade
stainless steel cylindrical type having a solid top cover plate with a
perforated mesh bottom of sufficient open area relative to the suction
flow rate and by design, prevent vortexing at the outlet.
2.8 Hardware: All wetted hardware shall be 304-grade stainless
steel.
3.0 Mechanical Equipment
3.1 Fan: The adjustable pitch axial flow fan(s) shall be of low noise,
multi-bladed type heavy duty extruded aluminium. The fan shall
operate within a FRP fan cylinder having an even and regular smooth
faced internal finish ensuring a streamlined air entry and minimum tip
clearance for maximum fan efficiency.
3.2 Motor: The fan motor(s) shall be to IP55 standard with Class F
insulation specifically designed for cooling tower service. The fan
motor shall be fully outside of the moist discharge air stream for belt
driven units. The motor shall be located adjacent to the fan cylinder
for ease of access for maintenance and increased motor life
expectancy. The motor is to be located below the top of the cooling
tower ensuring overall tower height is kept to a minimum and external
of discharge ducting in such applications.
3.3 Mechanical Support: The mechanical support shall be of HDG
steel construction. The entire mechanical arrangement shall simply
bolt to the top of the fan cylinder for ease of access for maintenance.
The fan shaft shall be of 304 stainless steel supported by heavy duty,
self aligning, grease packed ball bearings specifically suited to
vertical shaft application with moisture proof seals and integral
slingers. Extended lubrication lines shall be provided as standard to
the bearings with grease nipples located outside for ease of
scheduled maintenance.
3.4 Belt Drive: Units with belt drive shall be via standard V belts for
ease of availability. The motor pulley shall be located outside of the
discharge air stream. The entire drive arrangement is to be protected
by a hinged cover guard in HDG.
4.0 Drift Eliminators
4.1 Drift Eliminators: The plastic drift eliminators shall be UV
resistant and impervious to rot, decay and fungus or biological
attacks. They shall consist of high efficiency three pass wave formed
blades solvent welded into lightweight, easily removable sections.
5.0 Combined Inlet Shields
5.1. Combined Inlet Shields: Combined inlet shields shall be
separate from the wet deck surface and removable to allow easy
access for inspection of the air/water interface at the air inlet side of
the equipment. Combined inlet shields shall prevent UV-light and
debris from entering the unit, as well as prevent water splash out
during fan cycling. They shall be constructed of maintenance free,
corrosion and UV resistant material.
6.0 Access
6.1 Access: One full side of the casing shall be removable to provide
full and open access to all internal tower components for inspection,
maintenance and cleaning. The access panel shall be retained by
easily removable knobs, not requiring dismantling of the tower
structure.
RCT - B 20
R
C
T
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
7.0 Sound
7.1 Sound Level: To maintain the quality of the local environment,
the maximum sound pressure levels (dB) measured 15 m from the
cooling tower operating at full fan speed shall not exceed the sound
levels detailed below.
Location 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 dB(A)
Discharge
Air Inlet
End
Back
Open Cooling Towers
I MT - B 1
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
IMT
Product Detail
IMT Open Cooling Towers ....................................................................... B2
Benefits ....................................................................................................... B4
Construction Details .................................................................................. B6
Custom Features and Options .................................................................. B8
Accessories ............................................................................................... B10
Engineering Data ...................................................................................... B11
Structural Support .................................................................................. B14
Engineering Specifications ..................................................................... B19
I MT - B 2
I
M
T
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
IMT Open Cooling Towers
Capacity
single cell capacity
35 575 l/s
General Description
The features of modular design are incorporated in all IMT cooling towers to significantly reduce
site assembly time and cost.
IMT cooling towers are designed to meet the demanding conditions of a harsh industrial
environment. Highly corrosion resistant materials are available to insure long life under these
conditions. Structural strength is provided by heavy duty structural angles of stainless steel, hot dip
galvanized steel or galvanized steel protected by the Baltibond Corrosion protection system.
Standard cladding and fan stack materials are Fiberglass Reinforced Polyester (FRP)
Key Features
Sharply reduced Site assembly cost
Superior durability through industrial quality materials
Assured thermal performance
Versatility in selection to suit every project requirement
I MT - B 3
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
I MT - B 4
I
M
T
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Benefits
Different Construction Material Options
To meat each customers technical and economic requirement, IMT cooling towers offer a broad
choice of construction materials such as :
Fibreglass Reinforced Polyester cladding with a hot dip galvanised steel structure
Z600 hot dip galvanised cladding and structure protected with the unique Baltibond Corrosion
Protection System.
Fibreglass Reinforced Polyester cladding with a stainless steel structure
Choice of Heat Transfer Surface Alternatives
In addition to the standard IMT heat transfer surface, heavy duty cleanable fill material (for dirty
water applications) and clean water fill are available.
Total Lower Installed Cost
Modular Design - The time consuming field assembly of individual parts is reduced to the
rigging of large factory assembled sections and final assembly details. Your own construction
people can receive the shipment, assemble the modules and component parts, and complete
the cooling tower installation in a fraction of time required for conventional field erected cooling
towers.
Less construction time on site means less susceptibility to the variables of weather, labour
productivity and workmanship.
Field cutting, patching and drilling are virtually eliminated by use of standardized modular
sections. The result is the consistent high quality, quickly assembled installation required by
todays industrial cooling tower user.
Hoist heat transfer modules from truck to
concrete basin
Mount mechanical drive system
I MT - B 5
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Low Sound and Low kW
IMT Cooling towers offer low year round energy consumption, and moderately low noise levels,
which can be reduced by approx. 6-8 dB(A) on the low speed of two speed fan motors. Low kW
custom models are available for even lower energy consumption and lower noise levels.
Assemble and position fan stack and plenum
sections.
Install miscellaneous components
I MT - B 6
I
M
T
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Construction Details
1. Wet Deck Surface
Efficient plastic heat transfer surface suitable for most industrial applications
Impervious to rot, decay and biological attack
2. Steel Frame
Heavy duty steel structural angles connected with corresponding hardware
3. FRP casing
Fibreglass reinforced (FRP) fan stack
4. Axial Fan
Heavy duty, extruded aluminium axial fan, with maximum fan efficiency
Safe fan selection distant from critical fan speed or resonant frequencys
I MT - B 7
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
5. Drift Eliminators
UV resistant non-corrosive material, impervious to rot, decay and biological attack
Three distinct changes in air direction to reduce drift loss significantly
Assembled in easy to handle sections, which can be removed for access to the equipment
interior
6. Gear Drive System
Standard on models IMT 650 and larger.
Optional on models IMT 500 up to 650.
Right angle double reduction gear with AGMA rating of 2 according PCMA.
7. Access Door
Large sized access door in the fan plenum.
8. Fan Motor
TEFC fan motor, IP 55 protected and Class F insulation designed for cooling tower operation.
Extra moisture protection on bearings
9. FRP Fan Cylinder
Fibreglass reinforced (FRP) fan stack
10. Water Distribution System
Heavy duty spray branches
Low pressure, large diameter, non clog nozzles.
11. Belt Drive (Not Shown)
Standard on models IMT 500 650 with
Specially designed belt with corrosion resistant fan sheave.
Heavy duty grease lubricated ball bearings with moisture seals and integral slinger rings
12. Cold Water Sump (Not Shown)
Factory assembled sump available for models IMT 500 990 (for BBCPS unit execution only)
13. Combined Inlet Shields
Corrosion Resistant
Easily removable
UV resistant plastic material
I MT - B 8
I
M
T
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Custom Features and Options
Construction Options
Standard Construction:
All Z600 heavy-gauge galvanized steel structural elements are protected with the Baltibond
Corrosion Protection System, a hybrid polymer coating used to extend equipment life.
Optional Construction:
All heavy steel structural elements are hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
Optional Stainless Steel Construction:
Structural elements are constructed of stainless steel either type 304 or 316.
Note: Refer to section Technical Resources, Material Options for more details on the materials described above.
* Optional on models IMT 500 to 990.
Baltiguard Drive System (Optional on
IMT-500 to 650)
The BALTIGUARD

Drive System consists of two


standard single-speed fan motors and drive
assemblies. One drive assembly is sized for full
speed and load, and the other is sized for
approximately 2/3 speed and consumes only 1/3
of the design kilowatt power. This configuration
allows the system to be operated like a two-speed
motor, but with the reserve capacity of a standby
motor in the event of failure. As a minimum,
approximately 70% capacity will be available from
the low kilowatt motor, even on a design wet-bulb
day. Controls and wiring are the same, as those
required for a two-speed, two-winding motor.
Significant energy savings are achieved when operating at low speed during periods of reduced
load and/or low wet-bulb temperatures.
Combined Inlet Shields
Combined Inlet shields prevent biological growth from sunlight, act as a filter for air borne
impurities and debris and eliminate water splash out.
Standard Baltibond Corrosion
Protection System (BBCPS)
Optional
Hot-Dip Galvanized Structure
Optional
Stainless Steel Structure
Cold Water Sump* Z 600 Galvanized Steel with BBCPS Not Available Not Available
Cladding Z 600 Galvanized Steel with BBCPS Fiberglass Reinforced Polyester Fiberglass Reinforced Polyester
Fan Cowl Fiberglass Reinforced Polyester Fiberglass Reinforced Polyester Fiberglass Reinforced Polyester
Frame and Support Columns Z 600 Galvanized Steel with BBCPS
Steel Hot-Dip Galvanized after Fabri-
cation
304 or 316 Stainless Steel
Baltiguard Drive System
I MT - B 9
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Wetdeck Surface
Standard Heat Transfer Surface: The film-
type heat transfer surface supplied as standard
with the cooling towers has been carefully
selected for industrial applications. The 19 mm
spacing between the surface sheets gives
excellent air/water contact with low air pressure
loss. The standard heat transfer surface
provides high thermal efficiency and is
sufficient to avoid clogging in most
environments.
Optional Film-Type Space 12 mm: For
applications where the cooling tower water is
clean, alternative models with 12 mm fill are
available.
Heavy Duty 26 mm Fill Type: Heavier contamination, which results in a heavy accumulation on
the heat transfer surface, requires a higher structural strength than can be accomplished with
film-type. For such situations, a heat transfer surface is available, constructed of heavy-duty
wave formed FRP panels spaced 26 mm apart. With the unique integrated telescopic fill
supports, the FRP fill panels can easily be removed for cleaning.
Cold Water Basin
Integral cold water basins are available as an option on IMT models 500 to 990 and models
IMT500-2 to 990-2 (for IMT-models with the Baltibond

construction only).
Note:
(1)
Volume at overflow height
Low Sound Fan
To maintain the quality of the local environment, the IMT cooling tower can be furnished with a low
sound fan.
Model No.
IMT
Sump Height
(mm)
Sump Weight
(kg)
Sump Volume
(l)
(1)
Make Up Size
ND (mm)
Water Outlet Size
ND (mm)
Equalizer Size
ND (mm)
IMT 500 510 2090 5690 50 (2x) 250 (2x) 250
IMT 630 510 2090 5690 50 (2x) 250 (2x) 250
IMT 650 510 2500 7120 40 (2x) 250 (2x) 250
IMT-760 510 2500 7120 40 (2x) 250 (2x) 250
IMT 795 510 2730 8480 50 (2x) 300 (2x) 250
IMT 990 510 2730 8480 50 (2x) 300 (2x) 250
Telescopic fill supports (only for heavy duty 26
mm Fill Type)
I MT - B 10
I
M
T
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Accessories
Electric Water Level Control Package
The electric water level control to allow replaces the standard mechanical make-up valve when a
more precise water level control is required. This package consists of a float switch mounted in the
basin and a solenoid activated valve in the make-up water line. The valve is slow closing to
minimize water hammer. (Only for models IMT 500 up to IMT 990 with factory supplied basin.)
Vibration Cutout Switch
A factory-mounted vibration cut-out switch is available to effectively protect against equipment
failure due to excessive vibration of the mechanical equipment system. BAC can provide a
vibration cut-out switch in an IP65 enclosure to ensure reliable protection.
Two-Speed Fan Motor
An effective method of adding steps of capacity control and saving energy is the installation of two-
speed fan motors in lieu of the standard single-speed motors. Two-speed motors are ideally suited
for this purpose. At half fan speed the equipment capacity is still about 60% of design whereas the
drawn fan power is only about 20% of the full speed motor power. In addition, at low speed, sound
levels will generally reduce by about 9 dB(A).
Basin Heaters
Units exposed to below freezing ambient temperatures require protection to prevent freezing of the
water in the cold water basin when the unit is idle. Factory-installed heaters, which maintain the
water temperature at 4C, are a simple and inexpensive way of providing such protection. The
heater package includes the heaters, a thermostat and a low level cut out switch to protect the
heaters if the water level is too low. Standard electric heaters are selected for -18C ambient
temperature. (Only for models IMT 500 up to IMT 990 with factory supplied basin)
Fan Motor Control Thermostat
Single stage thermostats or two stage thermostats can be used for fan motor speed control.
Safety Switch
Safety switches or local isolators allow the electrical supply to motors to be disconnected for safety
purposes during inspection or maintenance.
Ladder and Safety Cage
These items are available for field installation on all IMT models when required.
Model No.
IMT
Heaters -18C
(kW)
IMT 500-630 2 x 8
IMT 650-760 4 x 5
IMT 795-990 4 x 6
I MT - B 11
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Engineering Data
REMARK: Do not use for construction. Refer to factory certified dimensions & weights. This brochure includes data
current at time of publication, which should be reconfirmed at the time of purchase. In the interest of product
improvement, specifications, weights and dimensions are subject to change without notice. Up-to-date engineering
data and more can be found at www.BaltimoreAircoil.com.
IMT 500 - 1195
Model No.
IMT
Operating
Weight
(kg)
Shipping
Weight
(kg)
Heaviest
Section
(kg)
H
(mm)
Water In
L
(mm)
W
(mm)
Airflow
m
3
/s
Motor
(kW)
Water In
ND (mm)
IMT 500-1B O 6430 4690 1460 5110 4800 4880 78,8 22 (2x) 200
IMT 630-1B O
IMT 630-1B P
7120
7120
5000
5000
1620
1620
5410
5410
4800
4800
4880
4880
74,8
82,1
22
30
(2x) 200
(2x) 200
IMT 650-1B P
IMT 650-1B Q
7980
7980
5550
5550
1820
1820
5410
5410
4800
4800
6080
6080
94,4
102,7
30
37
(2x) 250
(2x) 250
IMT 760-1B R 9020 6140 2120 5710 4800 6080 102,7 45 (2x) 250
IMT 795-1B Q
IMT 795-1B R
9840
9840
6850
6850
2050
2050
5410
5410
6000
6000
6080
6080
124,1
128,7
37
45
(2x) 250
(2x) 250
IMT 990-1B Q
IMT 990-1B R
10950
10950
7390
7390
2320
2320
5710
5710
6000
6000
6080
6080
116,6
126,3
37
45
(2x) 250
(2x) 250
IMT 925-1B R 11820 7820 2440 5720 6000 7280 151,8 45 (2x) 300
IMT 1195-1B R
IMT 1195-1B S
13410
13410
8730
8730
2890
2890
6020
6020
6000
6000
7280
7280
143,3
151,8
45
55
(2x) 300
(2x) 300
1. Water Inlet; 2. Access Door; 3. Motor System (Gear Drive Option); 4. Concrete Basin (by Others).
I MT - B 12
I
M
T
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
IMT 1155 - 1945
Model No.
IMT
Operating
Weight
(kg)
Shipping
Weight
(kg)
Heaviest
Section
(kg)
H
(mm)
Water In
L
(mm)
W
(mm)
Airflow
(m
3
/s)
Motor
(kW)
Water Inlet
ND (mm)
IMT 1155-1B S 13890 9280 2030 5720 7200 7280 184,2 55 (3x) 250
IMT 1360-1B T 15430 10020 2280 6020 7200 7280 182,6 75 (3x) 250
IMT 1550-1B S
IMT 1550-1B T
20900
20900
13600
13600
3300
3300
6570
6570
7200
7200
8480
8480
188,8
200,6
55
75
(3x) 300
(3x) 300
IMT 1695-1B T
IMT 1695-1B U
21400
21400
14100
14100
3300
3300
6570
6570
7200
7200
8480
8480
192,1
210,5
75
90
(3x) 300
(3x) 300
IMT 1780-1B U
IMT 1780-1B V
23400
23400
15800
15800
4200
4200
6570
6570
8400
8400
8480
8480
237,4
248,8
90
110
(3x) 300
(3x) 300
IMT 1945-1B U
IMT 1945-1B V
24000
24000
16400
16400
4200
4200
6570
6570
8400
8400
8480
8480
227,5
245,4
90
110
(3x) 300
(3x) 300
1. Water Inlet; 2. Access Door; 3. Fan Motor System (Gear Drive Option); 4. Concrete Basin (by others).
I MT - B 13
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
IMT 1990 - 2530
General Notes
1. Special models with alternative configurations, fan power options
or heat transfer surface options are available. Contact your BAC
Balticare Representative for information. IMT models 500 to 990
are also available with sump as an option. Contact your local BAC
Balticare Representative for sump dimensions of these models.
2. Motors located inside the fan plenum for models IMT-500 to IMT-
650.
Model No.
IMT
Operating
Weight
(kg)
Shipping
Weight
(kg)
Heaviest
Section
(kg)
H
(mm)
Water In
L
(mm)
W
(mm)
Airflow
(m
3
/s)
Motor
(kW)
Water Inlet
ND (mm)
IMT 1990-1B U
IMT 1990-1B V
27600
27600
17900
17900
3300
3300
6570
6570
9600
9600
8480
8480
270,9
284,8
90
110
(4x) 300
(4x) 300
IMT 2260-1B V
IMT 2260-1B W
28300
28300
18600
18600
3300
3300
6570
6570
9600
9600
8480
8480
271,7
285,3
110
132
(4x) 300
(4x) 300
IMT 2320-1B V
IMT 2320-1B W
31200
31200
20000
20000
3700
3700
7230
7230
9600
9600
9680
9680
309,1
327,4
110
132
(4x) 300
(4x) 300
IMT 2530-1B V
IMT 2530-1B W
32000
32000
20800
20800
2700
2700
7230
7230
9600
9600
9680
9680
297,3
314,6
110
132
(4x) 300
(4x) 300
1. Water Inlet; 2. Access Door; 3. Fan Motor System (Gear Drive Option); 4. Concrete Basin (by others).
I MT - B 14
I
M
T
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Structural Support
REMARK: Do not use for construction. Refer to factory certified dimensions & weights. This brochure includes data
current at time of publication, which should be reconfirmed at the time of purchase. In the interest of product
improvement, specifications, weights and dimensions are subject to change without notice. Up-to-date engineering
data and more can be found at www.BaltimoreAircoil.com.
IMT 500 - 1195
I MT - B 15
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Model No.
IMT
A
(mm)
B
(mm)
C
(mm)
D
(mm)
E
(mm)
F
(mm)
Support Points
(Concrete Sump)
IMT 500-1B O
IMT 500-1B P
5204 5294 2310 4710 2310 2400 (12) x M 12
IMT 630-1B P
IMT 630-1B Q
5204 5294 2310 4710 2310 2400 (12) x M 12
IMT 650-1B Q
IMT 650-1B R
5204 6494 2310 5910 2910 3000 (12) x M 12
IMT 760-1B R 5204 6494 2310 5910 2910 3000 (12) x M 12
IMT 795-1B Q
IMT 795-1B R
6404 6494 2910 5910 2910 3000 (12) x M 12
IMT 990-1B R
IMT 990-1B S
6404 6494 2910 5910 2910 3000 (12) x M 12
IMT 925-1B S 6404 7694 2910 7110 3510 3600 (12) x M 12
IMT 1195-1B S
IMT 1195-1B T
6404 7694 2910 7110 3510 3600 (12) x M 12
I MT - B 16
I
M
T
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
IMT 1155 - 1360
Model No.
IMT
A
(mm)
B
(mm)
C
(mm)
D
(mm)
E
(mm)
F
(mm)
Support Points
(Concrete Sump)
IMT 1155-1B 7604 7694 2310 7110 3510 3600 (18) x M 16
IMT 1360-1B 7604 7694 2310 7110 3510 3600 (18) x M 16
I MT - B 17
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
IMT 1550 - 1945
Model No.
IMT
A
(mm)
B
(mm)
C
(mm)
D
(mm)
E
(mm)
F
(mm)
G
(mm)
Support Points
(Concrete Sump)
IMT 1550-1B
IMT 1550-1B
7604 8894 2310 8310 2910 2400 2490 (24) x M 16
IMT 1695-1B
IMT 1695-1B
7604 8894 2310 8310 2910 2400 2490 (24) x M 16
IMT 1780-1B
IMT 1780-1B
8804 8894 2910 8310 2910 2400 2490 (24) x M 16
IMT 1945-1B
IMT 1945-1B
8804 8894 2910 8310 2910 2400 2490 (24) x M 16
I MT - B 18
I
M
T
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
IMT 1990 - 2530
Notes:
IMT Cooling Towers provided without the integral sump by BAC should be supported on concrete columns or sump walls as shown. Dimensions
A en B show the minimum inside sump dimensions and the table above gives the total number of support points required in the sump. For exact
support locations of double cell models refer to foundation drawing available from your BAC Balticare Representative.
Model No.
IMT
A
(mm)
B
(mm)
C
(mm)
D
(mm)
E
(mm)
F
(mm)
G
(mm)
Support Points
(Concrete Sump)
IMT 1990-1B
IMT 1990-1B
10004 8894 2310 8310 2910 2490 2400 (32) x M 16
IMT 2260-1B
IMT 2260-1B
10004 8894 2310 8310 2910 2490 2400 (32) x M 16
IMT 2320-1B
IMT 2320-1B
10004 10094 2310 9510 3510 2490 2400 (32) x M 16
IMT 2530-1B
IMT 2530-1B
10004 10094 2310 9510 3510 2490 2400 (32) x M 16
I MT - B 19
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Engineering Specifications
1.0 Cooling Tower
1.1 General: Furnish and install _____ factory-assembled, induced-
draft, axial fan, counterflow cooling tower(s) with vertical air
discharge, conforming in all aspects to the specifications, schedules
and as shown on the plans. Overall dimensions shall not exceed
approximately _____ mm long x ______ mm wide x _____ mm high.
The total connected fan kW shall not exceed _____ kW. The cooling
tower(s) shall be Baltimore Aircoil Model ____________.
1.2 Thermal Capacity: The cooling tower(s) shall be warranted by
the manufacturer to cool _____ l/s of water from ______ C to
_____C at _____C entering wet-bulb temperature.
1.3 Corrosion Resistant Construction: Unless otherwise noted in
this specification, all steel panels and structural members shall be
protected with the BALTIBOND

Corrosion Protection System. The
system shall consist of Z600 metric hot-dip galvanized steel prepared
in a four-step (clean, pre-treat, rinse, dry) process with an
electrostatically sprayed, thermosetting, hybrid polymer fuse-bonded
to the substrate during a thermally activated curing stage and
monitored by a 23-step quality assurance program. Casing panels
shall be constructed of corrosion and UV-resistant fibreglass
reinforced polyester (FRP) to minimise maintenance requirements
and prolong equipment life
(Alternate 1.3) Corrosion Resistant Construction: Unless
otherwise noted in this specification, all structural members shall be
constructed of heavy-gauge steel hot dip galvanized after fabrication.
Casing panels shall be constructed of corrosion and UV-resistant
fibreglass reinforced polyester (FRP) to minimise maintenance
requirements and prolong equipment life.
(Alternate 1.3) Type 304 or 316 Stainless Steel Construction: All
structural members shall be constructed of Type 304 or 316L
stainless steel. Casing panels shall be constructed of corrosion and
UV-resistant fibreglass reinforced polyester (FRP) to minimise
maintenance requirements and prolong equipment life
1.4 Quality Assurance: The cooling tower manufacturer shall have
a Management System certified by an accredited registrar as
complying with the requirements of ISO-9001:2000 to ensure
consistent quality of products and services.
1.5 Warranty: The manufacturers standard equipment warranty
shall be for a period of not less than one year from date of startup or
eighteen months from date of shipment, whichever occurs first.
2.0 Construction Details
2.1 Structure: The cooling tower structure shall be made of Z600
metric hot-dip galvanised steel protected with the BALTIBOND
Corrosion Protection System.
2.2 Casing Panels and Fan Deck: Casing panels shall be
constructed of corrosion and UV-resistant fibreglass reinforced
polyester (FRP) to minimise maintenance requirements and prolong
equipment life.
2.3 Support Columns: The cooling tower heat transfer surface
sections shall have integral support columns. The columns shall be
constructed from heavy gauge galvanized steel angles which recess
into the heat transfer section to reduce shipping volume.
2.4 Sump: (Optional for models IMT 500-990 and models IMT 500-2
990-2 and only for units protected with the Baltibond

Corrosion
Protection System.) The integral sump shall be constructed of heavy
gauge Z600 Hot dip galvanized steel. Standard accessories shall
include large area, liftout, galvanized strainers with BALTIBOND


Corrosion Protection System and perforated openings, sized smaller
than the water distribution nozzle orifices; an integral anti-vortexing
hood to prevent air entrainment, brass make-up valve with larger
diameter plastic float arrangement for easy adjustment (field
installed) and connections for water outlet, overflow and drain.
2.5. Fans: Fans shall be axial flow type constructed of heavy duty
aluminium, and tested in actual models by the cooling tower
manufacturer. Each fan cylinder shall be designed for streamlined air
entry and minimum tip clearance for maximum fan efficiency.
3.0 Mechanical Equipment
3.1. Belt Drive (models IMT 500-650): Fans shall be driven by
neoprene/polyester belt(s) designed specifically for cooling tower
service. The sheaves shall be cast aluminum. Fan shaft shall be
mounted in heavy duty, grease-packed, self-aligning relubricatable
ball bearings with moisture proof seals and integral slinger rings.
Extended lube lines shall be provided for ease of maintenance.
3.2. Gear Drive (models IMT 650 and larger, optional on models
IMT 500-650): Fan shall be driven through a right angle gear box
designed for a service factor of 2 according to PCMA.
3.3. Fan Motors: The fan motor(s) shall be ______ kW, 1500 RPM,
squirrel cage, totally enclosed, fan cooled (TEFC) with IP55
protection and Class F insulation. Motor(s) shall be specifically
designed for cooling tower service and shall have special moisture
protection on windings, shaft and bearings.
4.0 Wet Deck Surface and Drift Eliminators
4.1. Wet Deck Surface: The wet deck surface shall consist of plastic
formed sheets. It shall be impervious to rot, decay and fungus or
biological attack. The surface shall be performance tested in actual
models by the cooling tower manufacturer to assure specified
performance.
4.2. Drift Eliminators: Eliminators shall be constructed of formed
plastic sheets and be removable in easily handled sections. They
shall have a minimum of three changes in air direction.
5.0 Combined Inlet Shields
5.1. Combined Inlet Shields: Combined inlet shields shall be
separate from the wet deck surface and removable to allow easy
access for inspection of the air/water interface at the air inlet side of
the equipment. Combined inlet shields shall prevent UV-light and
debris from entering the unit, as well as prevent water splash out
during fan cycling. They shall be constructed of maintenance free,
corrosion and UV resistant material.
I MT - B 20
I
M
T
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
6.0 Access
6.1. Access : Access doors for inspection of the internal components
of the tower shall be installed on the plenum above the drift
eliminators.
7.0 Sound
7.1 Sound Level: To maintain the quality of the local environment,
the maximum sound pressure levels (dB) measured 15 m from the
cooling tower operating at full fan speed shall not exceed the sound
levels detailed below.
Location 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 DB(A)
Discharge
Air Inlet
End
Back
Open Cooling Towers
VTL - B 1
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
VTL
.
Product Detail
VTL Open Cooling Towers ....................................................................... B2
Benefits ....................................................................................................... B4
Construction Details .................................................................................. B6
Custom Features and Options .................................................................. B7
Accessories ................................................................................................. B9
Engineering Data ...................................................................................... B11
Structural Support .................................................................................. B15
Engineering Specifications ..................................................................... B16
VTL - B 2
V
T
L
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
VTL Open Cooling Towers
Capacity
Single Cell Capacity:
4 90 l/s
General Description
Open Circuit Cooling Towers with centrifugal fans, deliver fully rated thermal performance over a
wide range of flow and temperature requirements. This type of cooling towers can be installed
indoors and can accommodate limited ceiling or enclosure heights. Cooling towers with centrifugal
fans minimise sound levels and installation costs, provide year round operating reliability, and
simplify maintenance requirements.
Cooling Towers provide an answer to the growing need to save water and energy and help protect
the environment by providing the highest system efficiency.
Key Features
Suitable for indoor and outdoor installations
Suitable for high temperature applications
Low sound
Single side air inlet
Low energy consumption
Low installed costs
Easy maintenance
Reliable year-round operation
Long service life
Suitable for locations with limited ceiling or enclosure heights and roof top installations
.
VTL - B 3
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
VTL - B 4
V
T
L
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Benefits
Installation and Application Flexibility
Indoor Installations Centrifugal fans can
overcome the static pressure imposed by
external ductwork, allowing this type of cooling
towers to be installed indoors.
High Temperature Applications A range of
wet deck and construction options are available
to accommodate entering water temperatures
of up to 65C.
Low Profile Models Motors and drive of low
profile units are adjacent to the casing section
to yield models suitable for use in height
sensitive installations.
Low Sound
Centrifugal Fan - Centrifugal fans have inherently low sound characteristics.
Single Side Air Inlet - Particularly sound-
sensitive areas can be accommodated by
facing the quiet side (back panel) to the sound-
sensitive direction.
Low Energy Consumption
Evaporative Cooling Equipment minimizes
the energy consumption of the entire system
because it provides lower operating
temperatures. The owner saves money while
conserving natural resources and reducing
environmental impact.
Low Installed Cost
Support All models mount directly on two
parallel I-beams (supplied by others) and ship
complete with motors and drives, factory-
installed and aligned.
Modular Design All models without intake or
discharge accessories ship in one piece to
minimize field installation time and lifting time.
Easy Maintenance
Internal Access - The interior of the unit is
easily accessible for adjusting the float valve,
cleaning the strainer or flushing the basin.
Low profile unit shown in contrast to a
standard unit
Modular Design
VTL - B 5
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Reliable Year-Round Operation
V-Belt Drive The fans, motor, and drive system are located outside of the moist discharge
airstream, protecting them from moisture, condensation and icing hence allowing a safe year-
round operation.
Long Service Life
Materials of Construction Various materials are available to meet the corrosion resistance,
unit operating life, and budgetary requirements of any project.
Note: For more information, please refer to the section Technical Resources, Materials of Construction.
The water level control is easily reached from
the access door
V-Belt Drive System for Series VL-units
VTL - B 6
V
T
L
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Construction Details
.
1. Heavy-Duty Construction
Z600 hot-dip galvanized steel panels
2. Fan Drive System
V-belt drive
Heavy-duty bearings and fan motor
3. Low sound Centrifugal Fan(s)
Quiet Operation
4. Water Distribution System
Plastic spray header and branches
Large orifice, non-clog nozzles
Grommetted for easy maintenance
5. BACount

Wet Deck Surface


Plastic material
Impervious to rot, decay and biological attack
Self extinguishing
High temperature wet deck option
6. Strainer
Anti-vortex design to prevent air entrainment
7. Access Door
Circular access door
8. Drift Eliminators
UV resistant non-corrosive material, impervious to
rot, decay and biological attack
Three distinct changes in air direction to reduce drift
loss significantly
Assembled in easy to handle sections, which can be
removed for access to the equipment interior
VTL - B 7
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Custom Features and Options
Construction Options
Standard Construction:
Steel panels and structural elements are constructed of Z600 heavy-gauge hot-dip galvanized
steel protected with the Baltiplus Corrosion Protection on the outside of the unit.
Optional BALTIBOND

Corrosion Protection System:


The BALTIBOND

Corrosion Protection System, a hybrid polymer coating used to extend


equipment life, is applied before assembly to all hot-dip galvanized steel components of the
unit.
Optional Stainless Steel Construction:
Steel panels and structural elements are constructed of stainless steel either type 304 or 316.
Optional Water-Contact Stainless Steel Cold Water Basin:
A cost-effective alternative to an all stainless steel unit. The critical components in the cold
water basin and the cold water basin itself are provided in stainless steel. The remaining
components are protected with the BALTIBOND

Corrosion Protection System.


Note: See section Technical Resources, Material of Construction for more details on the materials described above.
Fan Drive System
The fan drive system provides the cooling air necessary to reject heat from the system to the
atmosphere. Centrifugal fans, forwardly curved, are driven by matched V-belts with taper lock
sheaves.
Baltiguard

Drive System
The BALTIGUARD

Drive System consists of two standard single-speed fan motors and drive
assemblies. One drive assembly is sized for full speed and load, and the other is sized for
approximately 2/3 speed and consumes only 1/3 of the design kilowatt power. This configuration
allows the system to be operated like a two-speed motor, but with the reserve capacity of a standby
motor in the event of failure. As a minimum, approximately 70% capacity will be available from the
low kilowatt motor, even on a design wet-bulb day. Controls and wiring are the same, as those
required for a two-speed, two-winding motor. Significant energy savings are achieved when
operating at low speed during periods of reduced load and/or low wet-bulb temperatures.
Baltiguard

Drive System Unit with Sound Attenuation


VTL - B 8
V
T
L
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Low Sound Operation
The low sound levels generated by BAC Products
with centrifugal fans make them suitable for most
installations. For situations when one direction is
particularly sound sensitive, the unit can be
oriented so that the side opposite the air inlet
faces the sound-sensitive direction. Units with
centrifugal fans are also available with factory
designed, tested and rated sound attenuation for
both the air inlet and discharge.
Note: For more information, please refer to the section Technical
Resources, Sound Reduction Options.
Remote Sump Execution
The use of an auxiliary sump within a heated
space is the most satisfactory way to protect sump water from freezing. When the circulating pump
is shut off, all the water in the water distribution, in suspension and in the sump will drain freely to
the auxiliary sump.
Note: For detailed information on the calculation of the remote sump tank, please refer to the section "Technical Resources, Selection of
Remote Sump Tank".
High Temperature Wet Deck
If operation above 55C is anticipated, an optional high temperature wet deck material is available
which increases the maximum allowable entering water temperature to 65C.
Unit with Intake and Discharge Sound
Attenuation
VTL - B 9
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Accessories
Basin Heaters
Units exposed to below freezing ambient temperatures require protection to prevent freezing of the
water in the cold water basin when the unit is idle. Factory-installed heaters, which maintain the
water temperature at 4C, are a simple and inexpensive way of providing such protection. The
heater package includes the heaters, a thermostat and a low level cut out switch to protect the
heaters if the water level is too low. Standard electric heaters are selected for -18C ambient
temperature.
Electric Water Level Control Package
The electric water level control replaces the
standard mechanical make-up valve when a
more precise water level control is required. This
package consists of a float switch mounted in the
basin and a solenoid activated valve in the make-
up water line. The valve is slow closing to
minimize water hammer.
Extended Lubrication Lines
Extended lubrication lines with grease fittings are
available for lubrication of the fan shaft bearings.
Capacity Control Dampers
Modulating capacity control dampers are available to provide better leaving water temperature
control than can be obtained from fan cycling alone. Fan discharge dampers consist of a single
airfoil type damper blade located in the discharge of each fan housing. A standard electrical control
package for dampers is available from BAC.
Model No.
VTL
Heaters -18 C
(kW)
VTL 039-072 1 x 3
VTL 076 1 x 4
VTL 079 1 x 3
VTL 082 1 x 4
VTL 086-094 1 x 5
VTL 095 1 x 4
VTL 103-137 1 x 5
VTL 139-215 2 x 4
VTL 225 2 x 5
VTL 227 2 x 4
VTL 238-272 2 x 5
Electric Water Level Control Package
VTL - B 10
V
T
L
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Basin Sweeper Piping
Basin sweeper piping provides an effective method of preventing sediment from collecting in the
cold water basin of the unit. A complete piping system, including nozzles, is provided in the unit
basin for connection to side stream filtration equipment.
Note: For more information, please refer to the section "Technical Resources, Filtration".
Discharge Hoods
Discharge hoods reduce the risk of re-circulation in tight enclosures by increasing discharge air
velocity, and can be used to elevate the unit discharge above adjacent walls to comply with layout
guidelines.
VTL - B 11
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Engineering Data
REMARK: Do not use for construction. Refer to factory certified dimensions & weights. This brochure includes data
current at time of publication, which should be reconfirmed at the time of purchase. In the interest of product
improvement, specifications, weights and dimensions are subject to change without notice. Up-to-date engineering
data and more can be found at www.BaltimoreAircoil.com.
VTL 039 G - VTL 137 M
Model
VTL
Operating
Weight
(kg)
Shipping
Weight
(kg)
Heaviest
Section
(kg)
H
(mm)
L
1
(mm)
L
2
(mm)
W
(mm)
A
(mm)
Air Flow
(m
3
/s)
Fan
Motor
(kW)
Fluid
Inlet
ND (mm)
Fluid
Outlet
ND (mm)
Make Up
ND (mm)
VTL 039-G
VTL 045-H
VTL 052-H
VTL 059-H
VTL 059-J
VTL 066-J
VTL 072-K
VTL 076-J
VTL 079-K
1200
1230
1260
1290
1310
1320
1330
1720
1410
720
750
780
810
830
840
850
1010
930
720
750
780
810
830
840
850
1010
930
1560
1560
1785
1990
1785
1990
1990
1990
2480
3350
3350
3350
3350
3350
3350
3350
4560
3350
1820
1820
1820
1820
1820
1820
1820
2730
1820
1250
1250
1250
1250
1250
1250
1250
1250
1250
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
105
75
7,0
8,0
7,7
7,3
8,6
8,1
8,8
9,7
8,3
(1x) 2,2
(1x) 4,0
(1x) 4,0
(1x) 4,0
(1x) 5,5
(1x) 5,5
(1x) 7,5
(1x) 5,5
(1x) 7,5
(1x) 100
(1x) 100
(1x) 100
(1x) 100
(1x) 100
(1x) 100
(1x) 100
(1x) 150
(1x) 100
(1x) 100
(1x) 100
(1x) 100
(1x) 100
(1x) 100
(1x) 100
(1x) 100
(1x) 150
(1x) 100
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
VTL 082-K
VTL 086-L
VTL 094-M
VTL 095-K
VTL 103-K
VTL 116-L
VTL 126-L
VTL 126-M
VTL 137-M
1740
2050
2060
1850
2150
2180
2320
2190
2330
1030
1120
1130
1140
1220
1250
1390
1260
1400
1030
1120
1130
1140
1220
1250
1390
1260
1400
1990
1560
1560
2480
1990
1990
2480
1990
2480
4560
5480
5480
4560
5480
5480
5480
5480
5480
2730
3650
3650
2730
3650
3650
3650
3650
3650
1250
1250
1250
1250
1250
1250
1250
1250
1250
105
105
105
105
105
105
105
105
105
10,6
14,0
15,4
10,0
11,8
13,3
12,8
14,5
13,6
(1x) 7,5
(1x) 11,0
(1x) 15,0
(1x) 7,5
(1x) 7,5
(1x) 11,0
(1x) 11,0
(1x) 15,0
(1x) 15,0
(1x) 150
(1x) 150
(1x) 150
(1x) 150
(1x) 150
(1x) 150
(1x) 150
(1x) 150
(1x) 150
(1x) 150
(1x) 150
(1x) 150
(1x) 150
(1x) 150
(1x) 150
(1x) 150
(1x) 150
(1x) 150
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
1. Water Inlet; 2. Water Outlet; 3. Access Door; 4. Make up; 5. Overflow ND50; 6. Drain ND50; 7. Fan Motor. Overflow connection is 80 mm on
models VTL 086-L, VTL-094-M and VTL 103-K through VTL 137-M.
VTL - B 12
V
T
L
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
VTL 139 L - VTL 272 P

General Notes
1. All connections 100 mm and smaller are MPT. Connections larger
than 100 mm are bevelled-for-welding.
2. Fan kW is at 0 Pa ESP. To operate against external static pressure
up to 125 Pa, consult your local BAC Balticare Representative for
size and location.
3. Make up, overflow, suction, drain connections and access door
can be provided on side opposite to that shown; consult your BAC
representative.
4. Unit height is indicative, for precise value refer to certified print.
5. Shipping/operating weights indicated are for units without
accessories such as sound attenuators, discharge hoods, etc.
Consult factory certified prints to obtain weight additions and the
heaviest section to be lifted.
Model
VTL
Operating
Weight
(kg)
Shipping
Weight
(kg)
Heaviest
Section
(kg)
H
(mm)
L
1
(mm)
L
2
(mm)
W
(mm)
A
(mm)
Air Flow
(m
3
/s)
Fan
Motor
(kW)
Fluid
Inlet
ND (mm)
Fluid
Outlet
ND (mm)
Make Up
ND (mm)
VTL 139-L
VTL 152-M
VTL 171-L
VTL 185-M
VTL 198-N
VTL 209-O
VTL 215-N
VTL 225-O
VTL 227-O
VTL 238-N
VTL 245-P
VTL 272-P
3000
3010
3100
3170
3190
3200
3380
4000
3400
4110
4080
4310
1560
1570
1670
1740
1760
1770
1950
2080
1970
2210
2180
2410
1560
1570
1670
1740
1760
1770
1950
2080
1970
2210
2180
2410
1560
1560
1990
1990
1990
1990
2480
1990
2480
2480
1990
2480
4560
4560
4560
4560
4560
4560
4560
5480
4560
5480
5480
5480
2730
2730
2730
2730
2730
2730
2730
3650
2730
3650
3650
3650
2400
2400
2400
2400
2400
2400
2400
2400
2400
2400
2400
2400
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
19,9
21,6
18,8
20,4
21,8
23,0
20,8
25,5
22,0
23,4
27,8
26,8
(1x) 11,0
(1x) 15,0
(1x) 11,0
(1x) 15,0
(1x) 18,5
(1x) 22,0
(1x) 18,5
(1x) 22,0
(1x) 22,0
(1x) 18,5
(1x) 30,0
(1x) 30,0
(1x) 200
(1x) 200
(1x) 200
(1x) 200
(1x) 200
(1x) 200
(1x) 200
(1x) 200
(1x) 200
(1x) 200
(1x) 200
(1x) 200
(1x) 200
(1x) 200
(1x) 200
(1x) 200
(1x) 200
(1x) 200
(1x) 200
(1x) 200
(1x) 200
(1x) 200
(1x) 200
(1x) 200
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
1. Water Inlet; 2. Water Outlet; 3. Access Door; 4. Make up; 5. Overflow ND 80; 6. Drain ND 50; 7. Fan Motor.
VTL - B 13
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Sound Attenuation
HS Horizontal Intake Sound Attenuation
HD Horizontal Intake Sound Attenuation
1.Discharge attenuator, 2. Access Door, 3. Intake Attenuator; H & W: unit height and width (see engineering data).
1.Discharge attenuator, 2. Access Door, 3. Intake Attenuator; H & W: unit height and width (see engineering data).
VTL - B 14
V
T
L
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
VS Vertical Intake Sound Attenuation
Note: All VL-units with HS, VS or HD attenuators ship in 2 pieces.
Remote Sump Data
Refer to the "Technical Resources" section "Selection of Remote Sump" for Remote Sump Data.
Model No
VTL
Dimensions (mm) Weight (kg)
L2 L1 Intake Attenuator Discharge Attenuator Total
HS HD VS HS,HD,VS HS HD HS HD HS HD VS
VTL039 G - 079 K 2390 3125 2010 1820 460 655 215 235 675 890 725
VTL076 J - 095 K 2640 3375 2010 2730 465 660 295 315 760 975 830
VTL086 L - 137 M 2640 3375 2010 3650 465 660 365 385 830 1045 915
VTL139 L - 227 O 2640 3375 2010 2730 665 980 465 500 1130 1480 1205
VTL225 O - 272 P 2640 3375 2010 3650 665 980 565 605 1230 1585 1310
1.Discharge attenuator, 2. Access Door, 3. Intake Attenuator, 4. Plenum; H & W: unit height and width (see engineering data).
VTL - B 15
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Structural Support
REMARK: Do not use for construction. Refer to factory certified dimensions & weights. This brochure includes data
current at time of publication, which should be reconfirmed at the time of purchase. In the interest of product
improvement, specifications, weights and dimensions are subject to change without notice. Up-to-date engineering
data and more can be found at www.BaltimoreAircoil.com.
The recommended support arrangement for units consists of parallel I-beams running the full length of the unit, spaced as shown in the following
drawing. Besides providing adequate support, the steel also serves to raise the unit above any solid foundation to ensure access to the bottom
of the unit. To support units in an alternate steel support arrangement, consult your BAC Balticare Representative.
Units with and without Sound Attenuation
Notes:
1. The recommended support arrangement for these units consists
of two parallel I-beams extending the full length of the unit.
Supports and anchor bolts are to be designed and furnished by
others.
2. All supporting beams are to be flush and level at top and must be
oriented relative to gage line as shown.
3. Recommended design loads for each unit support beam should
be 70% of the total unit operating weight applied as a uniform load
to each of the unit beams. Beams should be designed in
accordance with standard structural practice. For the maximum
allowable deflection of beams under the unit refer to above table.
4. All mounting holes have a diameter of 22 mm at the locations
shown.
5. If vibration isolators are used, a rail or channel must be provided
between the unit and the isolators to provide continuous unit
support. Additionally the support beams must be designed to
accommodate the overall length and mounting hole location of the
isolators that may differ from those of the unit. Refer to vibration
isolator drawings for these data.
VTL
Cooling Tower
Model No.
A
(mm)
B
(mm)
Maximum Allowable
Beam Deflection
(mm)
039-G - 072K
079-K
2426 1194 10
076-J
082-K
095-K
3334 1194 13
086-L & 094-M
103-K - 137-M
4253 1194 13
139-L - 215-N
227-O
3334 2344 13
225-O
238-N - 272-P
4253 2344 13
1. (4) 22 mm mounting holes; 2. Support Beams; 3. Fan Side; 4. Outline of Unit; 5. Outline of Attenuator HS (optional); 6. Outline of
Attenuator HD (optional).
VTL - B 16
V
T
L
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Engineering Specifications
1.0 Cooling Tower
1.1 General: Furnish and install _____ factory-assembled, forced-
draft, centrifugal fan, counter flow cooling tower(s) with vertical air
discharge, conforming in all aspects to the specifications, schedules
and as shown on the plans. Overall dimensions shall not exceed
approximately _____ mm long x ______ mm wide x _____ mm high.
The total connected fan power shall not exceed _____ kW. The
cooling tower(s) shall be Baltimore Aircoil Model ____________.
1.2 Thermal Capacity: The cooling tower(s) shall be warranted by
the manufacturer to cool _____ l/s of water from ______ C to
_____C at _____C entering wet-bulb temperature.
1.3 Corrosion Resistant Construction (standard): Unless
otherwise noted in this specification, all steel panels and structural
members shall be constructed of heavy-gauge Z600 metric hot-dip
galvanized steel with all edges given a protective coating of zinc-rich
compound and the exterior protected with the BALTIPLUS Protection.
(Alternate 1.3) Corrosion Resistant Construction (optional):
Unless otherwise noted in this specification, all steel panels and
structural members shall be protected with the BALTIBOND


Corrosion Protection System. The system shall consist of Z600 metric
hot-dip galvanized steel prepared in a four-step (clean, pre-treat,
rinse, dry) process with an electrostatically sprayed, thermosetting,
hybrid polymer fuse-bonded to the substrate during a thermally
activated curing stage and monitored by a 23-step quality assurance
program.
(Alternate 1.3) Corrosion Resistant Construction (optional):
Unless otherwise noted in this specification, all steel panels and
structural members shall be constructed of Type 304 or 316 stainless
steel and assembled with stainless steel nut and bolt fasteners.
1.4 Quality Assurance: The cooling tower manufacturer shall have
a Management System certified by an accredited registrar as
complying with the requirements of ISO-9001:2000 to ensure
consistent quality of products and services.
1.5 Warranty: The manufacturers standard equipment warranty
shall be for a period of not less than one year from date of startup or
eighteen months from date of shipment, whichever occurs first.
2.0 Construction Details
2.1 Structure: The unit shall be constructed of heavy-gauge steel
utilizing double-brake flanges for maximum strength and rigidity and
reliable sealing of watertight joints. The unit shall be of unitary design
to minimize rigging requirements. The fan(s) and fan drive system,
including the fan motor, shall be factory mounted and aligned and
located in the dry entering air stream to ensure reliable operation and
ease of maintenance.
2.2 Heat Transfer Section: The heat transfer sections(s) shall
consist of a wet deck surface, spray water distribution system and drift
eliminators arranged for optimal thermal performance with minimal
drift.
2.3 Wet Deck Surface: The wet deck surface shall be formed from
self-extinguishing plastic material and shall be impervious to rot,
decay, and fungus or biological attack. The wet deck surface shall be
manufactured and performance tested by the cooling tower
manufacturer to assure single source responsibility and control of the
final product.
2.4 Water Distribution System: Water shall be distributed evenly
over the wet deck surface by a water distribution system consisting of
a header and spray branches of plastic pipe with large orifice, non-
clog plastic distribution nozzles. The branches and spray nozzles
shall be held in place by snap-in rubber grommets, allowing quick
removal of individual nozzles or complete branches for cleaning or
flushing.
2.5 Cold Water Basin: The cold water basin shall be provided with
large area lift out strainers with perforated openings sized smaller
than the water distribution system nozzles and an anti-vortexing
device to prevent air entrainment. The strainer and anti-vortexing
device shall be constructed of the same material as the basin to
prevent dissimilar metal corrosion. Standard basin accessories shall
include a brass make-up valve with large diameter polystyrene filled
plastic float for easy adjustment of the operating water level.
(Alternate2.5) Cold Water Basin: The cold water basin shall be
constructed of heavy-gauge Type 304 or 316 stainless steel panels
and structural members up to the heat transfer section/basin joint.
The basin shall be provided with large area lift out strainers with
perforated openings sized smaller than the water distribution system
nozzles and an anti-vortexing device to prevent air entrainment. The
strainer and anti-vortexing device shall be constructed of the same
material as the basin to prevent dissimilar metal corrosion. Standard
basin accessories shall include a brass make-up valve with large
diameter polystyrene filled plastic float for easy adjustment of the
operating water level.
3.0 Mechanical Equipment
3.1 Fan(s): Fan(s) shall be dynamically balanced, forwardly curved,
centrifugal type selected to provide optimum thermal performance
with minimal sound levels. Fan housings shall have curved inlet rings
for efficient air entry and four-sided rectangular discharge cowls shall
extend into the basin to increase fan efficiency and prevent water
from splashing into the fans.
3.2 Bearings: Fan(s) and shaft(s) shall be supported by heavy-duty,
self-aligning, relubricatable bearings with cast iron housings,
designed for a minimum L10 life of 40 000 hours (280 000 Hr.
Average. Life).
3.3 Fan Drive: The fan(s) shall be driven by matched V-belts with
taper lock sheaves. Motor shall be located on a heavy-duty motor
base, adjustable by a single threaded bolt-and-nut arrangement.
Removable steel screens or panels shall protect the fan drive and all
moving parts.
3.4 Fan Motor: Furnish _____ kW, ______ RPM Totally Enclosed,
Fan Cooled (TEFC), squirrel cage, ball bearing type fan motors
suitable for outdoor service. Motor(s) shall be suitable for ________
volt, ___ hertz, and __ phase electrical service.
3.5 BALTIGUARD Fan System (optional): Two-single speed fan
motors, one sized for full speed and load, the other sized for 2/3
speed and approximately 1/3 of full load kW shall be provided in each
cell for capacity control and stand-by protection from drive or motor
failure. Two-speed motor(s) are not an acceptable alternative.
VTL - B 17
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
4.0 Drift Eliminators
4.1 Drift Eliminators: Eliminators shall be constructed of specially
formulated plastic material and be removable in easily handled
sections. They shall have a minimum of three changes in air
direction.
5.0 Access
5.1 Basin Access: Circular access doors shall be provided for easy
access to the make-up water assembly and suction strainer for
routine maintenance.
6.0 Sound
6.1 Sound Level: To maintain the quality of the local environment,
the maximum sound pressure levels (dB) measured 15 m from the
cooling tower operating at full fan speed shall not exceed the sound
levels detailed below.
Location 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 dB(A)
Discharge
Air Inlet
End
Back
Open Cooling Towers
VXT - B 1
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
VXT
Product Detail
VXT Open Cooling Tower ........................................................................ B2
Benefits ....................................................................................................... B4
Construction Details .................................................................................. B6
Custom Features and Options .................................................................. B8
Accessories ............................................................................................... B10
Engineering Data ..................................................................................... B12
Structural Support .................................................................................. B19
Engineering Specifications ..................................................................... B22
VXT - B 2
V
X
T
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
VXT Open Cooling Tower
Capacity
Single Cell Capacity:
From 1,6 l/s to 1230 l/s
General Description
Open Circuit Cooling Towers with centrifugal fans, deliver fully rated thermal performance over a
wide range of flow and temperature requirements. This type of cooling towers can be installed
indoors and can accommodate limited ceiling or enclosure heights. Cooling towers with centrifugal
fans minimise sound levels and installation costs, provide year round operating reliability, and
simplify maintenance requirements.
Cooling Towers provide an answer to the growing need to save water and energy and help protect
the environment by providing the highest system efficiency.
Key Features
Suitable for indoor and outdoor installations
Suitable for high temperature applications
Low sound
Single side air inlet
Low energy consumption
Low installed cost
Easy maintenance
Reliable year-round operation
Long service life
VXT - B 3
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
VXT - B 4
V
X
T
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Benefits
Installation and Application Flexibility
Indoor Installations Centrifugal fans can overcome the static pressure imposed by external
ductwork, allowing this type of cooling towers to be installed indoors.
High Temperature Applications A range of wet deck and construction options are available
to accommodate entering water temperatures of up to 65C.
Low Sound
Centrifugal Fan - Centrifugal fans have inherently low sound characteristics.
Single Side Air Inlet - Particularly sound-sensitive areas can be accommodated by facing the
quiet side (back panel) to the sound-sensitive direction.
Low Energy Consumption
Evaporative Cooling Equipment minimizes the energy consumption of the entire system
because it provides lower operating temperatures. The owner saves money while conserving
natural resources and reducing environmental impact.
Low Installed Cost
Support All models mount directly on two parallel I-beams (supplied by others) and ship
complete with motors and drives, factory-installed and aligned.
Modular Design Large models ship in multiple sections to minimize the size and weight of the
heaviest lift, allowing for the use of smaller, less costly cranes.
Easy Maintenance
Internal Access - The interior of the unit is easily accessible for adjusting the float valve,
cleaning the strainer or flushing the basin.
Reliable Year-Round Operation
V-Belt Drive The fans, motor, and drive system are located outside of the moist discharge
airstream, protecting them from moisture, condensation and icing hence allowing a safe year-
round operation.
The water level control is easily reached from
the access door.
External V-belt drive system (shown here with
panel removed)
VXT - B 5
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Long Service Life
Materials of Construction Various materials are available to meet the corrosion resistance,
unit operating life, and budgetary requirements of any project.
Note: For more information, please refer to the section Technical Resources, Materials of Construction.
Low Ocean Freight Cost
Size - C models are designed to fit in standard
closed box containers to minimize ocean
freight costs. All containerized models are
shipped in a bottom fan section and a top coil
section, which fit together into a 40' box
container, no crating required.
In order to fit the bottom fan section through the
doors of the container, the fan enclosures are
shipped loose inside the water basin area and
are easily mounted on site.
C Model in Dry Van Container Fan Enclosures are shipped loose
VXT - B 6
V
X
T
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Construction Details
Upper Section
Lower Section
VXT - B 7
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
1. Heavy Duty Construction
Z600 hot-dip galvanized steel panels
2. Fan Drive System
V-belt drive
Heavy-duty bearings and fan motor
3. Centrifugal Fan(s)
Quiet Operation
4. Water Distribution System
Plastic spray header and branches
Large orifice, non-clog nozzles
Grommetted for easy maintenance
5. BACount Wet Deck Surface
Plastic material
Impervious to rot, decay and biological attack
Self extinguishing
High temperature wet deck option
6. Strainer
Anti-vortex design to prevent air entrainment
7. Access Door
Circular access door
8. Drift Eliminators
UV resistant non-corrosive material, impervious to rot, decay and biological attack
Three distinct changes in air direction to reduce drift loss significantly
Assembled in easy to handle sections, which can be removed for access to the equipment
interior
VXT - B 8
V
X
T
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Custom Features and Options
Construction Options
Standard Construction:
Steel panels and structural elements are
constructed of Z600 heavy-gauge hot-dip
galvanized steel protected with the Baltiplus
Corrosion Protection on the outside of the unit.
Optional BALTIBOND

Corrosion
Protection System:
The BALTIBOND

Corrosion Protection
System, a hybrid polymer coating used to
extend equipment life, is applied before
assembly to all hot-dip galvanized steel
components of the unit.
Optional Stainless Steel Construction:
Steel panels and structural elements are constructed of stainless steel either type 304 or 316.
Optional Water-Contact Stainless Steel Cold Water Basin:
A cost-effective alternative to an all stainless steel unit. The critical components in the cold
water basin and the cold water basin itself are provided in stainless steel. The remaining
components are protected with the BALTIBOND

Corrosion Protection System.


Note: See section Technical Resources, Material of Construction for more details on the materials described above.
Fan Drive System
The fan drive system provides the cooling air necessary to reject heat from the system to the
atmosphere. Centrifugal fans, forwardly curved, are driven by matched V-belts with taper lock
sheaves.
The Baltiguard

Drive System
The BALTIGUARD

Drive System consists of two


standard single-speed fan motors and drive
assemblies. One drive assembly is sized for full
speed and load, and the other is sized for
approximately 2/3 speed and consumes only 1/3
of the design kilowatt power. This configuration
allows the system to be operated like a two-speed
motor, but with the reserve capacity of a standby
motor in the event of failure. As a minimum,
approximately 70% capacity will be available from
the low kilowatt motor, even on a design wet-bulb
day. Controls and wiring are the same, as those
required for a two-speed, two-winding motor.
Significant energy savings are achieved when
operating at low speed during periods of reduced load and/or low wet-bulb temperatures.
Unit with Stainless Steel Option
Baltiguard

Drive System
VXT - B 9
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Low Sound Operation
The low sound levels generated by BAC Products
with centrifugal fans make them suitable for most
installations. For situations when one direction is
particularly sound sensitive, the unit can be
oriented so that the side opposite the air inlet
faces the sound-sensitive direction. Units with
centrifugal fans are also available with factory
designed, tested and rated sound attenuation for
both the air inlet and discharge.
Note: For more information, please refer to the section Technical
Resources, Sound Reduction Options.
Remote Sump Execution
The use of an auxiliary sump within a heated
space is the most satisfactory way to protect sump water from freezing. When the circulating pump
is shut off, all the water in the water distribution, in suspension and in the sump will drain freely to
the auxiliary sump.
Note: For detailed information on the calculation of the remote sump tank, please refer to the section "Technical Resources, Selection of
Remote Sump Tank".
High Temperature Wet Deck
If operation above 55C is anticipated, an optional high temperature wet deck material is available
which increases the maximum allowable entering water temperature to 65C.
Units with Intake and Discharge Sound
Attenuation
VXT - B 10
V
X
T
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Accessories
Ladder, Safety Cage and Handrails
In the event the owner requires easy access to
the top of the unit, the unit can be furnished with
ladders extending from the base of the unit to the
top, as well as safety cages, and handrail
packages.
Note: When these access options are employed, the unit must be
equipped with steel drift eliminators.
Basin Heaters
Units exposed to below freezing ambient
temperatures require protection to prevent
freezing of the water in the cold water basin when
the unit is idle. Factory-installed heaters, which
maintain the water temperature at 4C, are a
simple and inexpensive way of providing such protection. The heater package includes the
heaters, a thermostat and a low level cut out switch to protect the heaters if the water level is too
low. Standard electric heaters are selected for -18C ambient temperature.
Model No.
VXT
Heater -18 C
(kW)
VXT 10-25 1 x 1,5
VXT 30-55 1 x 1,5
VXT 65-85 1 x 2,5
VXT 95-135 1 x 3
VXT 150-185 1 x 4
VXT N215-N265 1 x 6
VXT N310-N395 2 x 4
VXT N430-N535 2 x 6
VXT C215-C265 1 x 6
VXT C310-C395 2 x 4
VXT C430-C535 2 x 6
VXT S220-S320 1 x 6
VXT S345-S470 2 x 4
VXT S530-S640 2 x 6
VXT S690-S940 4 x 4
VXT 315-400 1 x 6
VXT 470-600 2 x 5
VXT 630-800 2 x 6
VXT 870-1200 4 x 5
Ladder and Safety Cage, Handrails around top
of unit
VXT - B 11
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Electric Water Level Control Package
The electric water level control replaces the
standard mechanical make-up valve when a
more precise water level control is required. This
package consists of a float switch mounted in the
basin and a solenoid activated valve in the make-
up water line. The valve is slow closing to
minimize water hammer.
Extended Lubrication Lines
Extended lubrication lines with grease fittings are
available for lubrication of the fan shaft bearings.
Capacity Control Dampers
Modulating capacity control dampers are
available to provide better leaving water
temperature control than can be obtained from
fan cycling alone. Fan discharge dampers consist
of a single airfoil type damper blade located in the
discharge of each fan housing. A standard
electrical control package for dampers is
available from BAC.
Solid Bottom Panels
Factory-installed bottom panels are required when intake air is ducted to the unit.
Discharge Hoods
Discharge hoods reduce the risk of re-circulation in tight enclosures by increasing discharge air
velocity, and can be used to elevate the unit discharge above adjacent walls to comply with layout
guidelines.
Basin Sweeper Piping
Basin sweeper piping provides an effective
method of preventing sediment from collecting in
the cold water basin of the unit. A complete piping
system, including nozzles, is provided in the unit
basin for connection to side stream filtration
equipment.
Note: For more information, please refer to the section "Technical
Resources, Filtration".
Electric Water Level Control Package
Extended Lubrication Lines
Basin Sweeper Piping
VXT - B 12
V
X
T
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Engineering Data
REMARK: Do not use for construction. Refer to factory certified dimensions & weights. This brochure includes data
current at time of publication, which should be reconfirmed at the time of purchase. In the interest of product
improvement, specifications, weights and dimensions are subject to change without notice. Up-to-date engineering
data and more can be found at www.BaltimoreAircoil.com.
VXT 10 - 185
On models VXT-10 to VXT-135 sufficient space must be provided on the back of the unit for entry to access doors located on side opposite air
entry side.
* Units ship in one piece, ** Casing is heaviest section
Model
VXT
Operating
Weight
(kg)
Shipping
Weight
(kg)
Heaviest
Section
(kg)
H
(mm)
L
(mm)
W
(mm)
Air Flow
(m
3
/s)
Fan Motor
(kW)
Fluid Inlet
ND (mm)
Fluid Outlet
ND (mm)
Make Up
ND (mm)
VXT 010
VXT 015
VXT 020
VXT 025
405
410
425
435
325
330
350
360
325*
330*
350*
360*
2036
2036
2036
2036
914
914
914
914
1207
1207
1207
1207
1,79
1,94
2,19
2,50
(1x) 0,75
(1x) 1,1
(1x) 1,5
(1x) 2,2
(1x) 80
(1x) 80
(1x) 80
(1x) 80
(1x) 80
(1x) 80
(1x) 80
(1x) 80
25
25
25
25
VXT 030
VXT 040
VXT 045
VXT 055
655
685
695
780
490
520
530
615
490*
520*
530*
440
2036
2036
2036
2506
1829
1829
1829
1829
1207
1207
1207
1207
3,74
4,48
4,97
5,16
(1x) 1,5
(1x) 2,2
(1x) 4,0
(1x) 5,5
(1x) 80
(1x) 80
(1x) 80
(1x) 80
(1x) 80
(1x) 80
(1x) 80
(1x) 80
25
25
25
25
VXT 065
VXT 070
VXT 075
VXT 085
1050
1075
1135
1140
715
740
805
810
715*
740*
540
540
2036
2220
2506
2506
2737
2737
2737
2737
1207
1207
1207
1207
7,22
8,12
8,02
8,83
(1x) 5,5
(1x) 5,5
(1x) 5,5
(1x) 7,5
(1x) 100
(1x) 100
(1x) 100
(1x) 100
(1x) 100
(1x) 100
(1x) 100
(1x) 100
25
25
25
25
VXT 095
VXT 105
VXT 120
VXT 135
1255
1445
1475
1665
890
1080
1110
1300
890*
575
605
700
2036
2675
2675
3350
3658
3658
3658
3658
1207
1207
1207
1207
11,04
10,90
12,58
12,46
(1x) 7,5
(1x) 7,5
(1x) 11
(1x) 11
(1x) 100
(1x) 100
(1x) 100
(1x) 100
(1x) 100
(1x) 100
(1x) 100
(1x) 100
25
25
25
25
VXT 150
VXT 165
VXT 185
2215
2360
2565
1590
1740
1940
915
915
980**
3128
3585
4042
3645
3645
3645
1438
1438
1438
15,79
15,53
16,94
(1x) 15
(1x) 15
(1x) 18,5
(1x) 150
(1x) 150
(1x) 150
(1x) 150
(1x) 150
(1x) 150
25
25
25
1. Drain ND 50; 2. Water Outlet; 3. Overflow ND50 (Overflow VXT 150 185: ND80); 4. Make Up ND25; 5.Water Inlet; 6.Access Door.
VXT - B 13
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
VXT N215 - N535
Model
VXT
Operating
Weight
(kg)
Shipping
Weight
(kg)
Heaviest
Section
(kg)
H
(mm)
L
(mm)
W
(mm)
Air Flow
(m
3
/s)
Fan Motor
(kW)
Fluid Inlet
ND (mm)
Fluid Outlet
ND (mm)
Make Up
ND (mm)
VXT N215
VXT N240
VXT N265
3640
3850
4080
2100
2310
2540
1395
1395
1435
3112
3569
4026
3550
3550
3550
2397
2397
2397
23,49
23,33
24,26
(1x) 22
(1x) 22
(1x) 30
(1x) 150
(1x) 150
(1x) 150
(1x) 200
(1x) 200
(1x) 200
50
50
50
VXT N310
VXT N345
VXT N370
VXT N395
5300
5580
5860
5890
3060
3340
3620
3650
1875
1875
1875
1895
3112
3569
4026
4026
5385
5385
5385
5385
2397
2397
2397
2397
34,12
33,82
33,60
36,15
(1x) 30
(1x) 30
(1x) 30
(1x) 37
(1x) 200
(1x) 200
(1x) 200
(1x) 200
(1x) 200
(1x) 200
(1x) 200
(1x) 200
50
50
50
50
VXT N430
VXT N480
VXT N510
VXT N535
7330
7730
8110
8200
4190
4590
4980
5060
2758
2758
2758
2839
3112
3569
4026
4026
7226
7226
7226
7226
2397
2397
2397
2397
46,98
46,65
46,44
48,94
(2x) 22
(2x) 22
(2x) 22
(2x) 30
(2x) 150
(2x) 150
(2x) 150
(2x) 150
(1x) 250
(1x) 250
(1x) 250
(1x) 250
50
50
50
50
1. Drain ND 50; 2. Water Outlet; 3. Overflow ND 80; 4. Make Up ND50; 5.Water Inlet; 6.Access Door.
VXT - B 14
V
X
T
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
VXT C215 - C535
Model
VXT-C
Operating
Weight
(kg)
Shipping
Weight
(kg)
Heaviest
Section
(kg)
H
(mm)
L
(mm)
W
(mm)
Air Flow
(m
3
/s)
Fan Motor
(kW)
Fluid Inlet
ND (mm)
Fluid Outlet
ND (mm)
Make Up
ND (mm)
VXT C215
VXT C240
VXT C265
4035
4225
4420
2335
2535
2750
1620
1620
1645
3112
3569
4026
3550
3550
3550
2245
2245
2245
23,49
23,33
24,26
(1x) 22
(1x) 22
(1x) 30
(1x) 150
(1x) 150
(1x) 150
(1x) 200
(1x) 200
(1x) 200
50
50
50
VXT C310
VXT C345
VXT C370
VXT C395
5960
6230
6490
6615
3435
3725
4010
4090
2260
2260
2260
2345
3112
3569
4026
4026
5385
5385
5385
5385
2245
2245
2245
2245
34,12
33,82
33,60
36,15
(1x) 30
(1x) 30
(1x) 30
(1x) 37
(1x) 200
(1x) 200
(1x) 200
(1x) 200
(1x) 200
(1x) 200
(1x) 200
(1x) 200
50
50
50
50
VXT C430
VXT C480
VXT C510
VXT C535
8120
8520
8900
8980
4650
5050
5480
5560
1620
1620
1620
1645
3112
3569
4026
4026
7226
7226
7226
7226
2245
2245
2245
2245
46,98
46,65
46,44
48,94
(2x) 22
(2x) 22
(2x) 22
(2x) 30
(2x) 150
(2x) 150
(2x) 150
(2x) 150
(1x) 250
(1x) 250
(1x) 250
(1x) 250
50
50
50
50
1. Drain ND 50; 2. Water Outlet; 3. Overflow ND 80; 4. Make Up ND50; 5. Water Inlet; 6. Access Door
VXT - B 15
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
VXT S220 - S940
Model
VXT-S
Operating
Weight
(kg)
Shipping
Weight
(kg)
Heaviest
Section
(kg)
H
(mm)
L
(mm)
W
(mm)
Air Flow
(m
3
/s)
Fan Motor
(kW)
Fluid Inlet
ND (mm)
Fluid Outlet
ND (mm)
Make Up
ND (mm)
VXT S220
VXT S240
VXT S265
VXT S300
VXT S320
4120
4140
4170
4400
4760
2380
2400
2430
2660
3020
1450
1470
1500
1500
1540
3479
3479
3479
4012
4437
3550
3550
3550
3550
3550
2397
2397
2397
2397
2397
24,8
26,3
29,2
29,0
29,1
(1x) 18,5
(1x) 22
(1x) 30
(1x) 30
(1x) 37
(1x) 200
(1x) 200
(1x) 200
(1x) 200
(1x) 200
(1x) 200
(1x) 200
(1x) 200
(1x) 200
(1x) 200
50
50
50
50
50
VXT S345
VXT S370
VXT S415
VXT S445
VXT S470
6030
6070
6430
6880
6930
3380
3420
3770
4220
4270
2050
2090
2090
2130
2140
3479
3479
4012
4437
4437
5385
5385
5385
5385
5385
2397
2397
2397
2397
2397
38,2
41,0
40,6
40,4
43,2
(1x) 30
(1x) 37
(1x) 37
(1x) 37
(1x) 45
(1x) 200
(1x) 200
(1x) 200
(1x) 200
(1x) 200
(1x) 200
(1x) 200
(1x) 200
(1x) 200
(1x) 200
50
50
50
50
50
VXT S530
VXT S600
VXT S640
8390
8860
9570
4850
5310
6030
2990
2990
3070
3479
4012
4437
7226
7226
7226
2397
2397
2397
58,4
58,0
58,2
(2x) 30
(2x) 30
(2x) 37
(2x) 200
(2x) 200
(2x) 200
(1x) 250
(1x) 250
(1x) 250
50
50
50
VXT S690
VXT S740
VXT S830
VXT S890
VXT S940
12110
12190
12910
13810
13910
6750
6830
7530
8430
8530
4090
4170
4170
4260
4270
3479
3479
4012
4437
4437
10903
10903
10903
10903
10903
2397
2397
2397
2397
2397
76,4
82,0
81,2
80,8
86,4
(2x) 30
(2x) 37
(2x) 37
(2x) 37
(2x) 45
(2x) 200
(2x) 200
(2x) 200
(2x) 200
(2x) 200
(2x) 200
(2x) 200
(2x) 200
(2x) 200
(2x) 200
50
50
50
50
50
1. Drain ND 50; 2. Water Outlet; 3. Overflow ND 80; 4. Make Up ND50; 5. Water Inlet; 6. Access Door
VXT - B 16
V
X
T
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
VXT 315 - 1200
General Notes
1. All connections 100 mm and smaller are MPT. Connections 150
mm and larger are bevelled-for-welding.
2. Fan kW is at 0 Pa ESP. To operate against external static pressure
up to 125 Pa, increase each fan motor one size.
3. The drawings show the standard right hand arrangement, which
has the air inlet side on the right when facing the connection end.
Left hand arrangement can be furnished by special order.
4. Water outlet, overflow and make-up are always located on the
same end of the unit. For units with two water outlet connections
an additional overflow connection will be installed on the other end
of the unit.
Model
VXT
Operating
Weight
(kg)
Shipping
Weight
(kg)
Heaviest
Section
(kg)
H
(mm)
L
(mm)
W
(mm)
Air Flow
(m
3
/s)
Fan Motor
(kW)
Fluid Inlet
ND (mm)
Fluid Outlet
ND (mm)
Make Up
ND (mm)
VXT 315
VXT 350
VXT 375
VXT 400
4905
5195
5505
5535
2960
3260
3560
3590
1945
1945
1945
1970
4030
4487
4944
4944
3550
3550
3550
3550
3000
3000
3000
3000
34,55
34,31
34,10
36,62
(1x) 30
(1x) 30
(1x) 30
(1x) 37
(1x) 200
(1x) 200
(1x) 200
(1x) 200
(1x) 200
(1x) 200
(1x) 200
(1x) 200
50
50
50
50
VXT 470
VXT 525
VXT 560
VXT 600
7305
7750
8245
8325
4360
4810
5290
5370
2770
2770
2770
2845
4030
4487
4944
4944
5388
5388
5388
5388
3000
3000
3000
3000
51,82
51,44
50,92
54,93
(2x) 22
(2x) 22
(2x) 22
(2x) 30
(1x) 250
(1x) 250
(1x) 250
(1x) 250
(1x) 250
(1x) 250
(1x) 250
(1x) 250
50
50
50
50
VXT 630
VXT 700
VXT 750
VXT 800
9805
10385
11005
11055
5900
6490
7110
7160
3885
3885
3885
3925
4030
4487
4944
4944
7226
7226
7226
7226
3000
3000
3000
3000
69,09
68,62
68,20
73,25
(2x) 30
(2x) 30
(2x) 30
(2x) 37
(2x) 200
(2x) 200
(2x) 200
(2x) 200
(1x) 300
(1x) 300
(1x) 300
(1x) 300
50
50
50
50
VXT 870
VXT 945
VXT 1050
VXT 1125
VXT 1200
14570
14680
15560
16490
16570
8720
8830
9710
10640
10720
5670
5785
5785
5785
5855
4030
4030
4487
4944
4944
10903
10903
10903
10903
10903
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
94,37
103,64
102,93
102,30
109,87
(3x) 22
(3x) 30
(3x) 30
(3x) 30
(3x) 37
(3x) 200
(3x) 200
(3x) 200
(3x) 200
(3x) 200
(2x) 250
(2x) 250
(2x) 250
(2x) 250
(2x) 250
80
80
80
80
80
1. Drain ND50; 2. Water Outlet; 3. Overflow ND 80; 4. Make Up ND50 and 870 - 1200: ND80; 5.Water Inlet; 6.Access Door.
VXT - B 17
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Sound Attenuation
XA + XB Sound Attenuation for VX-Line Cooling Towers
XC Sound Attenuation for VX-Line Cooling Towers
1. Access Door; L1= Intake Attenuator Length; L2= Discharge Attenuator Length; W & H= unit dimensions (see Engineering Data).
1. Access Door; L1= Intake Attenuator Length; L2= Discharge Attenuator Length; W & H= unit dimensions (see Engineering Data)
VXT - B 18
V
X
T
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
(1)
VXT-55 + attenuation is shipped in 4 pieces
(1)
VXT-75 and VXT 85 + attenuation is shipped in 4 pieces
(2)
VXT-95 + attenuation is shipped in 3 pieces
(3)
Intake Attenuator: Access opening is 775 mm high, 406 mm wide and is located at each end of the unit.
(3)
Discharge Attenuator : Access opening is 400 mm high, 1080 mm wide and is located at blank off side of the unit (Access door of VXT 10-25
has 650 mm width)
Model No.
VXT
Unit +
Atten. #
pieces
shipped
# Access
doors
(3)
XA, XB, XC
Dimensions
(mm)
Weights
(kg)
W2 H1 W1 L1 L2 Intake
Solid
Bottom
Discharge Total
XA, XB,
XC
Disch.
Att.
Int.
Att.
XA, XB XC XA, XB, XC XA XB XC XA XB XC XA XB XC
10 - 25 3 1 2 2352 N.A. 1090 1030 890 900 110 130 N.A. 30 130 150 N.A. 270 310 N.A.
30 - 55 3
(1)
1 2 2352 N.A. 1090 1030 1800 1815 175 220 N.A. 50 175 220 N.A. 400 490 N.A.
65 - 85 3
(1)
1 2 2352 N.A. 1090 1030 2710 2730 230 300 N.A. 70 280 350 N.A. 580 720 N.A.
95 - 135 4
(2)
1 2 2352 N.A. 1090 1030 3635 3645 300 370 830 100 360 420 N.A. 760 890 N.A.
150 - 185 4 1 2 2583 3728 1600 1420 3635 3645 380 480 1080 120 440 520 1070 940 1120 2270
N215 N265 4 1 2 3542 4687 2070 1955 3510 3645 500 630 1420 190 530 650 1330 1220 1470 2940
N310 N395 4 2 2 3542 4687 2070 1955 5365 5480 660 860 1970 300 760 970 1980 1720 2130 4250
N430 - N535 7 2 2 3542 4687 2070 1955 7185 7320 1000 1260 2840 380 1060 1300 2660 2440 2940 5880
C215 - C265 4 1 2 3390 4687 2070 1955 3510 3645 500 630 1420 190 530 650 1330 1220 1470 2940
C310 C395 4 2 2 3390 4687 2070 1955 5365 5480 660 860 1970 300 760 970 1980 1720 2130 4250
C430 C535 7 2 2 3390 4535 2070 1955 7185 7320 1000 1260 2840 380 1060 1300 2660 2440 2940 5880
S220 S320 4 1 2 3542 4687 2070 2365 3550 3645 500 630 1420 190 660 800 1640 1350 1620 3250
S345 S470 4 2 2 3542 4687 2070 2365 5385 5480 660 860 1970 300 830 1090 2240 1790 2250 4510
S530 S640 7 2 2 3542 4687 2070 2365 7226 7322 1000 1260 2840 380 1320 1600 3280 2700 3240 6500
S690 S940 7 4 2 3542 4687 2070 2365 10903 10998 1320 1720 3940 600 1660 2180 4480 3580 4500 9020
315 - 400 4 2 2 4145 5290 2560 2965 3510 3645 560 710 1620 230 710 880 1820 1500 1820 3670
470 - 600 4 2 2 4145 5290 2560 2965 5365 5480 730 980 2240 350 900 1210 2490 1980 2540 5080
630 - 800 7 4 2 4145 5290 2560 2965 7185 7320 1120 1420 3240 460 1420 1760 3640 3000 3640 7340
870 - 1200 10 3 3 4145 5290 2560 2965 10865 10995 1680 2130 4860 690 2130 2640 5460 4500 5460 11010
VXT - B 19
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Structural Support
REMARK: Do not use for construction. Refer to factory certified dimensions & weights. This brochure includes data
current at time of publication, which should be reconfirmed at the time of purchase. In the interest of product
improvement, specifications, weights and dimensions are subject to change without notice. Up-to-date engineering
data and more can be found at www.BaltimoreAircoil.com.
The recommended support arrangement for units consists of parallel I-beams running the full length of the unit, spaced as shown in the following
drawing. Besides providing adequate support, the steel also serves to raise the unit above any solid foundation to ensure access to the bottom
of the unit. To support units in an alternate steel support arrangement, consult your BAC Balticare Representative.
Units without Sound Attenuation
Model
A
Unit Length
(mm)
B
Unit Width
(mm)
C
Center dis.
Length
(mm)
D
Center dis.
Width
(mm)
E
(mm)
F
(mm)
G
(mm)
H
(mm)
X
Max. Deflection
(mm)
Mounting
Holes
VXT 10-25 914 1207 750 1153 - - - - 2 4
VXT 30-55 1829 1207 1664 1153 - - - - 5 4
VXT 65-84 2737 1207 2572 1153 - - - - 8 4
VXT 95-135 3658 1207 3492 1153 - - - - 10 4
VXT 150-185 3645 1438 3492 1378 - - - - 10 4
VXT N215-N265 3550 2397 3238 2327 - - - - 10 4
VXT 315-400 3550 3000 3238 2934 - - - - 10 4
VXT N310-N395 5388 2397 5074 2327 2496 102 - - 13 8
VXT 470-600 5388 3000 5074 2934 2496 102 - - 13 8
VXT N430-N535 7226 2397 6914 2327 3238 438 - - 13 8
VXT C215C265 3550 2245 3238 2175 - - - - 10 4
VXT C310-C395 5385 2245 5074 2175 2486 102 - - 13 8
1. Outline of Unit; 2. Mounting Holes 22 mm; 3. Unit; 4. Air Intake.
VXT - B 20
V
X
T
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Units with Sound Attenuation
VXT C430-C535 7226 2246 6914 2175 3238 438 - - 13 8
VXT S220-S320 3550 2397 3238 2327 - - - - 10 4
VXT S345-S470 5385 2397 5074 2327 2486 102 - - 13 8
VXT S530-S640 7226 2397 6914 2327 3238 438 - - 13 8
VXT S690-S940 10903 2397 10586 2327 2486 102 438 - 13 16
VXT 630-800 7226 3000 6914 2934 3238 438 - - 13 8
VXT 870-1200 10903 3000 10590 2934 3238 438 3238 438 13 12
Model
A
Unit Length
(mm)
B
Unit Width
(mm)
C
Center dis.
Length
(mm)
D
Center dis.
Width
(mm)
E
(mm)
F
(mm)
G
(mm)
H
(mm)
X
Max. Deflection
(mm)
Mounting
Holes
1. Outline of Unit; 2. Mounting Holes 22 mm; 3. Outline of attenuator (optional XA or XB); 4. Support Channel attached to optional XA or XB
attenuator; 5. (3 + 5) Outline of Attenuator (optional XC); 6. (4 + 6) Support Channels attached to optional XC attenuator; 7. Unit; 8. Sound
Attenuation (Type XA, XB or XC); 9. Air Intake.
VXT - B 21
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Notes:
1. The recommended support arrangement for VX units consists of
parallel I-beams extending the full length of the unit. Supports and
anchor bolts are to be designed and furnished by others.
2. All supporting beams are to be flush and level at top and must be
oriented relative to gage line as shown.
3. Recommended design loads for each unit support beam should
be 70% of the total unit operating weight applied as a uniform load
to each of the unit beams. The support beam(s) for the optional
intake attenuator(s) needs to carry attenuator only, uniform load of
250 kg/m. Beams should be designed in accordance with
standard structural practice. For the maximum allowable
deflection of beams under the unit refer to above table.
4. All mounting holes have a diameter of 22 mm at the locations
shown.
5. If vibration isolators are used, a rail or channel must be provided
between the unit (and optional attenuator) and the isolators to
provide continuous unit support. Additionally the support beams
must be designed to accommodate the overall length and
mounting hole location of the isolators that may differ from those
of the unit. Refer to vibration isolator drawings for these data.
VXT - B 22
V
X
T
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Engineering Specifications
1.0 Cooling Tower
1.1 General: Furnish and install _____ factory-assembled, forced-
draft, centrifugal fan, counter flow cooling tower(s) with vertical air
discharge, conforming in all aspects to the specifications, schedules
and as shown on the plans. Overall dimensions shall not exceed
approximately _____ mm long x ______ mm wide x _____ mm high.
The total connected fan power shall not exceed _____ kW. The
cooling tower(s) shall be Baltimore Aircoil Model ____________.
1.2 Thermal Capacity: The cooling tower(s) shall be warranted by
the manufacturer to cool _____ l/s of water from ______ C to
_____C at _____C entering wet-bulb temperature.
1.3 Corrosion Resistant Construction (standard): Unless
otherwise noted in this specification, all steel panels and structural
members shall be constructed of heavy-gauge Z600 metric hot-dip
galvanized steel with all edges given a protective coating of zinc-rich
compound and the exterior protected with the BALTIPLUS Protection.
(Alternate 1.3) Corrosion Resistant Construction (optional):
Unless otherwise noted in this specification, all steel panels and
structural members shall be protected with the BALTIBOND


Corrosion Protection System. The system shall consist of Z600 metric
hot-dip galvanized steel prepared in a four-step (clean, pre-treat,
rinse, dry) process with an electrostatically sprayed, thermosetting,
hybrid polymer fuse-bonded to the substrate during a thermally
activated curing stage and monitored by a 23-step quality assurance
program.
(Alternate 1.3) Corrosion Resistant Construction (optional):
Unless otherwise noted in this specification, all steel panels and
structural members shall be constructed of Type 304 or 316 stainless
steel and assembled with stainless steel nut and bolt fasteners.
1.4 Quality Assurance: The cooling tower manufacturer shall have
a Management System certified by an accredited registrar as
complying with the requirements of ISO-9001:2000 to ensure
consistent quality of products and services.
1.5 Warranty: The manufacturers standard equipment warranty
shall be for a period of not less than one year from date of startup or
eighteen months from date of shipment, whichever occurs first.
2.0 Construction Details
2.1 Structure (VX-Line models): The cooling tower shall be
constructed of heavy-gauge steel utilizing double-brake flanges for
maximum strength and rigidity and reliable sealing of watertight joints.
The heat transfer section shall be removable from the pan/fan section
to facilitate shipping and handling. The fan(s) and fan drive system,
including the fan motor, shall be factory mounted and aligned and
located in the dry entering air stream to ensure reliable operation and
ease of maintenance.
2.2 Heat Transfer Section: The heat transfer sections(s) shall
consist of a wet deck surface, spray water distribution system and drift
eliminators arranged for optimal thermal performance with minimal
drift.
2.3 Wet Deck Surface: The wet deck surface shall be formed from
self-extinguishing plastic material and shall be impervious to rot,
decay, and fungus or biological attack. The wet deck surface shall be
manufactured and performance tested by the cooling tower
manufacturer to assure single source responsibility and control of the
final product.
2.4 Water Distribution System: Water shall be distributed evenly
over the wet deck surface by a water distribution system consisting of
a header and spray branches of plastic pipe with large orifice, non-
clog plastic distribution nozzles. The branches and spray nozzles
shall be held in place by snap-in rubber grommets, allowing quick
removal of individual nozzles or complete branches for cleaning or
flushing.
2.5 Cold Water Basin: The cold water basin shall be provided with
large area lift out strainers with perforated openings sized smaller
than the water distribution system nozzles and an anti-vortexing
device to prevent air entrainment. The strainer and anti-vortexing
device shall be constructed of the same material as the basin to
prevent dissimilar metal corrosion. Standard basin accessories shall
include a brass make-up valve with large diameter polystyrene filled
plastic float for easy adjustment of the operating water level.
(Alternate2.5) Cold Water Basin: The cold water basin shall be
constructed of heavy-gauge Type 304 or 316 stainless steel panels
and structural members up to the heat transfer section/basin joint.
The basin shall be provided with large area lift out strainers with
perforated openings sized smaller than the water distribution system
nozzles and an anti-vortexing device to prevent air entrainment. The
strainer and anti-vortexing device shall be constructed of the same
material as the basin to prevent dissimilar metal corrosion. Standard
basin accessories shall include a brass make-up valve with large
diameter polystyrene filled plastic float for easy adjustment of the
operating water level.
3.0 Mechanical Equipment
3.1 Fan(s): Fan(s) shall be dynamically balanced, forwardly curved,
centrifugal type selected to provide optimum thermal performance
with minimal sound levels. Fan housings shall have curved inlet rings
for efficient air entry and four-sided rectangular discharge cowls shall
extend into the basin to increase fan efficiency and prevent water
from splashing into the fans.
3.2 Bearings: Fan(s) and shaft(s) shall be supported by heavy-duty,
self-aligning, relubricatable bearings with cast iron housings,
designed for a minimum L10 life of 40 000 hours (280 000 Hr.
Average. Life).
3.3 Fan Drive: The fan(s) shall be driven by matched V-belts with
taper lock sheaves. Motor shall be located on a heavy-duty motor
base, adjustable by a single threaded bolt-and-nut arrangement.
Removable steel screens or panels shall protect the fan drive and all
moving parts.
3.4 Fan Motor: Furnish _____ kW, ______ RPM Totally Enclosed,
Fan Cooled (TEFC), squirrel cage, ball bearing type fan motors
suitable for outdoor service. Motor(s) shall be suitable for ________
volt, ___ hertz, and __ phase electrical service.
3.5 BALTIGUARD Fan System (optional): Two-single speed fan
motors, one sized for full speed and load, the other sized for 2/3
speed and approximately 1/3 of full load kW shall be provided in each
cell for capacity control and stand-by protection from drive or motor
failure. Two-speed motor(s) are not an acceptable alternative.
VXT - B 23
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
4.0 Drift Eliminators
4.1 Drift Eliminators: Eliminators shall be constructed of specially
formulated plastic material and be removable in easily handled
sections. They shall have a minimum of three changes in air direction.
5.0 Access
5.1 Basin Access: Circular access doors shall be provided for easy
access to the make-up water assembly and suction strainer for
routine maintenance.
6.0 Sound
6.1 Sound Level: To maintain the quality of the local environment,
the maximum sound pressure levels (dB) measured 15 m from the
cooling tower operating at full fan speed shall not exceed the sound
levels detailed below.
Location 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 dB(A)
Discharge
Air Inlet
End
Back
Overview
CCCT - C 1
C
l
o
s
e
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
Closed Circuit Cooling Towers
Product Group Detail
General Information ................................................................................. C2
Principle of Operation .............................................................................. C2
Configuration ............................................................................................. C2
Fan System ................................................................................................. C3
Capacity Range .......................................................................................... C3
Maximum Entering Fluid Temperature .................................................. C4
Typical Applications .................................................................................. C4
Product Line Overview Table .................................................................. C4
Advantages of Closed Circuit Cooling Towers ....................................... C6
Engineering Considerations ..................................................................... C9
CCCT - C 2
O
v
e
r
v
i
e
w
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
General Information
Closed circuit cooling towers provide evaporative cooling for many types of systems, and the
specific application will largely determine which BAC Closed Circuit Cooling Tower is best suited
for a project. The Product Line Overview Table is intended as a general guide. Specialized
assistance is available through your local BAC Balticare Representative.
Principle of Operation
Closed circuit cooling towers operate in a manner similar to open cooling towers, except that the
heat load to be rejected is transferred from the process fluid (the fluid being cooled) to the ambient
air through a heat exchange coil. The coil serves to isolate the process fluid from the outside air,
keeping it clean and contamination free in a closed loop. This creates two separate fluid circuits:
(1) an external circuit, in which spray water circulates over the coil and mixes with the outside air,
and (2) an internal circuit, in which the process fluid circulates inside the coil. During operation,
heat is transferred from the internal circuit, through the coil to the spray water, and then to the
atmosphere as a portion of the water evaporates.
Configuration
BAC manufactures two types of closed circuit cooling towers: combined flow and counterflow.
Combined Flow
Combined flow is the use of both a heat exchange coil and wet deck surface for heat transfer in a
closed circuit cooling tower. The addition of wet deck surface to the traditional closed circuit cooling
tower design reduces evaporation in the coil section, reducing the potential for scaling and fouling.
BACs combined flow closed circuit cooling towers utilize parallel flow of air and spray water over
the coil, and crossflow air/water flow through the wet deck surface.
In parallel flow, air and water flow over the coil in the same direction. The process fluid travels from
the bottom to the top of the coil, increasing efficiency by bringing the coldest spray water and air
in contact with the process fluid at its coldest temperature.
Combined Flow: Parallel flow of air and water
over the coil in counterflow with the fluid
inside the coil
Combined Flow: Crossflow configuration over
the wet deck
CCCT - C 3
C
l
o
s
e
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Counterflow
In a counterflow closed circuit cooling tower
design, the flow of the air is in the opposite
direction of the spray water. In BACs counterflow
closed circuit cooling towers, air travels vertically
up through the unit while the spray water travels
vertically down over the coil.
Fan System
The flow of air through most factory assembled
evaporative cooling equipment is provided by one
or more mechanically driven fans. The fan(s) may
be axial or centrifugal, each type having its own
distinct advantages.
Axial fan units require approximately half the fan
motor kilowatt of comparably sized centrifugal fan units, offering significant life-cycle cost savings.
Centrifugal fan units are capable of overcoming reasonable amounts of external static pressure
(125 Pa), making them suitable for both indoor and outdoor installations. Centrifugal fans are also
inherently quieter than axial fans, although the difference is minimal and can often be overcome
through the application of optional low sound fans and/or sound attenuation on axial fan units. Fans
can be applied in an induced draft or a forced draft configuration.
Induced Draft
The rotating air handling components of induced draft equipment are mounted in the top deck of
the unit, minimizing the impact of fan noise on near-by neighbors and providing maximum
protection from fan icing with units operating in sub-freezing conditions. The air being drawn
through the unit hereby discharges over the inducing fan. The use of corrosion resistant materials
ensures long life and minimizes maintenance requirements for the air handling components.
Forced Draft
Rotating air-handling components are located on the air inlet face at the base of forced draft
equipment whereby fresh air is blown through the unit. This base fan position facilitates easy
access for routine maintenance and service. Additionally, location of these components in the dry
entering air stream extends component life by isolating them from the corrosive saturated
discharge air.
Capacity Range
In the Product Line Overview Table, product capacities are called out in terms of a flow rate. This
refers to the fluid flow rate that the unit can cool from a 30C entering water temperature to 25C
leaving water temperature at a 21C entering ambient wet-bulb temperature. All capacities shown
are for a single cell; multiple cell units can be applied to achieve larger capacities.
Counterflow Configuration
Centrifugal Fans Axial Fans
CCCT - C 4
O
v
e
r
v
i
e
w
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Maximum Entering Fluid Temperature
All BAC Closed Circuit Cooling Towers are capable of withstanding entering fluid temperatures as
high as 82C.
Typical Applications
A list of typical applications is provided in the Product Line Overview Table for your reference.
Product Line Overview Table
1. Air In; 2. Air Out; 3. Fluid In; 4. Fluid Out; 5. Wet Deck Surface; 6. Cold Water Basin; 7. Water Distribution System; 8. Coil; 9. Spray Water
Pump; 10. Eliminators; 11. Optional Extended Surface.
HFL, HXI and DFC water saving and hybrid wet-dry closed circuit products are available to
meet specific design requirements. Refer to the " Water Saving Products" section for more
details on these products.
VXI VFL
Principle of Operation

Configuration Counterflow Counterflow
Fan System Centrifugal Fan, Forced Draft Centrifugal Fan, Forced Draft
Capacity Range
(Single Cell)
1,5 tot 200 l/s 1 to 65 l/s
Maximum Entering
Fluid Temperature
82C 82C
Typical Applications
Small to medium HVAC & industrial
applications such as water source heat pump
loops and air compressor cooling
Indoor installations
High temperature applications
Tight enclosures & installations requiring
a single air inlet
Extremely sound sensitive applications
Small to medium HVAC & industrial applications Installations with
extremely low height requirements
Indoor installations
High temperature industrial applications
Extremely sound sensitive applications
1
2
3
4
6
7
8
9
10
11
1
2
3
4
6
7
8
9
10
11
CCCT - C 5
C
l
o
s
e
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
S1500
FXV - Single Air Inlet Models FXV-D Dual Air Inlet Models
Combined flow Combined flow
Axial Fan, Induced Draft Axial Fan, Induced Draft
3 to 149 l/s 200 to 300 l/s
82C 82C
Small to medium HVAC & industrial applications such as water
source heat pump loops and air compressor cooling
Tight enclosures & installations requiring a single air inlet
Unit replacements
Medium to large HVAC & industrial applications such as electric arc furnaces
and pharmaceutical plants
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
2
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
1 1
2 2
2
3
4
10
CCCT - C 6
O
v
e
r
v
i
e
w
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Advantages of Closed Circuit Cooling Towers
Open cooling towers expose process cooling water to the atmosphere, typically as part of a chiller
system loop (see Figure 1). These open towers use an efficient, simple, and economical design.
All components in an open system must be compatible with the oxygen introduced via the cooling
tower.
Closed circuit cooling towers completely isolate process cooling fluid from the atmosphere. This is
accomplished by combining heat rejection equipment with a heat exchanger in a closed circuit
tower (see Figure 2). A closed loop system protects the quality of the process fluid, reduces system
maintenance, and provides operational flexibility at a slightly higher initial cost.
When deciding which system is best for an application, several factors should be considered.
Performance
If an application must produce full capacity throughout the year, maintaining a clean, reliable
system loop is critical. Isolating the process fluid in a closed loop system prevents airborne
Figure 1 : Chiller Loop w/Open Tower
Figure 2 : Chiller Loop w/Closed Circuit Tower
CCCT - C 7
C
l
o
s
e
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
contaminants from entering and fouling the system. Sustaining optimum performance in an open
loop system will require regular maintenance to assure similar efficiency. High efficiency chillers
and heat exchangers rely on clean process water to function properly and are significantly
impacted by even small amounts of fouling.
Expense
The initial equipment cost of an open loop system will be less than a comparably sized closed loop
system, since the open system does not include the intermediate heat exchanger component.
However, the higher first cost of a closed loop system will be paid back during years of operation
through the following savings:
Cleaner process fluid results in a cleaner internal surface area, and higher efficiency
components in the system (e.g. chiller)
Reduced system maintenance costs
Reduced water treatment costs for evaporative equipment
Operating in free cooling mode during the winter to save energy consumption
Maintenance
Since the process fluid of a closed loop system is completely isolated from the environment,
routine maintenance is only required on the heat rejection equipment itself. The need to shut down
the system periodically to clean the heat exchanger is dramatically reduced, if not entirely
eliminated. Providing clean process fluid to the system will extend the life of other components in
the system (condenser bundles, compressors, etc.).
Water Treatment
Maintaining proper process fluid quality in a system may involve several steps, such as chemical
treatment, filtration equipment and the addition of clean make-up water. A closed circuit cooling
tower can provide the following advantages over an open cooling tower:
Lower volume of recirculating water to treat
Process loop requires minimal treatment
During periods of dry operation, the need for make-up water is eliminated
Operational Flexibility
Closed circuit cooling towers allow for the following modes of operation not possible with open
cooling towers:
Free cooling operation without the need for an intermediate heat exchanger: Chiller turned off
Dry operation: Conserve water and treatment chemicals, prevent icing and eliminate plume
Variable pumping: Closed condenser water loop allows for variable speed pumping to conserve
energy
CCCT - C 8
O
v
e
r
v
i
e
w
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Closed Circuit Tower versus Open Tower / Heat Exchanger
Sometimes, an open cooling tower is paired with a heat exchanger (see Figure 3) to capture some
of the benefits of closed loop cooling. Choosing closed circuit cooling towers over this open tower/
heat exchanger combination may still be a better choice for the following reasons:
Total cost: Addition of a heat exchanger (pump, piping, etc.) to the open tower loop brings the
initial cost much closer to that of the closed circuit tower system
Single piece of equipment: Compact design of the closed circuit tower conserves space in a
self-contained package, compared to multiple locations for the tower/heat exchanger
arrangement
Maintenance: Narrow spacing in heat exchanger (e.g. plate and frame) may trap solids
introduced by the open tower, requiring frequent, time consuming cleaning to assure optimum
performance
Dry operation: Open tower/heat exchanger system cannot be run dry in the winter
These guidelines provide some general information to help decide whether a closed circuit cooling
tower is better suited for a particular application than an open tower, with or without a heat
exchanger. For additional assistance with a project, please contact your local BAC Balticare
Representative.
Note :
BAC offers heat exchanger skids in combination with most of his open cooling tower products.
These skids are available for both new installations or to retrofit on existing installations. The heat
exchanger skid consists of a plate heat exchanger with pump and interconnecting piping and
appendages. The skids are delivered on a heavy duty frame and with steel panel enclosure. Refer
to your BAC Balticare representative for more details and selections.
Figure 3 : Chiller Loop w/Open Tower/Heat Exchanger Combination
CCCT - C 9
C
l
o
s
e
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Engineering Considerations
Location
Units must have an adequate supply of fresh air to the air inlet(s). When units are located adjacent
to building walls or in enclosures, care must be taken to ensure that the warm, saturated discharge
air is not deflected off surrounding walls or enclosures and drawn back to the air inlet(s).
Warning: Each unit should be located and positioned to prevent the introduction of the warm discharge air and the
associated drift, which may contain chemical or biological contaminants including Legionella, into the ventilation
systems of the building on which the unit is located or those of adjacent buildings.
Note: For detailed recommendations on layout, please consult your local BAC Balticare Representative.
For VL and VX products, bottom screens or solid bottom panels may be desirable or necessary for
safety, depending on the location and conditions at the installation site.
Piping and Valves
Piping must be sized and installed in accordance with good piping practice. All piping should be
supported by pipe hangers or other supports, not by the unit.
Some installations may require flow balancing valves (supplied by others) at the coil inlets to
balance the flow to individual coils and cells. External shutoff valves on the closed circuit loop
(supplied by others) may also be required if the system design necessitates the isolation of
individual cells.
Although equalizing lines can be used to balance water levels between multi-cell closed circuit
cooling towers, the spray water for each cell must be treated separately, and a separate make-up
must be provided for each cell. Note that a common remote sump for multi-cell installations can
simplify make-up and water treatment see "Technical Resources, Remote Sump Tank Selection"
for details. See the appropriate Operating and Maintenance Instruction Manual for more
information on water treatment.
Capacity Control
Variable Frequency Drives (VFD)
Installations which are to be controlled by Variable Frequency Drives (VFD) require the use of an
inverter duty motor as designed IEC 34.1, which recognizes the increased stresses placed on
motors by these drive systems. Inverter duty motors must be furnished on VFD applications in
order to maintain the motor warranty. Fan motors must be furnished with thermal protection (either
PTC sensors or coil thermostats normally open, or normally closed). The motor protection consists
of temperature sensitive cutout devices embedded in the motor windings (minimum 3 per motor).
The minimum fan motor speed during normal operation should be not below 30% of the speed
indicated on the motor nameplate. This corresponds with 15 Hz for a 50 Hz supply and 18 Hz for
a 60 Hz supply.
BAC offers factory installed motor control packages including VFD drives. Refer to the section
"Technical Resources, Motor Controls". Check with your local BAC Balticare representative for
availability.
Warning: When the fan speed is to be changed from the factory-set speed, including through the use of a variable
speed control device, steps must be taken to avoid operating at or near fan speeds that cause a resonance with the
unit or its supporting structure. At start-up, the variable frequency drive should be cycled slowly between zero and
full speed and any speeds that cause a noticeable resonance in the unit should be locked out by the variable speed
drive.
Fan Cycling
Fan cycling is the simplest method of capacity control. The number of steps of capacity control can
be increased using the Baltiguard

Fan System, the independent fan motor option, or two-speed


fan motors in conjunction with fan cycling (see the Custom Features & Options section of the
appropriate product line to determine whether the Baltiguard

Fan System or the independent fan
motor option are available; two-speed motors are available for all products). These options provide
substantial energy savings when compared to simple fan cycling.
Warning: Rapid on-off cycling can cause the fan motor to overheat. It is recommended that controls be set to allow a
maximum of 6 on-off cycles per hour.
CCCT - C 10
O
v
e
r
v
i
e
w
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Note: Spray water pump cycling should not be used for capacity control. This method of control often results in short
cycling of the pump motor as capacity changes substantially with pump cycling. In addition, alternate wetting and drying
of the coil promotes scaling of the heat exchanger coil surface.
Capacity Control Dampers (VFL and VXI models only)
On centrifugal fan models, modulating capacity control dampers are available to provide close
control of the leaving temperature. See Section "Accessories" or contact your local BAC Balticare
representative.
Vibration Cutout Switch
Vibration cutout switches are recommended on all axial fan installations. Vibration cutout switches
are designed to interrupt power to the fan motor and/or provide an alarm to the operator in the
event of excessive vibration. BAC offers both electronic and mechanical vibration cutout switches
on all closed circuit cooling towers.
Water Treatment
As water evaporates in the unit, the dissolved solids originally present in the water remain in the
system. The concentration of these dissolved solids increases rapidly and can cause scale and
corrosion. In addition, airborne impurities and biological contaminants, including Legionella, may
be introduced into the circulating water. To control all potential contaminants, a water treatment
program must be employed. In many cases, a simple bleed-off may be adequate for control of
scale and corrosion.
However, biological contamination, including Legionella, can be controlled only through the use of
biocides. Such treatment should be initiated at system startup, after periods of equipment
shutdown, and continued regularly thereafter. Accordingly, it is strongly recommended a biocide
treatment be initiated when the unit is first filled with water and continued regularly thereafter. For
more information, consult the appropriate Operating and Maintenance Manual.
When a water treatment program is employed, it must be compatible with construction materials.
Batch feeding of chemicals into the unit is not recommended. If units are constructed with optional
corrosion resistant materials, acid treatment may be considered; however, the water quality must
be maintained within the guidelines set forth in the Operating and Maintenance Instructions.
Note: Unless a common remote sump is utilised, each cell of a multi-cell installation must be treated as a separate
entity, even if the cold water basins are equalized.
For complete Water Quality Guidelines, see the appropriate Operating and Maintenance
Instruction Manual, available at www.baltimoreaircoil.com. For specific recommendations on water
treatment, contact a competent water treatment supplier.
Wet Deck Surface Compatibility (FXV and FXV-D models only)
The standard wet deck surface in FXV and FXV-D Closed Circuit Cooling Towers is constructed
of a plastic material This wet deck surface is compatible with the water found in most evaporative
cooling applications. For applications where the entering fluid temperature exceeds 82C, contact
your local BAC Balticare Representative to confirm that the standard wet deck is acceptable.
Sound Levels
Sound rating data are available for all BAC models. When calculating the sound levels generated
by a unit, the designer must take into account the effects of the geometry of the tower as well as
the distance and direction from the unit to noise-sensitive areas. Whisper Quiet fans and intake
and discharge sound attenuation can be supplied on certain models to provide reduced sound
characteristics (see the Custom Features and Options section of the appropriate product line for
details). The Baltiguard

Fan System, two-speed motors, or variable frequency drives can also be


used to reduce sound during periods of non-peak thermal loads. For more information on sound
and how it relates to evaporative cooling equipment, see Section "Technical Resources,
Fundamentals of Sound". For detailed low sound selections, please consult your local BAC
Balticare Representative.
CCCT - C 11
C
l
o
s
e
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Winterization
When a unit is shut down in freezing weather, the basin water must be protected by draining to an
indoor auxiliary remote sump tank or by providing supplementary heat to the cold water basin.
Supplementary heat can be provided by electric immersion heaters or in some cases, hot water,
steam coils, or steam injectors. All exposed water piping, make-up lines, and spray pumps (if
applicable) that do not drain at shutdown should be traced with electric heater tape and insulated.
When dry operation is planned for low ambient conditions, centrifugal fan units should be supplied
with oversized fan motors to prevent motor overload when the spray water is not operating. For
remote sump applications, the spray water pump must be selected for the required flow at a total
head which includes the vertical lift, pipe friction (in supply and suction lines) plus the required
pressure at the inlet header of the water distribution system (14 kPa). A valve should always be
installed in the discharge line from the pump to permit adjusting flow to the unit requirement. Inlet
water pressure should be measured by a pressure gauge installed in the water supply riser at the
spray water inlet, and adjusted to the specified inlet pressure.
Indoor Installation (applicable to VXI and VFL models only)
Many indoor installations require the use of inlet and/or discharge ductwork. Units installed with
inlet ductwork must be ordered with solid-bottom panels. Generally, intake ducts are used
only on smaller units while the equipment room is used as a plenum for larger units. Discharge
ductwork will normally be required to carry the saturated discharge air from the building.
Both intake and discharge ductwork must have access doors to allow servicing of the fan
assembly, drift eliminators, and water distribution system. All ductwork is supplied and installed by
others and should be symmetrical and designed to provide even air distribution across the face of
air intakes and discharge openings. Such ductwork may increase the external static pressure on
the unit, requiring a larger fan motor to be installed. This external static pressure must be quantified
(in Pa) to BAC to allow for suitable fan motor sizing.
Warning: The discharge opening must be positioned to prevent the introduction of discharge air into the fresh air
intakes serving the unit or the ventilation systems of adjacent buildings.
Note: Axial fan units are not suitable for indoor installations.
Safety
Adequate precautions, appropriate for the installation and location of these products, should be
taken to safeguard the public from possible injury and the equipment and the premises from
damage. Operation, maintenance and repair of this equipment should be undertaken only by
personnel qualified to do so. Proper care, procedures and tools must be used in handling, lifting,
installing, operating, maintaining, and repairing this equipment to prevent personal injury and/or
property damage.
Fluid Compatibility
The fluid to be cooled must be compatible with the coil material (standard serpentine are carbon
steel, hot-dip galvanized on the outside only). Fluids not compatible with coil materials can
lead to corrosion and tube failure. Certain fluids may require occasional pressure cleaning or
mechanical cleaning of the inside of coil tubes. In such cases the coil must be designed to provide
this capability.
Open / Closed System
The standard galvanised steel serpentine and coils are carbon steel, hot-dip galvanised on
the outside only, and are intended for application on closed, pressurised systems which
are not open to the atmosphere. Stainless steel coils or cleanable coil units (with tubes hot-dip
galvanized inside and out) are available to cool corrosive fluids or water and ethylene/propylene
glycol solutions in systems open to the atmosphere
Protection Against Coil Freezing
At below freezing ambient conditions, the unit can experience heat loss even without the
recirculating spray water pump and fans in operation. Without a heat load on the circulating fluid,
CCCT - C 12
O
v
e
r
v
i
e
w
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
coil freezing can occur even at full flow. Protective means are readily available to avoid potential
freeze problems. Where the system will permit, the best protection against coil freeze-up is the use
of an industrially inhibited anti-freeze solution. When this is not possible, the system must be
designed to meet both of the following conditions:
1. Maintain minimum recommended flow through the coil at all times, as per the table below:
2. Maintain a heat load on the circulating fluid so that the temperature of the fluid leaving the coil
will not be below 7C.
If the process load is extremely light, or if the process is periodically shut off entirely, then an
auxiliary heat load must be applied to the circulating fluid when below freezing ambient
temperatures exist to prevent damage to the coil. Refer to the Heat Loss Data table (see the
product section for applicable heat loss data) for the auxiliary heat load requirement. The amount
of auxiliary heat necessary to prevent coil freezing can be further reduced by the use of a positive
closure damper hood and insulation.
Draining the coil is not recommended as a normal method of freeze protection. However, draining
is acceptable as an emergency method of freeze protection. Frequent draining can promote
corrosion inside the coil tubes. If the coil is not protected by an industrially inhibited anti-freeze
solution, an automatic drain valve and air vent is recommended to drain the coil if flow stops or fluid
temperature drops below 7C when the ambient temperature is below freezing. Note that cold
water basin heaters will not provide freeze protection for the coil.
The coil of dry and TrilliumSeries coolers can never drain completely. If a minimum heat load can
not be guaranteed on the dry coil during the winter period, then the use of an anti-freeze solution
is the only available protection against coil freezing.
Warranties
Please refer to the Limitation of Warranties applicable to and in effect at the time of the sale/
purchase of these products.
Model Minimum Flow (l/s)
VFL 24X - 48X 4,1
VFL 72X - 96X 7,9
VXI 9, 18, 27, 36 3,5
VXI 50 5
VXI 70, C72 7
VXI 95, 145, C108 8
VXI 144, 215 13
VXI 180 11
VXI 190, 290 16
VXI 288, 430 26
VXI 360 22
FXV 42X, 43X 3
FXV 44X 5
FXV Q44X 10
FXV 5XX 6
FXV Q5XX 12
FXV 64X, 66X 7
FXV Q6XX 14
FXV D288X, D364X 18
FXV D288XQ, D364XQ 36
Closed Circuit Cooling Towers
VXI - C 1
C
l
o
s
e
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
VXI
Product Detail
VXI Closed Circuit Cooling Towers ........................................................ C2
Benefits ....................................................................................................... C4
Construction Details .................................................................................. C6
Custom Features and Options .................................................................. C8
Accessories ............................................................................................... C10
Engineering Data ..................................................................................... C12
Structural Support .................................................................................. C20
Engineering Specifications ..................................................................... C22
VXI - C 2
V
X
I
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
VXI Closed Circuit Cooling Towers
Capacity
Single Cell Capacity:
From 1,5 to 200 l/s
General Description
VXI Closed Circuit Cooling Towers deliver fully rated thermal performance over a wide range of
flow and temperature requirements. The VXI can be installed indoors and can accommodate
limited ceiling or enclosure heights. The VXI design minimizes sound levels and installation costs,
provides year-round operating reliability, and simplifies maintenance requirements.
Key Features
Suitable for indoor and outdoor installations
Suitable for high temperature applications
Low sound
Single side air inlet
Low energy consumption
Low installed costs
Easy maintenance
Reliable year-round operation
Long service life
VXI - C 3
C
l
o
s
e
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
VXI - C 4
V
X
I
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Benefits
Installation and Application Flexibility
Indoor Installations Centrifugal fans can overcome the static pressure imposed by external
ductwork, allowing these units to be installed indoors.
Low Sound
Centrifugal Fan - Centrifugal fans have inherently low sound characteristics.
Single Side Air Inlet - Particularly sound-sensitive areas can be accommodated by facing the
quiet side (back panel) to the sound-sensitive direction.
Low Energy Consumption
Evaporative Cooling Equipment minimizes the energy consumption of the entire system
because it provides lower operating temperatures. The owner saves money while conserving
natural resources and reducing environmental impact.
Low Installed Cost
Support All models mount directly on two parallel I-beams (supplied by others) and ship
complete with motors and drives, factory-installed and aligned.
Modular Design Large models ship in multiple sections to minimize the size and weight of the
heaviest lift, allowing for the use of smaller, less costly cranes.
Easy Maintenance
Internal Access - The interior of the unit is easily accessible for adjusting the float valve,
cleaning the strainer or flushing the basin.
Long Service Life
Materials of Construction Various materials are available to meet the corrosion resistance,
unit operating life, and budgetary requirements of any project.
Note: For more information, please refer to the section Technical Resources, Materials of Construction.
Reliable Year-Round Operation
V-Belt Drive The fans, motor, and drive system are located outside of the moist discharge
airstream, protecting them from moisture, condensation and icing hence allowing a safe year-
round operation.
The water level control is easily reached from
the access door.
External V-belt drive system (shown here with
panel removed)
VXI - C 5
C
l
o
s
e
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Low Ocean Freight Cost
Size - C models are designed to fit in standard
closed box containers to minimize ocean
freight costs. All containerized models are
shipped in a bottom fan section and a top coil
section, which fit together into a 40' box
container, no crating required.
In order to fit the bottom fan section through the
doors of the container, the fan enclosures are
shipped loose inside the water basin area and
are easily mounted on site.
C Model in Dry Van Container Fan Enclosures are shipped loose
VXI - C 6
V
X
I
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Construction Details
Upper Section
Lower Section
VXI - C 7
C
l
o
s
e
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
1. Heavy Duty Construction
Z600 hot-dip galvanized steel panels
2. Water Distribution System
Plastic spray header and branches
Large orifice, non-clog nozzles
Grommetted for easy maintenance
3. Coil
Continuous serpentine, steel tubing
Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication (HDGAF)
Sloped tubes for free drainage of fluid
Designed for max. 10 bar operating pressure according to PED
4. Drift Eliminators
UV resistant non-corrosive material, impervious to rot, decay and biological attack
Three distinct changes in air direction to reduce drift loss significantly
Assembled in easy to handle sections, which can be removed for access to the equipment
interior
5. Fan Drive System
V-belt drive
Heavy-duty bearings and fan motor
6. Centrifugal Fan(s)
Quiet Operation
7. Recirculating Spray Pump
Close coupled, bronze fitted centrifugal pump
Totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) motor
Bleed line with metering valve installed from pump discharge to overflow
8. Access Door
Circular access door
9. Strainer (not shown)
Anti-vortex design to prevent air entrainment
VXI - C 8
V
X
I
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Custom Features and Options
Construction Options
Standard Construction:
Steel panels and structural elements are constructed of Z600 heavy-gauge hot-dip galvanized
steel protected with the Baltiplus Corrosion Protection on the outside of the unit.
Optional BALTIBOND

Corrosion Protection System:
The BALTIBOND

Corrosion Protection System, a hybrid polymer coating used to extend
equipment life, is applied before assembly to all hot-dip galvanized steel components of the
unit.
Optional Stainless Steel Construction:
Steel panels and structural elements are constructed of stainless steel either type 304 or 316.
Optional Water-Contact Stainless Steel Cold Water Basin:
A cost-effective alternative to an all stainless steel unit. The critical components in the cold
water basin and the cold water basin itself are provided in stainless steel. The remaining
components are protected with the BALTIBOND

Corrosion Protection System.
Note: See section Technical Resources, Material of Construction for more details on the materials described above.
Coil Configurations
Standard Serpentine Coil:
The standard condensing coil is constructed of continuous lengths of all prime surface steel,
hot-dip galvanized after fabrication (HDGAF).
Optional Extended Surface Coil:
Coils are available with selected rows finned at 3 to 5 fins per inch for wet/dry applications. The
coil is hot-dip galvanized after fabrication (HDGAF).
Optional Stainless Steel Coil:
Coils are available in Type 304L or 316L stainless steel for specialized applications.
All coils are designed for low pressure drop with sloping tubes for free drainage of fluid.
Fan Drive System
The fan drive system provides the cooling air necessary to reject heat from the system to the
atmosphere. Centrifugal fans, forwardly curved, are driven by matched V-belts with taper lock
sheaves.

Extended Surface Coil Fan Drive System
VXI - C 9
C
l
o
s
e
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
The Baltiguard

Drive System
The BALTIGUARD

Drive System consists of two


standard single-speed fan motors and drive
assemblies. One drive assembly is sized for full
speed and load, and the other is sized for
approximately 2/3 speed and consumes only 1/3
of the design kilowatt power. This configuration
allows the system to be operated like a two-speed
motor, but with the reserve capacity of a standby
motor in the event of failure. As a minimum,
approximately 70% capacity will be available from
the low kilowatt motor, even on a design wet-bulb
day. Controls and wiring are the same, as those
required for a two-speed, two-winding motor.
Significant energy savings are achieved when
operating at low speed during periods of reduced load and/or low wet-bulb temperatures.
Low Sound Operation
The low sound levels generated by BAC Products
with centrifugal fans make them suitable for most
installations. For situations when one direction is
particularly sound sensitive, the unit can be
oriented so that the side opposite the air inlet
faces the sound-sensitive direction. Units with
centrifugal fans are also available with factory
designed, tested and rated sound attenuation for
both the air inlet and discharge.
Note: For more information, please refer to the section Technical
Resources, Sound Reduction Options.
Remote Sump Execution
The use of an auxiliary sump within a heated
space is the most satisfactory way to protect sump water from freezing. When the circulating pump
is shut off, all the water in the water distribution, in suspension and in the sump will drain freely to
the auxiliary sump.
Note: For detailed information on the calculation of the remote sump tank, please refer to the section "Technical Resources, Selection of
Remote Sump Tank".
Baltiguard

Drive System
Intake and Discharge Sound Attenuation
VXI - C 10
V
X
I
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Accessories
Electric Water Level Control Package
The electric water level control replaces the
standard mechanical make-up valve when a
more precise water level control is required. This
package consists of a float switch mounted in the
basin and a solenoid activated valve in the make-
up water line. The valve is slow closing to
minimize water hammer.
Basin Heaters
Units exposed to below freezing ambient
temperatures require protection to prevent
freezing of the water in the cold water basin when
the unit is idle. Factory-installed heaters, which
maintain the water temperature at 4C, are a
simple and inexpensive way of providing such protection. The heater package includes the
heaters, a thermostat and a low level cut out switch to protect the heaters if the water level is too
low. Standard electric heaters are selected for -18C ambient temperature.
Capacity Control Dampers
Modulating capacity control dampers are available to provide better leaving water temperature
control than can be obtained from fan cycling alone. Fan discharge dampers consist of a single
airfoil type damper blade located in the discharge of each fan housing. A standard electrical control
package for dampers is available from BAC.
Model No.
VXI
Heaters -18C
(kW)
VXI 9-X 1 x 1,5
VXI 18-X 1 x 1,5
VXI 27-X 1 x 2,5
VXI 36-X 1 x 3
VXI 50-X 1 x 4
VXI 70-X 1 x 6
VXI-C72-X 1 x 6
VXI 95-X 1 x 6
VXI-C108-X 1 x 4
VXI 144-X 2 x 4
VXI 145-X 2 x 4
VXI 180-X 2 x 5
VXI 190-X 2 x 6
VXI 215-X 2 x 6
VXI 288-X 4 x 4
VXI 290-X 4 x 4
VXI 360-X 4 x 5
VXI 430-X 4 x 6
Electric Water Level Control Package
VXI - C 11
C
l
o
s
e
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Extended Lubrication Lines
Extended lubrication lines with grease fittings are
available for lubrication of the fan shaft bearings.
Solid Bottom Panels
Factory-installed bottom panels are required
when intake air is ducted to the unit.
Ladder, Safety Cage and handrails
In the event the owner requires easy access to
the top of the unit, the unit can be furnished with
ladders extending from the base of the unit to the
top, as well as safety cages, and handrail
packages.
Note: When these access options are employed, the unit must be equipped with steel drift eliminators.
Discharge Hoods
Discharge hoods reduce the risk of re-circulation
in tight enclosures by increasing discharge air
velocity, and can be used to elevate the unit
discharge above adjacent walls to comply with
layout guidelines.
Plume Abatement Coil
The use of plume abatement coils is
recommended to reduce significantly the
formation of visible plume during wet operation
and extend the dry operation capability of the
closed circuit cooling tower. The combination of
discharge air reheating and extended dry
operation minimises plume formation during
weather conditions with high relative humidity. Plume abatement coils are also an effective way to
save water and water treatment costs.
Note: For more information, please refer to the section Technical Resources, Plume Abatement.
Basin Sweeper Piping
Basin sweeper piping provides an effective
method of preventing sediment from collecting in
the cold water basin of the unit. A complete piping
system, including nozzles, is provided in the unit
basin for connection to side stream filtration
equipment.
Note: For more information, please refer to the section "Technical
Resources, Filtration".
Extended Lubrication Lines
Discharge Hood
Basin Sweeper Piping
VXI - C 12
V
X
I
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Engineering Data
REMARK: Do not use for construction. Refer to factory certified dimensions & weights. This brochure includes data
current at time of publication, which should be reconfirmed at the time of purchase. In the interest of product
improvement, specifications, weights and dimensions are subject to change without notice. Up-to-date engineering
data and more can be found at www.BaltimoreAircoil.com.
VXI 9 - VXI 36
* Unit ships in one piece.
Model No.
VXI
Operating
Weight
(kg)
Shipping
Weight
(kg)
Heaviest
Section
(kg)
H
(mm)
L
(mm)
W
(mm)
Air
Flow
(m
3
/s)
Fan
Motor
(kW)
Spray
Water
Flow
(l/s)
Pump
Motor
(kW)
Coil
Volume
(l)
VXI 9-1
VXI 9-2
VXI 9-3
780
870
980
670
760
830
660*
480
540
2245
2467
2683
914
914
914
1207
1207
1207
2,3
2,2
2,5
(1x) 1,5
(1x) 1,5
(1x) 2,2
2,2
2,2
2,2
(1x) 0,25
(1x) 0,25
(1x) 0,25
(1x) 75
(1x) 95
(1x) 115
VXI 18-0
VXI 18-1
VXI 18-2
VXI 18-3
1120
1270
1440
1650
920
1030
1160
1330
920*
1030*
700
860
2035
2245
2467
2683
1829
1829
1829
1829
1207
1207
1207
1207
4,6
5,0
4,8
5,5
(1x) 4,0
(1x) 4,0
(1x) 4,0
(1x) 5,5
4,7
4,7
4,7
4,7
(1x) 0,37
(1x) 0,37
(1x) 0,37
(1x) 0,37
(1x) 98
(1x) 140
(1x) 182
(1x) 224
VXI 27-1
VXI 27-2
VXI 27-3
1760
1990
2300
1320
1500
1730
1320*
1000
1200
2343
2578
2813
2737
2737
2737
1207
1207
1207
7,6
6,8
7,1
(1x) 5,5
(1x) 5,5
(1x) 7,5
7,1
7,1
7,1
(1x) 0,75
(1x) 0,75
(1x) 0,75
(1x) 205
(1x) 269
(1x) 333
VXI 36-2
VXI 36-3
2300
2850
1800
2080
1200
1440
2578
2813
3658
3658
1207
1207
10,4
10,9
(1x) 7,5
(1x) 11
9,5
9,5
(1x) 0,75
(1x) 0,75
(1x) 356
(1x) 442
1. Drain ND50; 2. Outlet Connection ND80 for VXI 9-X and ND100 for VXI 18-X, VXI 27-X and VXI 36-X; 3. Overflow ND50; 4. Make Up ND25;
5. Inlet Connection ND80 for VXI 9-X and ND100 for VXI 18-X, VXI 27-X and VXI 36-X; 6. Vent ND15; 7. Access Door (not shown).
VXI - C 13
C
l
o
s
e
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
VXI 50 - VXI 70
VXI C72 - C108
Model No.
VXI
Operating
Weight
(kg)
Shipping
Weight
(kg)
Heaviest
Section
(kg)
H
(mm)
L
(mm)
W
(mm)
Air
Flow
(m
3
/s)
Fan
Motor
(kW)
Spray
Water
Flow
(l/s)
Pump
Motor
(kW)
Coil
Volume
(l)
VXI 50-2
VXI 50-3
VXI 50-4
3740
4280
4825
2670
2950
3255
1720
1980
2240
3093
3328
3563
3645
3645
3645
1438
1438
1438
14,6
15,7
16,9
(1x) 11
(1x) 11
(1x) 15
13,9
13,9
13,9
(1x) 1,5
(1x) 1,5
(1x) 1,5
(1x) 515
(1x) 638
(1x) 762
VXI 70-2
VXI 70-3
VXI 70-4
6490
7190
8075
4250
4770
5315
2630
3150
3665
3586
3821
4056
3550
3550
3550
2397
2397
2397
20,8
22,9
22,2
(1x) 15
(1x) 18,5
(1x) 18,5
19,2
19,2
19,2
(1x) 2,2
(1x) 2,2
(1x) 2,2
(2x) 356
(2x) 442
(2x) 527
Model No.
VXI
Operating
Weight
(kg)
Shipping
Weight
(kg)
Heaviest
Section
(kg)
H
(mm)
L
(mm)
W
(mm)
Air
Flow
(m
3
/s)
Fan
Motor
(kW)
Spray
Water
Flow
(l/s)
Pump
Motor
(kW)
Coil
Volume
(l)
VXI C072-2
VXI C072-3
VXI C072-4
6490
7190
8075
4250
4770
5315
2630
3150
3665
3585
3820
4055
3550
3550
3550
2245
2245
2245
20,8
22,9
22,2
(1x) 15
(1x) 18,5
(1x) 18,5
19,2
19,2
19,2
(1x) 2,2
(1x) 2,2
(1x) 2,2
(2x) 356
(2x) 442
(2x) 527
VXI C108-2
VXI C108-3
VXI C108-4
9695
10630
11760
6145
6945
7830
3885
4685
5485
3585
3820
4055
5385
5385
5385
2245
2245
2245
33,5
32,2
31,1
(1x) 22
(1x) 22
(1x) 22
29,0
29,0
29,0
(1x) 4,0
(1x) 4,0
(1x) 4,0
(2x) 532
(2x) 661
(2x) 790
1. Drain ND50; 2. Outlet Connection ND100; 3. Overflow ND 80; 4. Make Up ND25 for VXI 50-X and ND50 for VXI 70-X; 5. Inlet Connection
ND100; 6. Vent ND 15; 7. Access Door.
1. Drain ND50; 2. Outlet Connection ND100; 3. Overflow ND50; 4. Make Up ND25; 5. Inlet Connection ND100; 6. Vent ND15; 7. Access Door.
VXI - C 14
V
X
I
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
VXI 95 - VXI 290
* Pan section is heaviest section.
Model
Operating
Weight
(kg)
Shipping
Weight
(kg)
Heaviest
Section
(kg)
H
(mm)
L
(mm)
W
(mm)
Air
Flow
(m
3
/s)
Fan
Motor
(kW)
Spray
Water
Flow
(l/s)
Pump
Motor
(kW)
Coil
Volume
(l)
VXI 95-2
VXI 95-3
VXI 95-4
7740
8630
9520
4990
5630
6180
3200
3850
4470
4013
4248
4483
3550
3550
3550
2397
2397
2397
27,6
26,7
26,2
(1x) 30
(1x) 30
(1x) 30
25,2
25,2
25,2
(1x) 2,2
(1x) 2,2
(1x) 2,2
(2x) 448
(2x) 556
(2x) 664
VXI 145-1
VXI 145-2
VXI 145-3
VXI 145-4
10100
11460
12810
14160
6300
7280
8175
9260
3780
4715
5710
6690
3778
4013
4248
4483
5385
5385
5385
5385
2397
2397
2397
2397
39,9
38,6
37,5
36,6
(1x) 37
(1x) 37
(1x) 37
(1x) 37
38,5
38,5
38,5
38,5
(1x) 4
(1x) 4
(1x) 4
(1x) 4
(2x) 506
(2x) 669
(2x) 832
(2x) 995
VXI 190-2
VXI 190-3
VXI 190-4
15400
17160
18920
9820
11100
12305
3390*
3840
4470
4013
4248
4483
7226
7226
7226
2397
2397
2397
55,4
53,4
52,5
(2x) 30
(2x) 30
(2x) 30
50,4
50,4
50,4
(2x) 2,2
(2x) 2,2
(2x) 2,2
(4x) 448
(4x) 556
(4x) 664
VXI 290-1
VXI 290-2
VXI 290-3
VXI 290-4
20350
22980
25700
28420
12680
14570
16550
18505
5120*
5120*
5710
6690
3778
4013
4248
4483
10903
10903
10903
10903
2397
2397
2397
2397
79,5
77,8
75,0
73,1
(2x) 37
(2x) 37
(2x) 37
(2x) 37
77,0
77,0
77,0
77,0
(2x) 4
(2x) 4
(2x) 4
(2x) 4
(4x) 506
(4x) 669
(4x) 832
(4x) 995
1. Drain ND50 (not shown); 2. Outlet Connection ND100; 3. Overflow ND80; 4. Make Up ND50; 5. Inlet Connection ND100; 6. Vent ND15; 7.
Access Door.
VXI - C 15
C
l
o
s
e
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
VXI 180 - VXI 360
VXI 144 - VXI 430
Model
Operating
Weight
(kg)
Shipping
Weight
(kg)
Heaviest
Section
(kg)
H
(mm)
L
(mm)
W
(mm)
Air
Flow
(m
3
/s)
Fan
Motor
(kW)
Spray
Water
Flow
(l/s)
Pump
Motor
(kW)
Coil
Volume
(l)
VXI 180-2
VXI 180-3
VXI 180-4
12970
14590
16250
8990
10200
11530
5810
7010
8200
4075
4310
4545
5388
5388
5388
3000
3000
3000
51,4
50,0
52,0
(2x) 18,5
(2x) 18,5
(2x) 22,0
46,7
46,7
46,7
(1x) 4
(1x) 4
(1x) 4
(2x) 847
(2x) 1052
(2x) 1258
VXI 360-2
VXI 360-3
VXI 360-4
25840
29090
32500
17940
20380
23100
5810
7010
8200
4075
4310
4545
10903
10903
10903
3000
3000
3000
102,9
100,1
104,0
(4x) 18,5
(4x) 18,5
(4x) 22,0
93,4
93,4
93,4
(2x) 4
(2x) 4
(2x) 4
(4x) 847
(4x) 1052
(4x) 1258
1. Drain ND50; 2. Outlet Connection ND100; 3. Overflow ND80; 4. Make Up ND50 for VXI 180-X and ND80 for VXI 360-X; 5. Inlet Connection
ND100; 6. Vent ND15; 7. Access Door.
1. Drain ND50; 2. Outlet Connection ND100. 3. Overflow ND80; 4. Make Up ND50 for VXI 144-X, VXI 215-X, VXI 288-X and ND80 for VXI 430-
X; 5. Inlet Connection ND 100; 6. Vent ND15; 7. Access Door.
VXI - C 16
V
X
I
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
* Pan section is heaviest section.
General Notes
1. Make up, overflow, suction, drain connections and access door
can be provided on side opposite to that shown; consult your
BAC Balticare representative.
2. Unit height is indicative, for precise value refer to certified print.
3. Shipping/operating weights indicated are for units without
accessories such as sound attenuators, discharge hoods, etc.
Consult factory certified prints to obtain weight additions and the
heaviest section to be lifted.
4. The drawings for units with only one spray pump show the
standard right hand arrangement, which has the air inlet side on
the right when facing the connection end. Left hand
arrangement can be furnished by special order.
5. Coil, overflow, make-up and spray water connections are always
located on the same end of the unit. For double pump units an
additional set of coil connections and an additional overflow
connection will be installed on the other end of the unit.
6. For indoor applications of closed circuit cooling towers, the room
may be used as a plenum with ductwork attached to the
discharge only. If inlet ductwork is required, an enclosed fan
section must be specified; consult your BAC Balticare
representative for details.
7. Fan kW is at 0 Pa ESP. To operate against external static
pressure up to 125 Pa, increase each fan motor one size.
8. On models VXI 9 to VXI 36 access doors are located at the
opposite of the air inlet side, ensure sufficient space for entry
when positioning these units.
9. When flow rate on models VXI 27, VXI 36 and VXI 50 exceeds 30
l/s the quantity of coil connections will be double.
When flow rate on models VXI 70, VXI C72, VXI C108, VXI 95,
VXI 145, VXI 180, VXI 144, VXI 215 exceeds 60 l/s the coil
connections will be double
When flow rate on models VXI 190, VXI 290, VXI 360, VXI 288
and VXI 430 exceeds 120 l/s the quantity of coil connections will
be double.
10. Models VXI 9 through VXI 145 have one coil section and one fan
motor, which can be switched on and off.
Models VXI-95, 144, 145, 180 and 215 have one coil section and
one or two fan motors. Fan cycling results in only on-off
operation. On these units all fans need to operate simultaneously.
Models VXI-190, 288, 290, 360 and 430 have 2 coil casing
sections and one or two fan motors per coil casing section. Fan
cycling results in only on-off operation. On these units all fans
need to operate simultaneously per coil casing section.
Multiple speed motors are available for additional steps of
capacity control. Modulating capacity control can be obtained
with fan discharge dampers. Consult your local BAC Balticare
representative for details.
11. For dry operation, standard motors must be increased one size to
avoid motor overloading. Extended surface coils are available to
vastly increase dry capacity without motor size increase. Consult
your local BAC Balticare representative for selection and pricing.
Model
Operating
Weight
(kg)
Shipping
Weight
(kg)
Heaviest
Section
(kg)
H
(mm)
L
(mm)
W
(mm)
Air
Flow
(m
3
/s)
Fan
Motor
(kW)
Spray
Water
Flow
(l/s)
Pump
Motor
(kW)
Coil
Volume
(l)
VXI 144-2
VXI 144-3
VXI 144-4
12070
13390
14710
7270
8210
8470
4680
5610
6550
4075
4310
4545
3550
3550
3550
3607
3607
3607
38,6
40,2
39,4
(1x) 30
(1x) 37
(1x) 37
39,1
39,1
39,1
(1x) 4
(1x) 4
(1x) 4
(2x) 686
(2x) 851
(2x) 1015
VXI 215-1
VXI 215-2
VXI 215-3
VXI 215-4
15830
17730
19730
21690
9130
10460
12035
13435
5510
6900
8310
9710
3840
4075
4310
4545
5388
5388
5388
5388
3607
3607
3607
3607
59,4
57,9
62,3
60,4
(2x) 22
(2x) 22
(2x) 30
(2x) 30
56,8
56,8
56,8
56,8
(1x) 4
(1x) 4
(1x) 4
(1x) 4
(2x) 774
(2x) 1024
(2x) 1272
(2x) 1521
VXI 288-2
VXI 288-3
VXI 288-4
24230
26850
29540
14520
16520
18280
5280*
5610
6550
4075
4310
4545
7226
7226
7226
3607
3607
3607
77,3
80,0
78,8
(2x) 30
(2x) 37
(2x) 37
78,2
78,2
78,2
(2x) 4
(2x) 4
(2x) 4
(4x) 686
(4x) 851
(4x) 1015
VXI 430-1
VXI 430-2
VXI 430-3
VXI 430-4
31750
35550
39550
43560
18230
20890
23770
26845
7210*
7210*
8300
9710
3840
4075
4310
4545
10903
10903
10903
10903
3607
3607
3607
3607
119,2
115,9
124,6
120,7
(4x) 22
(4x) 22
(4x) 30
(4x) 30
113,6
113,6
113,6
113,6
(2x) 4
(2x) 4
(2x) 4
(2x) 4
(4x) 774
(4x) 1024
(4x) 1272
(4x) 1521
VXI - C 17
C
l
o
s
e
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Sound Attenuation
REMARK: Do not use for construction. Refer to factory certified dimensions & weights. This brochure includes data
current at time of publication, which should be reconfirmed at the time of purchase. In the interest of product
improvement, specifications, weights and dimensions are subject to change without notice. Up-to-date engineering
data and more can be found at www.BaltimoreAircoil.com.
XA + XB Sound Attenuation
XC Sound Attenuation
1. Access Door; L1= Intake Attenuator Length; L2= Discharge Attenuator Length; W= Unit Width; H.= Unit Height (see Engineering Data).
1. Access Door; L1= Intake Attenuator Length; L2= Discharge Attenuator Length; W= Unit Width; H.= Unit Height (see Engineering Data).
VXI - C 18
V
X
I
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
(1) VXI 9-1, VXI 18-0 and VXI 18-1 + Attenuator are shipped in 3 pieces
(2) Intake Attenuator: Access opening is 775 mm high, 405 mm wide and is located at each end of the unit.
(2) Discharge Attenuator : Access opening is 405 mm high, 1170 mm wide and is located at blank off side of the unit (VXI-9-X has 650 mm
width)
VXI
Unit + Atten.
# pieces
shipped
# Access
doors
(2)
XA, XB, XC
Dimensions
(mm)
Weights
(kg)
W2 H1 W1 L1 L2 Intake
Solid
Bottom
Discharge Total
XA, XB, XC
Disch.
Att.
Int.
Att.
XA, XB XC XA, XB, XC XA XB XC XA XB XC XA XB XC
9-X 4
(1)
1 2 2352 N.A. 1090 1030 890 902 110 130 N.A. 30 130 150 N.A. 270 310 N.A.
18-X 4
(1)
1 2 2352 N.A. 1090 1030 1800 1816 175 220 N.A. 50 175 220 N.A. 400 490 N.A.
27-X 4 1 2 2352 N.A. 1090 1030 2710 2731 230 300 N.A. 70 280 350 N.A. 580 720 N.A.
36-X 4 1 2 2352 N.A. 1090 1030 3635 3645 300 370 830 100 360 420 N.A. 760 890 N.A.
50-X 4 1 2 2583 3728 1600 1420 3635 3645 380 480 1080 120 440 520 1070 940 1120 2270
70-X 4 1 2 3542 4687 2070 1955 3525 3645 500 630 1420 190 530 650 1330 1220 1470 2940
C72-X 4 1 2 3390 4535 2070 1955 3525 3645 500 630 1420 190 530 650 1330 1220 1810 3400
95-X 4 1 2 3542 4687 2070 2365 3525 3645 500 630 1420 190 660 800 1640 1350 1620 3250
C108-X 4 2 2 3390 4535 2070 1955 5365 5480 660 860 1970 300 760 970 1980 1720 2590 4920
145-X 4 2 2 3542 4687 2070 2365 5365 5480 660 860 1970 300 830 1090 2240 1790 2250 4510
190-X 7 2 2 3542 4687 2070 2365 7050 7322 1000 1260 2840 380 1320 1600 3280 2700 3240 6500
290-X 7 4 2 3542 4687 2070 2365 10730 10998 1320 1720 3940 600 1660 2180 4480 3580 4500 9020
180-X 4 2 2 4145 5290 2560 2965 5365 5480 730 980 2240 350 900 1210 2490 1980 2540 5080
360-X 7 4 2 4145 5290 2560 2965 10730 10994 1460 1960 4480 700 1800 2420 4980 3960 5080 10160
144-X 4 1 2 4752 5897 2560 3575 3525 3645 560 710 1620 280 810 1030 2130 1650 2020 4030
215-X 4 2 2 4752 5897 2560 3575 5365 5480 730 980 2240 420 1020 1410 2920 2170 2810 5580
288-X 7 2 2 4752 5897 2560 3575 7050 7322 1120 1420 3240 560 1620 2060 4260 3300 4040 8060
430-X 7 4 2 4752 5897 2560 3575 10730 10994 1460 1960 4480 840 2040 2820 5840 4340 5620 11160
VXI - C 19
C
l
o
s
e
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Heat Loss Data
(1) Heat loss data based on 10C water and -14C ambient temperature with 20 m/s wind velocity (fans and pump off)
Remote Sump Data
Refer to the "Technical Resources" section "Selection of Remote Sump" for Remote Sump Data.
Model No.
VXI
Minimum flow
(l/s)
Heatloss Data (kW)
(1)
Standard Unit Unit with Hood and PCD's
9-1
9-2
9-3
3,5
5,1
6,2
6,9
3,6
4,0
4,3
18-0
18-1
18-2
18-3
3,5
7,3
9,7
11,8
13,6
5,4
5,8
6,1
6,5
27-1
27-2
27-3
3,5
15,1
18,2
20,6
9,0
9,7
10,4
36-2
36-3
3,5
23,8
27,2
13,3
14,1
50-2
50-3
50-4
5,0
32,7
37,4
42,1
16,9
17,7
18,5
70-2
70-3
70-4
7,0
44,8
50,9
57,0
17,7
18,4
19,1
C72-2
C72-3
C72-4
7,0
44,8
50,9
57,0
17,7
18,4
19,1
95-2
95-3
95-4
8,0
74,3
84,0
93,7
27,2
28,6
30,0
C108-2
C108-3
C108-4
8,0
67,0
75,8
84,6
27,2
28,4
29,6
144-2
144-3
144-4
13,0
112,8
127,6
141,6
25,9
26,4
27,7
145-1
145-2
145-3
145-4
8,0
95,6
111,8
126,0
140,2
35,8
37,6
39,5
41,5
180-2
180-3
180-4
11,0
101,7
114,9
128,1
34,0
35,5
37,0
190-2
190-3
190-4
16,0
149,4
168,9
188,4
63,7
66,9
70.2
215-1
215-2
215-3
215-4
13,0
142,6
169,9
191,5
212,0
54,1
56,8
59,7
62,7
288-2
288-3
288-4
26,0
222,0
248,9
276,3
76,3
80,1
84,1
290-1
290-2
290-3
290-4
16,0
187,2
223,6
252,0
280,4
71,6
75,2
78,9
82,7
360-2
360-3
360-4
22,0
200,4
227,1
253,8
68,5
71,0
73,5
430-1
430-2
430-3
430-4
26,0
280,9
334,8
377,3
418,8
108,8
114,3
120,0
126,0
VXI - C 20
V
X
I
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Structural Support
REMARK: Do not use for construction. Refer to factory certified dimensions & weights. This brochure includes data
current at time of publication, which should be reconfirmed at the time of purchase. In the interest of product
improvement, specifications, weights and dimensions are subject to change without notice. Up-to-date engineering
data and more can be found at www.BaltimoreAircoil.com.
The recommended support arrangement for units consists of parallel I-beams running the full length of the unit, spaced as shown in the following
drawing. Besides providing adequate support, the steel also serves to raise the unit above any solid foundation to ensure access to the bottom
of the unit. To support units in an alternate steel support arrangement, consult your BAC Balticare Representative.
Units without Sound Attenuation
Notes:
1. The recommended support arrangement for VX units consists of
parallel I-beams extending the full length of the unit. Supports
and anchor bolts are to be designed and furnished by others.
2. All supporting beams are to be flush and level at top and must be
oriented relative to gage line as shown.
3. Recommended design loads for each unit support beam should
be 70% of the total unit operating weight applied as a uniform
load to each of the unit beams. The support beam(s) for the
optional intake attenuator(s) needs to carry attenuator only,
uniform load of 250 kg/m. Beams should be designed in
accordance with standard structural practice. For the maximum
allowable deflection of beams under the unit refer to above table.
4. All mounting holes have a diameter of 22 mm at the locations
shown.
5. If vibration isolators are used, a rail or channel must be provided
between the unit (and optional attenuator) and the isolators to
provide continuous unit support. Additionally the support beams
must be designed to accommodate the overall length and
mounting hole location of the isolators that may differ from those
of the unit. Refer to vibration isolator drawings for these data.
1. Outline of Unit; 2. Mounting holes 22 mm, 3. Unit; 4. Air Intake.
VXI - C 21
C
l
o
s
e
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Units with Sound Attenuation
Model
VXI
A
Unit Length
(mm)
B
Unit width
(mm)
C
Center dis.
Length
(mm)
D
Center dis.
Width
(mm)
E
(mm)
F
(mm)
G
(mm)
X
Max. Deflection
(mm)
Mounting
holes
9-X 914 1207 750 1153 - - - 2 4
18-X 1829 1207 1664 1153 - - - 5 4
27-X 2737 1207 2572 1153 - - - 8 4
36-X 3658 1207 3492 1153 - - - 10 4
50-X 3645 1438 3492 1378 - - - 10 4
70-X 3550 2397 3238 2397 - - - 10 4
C72-X 3550 2245 3238 2175 - - - 10 4
95-X 3550 2397 3238 2327 - - - 10 4
C108-X 5385 2245 5074 2175 2486 102 - 13 8
145-X 5385 2397 5074 2327 2486 102 - 13 8
190-X 7226 2397 6914 2327 3238 438 - 13 8
290-X 10903 2397 10586 2327 2486 102 438 13 16
180-X 5388 3000 5074 2934 2486 102 - 13 8
360-X 10903 3000 10586 2934 2486 102 438 13 16
144-X 3550 3607 3238 3537 - - - 10 4
215-X 5388 3607 5074 3537 2486 102 - 13 8
288-X 7226 3607 6914 3537 3238 438 - 13 8
430-X 10903 3607 10586 3537 2486 102 438 13 16
1. Outline of Unit; 2. Mounting Holes 22 mm; 3. Outline of attenuator (optional XA or XB);4. Support Channel attached to optional XA or XB
attenuator; 5.+3. Outline of Attenuator (optional XC); 6.+4. Support Channels attached to optional XC attenuator; 7. Unit; 8. Sound Attenuator;
9. Air Intake.
VXI - C 22
V
X
I
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Engineering Specifications
1.0 Closed Circuit Cooling Tower
1.0 General: Furnish and install ____factory assembled, forced draft,
centrifugal fan, closed circuit cooling tower(s) with vertical air
discharge, conforming in all aspects to the specifications and
schedules as shown on the plans. Overall dimensions shall not
exceed approximately ____mm long x ____mm wide x ____ mm
high. The total connected fan kW shall not exceed ____kW. The total
connected pump kW shall not exceed ____kW. The closed circuit
cooling tower(s) shall be Baltimore Aircoil Company Model(s)
________________.
1.2. Thermal Capacity (water as heat transfer fluid): The closed-
circuit cooling tower(s) shall be warranted by the manufacturer to cool
______l/s of _______ water from ____C to ____C at ____C
entering wet-bulb temperature.
(Alternate1.2.) Thermal Capacity (aqueous glycol solution as heat
transfer fluid): The closed circuit cooling tower(s) shall be warranted
by the manufacturer to cool ________l/s of _____% by volume
ethylene/propylene glycol solution from ______C to _____C at
_____C entering wet-bulb temperature. Coil pressure drop shall not
exceed ________bar.
1.3. Corrosion Resistant Construction: Unless otherwise noted in
this specification, all steel panels and structural members shall be
constructed of heavy-gauge Z600 metric hot-dip galvanized steel,
with all sheared edges given a protective coating of zinc-rich
compound and the exterior protected with the Baltiplus Corrosion
Protection.
(Alternate1.3.) Corrosion Resistant Construction: Unless otherwise
noted in this specification, all steel panels and structural members
shall be protected with the BALTIBOND Corrosion Protection
System. The system shall consist of Z600 metric hot-dip galvanized
steel prepared in a four-step (clean, pre-treat, rinse, and dry) process
with an electrostatically sprayed, thermosetting hybrid polymer fuse-
bonded to the substrate during a thermally activated curing stage and
monitored by a 23-step quality assurance program.
(Alternate 1.3) Corrosion Resistant Construction: Unless
otherwise noted in this specification, all steel panels and structural
members shall be constructed of Type 304 or 316 stainless steel and
assembled with stainless steel nut and bolt fasteners.
1.4. Quality Assurance: The closed circuit cooling tower
manufacturer shall have a management system certified by an
accredited registrar as complying with the requirements of ISO-
9001:2000 to ensure consistent quality of its products and services.
1.5. Warranty: The manufacturers standard equipment warranty
shall be for a period of not less than one year from date of startup or
eighteen months from date of shipment, whichever occurs first.
2.0 Construction Details
2.1.Tower Structure: The closed circuit cooling tower shall be
constructed of heavy-gauge steel utilizing double-brake flanges for
maximum strength and rigidity and reliable sealing of water-tight
joints. All sheared edges shall be protected with a coating of zinc-rich
compound.
2.2. Casing Assembly: The closed circuit cooling tower shall include
a coil casing section consisting of a serpentine coil, spray water
distribution system, and drift eliminators, as indicated by the
manufacturer. Plastic drift eliminators shall be removable in easily
handled sections. They shall incorporate a minimum of three changes
in air direction.
2.3. Coil Assembly: The cooling coil shall be fabricated of
continuous lengths of all prime surface steel at the manufacturers
own facility, and hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. The cooling coil
shall be pneumatically tested at 15 bar. The cooling coil shall be
designed for low pressure drop with sloping tubes for free drainage of
fluid and shall be compliant to PED. Maximum allowable working
pressure shall be 10 bar.
2.4. Water Distribution System: Water shall be distributed evenly
over the coil at a minimum flow rate of 3,1 l/s/m to ensure complete
wetting of the coil at all times by large-diameter, non-clog, plastic 360
distribution nozzles, spaced across the coil face area in PVC spray
branches by snap-in rubber grommets, allowing quick removal of
individual nozzles or complete branches for cleaning or flushing.
Nozzles shall utilize a two-stage diffusion pattern to provide
overlapping, umbrella spray patterns that create multiple intersection
points with adjacent nozzles.
2.5. Spray Pump System: The closed circuit cooling tower shall
include a close-coupled, bronze-fitted centrifugal pump equipped with
a mechanical seal, mounted on the basin and piped to the suction
strainer and water distribution system. It shall be installed so that it
can be drained when the basin is drained. The pump assembly shall
include a metering valve and bleed line to control the bleed rate from
the pump discharge to the overflow connection. The pump motor shall
be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) type with IP 55 protection and
class B insulation suitable for outdoor service, _____ kW,
_______Volt, ________Hz, ______Phase.
(Alternate 2.5.) Spray Pump System-Remote Sump: On installations
requiring a remote sump, the closed circuit cooling tower shall be
modified to accommodate the use of an independent basin and pump
(both by others) for recirculating water.
2.6. Basin Assembly: The combination basin/fan section shall be
constructed of heavy-gauge Z600 galvanized steel. The basin shall
be provided with large area lift out strainers with perforated openings
sized smaller than the water distribution nozzles and an anti-vortexing
device to prevent air entrainment. The strainer and vortex device shall
be constructed of the same material as the cold water basin to
prevent dissimilar metal corrosion.
3.0 Mechanical Equipment
3.1. Fan System: The fans and motors shall be factory installed at the
base of the unit in the dry entering air stream to provide greater
reliability and ease of maintenance. The forwardly curved centrifugal
fans shall be heavy-duty centrifugal flow types. Fan housings shall
have curved inlet rings for efficient air entry and rectangular discharge
cowls shall extend into the basin to increase fan efficiency and
prevent water from entering the fans. Fans shall be mounted on a
steel fan shaft supported by heavy-duty self-aligning, relubricatable
ball bearings with cast iron housings and designed for a minimum L10
life of 40 000 hours (280 000 hrs average life). The fan shaft shall be
protected with a two-part epoxy coating for corrosion protection.
3.2. Fan Motor/Drive System: Fan motor(s) shall be totally enclosed
fan cooled (TEFC), IP-55, class F, selected for _____Pa static
pressure. Fan motor(s) shall be suitable for _____ volts, ____ phase,
____ Hz electrical service and shall be mounted on an easily
adjusted, heavy-duty motor base. V-belt drives and all moving parts
are protected with removable screens.
(Alternate 3.2.) Baltiguard Fan System: Two single speed fan
motors, one sized for full speed and load, the other sized for 2/3
speed and approximately 1/3 of full load kW shall be provided in each
cell for capacity control and standby protection from drive or motor
failure. Two-speed motor(s) is not an acceptable alternative.
VXI - C 23
C
l
o
s
e
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
4.0 Drift Eliminators
4.1 Drift Eliminators: Eliminators shall be constructed of specially
formulated plastic material and be removable in easily handled
sections. They shall have a minimum of three changes in air direction.
5.0 Access
5.1 Basin Access: Circular access doors shall be provided for easy
access to the make-up water assembly and suction strainer for
routine maintenance.
6.0 Sound
6.1 Sound Level: To maintain the quality of the local environment,
the maximum sound pressure levels (dB) measured 15 m from the
cooling tower operating at full fan speed shall not exceed the sound
levels detailed below.
Location 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 dB(A)
Discharge
Air Inlet
End
Back
Closed Circuit Cooling Towers
VFL - C 1
C
l
o
s
e
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
VFL
Product Detail
VFL Closed Circuit Cooling Tower ......................................................... C2
Benefits ....................................................................................................... C4
Construction Details .................................................................................. C6
Custom Features and Options .................................................................. C7
Accessories ................................................................................................. C9
Engineering Data ..................................................................................... C11
Structural Support .................................................................................. C16
Engineering Specifications ..................................................................... C17
VFL - C 2
V
F
L
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
VFL Closed Circuit Cooling Tower
Capacity
Single Model Capacity:
1 to 65 l/s
General Description
VFL Closed Circuit Cooling Towers deliver fully rated thermal performance over a wide range of
flow and temperature requirements. The VFL can be installed indoors and minimize sound levels,
and are available to accommodate limited ceiling or enclosure heights. The VFL design minimizes
installation costs, provides year-round operating reliability, and simplifies maintenance
requirements.
Key Features
Suitable for indoor and outdoor installations
Suitable for high temperature applications
Suitable for locations with limited ceiling or enclosure heights and roof top installations
Low sound
Single side air inlet
Low energy consumption
Low installed cost
Easy maintenance
Reliable year-round operation
Long service life
VFL - C 3
C
l
o
s
e
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
VFL - C 4
V
F
L
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Benefits
Installation and Application Flexibility
Indoor Installations Centrifugal fans can
overcome the static pressure imposed by
external ductwork, allowing this type of cooling
towers to be installed indoors.
Low Profile Models The fan section of low
profile units is adjacent to the casing section to
yield models suitable for use in height sensitive
installations. Low profile models are available
in heights of 1855 mm up to 2560 mm.
Low Sound
Centrifugal Fan - Centrifugal fans have
inherently low sound characteristics.
Single Side Air Inlet - Particularly sound-
sensitive areas can be accommodated by
facing the quiet side (back panel) to the sound-
sensitive direction.
Low Energy Consumption
Evaporative Cooling Equipment minimizes
the energy consumption of the entire system
because it provides lower operating
temperatures. The owner saves money while
conserving natural resources and reducing
environmental impact.
Low Installed Cost
Support All models mount directly on two
parallel I-beams (supplied by others) and ship
complete with motors and drives, factory-
installed and aligned.
Modular Design All models without intake or
discharge accessories ship in one piece to
minimize field installation time and lifting time.
Easy Maintenance
Internal Access - The interior of the unit is
easily accessible for adjusting the float valve,
cleaning the strainer or flushing the basin.
Low profile unit shown in contrast to a
standard unit
Modular Design
VFL - C 5
C
l
o
s
e
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Reliable Year-Round Operation
V-Belt Drive The fans, motor, and drive system are located outside of the moist discharge
airstream, protecting them from moisture, condensation and icing hence allowing a safe year-
round operation.
Long Service Life
Materials of Construction Various materials are available to meet the corrosion resistance,
unit operating life, and budgetary requirements of any project.
Note: For more information, please refer to the section Technical Resources, Materials of Construction.
The interior of the unit is easily accessible V-Belt Drive for Series VL
VFL - C 6
V
F
L
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Construction Details
1. Heavy Duty Construction
Z600 hot-dip galvanized steel panels
2. Water Distribution System
Plastic spray header and branches
Large orifice, non-clog nozzles
Grommetted for easy maintenance
3. Coil
Continuous serpentine, steel tubing
Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication (HDGAF)
Sloped tubes for free drainage of fluid
Designed for max. 10 bar operating pressure according
to PED
4. Drift Eliminators
UV resistant non-corrosive material, impervious to rot,
decay and biological attack
Three distinct changes in air direction to reduce drift loss
significantly
Assembled in easy to handle sections, which can be
removed for access to the equipment interior
5. Fan Drive System
V-belt drive
Heavy-duty bearings and fan motor
6. Centrifugal Fan(s)
Quiet Operation
7. Recirculating Spray Pump
Close coupled, bronze fitted centrifugal pump
Totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) motor
Bleed line with metering valve installed from pump
discharge to overflow
8. Access Door
Circular access door
9. Strainer (Not Shown)
Anti-vortex design to prevent air entrainment
VFL - C 7
C
l
o
s
e
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Custom Features and Options
Construction Options
Standard Construction:
Steel panels and structural elements are
constructed of Z600 heavy-gauge hot-dip
galvanized steel protected with the Baltiplus
Corrosion Protection on the outside of the unit.
Optional BALTIBOND

Corrosion
Protection System:
The BALTIBOND

Corrosion Protection
System, a hybrid polymer coating used to
extend equipment life, is applied before
assembly to all hot-dip galvanized steel
components of the unit.
Optional Stainless Steel Construction:
Steel panels and structural elements are constructed of stainless steel either type 304 or 316.
Optional Water-Contact Stainless Steel Cold Water Basin:
A cost-effective alternative to an all stainless steel unit. The critical components in the cold
water basin and the cold water basin itself are provided in stainless steel. The remaining
components are protected with the BALTIBOND

Corrosion Protection System.


Note: See section Technical Resources, Material of Construction for more details on the materials described above.
Coil Configurations
Standard Serpentine Coil:
The standard condensing coil is constructed of continuous lengths of all prime surface steel,
hot-dip galvanized after fabrication (HDGAF).
Optional Extended Surface Coil:
Coils are available with selected rows finned at 3 to 5 fins per inch for wet/dry applications. The
coil is hot-dip galvanized after fabrication (HDGAF).
Optional Stainless Steel Coil:
Coils are available in Type 304L or 316L stainless steel for specialized applications.
All coils are designed for low pressure drop with sloping tubes for free drainage of fluid.
Fan Drive System
The fan drive system provides the cooling air necessary to reject heat from the system to the
atmosphere. Centrifugal fans, forwardly curved, are driven by matched V-belts with taper lock
sheaves.
Stainless Steel Cold Water Basin
VFL - C 8
V
F
L
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Baltiguard

Drive System
The BALTIGUARD

Drive System consists of two


standard single-speed fan motors and drive
assemblies. One drive assembly is sized for full
speed and load, and the other is sized for
approximately 2/3 speed and consumes only 1/3
of the design kilowatt power. This configuration
allows the system to be operated like a two-speed
motor, but with the reserve capacity of a standby
motor in the event of failure. As a minimum,
approximately 70% capacity will be available from
the low kilowatt motor, even on a design wet-bulb
day. Controls and wiring are the same, as those
required for a two-speed, two-winding motor.
Significant energy savings are achieved when
operating at low speed during periods of reduced load and/or low wet-bulb temperatures.
Low Sound Operation
The low sound levels generated by BAC Products
with centrifugal fans make them suitable for most
installations. For situations when one direction is
particularly sound sensitive, the unit can be
oriented so that the side opposite the air inlet
faces the sound-sensitive direction. Units with
centrifugal fans are also available with factory
designed, tested and rated sound attenuation for
both the air inlet and discharge.
Note: For more information, please refer to the section Technical
Resources, Sound Reduction Options.
Remote Sump Execution
The use of an auxiliary sump within a heated
space is the most satisfactory way to protect sump water from freezing. When the circulating pump
is shut off, all the water in the water distribution, in suspension and in the sump will drain freely to
the auxiliary sump.
Note: For detailed information on the calculation of the remote sump tank, please refer to the section "Technical Resources, Selection of
Remote Sump Tank".
Baltiguard

Drive System
Sound Attenuation at Air Inlet and Discharge
VFL - C 9
C
l
o
s
e
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Accessories
Electric Water Level Control Package
The electric water level control replaces the
standard mechanical make-up valve when a
more precise water level control is required. This
package consists of a float switch mounted in the
basin and a solenoid activated valve in the make-
up water line. The valve is slow closing to
minimize water hammer.
Extended Lubrication Lines
Extended lubrication lines with grease fittings are
available for lubrication of the fan shaft bearings.
Basin Heaters
Units exposed to below freezing ambient temperatures require protection to prevent freezing of the
water in the cold water basin when the unit is idle. Factory-installed heaters, which maintain the
water temperature at 4C, are a simple and inexpensive way of providing such protection. The
heater package includes the heaters, a thermostat and a low level cut out switch to protect the
heaters if the water level is too low. Standard electric heaters are selected for -18C ambient
temperature.
Plume Abatement Coil
The use of plume abatement coils is
recommended to reduce significantly the
formation of visible plume during wet operation
and extend the dry operation capability of the
closed circuit cooling tower. The combination of
discharge air reheating and extended dry
operation minimises plume formation during
weather conditions with high relative humidity.
Plume abatement coils are also an effective way
to save water and water treatment costs.
Note: For more information, please refer to the section Technical
Resources, Plume Abatement.
Model No.
VFL
Heaters -18C
(kW)
VFL 24X 1 x 3
VFL 36X 1 x 4
VFL 48X 1 x 5
VFL 72X 2 x 4
VFL 96X 2 x 5
Electric Water Level Control Package
Plume Abatement Coil
VFL - C 10
V
F
L
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Capacity Control Dampers
Modulating capacity control dampers are available to provide better leaving water temperature
control than can be obtained from fan cycling alone. Fan discharge dampers consist of a single
airfoil type damper blade located in the discharge of each fan housing. A standard electrical control
package for dampers is available from BAC.
Basin Sweeper Piping
Basin sweeper piping provides an effective method of preventing sediment from collecting in the
cold water basin of the unit. A complete piping system, including nozzles, is provided in the unit
basin for connection to side stream filtration equipment.
Note: For more information, please refer to the section "Technical Resources, Filtration".
Discharge Hoods
Discharge hoods reduce the risk of re-circulation in tight enclosures by increasing discharge air
velocity, and can be used to elevate the unit discharge above adjacent walls to comply with layout
guidelines.
Discharge Hoods with Positive Closure
Dampers
BAC offers a full line of standard discharge hoods
with and without positive closure dampers that
are built, tested, and rated specifically for all
Series V Closed Circuit Cooling Towers. The
tapered hoods are designed to increase the
discharge air velocity to avoid recirculation in
extremely tight enclosures. Straight or tapered
hoods can be used to elevate the unit discharge
above adjacent walls. A larger fanmotor may be
necessary when this option is provided. For
details of hoods furnished with positive closure
dampers see section Engineering Data Heat
Loss Data.
Positive Closure Damper Section
VFL - C 11
C
l
o
s
e
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Engineering Data
REMARK: Do not use for construction. Refer to factory certified dimensions & weights. This brochure includes data
current at time of publication, which should be reconfirmed at the time of purchase. In the interest of product
improvement, specifications, weights and dimensions are subject to change without notice. Up-to-date engineering
data and more can be found at www.BaltimoreAircoil.com.
VFL 24 X - VFL 48 X
Model No.
VFL
Operating
Weight
(kg)
Shipping
Weight
(kg)
Heaviest
Section
(kg)
H
(mm)
L
(mm)
L2
(mm)
W
(mm)
Air
Flow
(m
3
/s)
Fan
Motor
(kW)
Spray
Water
Flow
(l/s)
Pump
Motor
(kW)
Coil
Volume
(L)
VFL 241-H
VFL 242-H
VFL 242-J
VFL 243-J
1950
2220
2230
2470
1280
1460
1490
1670
1280
1460
1490
1670
1855
2015
2015
2230
3350
3350
3350
3350
1820
1820
1820
1820
1250
1250
1250
1250
7,6
7,4
8,1
7,9
4
4
5,5
5,5
5,9
5,9
5,9
5,9
0,55
0,55
0,55
0,55
(1x) 176
(1x) 229
(1x) 229
(1x) 282
VFL 361-L
VFL 361-M
VFL 362-M
VFL 363-K
VFL 363-M
2800
2810
3130
3470
3540
1810
1820
2090
2280
2350
1810
1820
2090
2280
2350
1855
1855
2090
2350
2350
4560
4560
4560
4560
4560
2730
2730
2730
2730
2730
1250
1250
1250
1250
1250
12,7
13,8
13,4
10,8
13,0
11
15
15
7,5
15
9,0
9,0
9,0
9,0
9,0
0,75
0,75
0,75
0,75
0,75
(1x) 258
(1x) 258
(1x) 338
(1x) 418
(1x) 418
VFL 481-M
VFL 482-L
VFL 483-L
VFL 483-M
VFL 484-M
3490
3930
4390
4400
4860
2170
2490
2830
2840
3170
2170
2490
2830
2840
3170
1855
2090
2350
2350
2560
5480
5480
5480
5480
5480
3650
3650
3650
3650
3650
1250
1250
1250
1250
1250
15,1
13,6
13,4
14,6
14,3
15
11
11
15
15
12,1
12,1
12,1
12,1
12,1
1,1
1,1
1,1
1,1
1,1
(1x) 341
(1x) 448
(1x) 556
(1x) 556
(1x) 664
1. Fluid in ND100; 2. Fluid Out ND100; 3.Access Door; 4. Make Up ND25; 5. Overflow ND50 for VFL 24X - VFL 36x and ND80 for VFL 48X; 6.
Drain ND50; 7. Vent ND15.
VFL - C 12
V
F
L
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
VFL 72 X - VFL 96 X
General Notes
1. All location dimensions for coil connections are approximate and
should not be used for prefabrication of connecting piping.
2. If discharge hoods with positive closure dampers are furnished,
see table in section Engineering Data Straight Discharge Hood
with PCD for added weight and height.
3. For external static pressure up to 125 Pa use next larger motor
size.
4. For indoor applications of fluid coolers, the room may be used as
a plenum with ductwork attached to the discharge only. If inlet
ductwork is required, an enclosed fan section must be specified;
consult your BAC Balticare representative for details.
5. Fan cycling results only in on-off operation. For additional steps
of control, two-speed fan motors are available. More precise
capacity control can be obtained with modulation fan discharge
dampers or a BALTIGUARD

Drive System
6. Make up, overflow, suction, drain connections and access door
can be provided on side opposite to that shown; consult your
BAC Balticare representative.
7. Shipping/operating weights indicated are for units without
accessories such as sound attenuators, discharge hoods, plume
abatement coils, etc. Consult factory certified prints to obtain
weight additions and the heaviest section to be lifted.
Model No.
VFL
Operating
Weight
(kg)
Shipping
Weight
(kg)
Heaviest
Section
(kg)
H
(mm)
L1
(mm)
L2
(mm)
W
(mm)
Air
Flow
(m
3
/s)
Fan
Motor
(kW)
Spray
Water
Flow
(l/s)
Pump
Motor
(kW)
Coil
Volume
(L)
VFL 721-L
VFL 721-M
VFL 721-O
VFL 722-N
VFL 722-O
VFL 723-L
VFL 723-O
VFL 724-O
5150
5160
5190
5880
5900
6610
6650
7320
3150
3160
3190
3700
3720
4210
4250
4790
3150
3160
3190
3700
3720
4210
4250
4790
1855
1855
1855
2090
2090
2350
2350
2560
4560
4560
4560
4560
4560
4560
4560
4560
2730
2730
2730
2730
2730
2730
2730
2730
2400
2400
2400
2400
2400
2400
2400
2400
20,0
21,8
24,6
22,8
24,0
19,3
23,4
22,9
11
15
22
18,5
22
11
22
22
17,9
17,9
17,9
17,9
17,9
17,9
17,9
17,9
1,1
1,1
1,1
1,1
1,1
1,1
1,1
1,1
(2x) 258
(2x) 258
(2x) 258
(2x) 338
(2x) 338
(2x) 418
(2x) 418
(2x) 498
VFL 961-P
VFL 962-N
VFL 962-O
VFL 962-P
VFL 963-O
VFL 963-P
VFL 964-P
6520
7285
7310
7400
8210
8310
9300
3850
4360
4400
4500
5060
5160
5810
3850
4360
4400
4500
5080
5160
5810
1855
2090
2090
2090
2350
2350
2560
5480
5480
5480
5480
5480
5480
5480
3650
3650
3650
3650
3650
3650
3650
2400
2400
2400
2400
2400
2400
2400
28,7
24,5
25,9
28,3
25,6
27,9
27,4
30
18,5
22
30
22
30
30
24,2
24,2
24,2
24,2
24,2
24,2
24,2
2,2
2,2
2,2
2,2
2,2
2,2
2,2
(2x) 341
(2x) 448
(2x) 448
(2x) 448
(2x) 556
(2x) 556
(2x) 664
1. Fluid in ND100; 2. Fluid Out ND100; 3.Access Door; 4. Make Up ND50; 5. Overflow ND80; 6. Drain ND50; 7. Vent ND15.
VFL - C 13
C
l
o
s
e
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Sound Attenuation
HS Horizontal Intake Sound Attenuation

HD Horizontal Intake Sound Attenuation
1.Discharge attenuator, 2. Access Door, 3. Intake Attenuator; W & H = Unit Dimensions (See Engineering Data).
1.Discharge attenuator, 2. Access Door, 3. Intake Attenuator; W & H = Unit Dimensions (See Engineering Data).
VFL - C 14
V
F
L
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
VS Vertical Intake Sound Attenuation
Note: All units with HS, VS or HD attenuators ship in 2 pieces.
Model No
VFL
Dimensions (mm) Maximum Weight (kg)
L2 L1
Intake Attenuator + Solid
Bottom
Discharge Attenuator Total
HS HD VS HS,HD,VS HS HD HS HD HS HD VS
VFL 24X 2390 3125 2010 1820 460 655 215 235 675 890 725
VFL 36X 2640 3375 2010 2730 465 660 295 315 760 975 830
VFL 48X 2640 3375 2010 3650 465 660 365 385 830 1045 915
VFL 72X 2640 3375 2010 2730 665 980 465 500 1130 1480 1205
VFL 96X 2640 3375 2010 3650 665 980 565 605 1230 1585 1310
1.Discharge attenuator, 2. Access Door, 3. Intake Attenuator, 4. Plenum; W & H = Unit Dimensions (See Engineering Data).
VFL - C 15
C
l
o
s
e
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Heat Loss Data
Discharge Hoods with Positive Closure Dampers (PCDs)
(1) Heat loss data based on 10C water and 14C ambient temperature with 20 m/s wind velocity (fans and pump off).
Remote Sump Data
Refer to the "Technical Resources" section "Selection of Remote Sump" for Remote Sump Data.
Model No.
Minimum Flow (l/s)
Heat Loss Data (kW)
(1)
L W H
VFL Standard Unit
Unit with Discharge Hood
and PCDs
VFL 241-H
VFL 242-H
VFL 242-J
VFL 243-J
4,1
10,6
12,7
12,7
14,4
6,3
6,7
6,7
7,1
1820 1200 865
VFL 361-L
VFL 361-M
VFL 362-M
VFL 363-K
VFL 363-M
4,1
16,0
16,0
19,1
21,6
21,6
9,8
9,8
10,4
11,0
11,0
2730 1200 865
VFL 481-M
VFL 482-L
VFL 483-L
VFL 483-M
VFL 484-M
4,1
23,0
27,2
30,5
30,5
33,8
13,8
14,5
15,2
15,2
15,9
3650 1200 865
VFL 721-L
VFL 721-M
VFL 721-O
VFL 722-N
VFL 722-O
VFL 723-L
VFL 723-O
VFL 724-O
7,9
40,1
40,1
40,1
46,4
46,4
51,5
51,5
56,6
17,8
17,8
17,8
18,6
18,6
19,3
19,3
20,0
2730 2400 865
VFL 961-P
VFL 962-N
VFL 962-O
VFL 962-P
VFL 963-O
VFL 963-P
VFL 964-P
7,9
47,9
56,3
56,3
56,3
63,0
63,0
69,7
20,1
21,0
21,0
21,0
21,9
21,9
23,8
3650 2400 865
1. Access Door.
VFL - C 16
V
F
L
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Structural Support
REMARK: Do not use for construction. Refer to factory certified dimensions & weights. This brochure includes data
current at time of publication, which should be reconfirmed at the time of purchase. In the interest of product
improvement, specifications, weights and dimensions are subject to change without notice. Up-to-date engineering
data and more can be found at www.BaltimoreAircoil.com.
The recommended support arrangement for units consists of parallel I-beams running the full length of the unit, spaced as shown in the following
drawing. Besides providing adequate support, the steel also serves to raise the unit above any solid foundation to ensure access to the bottom
of the unit. To support units in an alternate steel support arrangement, consult your BAC Balticare Representative.
Units with and without Sound Attenuation
Notes:
1. The recommended support arrangement for these units consists
of two parallel I-beams extending the full length of the unit.
Supports and anchor bolts are to be designed and furnished by
others.
2. All supporting beams are to be flush and level at top and must be
oriented relative to gage line as shown.
3. Recommended design loads for each unit support beam should
be 70% of the total unit operating weight applied as a uniform
load to each of the unit beams. Beams should be designed in
accordance with standard structural practice. For the maximum
allowable deflection of beams under the unit refer to above table.
4. All mounting holes have a diameter of 22 mm at the locations
shown.
5. If vibration isolators are used, a rail or channel must be provided
between the unit and the isolators to provide continuous unit
support. Additionally the support beams must be designed to
accommodate the overall length and mounting hole location of
the isolators that may differ from those of the unit. Refer to
vibration isolator drawings for these data.
Model No.
VFL
A
(mm)
B
(mm)
Maximum Allowable
Beam Deflection
(mm)
VFL 24X
VFL 36X
VFL 48X
2426
3334
4253
1194
1194
1194
10
13
13
VFL 72X
VFL 96X
3334
4253
2344
2344
13
13
1. (4) 22 mm mounting holes; 2. Support Beams; 3. Fan Side; 4. Outline of Unit; 5. Outline of Attenuator HS (optional); 6. Outline of
Attenuator HD (optional).
VFL - C 17
C
l
o
s
e
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Engineering Specifications
1.0 Closed Circuit Cooling Tower
1.0 General: Furnish and install ____factory assembled, forced draft,
centrifugal fan, closed circuit cooling tower(s) with vertical air
discharge, conforming in all aspects to the specifications and
schedules as shown on the plans. Overall dimensions shall not
exceed approximately ____mm long x ____mm wide x ____ mm
high. The total connected fan kW shall not exceed ____kW. The total
connected pump kW shall not exceed ____kW. The closed circuit
cooling tower(s) shall be Baltimore Aircoil Company Model(s)
________________.
1.2. Thermal Capacity (water as heat transfer fluid): The closed-
circuit cooling tower(s) shall be warranted by the manufacturer to cool
______l/s of _______ water from ____C to ____C at ____C
entering wet-bulb temperature.
(Alternate1.2.) Thermal Capacity (aqueous glycol solution as heat
transfer fluid): The closed circuit cooling tower(s) shall be warranted
by the manufacturer to cool ________l/s of _____% by volume
ethylene/propylene glycol solution from ______C to _____C at
_____C entering wet-bulb temperature. Coil pressure drop shall not
exceed ________bar.
1.3. Corrosion Resistant Construction: Unless otherwise noted in
this specification, all steel panels and structural members shall be
constructed of heavy-gauge Z600 metric hot-dip galvanized steel,
with all sheared edges given a protective coating of zinc-rich
compound and the exterior protected with the Baltiplus Corrosion
Protection.
(Alternate1.3.) Corrosion Resistant Construction: Unless
otherwise noted in this specification, all steel panels and structural
members shall be protected with the BALTIBOND

Corrosion
Protection System. The system shall consist of Z600 metric hot-dip
galvanized steel prepared in a four-step (clean, pre-treat, rinse, and
dry) process with an electrostatically sprayed, thermosetting hybrid
polymer fuse-bonded to the substrate during a thermally activated
curing stage and monitored by a 23-step quality assurance program.
(Alternate 1.3) Corrosion Resistant Construction: Unless
otherwise noted in this specification, all steel panels and structural
members shall be constructed of Type 304 or 316 stainless steel and
assembled with stainless steel nut and bolt fasteners.
1.4. Quality Assurance: The closed circuit cooling tower
manufacturer shall have a management system certified by an
accredited registrar as complying with the requirements of ISO-
9001:2000 to ensure consistent quality of its products and services.
1.5. Warranty: The manufacturers standard equipment warranty
shall be for a period of not less than one year from date of startup or
eighteen months from date of shipment, whichever occurs first.
2.0 Construction Details
2.1.Tower Structure: The closed circuit cooling tower shall be
constructed of heavy-gauge steel utilizing double-brake flanges for
maximum strength and rigidity and reliable sealing of water-tight
joints. All sheared edges shall be protected with a coating of zinc-rich
compound.
2.2. Casing Assembly: The closed circuit cooling tower shall include
a coil casing section consisting of a serpentine coil, spray water
distribution system, and drift eliminators, as indicated by the
manufacturer. Plastic drift eliminators shall be removable in easily
handled sections. They shall incorporate a minimum of three changes
in air direction.
2.3. Coil Assembly: The cooling coil shall be fabricated of
continuous lengths of all prime surface steel at the manufacturers
own facility, and hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. The cooling coil
shall be pneumatically tested at 15 bar. The cooling coil shall be
designed for low pressure drop with sloping tubes for free drainage of
fluid and shall be compliant to PED. Maximum allowable working
pressure shall be 10 bar.
2.4. Water Distribution System: Water shall be distributed evenly
over the coil at a minimum flow rate of 3,1 l/s/m to ensure complete
wetting of the coil at all times by large-diameter, non-clog, plastic 360
distribution nozzles, spaced across the coil face area in PVC spray
branches by snap-in rubber grommets, allowing quick removal of
individual nozzles or complete branches for cleaning or flushing.
Nozzles shall utilize a two-stage diffusion pattern to provide
overlapping, umbrella spray patterns that create multiple intersection
points with adjacent nozzles.
2.5. Spray Pump System: The closed circuit cooling tower shall
include a close-coupled, bronze-fitted centrifugal pump equipped with
a mechanical seal, mounted on the basin and piped to the suction
strainer and water distribution system. It shall be installed so that it
can be drained when the basin is drained. The pump assembly shall
include a metering valve and bleed line to control the bleed rate from
the pump discharge to the overflow connection. The pump motor shall
be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) type with IP 55 protection and
class B insulation suitable for outdoor service, _____ kW,
_______Volt, ________Hz, ______Phase.
(Alternate 2.5.) Spray Pump System-Remote Sump: On
installations requiring a remote sump, the closed circuit cooling tower
shall be modified to accommodate the use of an independent basin
and pump (both by others) for recirculating water.
2.6. Basin Assembly: The combination basin/fan section shall be
constructed of heavy-gauge Z600 galvanized steel. The basin shall
be provided with large area lift out strainers with perforated openings
sized smaller than the water distribution nozzles and an anti-vortexing
device to prevent air entrainment. The strainer and vortex device shall
be constructed of the same material as the cold water basin to
prevent dissimilar metal corrosion.
3.0 Mechanical Equipment
3.1. Fan System: The fans and motors shall be factory installed at the
base of the unit in the dry entering air stream to provide greater
reliability and ease of maintenance. The forwardly curved centrifugal
fans shall be heavy-duty centrifugal flow types. Fan housings shall
have curved inlet rings for efficient air entry and rectangular discharge
cowls shall extend into the basin to increase fan efficiency and
prevent water from entering the fans. Fans shall be mounted on a
steel fan shaft supported by heavy-duty self-aligning, relubricatable
ball bearings with cast iron housings and designed for a minimum L10
life of 40 000 hours (280 000 hrs average life). The fan shaft shall be
protected with a two-part epoxy coating for corrosion protection.
3.2. Fan Motor/Drive System: Fan motor(s) shall be totally enclosed
fan cooled (TEFC), IP-55, class F, selected for _____Pa static
pressure. Fan motor(s) shall be suitable for _____ volts, ____ phase,
____ Hz electrical service and shall be mounted on an easily
adjusted, heavy-duty motor base. V-belt drives and all moving parts
are protected with removable screens.
(Alternate 3.2.) Baltiguard

Fan System: Two single speed fan


motors, one sized for full speed and load, the other sized for 2/3
speed and approximately 1/3 of full load kW shall be provided in each
cell for capacity control and standby protection from drive or motor
failure. Two-speed motor(s) is not an acceptable alternative.
VFL - C 18
V
F
L
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
4.0 Drift Eliminators
4.1 Drift Eliminators: Eliminators shall be constructed of specially
formulated plastic material and be removable in easily handled
sections. They shall have a minimum of three changes in air
direction.
5.0 Access
5.1 Basin Access: Circular access doors shall be provided for easy
access to the make-up water assembly and suction strainer for
routine maintenance.
6.0 Sound
5.1 Sound Level: To maintain the quality of the local environment,
the maximum sound pressure levels (dB) measured 15 m from the
cooling tower operating at full fan speed shall not exceed the sound
levels detailed below.
Location 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 dB(A)
Discharge
Air Inlet
End
Back
Closed Circuit Cooling Towers
FXV - C 1
C
l
o
s
e
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
FXV
Product Detail
FXV Closed Circuit Cooling Tower ......................................................... C2
Benefits ....................................................................................................... C4
Construction Details .................................................................................. C6
Custom Features and Options .................................................................. C8
Accessories ............................................................................................... C11
Engineering Data FXV Models .............................................................. C13
Structural Support FXV Models ............................................................ C18
Engineering Data FXV-D Models .......................................................... C19
Structural Support FXV-D Models ........................................................ C22
Engineering Specifications ..................................................................... C23
FXV - C 2
F
X
V
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
FXV Closed Circuit Cooling Tower
Capacity
Single Cell Capacity:
FXV: 3-149 l/s
FXV-D: up to 300 l/s
General Description
FXV Closed Circuit Cooling Towers deliver fully rated thermal performance over a wide range of
flow and temperature requirements. Standard design features satisfy todays environmental
concerns, minimize installation costs, maximize year-round operating reliability, and simplify
maintenance requirements.
Key Features
Low Energy Consumption
Low installed cost
Easy maintenance
Application flexibility
Reliable year-round operation
Long service life
FXV - C 3
C
l
o
s
e
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
FXV - C 4
F
X
V
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Benefits
Low Energy Consumption
Evaporative Cooling Equipment minimizes the energy consumption of the entire system
because it provides lower operating temperatures. The owner saves money while conserving
natural resources and reducing environmental impact.
FXV provides heat rejection at the lowest possible energy input and maintenance requirements
via:
- High efficiency, low kW axial fans
- Closed loop cooling, which minimizes process fouling
- Patented combined flow technology, which reduces evaporation directly off the coil,
minimizing the potential for scaling and fouling
- Parallel flow of air and spray water, which eliminates scale-promoting dry spots
- Multiple Fan Motor System: independent fan motor and drive assembly per fan, which allows
for extra steps of capacity control.
Easy Maintenance
Access - Hinged access doors provide easy access to the unit interior. In addition, all FXV
models are provided with an internal walkway as standard. An internal walkway is available as
an option on FXV-D models.
Spacious Interior Provides easy access to the cold water basin, drift eliminators, fan drive
system and heat transfer coil.
Access to Spray Distribution Parallel flow of air and spray water over the coil allows for
inspection and access to the top of the coil during full operation.
Large, hinged access door Spray Distribution System
FXV - C 5
C
l
o
s
e
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Low Installed Cost
Support All models mount directly on parallel I-beams and ship complete with motors and
drives factory-installed and aligned.
Modular Design Units ship in multiple sections to minimize the size and weight of the
heaviest lift, allowing for the use of smaller, less costly cranes.
Application Flexibility
Difficult thermal duties - The combined flow design is ideal for applications requiring a close
approach and/or large range.
Replacement applications Single air inlet models are designed to mount directly on existing
support steel of both crossflow and counterflow units.
Highest capacity in the industry FXV-D models offer the highest single cell capacity of any
evaporative closed circuit cooling tower in the industry. Projects benefit from fewer required
cells, lower overall fan kW, and fewer piping connections.
Reliable Year-Round Operation
Belt Drive System utilizes special corrosion-resistant materials of construction and state-of-
the-art technology to ensure ease of maintenance and reliable year-round performance.
Combined Inlet Shields prevent biological growth from sunlight, act as a filter for air borne
impurities and debris and eliminate water splash out.
Easy Removable Fill (D-models only)
The fill removal system allows nesting the fill in place for cleaning and replacement. The fill section
can easily be reached after removal of the Combined Inlet Shields / drift eliminators. Telescopic fill
support allow for complete fill removal.
Long Service Life
Materials of Construction Various materials are available to meet the corrosion resistance,
unit operating life, and budgetary requirements of any project.
Note: For more information, please refer to the section Technical Resources, Materials of Construction.
FXV - C 6
F
X
V
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Construction Details
FXV Models
.
1. Heavy-Duty Construction
Z600 hot-dip galvanized steel panels
2. Fan Drive System
Premium quality belts
Corrosion resistant sheaves
Heavy-duty bearings
Adapted fan motor for operation in saturated conditions.
3. Low kW Axial Fan
Quiet operation
High Efficiency
Corrosion resistant aluminum
4. Water Distribution System
Visible and accessible during operation
Overlapping spray patterns ensure proper water coverage
Large orifice, non-clog nozzles
5. Coil Section (Not Shown)
Continuous serpentine, steel tubing
Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication (HDGAF)
Sloped tubes for free drainage of fluid
Designed for maximum 10 bar operating pressure according
to PED
6. BACross

Wet Deck Surface with Integral Drift Eliminators


(Not Shown)
Plastic material
Impervious to rot, decay and biological attack
Designed and manufactured by BAC
7. Combined Inlet Shields
Corrosion Resistant
Easily removable
UV resistant plastic material
8. Cold Water Basin
Sloped cold water basin for easy cleaning
Suction strainer with anti-vortex hood
Adjustable water make-up assembly from air inlet side
Integral internal walkway as standard
9. Recirculating Spray Water Pump
Close coupled, bronze fitted centrifugal pump
Totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) motor
Bleed line with metering valve installed from pump discharge
to overflow
10. Hinged Access Doors
Inward swinging door
FXV - C 7
C
l
o
s
e
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
FXV-D Models
1. Heavy-Duty Construction
Heavy-gauge Z600 galvanized steel frame
2. FRP Casing Panels
Corrosion resistant
Maintenance free
UV-resistant finish
3. Fan Drive System
Premium quality belts
Corrosion resistant sheaves
Heavy-duty bearings
Adapted fan motor for operation in saturated conditions.
4. Low kW Axial Fan
Quiet operation
High Efficiency
Corrosion resistant aluminum
5. Water Distribution System
Visible and accessible during operation
Overlapping spray patterns ensure proper water coverage
Large orifice, non-clog nozzles
6. Coil Section
Continuous serpentine, steel tubing
Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication (HDGAF)
Sloped tubes for free drainage of fluid
Designed for maximum 10 bar operating pressure according
to PED
7. BACrossII Wet Deck Surface with Integral Drift Eliminators
Plastic material
Impervious to rot, decay and biological attack
Designed and manufactured by BAC
8. Combined Inlet Shields
Corrosion Resistant
Easily removable
UV resistant plastic material
9. Cold Water Basin
Sloped cold water basin for easy cleaning
Suction strainer with anti-vortex hood
Adjustable water make-up assembly from inside the unit
10. Integral Recirculating Spray Water Pumps (Not Shown)
Close coupled, bronze fitted centrifugal pump
Totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) motor
Bleed line with metering valve installed from pump discharge
to overflow
11. Hinged Access Doors (Not Shown)
Inward swinging door on each end wall
FXV - C 8
F
X
V
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Custom Features and Options
Construction Options
Standard Construction:
Steel panels and structural elements are constructed of Z600 heavy-gauge hot-dip galvanized steel
protected with the Baltiplus Corrosion Protection on the outside of the unit.
Optional BALTIBOND

Corrosion Protection System:


The BALTIBOND

Corrosion Protection System, a hybrid polymer coating used to extend equipment life,
is applied before assembly to all hot-dip galvanized steel components of the unit.
Optional Stainless Steel Construction:
Steel panels and structural elements are constructed of stainless steel either type 304 or 316.
Optional Water-Contact Stainless Steel Cold Water Basin:
A cost-effective alternative to an all stainless steel unit. The critical components in the cold water basin
and the cold water basin itself are provided in stainless steel. The remaining components are protected
with the BALTIBOND

Corrosion Protection System.


Note: See section Technical Resources, Material of Construction for more details on the materials described above.
Prime Surface Coil Configurations
Standard Serpentine Coil:
The standard cooling coil is constructed of
continuous lengths of all prime surface steel, hot-dip
galvanized (outside surface) after fabrication
(HDGAF). The coil is designed for low pressure
drop with sloping tubes for free drainage of fluid.
Each coil is pneumatically tested at 15 bar and PED
compliant.
Stainless Steel Coil:
Coils are available in Type 304L and 316L stainless
steel for specialized applications. The coil is
designed for low pressure drop with sloping tubes
for free drainage of fluid. Each coil is pneumatically
tested at 15 bar and is PED compliant.
Multiple Fan Drive System (not on FXV-D Models)
All FXV-models (except FXV-D) are standard equipped with the multiple fan motor system. This system
consists of an independent fan motor and drive assembly per fan with a plenum partition to allow
independent operation of each fan. This standard feature provides 2 steps of capacity control on dual fan
units and 3 steps of capacity control on triple fan units, as illustrated below.
Hot Dip Galvanised Coil
Individual Motor and Drive on each Fan Extra Steps of Capacity Control
FXV - C 9
C
l
o
s
e
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Low Sound Operation
The low sound levels generated by Series 1500 Units, thanks to the use of high efficiency low noise fans as
standard, make them suitable for installation in most environments. For very sound sensitive installations all
models are also available with a Whisper Quiet sound fan option that significantly reduces the sound levels
generated from the tower with minimal impact on thermal performance.
For extremely sound sensitive installations, factory designed, tested and rated sound attenuation is available
for both the air inlet and discharge.
Note: For more information, please refer to the section Technical Resources, Sound Reduction Options.
Gear Drive System, Externally Mounted Motor (FXV-D models only)
The D-models are available with a gear drive system with external TEFC motor and a non-corrosive carbon-
fiber composite drive shaft with stainless steel hubs is selected with a 2,0 service factor. The motor and drive
shaft ship separately for easy field installation.
Gear Drive System, Closed-Coupled
Motor (FXV-D models only)
The D-Models are available with a close-coupled gear
drive system. Both the gear drive and couplings are
selected with a 2,0 service factor. Gear construction
includes a nickel-alloy steel shaft, casehardened
gears, self-lubrication, and a single piece, gray iron
housing. This drive system ships completely installed
and aligned.
Combined Inlet Shields
Combined Inlet shields prevent biological growth from
sunlight, act as a filter for air borne impurities and
debris and eliminate water splash out.
Remote Sump Execution
The use of an auxiliary sump within a heated space is
the most satisfactory way to protect sump water from
freezing. When the circulating pump is shut off, all the
water in the water distribution, in suspension and in the
sump will drain freely to the auxiliary sump.
Note: For detailed information on the calculation of the remote sump
tank, please refer to the section "Technical Resources, Selection of
Remote Sump Tank".
Gear Drive System, close-coupled motor
Combined Inlet Shields
FXV - C 10
F
X
V
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Removable Bundled Fill
(only FXV-models)
For installations where it is necessary or
recommended to remove the wet deck surface for
more thorough cleaning and disinfection,
removable bundled fill is available. The fill
bundles can be easily lifted and handled by one
person and therefore provide a simple and secure
method of removing and installing. The bundles
can be dismantled and sheet by sheet can be
removed for inspection and cleaning of both
sides. After cleaning the sheets can be re-
bundled and re-installed.
Easy Removable Fill Bundles
FXV - C 11
C
l
o
s
e
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Accessories
External Service Platform with Ladder,
Safety Cage and Handrails
In the event the owner requires easy access to
the top of the unit, the unit can be furnished with
a platform and ladders extending from the base of
the unit to the platform, as well as safety cages,
and handrail packages.
Note: Top air inlet screens are recommended with this option.
Internal Ladder
For access to the motor and drive assemblies
internal ladders are available on all models.
Internal Service Platforms
For access to the motor and drive assemblies on
single air inlet models FXV-54x through FXV-66x and all FXV-D models, an internal ladder and
upper service platform with handrails is available.
Basin Heaters
Units exposed to below freezing ambient temperatures require protection to prevent freezing of the
water in the cold water basin when the unit is idle. Factory-installed heaters, which maintain the
water temperature at 4C, are a simple and inexpensive way of providing such protection. The
heater package includes the heaters, a thermostat and a low level cut out switch to protect the
heaters if the water level is too low. Standard electric heaters are selected for -18C ambient
temperature.
Model No.
FXV
Heaters
-18C (kW)
FXV 422
FXV 423
FXV 424
1 x 4
1 x 4
1 x 4
FXV 432
FXV 433
1 x 6
1 x 6
FXV 442
FXV 443
FXV 444
1 x 6
1 x 6
1 x 6
FXV Q440
FXV Q441
1 x 6
1 x 6
FXV 542
FXV 543
FXV 544
1 x 8
1 x 8
1 x 8
FXV Q540
FXV Q541
1 x 8
1 x 8
FXV 561
FXV 562
2 x 6
2 x 6
FXV Q560
FXV Q561
2 x 6
2 x 6
FXV 642
FXV 643
FXV 644
2 x 6
2 x 6
2 x 6
FXV 661
FXV 662
2 x 8
2 x 8
FXV Q661 2 x 8
FXV-D 288-x 2 x 12
FXV-D 364-x 2 x 14
External Service Platform, Ladder and Safety
Cage
FXV - C 12
F
X
V
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Top Air Inlet Screens
The screens protect the air inlet side above the coil section only. Top air inlet screens are always
in Baltibond Corrosion

Protection System.
Basin Sweeper Piping
Basin sweeper piping provides an effective
method of preventing sediment from collecting in
the cold water basin of the unit. A complete piping
system, including nozzles, is provided in the unit
basin for connection to side stream filtration
equipment.
Note: For more information, please refer to the section "Technical
Resources, Filtration".
Vibration Cut-out Switch
A factory-mounted vibration cut-out switch is
available to effectively protect against equipment
failure due to excessive vibration of the
mechanical equipment system. BAC can provide a vibration cut-out switch in an IP65 enclosure to
ensure reliable protection.
Extended Lubrication Lines
Extended lubrication lines with grease fittings are
available for lubrication of the fan shaft bearings.
Electric Water Level Control Package
The electric water level control replaces the
standard mechanical make-up valve when a
more precise water level control is required. This
package consists of a float switch mounted in the
basin and a solenoid activated valve in the make-
up water line. The valve is slow closing to
minimize water hammer.
Mechanical Equipment Removal
System (Only on FXV-D Models)
The mechanical equipment removal system is a
lightweight, easy to install system for removal and
installation of fan motor or gearbox. (motors up to
22kW)
Positive Closure Damper (PCD) Hoods
The FXVs innovative design results in a low heat
loss when the unit is idle. When additional heat
loss protection is desired, coil air intake hoods
with factory mounted PCDs and damper
actuators can be provided.
Basin Sweeper Piping
Extended Lubrication Lines
Mechanical Equipment Removal System
FXV - C 13
C
l
o
s
e
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Engineering Data FXV Models
REMARK: Do not use for construction. Refer to factory certified dimensions & weights. This brochure includes data
current at time of publication, which should be reconfirmed at the time of purchase. In the interest of product
improvement, specifications, weights and dimensions are subject to change without notice. Up-to-date engineering
data and more can be found at www.BaltimoreAircoil.com.
FXV 42x - FXV 44x
Model No.
FXV
Operating
Weight
(kg)
Shipping
Weight
(kg)
Heaviest
Section
(kg)
H
(mm)
L
(mm)
W
(mm)
Air
Flow
(m
3
/s)
Fan
Motor
(kW)
Spray
Water
Flow
(l/s)
Pump
Motor
(kW)
Coil Volume
(L)
Inlet/Outlet
Coil Conn.
(mm)
FXV 422-H
FXV 422-J
FXV 422-K
FXV 423-J
FXV 423-K
3570
3590
3600
3800
3810
2350
2370
2380
2520
2530
1440
1450
1460
1600
1610
3980
3980
3980
3980
3980
1861
1861
1861
1861
1861
2385
2385
2385
2385
2385
13,0
14,5
16,0
14,3
15,8
(1x) 4,0
(1x) 5,5
(1x) 7,5
(1x) 5,5
(1x) 7,5
12,0
12,0
12,0
12,0
12,0
1,1
1,1
1,1
1,1
1,1
(1x) 226
(1x) 226
(1x) 226
(1x) 278
(1x) 278
(1x) ND 100
(1x) ND 100
(1x) ND 100
(1x) ND 100
(1x) ND 100
FXV 432-K
FXV 432-L
FXV 433-L
5250
5260
5580
3390
3410
3640
2150
2160
2390
3980
3980
3980
2775
2775
2775
2385
2385
2385
23,4
26,0
25,6
(2x) 4,0
(2x) 5,5
(2x) 5,5
18,3
18,3
18,3
2,2
2,2
2,2
(1x) 337
(1x) 337
(1x) 418
(1x) ND 100
(1x) ND 100
(1x) ND 100
FXV 442-K
FXV 442-L
FXV 442-M
FXV 443-L
FXV 443-M
FXV 444-M
6640
6660
6670
7090
7100
7520
4150
4180
4190
4480
4490
4780
2590
2610
2620
2910
2920
3210
3980
3980
3980
3980
3980
3980
3690
3690
3690
3690
3690
3690
2385
2385
2385
2385
2385
2385
26,2
29,2
32,4
28,8
31,9
31,7
(2x) 4,0
(2x) 5,5
(2x) 7,5
(2x) 5,5
(2x) 7,5
(2x) 7,5
31,5
31,5
31,5
31,5
31,5
31,5
2,2
2,2
2,2
2,2
2,2
2,2
(1x) 452
(1x) 452
(1x) 452
(1x) 560
(1x) 560
(1x) 669
(1x) ND 100
(1x) ND 100
(1x) ND 100
(1x) ND 100
(1x) ND 100
(1x) ND 100
FXV Q440-K
FXV Q440-L
FXV Q441-L
6640
6660
7510
4150
4180
4770
2590
2610
3200
3980
3980
3980
3690
3690
3690
2385
2385
2385
26,2
29,1
28,5
(2x) 4,0
(2x) 5,5
(2x) 5,5
31,5
31,5
31,5
2,2
2,2
2,2
(1x) 452
(1x) 452
(1x) 669
(1x) ND 150
(1x) ND 150
(1x) ND 150
1. Fluid in; 2. Fluid out; 3. Make-Up ND15; 4. Overflow ND80; 5. Drain ND50; 6. Access door; 7. Vent ND15.
FXV - C 14
F
X
V
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
FXV 54x - FXV 56x
Model No.
FXV
Operating
Weight
(kg)
Shipping
Weight
(kg)
Heaviest
Section
(kg)
H
(mm)
L
(mm)
W
(mm)
Air
Flow
(m
3
/s)
Fan
Motor
(kW)
Spray
Water
Flow
(l/s)
Pump
Motor
(kW)
Coil
Volume
(L)
Inlet/Outlet
Coil Conn.
(mm)
FXV 542-L
FXV 542-M
FXV 542-N
FXV 543-M
FXV 543-O
FXV 544-O
7960
7970
8000
8600
8630
9260
4960
4970
5000
5410
5450
5890
3240
3250
3270
3690
3720
4160
4790
4790
4790
4790
4790
4790
3690
3690
3690
3690
3690
3690
2985
2985
2985
2985
2985
2985
35,1
38,9
41,3
38,6
43,8
43,5
(2x) 5,5
(2x) 7,5
(2x) 9,0
(2x) 7,5
(2x) 11
(2x) 11
45,1
45,1
45,1
45,1
45,1
45,1
4
4
4
4
4
4
(1x) 671
(1x) 671
(1x) 671
(1x) 832
(1x) 832
(1x) 993
(1x) ND 100
(1x) ND 100
(1x) ND 100
(1x) ND 100
(1x) ND 100
(1x) ND 100
FXV Q540-M
FXV Q540-O
FXV Q541-O
7970
8000
9260
4970
5010
5890
3250
3280
4160
4790
4790
4790
3690
3690
3690
2985
2985
2985
38,9
44,2
43,5
(2x) 7,5
(2x) 11
(2x) 11
45,1
45,1
45,1
4
4
4
(1x) 671
(1x) 671
(1x) 993
(1x) ND 150
(1x) ND 150
(1x) ND 150
FXV 561-M
FXV 561-O
FXV 562-M
FXV 562-O
10650
10710
11590
11650
6430
6490
7090
7150
4020
4090
4680
4740
4930
4930
4930
4930
5520
5520
5520
5520
2985
2985
2985
2985
59,3
67,4
58,9
66,9
(3x) 7,5
(3x) 11
(3x) 7,5
(3x) 11
56,8
56,8
56,8
56,8
5,5
5,5
5,5
5,5
(1x) 762
(1x) 762
(1x) 1007
(1x) 1007
(1x) ND 100
(1x) ND 100
(1x) ND 100
(1x) ND 100
FXV Q560-L
FXV Q560-O
FXV Q561-L
FXV Q561-O
11580
11650
13470
13550
7070
7150
8420
8490
4670
4740
6010
6090
4930
4930
4930
4930
5520
5520
5520
5520
2985
2985
2985
2985
53,0
66,8
52,3
65,9
(3x) 5,5
(3x) 11
(3x) 5,5
(3x) 11
56,8
56,8
56,8
56,8
5,5
5,5
5,5
5,5
(1x) 1007
(1x) 1007
(1x) 1562
(1x) 1562
(1x) ND 150
(1x) ND 150
(1x) ND 150
(1x) ND 150
1. Fluid in; 2. Fluid out; 3. Make-Up ND25; 4. Overflow ND80; 5. Drain ND50; 6. Access door; 7. Vent ND15.
FXV - C 15
C
l
o
s
e
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
FXV 64x - FXV 66x
General Notes FXV
1. Operating weight is for the tower with the water level in the cold
water basin at the overflow.
2. When the flow rate for FXV units exceeds 25 l/s the quantity of
the coil connections will be double. When the flow rate for FXV-Q
units exceeds 57 l/s, connections of ND200 will be used (1 x inlet;
1 x outlet).
3. Inlet and outlet connections are beveled for welding.
4. Standard make-up, drain and overflow connections are MPT.
5. Dimensional drawings show standard (right hand) arrangements.
Left hand arrangements can be furnished by special order.
6. All FXV-models will be shipped in two sections: upper and lower
section.
7. FXV-units have standard Low Noise Fans. For units with optional
Whisper Quiet Fans, a W is added at the end of the model
name.
Model No.
FXV
Operating
Weight
(kg)
Shipping
Weight
(kg)
Heaviest
Section
(kg)
H
(mm)
L
(mm)
W
(mm)
Air
Flow
(m
3
/s)
Fan
Motor
(kW)
Spray
Water
Flow
(l/s)
Pump
Motor
(kW)
Coil Volume
(L)
Inlet/Outlet
Coil Conn.
(mm)
FXV 642-L
FXV 642-M
FXV 642-N
FXV 643-M
FXV 643-N
FXV 643-O
FXV 644-N
FXV 644-O
9070
9090
9110
9770
9800
9810
10470
10480
5380
5400
5420
5880
5900
5910
6370
6380
3490
3510
3530
3990
4010
4020
4480
4490
4790
4790
4790
4790
4790
4790
4790
4790
3690
3690
3690
3690
3690
3690
3690
3690
3610
3610
3610
3610
3610
3610
3610
3610
39,9
44,3
47,0
43,7
46,4
49,6
45,8
49,0
(2x) 5,5
(2x) 7,5
(2x) 9,0
(2x) 7,5
(2x) 9,0
(2x) 11
(2x) 9,0
(2x) 11
45,1
45,1
45,1
45,1
45,1
45,1
45,1
45,1
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
(1x) 723
(1x) 723
(1x) 723
(1x) 896
(1x) 896
(1x) 896
(1x) 1069
(1x) 1069
(1x) ND 100
(1x) ND 100
(1x) ND 100
(1x) ND 100
(1x) ND 100
(1x) ND 100
(1x) ND 100
(1x) ND 100
FXV 661-M
FXV 661-N
FXV 661-O
FXV 662-M
FXV 662-N
FXV 662-O
12260
12300
12320
13270
13310
13330
7000
7050
7060
7710
7760
7770
4360
4400
4420
5070
5110
5130
4930
4930
4930
4930
4930
4930
5520
5520
5520
5520
5520
5520
3610
3610
3610
3610
3610
3610
68,6
72,8
77,9
67,3
62,5
76,5
(3x) 7,5
(3x) 9,0
(3x) 11
(3x) 7,5
(3x) 9,0
(3x) 11
56,8
56,8
56,8
56,8
56,8
56,8
5,5
5,5
5,5
5,5
5,5
5,5
(1x) 821
(1x) 821
(1x) 821
(1x) 1084
(1x) 1084
(1x) 1084
(1x) ND 100
(1x) ND 100
(1x) ND 100
(1x) ND 100
(1x) ND 100
(1x) ND 100
FXV Q661-M
FXV Q661-N
FXV Q661-O
15310
15360
15370
9160
9210
9220
6510
6560
6570
4930
4930
4930
5520
5520
5520
3610
3610
3610
65,4
69,5
74,4
(3x) 7,5
(3x) 9,0
(3x) 11
56,8
56,8
56,8
5,5
5,5
5,5
(1x) 1658
(1x) 1658
(1x) 1658
(1x) ND 150
(1x) ND 150
(1x) ND 150
1. Fluid in; 2. Fluid out ND 3. Make-Up ND25; 4. Overflow ND80; 5. Drain ND50; 6. Access door; 7. Vent ND15.
FXV - C 16
F
X
V
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Sound Attenuation FXV Models
W = Unit Width, see general Engineering data.
Remote Sump Data FXV Models
Refer to the "Technical Resources" section "Selection of Remote Sump" for Remote Sump Data.
Model No
FXV
Dimensions (mm) Weight (kg)
D H
t
Intake Discharge
FXV 42x 1345 4715 100 140
FXV 43x 1345 4715 130 210
FXV (Q)44x 1345 4715 175 255
FXV (Q)54x 1500 5525 250 270
FXV (Q)56x 1500 5665 375 385
FXV 64x 2005 5525 250 310
FXV (Q)66x 2005 5665 375 440
1. Intake Attenuator; 2. Discharge Attenuator.
FXV - C 17
C
l
o
s
e
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Heat Loss Data FXV
Notes:
1. Heat loss data based on 10C coil water and 14C ambient
temperature with 20 m/s wind velocity (fans and pump off).
2. Positive closure dampers are available to reduce the heat loss
during shut down. Consult your BAC Balticare representative for
further details.
3. Electric immersion heaters with thermostat and low level cut out
switch. All components are factory installed in the cooler pan.
Heaters are selected to maintain +4C pan water at 18C
ambient temperature. In outdoor locations trace heating and
insulation of spray pump(s) (by others) may be required for
freeze protection.
4. Hood weight excludes shipping skid weight.
Model No.
FXV
Min Flow
(l/s)
Heat Loss Data (kW) Positive Closure Damper Hood
Total Height
(Ht)
(mm) Standard Unit
Unit with
Positive Closure
Damper Hood
Weight
(kg)
Length
(L)
(mm)
Width
(X)
(mm)
Height
(Y)
(mm)
FXV 422
FXV 423
3
25,6
30,9
13,2
14,1
150
150
1815
1815
1045
1045
835
835
4715
4715
FXV 432
FXV 433
3
38,5
46,4
18,4
19,7
200
200
2730
2730
1045
1045
835
835
4715
4715
FXV 442
FXV 443
FXV 444
5
50,7
61,0
70,7
23,0
24,5
26,0
250
250
250
3645
3645
3645
1045
1045
1045
835
835
835
4715
4715
4715
FXV Q440
FXV Q441
10
50,7
70,7
23,0
26,0
250
250
3645
3645
1045
1045
835
835
4715
4715
FXV 542
FXV 543
FXV 544
6
71,1
86,0
99,9
29,7
31,4
33,0
310
310
310
3645
3645
3645
1490
1490
1490
835
835
835
5525
5525
5525
FXV Q540
FXV Q541
12
71,1
99,9
29,7
33,0
310
310
3645
3645
1490
1490
835
835
5525
5525
FXV 561
FXV 562
6
82,9
105,8
42,8
44,8
450
450
5480
5480
1490
1490
835
835
5665
5665
FXV Q560
FXV Q561
12
105,8
147,6
44,8
48,6
450
450
5480
5480
1490
1490
835
835
5665
5665
FXV 642
FXV 643
FXV 644
7
76,2
91,8
106,4
30,7
32,3
33,9
340
340
340
3645
3645
3645
1615
1615
1615
835
835
835
5525
5525
5525
FXV 661
FXV 662
7
89,3
113,6
44,2
46,2
490
490
5480
5480
1615
1615
835
835
5665
5665
FXV Q661 14 157,4 50,1 490 5480 1615 835 5665
FXV - C 18
F
X
V
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Structural Support FXV Models
REMARK: Do not use for construction. Refer to factory certified dimensions & weights. This brochure includes data current at time
of publication, which should be reconfirmed at the time of purchase. In the interest of product improvement, specifications, weights
and dimensions are subject to change without notice. Up-to-date engineering data and more can be found at
www.BaltimoreAircoil.com.
The recommended support arrangement for units consists of parallel I-beams running the full length of the unit, spaced as shown in the following
drawing. Besides providing adequate support, the steel also serves to raise the unit above any solid foundation to ensure access to the bottom
of the unit. To support units in an alternate steel support arrangement, consult your BAC Balticare Representative.
Units with and without Sound Attenuation
Notes :
1. Support steel and anchor bolts to be designed and furnished by
others.
2. All support steel must be level at the top.
3. Beams must be selected in accordance with accepted structural
practice. Maximum deflection of beam under unit see table.
4. If vibration isolation rails are to be used between the unit and
supporting steel, be certain to allow for the length of the vibration
rails when determining the length of the supporting steel, as
vibration rail length and mounting hole locations may differ from
those of the unit.
5. If point vibration isolation is used with multi-cell units, the
isolators must be located under the support steel, not between
the support steel and the towers.
6. All mounting holes have a diameter of 22mm.
Model
FXV
Max. Deflection
(mm)
Dimensions
(mm) No of 20 mm
Anchorbolts
W L A B C
FXV 42x 5 2385 1861 2325 - 255 4
FXV 43x 8 2385 2775 2325 - 255 4
FXV (Q)44x 10 2385 3690 2325 - 255 4
FXV (Q)54x 10 2985 3690 2925 - 255 4
FXV 64x 10 3610 3690 3550 - 255 4
FXV (Q)56x 12 2985 5520 2925 2440 270 8
FXV (Q)66x 12 3610 5520 3550 2440 270 8
1. Unit Outline, 2. Air Intake, 3. Mounting Holes, 4. Unit
FXV - C 19
C
l
o
s
e
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Engineering Data FXV-D Models
REMARK: Do not use for construction. Refer to factory certified dimensions & weights. This brochure includes data current at time
of publication, which should be reconfirmed at the time of purchase. In the interest of product improvement, specifications, weights
and dimensions are subject to change without notice. Up-to-date engineering data and more can be found at
www.BaltimoreAircoil.com.
FXV-D Double Sided Units
* Actual shipping dimensions.
General Notes FXV-D
1. Operating weight is for the tower with the water level in the cold
water basin at the overflow.
2. The actual size and number of inlet and outlet connections may
vary with the design flow rate. Consult unit print for dimensions.
3. Inlet and outlet connections are beveled for welding.
4. Standard make-up, drain and overflow connections are located
on the bottom of the unit.
5. Models shipped with an optional gear drive may have heights up
to 130 mm greater than shown. Models with fan motor up to
22 kW are belt driven only; models with motor between 22 kW
and 45 kW have standard belt drive but gear drive as an option;
models with 55 kW motor have gear drive only. Motor size for a
specific model is indicated by a letter x at the end of the model
name. Fan type is indicated by an additional letter y at the end
of the model name. L refers to the standard Low Noise Fan;
W refers to the Whisper Quiet fan.
6. FXV-D Models will be shipped in four sections; 1 x lower, 1 x fan
and 2 x coil section. Weight is shown for one coil section.
Model No.
FXV-D
Max.
Operating
Weight
(kg)
Max.
Shipping
Weight
(kg)
Max.
Heaviest
Section
(6)
(kg)
H
(mm)
L
(mm)
W
(mm)
A
(mm)
Max.
Air
Flow
(m
3
/s)
Fan
Motor
(kW)
Spray
Water
Flow
(l/s)
Pump
Motor
(kW)
Coil
Volume
(l)
FXV-D288-3-xy
FXV-D288-4-xy
FXV-D288-1Q-xy
20745
22420
22420
13280
14540
14540
3650
4280
4280
5665
5665
5665
3632
3632
3632
7328
7328
7328
3498
3498
3498
100,7
99,5
99,4
15 to 45
15 to 45
15 to 45
113,6
113,6
113,6
(2x) 5,5
(2x) 5,5
(2x) 5,5
(2x) 1082
(2x) 1294
(2x) 1283
FXV-D364-3-xy
FXV-D364-4-xy
FXV-D364-1Q-xy
24290
26265
26265
15175
16660
16660
4260
5005
5005
5665
5665
5665
4245
4245
4245
8014
8014
8014
4184
4184
4184
126,4
124,7
124,6
18,5 to 55
18,5 to 55
18,5 to 55
113,6
113,6
113,6
(2x) 5,5
(2x) 5,5
(2x) 5,5
(2x) 1268
(2x) 1514
(2x) 1540
1. Fluid out (see Note 2); 2. Fluid in (see Note 2); 3. Make-up ND40; 4. Overflow ND80; 5. Drain ND50; 6. Access Door
FXV - C 20
F
X
V
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Sound Attenuation FXV-D Models
Model No
FXV-D
Dimensions (mm) Weight (kg)
D Ht Both Intake Sides Discharge
FXV-D288 3510 6477 700 500
FXV-D364 4170 6477 850 600
1. Inlet Attenuator; 2. Discharge Attenuator (not for FXV-DW available).
FXV - C 21
C
l
o
s
e
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Heat Loss Data FXV-D
Notes:
1. Heat loss data based on 10C coil water and 14C ambient
temperature with 20 m/s wind velocity (fans and pump off).
2. Positive closure dampers are available to reduce the heat loss
during shut down. Consult your BAC Balticare representative for
further details.
3. Electric immersion heaters with thermostat and low level cut out
switch. All components are factory installed in the cooler pan.
Heaters are selected to maintain +4C pan water at 18C
ambient temperature. In outdoor locations trace heating and
insulation of spray pump(s) (by others) may be required for
freeze protection.
4. Hood weight excludes shipping skid weight.
5. Models shipped with optional gear drive may be higher.
Remote Sump Data FXV-D Models
Refer to the "Technical Resources" section "Selection of Remote Sump" for Remote Sump Data.
Model No.
FXV
Min. Flow
(l/s)
Heat Loss Data (kW) Positive Closure Damper Hood
Total Height
(Ht)
(mm) Standard Unit
Unit with
Positive
Closure
Damper Hood
Total
Weight
(kg)
Length
(L)
(mm)
Width
(X)
(mm)
Height
(Y)
(mm)
FXV-D288-3
FXV-D288-4
FXV-D288-1Q
18
18
36
222,8
258,2
258,2
81,1
86,3
86,3
470 3632 1915 740 6230
FXV-D364-3
FXV-D364-4
FXV-D364-1Q
18
18
36
262,0
303,7
303,7
96,8
101,5
101,5
545 4245 1915 740 6230
FXV - C 22
F
X
V
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Structural Support FXV-D Models
REMARK: Do not use for construction. Refer to factory certified dimensions & weights. This brochure includes data
current at time of publication, which should be reconfirmed at the time of purchase. In the interest of product
improvement, specifications, weights and dimensions are subject to change without notice. Up-to-date engineering
data and more can be found at www.BaltimoreAircoil.com.
The recommended support arrangement for units consists of parallel I-beams running the full length of the unit, spaced as shown in the following
drawing. Besides providing adequate support, the steel also serves to raise the unit above any solid foundation to ensure access to the bottom
of the unit. To support units in an alternate steel support arrangement, consult your BAC Balticare Representative.
Units with and without Sound Attenuation
Notes:
1. The recommended support arrangement for the units consists of
parallel I-beams extending the full length of the unit. Supports
and anchor bolts are to be designed and furnished by others.
2. All supporting beams are to be flush and level at top and must be
oriented relative to gage line as shown.
3. Recommended design loads for each unit support beam should
be 70% of the total unit operating weight applied as a uniform
load to each of the unit beams. Beams should be designed in
accordance with standard structural practice. For the maximum
allowable deflection of beams under the unit see table.
4. All mounting holes have a diameter of 22 mm at the locations
shown.
5. If vibration isolators are used, a rail or channel must be provided
between the unit (and optional attenuator) and the isolators to
provide continuous unit support. Additionally the support beams
must be designed to accommodate the overall length and
mounting hole location of the isolators that may differ from those
of the unit. Refer to vibration isolator drawings for these data.
Model
FXV-D
Max. Deflection
(mm)
Dimensions (mm)
No of 20 mm
Anchorbolts
A B C
FXV-D 288 12 3558 3570 37 12
FXV-D 364 12 4171 3913 37 12
1. Unit Outline; 2. Air Intake; 3 Mounting Holes
FXV - C 23
C
l
o
s
e
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Engineering Specifications
1.0 Closed Circuit Cooling Tower
1.1 General: Furnish and install ____factory assembled closed circuit
cooling tower(s) of induced draft design with single side air entry and
vertical air discharge. Overall dimensions shall not exceed
approximately ____ mm long x ____ mm wide, with an overall height
not exceeding approximately _____ mm. Operating weight shall not
exceed ____ kg. The closed circuit cooling tower(s) shall be Baltimore
Aircoil Company Model(s)________________.
(Alternate 1.1) General: Furnish and install ____factory assembled
closed circuit cooling tower(s) of induced draft design with dual side
air entry and vertical air discharge. Overall dimensions shall not
exceed approximately ____ mm long x ____ mm wide, with an overall
height not exceeding approximately _____ mm. Operating weight
shall not exceed ____ kg. The closed circuit cooling tower(s) shall be
Baltimore Aircoil Company Model(s)________________.
1.2. Thermal Capacity (water as heat transfer fluid): The closed-
circuit cooling tower(s) shall be warranted by the manufacturer to cool
______l/s of _______ water from ____C to ____C at ____C
entering wet-bulb temperature. Coil pressure drop shall not exceed
________ kPa.
(Alternate1.2.) Thermal Capacity (aqueous glycol solution as heat
transfer fluid): The closed circuit cooling tower(s) shall be warranted
by the manufacturer to cool ________l/s of _____% by volume
ethylene/propylene glycol solution from ______C to _____C at
_____C entering wet-bulb temperature. Coil pressure drop shall not
exceed ________ kPa.
1.3. Corrosion Resistant Construction: Unless otherwise noted in
this specification, all steel panels and structural members shall be
constructed of heavy-gauge Z600 metric hot-dip galvanized steel,
with all sheared edges given a protective coating of zinc-rich
compound and the exterior protected with the Baltiplus Corrosion
Protection.
(Alternate1.3.) Corrosion Resistant Construction: Unless
otherwise noted in this specification, all steel panels and structural
members shall be protected with the BALTIBOND

Corrosion
Protection System. The system shall consist of Z600 metric hot-dip
galvanized steel prepared in a four-step (clean, pre-treat, rinse, and
dry) process with an electrostatically sprayed, thermosetting hybrid
polymer fuse-bonded to the substrate during a thermally activated
curing stage and monitored by a 23-step quality assurance program.
1.4. Quality Assurance: The closed circuit cooling tower
manufacturer shall have a management system certified by an
accredited registrar as complying with the requirements of ISO-
9001:2000 to ensure consistent quality of its products and services.
1.5. Warranty: The manufacturers standard equipment warranty
shall be for a period of not less than one year from date of startup or
eighteen months from date of shipment, whichever occurs first.
2.0 Construction Details
2.1 Coil Section: The heat transfer section of the closed circuit
cooling tower shall be encased with removable heavy-gauge
galvanized steel panels (or corrosion resistant, fiberglass reinforced
polyester (FRP) on Models FXV-D). The coil shall be constructed of
continuous serpentine all prime surface steel designed for 10 bar, and
be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. The coil shall be designed for
free drainage of fluid.
2.2 Cold Water Basin: The basin shall include a depressed section
with drain/clean-out connection. Standard accessories shall include
large area, lift-out steel strainers with perforated openings sized
smaller than water distribution nozzle orifices, and integral anti-
vortexing hood to prevent air entrainment, waste water bleed line, and
brass make-up valve with large diameter plastic float arranged for
easy adjustment.
2.3 Casing Panels: For models FXV with single air inlet side the
casing panels shall be constructed of steel matching the structure
defined in section 1.3. For Models FXV-D the casing panels shall be
constructed of corrosion resistant, fiberglass reinforced polyester
(FRP).
3.0 Mechanical Equipment
3.1 Fan(s): Fan(s) shall be heavy-duty, axial flow low noise, with
aluminium alloy blades. Air shall discharge through a fan cylinder
designed for streamlined air entry and minimum fan blade tip
clearance for maximum fan efficiency.
(Alternate 3.1) Fan(s) for FXV-models: Fan(s) shall be of Whisper
Quiet fan design for ultra low sound consisting of specially shaped
aluminium blades with end caps and flexible hub connection.
(Alternate 3.1) Fan(s) for FXV-D models: Fan(s) shall be of
Whisper Quiet fan design for ultra low sound consisting of multi-
blade aerofoil fan design constructed of fibreglass reinforced plastic
blades.
3.2 Fan(s) and shaft(s) shall be supported by heavy-duty, self-
aligning, grease-packed ball bearings with moisture-proof seals and
integral slinger rings, designed for minimum L10 life of 40,000 hours.
Fan(s) shall be belt driven and specifically designed for evaporative
cooling service. Fan and motor sheave(s) shall be fabricated from
cast aluminum.
3.3 Independent motor and drives: Each fan is equipped with an
independent motor and drive assembly, which allows independent
operation of each fan.
3.4 Fan Motor: Fan motor(s) shall be totally enclosed fan cooled
(TEFC), reversible, squirrel cage, ball bearing, designed specifically
for evaporative cooling duty on _____ volts___ hertz ___ phase
electrical service. The motor shall be furnished with special moisture
protection on windings, shafts, and bearings. Each motor shall be
mounted on an easily adjusted, heavy-duty motor base.
4.0 Wet Deck Surface and Drift Eliminators
4.1. BACross

Wet Deck Surface and Drift Eliminators (FXV


models): The wet deck surface and integral drift eliminators shall be
formed from plastic material and shall be impervious to rot, decay,
fungus and biological attack. The surface shall be manufactured and
performance tested by the closed circuit cooling tower manufacturer
to provide single source responsibility and assure control of the final
product. A separate set of drift eliminators shall be removable in
easily handled sections for quick access to the coil. Eliminators shall
have a minimum of three changes in air direction.
(Alternate 4.1) BACross II Wet Deck Surface and Drift
Eliminators (FXV-D models): The wet deck surface and integral drift
eliminators shall be formed from plastic material and shall be
impervious to rot, decay, fungus and biological attack. The surface
shall be manufactured and performance tested by the closed circuit
cooling tower manufacturer to provide single source responsibility
and assure control of the final product. A separate set of drift
eliminators shall be removable in easily handled sections for quick
access to the coil. Eliminators shall have a minimum of three changes
in air direction.
FXV - C 24
F
X
V
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
5.0 Combined Inlet Shields
5.1. Combined Inlet Shields: Combined inlet shields shall be
separate from the wet deck surface and removable to allow easy
access for inspection of the air/water interface at the air inlet side of
the equipment. Combined inlet shields shall prevent UV-light and
debris from entering the unit, as well as prevent water splash out
during fan cycling. They shall be constructed of maintenance free,
corrosion and UV resistant material.
6.0 Spray Water System
6.1 Spray Water Pump(s): The closed circuit cooling tower shall
include an appropriate number of close-coupled, bronze-fitted
centrifugal pump and motor assemblies equipped with mechanical
seal, mounted in the basin and piped from the suction connection to
the water distribution system. The pump motor(s) shall be the totally
enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) type suitable for _____ volts, ___ phase,
and ____ hertz electrical service. The system shall include a metering
valve and bleed line to control the bleed rate from the pump discharge
to the overflow connection.
6.2 Water Distribution System: Water shall be distributed evenly
over the coil at a flow rate sufficient to ensure complete wetting of the
coil at all times. Large diameter, non-clog, 360 plastic distribution
nozzles shall utilize a two stage diffusion pattern to provide
overlapping, umbrella spray patterns that create multiple intersection
points with adjacent nozzles. The branches and spray nozzles shall
be held in place by snap-in rubber grommets, allowing quick removal
of individual nozzles or complete branches for cleaning or flushing.
7.0 Access
7.1 Plenum Access: A large, hinged access door shall be provided
for access to the coil, drift eliminators and fan plenum section. The
water make-up valve, float ball and suction strainer shall be easily
accessible.
8.0 Sound
8.1 Sound Level: To maintain the quality of the local environment,
the maximum sound pressure levels (dB) measured 15 m from the
cooling tower operating at full fan speed shall not exceed the sound
levels detailed below.
Location 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 dB(A)
Discharge
Air Inlet
End
Back
(not on D-models)
Overview
HWD - D 1
W
a
t
e
r

S
a
v
i
n
g

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
Water Saving Hybrid Wet-Dry Products
Product Group Detail
General Information ................................................................................. D2
Principle of Operation .............................................................................. D2
Configuration ............................................................................................. D2
Fan System ................................................................................................. D3
Capacity Range .......................................................................................... D4
Maximum Entering Fluid Temperature .................................................. D4
Typical Applications .................................................................................. D4
Product Line Overview Table .................................................................. D4
Advantages of Intelligent Water Saving Products ................................. D6
Engineering Considerations ..................................................................... D6
HWD - D 2
O
v
e
r
v
i
e
w
Baltimore Aircoil
General Information
Water saving and hybrid products provide cooling for many types of systems, and the specific
application will largely determine which BAC product is best suited for a project. Water saving and
hybrid products can be categorised within three different technologies. These are the hybrid wet-
dry, dry and adiabatic and the Product Line Overview Table indicates the BAC products available
under each of these technologies. This overview table is intended as a general guide. Specialised
assistance is available through your local BAC Balticare Representative.
Refer to the section Advantages of water saving and hybrid wet-dry products for the advantages
of each technology.
Principle of Operation
Water saving and hybrid products are usually of the closed circuit type where the heat load to be
rejected is transferred from the process fluid (Fluid to be cooled) to the ambient air through a heat
exchange coil. The coil serves to isolate the process fluid from the outside air, keeping it clean and
contamination free in a closed loop.
The Hybrid wet-dry products cool the liquid to be cooled by efficiently combining dry sensible air
cooling with evaporative cooling. These products include two or more distinctive heat transfer
surfaces or sections combined into one product optimising the use of the ambient dry and wet bulb
temperature.
Dry Fluid Coolers cool the liquid in a closed circuit by means of sensible heat transfer from the high-
density finned coil block to the air at ambient dry bulb temperature.
TrilliumSeries Coolers are dry coolers equipped with an Adiabatic Pre-Cooler section. Before the
air is drawn through the high density finned coil, it is pre-cooled adiabatically as it passes through
an evaporative pad where water is evaporated in the air.
Configuration
BAC manufactures two types of water saving and hybrid wet-dry products: combined flow and
counterflow.
Combined Flow
Combined flow is the use of a prime surface and a dry finned heat exchange coil in combination
with a wet deck surface for heat transfer in a hybrid wet-dry product. The addition of wet deck
surface hybrid wet-dry product reduces evaporation in the coil section and is also used as an
adiabatic pre-cooler section. BACs combined hybrid wet-dry products utilize parallel flow of air and
spray water over the prime surface coil, counterflow of fluid and air in the dry finned coil and
crossflow air/water flow through the wet deck surface.
In parallel flow, air and water flow over the coil in the same direction. The process fluid travels from
the bottom to the top of the coil, increasing efficiency by bringing the coldest spray water and air
in contact with the process fluid at its coldest temperature.
Combined Flow: Parallel flow of air and water
over the coil in counterflow with the fluid
inside the coil
Combined flow: Crossflow configuration over
the wet deck
HWD - D 3
W
a
t
e
r

S
a
v
i
n
g

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
... because temperature matters
Counterflow
In a counterflow water saving and hybrid wet-dry product, the flow of the air is in the opposite
direction of the spray water or fluid inside the heat exchange coil. In BACs counterflow dry and
adiabatic products, air travels vertically up through the coil while the fluid in the coil travels down.
Fan System
The flow of air through most factory assembled water saving hybrid wet-dry products is provided
by one or more mechanically driven fans. The fan(s) may be axial or centrifugal, each type having
its own distinct advantages.
Centrifugal fan units are capable of overcoming reasonable amounts of external static pressure (
125 Pa), making them suitable for both indoor and outdoor installations. Centrifugal fans are also
inherently quieter than axial fans, although the difference can be overcome through the application
of optional fan speed control, low sound fans and/or sound attenuation on axial fan units. Fans can
be applied in an induced draft or a forced draft configuration.
Induced Draft
The rotating air handling components of induced draft equipment are mounted in the top deck of
the unit, minimising the impact of fan noise on near-by neighbours. The air being drawn through
the unit hereby discharges over the inducing fan. The use of corrosion resistant materials ensures
long life and minimises maintenance requirements for the air handling components.
Forced Draft
Rotating air-handling components are located on the air inlet face at the base of forced draft towers
whereby fresh air is blown through the unit. This base fan position facilitates easy access for
routine maintenance and service. Additionally, location of these components in the dry entering air
stream extends component life by isolating them from the corrosive saturated discharge air when
units operate in evaporative mode.
Combined flow: Counterflow of air over the
coil and fluid inside the coil
Counterflow Configuration
Centrifugal Fans Axial Fans
HWD - D 4
O
v
e
r
v
i
e
w
Baltimore Aircoil
Capacity Range
In the Product Line Overview Table, product capacities are called out in terms of a fluid flow rate
for hybrid wet-dry products and nominal kW of heat rejection capacity for dry and TrilliumSeries
products. All capacities shown are for a single cell; multiple cell units can be applied to achieve
larger capacities.
Maximum Entering Fluid Temperature
All BAC hybrid wet-dry products are capable of withstanding entering fluid temperatures as high
as 82C. All BAC dry products are capable to withstanding entering fluid temperatures as high as
65C and all BAC TrilliumSeries Products as high as 60C.
Typical Applications
A list of typical applications is provided in the Product Line Overview Table for your reference.
Product Line Overview Table
1. Air in; 2. Air out; 3. Fluid in; 4. Fluid out; 5. Water, 6.Combined Inlet Shields; 7. Wet deck surface; 8. Cold water basin; 9. Water distribution
system; 10. Spray water pump; 11. Coil; 12. Finned coil; 13. Three way valve.
HXI HFL
Principle of Operation
Technology
Hybrid Wet-Dry closed circuit cooling tower
combining sensible and evaporative
heat transfer
Hybrid Wet-Dry closed circuit cooling tower combining sensible
and evaporative heat transfer.
Configuration Combined Flow Counterflow
Fan System Axial Fan, Induced Draft Centrifugal Fan, Forced Draft
Capacity Range
(Single Cell)
3 to 50 l/s 9 to 90 l/s
Maximum Entering
Fluid Temperature
82C 82C
Typical Applications
Medium to large HVAC & industrial applications
Installations requiring plume abatement
Installation requiring water conservation
Low energy consumption
Easy maintenance
Medium to large HVAC & industrial applications
Installations requiring plume abatement
Installation requiring water conservation
Sound sensitive locations
Indoor Installations
1
2
3
4
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
1
2
2
5
1
2
3
4
5
8
9
10
11
12
13
HWD - D 5
W
a
t
e
r

S
a
v
i
n
g

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
... because temperature matters
1. Dry heat exchanger coil; 2. Fluid Inlet. 3. Fluid Outlet; 4. Axial Fans; 5. High efficient evaporative cooling pad; 6. Water inlet connections; 7.
Water outlet connections; 8. Adiabatic cooling of ambient air; 9. Air discharge; 10. Air in.
REMARK: For the principle of operation for HXC (Hybrid Condenser) and DCV-AD (TrilliumSeries Condenser) refer to
the Evaporative Condenser Overview.
DFCH / DFCT or DFCV Dry Coolers
(only DFCH principle of operation is shown)
DFCV-AD TrilliumSeries Coolers
Dry Fluid Coolers cool the liquid in a closed circuit by means of sensible heat
transfer using a high-density finned coil block.
TrilliumSeries Coolers equipped with an Adiabatic Pre-Cooler cool
the liquid by sensible heat transfer only. Before the air is drawn
through the high density finned coil however, it is pre-cooled adia-
batically as it passes through an evaporative pad where water is
evaporated in the air.
Counterflow Counterflow
Axial Fan, Induced Draft Axial Fan, Induced Draft
30 kW 1110 kW at Eurovent Conditions according to EN 1048.
1,5 80 l/s 34% Ethylene Glycol Solution at 40
o
C / 35
o
C / 25
o
C dry bulb
temperature
220 kW 1620 kW at Eurovent Conditions according to EN 1048.
12 86 l/s 34% Ethylene Glycol Solution at 40
o
C / 35
o
C / 25
o
C dry
bulb temperature
65
o
C
High temperature execution available on DFC, max. 150
o
C,
max. 10 bar pressure
60
o
C
Small to medium HVAC and industrial applications
Locations with limited water availability
Large range, large approach applications
High temperature industrial applications
Small to medium HVAC and industrial applications
Locations with limited water and limited space availability
1
2
3
4
9
10
9
10
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
10
HWD - D 6
O
v
e
r
v
i
e
w
Baltimore Aircoil
Advantages of Intelligent Water Saving Products
Low water and water treatment cost, vastly improved operational safety and virtual elimination of
visible plume are the main advantages of intelligent water saving products from Baltimore Aircoil.
With a choice between different configurations and a vast array of material options and
accessories water saving technology from Baltimore Aircoil can be optimally incorporated in any
application.
Low Water Consumption reduces operating cost
In many European countries water has become an expensive commodity and hence the cost of
water often represents a significant portion of the total annual operating cost of conventional
evaporative cooling equipment. To significantly reduce operating cost, BAC can offer a variety of
intelligent water saving solutions. These solutions include air-cooled products with no water
consumption at all, TrillumSeries coolers and wet-dry hybrid coolers, which consume only water
when needed and as much as needed. The broad array of water saving products allows to optimise
a choice for each application, including the ones where low cooling temperatures need to be
achieved during a hot summer day. The cost premium associated with water saving products is
usually offset in short time by the operating cost savings that can be achieved.
Lower Water Treatment Cost
The cost for water treatment in cooling applications is generally related to the amount of water
consumed during a year. Water saving intelligence therefore also saves water treatment cost.
For hybrid and TrilliumSeries products periods of dry operation exist, where no water treatment at
all is needed and the water treatment system does not need to be inspected, since there is no
water in the products. In particular for TrilliumSeries coolers, extensive periods of dry operation can
be expected. During such periods no biological contamination of the environment can happen.
Reduction/Elimination of Visible Plume
In certain applications visible plume is considered as hinder. The use of "intelligent" water saving
products from BAC will either greatly reduce the formation of visible plume or completely eliminate
it. Especially when during the winter period dry operation of the products can be applied, the
occurrence of visual plume will virtually be eliminated.
Engineering Considerations
Location
Units must have an adequate supply of fresh air to the air inlet(s). When units are located adjacent
to building walls or in enclosures, care must be taken to ensure that the warm, saturated discharge
air is not deflected off surrounding walls or enclosures and drawn back to the air inlet(s).
Warning: Each unit should be located and positioned to prevent the introduction of the warm discharge air and the
associated drift (hybrid wet-dry products), which may contain chemical or biological contaminants including
Legionella, into the ventilation systems of the building on which the unit is located or those of adjacent buildings.
Note: For detailed recommendations on layout, please consult your local BAC Balticare Representative.
For HFL products, bottom screens or solid bottom panels may be desirable or necessary for safety,
depending on the location and conditions at the installation site.
HWD - D 7
W
a
t
e
r

S
a
v
i
n
g

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
... because temperature matters
Piping and Valves
Piping must be sized and installed in accordance with good piping practice. All piping should be
supported by pipe hangers or other supports, not by the unit.
Some installations may require flow balancing valves (supplied by others) at the coil inlets to
balance the flow to individual coils and cells. External shutoff valves on the closed circuit loop
(supplied by others) may also be required if the system design necessitates the isolation of
individual cells.
Although equalizing lines can be used to balance water levels between multi-cell hybrid wet-dry
products, the spray water for each cell must be treated separately, and a separate make-up must
be provided for each cell. Note that a common remote sump for multi-cell installations can simplify
make-up and water treatment see "Technical Resources, Remote Sump Tank Selection" for
details. See the appropriate Operating and Maintenance Instruction Manual for more information
on water treatment.
Capacity Control
Variable Frequency Drives (VFD)
Installations which are to be controlled by Variable Frequency Drives (VFD) require the use of an
inverter duty motor as designed IEC 34.1, which recognizes the increased stresses placed on
motors by these drive systems. Inverter duty motors must be furnished on VFD applications in
order to maintain the motor warranty. Fan motors must be furnished with thermal protection (either
PTC sensors or coil thermostats normally open, or normally closed). The motor protection consists
of temperature sensitive cutout devices embedded in the motor windings (minimum 3 per motor).
The minimum fan motor speed during normal operation should not be below 30% of the speed
indicated on the motor nameplate. This corresponds with 15 Hz for a 50 Hz supply and 18 Hz for
a 60 Hz supply.
Warning: When the fan speed is to be changed from the factory-set speed, including through the use of a variable
speed control device, steps must be taken to avoid operating at or near fan speeds that cause a resonance with the
unit or its supporting structure. At start-up, the variable frequency drive should be cycled slowly between zero and
full speed and any speeds that cause a noticeable resonance in the unit should be locked out by the variable speed
drive.
Fan Cycling
Fan cycling is the simplest method of capacity control. The number of steps of capacity control can
be increased using the Baltiguard

Fan System, the independent fan motor option, or two-speed


fan motors in conjunction with fan cycling (see the Custom Features & Options section of the
appropriate product line to determine whether the Baltiguard

Fan System or the independent fan


motor option are available; two-speed motors are available for all products). These options provide
substantial energy savings when compared to simple fan cycling.
Warning: Rapid on-off cycling can cause the fan motor to overheat. It is recommended that controls be set to allow a
maximum of 6 on-off cycles per hour.
Note: Spray water pump cycling should not be used for capacity control. This method of control often results in short
cycling of the pump motor as capacity changes substantially with pump cycling. In addition, alternate wetting and
drying of the coil promotes scaling of the heat exchanger coil surface.
Capacity Control Dampers (HFL models only)
On centrifugal fan models, modulating capacity control dampers are available to provide close
control of the leaving temperature. See Section "Accessories" or contact your local BAC Balticare
representative.
HWD - D 8
O
v
e
r
v
i
e
w
Baltimore Aircoil
Vibration Cut-out Switch
Vibration cut-out switches are recommended on all axial fan installations. Vibration cut-out
switches are designed to interrupt power to the fan motor and/or provide an alarm to the operator
in the event of excessive vibration. BAC offers both electronic and mechanical vibration cut-out
switches on all water saving and hybrid products.
Water Treatment (HFL, HXI and HXC models only)
As water evaporates in the unit, the dissolved solids originally present in the water remain in the
system. The concentration of these dissolved solids increases rapidly and can cause scale and
corrosion. In addition, airborne impurities and biological contaminants, including Legionella, may
be introduced into the circulating water. To control all potential contaminants, a water treatment
program must be employed. In many cases, a simple bleed-off may be adequate for control of
scale and corrosion.
However, biological contamination, including Legionella, can be controlled only through the use of
biocides. Such treatment should be initiated at system startup, after periods of equipment
shutdown, and continued regularly thereafter. Accordingly, it is strongly recommended a biocide
treatment be initiated when the unit is first filled with water and continued regularly thereafter. For
more information, consult the appropriate Operating and Maintenance Manual.
When a water treatment program is employed, it must be compatible with construction materials.
Batch feeding of chemicals into the unit is not recommended. If units are constructed with optional
corrosion resistant materials, acid treatment may be considered; however, the water quality must
be maintained within the guidelines set forth in the Operating and Maintenance Instructions.
Note: Unless a common remote sump is utilised, each cell of a multi-cell installation must be treated as a separate
entity, even if the cold water basins are equalized.
For complete Water Quality Guidelines, see the appropriate Operating and Maintenance
Instruction Manual, available at www.baltimoreaircoil.com. For specific recommendations on water
treatment, contact a competent water treatment supplier.
Wet Deck Surface Compatibility (HXI models only)
The standard wet deck surface in a HXI Hybrid Closed Circuit Cooling Tower is constructed of a
plastic material This wet deck surface is compatible with the water found in most evaporative
cooling applications. For applications where the entering fluid temperature exceeds 82C, contact
your local BAC Balticare Representative to confirm that the standard wet deck is acceptable.
Sound Levels
Sound rating data are available for all BAC models. When calculating the sound levels generated
by a unit, the designer must take into account the effects of the geometry of the tower as well as
the distance and direction from the unit to noise-sensitive areas. Whisper Quiet fans and intake
and discharge sound attenuation can be supplied on certain models to provide reduced sound
characteristics (see the Custom Features and Options section of the appropriate product line for
details). The Baltiguard Fan System, two-speed motors, or variable frequency drives can also be
used to reduce sound during periods of non-peak thermal loads. For more information on sound
and how it relates to evaporative cooling equipment, see Section "Technical Resources,
Fundamentals of Sound". Dry and TrilliumSeries coolers for sound sensitive applications are
offered with low speed motors. For detailed low sound selections, please consult your local BAC
Balticare Representative.
HWD - D 9
W
a
t
e
r

S
a
v
i
n
g

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
... because temperature matters
Winterization (HFL HXI and HXC models only)
When a unit is shut down in freezing weather, the basin water must be protected by draining to an
indoor auxiliary remote sump tank or by providing supplementary heat to the cold water basin.
Supplementary heat can be provided by electric immersion heaters or in some cases, hot water,
steam coils, or steam injectors. All exposed water piping, make-up lines, and spray pumps (if
applicable) that do not drain at shutdown should be traced with electric heater tape and insulated.
When dry operation is planned for low ambient conditions, centrifugal fan units should be supplied
with oversized fan motors to prevent motor overload when the spray water is not operating. For
remote sump applications, the spray water pump must be selected for the required flow at a total
head which includes the vertical lift, pipe friction (in supply and suction lines) plus the required
pressure at the inlet header of the water distribution system (14 kPa). A valve should always be
installed in the discharge line from the pump to permit adjusting flow to the unit requirement. Inlet
water pressure should be measured by a pressure gauge installed in the water supply riser at the
spray water inlet, and adjusted to the specified inlet pressure.
Indoor Installation (HFL models only)
Many indoor installations require the use of inlet and/or discharge ductwork. Units installed with
inlet ductwork must be ordered with solid-bottom panels. Generally, intake ducts are used
only on smaller units while the equipment room is used as a plenum for larger units. Discharge
ductwork will normally be required to carry the saturated discharge air from the building.
Both intake and discharge ductwork must have access doors to allow servicing of the fan
assembly, drift eliminators, and water distribution system. All ductwork is supplied and installed by
others and should be symmetrical and designed to provide even air distribution across the face of
air intakes and discharge openings. Such ductwork may increase the external static pressure on
the unit, requiring a larger fan motor to be installed. This external static pressure must be quantified
(in Pa) to BAC to allow for suitable fan motor sizing.
Warning: The discharge opening must be positioned to prevent the introduction of discharge air into the fresh air
intakes serving the unit or the ventilation systems of adjacent buildings.
Note: Axial fan units are not suitable for indoor installations.
Safety
Adequate precautions, appropriate for the installation and location of these products, should be
taken to safeguard the public from possible injury and the equipment and the premises from
damage. Operation, maintenance and repair of this equipment should be undertaken only by
personnel qualified to do so. Proper care, procedures and tools must be used in handling, lifting,
installing, operating, maintaining, and repairing this equipment to prevent personal injury and/or
property damage.
Fluid Compatibility
The fluid to be cooled must be compatible with the coil material. Fluids not compatible with coil
materials can lead to corrosion and tube failure. Certain fluids may require occasional pressure
cleaning or mechanical cleaning of the inside of coil tubes. In such cases the coil must be designed
to provide this capability. Refer to the appropriate product line section for details of the available
coil material.
Open / Closed System (HXI and HFL unit coils)
The standard galvanised steel serpentine coils (prime surface) are carbon steel, hot-dip
galvanised on the outside only, and are intended for application on closed, pressurised
systems which are not open to the atmosphere. Stainless steel coils are available to cool
corrosive fluids or water and ethylene/propylene glycol solutions in systems open to the
atmosphere
HWD - D 10
O
v
e
r
v
i
e
w
Baltimore Aircoil
Protection Against Coil Freezing
At below freezing ambient conditions, the unit can experience heat loss even without the
recirculating spray water pump and fans in operation. Without a heat load on the circulating fluid,
coil freezing can occur even at full flow. Protective means are readily available to avoid potential
freeze problems. Where the system will permit, the best protection against coil freeze-up is the use
of an industrially inhibited anti-freeze solution. When this is not possible, the system must be
designed to meet both of the following conditions:
1. Maintain minimum recommended flow through the coil at all times, as per the table below:
2. Maintain a heat load on the circulating fluid so that the temperature of the fluid leaving the coil
will not be below 7C.
If the process load is extremely light, or if the process is periodically shut off entirely, then an
auxiliary heat load must be applied to the circulating fluid when below freezing ambient
temperatures exist to prevent damage to the coil. Refer to the Heat Loss Data table (see the
product section for applicable heat loss data) for the auxiliary heat load requirement. The amount
of auxiliary heat necessary to prevent coil freezing can be further reduced by the use of a positive
closure damper hood and insulation.
Draining the coil is not recommended as a normal method of freeze protection. However, draining
is acceptable as an emergency method of freeze protection. Frequent draining can promote
corrosion inside the coil tubes. If the coil is not protected by an industrially inhibited anti-freeze
solution, an automatic drain valve and air vent is recommended to drain the coil if flow stops or fluid
temperature drops below 7C when the ambient temperature is below freezing. Note that cold
water basin heaters will not provide freeze protection for the coil.
The coil of dry and TrilliumSeries coolers can never drain completely. If a minimum heat load can
not be guaranteed on the dry coil during the winter period, then the use of an anti-freeze solution
is the only available protection against coil freezing.
Warranties
Please refer to the Limitation of Warranties applicable to and in effect at the time of the sale/
purchase of these products.
Model Minimum Flow (l/s)
HFL 36X - 48X 4,1
HFL 72X - 96X 7,9
HFL 108X - 144X 12
HFL 150X - 192X 15,8
HFL 180X - 240X 19,9
HFL 216X - 288X 24
HXI 42 X, 43X 3
HXI 44X 5
HXI 54X, 56X 6
HXI Q54X, Q56X 12
HXI 64X, 66X 7
HXI Q64X, Q66X 14
Hybrid Closed Circuit Cooling Towers
HXI - D 1
W
a
t
e
r

S
a
v
i
n
g

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
HXI
Product Detail
HXI Hybrid Closed Circuit Cooling Towers .......................................... D2
Benefits ....................................................................................................... D4
Construction Details .................................................................................. D6
Custom Features and Options .................................................................. D8
Accessories ............................................................................................... D11
Engineering Data ..................................................................................... D13
Structural Support .................................................................................. D21
Engineering Specifications ..................................................................... D22
HXI offers Economic Advantages .......................................................... D24
HXI - D 2
H
X
I
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
HXI Hybrid Closed Circuit Cooling
Towers
Capacity
Single Cell Capacity:
3 - 50 l/s
General Description
HXI Closed Circuit Hybrid Cooling Towers deliver fully rated thermal performance over a wide
range of flow and temperature requirements. Distinct advantages of the HXI include plume
abatement, significant water savings over traditional water-cooled equipment.
Standard design features satisfy todays environmental concerns, minimize installation costs,
maximize year-round operating reliability, and simplify maintenance requirements.
Key Features
Plume abatement
Maximum water savings
Low energy consumption
Low installed cost
Easy maintenance
Reliable year-round operation
Long service life
HXI - D 3
W
a
t
e
r

S
a
v
i
n
g

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
... because temperature matters
HXI - D 4
H
X
I
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Benefits
Plume Abatement
The HXI offers a combination of sensible, adiabatic, and evaporative heat transfer to significantly
reduce any plume that may occur with conventional evaporative cooling equipment. During the
coldest times of the year, when the potential for visible discharge is greatest, the HXI operates
100% dry, completely eliminating plume.
Maximum Water Savings
Water savings are achieved throughout the year with each of three different operating modes of
the HXI. In some areas, the water cost savings alone can pay for the equipment in as little as two
years!
At peak conditions in the dry/wet operating mode, a significant amount of heat is removed by
sensible heat transfer, providing reduced water consumption versus conventional evaporative
cooling.
When the heat load and/or ambient temperatures drop, water consumption is further reduced in
the adiabatic operating mode.
Water consumption is totally eliminated in the dry operating mode.
Note: See section "Engineering Specifications" for details on operating modes.
High Temperature Cooling
The finned dry coil tempers the incoming fluid, allowing higher inlet water temperatures than
traditional closed circuit cooling towers.
Low Energy Consumption
The HXI provides heat rejection at the lowest possible energy input and maintenance requirements
via:
High efficiency, low kW axial fans
Multiple fan motor system
Closed loop cooling, which minimizes process fouling
Patented combined flow technology, which reduces evaporation directly off the coil, minimizing
the potential for scaling and fouling
Parallel flow of air and spray water, which eliminates scale-promoting dry spots
Low Installed Cost
Support All models mount directly on parallel I-beams and ship complete with motors and
drives, factory-installed and aligned.
Modular Design Units ship in three pieces to minimize the size and weight of the heaviest lift,
allowing for the use of smaller, less costly cranes.
HXI - D 5
W
a
t
e
r

S
a
v
i
n
g

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
... because temperature matters
Easy Maintenance
Access Hinged access doors on each end wall and a standard internal walkway provide
easy access to the unit interior.
Spacious Interior Provides easy access to the cold water basin, drift eliminators, fan drive
system and the prime surface coil.
Access to spray Distribution Parallel flow of air and spray water over the coil allows for
inspection and access to the top of the coil during full operation.
Reliable Year-Round Operation
Belt Drive System utilizes special corrosion-resistant materials of construction and state-of-
the-art technology to ensure ease of maintenance and reliable year-round performance.
Combined Inlet Shields prevent biological growth from sunlight, act as a filter for air borne
impurities and debris and eliminate water splash out.
Long Service Life
Materials of Construction Various materials are available to meet the corrosion resistance,
unit operating life, and budgetary requirements of any project.
Note: For more information, please refer to the section Technical Resources, Materials of Construction.
Large Access Door Removable Drift Eliminators
HXI - D 6
H
X
I
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Construction Details
HXI - D 7
W
a
t
e
r

S
a
v
i
n
g

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
... because temperature matters
1. Heavy-Duty Construction
Z600 hot-dip galvanized steel panels
2. Fan Drive System (Not Shown)
Premium quality belts
Corrosion resistant sheaves
Heavy-duty bearings
Adapted fan motor for operation in saturated
conditions.
3. Low kW Axial Fan(s) (Not Shown)
Quiet operation
High Efficiency
Corrosion resistant aluminum
4. Water Distribution System
Visible and accessible during operation
Overlapping spray patterns ensure proper water
coverage
Large orifice, non-clog nozzles
5. Prime Surface Coil (Not Shown)
Continuous serpentine, steel tubing
Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication (HDGAF)
Sloped tubes for free drainage of fluid
Designed for maximum 10 bar operating pressure
according to PED
6. Dry Finned Coil
Copper tubing with high density aluminum fins
Designed for max. 10 bar operating pressure
according to PED
Staggered tubes coil arrangement
7. BACross

Wet Deck Surface with Integral


Drift Eliminators (Not Shown)
Plastic material
Impervious to rot, decay and biological attack
Designed and manufactured by BAC
8. Combined Inlet Shield Technology
Corrosion Resistant
Easily removable
UV resistant plastic material
9. Cold Water Basin
Sloped cold water basin for easy cleaning
Suction strainer with anti-vortex hood
Adjustable water make-up assembly from air inlet
side
Integral internal walkway as standard
10. Hinged Access Doors
Inward swinging door
11. Three Way Valve (Optional)
With actuator
With connection box
12. Recirculating Spray Pump (Not Shown)
Close coupled, bronze fitted centrifugal pump
Totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) motor
Bleed line with metering valve installed from pump
discharge to overflow
13. Manifolds and Interconnecting Pipework
(Optional)
With orifice plate
With hydraulic by-pass
HXI - D 8
H
X
I
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Custom Features and Options
Construction Options
Standard Construction:
Steel panels and structural elements are constructed of Z600 heavy-gauge hot-dip galvanized
steel protected with the Baltiplus Corrosion Protection on the outside of the cooling towers.
Optional BALTIBOND

Corrosion Protection System:


The BALTIBOND

Corrosion Protection System, a hybrid polymer coating used to extend


equipment life, is applied to all hot-dip galvanized steel components of the closed circuit hybrid
cooling tower (excluding heat transfer coils).
Note: See section Technical Resources, Material Options for more details on the materials described above.
Prime Surface Coil Configurations
Standard Serpentine Coil:
The standard cooling coil is constructed of continuous lengths of all prime surface steel, hot-dip
galvanized (outside surface) after fabrication (HDGAF). The coil is designed for low pressure drop
with sloping tubes for free drainage of fluid. Each coil is pneumatically tested at 15 bar and PED
compliant.
Dry Finned Coil Configurations
The standard finned coil on the HXI unit has 6 rows and is available in 1-1/2 serpentine and triple
serpentine arrangements. The serpentine arrangement indicates the way in which these rows are
circuited internally, and influences the process fluid velocity (the smaller the serpentine, the higher
the flow velocity) and the total fluid pressure through the unit (the smaller the serpentine, the higher
the finned coil pressure drop). Hence, the unit flow and pressure drop allowance must be taken
into account when the finned coil serpentine is selected to obtain the most suitable HXI selection.
Consult your local BAC Balticare Representative for selection assistance.
Hot Dip Galvanised Coil Finned Coil
HXI - D 9
W
a
t
e
r

S
a
v
i
n
g

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
... because temperature matters
Wet Deck Surface
Cross flow plastic wet deck surface with
integrated high efficiency drift eliminators
Fill pack extended into the cold water basin to
avoid sound of water splash
Reduction of recirculating spray water
temperature results in compact prime surface
coil which reduces both refrigerant and piping
costs.
Saturation and pre-cooling of incoming outside
air
Fan Drive System
The low sound fan drive system provides the cooling air necessary to reject heat from the system
to the atmosphere. The standard fan drive system consists of an independent fan motor and drive
assembly per fan with a plenum partition to allow independent operation of each fan. This standard
feature provides an extra step of capacity control.
Low Sound Operation
The low sound levels generated by HXI Hybrid
Closed Circuit Cooling Towers are due to the use
of high efficiency low noise axial fans and make
them suitable for installation in most
environments. For extremely sound sensitive
installations, factory designed, tested and rated
sound attenuation is available for both the air
intake and discharge.
Note: For more information, please refer to the section Technical
Resources, Sound Reduction Options. No discharge attenuator for
units with Whisper Quiet Fan.
Wet Deck Surface
Individual Motor and Drive on each Fan Extra Steps of Capacity Control
Low Noise Fans (dry coil section removed)
HXI - D 10
H
X
I
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Combined Inlet Shields
Combined Inlet shields prevent biological growth
from sunlight, act as a filter for air borne impurities
and debris and eliminate water splash out.
Remote Sump Execution
The use of an auxiliary sump within a heated
space is the most satisfactory way to protect
sump water from freezing. When the circulating
pump is shut off, all the water in the water
distribution, in suspension and in the sump will
drain freely to the auxiliary sump.
Note: For detailed information on the calculation of the remote sump
tank, please refer to the section "Technical Resources, Selection of
Remote Sump Tank".
Removable Fill Bundles
For installations where it is necessary or
recommended to remove the wet deck surface for
more thorough cleaning and disinfection,
removable bundled fill is available. The fill
bundles can be easily lifted and handled by one
person and therefore provide a simple and secure
method of removing and installing. The bundles
can be dismantled and sheet by sheet can be
removed for inspection and cleaning of both
sides. After cleaning the sheets can be re-
bundled and re-installed.
Combined Inlet Shields
Easy Removable Fill Bundles
HXI - D 11
W
a
t
e
r

S
a
v
i
n
g

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
... because temperature matters
Accessories
External Service Platforms
For external service, platforms can be added to
the unit.
Internal Ladder
For access to the motor and drive assemblies
internal ladders are available on all models.
Internal Service Platforms
For access to the motor and drive assemblies an
upper service platform with ladder and handrails
is available.
Basin Heaters
Although most units will operate dry in the winter, basin heaters are available for freeze protection
when required. Basin heaters prevent freezing of the water in the cold water basin when the unit
is idle. Factory-installed heaters, which maintain the water temperature at 4C, are a simple and
inexpensive way of providing such protection.
Electric Water Level Control Package
The electric water level control replaces the standard mechanical make-up valve when a more
precise water level control is required. This package consists of a float switch mounted in the basin
and a solenoid activated valve in the make-up water line. The valve is slow closing to minimize
water hammer.
Model No.
HXI
Electric Immersion
Heaters -18C kW
HXI 42X-K 1 x 4
HXI 43X-L 1 x 6
HXI 44X-M 1 x 6
HXI (Q)54X-O 1 x 8
HXI (Q)56X-O 2 x 6
HXI (Q)64X-O 2 x 6
HXI (Q)66X-O 2 x 8
External Service Platform
HXI - D 12
H
X
I
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Flow Control Package
A flow control package is available to provide
maximum plume control and water savings. This
package consists of a 3-way flow control valve
arrangement with actuator, and all connecting
piping. The 3-way flow control valve arrangement
shown below for single prime surface and double
prime surface coil connections.
Note: For double serpentine the manifold inlet is relocated to opposite side.
Vibration Cut-out Switch
A factory-mounted vibration cut-out switch is available to effectively protect against equipment
failure due to excessive vibration of the mechanical equipment system. BAC can provide a
vibration cut-out switch in an IP65 enclosure to ensure reliable protection.
Extended Lubrication Lines
Extended lubrication lines with grease fittings are available for lubrication of the fan shaft bearings.
Basin Sweeper Piping
Basin sweeper piping provides an effective method of preventing sediment from collecting in the
cold water basin of the unit. A complete piping system, including nozzles, is provided in the unit
basin for connection to side stream filtration equipment.
Note: For more information, please refer to the section "Technical Resources, Filtration".
3-way Flow Control Valve
Single Prime Surface Coil Connections
1. Fluid in; 2. Fluid out.; (shown for 3/4, 1/1 and 1-1/2 serpentine)
Double Prime Surface Coil Connections
1. Fluid in; 2. Fluid out.
HXI - D 13
W
a
t
e
r

S
a
v
i
n
g

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
... because temperature matters
Engineering Data
REMARK: Do not use for construction. Refer to factory certified dimensions & weights. This brochure includes data
current at time of publication, which should be reconfirmed at the time of purchase. In the interest of product
improvement, specifications, weights and dimensions are subject to change without notice. Up-to-date engineering
data and more can be found at www.BaltimoreAircoil.com.
HXI 42X - 44X
Model
No.
HXI
Operating
Weight
(kg)
Shipping
Weight
(kg)
Heaviest
Section
(kg)
H
(mm)
L
(mm)
W
(mm)
Airflow
(m
3
/s)
Fan
Motor
(kW)
Spray
Water
Flow
(l/s)
Pump
(kW)
Inlet / Outlet
Coil Connections (mm)
Prime
Surface
Coil
Finned
Coil
420-K
421-K
422-K
3810
4020
4230
2570
2710
2850
1110
1260
1400
4855
4855
4855
1861
1861
1861
2385
2385
2385
13,0
12,9
12,8
(1x) 7,5
(1x) 7,5
(1x) 7,5
12,0
12,0
12,0
(1x) 1,1
(1x) 1,1
(1x) 1,1
(1x) 100
(1x) 100
(1x) 100
(2x) 80
(2x) 80
(2x) 80
430-L
431-L
432-L
5560
5870
6190
3700
3910
4130
1660
1870
2090
4855
4855
4855
2775
2775
2775
2385
2385
2385
20,2
19,9
19,6
(2x) 5,5
(2x) 5,5
(2x) 5,5
18,3
18,3
18,3
(1x) 2,2
(1x) 2,2
(1x) 2,2
(1x) 100
(1x) 100
(1x) 100
(2x) 80
(2x) 80
(2x) 80
440-M
441-M
442-M
7010
7420
7850
4520
4800
5090
1960
2240
2530
4855
4855
4855
3690
3690
3690
2385
2385
2385
26,6
26,3
26,0
(2x) 7,5
(2x) 7,5
(2x) 7,5
31,5
31,5
31,5
(1x) 2,2
(1x) 2,2
(1x) 2,2
(1x) 100
(1x) 100
(1x) 100
(2x) 80
(2x) 80
(2x) 80
1. Inlet Connection; 2. Outlet Connection, 3. Make Up ND15, 4. Overflow ND80; 5. Drain ND50; 6. Access door.
HXI - D 14
H
X
I
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
HXI (Q)54X - HXI (Q)56X
Model
No.
HXI
Operating
Weight
(kg)
Shipping
Weight
(kg)
Heaviest
Section
(kg)
H
(mm)
L
(mm)
W
(mm)
Airflow
(m
3
/s)
Fan
Motor
(kW)
Spray
Water
Flow
(l/s)
Pump
(kW)
Inlet/Outlet Coil
Connections (mm)
Prime
surface coil
Finned coil
540-O
541-O
542-O
Q540-O
Q541-O
8690
9310
9930
9930
11180
5700
6140
6580
6580
7460
2400
2840
3280
3280
4160
6580
6580
6580
6580
6580
3690
3690
3690
3690
3690
2985
2985
2985
2985
2985
35,5
35,1
34,9
34,9
34,6
(2x) 11
(2x) 11
(2x) 11
(2x) 11
(2x) 11
45,1
45,1
45,1
45,1
45,1
(1x) 4,0
(1x) 4,0
(1x) 4,0
(1x) 4,0
(1x) 4,0
(2x) 100
(2x) 100
(2x) 100
(1x) 150
(1x) 150
(2x) 80
(2x) 80
(2x) 80
(2x) 80
(2x) 80
560-O
561-O
562-O
Q560-O
Q561-O
12695
13635
14575
14575
16475
8220
8880
9540
9540
10880
3360
4090
4740
4740
6090
6785
6785
6785
6785
6785
5520
5520
5520
5520
5520
2985
2985
2985
2985
2985
53,6
53,1
52,7
52,7
52,3
(3x) 11
(3x) 11
(3x) 11
(3x) 11
(3x) 11
56,8
56,8
56,8
56,8
56,8
(1x) 5,5
(1x) 5,5
(1x) 5,5
(1x) 5,5
(1x) 5,5
(2x) 100
(2x) 100
(2x) 100
(1x) 150
(1x) 150
(2x) 100
(2x) 100
(2x) 100
(2x) 100
(2x) 100
1. Inlet Connection; 2. Outlet Connection; 3. Make Up ND25; 4. Overflow ND80; 5. Drain ND50; 6. Access door.
HXI - D 15
W
a
t
e
r

S
a
v
i
n
g

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
... because temperature matters
HXI (Q)64X - HXI (Q)66X
Model
No.
HXI
Operating
Weight
(kg)
Shipping
Weight
(kg)
Heaviest
Section
(kg)
H
(mm)
L
(mm)
W
(mm)
Airflow
(m
3
/s)
Fan
Motor
(kW)
Spray
Water
Flow
(l/s)
Pump
(kW)
Inlet/Outlet Coil
Connections (mm)
Prime
Surface
Coil
Finned Coil
640-O
641-O
642-O
Q640-O
Q641-O
10050
10740
11430
11430
12790
6330
6810
7290
7290
8240
2575
3055
3535
3540
4480
6785
6785
6785
6785
6785
3690
3690
3690
3690
3690
3610
3610
3610
3610
3610
39,9
39,2
38,7
38,7
37,8
(2x) 11
(2x) 11
(2x) 11
(2x) 11
(2x) 11
45,1
45,1
45,1
45,1
45,1
(1x) 4,0
(1x) 4,0
(1x) 4,0
(1x) 4,0
(1x) 4,0
(2x) 100
(2x) 100
(2x) 100
(1x) 150
(1x) 150
(2x) 100
(2x) 100
(2x) 100
(2x) 100
(2x) 100
660-O
661-O
662-O
Q660-O
Q661-O
14690
15700
16710
16710
18750
9085
9795
10505
10505
11955
3710
4420
5130
5130
6570
6925
6925
6925
6925
6925
5520
5520
5520
5520
5520
3610
3610
3610
3610
3610
60,5
59,5
58,6
60,5
57,4
(3x) 11
(3x) 11
(3x) 11
(3x) 11
(3x) 11
56,8
56,8
56,8
56,8
56,8
(1x) 5,5
(1x) 5,5
(1x) 5,5
(1x) 5,5
(1x) 5,5
(2x) 100
(2x) 100
(2x) 100
(1x) 150
(1x) 150
(2x) 100
(2x) 100
(2x) 100
(2x) 100
(2x) 100
1. Inlet Connection; 2. Outlet Connection; 3. Make Up ND25; 4. Overflow ND80; 5. Drain ND50; 6. Access door.
HXI - D 16
H
X
I
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Serpentine Arrangement
Note: Only available on the finned coil.
Description:
The finned coil on the HXI unit has 6 rows. The serpentine indicates the way in which these rows are circuited internally. The serpentine
influences the process fluid velocity (the smaller the serpentine, the higher the flow) and the total pressure drop over the unit ( the smaller the
serpentine, the higher the finned coil pressure drop). Hence, the unit flow and pressure drop must be taken into account when the finned coil
serpentine is selected to obtain the most suitable HXI selection.
Nomenclature:
External finned coil arrangement:
For 3/4 serpentine (A) , 1/1 serpentine (B) and 1-1/2 serpentine (C), the finned coil inlet and the outlet connections are on the same side. For
double serpentine (D), the finned coil inlet connections are on the opposite side of the finned coil outlet connections.

General Notes
1. Pipe sizes are nominal diameters. All connections have BSP male
thread except for the 15 mm vent which has female BSP thread.
2. Dimensional drawings show standard (right hand) arrangements
with the standard finned coil arrangement. Left hand arrangement
can be furnished by special order.
3. Coil connection locations are approximate. Dimensions should not
be used for prefabrication of the connecting piping.
4. For high process flows, the double serpentine finned coil
arrangement (HXI D) might be used. For a finned coil bundle with
a double serpentine arrangement, the coil inlet connections will be
on one side and the outlet on the opposite side. (Refer to
serpentine arrangements)
5. All technical information on this page is without manifolds and
three-way valve arrangement. (refer to the section "Accessories,
Flow control package)
6. The units will be delivered in 3 different pieces, upper, middle and
lower section.
Affix Example
3/4 serpentine A HXI 420-K A
1/1 serpentine B HXI 420-K B
1-1/2 serpentine C HXI 420-K C
Double Serpentine D HXI 540-O D
3/4, 1/1, 1-1/2 Serpentine Double Serpentine
HXI - D 17
W
a
t
e
r

S
a
v
i
n
g

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
... because temperature matters
Sound Attenuation
REMARK: Do not use for construction. Refer to factory certified dimensions & weights. This brochure includes data
current at time of publication, which should be reconfirmed at the time of purchase. In the interest of product
improvement, specifications, weights and dimensions are subject to change without notice. Up-to-date engineering
data and more can be found at www.BaltimoreAircoil.com.
Modes of Operation
Note: *During dry mode air flow modulation can be controlled by two-speed motor or Variable Frequency Drive.
Model No.
HXI
Weight Sound Attenuator
(kg)
HXI 42X 100
HXI 43X 130
HXI 44X 175
HXI (Q)54X 150
HXI (Q)56X 375
HXI (Q)64X 250
HXI (Q)66X 375
Operation Mode
Dry Finned Coil
Fluid Flow
Wet Prime Surface Coil
Fluid Flow
Spray Pump Fans
Dry-Wet Mode 100 % Modulating ON ON
Adiabatic Mode 100 % 0 % ON ON
Dry Mode 100 % 100 % OFF ON*
1. Unit Width; 2. Unit Height; 3. Insulated Plenum; 4. Intake Attenuator.
HXI - D 18
H
X
I
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Combined Dry/Wet Operation Mode
In this mode, the fluid to be cooled flows first to the dry finned coil and then to the prime surface evaporative coil, where the cooled fluid exits
the unit. Spray water is drawn from the cold water basin and pumped to the water distribution system above the prime surface coil. Wetting the
prime surface coil allows evaporative cooling to occur. The spray water falls from the prime surface coil over the wet deck surface, enhancing
the evaporative heat transfer by sub-cooling the spray water. Air is drawn through both the prime surface coil and through the wet deck surface
where it is saturated and picks up heat. The air is, however, still cold enough to achieve significant cooling within the finned coil, which is installed
at the discharge above the fan(s).
In the dry/wet mode, both sensible and evaporative heat transfer are used. Compared to a conventional evaporative unit, the potential for plume
is substantially reduced and significant water savings can be obtained, even at peak design conditions. At reduced heat load and/or ambient
temperatures, the evaporative cooling portion, and hence water usage, are further reduced as the flow through the evaporative coil is gradually
decreased. This is accomplished by a modulating flow control valve arrangement, which controls the outlet fluid temperature. This control
arrangement automatically assures maximum use of sensible cooling in the finned coil and minimum use of evaporative cooling in the prime
surface coil. The heat transfer method and flow control are arranged to achieve maximum water savings in the dry/wet mode. Plume is minimized
by reducing the amount of evaporated water and the heating of the entire discharge air with the dry finned coil.
1. Water Distribution System; 2. Air In; 3. Air Out; 4. Prime Surface Coil; 5. Wet Deck Surface; 6. Finned Coil; 7. Spray Pump; 8. Sump; 9. Axial
Fan.
Adiabatic Mode
The adiabatic mode occurs when the fluid to be cooled completely bypasses the evaporative prime surface coil. No heat is rejected from this
coil and the recirculating spray water merely serves to saturate and adiabatically pre-cool the incoming outside air. In most climates, the ambient
air still has considerable potential for absorbing moisture.
Thus adiabatic cooling of the incoming air results in significantly lower air temperatures, which greatly increases the rate of sensible heat transfer.
Compared to conventional evaporative cooling equipment, visible plume and water consumption are greatly reduced while maintaining the low
fluid design temperatures required to maximize system efficiency.
1. Water Distribution System; 2. Air In; 3. Air Out; 4. Prime Surface Coil; 5. Wet Deck Surface; 6. Finned Coil; 7. Spray Pump; 8. Sump; 9. Axial
Fan.
Combined Dry-Wet Operation Mode Water Consumption
Adiabatic Operation Mode Water Consumption
HXI - D 19
W
a
t
e
r

S
a
v
i
n
g

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
... because temperature matters
Dry Mode
During the dry operation mode the spray water system is turned off, saving on pump energy. The fluid to be cooled is fed from the finned coil to
the prime surface coil. The modulating flow control valve remains fully open to ensure both coils receive the full fluid flow in series; hence the
maximum heat transfer surface is available. In this mode no water consumption occurs, and plume is completely eliminated. HXI units can be
economically selected for dry bulb switchover points of 10C to 15C or higher, depending on the specific needs of the project. When the
equipment operates in the dry mode for prolonged periods, draining the cold water basin is recommended, eliminating the need for freeze
protection and water treatment.
1. Water Distribution System; 2. Air In; 3. Air Out; 4. Prime Surface Coil; 5. Wet Deck Surface; 6. Finned Coil; 7. Spray Pump; 8. Sump; 9. Axial
Fan.
Dry Operation Mode Water Consumption
HXI - D 20
H
X
I
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Winter Operation
Hybrid Evaporative Fluid Cooler coil(s) must be protected from damage by freezing of the fluid inside the coil(s) when exposed to subfreezing
conditions.
Freeze protection can be obtained by the use of ethylene or propylene glycol or other anti-freeze solutions in appropriate concentrations. If no
anti-freeze solution can be used, refer to the heat loss data hereunder and to the section Winter Operation of the HXI operating and maintenance
instructions bulletin.
Notes:
1. Heat loss data, based on 10C coil water and -14C with 20 m/s wind velocity (fans and pump off).
2. Electric immersion heaters with thermostat and low level cut out. All components are factory installed in the cooler pan. Heaters are selected
to maintain +4C pan water at -18C ambient temperature. In outdoor locations trace heating and insulation of spray pump(s) (by others) may
be required for freeze protection. See section "Accessories" for more information on Basin Heaters.
Remote Sump Data
Refer to the "Technical Resources" section "Selection of Remote Sump" for Remote Sump Data.
HXI
Model
N
Minimum
Flow
(l/s)
Heatloss Data
(kW) (1)
Standard Unit
Coil Volumes
Pan Volume
Operating Level
(mm)
Prime Surface
Coil (l)
Finned Coil (l)
420-K
421-K
422-K
3
3
3
85
90
95
122
174
226
150
150
150
556
556
556
430-L
431-L
432-L
3
3
3
127
135
143
175
256
337
214
214
214
847
847
847
440-M
441-M
442-M
5
5
5
167
178
189
236
344
452
277
277
277
1137
1137
1137
540-O
541-O
542-O
Q540-O
Q541-O
6
6
6
12
12
210
225
240
240
270
349
510
671
716
1038
349
349
349
349
349
685
685
685
685
685
560-O
561-O
562-O
Q560-O
Q561-O
6
6
6
12
12
318
340
365
365
415
517
762
1052
1542
1562
533
533
533
533
533
1036
1036
1036
1036
1036
640-O
641-O
642-O
Q640-O
Q641-O
7
7
7
14
14
250
265
282
282
315
377
550
723
771
1117
450
450
450
450
450
785
785
785
785
785
660-O
661-O
662-O
Q660-O
Q661-O
7
7
7
14
14
374
397
421
421
468
558
821
1084
1132
1658
644
644
644
644
644
1187
1187
1187
1187
1187
HXI - D 21
W
a
t
e
r

S
a
v
i
n
g

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
... because temperature matters
Structural Support
REMARK: Do not use for construction. Refer to factory certified dimensions & weights. This brochure includes data
current at time of publication, which should be reconfirmed at the time of purchase. In the interest of product
improvement, specifications, weights and dimensions are subject to change without notice. Up-to-date engineering
data and more can be found at www.BaltimoreAircoil.com.
The recommended support arrangement for units consists of parallel I-beams running the full length of the unit, spaced as shown in the following
drawing. Besides providing adequate support, the steel also serves to raise the unit above any solid foundation to ensure access to the bottom
of the unit. To support units in an alternate steel support arrangement, consult your BAC Balticare Representative.
Units with and without Sound Attenuation
Notes :
1. Support steel and anchor bolts to be designed and furnished by
others.
2. All support steel must be level at the top.
3. Beams must be selected in accordance with accepted structural
practice. Maximum deflection of beam under unit see table.
4. If vibration isolation rails are to be used between the unit and
supporting steel, be certain to allow for the length of the vibration
rails when determining the length of the supporting steel, as
vibration rail length and mounting hole locations may differ from
those of the unit.
5. If point vibration isolation is used with multi-cell units, the isolators
must be located under the support steel, not between the support
steel and the towers.
Model
HXI / HXIQ
Max. Deflection
(mm) (4)
Dimensions (mm)
N of 16mm
Anchorbolts
W L A B C
42X 5 2385 1860 2325 - 255 4
43X 8 2385 2775 2325 - 255 4
44X 10 2385 3690 2325 - 255 4
(Q)54X 10 2985 3690 2925 - 255 4
(Q)56X 12 2985 5520 2925 2440 270 8
(Q)64X 10 3610 3690 3550 - 255 4
(Q)66X 12 3610 5520 3550 2440 270 8
1. Outline of Unit, 2. Air Intake, 3. Mounting Holes diameter 22 mm, 4. Unit
HXI - D 22
H
X
I
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Engineering Specifications
1.0 Closed Circuit Hybrid Cooling Tower
1.1 General: Furnish and install _____ factory-assembled, induced-
draft, axial fan, closed circuit hybrid cooling tower(s) with vertical air
discharge, conforming in all aspects to the specifications, schedules
and as shown on the plans. The unit shall be able to operate in
combined dry/wet, adiabatic and dry modes for plume abatement and
minimum water consumption. Overall dimensions shall not exceed
approximately _____ mm long x ______ mm wide x _____ mm high.
Operating weight shall not exceed ________kg. The closed circuit
hybrid cooling tower(s) shall be Baltimore Aircoil Model
____________.
1.2 Thermal Capacity: The closed circuit hybrid cooling tower(s)
shall be warranted by the manufacturer to cool _____ l/s of
________% by volume aqueous ethylene/propylene glycol solution
(water) from ______ C to _____C at _____C entering wet-bulb
temperature and from ________C to _________C at _________C
entering dry bulb temperature. Total coil pressure drop shall not
exceed __________kPa.
1.3 Corrosion Resistant Construction (standard): Unless
otherwise noted in this specification, all steel panels and structural
members shall be constructed of heavy-gauge Z600 metric hot-dip
galvanized steel with all edges given a protective coating of zinc-rich
compound and the exterior protected with the BALTIPLUS Corrosion
Protection.
(Alternate 1.3) Corrosion Resistant Construction (optional): Unless
otherwise noted in this specification, all steel panels and structural
members shall be protected with the BALTIBOND

Corrosion
Protection System. The system shall consist of Z600 metric hot-dip
galvanized steel prepared in a four-step (clean, pre-treat, rinse, dry)
process with an electrostatically sprayed, thermosetting, hybrid
polymer fuse-bonded to the substrate during a thermally activated
curing stage and monitored by a 23-step quality assurance program.
1.4 Quality Assurance: The cooling tower manufacturer shall have
a Management System certified by an accredited registrar as
complying with the requirements of ISO-9001:2000 to ensure
consistent quality of products and services.
1.5 Warranty: The manufacturers standard equipment warranty
shall be for a period of not less than one year from date of startup or
eighteen months from date of shipment, whichever occurs first.
2.0 Construction Details
2.1. Coil Sections: The dry finned coil shall consist of copper tubes
with rippled edge, aluminum flat plate fins, and headers of seamless
copper tubes installed in a heavy-gauge aluminum casing. Fins shall
have full drawn collars to maintain consistent fin spacing and a
continuous surface contact over the entire tube for maximum heat
transfer. The coil shall have a design pressure of 10 bar and be
pneumatically tested at 15 bar. Staggered tube coil arrangement and
fin density shall be optimized for maximum sensible heat transfer
during all operation modes with minimum airside pressure drop.
The prime surface coil shall be encased in a heavy-gauge galvanized
steel casing. The coil shall be constructed of continuous serpentine
all prime surface steel, be pneumatically tested 15 bar, and be hot-dip
galvanized after fabrication. The coil shall be designed for free
drainage of fluid and shall be PED compliant. Maximum allowable
working pressure shall be 10 bar.
2.2.Cold Water Basin: The cold water basin shall be constructed of
heavy-gauge hot-dip galvanized steel. The basin shall include a
depressed section with drain/clean-out connection. Standard
accessories shall include large area, lift-out steel strainers with
perforated openings sized smaller than water distribution nozzle
orifices, an integral anti-vortexing hood to prevent air entrainment,
waste water bleed line, and brass make-up valve with large diameter
plastic float arranged for easy adjustment.
3.0 Mechanical Equipment
3.1. Fan(s): Fan(s) shall be heavy-duty, axial flow low noise, with
aluminum alloy blades. Air shall discharge through a fan cylinder
designed for streamlined air entry and minimum fan blade tip
clearance for maximum fan efficiency. Fan(s) and shaft(s) shall be
supported by heavy-duty, self-aligning, grease-packed ball bearings
with moisture-proof seals and integral slinger rings, designed for
minimum L10 life of 40,000 hours. Fan(s) shall be belt driven and
specifically designed for evaporative cooling service. Fan and motor
sheave(s) shall be fabricated from cast aluminum.
3.2. Fan Motor: Fan motor(s) shall be totally enclosed fan cooled
(TEFC), reversible, squirrel cage, ball bearing, designed specifically
for evaporative cooling duty on _____ volts___ hertz ___ phase
electrical service. The motor shall be furnished with special moisture
protection on windings, shafts, and bearings. Each motor shall be
mounted on an easily adjusted, heavy-duty motor base.
4.0 Wet Deck Surface and Drift Eliminators
4.1. BACross Wet Deck Surface and Drift Eliminators: The wet
deck surface and integral drift eliminators shall be formed from plastic
material and shall be impervious to rot, decay, fungus and biological
attack. The surface shall be manufactured and performance tested by
the closed circuit cooling tower manufacturer to provide single source
responsibility and assure control of the final product. A separate set
of drift eliminators shall be removable in easily handled sections for
quick access to the coil. Eliminators shall have a minimum of three
changes in air direction.
5.0 Combined Inlet Shield Technology
5.1. Combined Inlet Shields: Combined inlet shields shall be
separate from the wet deck surface and removable to allow easy
access for inspection of the air/water interface at the air inlet side of
the equipment. Combined inlet shields shall prevent UV-light and
debris from entering the unit, as well as prevent water splash out
during fan cycling. They shall be constructed of maintenance free,
corrosion and UV resistant material.
HXI - D 23
W
a
t
e
r

S
a
v
i
n
g

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
... because temperature matters
6.0 Access
6.1. Plenum Access: A large, hinged access door shall be provided
on each end wall for access to the prime surface coil, drift eliminators,
and fan plenum section. The water make-up valve, float ball, and
suction strainer shall be easily accessible.
7.0 Sound
7.1 Sound Level: To maintain the quality of the local environment,
the maximum sound pressure levels (dB) measured 15 m from the
cooling tower operating at full fan speed shall not exceed the sound
levels detailed below.
Location 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 dB(A)
Discharge
Air Inlet
End
Back
HXI - D 24
H
X
I
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
HXI offers Economic Advantages
HXI First Cost Benefits
Heat rejection equipment must be selected for the
maximum heat load at summer peak air
temperatures. In most climates peak wet-bulb
temperatures are significantly lower than peak dry-
bulb temperatures. Evaporative cooling equipment
based on the ambient air wet-bulb therefore has a
greater temperature driving force, thus allowing the
use of lower system temperatures. This greater
driving force also allows the use of less and thus
more cost-effective heat transfer surface area.
Since the HXI concept utilizes evaporative cooling
during peak load operation it inherently benefits
from this advantage. Evaporatively cooled units
such as the HXI have a plan area and fan kilowatt advantage over the typical air-cooled arrangement,
saving on support structures and electrical hook-ups. The HXI design also avoids the corrosion and
scaling that can be associated with spraying of standard air-cooled equipment on design days for
additional capacity. The lower process fluid temperatures that can be achieved compared to air-cooled
systems and the greatly reduced fouling factors of closed loop cooling result in lower first cost of
process equipment such as chillers or refrigeration compressors. Lastly, the costs associated with
plume abatement are eliminated, as the design is inherently plume-free.
HXI Operating Cost Benefits
Due to its water saving concept and Combined Flow design, the HXI offers significant operating cost
benefits. Water consumption is minimized throughout the year. During peak summer operation a large
amount of heat load is already transferred by the finned coil. As the ambient temperature and/or heat
load drops, the amount of evaporative heat transfer is further reduced by controlling the flow through
the wet coil. This reduces the evaporation loss and blow-down as well as water treatment requirements
compared to conventional evaporative cooling equipment. In the adiabatic mode only a small amount
of water is needed to saturate the air and the amount of blow-down is reduced even further. Finally in
the dry mode no water is used at all (while saving the energy associated with running the spray pump).
With HXI hybrid units water savings up to 70% or more are possible. Depending on local water costs
and availability, this advantage alone can pay for the equipment in as little as two years through cost
savings in water use, water treatment chemicals, and higher system efficiencies. In addition, fouling
potential associated with open circuit cooling towers is eliminated through both the closed loop cooling
system and the Advanced Coil Technology design of the HXI, assuring peak efficiency and energy
savings over time. Finally, the induced draft propeller fan design results in low fan energy requirements
compared to centrifugal fan units.
Dry-bulb / Wet-bulb difference versus climate
zone
Closed Circuit Cooling Systems offer the
lowest fluid temperatures
Typical annual distribution of ambient
temperature with the three operating modes
Hybrid Closed Circuit Cooling Towers
HFL - D 1
W
a
t
e
r

S
a
v
i
n
g

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
HFL
Product Detail
HFL Hybrid Closed Circuit Cooling Towers .......................................... D2
Benefits ....................................................................................................... D4
Construction Details .................................................................................. D6
Custom Features and Options .................................................................. D8
Accessories ............................................................................................... D10
Engineering Data ..................................................................................... D11
Structural Support .................................................................................. D21
Engineering Specifications ..................................................................... D23
HFL - D 2
H
F
L
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
HFL Hybrid Closed Circuit Cooling
Towers
Capacity
Single Cell Capacity
9 to 90 l/s (30% E.G.) at 32/27/22C
General Description
The HFL combines the air cooled and evaporative technologies in one product providing the
benefit of low cooling temperature and high process efficiency in the summer with the water saving
advantage of air-cooled equipment in the winter. The HFL features a unique sump concept, which
offers next to the principle of intelligent water saving an unprecedented level of operation
flexibility. Additional features, such as compactness, ease of maintenance, low height, very low
operating weight and effective suppression of plume, make this product your first choice for heat
rejection applications.
Key Features
Effective suppression of plume
Maximum water savings
Operational flexibility
Very low operating weight
Ease of access and cleanability for superior maintenance
Compactness
HFL - D 3
W
a
t
e
r

S
a
v
i
n
g

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
... because temperature matters
HFL - D 4
H
F
L
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Benefits
Effective Suppression of Plume
The finned coil(s) installed in the discharge air stream of the HFL Hybrid Closed Circuit Cooling
Tower unit will raise the temperature and reduce the relative humidity of the discharge air. During
wet operation this suppresses the formation of visible plume even when the relative humidity of the
ambient air is high. Installation of the optional three-way valve flow control package will furthermore
enhance the plume suppressing effect in that this control package ensures that at any atmospheric
condition only as much evaporative cooling is applied as needed to satisfy the load requirement.
Therefore the air leaving the wet portion of the equipment is dryer than is the case with
conventional evaporative cooling equipment and has a much lower tendency to generate plume.
The combination of finned discharge coil and three-way valve flow control package virtually
eliminates the formation of visible plume even under extremely humid conditions. It is obvious that
during the periods of dry operation no plume formation will occur.
Maximum Water Savings
To achieve a maximal reduction of water consumption in a cost-effective way, it is essential to
make the best use of the heat exchangers incorporated in the HFL Hybrid Closed Circuit Cooling
Tower. The fluid to be cooled is first fed to the finned coil(s) and then subsequently to the prime
surface coil, which can either operate in wet or dry mode. This way the finned coil contributes to
the heat rejection even in the summertime, when the prime surface coil is operated wet. The
addition of the finned coil heat exchange surface has a significant impact on the switch point
condition. Dry operation now can occur not only in wintertime but also in spring and fall and
depending on the load profile even a good portion of the summer season is suitable for dry
operation. To further improve the water saving feature of the HFL a three-way valve flow control
system (optional) can be integrated in the piping between the finned and the prime surface coil.
This intelligent control system ensures that evaporative cooling is only applied when needed and
as much as needed. This way water savings up to 60% can be achieved when compared to a
conventional evaporative fluid cooler.
Operational Flexibility
A critical aspect of hybrid products is the switch
over from wet operation to dry operation and vice
versa. In particular when during dry operation
water remains in the sump, the potential danger
of ice formation and subsequent damage exists in
subfreezing conditions. To prevent this,
manufacturers recommend draining the sump
during the dry operation period. Depending on the
ambient climatic conditions, sump draining may
not be possible, because draining and refilling a
sump requires at least several hours and hence
cannot be conducted on a 24-hour cycle. To cope
with this problem, installing a conventional
remote sump in a heated area inside the building
is adequate, but adds complexity, costs and extra space. The HFL Hybrid Closed Circuit Cooling
Tower has a unique sump design, which includes a wet and a dry sump. During dry operation all
water will drain from the dry sump into the wet sump, which is shielded from the airstream. Heaters
in the wet sump are sufficiently sized to prevent freezing at temperatures as low as -25C at full
speed of the fan system. Both sumps are compactly integrated into the design of the B.A.C. HFL
HFL units have been tested in subfreezing
conditions
HFL - D 5
W
a
t
e
r

S
a
v
i
n
g

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
... because temperature matters
unit. It is for the first time that the operational flexibility and safety of a remote sump arrangement
has been integrated into a factory-assembled product.
Very Low Operating Weight
This is achieved by the fact that the sump water content of the HFL Hybrid Closed Circuit Cooling
Tower is only about one quarter of the sump water content of a conventional evaporative fluid
cooler. The HFL units from B.A.C. only contain the amount of water needed to wet the prime
surface coil(s). This way it is avoided that supports are designed for a dead weight created by the
amount of water which is in the sump, but does not contribute to the cooling process.
Ease of Access and Cleanability for
Superior Maintenance
Access to the wet sump is provided through
rectangular access doors at the connection end of
the equipment. The wet sump is separated from
the dry sump by a separation panel. This permits
access to the wet sump even when the fan
system is in operation, which is NOT possible with
conventional equipment in forced draught
configuration. Make up can be inspected and
sump strainers can be cleaned whilst the cooler
operates. Due to the separation panel there is
also no turbulence of the sump water, which in
conventional designs is created by the airstream.
Maintenance points in the dry sump access is
provided by circular access door(s) at the side of the equipment. The bottom of the dry sump is
sloping so that all water sprayed over the coil (during wet operation) will drain into the wet sump.
The wet sump is compact, can be drained and cleaned easily. It is also easy to disinfect the wet
sump; when this should be required.
Compactness
The HFL Hybrid Closed Circuit Cooling Tower has a compact design. The models have a low
height and up to three fans are operated on a singe shaft with one electrical motor. Double cells
can be arranged side by side with no intermediate space requirements, which allows making
maximum use of the available floor space. Side by side arrangements are possible due to the fact
that the access to the wet sump is at the rear end (connection end) of the equipment and that
access to the dry sump only from one side is sufficient.
Access to wet sump
HFL - D 6
H
F
L
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Construction Details
1. Heavy Duty Construction
All major structural components are constructed
from heavy gauge Z600 galvanised steel
Double brake flanges are used to maximise panel
and connection strength
2. Water Distribution System
Large orifice low pressure nozzles are oriented for
optimum water distribution over the heat transfer
surface
Non-corrosive spray branches
Grommeted nozzles and branches allow quick
removal and cleaning
3. Drift Eliminators
UV resistant non-corrosive material, impervious to
rot, decay and biological attack
Three distinct changes in air direction to reduce
drift loss significantly
Assembled in easy to handle sections, which can
be removed for access to the equipment interior
4. Hight Efficiency Air Moving System
Forwardly curved centrifugal fan wheels
A close coupled transition duct uniquely curved
and flared
Two piece fan housings for ease of fan and shaft
removal.
5. Fan Shaft and Bearings
Heavy duty self aligning relubricable ball bearings
with cast iron housings
Hollow shaft protection with two part epoxy
coating
Shafts supported by bearings at each shaft end,
no intermediate bearings
6. Fan Motor (Not Shown)
TEFC with IP 55 protection, class F insulation
Sized for dry operation as standard
Location in protected area beneath the fan
housing
HFL - D 7
W
a
t
e
r

S
a
v
i
n
g

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
... because temperature matters
7. Fan Drive System
Belt drive
8. Access
Rectangular access door(s) at the connection end
provide access to the wet sump, even if the fan
system is running
Rectangular access door(s) provided in the
plenum section under the finned discharge coil,
for easy access to the water distribution system
(Optional)
Circular access door(s) at side(s) provide access
to the air distribution plenum (dry sump)
9. Spray Water Collection (Not Shown)
Sloping air separation and air distribution bottom
panels to ensure complete drainage of spray
water in the wet sump
10. Suction Strainer
Cylindrical lift out strainer of anti-vortex design
11. Make-Up Arrangement
Factory installed and set electrical float switch
Slow closing solenoid valve
12. Evaporative Heat Transfer Coil
Prime surface tube circuits
Designed for max. 10 bar operating pressure
according to PED
Sloping tubes for free fluid drainage
13. Finned Discharge Coil (Optional) (Not
shown)
Copper tubes with aluminium plate fins
Designed for max. 10 bar operating pressure
according to PED
Fins with full drawn collars
Staggered arrangement of minimum 4 circuits
14. Recirculating Spray Pump
Close Coupled, Bronze fitted, centrifugal pump
Completely piped from suction strainer to the
water distribution system
Installed at the connection end for ease of access
HFL - D 8
H
F
L
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Custom Features and Options
Construction Options
Standard Construction:
Steel panels and structural elements are constructed of Z600 heavy-gauge hot-dip galvanized
steel protected with the Baltiplus Corrosion Protection on the outside of the unit.
Optional BALTIBOND

Corrosion Protection System:


The BALTIBOND

Corrosion Protection System, a hybrid polymer coating used to extend


equipment life, is applied before assembly to all hot-dip galvanized steel components of the
unit.
Optional Stainless Steel Construction:
Steel panels and structural elements are constructed of stainless steel either type 304 or 316.
Optional Water-Contact Stainless Steel Cold Water Basin:
A cost-effective alternative to an all stainless steel unit. The critical components in the cold
water basin and the cold water basin itself are provided in stainless steel. The remaining
components are protected with the BALTIBOND

Corrosion Protection System.


Note: See section Technical Resources, Material of Construction for more details on the materials described above.
Coil Configurations
Standard Serpentine Coil:
The standard cooling coil is constructed of
continuous lengths of all prime surface steel,
hot-dip galvanized after fabrication (HDGAF).
The coil is designed for low pressure drop with
sloping tubes for free drainage of fluid. Each
coil is pneumatically tested at 10 bar and PED
certified
Optional Stainless Steel Coil:
Coils are available in Type 304 L and 316 L
stainless steel for specialized applications. The
coil is designed for low pressure drop with
sloping tubes for free drainage of fluid.
Stainless steel coils must be combined with the stainless steel material options or the
Baltibond Corrosion Protection System
Finned Discharge Coil (FDC):
To enhance the water saving capability of wet-dry HFL units, finned discharge coils are added.
These coils consist of copper tubes with corrugated aluminium plate fins, installed in a heavy
gauge aluminium casing. All finned discharge coils have minimum four rows providing a
significant heat exchange surface for dry operation. Optionally aluminium fins can be provided
with pre-coated hydrophobic anti-corrosion surface treatment.
Fan Drive System
The fan drive system provides the cooling air necessary to reject heat from the system to the
atmosphere. Centrifugal fans, forwardly curved, are driven by matched V-belts with taper lock
sheaves.
Finned Discharge Coil
HFL - D 9
W
a
t
e
r

S
a
v
i
n
g

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
... because temperature matters
The Baltiguard

Drive System
The BALTIGUARD

Drive System consists of two standard single-speed fan motors and drive
assemblies. One drive assembly is sized for full speed and load, and the other is sized for
approximately 2/3 speed and consumes only 1/3 of the design kilowatt power. This configuration
allows the system to be operated like a two-speed motor, but with the reserve capacity of a standby
motor in the event of failure. As a minimum, approximately 70% capacity will be available from the
low kilowatt motor, even on a design wet-bulb day. Controls and wiring are the same, as those
required for a two-speed, two-winding motor. Significant energy savings are achieved when
operating at low speed during periods of reduced load and/or low wet-bulb temperatures.
Low Sound Operation
The low sound levels generated by BAC Products
with centrifugal fans make them suitable for most
installations. For situations when one direction is
particularly sound sensitive, the unit can be
oriented so that the side opposite the air inlet
faces the sound-sensitive direction. Units with
centrifugal fans are also available with factory
designed, tested and rated sound attenuation for
both the air inlet and discharge.
Note: For more information, please refer to the section Technical
Resources, Sound Reduction Options.
Electric Water Level Control Package
HFL units are fitted with an electric water level
control to allow precise water level control. This
package consists of a float switch mounted in the basin and a solenoid activated valve in the make-
up water line. The valve is slow closing to minimize water hammer.
Factory tested HFL Sound Attenuation
(Special Execution NR45 at 10 m)
HFL - D 10
H
F
L
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Accessories
Basin Heaters
HFL units exposed to below freezing ambient temperatures require protection to prevent freezing
of the water in the wet sump. Factory-installed heaters, which maintain the water temperature at
4C, are a simple and inexpensive way of providing such protection. The heater package includes
the heaters, a thermostat and a low level cut out switch to protect the heaters if the water level is
too low. The standard electric heaters are selected for -18C ambient temperature.
Discharge Hoods
Discharge hoods reduce the risk of re-circulation in tight enclosures by increasing discharge air
velocity, and can be used to elevate the unit discharge above adjacent walls to comply with layout
guidelines.
They can also be fitted with positive closure dampers and damper actuators to minimize heat loss
from convection air during idle conditions. Hoods and dampers create external static pressure and
fan motors must be sized accordingly.
Capacity Control
To achieve maximum water saving it is recommended to run the fan system always at full speed.
There may however be applications where capacity control by a change of fan speed is needed.
In such cases several options are available:
Two speed motors either as Dahlander or with separate windings
Modulating fan damper controls, consisting of an aerofoil damper blade located in the discharge
of each fan housing. The control package consists of a 24 Volt transformer, a damper motor
actuator with end switches and a temperature controller. All components except the
temperature controller are factory installed.
Flow Control Package
Flow control packages are available in
combination with finned discharge coils. The
control package includes a three way valve and a
temperature sensor and the additional connecting
piping. Flow control packages enhance water
saving by making intelligent use of evaporative
cooling only when needed and as much as
needed.
Model Number
HFL
Heaters (-18C)
(kW)
HFL 36 X & HFL 48 X 2 x 3
HFL 72 X & HFL 96 X 2 x 4
HFL 108 X & HFL 144 X 2 x 5
HFL 150 X & HFL 192 X 4 x 4
HFL 180 X & HFL 240 X 2 x 4 + 2 x 5
HFL 216 X & HFL 288 X 4 x 5
Flow Control Package
HFL - D 11
W
a
t
e
r

S
a
v
i
n
g

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
... because temperature matters
Engineering Data
REMARK: Do not use for construction. Refer to factory certified dimensions & weights. This brochure includes data
current at time of publication, which should be reconfirmed at the time of purchase. In the interest of product
improvement, specifications, weights and dimensions are subject to change without notice. Up-to-date engineering
data and more can be found at www.BaltimoreAircoil.com.
HFL 36X - 48X (Single Cell Units)
Model
HFL
Fan
Motor
(kW)
Pump
Motor
(kW)
Air-
flow
(m3/s)
Spray-
flow
(l/s)
Ship.
Weight
(kg)
Oper.
Weight
(kg)
Heaviest
Section
(kg)
Dimensions (mm) FDC 3-Way Valve Arrangement
F H L W
Ship.
Weight
(kg)
Oper.
Weight
(kg)
Ship.
Weight
(kg)
Oper.
Weight
(kg)
Heaviest
Section
(kg)
HFL 361-L
HFL 361-M
HFL 362-M
HFL 363-K
HFL 363-M
HFL 364-M
11
15
15
7,5
15
15
0,75
0,75
0,75
0,75
0,75
0,75
12,7
13,8
13,4
10,8
13,0
12,5
9
9
9
9
9
9
2025
2035
2305
2495
2565
2835
2680
2690
3010
3350
3420
3690
2025
2035
2305
2495
2565
2825
610
610
845
1080
1080
1315
2175
2175
2410
2675
2675
2880
2730
2730
2730
2730
2730
2730
1250
1250
1250
1250
1250
1250
250
250
250
250
250
250
315
315
315
315
315
315
80
80
80
80
80
80
120
120
120
120
120
120
70
70
70
70
70
70
HFL 482-L
HFL 483-L
HFL 483-M
HFL 484-M
11
11
15
15
1,1
1,1
1,1
1,1
13,6
13,4
14,6
14,3
12,1
12,1
12,1
12,1
2730
3070
3080
3410
4170
4630
4640
5100
2730
3070
3080
3410
845
1080
1080
1315
2410
2675
2675
2880
3650
3650
3650
3650
1250
1250
1250
1250
315
315
315
315
400
400
400
400
190
190
190
190
300
300
300
300
130
130
130
130
1. Access; 2. Make-up; 3. Electric Float Switch; 4. Overflow; 5. Drain; 6. Water Treatment Connection; 7.Bare Coil Fluid Inlet ND100; 8. Bare
Coil Fluid Outlet ND100; 9. Vent; 10. FDC Fluid Inlet ND80; 11. FDC Fluid Outlet ND80; 12. Three-Way valve; 13. Orifice; 14. Terminal Box; 15.
Operating Level; 16. Overflow Level.
HFL - D 12
H
F
L
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
HFL 72X - 96X (Single Cell Units)
Model
HFL
Fan
Motor
(kW)
Pump
Motor
(kW)
Air-
flow
(m
3
/s)
Spray-
flow
(l/s)
Ship.
Weight
(kg)
Oper.
Weight
(kg)
Heaviest
Section
(kg)
Dimension (mm) FDC 3-Way Valve Arrangement
F H L W
Ship.
Weight
(kg)
Oper.
Weight
(kg)
Ship.
Weight
(kg)
Oper.
Weight
(kg)
Heaviest
Section
(kg)
HFL 722-N
HFL 722-O
HFL 723-L
HFL 723-O
HFL 724-O
18,5
22
11
22
22
1,1
1,1
1,1
1,1
1,1
22,8
24,0
19,3
23,4
22,9
17,9
17,9
17,9
17,9
17,9
4000
4020
4510
4550
5090
5495
5515
6225
6265
6935
4000
4020
4510
4550
5090
845
845
1080
1080
1315
2410
2410
2675
2675
2880
2730
2730
2730
2730
2730
2400
2400
2400
2400
2400
420
420
420
420
420
555
555
555
555
555
270
270
270
270
270
420
420
420
420
420
180
180
180
180
180
HFL 961-P
HFL 962-N
HFL 962-O
HFL 962-P
HFL 963-O
HFL 963-P
HFL 964-P
30
18,5
22
30
22
30
30
2,2
2,2
2,2
2,2
2,2
2,2
2,2
28,7
24,5
25,9
28,3
25,6
27,9
27,4
24,2
24,2
24,2
24,2
24,2
24,2
24,2
4190
4700
4740
4840
5400
5500
6150
5650
6400
6440
6540
7340
7440
8430
4190
4700
4740
4840
5400
5500
6150
610
845
845
845
1080
1080
1315
2175
2410
2410
2410
2675
2675
2880
3650
3650
3650
3650
3650
3650
3650
2400
2400
2400
2400
2400
2400
2400
525
525
525
525
525
525
525
700
700
700
700
700
700
700
290
290
290
290
290
290
290
460
460
460
460
460
460
460
220
220
220
220
220
220
220
1. Access; 2. Make-up; 3. Electric Float Switch; 4. Overflow; 5. Drain; 6. Water Treatment Connection; 7.Bare Coil Fluid Inlet ND100; 8. Bare
Coil Fluid Outlet ND100; 9. Vent; 10. FDC Fluid Inlet ND80; 11. FDC Fluid Outlet ND80; 12. Three-Way valve; 13. Orifice; 14. Terminal Box; 15.
Operating Level; 16. Overflow Level.
HFL - D 13
W
a
t
e
r

S
a
v
i
n
g

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
... because temperature matters
HFL 108X - 144X (Single Cell Units)
Model
HFL
Fan
Motor
(kW)
Pump
Motor
(kW)
Air-
flow
(m
3
/s)
Spray-
flow
(l/s)
Ship.
Weight
(kg)
Oper.
Weight
(kg)
Heaviest
Section
(kg)
Dimensions (mm) FDC 3-Way Valve Arrangement
F H L W
Ship.
Weight
(kg)
Oper.
Weight
(kg)
Ship.
Weight
(kg)
Oper.
Weight
(kg)
Heaviest
Section
(kg)
HFL 1081-O
HFL 1081-P
HFL 1082-O
HFL 1082-P
HFL 1083-O
HFL 1083-P
HFL 1084-P
HFL 1084-Q
22
30
22
30
22
30
30
37
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
33,3
36,9
32,4
35,9
31,1
34,5
33,8
36,2
26,9
26,9
26,9
26,9
26,9
26,9
26,9
26,9
5310
5330
6050
6070
6840
6860
7660
7760
7280
7300
8250
8270
9410
9430
10360
10460
5310
5330
6050
6070
6840
6860
7660
7760
610
610
845
845
1080
1080
1315
1315
2175
2175
2410
2410
2675
2675
2880
2880
2730
2730
2730
2730
2730
2730
2730
2730
3605
3605
3605
3605
3605
3605
3605
3605
590
590
590
590
590
590
590
590
805
805
805
805
805
805
805
805
430
430
430
430
430
430
430
430
670
670
670
670
670
670
670
670
320
320
320
320
320
320
320
320
HFL 1442-O
HFL 1442-P
HFL 1443-O
HFL 1443-P
HFL 1443-Q
HFL 1444-P
HFL 1444-Q
22
30
22
30
37
30
37
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
33,7
37,3
32,8
36,3
39,9
35,6
38,2
36,3
36,3
36,3
36,3
36,3
36,3
36,3
7220
7240
8170
8190
8290
9160
9260
9770
9790
11080
11100
11190
12535
12635
7220
7240
8170
8190
8290
9160
9260
845
845
1080
1080
1080
1315
1315
2410
2410
2675
2675
2675
2880
2880
3650
3650
3650
3650
3650
3650
3650
3605
3605
3605
3605
3605
3605
3605
760
760
760
760
760
760
760
1055
1055
1055
1055
1055
1055
1055
510
510
510
510
510
510
510
890
890
890
890
890
890
890
340
340
340
340
340
340
340
1. Access; 2. Make-up; 3. Electric Float Switch; 4. Overflow; 5. Drain; 6. Water Treatment Connection; 7.Bare Coil Fluid Inlet ND100; 8. Bare
Coil Fluid Outlet ND100; 9. Vent; 10. FDC Fluid Inlet ND100; 11. FDC Fluid Outlet ND100; 12. Three-Way valve; 13. Orifice; 14. Terminal Box;
15. Operating Level; 16. Overflow Level.
HFL - D 14
H
F
L
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
HFL 150X - 192X (Double Cell Units)
Model
HFL
Fan
Motor
(kW)
Pump
Motor
(kW)
Air-
flow
(m
3
/s)
Spray-
flow
(l/s)
Ship.
Weight
(kg)
Oper.
Weight
(kg)
Heaviest
Section
(kg)
Dimensions (mm) FDC 3-Way Valve Arrangement
F H L W
Ship.
Weight
(kg)
Oper.
Weight
(kg)
Ship.
Weight
(kg)
Oper.
Weight
(kg)
Heaviest
Section
(kg)
HFL 1502-N
HFL 1502-O
HFL 1503-L
HFL 1503-O
HFL 1504-O
18,5+18,5
22+22
11+11
22+22
22+22
1,1+1,1
1,1+1,1
1,1+1,1
1,1+1,1
1,1+1,1
45,6
48,0
38,6
46,8
45,8
35,8
35,8
35,8
35,8
35,8
8000
8040
9020
9100
10180
10990
11030
12450
12530
13870
4000
4020
4510
4550
5090
845
845
1080
1080
1315
2410
2410
2675
2675
2880
2730
2730
2730
2730
2730
4840
4840
4840
4840
4840
840
840
840
840
840
1110
1110
1110
1110
1110
540
540
540
540
540
840
840
840
840
840
180
180
180
180
180
HFL 1921-P
HFL 1922-N
HFL 1922-O
HFL 1922-P
HFL 1923-O
HFL 1923-P
HFL 1924-P
30+30
18,5+18,5
22+22
30+30
22+22
30+30
30+30
2,2+2,2
2,2+2,2
2,2+2,2
2,2+2,2
2,2+2,2
2,2+2,2
2,2+2,2
57,4
49,0
51,8
56,6
51,2
55,8
54,8
48,4
48,4
48,4
48,4
48,4
48,4
48,4
8380
9400
9480
9680
10800
11000
12300
11300
12800
12880
13080
14680
14880
16860
4190
4700
4740
4840
5400
5500
6150
610
845
845
845
1080
1080
1315
2175
2410
2410
2410
2675
2675
2880
3650
3650
3650
3650
3650
3650
3650
4840
4840
4840
4840
4840
4840
4840
1050
1050
1050
1050
1050
1050
1050
1400
1400
1400
1400
1400
1400
1400
580
580
580
580
580
580
580
920
920
920
920
920
920
920
220
220
220
220
220
220
220
HFL - D 15
W
a
t
e
r

S
a
v
i
n
g

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
... because temperature matters
HFL 180X - 240 X (Double Cell Units)
Model
HFL
Fan
Motor
(kW)
Pump
Motor
(kW)
Air-
flow
(m
3
/s)
Spray-
flow
(l/s)
Ship.
Weight
(kg)
Oper.
Weight
(kg)
Heaviest
Section
(kg)
Dimensions (mm) FDC 3-Way Valve Arrangement
F H L W
Ship.
Weight
(kg)
Oper.
Weight
(kg)
Ship.
Weight
(kg)
Oper.
Weight
(kg)
Heaviest
Section
(kg)
HFL 1801-P
HFL 1802-O
HFL 1802-P
HFL 1803-P
HFL 1804-Q
15+30
18,5+2
2
22+30
22+30
22+37
1,1+4
1,1+4
1,1+4
1,1+4
1,1+4
58,7
55,2
59,9
57,9
59,1
44,8
44,8
44,8
44,8
44,8
8790
10050
10090
11410
12850
12075
13745
13785
15695
17395
5330
6050
6070
6860
7760
610
845
845
1080
1315
2175
2410
2410
2675
2880
2730
2730
2730
2730
2730
6045
6045
6045
6045
6045
1010
1010
1010
1010
1010
1360
1360
1360
1360
1360
700
700
700
700
700
1090
1090
1090
1090
1090
320
320
320
320
320
HFL 2402-O
HFL 2402-P
HFL 2403-P
HFL 2403-Q
HFL 2404-Q
18,5+2
2
22+30
22+30
30+37
30+37
2,2+4
2,2+4
2,2+4
2,2+4
2,2+4
58,2
63,2
61,9
66,8
65,6
60,5
60,5
60,5
60,5
60,5
11920
11980
13590
13790
15410
16760
16820
19030
19230
21660
7220
7240
8190
8290
9260
845
845
1080
1080
1315
2410
2410
2675
2675
2880
3650
3650
3650
3650
3650
6045
6045
6045
6045
6045
1285
1285
1285
1285
1285
1755
1755
1755
1755
1755
800
800
800
800
800
1350
1350
1350
1350
1350
340
340
340
340
340
HFL - D 16
H
F
L
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
HFL 216X - 288X (Double Cell Units)
General Notes
1. All connections 100 mm and smaller are MPT. Connections larger
than 100 mm are bevelled-for-welding.
2. Fan kW is for HFL units without FDC (0 Pa ESP) and in wet
operation. To operate against external static pressure up to 125
Pa, consult your local BAC Balticare representative for size and
location.
3. Airflow is for HFL units without FDC. For air flow of units equipped
with the FDC consult you local BAC Balticare Representative.
4. Unit height is indicative, for precise value refer to certified print.
5. Shipping/operating weights indicated are for units without
accessories such as sound attenuators, discharge hoods, etc.
Consult factory certified prints to obtain weight additions and the
heaviest section to be lifted.
6. The weights for the 3-way valve arrangement are the maximum
weights.
Model
HFL
Fan
Motor
(kW)
Pump
Motor
(kW)
Air-
flow
(m
3
/s)
Spray-
flow
(l/s)
Ship.
Weight
(kg)
Oper.
Weight
(kg)
Heaviest
Section
(kg)
Dimensions (mm) FDC 3-Way Valve Arrangement
F H L W
Ship.
Weight
(kg)
Oper.
Weight
(kg)
Ship.
Weight
(kg)
Oper.
Weight
(kg)
Heaviest
Section
(kg)
HFL 2161-P
HFL 2162-O
HFL 2162-P
HFL 2163-P
HFL 2164-Q
30+30
22+22
30+30
30+30
37+37
4+4
4+4
4+4
4+4
4+4
73,8
64,7
71,7
69,0
72,4
53,8
53,8
53,8
53,8
53,8
10660
12100
12140
13720
15520
14600
16500
16540
18860
20920
5330
6050
6070
6860
7760
610
845
845
1080
1315
2175
2410
2410
2675
2880
2730
2730
2730
2730
2730
7250
7250
7250
7250
7250
1180
1180
1180
1180
1180
1610
1610
1610
1610
1610
860
860
860
860
860
1340
1340
1340
1340
1340
320
320
320
320
320
HFL 2882-O
HFL 2882-P
HFL 2883-O
HFL 2883-P
HFL 2883-Q
HFL 2884-Q
22+22
30+30
22+22
30+30
37+37
37+37
4+4
4+4
4+4
4+4
4+4
4+4
67,3
74,6
65,5
72,6
77,9
76,3
72,6
72,6
72,6
72,6
72,6
72,6
14440
14480
16340
16380
16580
18520
19540
19580
22160
22200
22380
25270
7220
7240
8170
8190
8290
9260
845
845
1080
1080
1080
1315
2410
2410
2675
2675
2675
2880
3650
3650
3650
3650
3650
3650
7250
7250
7250
7250
7250
7250
1520
1520
1520
1520
1520
1520
2110
2110
2110
2110
2110
2110
1020
1020
1020
1020
1020
1020
1780
1780
1780
1780
1780
1780
340
340
340
340
340
340
HFL - D 17
W
a
t
e
r

S
a
v
i
n
g

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
... because temperature matters
Sound Attenuation
HS and HD Sound Attenuation
VS Sound Attenuation
1. Access; 2. FDC; 3. Discharge Attenuator; 4. Intake Attenuator HS, 5. Intake Attenuator HD; 6. Three-way valve arrangement; 7. Pump
Attenuation (only installed on 3000 rpm pump motors).
1. Access; 2. FDC; 3. Discharge Attenuator; 4. Intake Attenuator VS, 5. Intake Plenum VS; 6. Three-way valve arrangement; 7. Pump
Attenuation (only installed on 3000 rpm pump motors).
HFL - D 18
H
F
L
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
HFL with FDC (Finned Discharge Coil)
HFL without FDC (Finned Discharge Coil)
Model
HFL
HS attenuator HD attenuator VS attenuator Dimensions
Solid Bottom
+ Intake
(kg)
Discharge
(kg)
Total
(kg)
Solid Bottom
+ Intake
(kg)
Discharge
(kg)
Total
(kg)
Total
(kg)
" L"
(mm)
" W"
(mm)
HFL 36X-X 515 255 770 710 275 985 880 2730 1250
HFL 48X-X 515 315 830 710 335 1045 965 3650 1250
HFL 72X-X 790 420 1210 1105 455 1560 1330 2730 2400
HFL 96X-X 790 510 1300 1105 550 1655 1435 3650 2400
HFL 108X-X 1065 590 1655 1520 640 2160 1830 2730 3605
HFL 144X-X 1065 715 1780 1520 770 2290 1980 3650 3605
HFL 150X-X 1580 840 2420 2210 910 3120 2660 2730 4840
HFL 192X-X 1580 1020 2600 2210 1100 3310 2870 3650 4840
HFL 180X-X 1855 1010 2865 2625 1095 3720 3160 2730 6045
HFL 240X-X 1855 1225 3080 2625 1320 3945 3415 3650 6045
HFL 216X-X 2130 1180 3310 3040 1280 4320 3660 2730 7250
HFL 288X-X 2130 1430 3560 3040 1540 4580 3960 3650 7250
Model
HFL
HS attenuator HD attenuator VS attenuator Dimensions
Solid Bottom
+ Intake
(kg)
Discharge
(kg)
Total
(kg)
Solid Bottom
+ Intake
(kg)
Discharge
(kg)
Total
(kg)
Total
(kg)
" L"
(mm)
" W"
(mm)
HFL 36X-X 515 295 810 710 315 1025 855 2730 1250
HFL 48X-X 515 365 880 710 385 1095 950 3650 1250
HFL 72X-X 790 465 1255 1105 500 1605 1300 2730 2400
HFL 96X-X 790 565 1355 1105 605 1710 1415 3650 2400
HFL 108X-X 1065 650 1715 1520 700 2220 1800 2730 3605
HFL 144X-X 1065 785 1850 1520 840 2360 1955 3650 3605
HFL 150X-X 1580 930 2510 2210 1000 3210 2600 2730 4840
HFL 192X-X 1580 1130 2710 2210 1210 3420 2830 3650 4840
HFL 180X-X 1855 1115 2970 2625 1200 3825 3100 2730 6045
HFL 240X-X 1855 1350 3205 2625 1445 4070 3370 3650 6045
HFL 216X-X 2130 1300 3430 3040 1400 4440 3600 2730 7250
HFL 288X-X 2130 1570 3700 3040 1680 4720 3910 3650 7250
HFL - D 19
W
a
t
e
r

S
a
v
i
n
g

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
... because temperature matters
Operation of the HFL "Wet/Dry" Sump Design
Wet Operation
The fluid to be cooled is fed to the HFL Hybrid Closed Circuit Cooling Tower. Through a water
distribution system installed above the prime surface coil water is sprayed over the coil. From the
coil the spray water drops into a plenum with a sloping bottom panel. The spray water is then
drained to the wet sump, where it is collected and pumped to the water distribution system for
another cycle. The sump is shielded from the air stream by a separation panel, which extends into
a water lock. By means of the water lock the pressure difference between the equipment interior
(elevated pressure) and the sump (atmospheric pressure) is equalised. The water lock is
designed so that the fan(s) can be operated at any fan speed (and pressure) and maintain
atmospheric pressure in the sump area. This way access to the sump is possible even if the fan
system is in operation.
Dry Operation
During dry operation the spray water pump is shut off. The spray water drains into the wet sump.
The sloping bottom of the plenum ensures complete drainage. In subfreezing conditions an electric
sump heater located underneath the water lock will ensure that the water in the sump and in
particular in the water lock area will not freeze. Air will be moved over the prime surface coil to
reject the heat from the fluid fed to this coil. It is possible to consider the use of multi-step fan
motors or modulating air flow controls, but if the aim is to achieve the maximum reduction of water
consumption, it is recommended to maintain full airflow during wet operation and change fan
speed only during dry operation periods.
Three Distinct Modes of Operation
Combined wet/dry Operating Mode
The fluid to be cooled is first fed to the finned
discharge coil, where it is pre-cooled by the
discharge air. Subsequently the fluid is fed to the
prime surface coil, which is wetted by the spray
system. By means of evaporative heat transfer
the fluid is cooled to its desired exit temperature.
With this arrangement already at peak conditions
significant water savings can be achieved. At
reduced heat load and/or ambient temperatures
the three-way valve (optional), which is controlled
by the design fluid outlet temperature, modulates
the flow through the wetted prime surface coil. As
flow and heat load for the wetted prime surface
coil decrease, less and less evaporative heat
transfer will occur and a significant amount of
water is saved.
Adiabatic Operating Mode
When the fluid to be cooled completely bypasses the wetted prime surface coil, the adiabatic
operating mode occurs. In this mode no heat is rejected from the wetted prime surface coil and no
water is evaporated for heat rejection purposes. The only water that evaporates is the water
needed to humidify the air stream subsequently led over the finned discharge coil. Due to
humidification the temperature of this air is reduced and the heat transfer capability of the finned
discharge coil is increased.
Wet-Dry Operating Mode
HFL - D 20
H
F
L
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Dry Operating Mode
During this mode the spray water pump is off and the three-way valve is set, so that the full flow of
the fluid to be cooled is fed to the prime surface coil. This way it is achieved that full benefit is taken
from the heat exchange surfaces of both, the finned discharge coil and the prime surface coil,
which in this mode is not wetted. In this mode no water is consumed at all.
Note: *During dry mode air flow modulation can be controlled by two-speed motor or Variable Frequency Drive.
Operation Mode
Dry Finned Coil
Fluid Flow
Wet Prime Surface Coil
Fluid Flow
Spray Pump Fans
Dry-Wet Mode 100 % Modulating ON ON
Adiabatic Mode 100 % 0 % ON ON
Dry Mode 100 % 100 % OFF ON*
Adiabatic Operating Mode Dry Operating Mode
HFL - D 21
W
a
t
e
r

S
a
v
i
n
g

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
... because temperature matters
Structural Support
REMARK: Do not use for construction. Refer to factory certified dimensions & weights. This brochure includes data
current at time of publication, which should be reconfirmed at the time of purchase. In the interest of product
improvement, specifications, weights and dimensions are subject to change without notice. Up-to-date engineering
data and more can be found at www.BaltimoreAircoil.com.
The recommended support arrangement for units consists of parallel I-beams running the full length of the unit, spaced as shown in the following
drawing. Besides providing adequate support, the steel also serves to raise the unit above any solid foundation to ensure access to the bottom
of the unit. To support units in an alternate steel support arrangement, consult your BAC Balticare Representative.
Units with and without Sound Attenuation
HFL 36X to HFL 144X (Single Cell Units)
HFL 150X to HFL 288X (Double Cell Units)
1. (4) 22 mm mounting holes; 2. Support Beams; 3. Fan Side; 4. Outline of Unit; 5. Outline of Attenuator HS (optional); 6. Outline of
Attenuator HD (optional).
1. (12) 22 mm mounting holes; 2. Support Beams; 3. Fan Side; 4. Outline of Unit; 5. Outline of Attenuator HS (optional); 6. Outline of
Attenuator HD (optional); 7. Temporary min. 500 mm extra length required (see note 5).
HFL - D 22
H
F
L
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Notes:
1. The recommended support arrangement for double cell units
consists of three parallel I-beams. Supports and anchor bolts are
to be designed and furnished by others.
2. All supporting beams are to be flush and level at top and must be
oriented relative to gage line as shown.
3. Recommended design loads for each unit support beam should
be 60% of the total unit operating weight applied as a uniform load
to each of the unit beams. Beams should be designed in
accordance with standard structural practice. For the maximum
allowable deflection of beams under the unit refer to above table.
4. Double Cell units in combination with omega lineair springs or
vibration isolators, require a different support arrangement. Use
2x single cell arrangement positioned 500mm apart.
5. Units to be positioned +/- 500mm apart on the beams and then
pushed and/or pulled together.
Model A B C D
Maximum Allowable Beam
Deflection (mm)
HFL 36X 3334 1194 - - 13
HFL 48X 4253 1194 - - 13
HFL 72X 3334 2344 - - 13
HFL 96X 4253 2344 - - 13
HFL 108X 3334 3551 - - 13
HFL 144X 4253 3551 - - 13
HFL 150 X 3334 2344 2344 1951 13
HFL 192 X 4253 2344 2344 1951 13
HFL 180 X 3334 3551 2344 1951 13
HFL 240 X 4253 3551 2344 1951 13
HFL 216 X 3334 3551 3551 1951 13
HFL 288 X 4253 3551 3551 1951 13
HFL - D 23
W
a
t
e
r

S
a
v
i
n
g

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
... because temperature matters
Engineering Specifications
1.0 Hybrid Closed Circuit Cooling Tower
1.0 General: Furnish and install ____factory assembled, forced draft,
centrifugal fan, hybrid closed circuit cooling tower(s) with vertical air
discharge, conforming in all aspects to the specifications and
schedules as shown on the plans. Overall dimensions shall not
exceed approximately ____mm long x ____mm wide x ____ mm
high. The total connected fan kW shall not exceed ____kW. The total
connected pump kW shall not exceed ____kW. The hybrid closed
circuit cooling tower(s) shall be Baltimore Aircoil Model(s)
________________.
1.2. Thermal Capacity (water as heat transfer fluid): The hybrid
closed-circuit cooling tower(s) shall be warranted by the manufacturer
to cool ______lps of _______ water from ____C to ____C at
____C entering wet-bulb temperature and from ____C to ____C at
____C entering dry bulb temperature.
(Alternate1.2.) Thermal Capacity (aqueous glycol solution as heat
transfer fluid): The hybrid closed circuit cooling tower(s) shall be
warranted by the manufacturer to cool ________lps of _____% by
volume ethylene/propylene glycol solution from ______C to
_____C at _____C entering wet-bulb temperature and from ____C
to ____C at ____C entering dry bulb temperature. Coil pressure
drop shall not exceed ________bar.
1.3. Corrosion Resistant Construction: Unless otherwise noted in
this specification, all steel panels and structural members shall be
constructed of heavy-gauge Z600 metric hot-dip galvanized steel,
with all sheared edges given a protective coating of zinc-rich
compound.
(Alternate1.3.) Corrosion Resistant Construction: Unless otherwise
noted in this specification, all steel panels and structural members
shall be protected with the BALTIBONDCorrosion Protection
System. The system shall consist of Z600 metric hot-dip galvanized
steel prepared in a four-step (clean, pre-treat, rinse, and dry) process
with an electrostatically sprayed, thermosetting hybrid polymer fuse-
bonded to the substrate during a thermally activated curing stage and
monitored by a 23-step quality assurance program.
1.4. Quality Assurance: The hybrid closed circuit cooling tower
manufacturer shall have a management system certified by an
accredited registrar as complying with the requirements of ISO-
9001:2000 to ensure consistent quality of its products and services.
Hybrid closed circuit cooling tower manufacturers that are not ISO-
9001:2000 certified shall provide an additional year of warranty to the
customer at no additional cost.
1.5. Warranty: The manufacturers standard equipment warranty
shall be for a period of not less than one year from date of startup or
eighteen months from date of shipment, whichever occurs first.
2.0 Construction Details
2.1.Tower Structure: The hybrid closed circuit cooling tower shall be
constructed of heavy-gauge steel utilizing double-brake flanges for
maximum strength and rigidity and reliable sealing of water-tight
joints. All sheared edges shall be protected with a coating of zinc-rich
compound.
2.2. Casing Assembly: The hybrid closed circuit cooling tower shall
include a coil casing section consisting of a serpentine coil, spray
water distribution system, and drift eliminators, as indicated by the
manufacturer. Drift eliminators shall be removable in easily handled
sections. They shall incorporate a minimum of three changes in air
direction.
2.3. Coil Assembly:
2.3.1. Prime Surface Coil: The cooling coil shall be fabricated of
continuous lengths of all prime surface steel at the manufacturers
own facility, and hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. The cooling coil
shall be pneumatically tested at 10 bar. The cooling coil shall be
designed for low pressure drop with sloping tubes for free drainage of
fluid.
2.3.2. Finned Discharge Coil: The cooling coil shall be fabricated of
copper tubes with corrugated aluminium plate fins and seamless
copper tube headers with connections. The cooling coil shall be
pneumatically tested at 10 bar. Fins with full drawn collars to maintain
consistent fin spacing and a continuous surface contact over the
entire tube. Staggered arrangement of minimum 4 circuits. Coils with
heavy-duty aluminium frame shall be installed in a casing from Z600
galvanised steel. Casing includes an access plenum with access
doors.
2.4. Water Distribution System: Water shall be distributed evenly
over the coil at a minimum flow rate of 3.1 lps/m to ensure complete
wetting of the coil at all times by large-diameter, non-clog, plastic 360
distribution nozzles spaced across the coil face area in spray
branches by snap-in rubber grommets, allowing quick removal of
individual nozzles or complete branches for cleaning or flushing.
Nozzles shall utilize a two-stage diffusion pattern to provide
overlapping, umbrella spray patterns that create multiple intersection
points with adjacent nozzles.
2.5. Spray Pump System: The hybrid closed circuit cooling tower
shall include a close-coupled, bronze-fitted centrifugal pump
equipped with a mechanical seal, mounted on the basin and piped to
the suction strainer and water distribution system. It shall be installed
so that it can be drained when the basin is drained. The pump
assembly shall include a metering valve and bleed line to control the
bleed rate from the pump discharge to the overflow connection. The
pump motor shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) type with IP
54 protection and class B insulation suitable for outdoor
service,_____ kW, _______Volt, ________Hz, ______Phase.
2.6. Basin Assembly: The hybrid closed circuit cooling tower sump
design includes a wet and a dry sump. During dry operation all water
will drain from the dry sump into the wet sump, which is shielded from
the airstream. Heaters in the wet sump are sufficiently sized to
prevent freezing at temperatures as low as 25C at full speed of the
fan system. Both sumps are compactly integrated into the design of
the hybrid closed circuit cooling tower(s). The combination sump/fan
section shall be constructed of heavy-gauge Z600 metric galvanized
steel. The wet sump shall be provided with large area lift out strainers
with perforated openings sized smaller than the water distribution
nozzles and an anti-vortexing device to prevent air entrainment. The
strainer and vortex device shall be constructed of the same material
as the cold water basin to prevent dissimilar metal corrosion.
HFL - D 24
H
F
L
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
3.0 Mechanical Equipment
3.1. Fan System: The fans and motors shall be factory installed at the
base of the unit in the dry entering air stream to provide greater
reliability and ease of maintenance. The forwardly curved centrifugal
fans shall be heavy-duty centrifugal flow types. Fan housings shall
have curved inlet rings for efficient air entry and rectangular discharge
cowls shall extend into the basin to increase fan efficiency and
prevent water from entering the fans. Fans shall be mounted on a
steel fan shaft supported by heavy-duty self-aligning, relubricatable
ball bearings with cast iron housings and designed for a minimum L10
life of 40 000 hours (280 000 hrs average life). The fan shaft shall be
protected with a two-part epoxy coating for corrosion protection.
3.2. Fan Motor/Drive System: Fan motor(s) shall be totally enclosed
fan cooled (TEFC), IP-55, class F, selected for _____Pa static
pressure. Fan motor(s) shall be suitable for _____ volts, ____ phase,
____ Hz electrical service and shall be mounted on an easily
adjusted, heavy-duty motor base. V-belt drives and all moving parts
are protected with removable screens.
(Alternate 3.2.) Baltiguard

Fan System: Two single speed fan


motors, one sized for full speed and load, the other sized for 2/3
speed and approximately 1/3 of full load kW shall be provided in each
cell for capacity control and standby protection from drive or motor
failure. Two-speed motor(s) is not an acceptable alternative.
4.0 Access
4.1. Access Wet Sump: Large rectangular access door(s) shall be
provided on the connection end of the cooling tower for access to the
wet sump of the cooling tower, including water make-up valve, float
ball and suction strainer.
4.2. Access Dry Sump: Circular access door(s) shall be provided for
easy access to the air distribution plenum.
4.3. Acces Water Distribution System: Rectangular acces doors
shall be provided in the plenum section under the finned coil for easy
acces to the water distribution system.
5.0 Sound
5.1 Sound Level: To maintain the quality of the local environment,
the maximum sound pressure levels (dB) measured 15 m from the
cooling tower operating at full fan speed shall not exceed the sound
levels detailed below.
Location 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 dB(A)
Discharge
Air Inlet
End
Back
Dry Fluid Coolers
DFC - D 1
W
a
t
e
r

S
a
v
i
n
g

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
DFC
.
Product Detail
DFC Dry Fluid Coolers ............................................................................. D2
Benefits ....................................................................................................... D4
Construction Details .................................................................................. D7
Custom Features and Options .................................................................. D9
Accessories ............................................................................................... D10
Engineering Data ..................................................................................... D12
Engineering Specifications DFCH / T ................................................... D18
Engineering Specifications DFCV ......................................................... D19
DFC - D 2
D
F
C
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
DFC Dry Fluid Coolers
Capacity
Single unit capacity:
30 1110 kW according to ENV1048 norm
1,5 80 l/s 34% glycol solution by volume at 40C/35C/25C
General Description
DFC Dry Fluid Coolers are available in horizontal, vertical or V-shaped configuration in a wide
capacity and sound level range. The DFC has been designed to deliver maximum thermal
performance and longevity while minimising sound pressure, operational and installation costs.
Key Features
100 standard models 270 models total
Available in horizontal, vertical or V-shaped configuration
Heavy duty design requiring minimum maintenance
Suitable for cooling of all common coolants
Unique retractable legs to minimise shipping and installation costs
Low maintenance
Low sound models available for sound sensitive applications
Optimised primary fluid pressure drops due to the availability of various tube diameters
DFC - D 3
W
a
t
e
r

S
a
v
i
n
g

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
... because temperature matters
.
DFC - D 4
D
F
C
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Benefits
Wide Capacity and Sound Level Range
The DFC Dry Fluid Cooler is available in a broad variety of fan configurations, coil designs and
motor types, resulting in a wide and complete range of capacities, optimally satisfying capacity
requirements and sound level limitations.
Thermal and acoustical performance has been verified according to the Eurovent rating
standard 7/C/003-1995 (thermal) and 8/1 (acoustical) for air cooled equipment. This assures
guaranteed cooling efficiency and noise levels throughout the life of the equipment.
The low speed, dry cooler range, applying a 12-pole motor, is especially designed for very
sound sensitive application, such as residential areas.
The application of 1/2" as well as 5/8 tubing allows the optimisation of the primary fluid
pressure drop.
Acoustical Testing on DFC Dry Cooler Acoustical Testing on DFC Fans
Capacity Testing of DFC Dry Coolers Capacity Testing of DFC Dry Coolers
DFC - D 5
W
a
t
e
r

S
a
v
i
n
g

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
... because temperature matters
Heavy Duty Design
The DFC Dry Fluid Cooler has been designed to meet demanding conditions of an industrial
environment. Highly corrosion resistant materials, double break flanges and intermediate coil
supports guarantee strong structural strength.
The heat exchanger is made of high quality seamless copper tubes with wall thickness above
industrial standard and thick and rigid aluminium fins with rippled corrugated fin surface.
Quick and Easy Installation
The heat exchanger section is supported by unique retractable legs, which recess into the heat
transfer section to reduce shipping volume and to facilitate quick and easy installation.
Heavy Duty Design, Double-break Flanges Heavy Duty Design, Intermediate Coil
Supports
Retractable Legs: in Retractable Legs: out
DFC - D 6
D
F
C
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Low Maintenance & Ease of Access
Fan and motor of the DFC Dry fluid cooler are designed to be totally maintenance free. Large
removable panels assure ease of access to the heat exchanger for inspection and cleaning.
Removable Panels Removable Panels
DFC - D 7
W
a
t
e
r

S
a
v
i
n
g

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
... because temperature matters
Construction Details
DFCH Horizontal Dry Cooler
DFCV Shaped Dry Cooler
DFC - D 8
D
F
C
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
1. Heavy Duty Construction
Structure and casing of bolted heavy gauge hot dipped galvanised steel panels Z275 with
double break angles and intermediate coil supports. Casing painted with zinc aluminium
coating.
2. Heat Exchanger (Not Shown on DFCH)
Staggered tube arrangement with dense tube spacing.
Rigid 0,17 mm or 0,14 mm thick aluminium fins with rippled, corrugated fin surface design with
2,5 mm fin spacing, creates turbulent air stream for high performance.
High quality seamless 15,9 mm or 12,7 mm diameter copper tubes, with 0,4 mm wall thickness.
Thick seamless copper headers and threaded steel connections.
3. Fan & Fan Motor
Low profile fan.
Asymmetrically spaced and crenulated blades give low noise characteristics and increased
efficiency.
Fan designed for frequent starting, up to 60 times an hour.
Continuous running at 40C to 60C air temperature.
The bearing seals and encapsulation of the motor eliminate the possibility of contamination,
hence extending the product life.
The fan and motor are designed to be totally maintenance free.
4. Retractable Legs (DFCH only)
The heat exchanger section is supported by columns which recess into the heat exchanger
section to reduce shipping volume, and facilitate installation.
5. Removable Panels (DFCH only)
Large removable panels assure ease of access to the heat exchanger for inspection and
cleaning.
6. Electrical Panel (optional)
factory installed IP65 electrical panel fully wired to motors
available with variable frequency drive or step controller for capacity control
DFC - D 9
W
a
t
e
r

S
a
v
i
n
g

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
... because temperature matters
Custom Features and Options
Casing Construction Options
Structure and casing are constructed of bolted heavy gauge hot dipped galvanised steel panels
Z275 (275 gr. of zinc per m2) with double break angles and intermediate coil supports. Panels are
bolted with the best hardware available on the market, triple protected against corrosion, with zinc
phosphate treatment, zinc rich inorganic resin coating and aluminium rich organic topcoat. As
standard the outside of the casing is painted with Baltiplus zinc aluminium polymeric coating.
High Temperature Configuration
(DFCH only)
The standard fan motor configuration is suitable
for continuous running at 40C to 60C air
temperature. For high temperature fluid cooling
applications, where air discharge temperature
may exceed 60C, the fans can be positioned
underneath the coil in the incoming air stream,
pushing the air through the heat exchanger.
Heat Exchanger Construction
Materials
The standard materials of construction for the
heat exchanger are seamless copper tubes
with 0,4-mm wall thickness and corrugated
aluminium fins of 0,17 or 0,14 mm thickness
and 2,5 fin spacing.
For aggressive environments in industrial
applications or installation at coastal areas, the
following optional fin materials are available:
- Aluminium fins with pre-coated hydrophobic
anti-corrosion surface treatment. Both sides
of the aluminium fin are coated with a layer of epoxy phenolic resin. After thermosetting the
high quality and firmly bonded hydrophobic film is highly effective in minimising salt corrosion
and has excellent solvent resistance.
- Copper fins of 0,2 mm thickness in lieu of aluminium.
DFCH in High Temperature execution
Heat Exchanger
DFC - D 10
D
F
C
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Accessories
Wiring to Terminal Box
Each fan can be wired to a terminal box of IP55
enclosure located at the fluid connection end of
the cooler, or at the opposite side. The wiring can
be specified for single speed fan operation or for
dual fan speed operation through delta/star re-
connect.
Two-Speed Switch
All motors are suitable for dual speed operation
through delta/star re-connect. A two-speed switch
can be supplied as an option, installed on the unit
for manual changeover.
Variable Speed Drive
Designed specifically for energy-optimised fan
control, variable speed drive is available for the
simultaneous speed control of the fans of the Dry
Cooler. The variable speed drive is of EMC low-
noise design, delivered with control panel and
EMC filter. It has a built-in PID controller for fast
and accurate control of the fans through a direct
connection to a temperature sensor. The drive is
equipped with a manual/auto button for
maintenance purposes. The drive is delivered with factory settings, but its menu-driven operating
system allows easy re-programming in the field.
Safety Switch
If required by local codes a safety switch for each
fan can be installed in the wiring to the terminal
box of the motor.
Wiring to Terminal Box
Safety Switch
DFC - D 11
W
a
t
e
r

S
a
v
i
n
g

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
... because temperature matters
Starter Panels
Starter panel of IP65 enclosure is available with
main switch, main fuses, general contactor relay
with emergency cut-out switch, control circuit
fuse, thermal contactor and coil for each fan,
wired to the fan motor thermostatic cut-out switch.
Alternatively, starter panels designed for capacity
control by fan cycling can be provided, with
electronic step controller, as sequence controller
with direct entry and setting of all data and
immersion temperature sensor with protection
pocket made of brass.
Sound Attenuation
Low Sound Dry Cooler models with low speed
motors are available for installation in sound
sensitive and residential areas. Alternatively the
dry coolers can be equipped with air outlet
silencers.
Air Inlet Screens
Wire mesh screens can be factory-installed on
the air intake side to prevent debris from entering
the dry cooler. For dry coolers in high temperature
execution, the screen would be installed at air
outlet.
Electrical Panel
DFCH with Sound Attenuation
DFC - D 12
D
F
C
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Engineering Data
REMARK: Do not use for construction. Refer to factory certified dimensions & weights. This brochure includes data
current at time of publication, which should be reconfirmed at the time of purchase. In the interest of product
improvement, specifications, weights and dimensions are subject to change without notice. Up-to-date engineering
data and more can be found at www.BaltimoreAircoil.com.
Horizontal DFCH or Vertical DFCT Dry Coolers
Note: Height for S80 models is 1527 mm.
DFCH/S80 and DFCT/S80
Standard Sound Level Models Fans 800 mm 6 pole Motor
Model
DFCH/T
Number
of Fans
Nominal
Capacity
kW
Airflow
m
3
/s
Cooling
Agent
l/s
p
kPa
Tube
Internal
Volume
dm
3
Surface
m
2
Connec-
tions
Ship.
Weight
kg
Lp
A
dB(A)
Dimensions
mm
/ / / / / A B C
S8012-S213B
S8012-L313B
S8012-S413B
S8012-L416B
2
oo
74/64
109/91
123/101
128/105
12,2/9,3
11,4/8,7
10,7/8,2
11,3/8,6
3,9/3,4
5,7/4,8
6,5/5,3
6,7/5,5
13/10
75/54
53/36
41/29
24
35
47
74
193
290
386
347
2 x ND80
368
401
435
473
61/58 3612 2900 -
Horizontal DFCH Dry Cooler
Vertical DFCT Dry Cooler
DFC - D 13
W
a
t
e
r

S
a
v
i
n
g

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
... because temperature matters
DFCH/L80 and DFCT/L80
Low Sound Level Models Fans 800 mm 8 pole motor
S8013-S213B
S8013-S313B
S8013-D413B
S8013-S416B
3
ooo
123/104
165/138
177/146
196/161
18,3/13,9
17,1/13,0
16,1/12,3
16,9/12,9
6,5/5,5
8,7/7,3
9,3/7,7
10,3/8,5
41/30
96/69
29/21
57/40
35
53
71
112
290
435
579
520
2 x ND80
513
563
613
670
63/60 5212 4500 -
S8014-S213B
S8014-D413B
S8014-D416B
4
oooo
173/146
247/202
248/206
24,4/18,6
21,5/16,4
22,6/17,2
9,1/7,7
13,0/10,6
13,1/10,9
92/68
64/44
26/19
47
95
149
386
773
693
2 x ND80
686
820
896
63/60 6812 6100 3050
S8015-D413B
S8015-M516B
5
ooooo
268/219
301/244
24,2/18,5
24,0/18,3
14,1/11,6
15,9/12,9
74/51
73/50
95
186
773
867
2 x ND80
871
1033
64/61 6812 6100 2410
S8022-S213B
S8022-L313B
S8022-S413B
S8022-L416B
4
oo
oo
149/128
218/182
247/202
257/210
24,4/18,7
22,8/17,4
21,5/16,5
22,6/17,3
7,8/6,7
11,5/9,6
13,0/10,6
13,5/11,1
13/10
75/54
53/36
41/29
47
71
95
149
386
579
773
693
4 x ND80
637
703
770
846
64/61 3612 2900 -
S8023-S213B
S8023-S313B
S8023-D413B
S8023-S416B
6
ooo
ooo
247/209
331/277
354/292
392/322
36,6/28,0
34,2/26,1
32,3/24,7
33,9/25,9
13,0/11,0
17,5/14,6
18,7/15,4
20,7/17,0
41/30
96/69
29/21
57/40
71
106
142
223
579
869
1159
1040
4 x ND80
902
1003
1103
1217
66/63 5212 4500 -
S8024-S213B
S8024-D413B
S8024-D416B
8
oooo
oooo
346/293
494/404
497/412
48,8/37,3
43,1/33,0
45,2/34,6
18,0/15,4
26,1/21,3
26,2/21,8
92/68
64/44
26/19
95
189
298
773
1545
1386
4 x ND80
1192
1460
1612
66/63 6812 6100 3050
S8025-D413B
S8025-M516B
10
ooooo
ooooo
536/439
602/489
48,5/37,1
48,0/36,7
28,3/23,2
31,8/25,8
74/51
73/50
189
372
1545
1733
4 x ND80
1542
1866
67/64 6812 6100 2410
Model
DFCH/T
Number
of Fans
Nominal
Capacity
kW
Airflow
m
3
/s
Cooling
Agent
l/s
p
kPa
Tube
Internal
Volume
dm
3
Surface
m
2
Connec-
tions
Ship.
Weight
kg
Lp
A
dB(A)
Dimensions
mm
/Y /Y /Y /Y /Y A B C
L8012-H213B
L8012-L313B
L8012-S413B
L8012-L416B
2
oo
73/68
90/81
100/91
104/95
9,4/8,2
8,6/7,5
8,2/7,2
8,6/7,5
3,8/3,6
4,7/4,3
5,3/4,8
5,5/5,0
69/60,2
53/44,8
36/30,7
28/24,6
24
35
47
74
193
290
386
347
2 x ND80
368
401
435
473
56/53 3612 2900 -
L8013-S213B
L8013-S313B
L8013-D413B
L8013-S416B
3
ooo
105/97
136/125
145/132
160/45
14,1/12,8
12,9/11,3
12,3/10,8
12,9/11,3
5,5/5,1
7,2/6,6
7,7/6,9
8,4/7,6
30/26,9
67/57,1
20/17,4
39/33,0
35
53
71
112
290
435
579
520
2 x ND80
513
563
613
670
57/54 5212 4500 -
L8014-S213B
L8014-D413B
L8014-D416B
4
oooo
147/136
201/182
205/186
18,8/16,5
16,4/14,4
17,2/15,1
7,7/7,2
10,6/9,6
10,8/9,8
69/60,2
44/36,7
19/15,9
47
95
149
386
773
693
2 x ND80
686
820
896
58/55 6812 6100 3050
L8015-S213B
L8015-D416B
5
ooooo
162/149
223/203
22,0/19,3
19,3/16,9
8,5/7,9
11,8/10,7
82/71,4
22/18,5
47
186
386
867
2 x ND80
737
947
59/56 6812 6100 2410
L8022-H213B
L8022-L313B
L8022-S413B
L8022-L416B
4
oo
oo
147/136
180/163
201/182
208/190
18,8/16,5
17,2/15,1
16,4/14,4
17,2/15,1
7,7/7,2
9,5/8,6
10,6/9,6
11,0/10,0
69/60,2
53/44,8
36/30,7
28/24,6
47
71
95
149
386
579
773
693
4 x ND80
637
703
770
846
59/56 3612 2900 -
L8023-S213B
L8023-S313B
L8023-D413B
L8023-S416B
6
ooo
ooo
210/195
273/250
291/263
320/290
28,2/24,7
25,8/22,6
24,6/21,6
25,8/22,6
11,1/10,3
14,4/13,2
15,4/13,9
16,9/15,3
30/26,9
67/57,1
20/17,4
39/33,0
71
106
142
223
579
869
1159
1040
4 x ND80
902
1003
1103
1217
60/57 5212 4500 -
L8024-S213B
L8024-D413B
L8024-D416B
8
oooo
oooo
294/273
402/364
411/373
37,6/33,0
32,8/28,8
34,4/30,2
15,5/14,4
21,2/19,2
21,7/19,7
69/60,2
44/36,7
19/15,9
95
189
298
773
1545
1386
4 x ND80
1192
1460
1612
61/58 6812 6100 3050
L8025-S213B
L8025-D416B
10
ooooo
ooooo
325/299
447/406
44,0/38,6
38,7/33,9
17,1/15,8
23,6/21,5
82/71,4
22/18,5
95
372
773
1733
4 x ND80
1275
1694
62/59 6812 6100 2410
Model
DFCH/T
Number
of Fans
Nominal
Capacity
kW
Airflow
m
3
/s
Cooling
Agent
l/s
p
kPa
Tube
Internal
Volume
dm
3
Surface
m
2
Connec-
tions
Ship.
Weight
kg
Lp
A
dB(A)
Dimensions
mm
/ / / / / A B C
DFC - D 14
D
F
C
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
DFCH/R80 and DFCT/R80
Ultra Low Sound Level Models Fans 800 mm 12 pole motor
Notes
1. Dry coolers capacities are tested according to EN 1048.
2. Ratings shown are for clean tubes with 34% ethylene glycol
solution by volume, 40C in and 35C out, 25C ambient air
temperature.
3. Sound Pressure Levels (Lp
A
) are measured in the horizontal
plane at a distance of 10 m from the connection end of the unit,
under free field conditions.
4. Dry Coolers of models with S313B, S516B and D616B coil
configuration have inlet and outlet connections at opposite ends.
Sound Power Levels for one 800 mm Fan at Nominal Speed Rating
Sound Pressure Correction Values Lp
A
for Other Distances
For other distances the change in sound pressure depends on the dimensions of the equipment. Therefore, the correction values given in the
table below are approximate values.
Model
DFCH/T
Number
of Fans
Nominal
Capacity
kW
Airflow
m
3
/s
Cooling
Agent
l/s
p
kPa
Tube
Internal
Volume
dm
3
Surface
m
2
Connec-
tions
Ship.
Weight
kg
Lp
A
dB(A)
Dimensions
mm
/Y /Y /Y /Y /Y A B C
R8012-L313B
2
oo
60/48 5,0/3,7 3,1/2,5 25/17 35 290 2 x ND80 401 36/33 3612 2900 -
R8013-S313B
3
ooo
92/75 7,5/5,6 4,8/3,9 32/22 53 435 2 x ND80 563 38/35 5212 4500 -
R8014-S313B
4
oooo
126/101 10,0/7,5 6,6/5,3 73/49 71 579 2 x ND80 753 38/35 6812 6100 3050
R8022-L313B
4
oo
oo
120/97 10,0/7,5 6,3/5,1 25/17 71 579 4 x ND80 703 40/36 3612 2900 -
R8023-S313B
6
ooo
ooo
184/149 15,0/11,2 9,7/7,8 34/23 106 869 4 x ND80 1003 41/38 5212 4500 -
R8024-S313B
8
oooo
oooo
252/202 20,0/15,0 13,3/10,6 73/49 142 1159 4 x ND80 1326 41/38 6812 6100 3050
DFCH/T
Product Range
Fan Motor
50 Hz Outlet Sound Power Level at Octave Band Center Frequency (Hz) Total
Conn. 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 Lw
A
Standard Sound Level
6-pole Delta 73 82 85 83 81 79 76 69 86
6-pole Star 74 77 81 82 77 75 71 62 83
Low Sound Level
8-pole Delta 79 80 77 76 75 74 71 65 80
8-pole Star 76 77 74 73 72 71 68 62 77
Ultra Low Sound Level
12-pole Delta 47 57 59 62 62 60 58 54 69
12-pole Star 43 53 55 58 58 56 54 50 65
m 2 3 5 10 15 20 30 40 50
dB(A) +14 +10 +6 0 -4 -6 -9 -12 -14
DFC - D 15
W
a
t
e
r

S
a
v
i
n
g

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
... because temperature matters
V-Shaped Dry Coolers DFCV
DFCV/S80
Standard Sound Level Models Fans 800 mm 6 pole motor
Model
DFCV
Number of
Fans
Nominal
Capacity
kW
Airflow
m
3
/s
Cooling
Agent
l/s
p
kPa
Tube
Internal
Volume
dm
3
Surface
m
2
Connec-
tions
Ship.
Weight
kg
Lp
A
dB(A)
Dimensions
mm
/Y /Y /Y /Y /Y L W H
S8022-L413B
S8022-L416B
4
oo
oo
276/225
275/224
23,6/18,0
24,0/18,3
14,5/11,9
14,5/11,8
36/25
14/9
121
191
992
890
4 x ND80
916
1046
65/62 2517 2400 2775
S8023-S413B
S8023-S416B
6
ooo
ooo
422/344
423/346
35,4/27,0
36,0/27,5
22,3/18,1
22,3/18,3
54/37
22/15
182
287
1487
1335
4 x ND80
1283
1462
66/63 3617 2400 2775
S8024-S413B
S8024-S416B
8
oooo
oooo
581/472
581/471
47,2/36,0
48,0/36,6
30,7/24,9
30,7/24,9
97/68
34/23
243
382
1983
1779
8 x ND80
1677
1924
67/64 4717 2400 2775
S8025-D413B
S8025-D416B
10
ooooo
ooooo
685/559
685/557
59,0/45,0
60,0/45,8
36,2/29,5
36,2/29,4
31/21
13/9
303
478
2479
2224
8 x ND80
2070
2387
68/65 5817 2400 2775
S8026-D413B
S8026-D416B
12
oooooo
oooooo
845/688
846/692
70,8/54,1
72,0/55,0
44,6/36,3
44,7/36,6
52/35
21/15
364
574
2975
2669
8 x ND80
2464
2822
68/65 6917 2400 2775
DFCV V-shaped Dry Cooler
DFC - D 16
D
F
C
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
DFCV/L80
Low Sound Level Models Fans 800 mm 8 pole motor
DFCV/S90
Standard Sound Level Models Fans 900 mm 6 pole motor
Model
DFCV
Number of
Fans
Nominal
Capacity
kW
Airflow
m
3
/s
Cooling
Agent
l/s
p
kPa
Tube
Internal
Volume
dm
3
Surface
m
2
Connec-
tions
Ship.
Weight
kg
Lp
A
dB(A)
Dimensions
mm
/Y /Y /Y /Y /Y L W H
L8022-H413B
L8022-H416B
4
oo
oo
236/202
240/207
18,0/14,7
18,8/15,4
12,4/10,7
12,6/21,2
74/56
27/21
121
191
992
890
4 x ND80
916
1046
60/57 2517 2400 2664
L8023-L413B
L8023-L416B
6
ooo
ooo
353/302
357/310
27,0/22,1
28,2/23,1
18,6/15,9
18,9/16,4
74/56
28/22
182
287
1487
1335
4 x ND80
1283
1462
61/58 3617 2400 2664
L8024-S413B
L8024-S416B
8
oooo
oooo
472/405
480/415
36,0/29,5
37,6/30,8
24,9/21,4
25,3/21,9
80/60
33/25
243
382
1983
1779
4 x ND80
1677
1924
62/59 4717 2400 2664
L8025-S413B
L8025-S416B
10
ooooo
ooooo
601/513
615/523
45,0/36,9
47,0/38,5
31,7/27,1
32,5/27,6
124/94
46/34
303
478
2479
2224
8 x ND80
2070
2387
63/60 5817 2400 2664
L8026-D413B
L8026-D416B
12
oooooo
oooooo
686/587
706/608
54,0/44,2
56,4/46,2
36,3/31,0
37,3/32,1
35/26
15/11
364
574
2975
2669
8 x ND80
2464
2822
63/60 6917 2400 2664
Model
DFCV
Number of
Fans
Nominal
Capacity
kW
Airflow
m
3
/s
Cooling
Agent
l/s
p
kPa
Tube
Internal
Volume
dm
3
Surface
m
2
Connec-
tions
Ship.
Weight
kg
Lp
A
dB(A)
Dimensions
mm
/Y /Y /Y /Y /Y L W H
S9022-L616B
4
oo
oo
366/291 26,4/19,7 19,3/15,3 31/21 287 1335 4 x ND80 1331 59/52 2517 2400 2664
S9023-S616B
6
ooo
ooo
555/436 39,6/29,6 29,3/23,0 36/23 430 2002 8 x ND80 1887 61/54 3617 2400 2664
S9024-M616B
8
oooo
oooo
732/582 52,8/39,5 38,6/30,7 29/19 574 2669 8 x ND80 2490 61/54 4717 2400 2664
S9025-M616B
10
ooooo
ooooo
937/733 66,0/49,4 49,5/38,7 50/32 717 3336
8 x
ND100
3124 62/55 5817 2400 2664
S9026-D616B
12
oooooo
oooooo
1110/873 79,2/59,3 58,6/46,1 41/26 860 4004
8 x
ND100
3699 63/56 6917 2400 2664
DFC - D 17
W
a
t
e
r

S
a
v
i
n
g

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
... because temperature matters
DFCV/R90
Ultra Low Sound Level Models Fans 900 mm 12 pole motor
Notes
1. Dry coolers capacities are tested according to EN 1048.
2. Ratings shown are for clean tubes with 34% ethylene glycol
solution by volume, 40C in and 35C out, 25C ambient air
temperature.
3. Sound Pressure Levels (Lp
A
) are measured in the horizontal
plane at a distance of 10 m from the connection end of the unit,
under free field conditions.
4. Dry Coolers of models with S313B, S516B and D616B coil
configuration have inlet and outlet connections at opposite ends.

Sound Power Levels for One Fan at Nominal Speed Rating
800 mm
900 mm
Sound Pressure Correction Values Lp
A
for Other Distances
For other distances the change in sound pressure depends on the dimensions of the equipment. Therefore, the correction values given in the
table below are approximate values.
Model
DFCV
Number of
Fans
Nominal
Capacity
kW
Airflow
m
3
/s
Cooling
Agent
l/s
p
kPa
Tube
Internal
Volume
dm
3
Surface
m
2
Connec-
tions
Ship.
Weight
kg
Lp
A
dB(A)
Dimensions
mm
/Y /Y /Y /Y /Y L W H
R9022-H413B
R9022-H416B
4
oo
oo
170/145
169/145
12/9,9
9,0/7,7
8,9/7,6
42/31
14/11
121
191
992
890
4 x ND80
996
1126
38/37 2517 2400 2664
R9023-L413B
R9023-H416B
6
ooo
ooo
255/217
260/221
18/14,8
13,5/11,5
13,7/11,7
42/31
42/32
182
287
1487
1335
4 x ND80
1403
1582
39/38 3617 2400 2664
R9024-S413B
R9024-L416B
8
oooo
oooo
340/290
341/294
24/19,8
18,0/15,3
18,0/15,6
38/29
27/21
243
382
1983
1779
8 x ND80
1837
2084
40/39 4717 2400 2664
R9025-S413B
R9025-L416B
10
ooooo
ooooo
435/368
434/371
30/24,8
23,0/19,4
22,9/19,6
71/53
51/39
303
478
2479
2224
8 x ND80
2270
2587
41/40 5817 2400 2664
R9026-D413B
R9026-S416B
12
oooooo
oooooo
501/432
522/444
36/29,8
26,5/22,8
27,6/23,4
21/16
40/30
364
574
2975
2669
8 x ND80
2704
3062
42/41 6917 2400 2664
DFCV
Product Range
Fan
motor
50Hz Outlet Sound Power Level at Octave Band Center Frequency (Hz) Total
Conn 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 Lw
A
Standard Sound Level
6-pole Delta 73 82 85 83 81 79 76 69 86
6-pole Star 74 77 81 82 77 75 71 62 83
Low Sound Level
8-pole Delta 79 80 77 76 75 74 71 65 80
8-pole Star 76 77 74 73 72 71 68 62 77
DFCV
Product Range
Fan motor
50Hz Outlet Sound Power Level at Octave Band Center Frequency (Hz) Total
Conn 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 Lw
A
Standard Sound Level
6-pole Delta 62 76 82 85 85 83 80 74 89
6-pole Star 55 69 75 78 78 76 73 67 82
Ultra Low Sound Level
12-pole Delta 49 58 61 64 64 62 58 55 68
12-pole Star 48 57 60 63 63 61 57 54 67
m 2 3 5 10 15 20 30 40 50
dB(A) +14 +10 +6 0 -4 -6 -9 -12 -14
DFC - D 18
D
F
C
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Engineering Specifications DFCH / T
1.0 Heat Exchanger
1.1 General: The finned Coil Heat Exchanger consists of either 1/2
or 5/8 O.D. phosphorus deoxidised copper seamless tubes and
aluminium fins. Staggered tube construction provides substantially
higher capacity since more tubes are exposed to the air stream. The
advanced rippled-corrugated fin design creates a state of continuous
turbulence, which effectively reduces the boundary layer formation
that could otherwise reduce the rate of heat exchange. Fins have full
drawn collars to maintain fin spacing and provide a continuous
surface cover over the entire tube. The copper tubes are
mechanically expanded into the fin collars to provide a continuous
primary to secondary compression bond over the entire finned length
for maximum heat transfer rates. Headers are made of seamless
copper tubing and the coils are circuited for counterflow heat transfer
to provide the maximum mean-effective temperature difference. The
headers have steel male screw connections with 1/8 vent and drain.
A full coil drain of the heat exchangers is not possible and as such
Fluid Coolers operating under ambient temperatures that could drop
below freezing point must contain liquid with and antifreeze agent.
The entire coil block is pressure tested at 15 bar dry air submerged in
warm water.
2.0 Air Movement
2.1 The air movement package: This air movement package
combines premium aerodynamic and acoustic performance with
innovative design to offer a compact fan and motor as an integrated
product.
1. Crenelated blades for the 6-pole and 8-pole fans provide low
noise characteristics and increased efficiencies. The adjustable
pitch angle impeller of the 12-pole fans allows the optimum
aerodynamic performance to be achieved for the given motor
output, therefore minimising running costs.
2. Exceptionally compact design with short overall motor length.
3. Two speed by delta / star reconnection speed control.
4. Minimal moving parts for maximum reliability.
5. Motor protection IP55.
6. Insulation Class F.
7. Fan designed for frequent starting.
8. Continuous running from -40C to 60C.
9. Integral Overheat thermal cut-out protection.
2.2 Fan(s): The Fan has superb performance with a steep volume/
pressure performance curve, giving greater flexibility in design and
making it more tolerant of pressure variations which may occur
because of, for instance, dirt accumulation on the fins of the heat
exchanger. The fan, being an integrated product of impeller and
motor, is balanced as a complete unit using dynamic single plane
balancing. Balance grade is G6.3. The fan and motor are designed to
be totally maintenance free.
2.3 Impeller: The one-piece impellers of the 6-pole and 8-pole fans
are manufactured from glass coupled engineering polymers, which
are UV stabilised. These have been developed using finite element
stress analysis to provide a structural hub with a smooth transition
into the blade form. Crenelated blades reduce sound levels and
increase efficiency. Blade section thickness, consistent with providing
sufficient strength, is kept to a minimum to further reduce noise.
The impeller of the 12-pole fans has an aluminium hub and clamp-
plate with six equally spaced, fully adjustable, moulded, black, ultra-
violet stabilised, glass coupled polypropylene airfoil section blades,
designed on the latest aerospace technology.
2.4 Motor: Suitable for horizontal through to vertical shaft operation.
IP55 protection, with removable drain plugs. Bearings lubricated with
wide temperature range grease, re-lubricated or sealed for life
depending on size. Insulation class F as standard. The motor is
designed to give maximum flexibility of control by PWM Frequency
Inverter, or Voltage Speed Control and where appropriate can be
used to give two speeds by Delta/Star reconnect, where 80% of the
full speed can be obtained by this method.
Electrical Supply
380 -420 V / 50 Hz / 3 ph
440- 480 V / 60 Hz / 3 ph
Motor Electrical Details
The motor can be run continuously from -40C to +60C.
Performance Data
The air and sound performance data has been measured in
accordance with the following Standards:
ISO 5801:1977, type A installation test method for air performance
(dual numbered BS 848 Part1: 1997)
BS 848 Part 2:1985, type A installation, method of noise testing.
3.0 Supporting Frame and Casing
3.1 Frame and Casing: The supporting Frame and Casing is an all-
bolted painted galvanised steel construction designed to withstand
the most adverse weather conditions. Double brake flanges maximise
strength of panels. Full baffles separate individual fan sections.
Motor Poles 6 Poles 8 Poles 12 Poles
Motor Rating, kW
1,50 0,76 0,25
Y 0,75 0,41 0,12
Speed, Rpm
890 695 435
Y 700 570 360
Full Load Current, A
5 2,50 1,80
Y 2,3 1,46 0,80
Starting Current, A
18 9,00 3,50
Y 8,3 2,60 2,90
DFC - D 19
W
a
t
e
r

S
a
v
i
n
g

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
... because temperature matters
Engineering Specifications DFCV
1.0 Heat Exchanger
1.1 General: The finned Coil Heat Exchanger consists of either 1/2
or 5/8 O.D. phosphorus deoxidised copper seamless tubes and
aluminium fins. Staggered tube construction provides substantially
higher capacity since more tubes are exposed to the air stream. The
advanced rippled-corrugated fin design creates a state of continuous
turbulence, which effectively reduces the boundary layer formation
that could otherwise reduce the rate of heat exchange. Fins have full
drawn collars to maintain fin spacing and provide a continuous
surface cover over the entire tube. The copper tubes are
mechanically expanded into the fin collars to provide a continuous
primary to secondary compression bond over the entire finned length
for maximum heat transfer rates. Headers are made of seamless
copper tubing and the coils are circuited for counterflow heat transfer
to provide the maximum mean-effective temperature difference. The
headers have steel male screw connections with 1/8 vent and drain.
A full coil drain of the heat exchangers is not possible and as such
Fluid Coolers operating under ambient temperatures that could drop
below freezing point must contain liquid with an antifreeze agent. The
entire coil block is pressure tested at 15 bar dry air submerged in
warm water.
2.0 Air Movement
2.1 The air movement package: This air movement package
combines premium aerodynamic and acoustic performance with
innovative design to offer a compact fan and motor as an integrated
product.
1. Crenelated blades for the 800mm diameter fans provide low noise
characteristics and increased efficiencies. The adjustable pitch
angle impeller of the 900mm diameter fans, allows the optimum
aerodynamic performance to be achieved for the given motor
output, therefore minimising running costs.
2. Exceptionally compact design with short overall motor length.
3. Two speed by delta / star reconnection speed control.
4. Minimal moving parts for maximum reliability.
5. Motor protection IP55.
6. Insulation Class F.
7. Fan designed for frequent starting.
8. Continuous running from -40C to 60C.
9. Integral, overheat thermal cut-out protection.
2.2 Fan(s): The Fan has superb performance with a steep volume/
pressure performance curve, giving greater flexibility in design and
making it more tolerant of pressure variations which may occur
because of, for instance, dirt accumulation on the fins of the heat
exchanger. The fan, being an integrated product of impeller and
motor, is balanced as a complete unit using dynamic single plane
balancing. Balance grade is G6.3. The fan and motor are designed to
be totally maintenance free.
2.3 Impeller: The one-piece impeller of the 800mm diameter fans is
manufactured from glass coupled engineering polymers, which are
UV stabilized. These have been developed using finite element stress
analysis to provide a structural hub with a smooth transition into the
blade form. Crenelated blades reduce sound levels and increase
efficiency. Blade section thickness, consistent with providing
sufficient strength, is kept to a minimum to further reduce noise.
The impeller of the 900mm diameter fans has an aluminum hub and
clamp-plate, with six equally spaced, fully adjustable, moulded, black,
ultra violet stabilized, glass coupled polypropylene airfoil section
blades, designed on the latest aerospace technology.
2.4 Motor: Suitable for horizontal through to vertical shaft operation.
IP55 protection, with removable drain plugs. Bearings lubricated with
wide temperature range grease, re-lubricated or sealed for life
depending on size. Insulation class F as standard. The motor is
designed to give maximum flexibility of control by PWM Frequency
Inverter, or Voltage Speed Control and where appropriate can be
used to give two speeds by Delta/Star reconnect, where 80% of the
full speed can be obtained by this method.
Electrical Supply
380 -420 V / 50 Hz / 3 ph
440- 480 V / 60 Hz / 3 ph
Motor Electrical Details
The motor can be run continuously from -40C to +60C.
A. Fans 800 mm
B. Fans 900 mm
Performance Data
The air and sound performance data has been measured in
accordance with the following Standards:
ISO 5801:1977, type A installation test method for air performance
(dual numbered BS 848 Part1: 1997)
BS 848 Part 2:1985, type A installation, method of noise testing.
3.0 Supporting Frame and Casing
3.1 Frame and Casing: The supporting Frame and Casing is an all-
bolted painted galvanised steel construction designed to withstand
the most adverse weather conditions. Double brake flanges maximise
strength of panels. Full baffles separate individual fan sections.
Motor Poles 6 Poles 8 Poles
Motor Rating, kW
1,50 0,76
Y 0,75 0,41
Speed, Rpm
890 695
Y 700 570
Full Load Current, A
5 2,50
Y 2,3 1,46
Starting Current, A
18 9,00
Y 8,3 2,60
Motor Poles 6 Poles 12 Poles
Motor Rating, kW
2,10 0,25
Y 1,10 0,12
Speed, Rpm
925 435
Y 725 360
Full Load Current, A
5,74 1,80
Y 3,80 0,80
Starting Current, A
24,0 3,50
Y 18,4 2,90
TrilliumSeries Coolers
DFCV-AD - D 1
W
a
t
e
r

S
a
v
i
n
g

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
DFCV-AD
Product Detail
TrilliumSeries Coolers .............................................................................. D2
Benefits ....................................................................................................... D4
Construction Details .................................................................................. D7
Custom Features and Options .................................................................. D8
Accessories ................................................................................................. D9
Engineering Data ..................................................................................... D10
Engineering Specifications TrilliumSeries Coolers .............................. D12
DFCV-AD - D 2
D
F
C
V
-
A
D
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
TrilliumSeries Coolers
Capacity
Single unit capacity:
220 1620 kW according to ENV1048 norm
12 86 l/s 34% glycol solution by volume at 40C/35C/25C
General Description
In conditions where the design fluid outlet temperature comes close to the ambient dry bulb
temperature, dry air cooling becomes inefficient or impossible. The BAC TrilliumSeries Cooler has
been designed to offer reliable, safe and efficient fluid cooling down to temperature below ambient
temperature, while minimizing water consumption. The TrilliumSeries Cooler offers the
advantages of evaporative cooling in a safe dry cooling product.
Key Features
15 standard models, 34 models total
Heavy duty design requiring minimum maintenance
Suitable for cooling of all common coolants
Low maintenance
Low sound models available for sound sensitive applications
Optimised primary fluid pressure drops due to the availability of various tube diameters
Thermal efficiency, operational safety and unique water saving capability combined into single
product
DFCV-AD - D 3
W
a
t
e
r

S
a
v
i
n
g

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
... because temperature matters
.
DFCV-AD - D 4
D
F
C
V
-
A
D
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Benefits
.
High Thermal Performance
The TrilliumSeries Cooler is a V-type dry cooler equipped with unique adiabatic air pre-cooling
sections, which greatly enhance the coolers capacity, reducing coolers size and allowing
process temperatures to be cooled far below ambient temperature.
Only when necessary (at high ambient temperatures), the adiabatic pre-cooling will be
activated. The adiabatic pre-cooling sections consist of a full stainless steel frame, with water
distribution outside the airflow, and highly efficient evaporative cooling medium. During
adiabatic operation, the evaporative medium is wetted with water, which is evenly distributed
over the top of the medium at city water pressure. As the air passes through the pads, water is
evaporated in the air, and the air is humidified and cooled down to temperatures at 2 to 3 C
above wet bulb temperature.
1. Dry Heat Exchanger Coil; 2. Fluid inlet; 3. Fluid outlet; 4. Axial Fans; 5. High Efficient Evaporative Cooling Pad; 6. Water inlet Connections;
7. Water outlet Connections; 8. Adiabatic Cooling of Ambient Air; 9. Air Discharge; 10. Air in.
Principle of Operation TrilliumSeries Cooler SST Frame with Adiabatic Pre-Cooling Pads
DFCV-AD - D 5
W
a
t
e
r

S
a
v
i
n
g

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
... because temperature matters
Water Saving
The TrilliumSeries Cooler is delivered with
intelligent adiabatic controls limiting water
consumption to very short periods of time,
activating adiabatic pre-cooling in two stages
and only when necessary. When compared to a
traditional evaporative cooling installation,
without built-in hybrid technology and controls,
the TrilliumSeries Cooler saves more than 85%
of the water.
Operational Safety
While part of the water distributed over the
adiabatic pre-cooling medium evaporates to
cool the air, excess water assists in rinsing the
pads to keep it free from debris and minerals that would stay behind on the pad after
evaporation.
The pre-cooling system of the TrilliumSeries Cooler is designed as once-through system. The
excess water leaves the adiabatic section via a gutter system to the sewer, avoiding stagnant
water conditions and avoiding water re-circulation, both conditions that would increase the risk
for micro-biological contamination and proliferation.
After each adiabatic pre-cooling cycle, the adiabatic controls will open drain valves
guaranteeing full emptying and drying of all pre-cooling water distribution piping installed on the
cooler.
The special pre-cooling medium design guarantees that no droplets, nor aerosols are being
generated while pre-cooling is activated. Water carry-over from the pre-cooling section to the
dry coil is avoided.
Limited Maintenance
Unlike dry coolers equipped with spray systems, the TrilliumSeries Cooler provides stable and
predictable thermal performance without the need for high pressure pumps and water
treatment.
Water Consumption
1. Evaporative Cooling; 2. Hybrid Cooling; 3. TrilliumSeries
Installation of Pre-Cooler Medium Installation of Pre-Cooler Medium
DFCV-AD - D 6
D
F
C
V
-
A
D
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
The pre-cooling medium can be removed during colder seasons. If kept in place however, the
adiabatic pre-cooling could be used to enhance energy saving operation and it acts as filter,
protecting the dry coil year-round from any air borne debris which could cause coil
contamination.
Installation of Water Distribution Pad Installation of Top Bar
DFCV-AD - D 7
W
a
t
e
r

S
a
v
i
n
g

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
... because temperature matters
Construction Details
1. Heavy Duty Construction
Structure and casing of bolted heavy gauge hot dipped
galvanised steel panels Z275 with double break angles
and intermediate coil supports. Casing painted with zinc
aluminium coating.
Full baffles separate individual fan sections.
2. Heat Exchanger (Not Shown)
Staggered tube arrangement with dense tube spacing.
Rigid 0,17 mm or 0,14 mm thick aluminium fins with
rippled, corrugated fin surface design with 2,5 mm fin
spacing, creates turbulent air stream for high
performance.
High quality seamless 15,9 mm or 12,7 mm diameter
copper tubes, with 0,4 mm wall thickness.
Thick seamless copper headers and threaded steel
connections.
3. Fan & Fan Motor
Low profile fan.
Asymmetrically spaced and crenulated blades give low
noise characteristics and increased efficiency.
Fan designed for frequent starting, up to 60 times an
hour.
Continuous running at 40C to 60C air temperature.
The bearing seals and encapsulation of the motor
eliminate the possibility of contamination, hence
extending the product life.
The fan and motor are designed to be totally
maintenance free.
4. Adiabatic Pre-cooler
Casing in bolted heavy gauge stainless steel.
Water distribution outside the airflow.
Water collecting sump, draining water, once through to
sewage.
Highly efficient impregnated cellulose paper evaporative
cooling pad.
5. Electrical Panel and Adiabatic Controls
Factory installed electrical panel of IP55 enclosure,
including main isolating power switch with lock
provision, magnetic main switch, emergency cut-out
switch, thermal contactor with coil for each fan wired to
the fan motor thermostatic cut-out switch and 400/230
transformer, Variable Frequency Drive or Step Controller
for capacity control, delivered with integrated adiabatic
controls.
TrilliumSeries Cooler
DFCV-AD - D 8
D
F
C
V
-
A
D
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Custom Features and Options
Heat Exchanger Construction
Materials
The standard materials of construction for the
heat exchanger are seamless copper tubes
with 0,4-mm wall thickness and corrugated
aluminium fins of 0,17 or 0,14 mm thickness
and 2,5 fin spacing.
For aggressive environments in industrial
applications or installation at coastal areas the
option of aluminium fins with pre-coated
hydrophobic anti-corrosion surface treatment is
available. Both sides of the aluminium fin are
coated with a layer of epoxy phenolic resin.
After thermosetting the high quality and firmly bonded hydrophobic film is highly effective in
minimising salt corrosion and has excellent solvent resistance.
Heat Exchanger
DFCV-AD - D 9
W
a
t
e
r

S
a
v
i
n
g

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
... because temperature matters
Accessories
Safety Switch
If required by local codes a safety switch for each fan can be installed next to the respective fan
and it is fully wired.
Control Panel
TrilliumSeries Coolers are delivered with factory installed control panel, including main isolating
power switch with lock provision, magnetic main switch, emergency cut-out switch, thermal
contactor with coil for each fan wired to the fan motor thermostatic cut-out switch, 380/200
transformer, Variable Frequency Drive or Step Controller and integrated adiabatic controls. Each
adiabatic pre-cooling side is controlled separately in function of a logical combination of ambient
temperature and fluid outlet temperature. The adiabatic control sequence guarantees maximum
water savings, and all adiabatic set points are adjustable.
Control Panel with Variable Frequency Drive
and Integrated Adiabatic Controls
Control Panel with Step Controller and
Integrated Adiabatic Controls
DFCV-AD - D 10
D
F
C
V
-
A
D
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Engineering Data
REMARK: Do not use for construction. Refer to factory certified dimensions & weights. This brochure includes data
current at time of publication, which should be reconfirmed at the time of purchase. In the interest of product
improvement, specifications, weights and dimensions are subject to change without notice. Up-to-date engineering
data and more can be found at www.BaltimoreAircoil.com.
Standard Sound Level Models Fans 900 mm 6 pole motor
Model
DFCV-AD
Number of
Fans
Operating
Weight
kg
Shipping
Weight
kg
Heaviest
Section
kg
Dimensions
mm
Air Flow
m
3
/s
Tube
Internal
Volume
dm
3
Surface
m
2
Connec-
tions
H L W /Y
S9022-L613B-AD
S9022-L616B-AD
4
oo
oo
1677
1868
1345
1448
1228
1331
2635 2546 2904
23,6/17,7
24/18
182
288
1488
1336
4 x ND80
S9023-S613B-AD
S9023-S616B-AD
6
ooo
ooo
2399
2692
1901
2057
1731
1887
2635 3646 2904
35,4/26,6
36/27
272
432
2232
2004
8 x ND80
S9024-M613B-AD
S9024-M616B-AD
8
oooo
oooo
3178
3564
2514
2724
2280
2490
2635 4746 2904
47,2/35,4
48/36
364
576
2976
2668
8 x ND80
S9025-D613B-AD
S9025-D616B-AD
10
ooooo
ooooo
3979
4466
3149
3411
2862
3124
2635 5878 2904
59/44,3
60/45
456
716
3720
3336
8 x ND100
S9026-D613B-AD
S9026-D616B-AD
12
oooooo
oooooo
4719
5309
3723
4032
3383
3699
2635 6918 2904
70,8/53,1
72/54
548
860
4464
4004
8 x ND100
1. Fluid inlet connections; 2. Fluid outlet connections; 3. Pre-cooler water drain and overflow; 4. Electrical panel; 5. Pre-cooler city water
connection.
DFCV-AD - D 11
W
a
t
e
r

S
a
v
i
n
g

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
... because temperature matters
Ultra Low Sound Level Models Fans 900 mm 12 pole motor
Notes
1. Adiabatic cooler capacities are tested according to EN 1048 for
dry coolers.
2. Ratings shown are for clean tubes with 34% ethylene glycol
solution by volume, 40C in and 35C out, 25C ambient air
temperature.
3. Sound Pressure Levels (Lp
A
) are measured in the horizontal
plane at a distance of 10 m from the connection end of the unit,
under free field conditions.
4. TrilliumSeries Coolers of models with D616B coil configuration
have inlet and outlet connections at opposite ends.
5. Adiabatic pre-cooling sections are shipped separately and need to
be installed on site.
Sound Power Levels for one fan at nominal speed rating
Sound Pressure Correction Values Lp
A
for Other Distances
For other distances the change in sound pressure depends on the dimensions of the equipment. Therefore, the correction values given in the
table below are approximate values.
Model
DFCV-AD
Number of
Fans
Operating
Weight
kg
Shipping
Weight
kg
Heaviest
Section
kg
Dimensions
mm
Air Flow
m
3
/s
Tube
Internal
Volume
dm
3
Surface
m
2
Connec-
tions
H L W /Y
R9022-H413B-AD
R9022-H416B-AD
4
oo
oo
1367
1567
1113
1243
996
1126
2630 2546 2904 11,2/9,3
121
191
992
890
4 x ND80
R9023-L413B-AD
R9023-H416B-AD
6
ooo
ooo
2244
1960
1752
1573
1582
1403
2630 3646 2904 16,8/13,9
182
287
1487
1335
4 x ND80
R9024-S413B-AD
R9024-L416B-AD
8
oooo
oooo
2966
2580
2318
2071
2084
1837
2630 4746 2904 22,4/18,5
243
382
1983
1779
8 x ND80
R9025-D413B-AD
R9025-L416B-AD
10
ooooo
ooooo
3690
3198
2874
2520
2587
2270
2630 5878 2904 28,0/23,2
303
478
2479
2224
8 x ND80
R9026-D413B-AD
R9026-S416B-AD
12
oooooo
oooooo
3818
4386
3044
3402
2704
3062
2630 6918 2904 33,6/27,8
364
574
2975
2669
8 x ND80
DFCV-AD
Product Range
Fan
Motor
50Hz Outlet Sound Power Level at Octave Band Center Frequency (Hz) Total
Conn. 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 Lw
A
Standard Sound Level
6-pole Delta 62 76 82 85 85 83 80 74 89
6-pole Star 55 69 75 78 78 76 73 67 82
Ultra Low Sound Level
12-pole Delta 49 58 61 64 64 62 58 55 68
12-pole Star 48 57 60 63 63 61 57 54 67
m 2 3 5 10 15 20 30 40 50
dB(A) +14 +10 +6 0 -4 -6 -9 -12 -14
DFCV-AD - D 12
D
F
C
V
-
A
D
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Engineering Specifications
TrilliumSeries Coolers
1.0 Heat Exchanger
1.1 General: The finned Coil Heat Exchanger consists of either 1/2
or 5/8 O.D. phosphorus deoxidised copper seamless tubes and
aluminium fins. Staggered tube construction provides substantially
higher capacity since more tubes are exposed to the air stream. The
advanced rippled-corrugated fin design creates a state of continuous
turbulence, which effectively reduces the boundary layer formation
that could otherwise reduce the rate of heat exchange. Fins have full
drawn collars to maintain fin spacing and provide a continuous
surface cover over the entire tube. The copper tubes are
mechanically expanded into the fin collars to provide a continuous
primary to secondary compression bond over the entire finned length
for maximum heat transfer rates. Headers are made of seamless
copper tubing and the coils are circuited for counterflow heat transfer
to provide the maximum mean-effective temperature difference. The
headers have steel male screw connections with 1/8 vent and drain.
A full coil drain of the heat exchangers is not possible and as such
fluid Coolers operating under ambient temperatures that could drop
below freezing point must contain liquid with an antifreeze agent. The
entire coil block is pressure tested at 15 bar dry air submerged in
warm water.
2.0 Air Movement
2.1 The air movement package: This air movement package
combines premium aerodynamic and acoustic performance with
innovative design to offer a compact fan and motor as an integrated
product.
1. Adjustable pitch angle impeller allows the optimum aerodynamic
performance to be achieved for the given motor output, therefore
minimising running costs.
2. Exceptionally compact design with short overall motor length.
3. Two speed by delta / star reconnection speed control.
4. Minimal moving parts for maximum reliability.
5. Motor protection IP55.
6. Insulation Class F.
7. Fan designed for frequent starting.
8. Continuous running from -40C to 60C.
9. Integral Overheat thermal cut-out protection.
2.2 Fan(s): The Fan has superb performance with a steep volume/
pressure performance curve, giving greater flexibility in design and
making it more tolerant of pressure variations which may occur
because of, for instance, dirt accumulation on the fins of the heat
exchanger. The fan, being an integrated product of impeller and
motor, is balanced as a complete unit using dynamic single plane
balancing. Balance grade is G6.3. The fan and motor are designed to
be totally maintenance free.
2.3 Impeller: The impeller has an aluminium hub and clamp-plate,
with six equally spaced, fully adjustable, moulded, black, ultra-violet
resistant, glass coupled polypropylene airfoil section blades,
designed on the latest aerospace technology. All rotating aluminium
components are X-ray examined prior to machining to ensure quality.
2.4 Motor: Suitable for horizontal through to vertical shaft operation.
IP55 protection, with removable drain plugs. Bearings lubricated with
wide temperature range grease, re-lubricated or sealed for life
depending on size. Insulation class F as standard. The motor is
designed to give maximum flexibility of control by PWM Frequency
Inverter, or Voltage Speed Control and where appropriate can be
used to give two speeds by Delta/Star reconnect, where 80% of the
full speed can be obtained by this method.
Electrical Supply
380 -420 V / 50 Hz / 3 ph
440- 480 V / 60 Hz / 3 ph
Motor Electrical Details
The motor can be run continuously from -40C to +60C.
Performance Data
The air and sound performance data has been measured in
accordance with the following Standards:
ISO 5801:1977, type A installation test method for air performance
(dual numbered BS 848 Part1: 1997)
BS 848 Part 2:1985, type A installation, method of noise testing.
3.0 Supporting Frame and Casing
3.1 Frame and Casing: The supporting Frame and Casing is an all-
bolted painted galvanised steel construction designed to withstand
the most adverse weather conditions. Double brake flanges maximise
strength of panels. Full baffles separate individual fan sections.
Motor Poles 6 Poles 12 Poles
Motor Rating, kW
2, 1 0,25
Y 1,1 0,12
Speed, Rpm
925 435
Y 725 360
Full Load Current, A
5,74 1,80
Y 3,8 0,80
Starting Current, A
24,0 3,50
Y 18,4 2,90
DFCV-AD - D 13
W
a
t
e
r

S
a
v
i
n
g

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
... because temperature matters
4.0 Adiabatic Pre-Cooler
4.1 Adiabatic Pre-Cooling Medium: The MUNTERS EPACC
adiabatic pre-cooling section serves as an adiabatic saturator to cool
the incoming air. It consists of specially impregnated and corrugated
cellulose paper sheets with different flute angles, one steep and one
shallower that have been bonded together. Such a design yields a
cooling pad with high evaporation efficiency while still operating with
a very low-pressure drop. The impregnation procedure for the
cellulose paper ensures a strong self supporting product, with high
absorbency, which is protected against decomposition and rotting.
The evaporative fluid, such as city water, is supplied to a distribution
manifold and the rate of the water flow may be initially regulated by a
manual-regulating valve. A distribution pad on the top of the cooling
pad ensures an even water distribution and minimises the risk of dry
spots. The water flows down the corrugated surface of the
evaporative cooling pad. The incoming warm and dry air that passes
through the pad evaporates most of the water. Any remaining water
assists in washing the pad, and is drained to the gutter. In addition
scaling is kept to a minimum and no water carry-over occurs due to
the fact that the water is directed to the air inlet side of the pad and
this where the evaporation takes place. The air that leaves the pad is
therefore cooled and humidified simultaneously without any external
energy supply, and without formation of aerosols.
For proper Legionella bacteria control, the system and all its water
distribution piping is completely drained and dried after each
adiabatic cycle.
4.2 Adiabatic Pre-Cooling Casing: The adiabatic pre-cooling casing
is made of stainless steel, designed as a direct water system, without
the need for pumps.
5.0 Electrical Panel and Controls
5.1 TrilliumSeries Cooler delivered with factory installed
electrical panel with step controller: For TrilliumSeries Coolers
delivered with factory installed electrical panel including step
controller, the TrilliumSeries Cooler will be delivered with panel of
IP65 enclosure, including main isolating power switch with lock
provision, main fuses, emergency cut-out switch, thermal contactor
with coil for each fan, wired to the fan motor thermostatic cut-out
switch, 400/230 transformer, all wiring from the electrical panel to the
individual fans, step controller and ambient temperature sensor.
Both process fluid outlet temperature and ambient temperature
signals are fed into the step controller. The adiabatic pre-cooling will
be activated and stopped on the basis of a pre-programmed logical
combination of the two signals in the step controller.
5.2 TrilliumSeries Cooler delivered with factory installed
electrical panel with variable frequency drive: For TrilliumSeries
Coolers delivered with factory installed electrical panel including
variable frequency drive, the TrilliumSeries Cooler will be delivered
with panel of IP55 enclosure, including main isolating power switch
with lock provision, main fuses, emergency cut-out switch, thermal
contactor with coil for each fan wired to the fan motor thermostatic
cut-out switch, 400/230 transformer.
Danfoss Variable Frequency Drive with built-in RFI filters protected to
1st environment and EN55011 to 1B, built-in DC Link coils which
reduce harmonic distortion. Hand-Off-Auto function - fast and easy
commissioning. Local control Panel - clear text display read-out.
Inverter by-pass power switch. Digital controller, and ambient
temperature sensor.
Both fan speed signal from variable speed drive and ambient
temperature signal are fed to the digital controller. The adiabatic pre-
cooling will be activated and stopped on the basis of a pre-
programmed logical combination of the two signals in the digital
controller.
TrilliumSeries Condensers
DCV-AD - D1
W
a
t
e
r

S
a
v
i
n
g

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
DCV-AD
Product Detail
TrilliumSeries Condensers ....................................................................... D2
Benefits ....................................................................................................... D4
Construction Details .................................................................................. D7
Custom Features and Options .................................................................. D8
Accessories ................................................................................................. D9
Engineering Data ..................................................................................... D10
Engineering Specifications TrilliumSeries Condensers ....................... D12
DCV-AD - D2
D
C
V
-
A
D
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
TrilliumSeries Condensers
Capacity
Single unit capacity:
340 1030 KW
General Description
In conditions where the design refrigerant outlet temperature comes close to the ambient dry bulb
temperature, dry air cooling becomes inefficient or impossible. The BAC TrilliumSeries Condenser
has been designed to offer reliable, safe and efficient gaz cooling down to temperature below
ambient temperature, while minimizing water consumption. The TrilliumSeries Condenser offers
the advantages of evaporative cooling in a safe dry cooling product.
Key Features
10 standard models
Heavy duty design requiring minimum maintenance
Suitable for cooling of all common refrigerants
Low maintenance
Thermal efficiency, operational safety and unique water saving capability combined into single
product
DCV-AD - D3
W
a
t
e
r

S
a
v
i
n
g

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
... because temperature matters
.
DCV-AD - D4
D
C
V
-
A
D
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Benefits
.
High Thermal Performance
The TrilliumSeries Condenser is a V-type dry condenser equipped with unique adiabatic air pre-
cooling sections, which greatly enhance the condensers capacity, reducing condensers size
and allowing gaz temperatures to be cooled far below ambient temperature.
Only when necessary (at high ambient temperatures), the adiabatic pre-cooling will be
activated. The adiabatic pre-cooling sections consist of a full stainless steel frame, with water
distribution outside the airflow, and highly efficient evaporative cooling medium. During
adiabatic operation, the evaporative medium is wetted with water, which is evenly distributed
over the top of the medium at city water pressure. As the air passes through the pads, water is
evaporated in the air, and the air is humidified and cooled down to temperatures at 2 to 3 C
above wet bulb temperature.
1
. Dry Heat Exchanger Coil; 2. Refrigerant inlet; 3. Refrigerant outlet; 4. Axial Fans; 5. High Efficient Evaporative Cooling Pad; 6. Water inlet
Connections; 7. Water outlet Connections; 8. Adiabatic Cooling of Ambient Air; 9. Air Discharge; 10. Air in.
Principle of Operation TrilliumSeries
Condenser
SST Frame with Adiabatic Pre-Cooling Pads
DCV-AD - D5
W
a
t
e
r

S
a
v
i
n
g

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
... because temperature matters
Water Saving
The TrilliumSeries Condenser is delivered with
intelligent adiabatic controls limiting water
consumption to very short periods of time,
activating adiabatic pre-cooling at both sides
simultaneously and only when necessary.
When compared to a traditional evaporative
cooling installation, without built-in hybrid
technology and controls, the TrilliumSeries
Condenser saves more than 85% of the water.
Operational Safety
While part of the water distributed over the
adiabatic pre-cooling medium evaporates to
cool the air, excess water assists in rinsing the
pads to keep it free from debris and minerals that would stay behind on the pad after
evaporation.
The pre-cooling system of the TrilliumSeries Condenser is designed as once-through system.
The excess water leaves the adiabatic section via a gutter system to the sewer, avoiding
stagnant water conditions and avoiding water re-circulation, both conditions that would increase
the risk for micro-biological contamination and proliferation.
After each adiabatic pre-cooling cycle, the adiabatic controls will open drain valves
guaranteeing full emptying and drying of all pre-cooling water distribution piping installed on the
condenser.
The special pre-cooling medium design guarantees that neither droplets, nor aerosols are being
generated while pre-cooling is activated. Water carry-over from the pre-cooling section to the
dry coil is avoided.
Limited Maintenance
Unlike dry condensers equipped with spray systems, the TrilliumSeries Condenser provides
stable and predictable thermal performance without the need for high pressure pumps and
water treatment.
Water Consumption
1. Evaporative Cooling; 2. Hybrid Cooling; 3. TrilliumSeries
Installation of Pre-Cooler Medium Installation of Pre-Cooler Medium
DCV-AD - D6
D
C
V
-
A
D
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
The pre-cooling medium can be removed during colder seasons. If kept in place however, the
adiabatic pre-cooling could be used to enhance energy saving operation and it acts as filter,
protecting the dry coil year-round from any air borne debris which could cause coil
contamination.
Installation of Water Distribution Pad Installation of Top Bar
DCV-AD - D7
W
a
t
e
r

S
a
v
i
n
g

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
... because temperature matters
Construction Details
1. Heavy Duty Construction
Structure and casing of bolted heavy gauge hot dipped galvanised
steel panels Z275 with double break angles and intermediate coil
supports. Casing painted with zinc aluminium coating.
Full baffles separate individual fan sections.
2. Heat Exchanger (Not Shown)
Staggered or parallel tube arrangement with dense tube spacing.
Rigid 0,17 mm or 0,14 mm thick aluminium fins with rippled,
corrugated fin surface design with 2,12 mm or 2,54 mm fin spacing,
creates turbulent air stream for high performance.
High quality seamless 15,9 mm or 12,7 mm diameter copper/
stainless steel 304L tubes, with 0,4 mm and 0,7 mm wall thickness.
Thick stainless steel type 316L or seamless copper headers and
threaded connections.
Coil according to European Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC.
Pneumatically tested at 30 bar standard coil.
3. Fan & Fan Motor
Low profile fan.
Asymmetrically spaced and crenulated blades give low noise
characteristics and increased efficiency.
Fan designed for frequent starting, up to 60 times an hour.
Continuous running at 40C to 60C air temperature.
The bearing seals and encapsulation of the motor eliminate the
possibility of contamination, hence extending the product life.
The fan and motor are designed to be totally maintenance free.
4. Adiabatic Pre-cooler
Casing in bolted heavy gauge stainless steel.
Water distribution outside the airflow.
Water collecting sump, draining water, once through to sewage.
Highly efficient impregnated cellulose paper evaporative cooling pad.
5. Electrical Panel and Adiabatic Controls
Factory installed electrical panel of IP55 enclosure, including main
isolating power switch with lock provision, main fuses, emergency
cut-out switch, thermal contactor with coil for each fan wired to the fan
motor thermostatic cut-out switch, a control switch and 400/230
transformer.
TrilliumSeries Condensers with factory installed electrical panel with
Variable Frequency Drive are delivered with integrated adiabatic
controls.
TrilliumSeries Condenser
DCV-AD - D8
D
C
V
-
A
D
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Custom Features and Options
Casing Construction
Structure and casing are constructed of bolted heavy gauge hot dipped galvanised steel panels
Z275 (275 gr. of zinc per m
2
) with double break angles and intermediate coil supports. Panels are
bolted with the best hardware available on the market, triple protected against corrosion, with zinc
phosphate treatment, zinc rich inorganic resin coating and aluminium rich organic topcoat. As
standard the outside of the casing is painted with Baltiplus zinc aluminium polymeric coating.
Heat Exchanger Construction
Materials
Each coil is manufactured according to the
European Pressure Equipment Directive (PED)
97/23/EC. BAC condenser coils are standard
available at a design pressure of 21 bar. Design
temperatures are minimum -20C and maximum
+120C.
The standard materials of construction for the
heat exchanger are stainless steel type 304L or
seamless copper tubes with 0,7mm/0,4 mm
wall thickness and corrugated aluminium fins of
0,17 mm/0,14 mm thickness and
2,12 mm/2,54mm fin spacing.
For aggressive environments in industrial applications or installation at coastal areas, aluminium
fins with pre-coated hydrophobic anti-corrosion surface treatment are available. Both sides of
the aluminium fin are coated with a layer of epoxy phenolic resin. After thermosetting the high
quality and firmly bonded hydrophobic film is highly effective in minimising salt corrosion and
has excellent solvent resistance.
Heat Exchanger
DCV-AD - D9
W
a
t
e
r

S
a
v
i
n
g

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
... because temperature matters
Accessories
Safety Switch
If required by local codes a safety switch for each fan can be installed next to the respective fan
and it is fully wired.
Control Panel
Basic delivery of TrilliumSeries condensers is
complete with factory installed control panel of
IP55 enclosure, including, main isolating power
switch with lock provision, main fuses,
emergency cut-out switch, thermal contactor with
coil for each fan wired to the fan motor
thermostatic cut-out switch, 400/230 transformer,
control circuit switch, Variable Frequency Drive
and integrated adiabatic controls. In this
execution, the 2 adiabatic pre-cooling sides are
controlled simultaneously in function of a logical
combination of ambient temperature and
condensing temperature. The adiabatic control
sequence guarantees maximum water savings
and the adiabatic set point is adjustable.
Control Panel with Variable Frequency Drive
and Integrated Adiabatic Controls
DCV-AD - D10
D
C
V
-
A
D
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Engineering Data
REMARK: Do not use for construction. Refer to factory certified dimensions & weights. This brochure includes data
current at time of publication, which should be reconfirmed at the time of purchase. In the interest of product
improvement, specifications, weights and dimensions are subject to change without notice. Up-to-date engineering
data and more can be found at www.BaltimoreAircoil.com.
Standard Sound Level Models Fans 900 mm 6 pole motor Refrigerant NH
3
Model
DCV-AD
Refrigerant
Number of
Fans
Air Flow
m
3
/s Surface
m
2
Tube
Internal
Volume
dm
3
Lp
A
dB(A)
Ship.
Weight
kg
Dimensions
mm
/Y /Y L W H
S9022-S416B-AD NH
3
4
oo
oo
24/18 1850 191 59/52 1557 2546 2904 2635
S9023-S416B-AD NH
3
6
ooo
ooo
36/27 2775 287 61/54 2190 3646 2904 2635
S9024-S416B-AD NH
3
8
oooo
oooo
48/35,9 3700 382 61/54 2871 4746 2904 2635
S9025-S416B-AD NH
3
10
ooooo
ooooo
60/44,9 4625 478 62/55 3564 5878 2904 2635
S9026-S416B-AD NH
3
12
oooooo
oooooo
72/53,9 5550 574 63/56 4218 6918 2904 2635
1. Refrigerant inlet connections; 2. Refrigerant outlet connections; 3. Pre-cooler water drain and overflow; 4. Electrical panel; 5. Pre-cooler city
water connection.
DCV-AD - D11
W
a
t
e
r

S
a
v
i
n
g

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
... because temperature matters
Standard Sound Level Models Fans 900 mm 6 pole motor - Halocarbon Refrigerants
1. Sound Pressure Levels (Lp
A
) are measured in the horizontal
plane at a distance of 10 m from the connection end of the unit,
under free field conditions.
2. Adiabatic pre-cooling sections are shipped separately and need to
be installed on site.
Sound Power Levels for one fan at nominal speed rating
Sound Pressure Correction Values Lp
A
for Other Distances
For other distances the change in sound pressure depends on the dimensions of the equipment. Therefore, the correction values given in the
table below are approximate values.
Model
DCV-AD
Refrigerant
Number of
Fans
Air Flow
m
3
/s Surface
m
2
Tube
Internal
Volume
dm
3
Lp
A
dB(A)
Ship.
Weight
kg
Dimensions
mm
/Y /Y L W H
S9022-S613A-AD Halocarbon
4
oo
oo
23,6/18,5 1487 182 59/52 1359 2546 2904 2635
S9023-S613A-AD Halocarbon
6
ooo
ooo
35,4/27,7 2231 273 61/54 1910 3646 2904 2635
S9024-S613A-AD Halocarbon
8
oooo
oooo
47,2/37 2975 364 61/54 2530 4746 2904 2635
S9025-S613A-AD Halocarbon
10
ooooo
ooooo
59/46,2 3718 455 62/55 3119 5878 2904 2635
S9026-S613A-AD Halocarbon
12
oooooo
oooooo
70,8/55,4 4462 546 63/56 3685 6918 2904 2635
DCV-AD
Product Range
Fan
Motor
50Hz Outlet Sound Power Level at Octave Band Center Frequency (Hz) Total
Conn. 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 Lw
A
Standard Sound Level
6-pole Delta 62 76 82 85 85 83 80 74 89
6-pole Star 55 69 75 78 78 76 73 67 82
m 2 3 5 10 15 20 30 40 50
dB(A) +14 +10 +6 0 -4 -6 -9 -12 -14
DCV-AD - D12
D
C
V
-
A
D
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Engineering Specifications
TrilliumSeries Condensers
1.0 Heat Exchanger
1.1 General: The finned Coil Heat Exchanger consists of either 15,9
mm or 12,7 mm O.D. phosphorus deoxidised stainless steel type
304L or copper seamless tubes and aluminium fins. Parallel or
staggered tube construction provides substantially higher capacity
since more tubes are exposed to the air stream. The advanced
rippled-corrugated fin design creates a state of continuous
turbulence, which effectively reduces the boundary layer formation
that could otherwise reduce the rate of heat exchange. Fins have full
drawn collars to maintain fin spacing and provide a continuous
surface cover over the entire tube. The tubes are mechanically
expanded into the fin collars to provide a continuous primary to
secondary compression bond over the entire finned length for
maximum heat transfer rates. The coils are circuited for counterflow
heat transfer to provide the maximum mean-effective temperature
difference.
The refrigerant condensing coil shall be according to the European
Pressure Equipment directive (PED) 97/23/EC. The refrigerant
condensing coil shall be tested at 30 bar air pressure under water.
2.0 Air Movement
2.1 The air movement package: This air movement package
combines premium aerodynamic and acoustic performance with
innovative design to offer a compact fan and motor as an integrated
product.
1. Adjustable pitch angle impeller allows the optimum aerodynamic
performance to be achieved for the given motor output, therefore
minimising running costs.
2. Exceptionally compact design with short overall motor length.
3. Two speed by delta / star reconnection speed control.
4. Minimal moving parts for maximum reliability.
5. Motor protection IP55.
6. Insulation Class F.
7. Fan designed for frequent starting.
8. Continuous running from -40C to 60C.
9. Integral Overheat thermal cut-out protection.
2.2 Fan(s): The Fan has superb performance with a steep volume/
pressure performance curve, giving greater flexibility in design and
making it more tolerant of pressure variations which may occur
because of, for instance, dirt accumulation on the fins of the heat
exchanger. The fan, being an integrated product of impeller and
motor, is balanced as a complete unit using dynamic single plane
balancing. Balance grade is G6.3. The fan and motor are designed to
be totally maintenance free.
2.3 Impeller: The impeller has an aluminium hub and clamp-plate,
with six equally spaced, fully adjustable, moulded, black, ultra-violet
resistant, glass coupled polypropylene airfoil section blades,
designed on the latest aerospace technology. All rotating aluminium
components are X-ray examined prior to machining to ensure quality.
2.4 Motor: Suitable for horizontal through to vertical shaft operation.
IP55 protection, with removable drain plugs. Bearings lubricated with
wide temperature range grease, re-lubricated or sealed for life
depending on size. Insulation class F as standard. The motor is
designed to give maximum flexibility of control by PWM Frequency
Inverter, or Voltage Speed Control and where appropriate can be
used to give two speeds by Delta/Star reconnect, where 80% of the
full speed can be obtained by this method.
Electrical Supply
380 -420 V / 50 Hz / 3 ph
440- 480 V / 60 Hz / 3 ph
Motor Electrical Details
The motor can be run continuously from -40C to +60C.
Performance Data
The air and sound performance data has been measured in
accordance with the following Standards:
ISO 5801:1977, type A installation test method for air performance
(dual numbered BS 848 Part1: 1997)
BS 848 Part 2:1985, type A installation, method of noise testing.
3.0 Supporting Frame and Casing
3.1 Frame and Casing: The supporting Frame and Casing is an all-
bolted painted galvanised steel construction designed to withstand
the most adverse weather conditions. Double brake flanges maximise
strength of panels. Full baffles separate individual fan sections.
Motor Poles 6 Poles
Motor Rating, kW
2, 1
Y 1,1
Speed, Rpm
925
Y 725
Full Load Current, A
5,74
Y 3,8
Starting Current, A
24,0
Y 18,4
DCV-AD - D13
W
a
t
e
r

S
a
v
i
n
g

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
... because temperature matters
4.0 Adiabatic Pre-Cooler
4.1 Adiabatic Pre-Cooling Medium: The MUNTERS EPACC
adiabatic pre-cooling section serves as an adiabatic saturator to cool
the incoming air. It consists of specially impregnated and corrugated
cellulose paper sheets with different flute angles, one steep and one
shallower that have been bonded together. Such a design yields a
cooling pad with high evaporation efficiency while still operating with
a very low-pressure drop. The impregnation procedure for the
cellulose paper ensures a strong self supporting product, with high
absorbency, which is protected against decomposition and rotting.
The evaporative fluid, such as city water, is supplied to a distribution
manifold and the rate of the water flow may be initially regulated by a
manual-regulating valve. A distribution pad on the top of the cooling
pad ensures an even water distribution and minimises the risk of dry
spots. The water flows down the corrugated surface of the
evaporative cooling pad. The incoming warm and dry air that passes
through the pad evaporates most of the water. Any remaining water
assists in washing the pad, and is drained to the gutter. In addition
scaling is kept to a minimum and no water carry-over occurs due to
the fact that the water is directed to the air inlet side of the pad and
this where the evaporation takes place. The air that leaves the pad is
therefore cooled and humidified simultaneously without any external
energy supply, and without formation of aerosols.
For proper Legionella bacteria control, the system and all its water
distribution piping is completely drained and dried after each
adiabatic cycle.
4.2 Adiabatic Pre-Cooling Casing: The adiabatic pre-cooling casing
is made of stainless steel, designed as a direct water system, without
the need for pumps.
5.0 Electrical Panel and Controls
5.1 TrilliumSeries Condenser delivered with factory installed
electrical panel with variable frequency drive: For TrilliumSeries
Condenser delivered with factory installed electrical panel including
variable frequency drive, the TrilliumSeries Condenser will be
delivered with panel of IP55 enclosure, including main isolating power
switch with lock provision, main fuses, emergency cut-out switch,
thermal contactor with coil for each fan wired to the fan motor
thermostatic cut-out switch, 400/230 transformer, control circuit
switch.
Danfoss Variable Frequency Drive with built-in RFI filters protected to
1st environment and EN55011 to 1B, built-in DC Link coils which
reduce harmonic distortion. Hand-Off-Auto function - fast and easy
commissioning. Local control Panel - clear text display read-out.
Inverter by-pass power switch. Digital controller and ambient
temperature sensor.
Both fan speed signal from variable speed drive and ambient
temperature signal are fed to the digital controller. The adiabatic pre-
cooling will be activated and stopped on the basis of a pre-
programmed logical combination of the two signals in the digital
controller.
Hybrid Condenser
HXC - D 1
W
a
t
e
r

S
a
v
i
n
g

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
HXC
Product Detail
HXC Hybrid Condenser ........................................................................... D2
Benefits ....................................................................................................... D4
Construction Details .................................................................................. D6
Custom Features and Options .................................................................. D8
Accessories ............................................................................................... D11
Engineering Data ..................................................................................... D13
Structural Support .................................................................................. D18
Engineering Specifications ..................................................................... D19
HXC - D 2
H
X
C
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
HXC Hybrid Condenser
Capacity
Single Cell Capacity:
710- 2460 Nominal R-717 kW
General Description
The HXC Hybrid Condenser offers significant water savings versus traditional water-cooled and
evaporative condensers. Thanks to the standard design features the HXC satisfies additional
environmental concerns by minimising also energy consumption, refrigerant charge and plume.
The HXC minimises operating cost, provides year-round operating reliability and simplifies
maintenance requirements.
Key Features
Maximum water savings
Low energy consumption
Low refrigerant charge
Low installed cost
Easy maintenance
Plume abatement
Reliable year-round operation
Long service life
PED 97/23/EC Coil Design
HXC - D 3
W
a
t
e
r

S
a
v
i
n
g

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
... because temperature matters
Principle of Operation
The refrigerant enters the dry (finned) coil at the top, which is to be connected
with the wet (prime surface) coil in series. Liquid refrigerant leaves at the
bottom outlet of the wet coil. When the dampers are closed, air is induced
through the wet sections (coil and fill), where it picks up heat and humidity.
The air is then led over the dry (finned) coil, where it picks up additional
sensible heat. Due to the sensible heat transfer of the dry (finned) coil, water
consumption is reduced, when compared to a conventional evaporative
condenser. To save compressor energy and reduce the condensing heat (and
water consumption) the HXC hybrid condenser will operate with dampers
closed until a given value of condensing temperature is reached and the ambient air is cold enough
to contribute to the heat rejection. When the dampers open the air flow increases due to the lower
resistance to air flow and the air distribution will shift, so that less air is induced through the
evaporative sections, both of which enhances the sensible heat transfer and further reduces water
consumption. If the ambient air temperature is low enough to allow dry operation, the spray pump
is shut off and no water is consumed at all.
1. Air in; 2. Air out; 3. Vapour in; 4. Liquid out; 5. Wet deck surface; 6. Cold water basin; 7. Water distribution system; 8. Coil; 9. Spray Water
Pump; 10. Eliminators; 12. Dry finned coil; 13. Modulating air inlet dampers; 14. Servo motor; 15. Pressure transmitter.
HXC - D 4
H
X
C
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Benefits
Maximum Water Savings
Water savings are achieved throughout the year with different operating modes of the HXC. In
some areas, the water cost savings alone can pay for the equipment in as little as two years!
During the dry/wet operating mode, a significant amount of heat is removed by sensible heat
transfer, providing reduced water consumption versus conventional evaporative cooling
When the heat load and/or ambient temperatures drop, the condensing pressure is lowered to a
set value, hence saving energy and water
When temperature of the ambient air is low enough, dampers in the back of the condenser
open, hereby introducing an increased flow of colder ambient air, which enhances the heat
transfer on the dry coil and further reduces water consumption
Water consumption is totally eliminated in the dry operating mode
Low Energy Consumption
The HXC provides heat rejection at the lowest possible energy input and maintenance
requirements via:
High efficiency, low kW axial fans
Patented combined flow technology, which reduces evaporation directly off the coil, minimizing
the potential for scaling and fouling
Parallel flow of air and spray water, which eliminates scale-promoting dry spots
Variable frequency drive or two speed motors
Reduced Refrigerant Charge
Combined flow technology provides maximum
capacity at the lowest refrigerant charge
available in the industry.
Reduced refrigerant charge lowers installation
costs and may help satisfy refrigerant charge
thresholds.
Note: For more information on combined flow technology, refer to
section Evaporative Condenser Product Line Overview.
Low Installed Cost
Support All models mount directly on parallel
I-beams and ship complete with motors and
drives factory-installed and aligned.
Modular Design Units ship in three pieces to minimize the size and weight of the heaviest lift,
allowing for the use of smaller, less costly cranes.
Coil Connections Single prime surface coil reduces costs of pipe, valves, purgers and labour.
1. HXC, 2. Forced Draft; 3. Induced Draft
HXC - D 5
W
a
t
e
r

S
a
v
i
n
g

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
... because temperature matters
Easy Maintenance
Access Hinged access doors and a standard internal walkway provide easy access to the
unit interior.
Spacious Interior Provides easy access to the cold water basin, drift eliminators, fan drive
system, the prime surface coil and the modulation fan dampers.
Access to spray Distribution Parallel flow of air and spray water over the coil allows for
inspection and access to the top of the coil during full operation.
Plume Abatement
The HXC offers a combination of sensible, adiabatic, and evaporative heat transfer to significantly
reduce any plume that may occur with conventional evaporative cooling equipment. During the
coldest times of the year, when the potential for visible discharge is greatest, the HXC operates
100% dry, completely eliminating plume.
Reliable Year Round Operation
Belt Drive System utilizes special corrosion-resistant materials of construction and state-of-
the-art technology to ensure ease of maintenance and reliable year-round performance.
Combined Inlet Shields prevent biological growth from sunlight, act as a filter for air borne
impurities and debris and eliminate water splash out.
Long Service Life
Materials of Construction Various materials are available to meet the corrosion resistance,
unit operating life, and budgetary requirements of any project.
Note: For more information, please refer to the section Technical Resources, Materials of Construction.
Large Access Door Removable Drift Eliminators
HXC - D 6
H
X
C
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Construction Details
HXC - D 7
W
a
t
e
r

S
a
v
i
n
g

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
... because temperature matters
1. Heavy-Duty Construction
Z600 hot-dip galvanized steel panels
2. Fan Drive System (Not Shown)
Premium quality belts
Corrosion resistant sheaves
Heavy-duty bearings
Adapted fan motor for operation in saturated
conditions.
3. Low kW Axial Fan(s) (Not Shown)
Quiet operation
High Efficiency
Corrosion resistant aluminum
4. Water Distribution System
Visible and accessible during operation
Overlapping spray patterns ensure proper water
coverage
Large orifice, non-clog nozzles
5. Prime Surface Coil (Not Shown)
Continuous serpentine, steel tubing
Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication (HDGAF)
Sloped tubes for free drainage of fluid
Designed for maximum 23 bar operating pressure
according to PED
6. Dry Finned Coil
Stainless Steel tubing with high density aluminum
fins
Designed for max. 23 bar operating pressure
according to PED
Staggered tubes coil arrangement
7. BACross Wet Deck Surface with
Integral Drift Eliminators (Not Shown)
Plastic material
Impervious to rot, decay and biological attack
Designed and manufactured by BAC
8. Combined Inlet Shield Technology
Corrosion Resistant
Easily removable
UV resistant plastic material
9. Cold Water Basin
Sloped cold water basin for easy cleaning
Suction strainer with anti-vortex hood
Adjustable water make-up assembly from air inlet
side
Integral internal walkway as standard
10. Hinged Access Doors
Inward swinging door
11. Recirculating Spray Pump
Close coupled, bronze fitted centrifugal pump
Totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) motor
Bleed line with metering valve installed from pump
discharge to overflow
12. Modulating Air Inlet Dampers
Galvanised Steel
Opposed blade, air-tight design
Located in the back of the upper "wet" section
13. Actuators (Not shown)
Two actuators for modulation of the dampers
14. Controller (Not Shown)
Programmable controller with multiple set points for
maximum operating savings.
For sequencing the operation of dampers, fans and
spray pump
15. Pressure Transmitter (Not Shown)
To be installed on site (in the condenser discharge
piping)
HXC - D 8
H
X
C
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Custom Features and Options
Construction Options
Standard Construction:
Steel panels and structural elements are constructed of Z600 heavy-gauge hot-dip galvanized
steel protected with the Baltiplus Corrosion Protection on the outside of the unit.
Optional BALTIBOND

Corrosion Protection System:


The BALTIBOND

Corrosion Protection System, a hybrid polymer coating used to extend


equipment life, is applied to all hot-dip galvanized steel components of the unit.
Optional Stainless Steel Construction:
Steel panels and structural elements are constructed of stainless steel either type 304 or 316.
Note: Refer to section Technical Resources, Material Options for more details on the materials described above.
Prime Surface Coil Configurations
Each coil is manufactured according to the
European Pressure Equipment Directive (PED)
97/23/EC (For more details, refer to the
Evaporative Condenser "Overview" section)
BAC condenser coils are standard available at a
design pressure of 23 bar, and are pneumatically
tested at 34 bar.
Standard Serpentine Coil:
The standard condensing coil is constructed of
continuous lengths of all prime surface steel,
hot-dip galvanized after fabrication (HDGAF)
Optional Stainless Steel Coil:
Coils are available in Type 304L and 316L
stainless steel for specialized applications.
All coils are designed for low pressure drop with sloping tubes for free drainage of fluid.
Dry Finned Configuration
The standard dry finned coil on the HXC hybrid
condenser consists of a 6-row stainless steel AISI
304L coil in a staggered "triangle" arrangement
with precoated aluminium high density fins. The
coil is designed in accordance to PED regulations
and has an operating pressure of 23 bar.
Hot Dip Galvanised Coil
Stainless Steel Finned Coil
HXC - D 9
W
a
t
e
r

S
a
v
i
n
g

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
... because temperature matters
Wet Deck Surface
Cross flow plastic wet deck surface with
integrated high efficiency drift eliminators
Fill pack extended into the cold water basin to
avoid sound of water splash
Reduction of recirculating spray water
temperature results in compact prime surface
coil which reduces both refrigerant and piping
costs.
Saturation and pre-cooling of incoming outside
air
Modulating Air Inlet Dampers
Dampers are located in the back of the upper
"wet section".
Constructed of galvanised steel
Opposed blade, air-tight design
Proportional modulation through beams
Air Flow Control Package
An air flow control package is included to provide
maximum water savings and plume control. This
package consists of a pressure transmitter
(shipped loose for site installation in condenser
discharge piping), actuators to activate the modulating air inlet dampers and a control system to
intelligently modulate the dampers when needed.
The condensing pressure is allowed to float down to a set minimum value in parallel with a
proportional regulation of the cold air entry to minimise water consumption.
Fan Drive System
The low sound fan drive system provides the
cooling air necessary to reject heat from the
system to the atmosphere. The standard fan drive
system consists of two sheaves located on
minimum shaft centreline distances to maximise
belt life. A fan motor, custom engineered for BAC
to provide maximum performance for cooling
tower service, is provided.
Wet Deck Surface
Modulating Air Inlet Dampers
Fan Drive System
HXC - D 10
H
X
C
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Low Noise Fans
The low sound levels generated by HXC Hybrid
Condensers are thanks to the use of high
efficiency low noise axial fans making them
suitable for installation in most environments. For
extremely sound sensitive installations, factory
designed, tested and rated sound attenuation is
available for both the air intake and discharge.
Note: For more information, please refer to the section Technical
Resources, Sound Reduction Options.
Combined Inlet Shields
Combined Inlet shields prevent biological growth
from sunlight, act as a filter for air borne impurities
and debris and eliminate water splash out.
Remote Sump Execution
The use of an auxiliary sump within a heated
space is the most satisfactory way to protect
sump water from freezing. When the circulating
pump is shut off, all the water in the water
distribution, in suspension and in the sump will
drain freely to the auxiliary sump.
Note: For detailed information on the calculation of the remote sump
tank, please refer to the section "Technical Resources, Selection of
Remote Sump Tank".
Removable Bundled Fill
For installations where it is necessary or
recommended to remove the wet deck surface for
more thorough cleaning and disinfection,
removable bundled fill is available. The fill
bundles can be easily lifted and handled by one
person and therefore provide a simple and secure
method of removing and installing. The bundles
can be dismantled and sheet by sheet can be
removed for inspection and cleaning of both
sides. After cleaning the sheets can be re-
bundled and re-installed.
Low Noise Fans (dry coil section removed)
Combined Inlet Shields
Easy Removable Fill Bundles
HXC - D 11
W
a
t
e
r

S
a
v
i
n
g

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
... because temperature matters
Accessories
External Service Platform
For external service, platforms can be added to the unit.
Ladder and Safety Cage
In the event the owner requires easy access to the top of the unit, the unit can be furnished with a
platform and ladders extending from the base of the unit to the platform, as well as safety cages.
Internal Ladder
For access to the motor and drive assemblies internal ladders are available on all models.
Internal Service Platforms
For access to the motor and drive assemblies on models HXC 214 to 468 an upper service
platform with ladder and handrails is available. Safety gates are available for handrail openings.
Top Air Inlet Screens
The screens protect the air inlet side above the coil section only. Top air inlet screens are always
in Baltibond Corrosion

Protection System.
Vibration Cut-out Switch
A factory-mounted vibration cut-out switch is available to effectively protect against equipment
failure due to excessive vibration of the mechanical equipment system. BAC can provide a
vibration cut-out switch in an IP65 enclosure to ensure reliable protection.
Extended Lubrication Lines
Extended lubrication lines with grease fittings are
available for lubrication of the fan shaft bearings.
Internal Service Platform and Ladder External Service Platform
Extended Lubrication Lines
HXC - D 12
H
X
C
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Basin Heaters
Although most units will operate dry in the winter, basin heaters are available for freeze protection
when required. Basin heaters prevent freezing of the water in the cold water basin when the unit
is idle. Factory-installed heaters, which maintain the water temperature at 4C, are a simple and
inexpensive way of providing such protection.
Electric Water Level Control Package
The electric water level control replaces the standard mechanical make-up valve when a more
precise water level control is required. This package consists of a float switch mounted in the basin
and a solenoid activated valve in the make-up water line. The valve is slow closing to minimize
water hammer.
Stand-by Pump
A factory mounted stand-by pump is available, including non-return valves in each pump piping
line. In case of a pump failure, there can be switched over to the stand-by pump, eliminating the
unit shut down period as much as possible.
N2 Filling of the Coil
For prolonged shipment periods (ocean freight) or extended storage on site it is recommended to
charge the coil(s) with nitrogen.
Basin Sweeper Piping
Basin sweeper piping provides an effective method of preventing sediment from collecting in the
cold water basin of the unit. A complete piping system, including nozzles, is provided in the unit
basin for connection to side stream filtration equipment.
Note: For more information, please refer to the section "Technical Resources, Filtration".
Model No. HXC Electric Immersion Heaters -18C kW
HXC 131-147 1 x 6
HXC 173-193 1 x 6
HXC 214-288 1 x 8
HXC 379-424 2 x 6
HXC 309 2 x 6
HXC 468 2 x 6
Basin Sweeper Piping N2 Filling of the Coil
HXC - D 13
W
a
t
e
r

S
a
v
i
n
g

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
... because temperature matters
Engineering Data
REMARK: Do not use for construction. Refer to factory certified dimensions & weights. This brochure includes data
current at time of publication, which should be reconfirmed at the time of purchase. In the interest of product
improvement, specifications, weights and dimensions are subject to change without notice. Up-to-date engineering
data and more can be found at www.BaltimoreAircoil.com.
HXC 131-193
Model No
HXC
Operating
Weight
(kg)
Shipping
Weight
(kg)
Heaviest
Section
(kg)
H
(mm)
L
(mm)
W
(mm)
Airflow
(m
3
/s)
Fan
Motor
(kW)
Spray
Water
Flow
(l/s)
Pump
(kW)
Inlet/Outlet Coil
Connections
(mm)
R717 Charge
(kg)
Prime
Surface
Coil
Finned
Coil
Prime
Surface
Coil
Dry
Coil
HXC 131
HXC 147
5772
6032
4172
4402
2160
2390
5397
5397
2775
2775
2385
2385
19,6
19,1
(2x) 5,5
(2x) 5,5
18,3
18,3
(1x) 2,2
(1x) 2,2
100
100
80
80
46
57
10
10
HXC 173
HXC 193
7298
7638
5155
5455
2620
2920
5397
5397
3690
3690
2385
2385
26,1
25,5
(2x) 7,5
(2x) 7,5
31,5
31,5
(1x) 2,2
(1x) 2,2
100
100
80
80
61
76
14
14
1. Refrigerant in; 2. Refrigerant out; 3. Make Up ND15; 4. Overflow ND80; Drain ND50; 6. Acces door.
HXC - D 14
H
X
C
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
HXC 214-468
General Notes
1. Dimensional drawings show standard (right hand) arrangements.
Left hand arrangement can be furnished by special order.
2. Coil connection locations are approximate. Dimensions should not
be used for prefabrication of the connecting piping. All coil
connections are beveled for welding.
3. Shipping/operating weights indicated are for units without
accessories such as sound attenuators, discharge hoods, etc.
Consult factory certified prints to obtain weight additions and the
heaviest section to be lifted. Operating weight shown in tables is
based on total unit weight of refrigerant operating charge and
basin filled to overflow level.
4. The units will be delivered in 3 different pieces, upper, middle and
lower section.
Model No
HXC
Operating
Weight
(kg)
Shipping
Weight
(kg)
Heaviest
Section
(kg)
H
(mm)
L
(mm)
W
(mm)
Airflow
(m
3
/s)
Fan
Motor
(kW)
Spray
Water
Flow
(l/s)
Pump
(kW)
Inlet/Outlet Coil
Connections
(mm)
R717 Charge
(kg)
Prime
Surface
Coil
Finned
Coil
Prime
Surface
Coil
Dry
Coil
HXC 214
HXC 258
HXC 288
8625
8042
8542
6200
5547
5987
2840
3280
3720
6717
6717
6717
3690
3690
3690
2985
2985
2985
35,1
34,7
33,7
(2x) 11
(2x) 11
(2x) 11
45,1
45,1
45,1
(1x) 4
(1x) 4
(1x) 4
100
100
100
80
80
80
69
91
114
16
16
16
HXC 379
HXC 424
13355
14125
9601
10271
4740
5410
6856
6856
5520
5520
2985
2985
52,9
51,4
(3x) 11
(3x) 11
56,8
56,8
(1x) 5,5
(1x) 5,5
100
100
80
80
136
170
24
24
HXC 309 11017 7796 4010 6856 3690 3610 36,4 (2x) 9 45,1 (1x) 4 100 80 123 19
HXC 468 16200 11341 5850 6996 5520 3610 56,5 (3x) 11 56,8 (1x) 5,5 100 80 182 29
1. Refrigerant in; 2. Refrigerant out; 3. Make Up ND25; 4. Overflow ND80; 5. Drain ND50; 6. Access door.
HXC - D 15
W
a
t
e
r

S
a
v
i
n
g

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
... because temperature matters
Sound Attenuation
REMARK: Do not use for construction. Refer to factory certified dimensions & weights. This brochure includes data
current at time of publication, which should be reconfirmed at the time of purchase. In the interest of product
improvement, specifications, weights and dimensions are subject to change without notice. Up-to-date engineering
data and more can be found at www.BaltimoreAircoil.com.
Modes of Operation
Note: *During dry mode air flow modulation can be controlled by two-speed motor or Variable Frequency Drive.
Model No.
HXC
Weight Sound Attenuator
(kg)
HXC 131-147 130
HXC 173-193 175
HXC 214-288 150
HXC 379-424 375
HXC 309 250
HXC 468 375
Operation Mode Modulating Air Inlet Dampers Spray Pump Fans
Dry-Wet Mode Closed ON ON
Modulating Mode 0 100% Open ON ON
Dry Mode 100 % Open OFF ON*
1. Unit Width; 2. Unit Height; 3. Insulated Plenum; 4. Intake Attenuator.
HXC - D 16
H
X
C
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Dry/Wet Mode
The refrigerant to be condensed always first flows through the dry finned coil and then to the wet prime
surface coil, where the condensed exits the unit. Spray is drawn from the cold water basin and pumped to
the water distribution system above the prime surface coil. Wetting the prime surface coil allows evaporative
cooling to occur. The spray water falls from the prime surface coil over the wet deck surface, enhancing the
evaporative heat transfer by sub-cooling the spray water. Air is drawn through both the prime surface coil
and through the wet deck surface where it is saturated and picks up heat. The air is, however, still cold
enough to achieve significant heat rejection within the finned coil, which is installed at the discharge above
the fan(s). In this mode the finned coil, acts in fact as a desuperheater. Due to the sensible heat transfer of
the finned coil, water consumption is reduced, when compared to a conventional evaporative condenser.
In the dry-wet mode, both sensible and evaporative heat transfer are used. Compared to a conventional
evaporative unit, the potential for plume is substantially reduced and significant water savings can be
obtained, even at peak design conditions.
Modulating Mode
At reduced heat load and/or reduced ambient temperatures, the dampers may open and modulate to further
reduce water consumption and to control the condensing capacity. When the dampers open, they open a
low resistance path for ambient air to directly reach the fan, mixing with the humid air from the wet section
of the condenser. This low resistance path reduces water consumption in two ways. First, air is drawn
through the open louvers, reducing the air drawn through the wet section and the related evaporation.
Second, the low resistance path allows the fans to move a greater total volume of air, which passes over the
dry section and improves the performance of the dry coil. This change in airflow also serves to control
capacity as the heat load is shifted from the wet section to the dry section, keeping the condensing
temperature from falling as the heat load or ambient temperatures fall. In addition, the potential for plume is
further diminished by reducing the amount of evaporated water and increasing the heat added to the
discharge air by the dry finned coil.
Dry-Wet Mode Water Consumption
Modulating Mode Water Consumption
HXC - D 17
W
a
t
e
r

S
a
v
i
n
g

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
... because temperature matters
Dry Mode
During the dry mode the spray water system is turned off, saving on pump energy. With the intelligent HXC
Hybrid condenser the switchpoint from wet to dry operation is improved, since the total airflow in the product
increases when the dampers are fully open. In this mode no water consumption occurs, and plume is
completely eliminated. When the equipment operates in the dry mode for prolonged periods, draining the
cold water basin is recommended, eliminating the need for freeze protection and water treatment.
Remote Sump Data
Refer to the "Technical Resources" section "Selection of Remote Sump" for Remote Sump Data.
Dry Mode Water Consumption
HXC - D 18
H
X
C
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Structural Support
REMARK: Do not use for construction. Refer to factory certified dimensions & weights. This brochure includes data
current at time of publication, which should be reconfirmed at the time of purchase. In the interest of product
improvement, specifications, weights and dimensions are subject to change without notice. Up-to-date engineering
data and more can be found at www.BaltimoreAircoil.com.
The recommended support arrangement for units consists of parallel I-beams running the full length of the unit, spaced as shown in the following
drawing. Besides providing adequate support, the steel also serves to raise the unit above any solid foundation to ensure access to the bottom
of the unit. To support units in an alternate steel support arrangement, consult your BAC Balticare Representative.
Units With and Without Sound Attenuation
Notes :
1. Support steel and anchor bolts to be designed and furnished by
others.
2. All support steel must be level at the top.
3. Beams must be selected in accordance with accepted structural
practice. Maximum deflection of beam under unit see table.
4. If vibration isolation rails are to be used between the unit and
supporting steel, be certain to allow for the length of the vibration
rails when determining the length of the supporting steel, as
vibration rail length and mounting hole locations may differ from
those of the unit.
5. If point vibration isolation is used with multi-cell units, the isolators
must be located under the support steel, not between the support
steel and the towers.
Model
HXC
Max. Deflection
(mm) (4)
Dimensions (mm)
N of 20 mm
Anchorbolts
W L A B C
131-147 8 2385 2775 2325 - 255 4
173-193 10 2385 3690 2325 - 255 4
214-288 10 2985 3690 2925 - 255 4
379-424 12 2985 5520 2925 2440 270 8
309 10 3610 3690 3550 - 255 4
468 12 3610 5520 3550 2440 270 8
1. Outline of Unit, 2. Air Intake, 3. Mounting Holes diameter 22 mm, 4. Unit
HXC - D 19
W
a
t
e
r

S
a
v
i
n
g

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
... because temperature matters
Engineering Specifications
General
A. General: Furnish and install, _____ factory assembled hybrid
condenser(s) of induced draft design, with single side air entry and
vertical air discharge. Overall dimensions shall not exceed
approximately _____ mm x _____ mm, with an overall height not
exceeding approximately _____mm. Operating weight shall not
exceed _____ kg. The hybrid condenser shall be Baltimore Aircoil
Model ____________.
B. Capacity: The hybrid condenser(s) shall be warranted by the
manufacturer to have condensing capacity of _____ kW heat
rejection, operating with ____ refrigerant at ___C condensing
temperature and ___C entering wet-bulb temperature.
C. Warranty: The manufacturers standard equipment warranty shall
be for a period of one year from the date of startup or eighteen months
from the date of shipment, whichever ends first.
D. Quality Assurance: The manufacture shall have Management
System certified by an accredited registrar as complying with the
requirements of ISO-9001:2000 to ensure consistent quality of
products and services.
Products
1.0 Evaporative Condenser Materials and Components
1.1 Baltiplus Corrosion Resistant Construction: Unless otherwise
noted in this specification, all steel panels and structural elements
shall be constructed from heavy-gauge, Z600 hot-dip galvanized
steel, with all sheared edges given a protective coating of zinc-rich
compound and the exterior protected with the Baltiplus Corrosion
Protection.
(Alternate 1.1) Baltibond

Corrosion Resistant Construction:


Unless otherwise noted in this specification, all steel panels and
structural members shall be protected with the BALTIBOND
Corrosion Protection System. The system shall consist of Z600 hot
dip galvanised steel prepared in a four-step (clean, pre-treat, rinse
and dry) process with an electrostatically sprayed, thermosetting
hybrid polymer fuse-bonded to the substrate during a thermally
activated curing stage monitored by a 23-step quality assurance
program.
2.0 Coil Casing Assembly
The hybrid condenser shall include a coil casing section consisting of
a refrigerant condensing coil, a spray water distribution system,
modulating air inlet dampers, air flow control package, drift
eliminators, fans and drive system as indicated by the manufacturer.
2.1. The refrigerant condensing coil shall be fabricated of all prime
surface steel at the manufacturers own facility, and hot-dip
galvanized after fabrication.
a. The refrigerant condensing coil shall be according to European
Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC, with design pressure of 23
bar.
b. The refrigerant condensing coil shall be tested at 34 bar air
pressure under water.
c. The refrigerant condensing coil shall be designed for low pressure
drop with sloping tubes for free drainage of liquid refrigerant.
2.2 Spray Water Distribution System: Water shall be distributed
evenly over the coil at a minimum flow rate sufficient to ensure
complete wetting of the coil at all times by large-diameter, non-clog,
360 plastic distribution nozzles spaced across the coil face area in
spray branches. Nozzles shall utilize a two-stage diffusion pattern to
provide overlapping, umbrella spray patterns that create multiple
intersection points with adjacent nozzles.
a. Nozzles and spray branches shall be observable and accessible for
cleaning from the outside of the hybrid condenser during condenser
operation without the removal of other components.
b. Spray branches and nozzles shall be held in place by snap-in
rubber grommets, allowing quick removal of individual nozzles or
complete branches for cleaning or flushing.
2.3. Removable drift eliminators shall be positioned to prevent
moisture from entering the air plenum and incorporate a minimum of
three (3) changes in air direction. The drift eliminators shall be
removable in easy to handle sections for quick access to the coil.
2.4. Fans and Drive System: Fan(s) shall be driven by V-type belts.
a. Fan(s) shall be heavy-duty, axial flow low noise, with aluminium
alloy blades. Air shall discharge through a fan cylinder designed for
streamlined air entry and minimum fan blade tip clearance for
maximum fan efficiency.
b. Fan(s) and shaft(s) shall be supported by heavy-duty, self-aligning,
grease-packed ball bearings with moisture-proof seals and integral
slinger rings, designed for a minimum L10 life of 40,000 hours.
c. Fan and motor sheaves shall be fabricated from corrosion resistant
materials.
d. Fan motor(s) shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) type,
suitable for ____ volt, ____ phase, ___ Hz electrical service and shall
be mounted on an easily adjusted, heavy-duty motor base.
e. The motor shall be furnished with double-sealed, permanently
lubricated bearings and special moisture protection on windings,
shafts and bearings.
f. Air plenum shall provide a minimum of 1220 mm clearance under
the motor base to provide comfortable working space for service
personnel.
2.5. Modulating air inlet dampers: modulating air inlet damper
blocks of air-tight design (to DIN 1946) shall be located in the back of
the coil casing assembly. Damper blades shall be made from
galvanised rolled sheet steel and will be of opposed blade design with
proportional modulation through beams.
2.6. Air flow control package: The air flow control package shall
consist of a pressure transmitter (shipped loose for site installation in
condenser, discharge piping), actuators to activate the modulating air
inlet dampers and a control system to intelligently modulate the
dampers when needed to minimise water consumption.
3.0 Pan Assembly
The hybrid condenser shall include a pan assembly consisting of cold
water basin with pump assembly, heat transfer section for spray water
cooling with integral drift eliminators, combined inlet shields and
hinged access door and internal walkway.
3.1 The cold water basin shall be constructed of heavy-gauge steel
panels and structural members either protected by Baltiplus or
Baltibond

. Basin shall include a depressed section with drain/


cleanout connection. The basin area under the wet deck surface shall
be sloped toward the depressed section to facilitate cleaning.
3.2 The cold water basin shall include a drain/clean-out connection; a
steel strainer; a brass make-up valve; over flow connection; and a
water recirculation pump assembly.
a. Cold water basin shall be designed so that the strainer, makeup
valve and float, and pump assembly are easily accessible without
removing any of the unit panels.
b. Lift-out steel strainer shall be supplied with perforated openings
sized smaller than the water distribution nozzle orifices and an
integral anti-vortexing hood to prevent air entrainment.
c. Water recirculation pump shall be a close-coupled, bronze-fitted
centrifugal pump equipped with a mechanical seal, mounted on the
basin and piped from the suction strainer to the water distribution
system.
HXC - D 20
H
X
C
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
i. The pump shall be installed with adequate drains so that it may
drain freely when the basin is drained.
ii. The pump assembly shall include an integral metering valve and
bleed line to control the bleed rate from the pump discharge to the
overflow connection.
iii. The pump motor shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) type
suitable for _____ volt, ____ phase, ______ Hz electrical service.
d. On installations requiring a remote sump, the hybrid condenser
shall be modified to accommodate the use of an independent sump
and pump for recirculating water (by others).
i. The recirculating water pump, steel strainer, make-up valve, and
integral bleed line assemblies shall be omitted from the hybrid
condenser scope of supply.
ii. The hybrid condenser shall be supplied with a cold water basin
outlet sized and located as indicated on the drawings for gravity drain
to the remote sump.
iii. The water distribution system shall have a design operating
pressure of 14 kPa at the hybrid condenser spray water inlet
connection.
3.3 The heat transfer section shall consist of BACross

wet deck
surface with integral drift eliminators for cooling the spray water
leaving the coil to optimize the thermal performance of the hybrid
condenser as well as saturate and pre-cool the incoming ambient air.
a. The wet deck surface and integral drift eliminators shall be formed
from plastic material.
b. The wet deck surface and integral drift eliminators shall be
impervious to rot, decay, fungus, and biological attack.
3.4 Combined Inlet Shields: Combined inlet shields shall be
separate from the wet deck surface and removable to allow easy
access for inspection of the air/water interface at the air inlet side of
the equipment. Combined inlet shields shall prevent UV-light and
debris from entering the unit, as well as prevent water splash out
during fan cycling. They shall be constructed of maintenance free,
corrosion and UV resistant material.
3.5 Hinged Access Door: A large, hinged access door shall be
provided for access to the coil, drift eliminators and fan plenum
section. The water make-up valve, float ball and suction strainer shall
be easily accessible.
3.6. Internal walkway: The hybrid condenser shall be provided with
an internal walkway at the access door to facilitate servicing of the
unit.
4.0 Dry Finned Coil Assembly
The hybrid condenser shall include a dry finned coil section consisting
of a heavy-gauge steel panel construction (either Baltiplus or
Baltibond Corrosion Protection) and two dry finned coils. The dry
finned coils consist of a 6-row stainless steel AISI 304L coil in a
staggered triangle tube arrangement with precoated aluminium high
density fins. Coil is designed in accordance to PED for 23 bar
operating pressure.
5.0 Sound
Sound Level: To maintain the quality of the local environment, the
maximum sound pressure levels (dB) measured 15 m from the hybrid
condenser operating at full fan speed shall not exceed the sound
levels detailed below.
Location 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 dB(A)
Discharge
Air Inlet
End
Back
Overview
EC - E 1
E
v
a
p
o
r
a
t
i
v
e

C
o
n
d
e
n
s
e
r
s
Evaporative Condensers
.
Product Group Detail
General Information ................................................................................. E2
Principle of Operation .............................................................................. E2
Configuration ............................................................................................. E2
Fan System ................................................................................................. E3
Capacity Range .......................................................................................... E4
Typical Applications .................................................................................. E4
Product Line Overview Table .................................................................. E4
Engineering Considerations ..................................................................... E6
EC - E 2
O
v
e
r
v
i
e
w
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
General Information
Evaporative condensers provide heat rejection for many types of systems, and the specific
application will largely determine which BAC Evaporative Condenser is best suited for a project.
The product line overview table in this section is intended as a general guide.
Evaporative condensers are used to provide lower condensing temperatures and compressor
kilowatts savings of up to 30 percent when compared with air-cooled systems.
Principle of Operation
The vapor to be condensed is circulated through a condensing coil, which is continually wetted on
the outside by a re-circulating water system. Air is pulled or pushed over the coil, causing a small
portion of the re-circulating water to evaporate. The evaporation removes heat from the vapor in
the coil, causing it to condense.
Configuration
BAC manufactures three types of evaporative condensers: combined flow, counter flow, hybrid
and adiabatic products.
Combined Flow
Combined flow is the use of both a condensing coil and wet deck surface for heat transfer in an
evaporative condenser. The addition of wet deck surface to the traditional evaporative condenser
design reduces evaporation in the coil section, reducing the potential for scaling and fouling. BACs
combined flow evaporative condensers utilize parallel flow of air and spray water over the coil, and
crossflow air/water flow through the wet deck surface.
In parallel flow, air and water flow over the coil in the same direction. In the wet deck section of
BACs combined flow evaporative condensers, air and water interact in a crossflow configuration:
water flows vertically down the wet deck as air flows horizontally across it.
Combined Flow: Parallel flow of air and water
over the coil
Combined flow: Crossflow configuration over
the wet deck
EC - E 3
E
v
a
p
o
r
a
t
i
v
e

C
o
n
d
e
n
s
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Counterflow
In a counterflow evaporative condenser design,
the flow of the air is in the opposite direction of the
spray water. In BACs counterflow evaporative
condensers, air travels vertically up through the
unit while the spray water travels vertically down
over the coil.
Hybrid and Adiabatic Products
See description under separate section "Hybrid
Water Saving Products.
Fan System
The flow of air through most factory assembled evaporative cooling equipment is provided by one
or more mechanically driven fans. The fan(s) may be axial or centrifugal, each type having its own
distinct advantages.
Axial fan units require approximately half the fan motor kilowatt of comparably sized centrifugal fan
units, offering significant life-cycle cost savings.
Centrifugal fan units are capable of overcoming reasonable amounts of external static pressure
(125 Pa), making them suitable for both indoor and outdoor installations. Centrifugal fans are also
inherently quieter than axial fans, although the difference is minimal and can often be overcome
through the application of optional low sound fans and/or sound attenuation on axial fan units. Fans
can be applied in an induced draft or a forced draft configuration.
Induced Draft
The rotating air handling components of induced draft equipment are mounted in the top deck of
the unit, minimizing the impact of fan noise on near-by neighbors and providing maximum
protection from fan icing with units operating in sub-freezing conditions. The air being drawn
through the unit hereby discharges over the inducing fan. The use of corrosion resistant materials
ensures long life and minimizes maintenance requirements for the air handling components.
Forced Draft
Rotating air-handling components are located on the air inlet face at the base of forced draft
equipment whereby fresh air is blown through the unit. This base fan position facilitates easy
access for routine maintenance and service. Additionally, location of these components in the dry
entering air stream extends component life by isolating them from the corrosive saturated
discharge air.
Counterflow Configuration
Centrifugal Fans Axial Fans
EC - E 4
O
v
e
r
v
i
e
w
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Capacity Range
All capacities shown are for a single unit; multiple units can be applied to achieve larger capacities.
Typical Applications
A list of typical applications is provided in the Product Line Overview Table for your reference.
Product Line Overview Table
For VXC, VCL, HXC, CXV, CXV-D: 1. Air in; 2. Air out; 3. Vapour in; 4. Liquid out; 5. Wet deck surface; 6. Cold water basin; 7. Water
distribution system; 8. Coil; 9. Spray Water Pump; 10. Eliminators; 11. Optional Extended Surface. 12. Dry finned coil; 13. Modulating air inlet
dampers; 14. Servo motor; 15. Pressure transmitter.
HXC and DCV water saving and hybrid wet-dry products are available to meet these specific
design requirements. Refer to the Water Saving Products section for more details on
these products.
VXC VCL
HXC
(For more information refer to Section
Hybrid Water Saving Products)
Principle of
Operation

Configuration Counterflow Counterflow Combined flow
Fan System Centrifugal Fan, Forced Draft Centrifugal Fan, Forced Draft Axial Fan, Induced Draft
Capacity Range
Nominal R717
kWs
50 to 6470 kW 160 to 1290 kW 710 to 2460 kW
Typical
Applications
Sound sensitive industrial refrigeration
projects
Installations with limited plan area
Indoor Installations
Sound sensitive industrial refrigeration
projects.
Installations with extremely low height
requirements
Indoor Installations
Skid packages
Industrial refrigeration applications in geo-
graphical regions where water cost is high.
1
2
3
4
6
7
8
9
10
11
1
2
3
4
6
7
8
9
10
11
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
12
13
14
15
1
1
2
2
10
EC - E 5
E
v
a
p
o
r
a
t
i
v
e

C
o
n
d
e
n
s
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
For TrilliumSeries Condenser: 1. Dry heat exchanger; 2. Fluid in; 3. Fluid out; 4. Axial Fans; 5. High efficiency evaporative coolingpad; 6.
Water inlet connections; 7. Water outlet connections; 8; Adiabatic cooling ot ambient air; 9. Air Discharge; 10. Air In.
CXV CXV-D
DCV
TrilliumSeries Condenser
(For more information refer to Section
Hybrid Water Saving Products)

Combined Flow Combined Flow Counterflow
Axial Fan, Induced Draft Axial Fan, Induced Draft Axial Fan, Induced Draft
410 to 2730 kW
3500 to 5140 kW 340 to 1030 kW
Industrial refrigeration applications
Very large industrial refrigeration and process
projects requiring low energy consumption and
low sound
Small to medium industrial refrigeration projects
Locations with limited water and limited space
availability
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
2
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4 10
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
4
5
6
7
8
10 10
2
1
EC - E 6
O
v
e
r
v
i
e
w
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Engineering Considerations
Location
Units must have an adequate supply of fresh air to the air inlet(s). When units are located adjacent
to building walls or in enclosures, care must be taken to ensure that the warm, saturated discharge
air is not deflected off surrounding walls or enclosures and drawn back to the air inlet(s).
Warning: Each unit should be located and positioned to prevent the introduction of the warm discharge air and the
associated drift, which may contain chemical or biological contaminants including Legionella, into the ventilation
systems of the building on which the unit is located or those of adjacent buildings.
Note: For detailed recommendations on layout, please consult your local BAC Balticare Representative.
For VL and VX products, bottom screens or solid bottom panels may be desirable or necessary for
safety, depending on the location and conditions at the installation site.
Piping and Valves
Piping should be adequately sized according to standard refrigeration practice and arranged to
allow flexibility for expansion and contraction between component parts of the system. Suitably
sized equalising lines must be installed between the condenser and high pressure receiver to
prevent gas binding and refrigerant backup in the condenser. Service valves should be installed
so that the component parts may be easily serviced.
On multiple evaporative condenser installations, evaporative condensers in parallel with shell-and-
tube condensers, or single condensers with multiple coils, refrigerant outlet connections must be
trapped into the main liquid refrigerant header. The height of the trapped liquid legs must be
sufficient to balance the effect of the unequal coil pressures without backing up liquid refrigerant
into the condensing coil. This type of liquid line piping permits independent operation of any one
of the parallel circuits without manually closing inlet and outlet valves.
Although equalising lines can be used to balance water levels between multi-cell evaporative
condensers, the spray water for each cell must be treated separately, and a separate make-up
must be provided for each cell. Note that a common remote sump for multi-cell installations can
simplify make-up and water treatment. See section "Technical Resources, Application Guidelines"
or the appropriate Operating and Maintenance Instruction Manual for more information on water
treatment.
Weld Byproduct Cleaning
The installation and manufacturing processes commonly used for field assembly of steel-piped
systems may leave weld byproducts inside coils and connecting piping (especially in refrigeration
systems). It is common practice to install filters and/or strainers that remove contaminants during
initial system operation. Shortly after system startup, the filters and/or strainers should be cleaned
or replaced.
Capacity Control
Variable Frequency Drives (VFD)
Installations which are to be controlled by Variable Frequency Drives (VFD) require the use of an
inverter duty motor as designed IEC 34.1, which recognizes the increased stresses placed on
motors by these drive systems. Inverter duty motors must be furnished on VFD applications in
order to maintain the motor warranty. Fan motors must be furnished with thermal protection (either
PTC sensors or coil thermostats normally open, or normally closed). The motor protection consists
of temperature sensitive cutout devices embedded in the motor windings (minimum 3 per motor).
EC - E 7
E
v
a
p
o
r
a
t
i
v
e

C
o
n
d
e
n
s
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
The minimum fan motor speed during normal operation should be not below 30% of the speed
indicated on the motor nameplate. This corresponds with 15 Hz for a 50 Hz supply and 18 Hz for
a 60 Hz supply.
BAC offers factory installed motor control packages including VFD drives. Refer to the section
"Technical Resources, Motor Controls". Check with your local BAC Balticare representative for
availability.
Warning: When the fan speed is to be changed from the factory-set speed, including through the use of a variable
speed control device, steps must be taken to avoid operating at or near fan speeds that cause a resonance with the
unit or its supporting structure. At start-up, the variable frequency drive should be cycled slowly between zero and
full speed and any speeds that cause a noticeable resonance in the unit should be locked out by the variable speed
drive.
Fan Cycling
Fan cycling is the simplest method of capacity control. The number of steps of capacity control can
be increased using the Baltiguard

Fan System, the independent fan motor option, or two-speed


fan motors in conjunction with fan cycling (see the Custom Features & Options section of the
appropriate product line to determine whether the Baltiguard

Fan System or the independent fan
motor option are available; two-speed motors are available for all products). These options provide
substantial energy savings when compared to simple fan cycling.
Warning: Rapid on-off cycling can cause the fan motor to overheat. It is recommended that controls be set to allow a
maximum of 6 on-off cycles per hour.
Note: Spray water pump cycling should not be used for capacity control. This method of control often results in short
cycling of the pump motor as capacity changes substantially with pump cycling. In addition, alternate wetting and drying
of the coil promotes scaling of the heat exchanger coil surface.
Capacity Control Dampers
On centrifugal fan models, modulating capacity control dampers are available to provide close
control of head pressure. See Section "Accessories" or contact your local BAC Balticare
representative.
Vibration Cut-out Switch
Vibration cutout switches are recommended on all axial fan installations. Vibration cutout switches
are designed to interrupt power to the fan motor and/or provide an alarm to the operator in the
event of excessive vibration. BAC offers both electronic and mechanical vibration cutout switches
on all evaporative condensers.
Water Treatment
As water evaporates in the unit, the dissolved solids originally present in the water remain in the
system. The concentration of these dissolved solids increases rapidly and can cause scale and
corrosion. In addition, airborne impurities and biological contaminants, including Legionella, may
be introduced into the circulating water. To control all potential contaminants, a water treatment
program must be employed. In many cases, a simple bleed-off may be adequate for control of
scale and corrosion.
However, biological contamination, including Legionella, can be controlled only through the use of
biocides. Such treatment should be initiated at system startup, after periods of equipment
shutdown, and continued regularly thereafter. Accordingly, it is strongly recommended a biocide
treatment be initiated when the unit is first filled with water and continued regularly thereafter. For
more information, consult the appropriate Operating and Maintenance Manual.
When a water treatment program is employed, it must be compatible with construction materials.
Batch feeding of chemicals into the unit is not recommended. If units are constructed with optional
EC - E 8
O
v
e
r
v
i
e
w
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
corrosion resistant materials, acid treatment may be considered; however, the water quality must
be maintained within the guidelines set forth in the Operating and Maintenance Instructions.
Note: Unless a common remote sump is utilised, each cell of a multi-cell installation must be treated as a separate
entity, even if the cold water basins are equalized.
For complete Water Quality Guidelines, see the appropriate Operating and Maintenance
Instruction Manual, available at www.baltimoreaircoil.com. For specific recommendations on water
treatment, contact a competent water treatment supplier.
Sound Levels
Sound rating data are available for all BAC models. When calculating the sound levels generated
by a unit, the designer must take into account the effects of the geometry of the tower as well as
the distance and direction from the unit to noise-sensitive areas. Whisper Quiet fans and intake
and discharge sound attenuation can be supplied on certain models to provide reduced sound
characteristics (see the Custom Features and Options section of the appropriate product line for
details). The Baltiguard

Fan System, two-speed motors, or variable frequency drives can also be


used to reduce sound during periods of non-peak thermal loads. For more information on sound
and how it relates to evaporative cooling equipment, see Section "Technical Resources,
Fundamentals of Sound". For detailed low sound selections, please consult your local BAC
Balticare Representative.
Winterization
When a unit is shut down in freezing weather, the basin water must be protected by draining to an
indoor auxiliary remote sump tank or by providing supplementary heat to the cold water basin.
Supplementary heat can be provided by electric immersion heaters or in some cases, hot water,
steam coils, or steam injectors. All exposed water piping, make-up lines, and spray pumps (if
applicable) that do not drain at shutdown should be traced with electric heater tape and insulated.
When dry operation is planned for low ambient conditions, centrifugal fan units should be supplied
with oversized fan motors to prevent motor overload when the spray water is not operating. For
remote sump applications, the spray water pump must be selected for the required flow at a total
head which includes the vertical lift, pipe friction (in supply and suction lines) plus the required
pressure at the inlet header of the water distribution system (14 kPa). A valve should always be
installed in the discharge line from the pump to permit adjusting flow to the unit requirement. Inlet
water pressure should be measured by a pressure gauge installed in the water supply riser at the
spray water inlet, and adjusted to the specified inlet pressure.
Indoor Installation (applicable to VXC and VCL models only)
Many indoor installations require the use of inlet and/or discharge ductwork. Units installed with
inlet ductwork must be ordered with solid-bottom panels. Generally, intake ducts are used
only on smaller units while the equipment room is used as a plenum for larger units. Discharge
ductwork will normally be required to carry the saturated discharge air from the building.
Both intake and discharge ductwork must have access doors to allow servicing of the fan
assembly, drift eliminators, and water distribution system. All ductwork is supplied and installed by
others and should be symmetrical and designed to provide even air distribution across the face of
air intakes and discharge openings. Such ductwork may increase the external static pressure on
the unit, requiring a larger fan motor to be installed. This external static pressure must be quantified
(in Pa) to BAC to allow for suitable fan motor sizing.
Warning: The discharge opening must be positioned to prevent the introduction of discharge air into the fresh air
intakes serving the unit or the ventilation systems of adjacent buildings.
Note: Axial fan units are not suitable for indoor installations.
EC - E 9
E
v
a
p
o
r
a
t
i
v
e

C
o
n
d
e
n
s
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Safety
Adequate precautions, appropriate for the installation and location of these products, should be
taken to safeguard the public from possible injury and the equipment and the premises from
damage. Operation, maintenance and repair of this equipment should be undertaken only by
personnel qualified to do so. Proper care, procedures and tools must be used in handling, lifting,
installing, operating, maintaining, and repairing this equipment to prevent personal injury and/or
property damage.
Code Requirement
All evaporative condenser coils supplied from Europe, including desuperheater coils, are certified
according to the European Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC. Since November 1999 this
Pressure Equipment Directive has been adopted by the national legislation of all EU and EFTA
member states. The PED 97/23/EC specifies the design, manufacturing, quality and
documentation requirements for pressure vessels and replaces previous national code
requirements. BAC evaporative condenser coils fall under Category IV of the PED 97/23/EC
reglementation and require a CE Declaration of Conformity which is supplied by BAC at time of
shipment.
Standard PED Coil design (hot-dip galvanised)
All BAC evaporative condenser coils, including bare serpentine coils, split circuit coils, extended
surface coils and desuperheater coils are designed as standard for a maximum operating pressure
of 23 bar (minimum -1 bar). Design temperatures are minimum: -20C and maximum +120C. All
standard PED coils are pneumatically tested at 34 bar after fabrication.
Optional High pressure PED coil design (hot dip galvanised)
For specific refrigerants or applications requiring higher operating pressures (> 23 bar), the high
pressure coil option is available for all hot-dip galvanised condenser coil types (see above under
standard PED coil design). The high pressure coils are designed for a maximum operating
pressure of 28 bar (min. -1 bar) and are pneumatically tested at 40 bar. Design temperatures are
minimum -20C and maximum +120C.
Optional Stainless Steel PED coil design
Bare serpentine coils only (with or without split) are available in stainless steel AISI 304 or AISI 316
execution. All stainless steel coils are designed for a maximum operating pressure of 23 bar (min.
-1 bar) and are pneumatically tested at 34 bar. Design temperature limits are minimum -20C and
maximum +120C.
Checking the refrigeration system for non-condensables and purging
Source of Non-Condensables
Air and other non-condensables gases collect in refrigeration systems from several sources :
1. Poor evacuation of a new system low side if operation is at pressures below atmospheric.
2. Failure to evacuate completely after part of a system has been open for repair.
3. Chemical breakdown of oil and/or refrigerant.
EC - E 10
O
v
e
r
v
i
e
w
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Test on Non-Condensables
Check the system for non-condensable gases is done during system operation. First close the
valve (V3) in the liquid line running from the receiver to the evaporator (king valve).
Keep the compressor running and start pumping down the system. The compressor pressure will
drop as the ammonia supply has been shut off and will finally cause the compressor to fall out
(security). When this happens, simultaneously close the discharge valve V1 of the compressor.
The condenser is now fully pumped up with the ammonia refrigerant (which is captured between
valves V1 and V3 and cannot escape).
Operate the evaporative condenser for at least two hours and measure the 5 temperatures (listed
below) every 10 minutes until the pan water temperature is equal to the entering wet bulb
temperature (T pan = WB in).
When this happens, an equilibrium has been reached in the condenser and all 5 measured
temperatures should be identical to each other.
If the temperature (T1, T2) corresponding to the pressure in the evaporative condenser is higher
than the entering wet bulb temperature by more than 1C, the system has an excessive amount of
non-condensables (make sure that all gauges are accurate when checking for non-condensables).
Five temperatures to be measured :
Entering wet bulb temperature at the condenser air inlet (WB in).
Discharge wet bulb temperature at the condenser outlet (WB out).
Pan (or remote sump) water temperature (T pan).
Temperature (T1) equivalent to refrigerant inlet pressure of the condenser.
Temperature (T2) equivalent to refrigerant discharge pressure of the condenser.
EC - E 11
E
v
a
p
o
r
a
t
i
v
e

C
o
n
d
e
n
s
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Purge Connections
The several recommended piping arrangements each show purge valves at two different locations,
i.e. at the high point of the system and at each condensing coil outlet.
Purging at the high point of the system can only be effective when the system is down. During
normal operation the non-condensables are dispersed throughout the high velocity refrigerant
vapour and too much refrigerant would be lost when purging from this high point.
However, purging at the condenser coil outlet can be effectively accomplished during system
operation. The non-condensables will carry through the condenser coil with the refrigerant liquid
and vapour and tend to accumulate in the condensing coil outlet header and connection where the
temperature and velocity are relatively low.
Purge Piping
All of the purge connections on the condenser coils plus the purge connection in the receiver may
be cross connected to a single purge line, connected to an automatic purger. However, only one
purge valve should be open at a time. Opening two or more valves tied together equalises the coil
outlet pressures and the effect of the vertical drop legs is lost.
Desuperheaters
The discharge gas from ammonia reciprocating compressors is highly superheated. A
desuperheater removes a portion of this superheat prior to the gas entering the condensing coil,
and thereby reduces the load on the evaporative condenser. Within the normal range of single-
stage compressor operation, discharge gas temperatures at 13 bar discharge pressure (36C)
may run from 120C to 150C depending on the compression ratio, amount of suction gas
superheat, and the compressor design. This represents up to 15% of the total heat rejection load.
Other refrigerants and compressor types generally have much lower discharge gas temperatures
than the ammonia reciprocating system so a desuperheater is usually impractical for these
applications.
An enhanced surface coil encased by galvanised steel panels will be fitted onto the evaporative
condenser in the discharge air stream. The coil has a design for low pressure drop and is in
complete compliance to the PED code requirements for a 23 bar design pressure. Optional high
pressure PED coils are available designed for 28 bar operating pressure. The coil is a two pass
arrangement with the entering and leaving gas connections at the same end; thus keeping all coil
connections at the same end of the evaporative condenser. The coil is hot dip galvanised after
fabrication and mounted into a completely enclosed plenum with access doors to allow inspection
and maintenance of the drift eliminators and spray section. The piping between the desuperheater
coil and the condenser coil is to be field fabricated and installed by the contractor.
Ammonia Reciprocating Compressors
generate significant superheat
The desuperheater coil is located on top of the
condenser, above the drift eliminators.
EC - E 12
O
v
e
r
v
i
e
w
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Refrigerant Liquid Subcooling
The pressure at the expansion device feeding the evaporator(s) can be substantially lower than
the receiver pressure due to liquid line pressure losses. If the liquid line is long or the evaporator
is above the receiver, which further reduces the pressure at the expansion device, significant
flashing can occur in the liquid line.
To avoid liquid line flashing where the above conditions exist, it is necessary to subcool the liquid
refrigerant after it leaves the receiver. The minimum amount of subcooling required is the
temperature difference between the condensing temperature and the saturation temperature
corresponding to the pressure at the expansion device. To determine the degree of subcooling
required, it is necessary to calculate the liquid line pressure drop including valves, ells, tees,
strainers, etc., and add to it the pressure drop equivalent to the static head loss between the
receiver and the expansion device at the evaporator, if the evaporator is located above the
receiver.
Some compressor manufacturers publish their compressor ratings based on a fixed amount of
subcooling at the expansion device. Subcooled liquid at the expansion device of the evaporator
does increase system capacity since it increases the refrigeration effect per litre refrigerant
circulated. But the increase is relatively small and seldom justifies the cost of the subcooling device
and piping for this reason alone. However, where compressor ratings based on subcooled liquid
are used, the specified amount of subcooling must be added to that required for liquid line pressure
drop and static head loss.
Note: Increasing the evaporative condenser size over the capacity required for the system will not produce liquid
subcooling. The increased condenser capacity will result only in lower operating condensing temperatures. The same
result will occur if the condensing coil is piped directly to the subcooling coil.
Low temperature, multistage ammonia (R-717) refrigeration systems often use liquid subcooling
between stages for more economical operation. However, subcooling coils in an evaporative
condenser are seldom, if ever, used with an ammonia refrigeration system for several reasons and
are not available from BAC:
1. Design condensing temperatures are generally lower with ammonia, thus limiting the amount of
subcooling that can be obtained.
2. The density of ammonia liquid is approximately 37 pounds per cubic foot, less than half that of
the normally used halocarbons, and static head losses are proportionately less.
3. The expansion devices and system designs normally used for ammonia systems are less
sensitive to small amounts of flash gas.
4. The high latent heat of ammonia (approximately 7110 kJ/kg versus 163 kJ/kg for R-22) results
in comparatively small amounts of flash gas with a liquid line properly sized for low pressure
drop.
Note: Subcooling coils are not available from BAC.
Warranties
Please refer to the Limitation of Warranties applicable to and in effect at the time of the sale/
purchase of these products.
Evaporative Condensers
VXC - E 1
E
v
a
p
o
r
a
t
i
v
e

C
o
n
d
e
n
s
e
r
s
VXC
Product Detail
VXC Evaporative Condensers ................................................................. E2
Benefits ....................................................................................................... E4
Construction Details .................................................................................. E6
Custom Features and Options .................................................................. E8
Accessories ............................................................................................... E10
Engineering Data ..................................................................................... E12
Structural Support .................................................................................. E19
Engineering Specifications ..................................................................... E21
VXC - E 2
V
X
C
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
VXC Evaporative Condensers
Capacity
Single Model Capacity:
VXC : 50 6470 Nominal R717 kWs
VXC-C : 880 1720 Nominal R717 kWs
General Description
VXC Evaporative Condensers deliver fully rated thermal performance over a wide range of heat
rejection and temperature requirements for various refrigerants. VXC and VXC-C models can be
installed indoors and minimize sound levels. VXC-C models are designed to fit in standard dry van
containers to minimize ocean freight costs. The Series VX occupies minimum floor space, provides
year-round operating reliability and is ideal for sound sensitive applications.
Key Features
Suitable for indoor and outdoor installations
Low sound
Low ocean freight costs (VXC-C)
Single side air inlet
Low energy consumption
Low installed cost
Easy maintenance
Reliable year-round operation
Long service life
Wide capacity range
PED 97/23/EC coil design
VXC - E 3
E
v
a
p
o
r
a
t
i
v
e

C
o
n
d
e
n
s
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
VXC - E 4
V
X
C
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Benefits
Wide Capacity Range
Evaporative condenser capacity - The evaporative condensers are available in a broad range
of unit capacities, with small capacity increments to permit close matching of unit size to design
load. The VX line offers the widest selection of evaporative condensers in the industry to meet
virtually every installation and application need.
Installation and Application Flexibility
Indoor Installations Centrifugal fans can overcome the static pressure imposed by external
ductwork, allowing these units to be installed indoors.
Low Sound
Centrifugal Fan - Centrifugal fans have inherently low sound characteristics.
Single Side Air Inlet - Particularly sound-sensitive areas can be accommodated by facing the
quiet side (back panel) to the sound-sensitive direction.
Low Ocean Freight Cost
Size - C models are designed to fit in standard
closed box containers to minimize ocean
freight costs. All containerized models are
shipped in a bottom fan section and a top coil
section, which fit together into a 40' box
container, no crating required.
In order to fit the bottom fan section through the
doors of the container, the fan enclosures are
shipped loose inside the water basin area and
are easily mounted on site.
C Model in Dry Van Container Fan Enclosures are shipped loose
VXC - E 5
E
v
a
p
o
r
a
t
i
v
e

C
o
n
d
e
n
s
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Low Energy Consumption
Evaporative Cooling Equipment minimizes the energy consumption of the entire system
because it provides lower operating temperatures. The owner saves money while conserving
natural resources and reducing environmental impact.
Evaporative Condensers provide lower condensing temperatures and can offer significant kW
savings over conventional air-cooled and water-cooled condensing systems.
Low Installed Cost
Support All models mount directly on two parallel I-beams (supplied by others) and ship
complete with motors and drives, factory-installed and aligned.
Modular Design Large models ship in multiple sections to minimize the size and weight of the
heaviest lift, allowing for the use of smaller, less costly cranes.
Easy Maintenance
Internal Access - The interior of the unit is easily accessible for adjusting the float valve,
cleaning the strainer or flushing the basin.
Reliable Year-Round Operation
V-Belt Drive The fans, motor, and drive system are located outside of the moist discharge
airstream, protecting them from moisture, condensation and icing hence allowing a safe year-
round operation.
Long Service Life
Materials of Construction Various materials are available to meet the corrosion resistance,
unit operating life, and budgetary requirements of any project.
Note: For more information, please refer to the section Technical Resources, Materials of Construction.
The water level control is easily reached from
the access door.
External V-belt drive system (shown here with
panel removed)
VXC - E 6
V
X
C
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Construction Details
Upper Section
Lower Section
VXC - E 7
E
v
a
p
o
r
a
t
i
v
e

C
o
n
d
e
n
s
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
1. Heavy Duty Construction
Z600 hot-dip galvanized steel panels
2. Water Distribution System
Plastic spray header and branches
Large orifice, non-clog nozzles
Grommetted for easy maintenance
3. Coil
Coil according to European Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC
Continuous serpentine, steel tubing
Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication (HDGAF)
Pneumatically tested at 34 bar standard coil
Sloped tubes for free drainage of fluid
4. Drift Eliminators
UV resistant non-corrosive material, impervious to rot, decay and biological attack
Three distinct changes in air direction to reduce drift loss significantly
Assembled in easy to handle sections, which can be removed for access to the equipment
interior
5. Fan Drive System
V-belt drive
Heavy-duty bearings and fan motor
6. Centrifugal Fan(s)
Quiet Operation
7. Recirculating Spray Pump
Close coupled, bronze fitted centrifugal pump
Totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) motor
Bleed line with metering valve installed from pump discharge to overflow
8. Access Door
Circular access door
9. Strainer (not shown)
Anti-vortex design to prevent air entrainment
VXC - E 8
V
X
C
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Custom Features and Options
Construction Options
Standard Construction:
Steel panels and structural elements are constructed of Z600 heavy-gauge hot-dip galvanized
steel protected with the Baltiplus Corrosion Protection on the outside of the unit.
Optional BALTIBOND

Corrosion Protection System:


The BALTIBOND

Corrosion Protection System, a hybrid polymer coating used to extend


equipment life, is applied before assembly to all hot-dip galvanized steel components of the
unit.
Optional Stainless Steel Construction:
Steel panels and structural elements are constructed of stainless steel either type 304 or 316.
Optional Water-Contact Stainless Steel Cold Water Basin:
A cost-effective alternative to an all stainless steel unit. The critical components in the cold
water basin and the cold water basin itself are provided in stainless steel. The remaining
components are protected with the BALTIBOND

Corrosion Protection System.


Note: See section Technical Resources, Material of Construction for more details on the materials described above.
Coil Configurations
Each coil is manufactured according to the
European Pressure Equipment Directive (PED)
97/23/EC (For more details, refer to the
Evaporative Condenser "Overview" section)
BAC condenser coils are standard available at a
design pressure of 23 bar, and are pneumatically
tested at 34 bar.
Standard Serpentine Coil:
The standard condensing coil is constructed of
continuous lengths of all prime surface steel,
hot-dip galvanised after fabrication (HDGAF).
Multiple Circuit Coils (Split Coils):
In general, multiple circuit coils are required
primarily on halocarbon refrigerant systems where it is common practice to maintain individual
compressor systems. Also, a circuit can be isolated to provide cooling of a water or glycol loop
for compressor jacket cooling. A wide range of multiple circuit arrangements are available.
Optional Extended Surface Coil:
Coils are available with selected rows finned at 3 to 5 fins per inch for wet/dry applications. The
coil is hot-dip galvanised after fabrication (HDGAF).
Optional Stainless Steel Coil:
Coils are available in Type 304L or 316L stainless steel for specialised applications.
Optional High Pressure Coil:
Coils are available with a design pressure of 28 bar and pneumatically tested at 40 bar. The Coil
is hot-dip galvanised after fabrication (HDGAF).
All coils are designed for low pressure drop with sloping tubes for free drainage of fluid.
Hot Dip Galvanised Coil
VXC - E 9
E
v
a
p
o
r
a
t
i
v
e

C
o
n
d
e
n
s
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Fan Drive System
The fan drive system provides the cooling air necessary to reject heat from the system to the
atmosphere. Centrifugal fans, forwardly curved, are driven by matched V-belts with taper lock
sheaves.
The Baltiguard

Drive System
The BALTIGUARD

Drive System consists of two standard single-speed fan motors and drive
assemblies. One drive assembly is sized for full speed and load, and the other is sized for
approximately 2/3 speed and consumes only 1/3 of the design kilowatt power. This configuration
allows the system to be operated like a two-speed motor, but with the reserve capacity of a standby
motor in the event of failure. As a minimum, approximately 70% capacity will be available from the
low kilowatt motor, even on a design wet-bulb day. Controls and wiring are the same, as those
required for a two-speed, two-winding motor. Significant energy savings are achieved when
operating at low speed during periods of reduced load and/or low wet-bulb temperatures.
Low Sound Operation
The low sound levels generated by BAC Products with centrifugal fans make them suitable for
most installations. For situations when one direction is particularly sound sensitive, the unit can be
oriented so that the side opposite the air inlet faces the sound-sensitive direction. Units with
centrifugal fans are also available with factory designed, tested and rated sound attenuation for
both the air inlet and discharge.
Note: For more information, please refer to the section Technical Resources, Sound Reduction Options.
Remote Sump Execution
The use of an auxiliary sump within a heated space is the most satisfactory way to protect sump
water from freezing. When the circulating pump is shut off, all the water in the water distribution, in
suspension and in the sump will drain freely to the auxiliary sump.
Note: For detailed information on the calculation of the remote sump tank, please refer to the section "Technical Resources, Selection of
Remote Sump Tank".
Baltiguard Drive System Unit with Intake and Discharge Sound
Attenuation
VXC - E 10
V
X
C
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Accessories
Ladder, Safety Cage and handrails
In the event the owner requires easy access to
the top of the unit, the unit can be furnished with
ladders extending from the base of the unit to the
top, as well as safety cages, and handrail
packages.
Note: When these access options are employed, the unit must be
equipped with steel drift eliminators.
Electric Water Level Control Package
The electric water level control replaces the
standard mechanical make-up valve when a
more precise water level control is required. This
package consists of a float switch mounted in the
basin and a solenoid activated valve in the make-
up water line. The valve is slow closing to minimize water hammer.
Extended Lubrication Lines
Extended lubrication lines with grease fittings are
available for lubrication of the fan shaft bearings.
Basin Heaters
Units exposed to below freezing ambient
temperatures require protection to prevent
freezing of the water in the cold water basin when
the unit is idle. Factory-installed heaters, which
maintain the water temperature at 4C, are a
simple and inexpensive way of providing such
protection. The heater package includes the
heaters, a thermostat and a low level cut out
switch to protect the heaters if the water level is
too low. Standard electric heaters are selected for
-18C ambient temperature.
Model No.
VXC
Heater -18C
(kW)
14-28 1 x 1,5
36-65 1 x 1,5
72-97 1 x 2,5
110-135 1 x 3
150-205 1 x 4
221-454 1 x 6
495-516 2 x 4
562-680 2 x 5
714-908 / 715-804 2 x 6
990-1032 4 x 4
Ladder and Safety Cage, Handrails around top
of Unit
Extended Lubrication Lines
VXC - E 11
E
v
a
p
o
r
a
t
i
v
e

C
o
n
d
e
n
s
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Solid Bottom Panels
Factory-installed bottom panels are required when intake air is ducted to the unit.
Discharge Hoods
Discharge hoods reduce the risk of re-circulation in tight enclosures by increasing discharge air
velocity, and can be used to elevate the unit discharge above adjacent walls to comply with layout
guidelines.
Desuperheater
Desuperheaters can be used in R-717 systems with reciprocating compressors. They increase the
capacity of the standard model and extend the dry operation capacity. They are also effective in
reducing the occurrence of visible plumes.
Steel Eliminators
Steel eliminators with Baltibond

Corrosion Protection System are available for specific


applications.
N2 Filling of the Coil
For prolonged shipment periods (ocean freight) or extended storage on site it is recommended to
charge the coil(s) with nitrogen.
Basin Sweeper Piping
Basin sweeper piping provides an effective
method of preventing sediment from collecting in
the cold water basin of the unit. A complete piping
system, including nozzles, is provided in the unit
basin for connection to side stream filtration
equipment.
Note: For more information, please refer to the section "Technical
Resources, Filtration".
1124-1360 4 x 5
1430-1608 4 x 6
S288-S350 1 x 6
S403-S504 2 x 4
S576-S700 2 x 6
S806-S1010 4 x 4
C220 - C287 1 x 6
C325 - C426 2 x 4
Model No.
VXC
Heater -18C
(kW)
Basin Sweeper Piping
VXC - E 12
V
X
C
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Engineering Data
REMARK: Do not use for construction. Refer to factory certified dimensions & weights. This brochure includes data
current at time of publication, which should be reconfirmed at the time of purchase. In the interest of product
improvement, specifications, weights and dimensions are subject to change without notice. Up-to-date engineering
data and more can be found at www.BaltimoreAircoil.com.
VXC 14 - VXC 265
* Unit normally ships in one piece.
Model
Operating
Weight
(kg)
Shipping
Weight
(kg)
Heaviest
Section
Coil
(kg)
H
(mm)
L
(mm)
W
(mm)
Air
Flow
(m
3
/s)
Fan
Motor
(kW)
Water
Flow
(l/s)
Pump
Motor
(kW)
R717
Charge
(kg)
VXC 14
VXC 18
VXC 25
VXC 28
660
740
830
900
600
670
760
830
580*
660*
480
540
2035
2245
2467
2683
914
914
914
914
1207
1207
1207
1207
2,3
2,2
2,5
2,4
(1x) 1,5
(1x) 1,5
(1x) 2,2
(1x) 2,2
2,2
2,2
2,2
2,2
(1x) 0,25
(1x) 0,25
(1x) 0,25
(1x) 0,25
9
11
15
19
VXC 36
VXC 45
VXC 52
VXC 59
VXC 65
1050
1170
1310
1330
1500
920
1030
1160
1180
1330
920*
1030*
700
700
860
2035
2245
2467
2467
2683
1829
1829
1829
1829
1829
1207
1207
1207
1207
1207
4,6
5,0
4,8
5,3
5,5
(1x) 4,0
(1x) 4,0
(1x) 4,0
(1x) 5,5
(1x) 5,5
4,7
4,7
4,7
4,7
4,7
(1x) 0,37
(1x) 0,37
(1x) 0,37
(1x) 0,37
(1x) 0,37
16
20
29
29
36
VXC 72
VXC 86
VXC 97
1810
1820
2080
1490
1500
1730
1000
1000
1200
2578
2578
2813
2737
2737
2737
1207
1207
1207
5,8
7,5
7,1
(1x) 4,0
(1x) 7,5
(1x) 7,5
7,1
7,1
7,1
(1x) 0,75
(1x) 0,75
(1x) 0,75
41
41
50
VXC 110
VXC 125
VXC 135
2240
2510
2540
1800
2050
2080
1200
1440
1440
2578
2813
2813
3658
3658
3658
1207
1207
1207
10,4
9,9
10,9
(1x) 7,5
(1x) 7,5
(1x) 11,0
9,5
9,5
9,5
(1x) 0,75
(1x) 0,75
(1x) 0,75
59
73
73
VXC 150
VXC 166
VXC 185
VXC 205
3210
3240
3670
3980
2640
2670
2950
3255
1720
1720
1980
2240
3093
3093
3328
3563
3645
3645
3645
3645
1438
1438
1438
1438
13,3
15,8
15,7
16,9
(1x) 7,5
(1x) 11,0
(1x) 11,0
(1x) 15,0
13,9
13,9
13,9
13,9
(1x) 1,5
(1x) 1,5
(1x) 1,5
(1x) 1,5
77
77
104
111
VXC 221
VXC 250
VXC 265
5860
6390
6435
4250
4770
4815
2630
3150
3150
3585
3820
3820
3550
3550
3550
2397
2397
2397
21,9
21,2
22,7
(1x) 15,0
(1x) 15,0
(1x) 18,5
19,2
19,2
19,2
(1x) 2,2
(1x) 2,2
(1x) 2,2
118
146
146
1. For VXC 14 through VXC 28: refrigerant in ND 80; 2. For VXC 14 through VXC 28: refrigerant out ND 80: 3. For VXC 36 through VXC 265:
refrigerant in ND 100; 4. For VXC 36 through VXC 265: refrigerant out ND 100; 5. Make-up; 6. Overflow; 7. Drain; 8. Access (models 14
VXC - E 13
E
v
a
p
o
r
a
t
i
v
e

C
o
n
d
e
n
s
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
VXC S288 - VXC S1010

* Pan section is the heaviest section.
Model
Operating
Weight
(kg)
Shipping
Weight
(kg)
Heaviest
Section
(coil)
(kg)
H
(mm)
L
(mm)
W
(mm)
Air
Flow
(m
3
/s)
Fan
Motor
(kW)
Water
Flow
(l/s)
Pump
Motor
(kW)
R717
Charge
(kg)
VXC S288
VXC S300
VXC S328
VXC S350
7600
7630
7705
8320
5525
5555
5630
6180
3850
3850
3850
4470
4248
4248
4248
4483
3550
3550
3550
3550
2397
2397
2397
2397
22,8
24,2
26,7
26,2
(1x) 18,5
(1x) 22,0
(1x) 30,0
(1x) 30,0
25,2
25,2
25,2
25,2
(1x) 2,2
(1x) 2,2
(1x) 2,2
(1x) 2,2
164
164
164
196
VXC S403
VXC S429
VXC S455
VXC S482
VXC S504
10225
10285
11270
11320
12500
7170
7230
8125
8175
9260
4715
4715
5710
5710
6690
4013
4013
4248
4248
4483
5385
5385
5385
5385
5385
2397
2397
2397
2397
2397
36,6
38,9
34,9
37,5
36,6
(1x) 30,0
(1x) 37,0
(1x) 30,0
(1x) 37,0
(1x) 37,0
38,5
38,5
38,5
38,5
38,5
(1x) 4
(1x) 4
(1x) 4
(1x) 4
(1x) 4
198
198
246
246
294
VXC S576
VXC S600
VXC S656
VXC S700
15120
15220
15400
16655
10880
10980
11100
12355
3840
3840
3840
4470
4248
4248
4248
4483
7226
7226
7226
7226
2397
2397
2397
2397
45,6
48,4
53,4
52,4
(2x) 18,5
(2x) 22,0
(2x) 30,0
(2x) 30,0
50,4
50,4
50,4
50,4
(2x) 2,2
(2x) 2,2
(2x) 2,2
(2x) 2,2
328
328
328
392
VXC S806
VXC S858
VXC S910
VXC S964
VXC S1010
20555
20755
22570
22770
25035
14415
14615
16420
16550
18505
5120*
5120*
5710
5710
6690
4013
4013
4248
4248
4483
10903
10903
10903
10903
10903
2397
2397
2397
2397
2397
73,2
77,8
69,8
75,0
73,2
(2x) 30,0
(2x) 37,0
(2x) 30,0
(2x) 37,0
(2x) 37,0
77,0
77,0
77,0
77,0
77,0
(2x) 4
(2x) 4
(2x) 4
(2x) 4
(2x) 4
396
396
492
492
588
1. Refrigerant in ND 100; 2. Refrigerant out ND 100; 3. Make-up ND 50; 4. Overflow ND 80; 5. Drain ND 50; 6. Access
VXC - E 14
V
X
C
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
VXC 357 - VXC 1360

* Pan Section is the heaviest section.
Model
Operating
Weight
(kg)
Shipping
Weight
(kg)
Heaviest
Section
(coil)
(kg)
H
(mm)
L
(mm)
W
(mm)
Air
Flow
(m
3
/s)
Fan
Motor
(kW)
Water
Flow
(l/s)
Pump
Motor
(kW)
R717
Charge
(kg)
VXC 357
VXC 399
VXC 454
6940
8290
9580
5300
6600
7860
3940
4730
5510
4075
4310
4545
3550
3550
3550
3000
3000
3000
34,3
31,6
34,4
(1x) 22,0
(1x) 22,0
(1x) 30,0
30,8
30,8
30,8
(1x) 4
(1x) 4
(1x) 4
180
218
250
VXC 562
VXC 620
VXC 680
11490
12680
14100
8990
10200
11530
5810
7010
8200
4075
4310
4545
5388
5388
5388
3000
3000
3000
51,2
50,0
52,0
(2x) 18,5
(2x) 18,5
(2x) 22,0
46,7
46,7
46,7
(1x) 4
(1x) 4
(1x) 4
250
350
390
VXC 714
VXC 798
VXC 908
14430
16590
19140
10600
13200
15700
3940
4730
5510
4075
4310
4545
7226
7226
7226
3000
3000
3000
68,6
63,2
68,8
(2x) 22,0
(2x) 22,0
(2x) 30,0
61,6
61,6
61,6
(2x) 4
(2x) 4
(2x) 4
360
436
500
VXC 1124
VXC 1240
VXC 1360
22740
25240
28090
17940
20380
23100
5810*
7010
8200
4075
4310
4545
10903
10903
10903
3000
3000
3000
102,4
100,1
104,0
(4x) 18,5
(4x) 18,5
(4x) 22,0
93,4
93,4
93,4
(2x) 4
(2x) 4
(2x) 4
500
700
780
1. Refrigerant in ND 100; 2. Refrigerant out ND 100; 3. Make-up; 4. Overflow ND 80; 5. Drain ND 50; 6. Access; For VXC 357 through VXC
908: make-up ND 50; For VXC 1124 through VXC 1360 Make-up ND 80.
VXC - E 15
E
v
a
p
o
r
a
t
i
v
e

C
o
n
d
e
n
s
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
VXC 495 - VXC 1608
Model
Operating
Weight
(kg)
Shipping
Weight
(kg)
Heaviest
Section
(coil)
(kg)
H
(mm)
L
(mm)
W
(mm)
Air
Flow
(m
3
/s)
Fan
Motor
(kW)
Water
Flow
(l/s)
Pump
Motor
(kW)
R717
Charge
(kg)
VXC 495
VXC 516
12040
13030
8210
9170
5610
6550
4310
4545
3550
3550
3607
3607
40,0
39,4
(1x) 37,0
(1x) 37,0
39,1
39,1
(1x) 4
(1x) 4
250
298
VXC 715
VXC 772
VXC 804
17555
17735
19290
11855
12035
13435
8310
8310
9710
4310
4310
4545
5388
5388
5388
3607
3607
3607
56,1
62,3
60,4
(2x) 22,0
(2x) 30,0
(2x) 30,0
56,8
56,8
56,8
(1x) 4
(1x) 4
(1x) 4
374
374
450
VXC 990
VXC 1032
24185
26095
16520
18280
5610
6550
4310
4545
7226
7226
3607
3607
80,0
78,8
(2x) 37,0
(2x) 37,0
78,2
78,2
(2x) 4
(2x) 4
500
596
VXC 1430
VXC 1544
VXC 1608
35200
35560
38665
23680
23770
26845
8300
8300
9710
4310
4310
4545
10903
10903
10903
3607
3607
3607
112,2
124,6
120,8
(4x) 22,0
(4x) 30,0
(4x) 30,0
113,6
113,6
113,6
(2x) 4
(2x) 4
(2x) 4
748
748
900
1. Refrigerant in ND 100; 2. Refrigerant out ND 100; 3. Make-up; 4. Overflow ND 80; 5. Drain ND 50; 6. Access. For VXC 495 through VXC
1032 : Make-up ND50; For VXC 1430 through VXC 1608: Make-up ND 80.
VXC - E 16
V
X
C
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
VXC C220 - VXC C426
General Notes
1. Standard refrigerant connection sizes are ND 100 BSP MPT inlet
and outlet (for models VXC 14 through 28 refrigerant connection
sizes are ND 80 BSP MPT), consult your local BAC representative
for size and location. Other connection sizes are available on
special order. Refrigerant connections are standard bevelled for
welding.
2. Make up, overflow, suction, drain connections and access door
can be provided on side opposite to that shown; consult your BAC
Balticare representative.
3. Unit height is indicative, for precise value refer to certified print.
4. Shipping/operating weights indicated are for units without
accessories such as sound attenuators, discharge hoods, etc.
Consult factory certified prints to obtain weight additions and the
heaviest section to be lifted.
5. The drawings for units with only one spray pump show the
standard right hand arrangement, which has the air inlet side on
the right when facing the connection end. Left hand arrangement
can be furnished by special order.
6. Coil, overflow, make-up and spray water connections are always
located on the same end of the unit. For double pump units an
additional set of coil connections and an additional overflow
connection will be installed on the other end of the unit.
7. On models VXC 14 through VXC 135 access doors are located at
the opposite of the air inlet side, ensure sufficient space for entry
when positioning these units.
8. For indoor applications of evaporative condensers, the room may
be used as a plenum with ductwork attached to the discharge only.
If inlet ductwork is required, an enclosed fan section must be
specified; consult your BAC representative for details.
9. Fan kW is at 0 Pa ESP. To operate against external static pressure
up to 125 Pa, increase each fan motor one size.
10.Refrigerant charge listed is R 717 operating charge. To determine
operating charge of R22 refrigerants, multiply by: 1,93. For
R134A, multiply by: 1,98.
11.For dry operation, standard motors must be increased one size to
avoid motor overloading. Extended surface coils are available to
vastly increase dry capacity without motor size increase. Consult
your local BAC Balticare representative for selection and pricing.
12.Models VXC 357-454, VXC 562-380, VXC 495-516 and VXC
715-804 have only 1 coil casing section and one or two fan
motors. Fan cycling results in only on-off operation. On these units
all fans need to operate simultaneously.
13.Models VXC 714-907, VXC 1124-1360, VXC 990-1032 and VXC
1430-1608 have 2 coil casing sections and one or two fan motors
per coil casing section. Fan cycling results in only on-off operation.
On these units all fans need to operate simultaneously per coil
casing section.
Model
Operating
Weight
(kg)
Shipping
Weight
(kg)
Heaviest
Section
(coil)
(kg)
H
(mm)
L
(mm)
W
(mm)
Air
Flow
(m
3
/s)
Fan
Motor
(kW)
Water
Flow
(l/s)
Pump
Motor
(kW)
R717
Charge
(kg)
VXC C220
VXC C250
VXC C265
VXC C287
5940
6415
6440
7450
4250
4770
4795
5315
2630
3150
3150
3665
3585
3820
3820
4055
3550
3550
3550
3550
2245
2245
2245
2245
20,6
20,1
21,7
22,5
(1x) 15,0
(1x) 15,0
(1x) 18,5
(1x) 22,0
19,2
19,2
19,2
19,2
(1x) 2,2
(1x) 2,2
(1x) 2,2
(1x) 2,2
118
146
146
154
VXC C325
VXC C340
VXC C380
VXC C408
VXC C426
8730
8735
9430
9470
10260
6135
6145
6945
7030
7830
3885
3885
4685
4685
5485
3585
3585
3820
3820
4055
5385
5385
5385
5385
5385
2245
2245
2245
2245
2245
31,5
33,5
32,2
35,5
34,7
(1x) 18,5
(1x) 22,0
(1x) 22,0
(1x) 30,0
(1x) 30,0
29,0
29,0
29,0
29,0
29,0
(1x) 4
(1x) 4
(1x) 4
(1x) 4
(1x) 4
156
156
196
196
234
1. Refrigerant in ND 100; 2. Refrigerant out ND 100; 3. Make-up ND 50; 4. Overflow ND 80; 5. Drain ND 50; 6. Access Fan covers are shipped
loose.
VXC - E 17
E
v
a
p
o
r
a
t
i
v
e

C
o
n
d
e
n
s
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Sound Attenuation
XA + XB Sound Attenuation
XC Sound Attenuation
1. Access Door; L1= Intake Attenuator Length; L2= Discharge Attenuator Length; W= Unit Width; H.= Unit Height (see Engineering Data).
1. Access Door; L1= Intake Attenuator Length; L2= Discharge Attenuator Length; W= Unit Width; H.= Unit Height (see Engineering Data).
VXC - E 18
V
X
C
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
(1)
VXC 14, VXC 18, VXC-36 and VXC-45 + Attenuator are shipped in 3 pieces
(2)
Intake Attenuator: Access opening is 775 mm high, 405 mm wide and is located at each end of the unit. Discharge Attenuator : Access opening
is 405 mm high, 1170 mm wide and is located at blank off side of the unit (VXC14-28 has 650 mm width)
Remote Sump Data
Refer to the "Technical Resources" section "Selection of Remote Sump" for Remote Sump Data.
VXC
Unit +
Atten.
# pieces
shipped
# Access doors
(2)
XA, XB, XC
Dimensions
(mm)
Weights
(kg)
W2 H1 W1 L1 L2 Intake
Solid
Bottom
Discharge Total
XA, XB,
XC
Disch.
Att.
Int.
Att.
XA, XB XC XA, XB, XC XA XB XC XA XB XC XA XB XC
14 - 28 4
(1)
1 2 2352 N.A. 1090 1030 890 902 110 130 N.A. 30 130 150 N.A. 270 310 N.A.
36 - 65 4
(1)
1 2 2352 N.A. 1090 1030 1800 1816 175 220 N.A. 50 175 220 N.A. 400 490 N.A.
72 - 97 4 1 2 2352 N.A. 1090 1030 2710 2731 230 300 N.A. 70 280 350 N.A. 580 720 N.A.
110 - 135 4 1 2 2352 N.A. 1090 1030 3635 3645 300 370 830 100 360 420 N.A. 760 890 N.A.
150 - 205 4 1 2 2583 3728 1600 1420 3635 3645 380 480 1080 120 440 520 1070 940 1120 2270
221 - 265 4 1 2 3542 4687 2070 1955 3525 3645 500 630 1420 190 530 650 1330 1220 1470 2940
S288 - S350 4 1 2 3542 4687 2070 2365 3525 3645 500 630 1420 190 660 800 1640 1350 1620 3250
S403 - S504 4 2 2 3542 4687 2070 2365 5365 5480 660 860 1970 300 830 1090 2240 1790 2250 4510
S576 - S700 7 2 2 3542 4687 2070 2365 7050 7322 1000 1260 2840 380 1320 1600 3280 2700 3240 6500
S806 -
S1010
7 4 2 3542 4687 2070 2365 10730 10998 1320 1720 3940 600 1660 2180 4480 3580 4500 9020
357 - 454 4 1 2 4145 5290 2560 2965 3525 3645 560 710 1620 230 710 880 1820 1500 1820 3670
562 - 680 4 2 2 4145 5290 2560 2965 5365 5480 730 980 2240 350 900 1210 2490 1980 2540 5080
714 - 908 7 2 2 4145 5290 2560 2965 7050 7322 1120 1420 3240 460 1420 1760 3640 3000 3640 7340
1124 - 1360 7 4 2 4145 5290 2560 2965 10730 10994 1460 1960 4480 700 1800 2420 4980 3960 5080 10160
495 - 516 4 1 2 4752 5897 2560 3575 3525 3645 560 710 1620 280 810 1030 2130 1650 2020 4030
715 - 804 4 2 2 4752 5897 2560 3575 5365 5480 730 980 2240 420 1020 1410 2920 2170 2810 5580
990 - 1032 7 2 2 4752 5897 2560 3575 7050 7322 1120 1420 3240 560 1620 2060 4260 3300 4040 8060
1430 - 1608 7 4 2 4752 5897 2560 3575 10730 10994 1460 1960 4480 840 2040 2820 5840 4340 5620 11160
VXC - E 19
E
v
a
p
o
r
a
t
i
v
e

C
o
n
d
e
n
s
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Structural Support
REMARK: Do not use for construction. Refer to factory certified dimensions & weights. This brochure includes data
current at time of publication, which should be reconfirmed at the time of purchase. In the interest of product
improvement, specifications, weights and dimensions are subject to change without notice. Up-to-date engineering
data and more can be found at www.BaltimoreAircoil.com.
The recommended support arrangement for units consists of parallel I-beams running the full length of the unit, spaced as shown in the following
drawing. Besides providing adequate support, the steel also serves to raise the unit above any solid foundation to ensure access to the bottom
of the unit. To support units in an alternate steel support arrangement, consult your BAC Balticare Representative.
Units without Sound Attenuation
Model

A
Unit Length
(mm)
B
Unit width
(mm)
C
Center dis.
Length
(mm)
D
Center dis.
Width
(mm)
E
(mm)
F
(mm)
G
(mm)
X
Max. Deflection
(mm)
Mounting
holes
VXC 14-28 914 1207 750 1153 - - - 2 4
VXC 36-65 1829 1207 1664 1153 - - - 5 4
VXC 72-97 2737 1207 2572 1153 - - - 8 4
VXC 110-135 3658 1207 3492 1153 - - - 10 4
VXC 150-205 3645 1438 3492 1378 - - - 10 4
VXC 221-265 3550 2397 3238 2397 - - - 10 4
VXC S288-S350 3550 2397 3238 2327 - - - 10 4
VXC S403-S504 5385 2397 5074 2327 2486 102 - 13 8
VXC S576-S700 7226 2397 6914 2327 3238 438 - 13 8
1. Outline of Unit; 2. Mounting holes 22 mm, 3. Unit; 4. Air Intake.
VXC - E 20
V
X
C
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Units with Sound Attenuation
Notes:
1. The recommended support arrangement for VX units consists of
parallel I-beams extending the full length of the unit. Supports and
anchor bolts are to be designed and furnished by others.
2. All supporting beams are to be flush and level at top and must be
oriented relative to gage line as shown.
3. Recommended design loads for each unit support beam should
be 70% of the total unit operating weight applied as a uniform load
to each of the unit beams. The support beam(s) for the optional
intake attenuator(s) needs to carry attenuator only, uniform load of
250 kg/m. Beams should be designed in accordance with
standard structural practice. For the maximum allowable
deflection of beams under the unit refer to above table.
4. All mounting holes have a diameter of 22 mm at the locations
shown.
5. If vibration isolators are used, a rail or channel must be provided
between the unit (and optional attenuator) and the isolators to
provide continuous unit support. Additionally the support beams
must be designed to accommodate the overall length and
mounting hole location of the isolators that may differ from those
of the unit. Refer to vibration isolator drawings for these data.
VXC S806-S1010 10903 2397 10586 2327 2486 102 438 13 16
VXC 357-454 3550 3000 3238 2934 - - - 10 4
VXC 562-680 5388 3000 5074 2934 2486 102 - 13 8
VXC 714-908 7226 3000 6914 2934 3238 438 - 13 8
VXC 1124-1360 10903 3000 10586 2934 2486 102 438 13 16
VXC 495-516 3550 3607 3238 3537 - - - 10 4
VXC 715-804 5388 3607 5074 3537 2486 102 - 13 8
VXC 990-1032 7226 3607 6914 3537 3238 438 - 13 8
VXC 1430-1608 10903 3607 10586 3537 2486 102 438 13 16
VXC C220-C287 3550 2245 3238 2175 - - - 10 4
VXC C325-C426 5385 2245 5074 2175 2486 102 - 13 8
Model

A
Unit Length
(mm)
B
Unit width
(mm)
C
Center dis.
Length
(mm)
D
Center dis.
Width
(mm)
E
(mm)
F
(mm)
G
(mm)
X
Max. Deflection
(mm)
Mounting
holes
1. Outline of Unit; 2. Mounting Holes 22 mm; 3. Outline of attenuator (optional XA or XB);4. Support Channel attached to optional XA or XB
attenuator; 5.+3. Outline of Attenuator (optional XC); 6.+4. Support Channels attached to optional XC attenuator; 7. Unit; 8. Sound Attenuator;
9. Air Intake.
VXC - E 21
E
v
a
p
o
r
a
t
i
v
e

C
o
n
d
e
n
s
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Engineering Specifications
General
A. General: Furnish and install, _____ factory assembled
evaporative condenser(s) of counterflow blow-through design, with
single side entry, conforming in all aspects to the specifications and
schedule as shown on the plans.
B. Capacity: The evaporative condenser(s) shall be warranted by the
manufacturer to have condensing capacity of _____ kW heat
rejection, operating with ____ refrigerant and ___C condensing
temperature and ___C entering wet-bulb temperature.
C. Warranty: The manufacturers standard equipment warranty shall
be for a period of one year from the date of startup or eighteen months
from the date of shipment, whichever ends first.
D. Quality Assurance: The manufacture shall have Management
System certified by an accredited registrar as complying with the
requirements of ISO-9001:2000 to ensure consistent quality of
products and services.
Products
1.0 Evaporative Condenser Materials and Components
General: All steel panels and structural elements shall be
constructed from heavy-gauge, Z600 hot-dip galvanized steel, with
cut edges given a protective coating of zinc-rich compound.
2.0 Coil Casing Assembly
The evaporative condenser shall include a coil casing section
consisting of a refrigerant condensing coil, a spray water distribution
system, and drift eliminators as indicated by the manufacturer.
1. The refrigerant condensing coil shall be fabricated of all prime
surface steel at the manufacturers own facility, and hot-dip
galvanized after fabrication.
a. The refrigerant condensing coil shall be tested at 34 bar air
pressure under water.
b.The refrigerant condensing coil shall be designed for low pressure
drop with sloping tubes for free drainage of liquid refrigerant.
c. The refrigerant condensing coil shall be according to European
Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC.
2. Water shall be distributed evenly over the coil at a minimum flow
rate sufficient to ensure complete wetting of the coil at all times by
large-diameter, non-clog, 360 plastic distribution nozzles spaced
across the coil face area in plastic material spray branches. Nozzles
shall utilize a two-stage diffusion pattern to provide overlapping,
umbrella spray patterns that create multiple intersection points with
adjacent nozzles.
Spray branches and nozzles shall be held in place by snap-in rubber
grommets, allowing quick removal of individual nozzles or complete
branches for cleaning or flushing.
3. Removable plastic material drift eliminators shall be positioned to
prevent moisture from leaving the evaporative condenser and
incorporate a minimum of three (3) changes in air direction.
3.0 Pan Assembly
The evaporative condenser shall include a pan assembly consisting
of cold water basin with pump assembly and fan assemblies with
single side air inlet and integral air plenum.
1. The cold water basin shall include: a drain/clean-out connection; a
steel strainer; a brass make-up valve; overflow connection; and a
water recirculation pump assembly.
a. Drain/cleanout connection shall be located in the cold water basin
to allow removal of recirculating water.
b. Lift-out steel strainer shall be supplied with perforated openings
sized smaller than the water distribution nozzle orifices and an
integral anti-vortexing hood to prevent air entrainment.
c. Brass make-up valve shall be supplied with a large-diameter plastic
float arranged for easy adjustment.
d. Overflow connection shall be provided in the cold water basin to
protect against recirculating water spillage.
e. Water recirculation pump shall be a close-coupled, bronze-fitted
centrifugal pump equipped with a mechanical seal, mounted on the
basin and piped from the suction strainer to the water distribution
system.
i. The pump shall be installed so that it may drain freely when the
basin is drained.
ii. The pump assembly shall include an integral metering valve and
bleed line to control the bleed rate from the pump discharge to the
overflow connection.
iii. The pump motor shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) type
suitable for _____ V, ____ phase______ Hz electrical service.
f. On installations requiring a remote sump, the evaporative
condenser shall be modified to accommodate the use of an
independent sump and pump for recirculating water (by others)
i. The recirculating water pump, steel strainer, make-up valve, and
integral bleed line assemblies shall be omitted from the evaporative
condenser scope of supply.
ii. The evaporative condenser shall be supplied with a cold water
basin outlet sized and located as indicated on the drawings for gravity
drain to the remote sump.
iii. The water distribution system shall have an operating pressure of
14 kPa at the evaporative condenser spray water inlet connection.
2. Air shall enter the evaporative condenser through the centrifugal
fan assemblies and integral air plenum.
a. Fans and motors shall be located in the dry entering airstream to
provide greater reliability and ease of maintenance.
b. Fan housings shall have curved inlet rings for efficient air entry and
rectangular discharge cowls that extend into the pan to increase fan
efficiency and prevent water from entering the fans.
c. Fan(s) shall be heavy-duty, centrifugal flow type mounted on a
steel shaft with heavy-duty, self-aligning, relubricatable bearings with
cast iron housings, designed for a minimum L10 life of 40 000 hours.
d. Fan motor(s) shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) type,
suitable for _____ V, ____ phase, ______ Hz electrical service and
shall be mounted on an easily adjusted, heavy-duty motor base.
Special moisture protection shall be furnished on the windings,
shafts, and bearings.
VXC - E 22
V
X
C
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
4.0 Optional Equipment Specifications
A. Evaporative condenser shall be provided with basin heaters to
prevent freezing of the water in the cold water basin when the
evaporative condenser is idle.
1. The basin heaters shall be selected to maintain +4C basin water
temperature at -18C ambient temperature.
2. Basin heaters shall be electric immersion type controlled by a
remote thermostat with the sensing bulb located in the basin water.
3. Basin heaters shall be provided with a factory-installed low water
level cutout switch to prevent heater operation unless the heater
elements are fully submerged.
B. Evaporative condenser shall be provided with a factory
assembled, field-installed access ladder and handrails to provide
access to the top of the evaporative condenser.
C. Evaporative condenser shall be supplied with the Baltiguard Drive
System to improve part load efficiency and provide system
redundancy in case of a motor failure.
1. The Baltiguard Drive System shall include the main fan motor as
listed in the manufacturers published literature and a pony motor
sized for approximately 1/3 of design kW and 2/3 of design fan speed
to optimize energy savings during non-design load conditions.
5.0 Sound
5.1 Sound Level: To maintain the quality of the local environment,
the maximum sound pressure levels (dB) measured 15 m from the
condenser operating at full fan speed shall not exceed the sound
levels detailed below.
Location 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 dB(A)
Discharge
Air Inlet
End
Back
Evaporative Condensers
VCL - E 1
E
v
a
p
o
r
a
t
i
v
e

C
o
n
d
e
n
s
e
r
s
VCL
Product Detail
VCL Evaporative Condensers ................................................................. E2
Benefits ....................................................................................................... E4
Construction Details .................................................................................. E6
Custom Features and Options .................................................................. E7
Accessories ................................................................................................. E9
Engineering Data ..................................................................................... E10
Structural Support .................................................................................. E14
Engineering Specifications ..................................................................... E15
VCL - E 2
V
C
L
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
VCL Evaporative Condensers
Capacity
Single Model Capacity:
160 kW 1290 Nominal R717 kWs
General Description
VCL Evaporative Condensers deliver fully rated thermal performance over a wide range of heat
rejection and temperature requirements for various refrigerants. VCL models can be installed
indoors, minimize sound levels, and are available to accommodate limited ceiling or enclosure
heights. The Series VL minimizes installation costs, provides year-round operating reliability, and
is ideal for sound sensitive applications.
Key Features
Suitable for indoor and outdoor installations
Suitable for locations with limited ceiling or enclosure heights and roof top installations
Low sound
Single side air inlet
Low energy consumption
Low installed cost
Easy maintenance
Reliable year-round operation
Long service life
PED 97/23/EC coil design
VCL - E 3
E
v
a
p
o
r
a
t
i
v
e

C
o
n
d
e
n
s
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
VCL - E 4
V
C
L
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Benefits
Installation and Application Flexibility
Indoor Installations Centrifugal fans can
overcome the static pressure imposed by
external ductwork, allowing this type of unit to
be installed indoors.
Low Profile Models The fan section of low
profile units is adjacent to the casing section to
yield models suitable for use in height sensitive
installations. Low profile models are available
in heights of 1585 mm up to 2560 mm.
Low Sound
Centrifugal Fan - Centrifugal fans have
inherently low sound characteristics.
Single Side Air Inlet - Particularly sound-
sensitive areas can be accommodated by
facing the quiet side (back panel) to the sound-
sensitive direction.
Low Energy Consumption
Evaporative Cooling Equipment minimizes
the energy consumption of the entire system
because it provides lower operating
temperatures. The owner saves money while
conserving natural resources and reducing
environmental impact.
Evaporative Condensers provide lower
condensing temperatures and can offer
significant kW savings over conventional air-
cooled and water-cooled condensing systems.
Low Installed Cost
Support All models mount directly on two
parallel I-beams (supplied by others) and ship
complete with motors and drives, factory-
installed and aligned.
Modular Design All models without intake or
discharge accessories ship in one piece to
minimize field installation time and lifting time.
Easy Maintenance
Internal Access - The interior of the unit is easily accessible for adjusting the float valve,
cleaning the strainer or flushing the basin.
Low profile unit shown in contrast to a
standard unit
Modular Design
VCL - E 5
E
v
a
p
o
r
a
t
i
v
e

C
o
n
d
e
n
s
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Reliable Year-Round Operation
V-Belt Drive The fans, motor, and drive system are located outside of the moist discharge
airstream, protecting them from moisture, condensation and icing hence allowing a safe year-
round operation.
Long Service Life
Materials of Construction Various materials are available to meet the corrosion resistance,
unit operating life, and budgetary requirements of any project.
Note: For more information, please refer to the section Technical Resources, Materials of Construction.
The interior of the unit is easily accessible V-Belt Drive for Series VL
VCL - E 6
V
C
L
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Construction Details
1. Heavy Duty Construction
Z600 hot-dip galvanized steel panels
2. Water Distribution System
Plastic spray header and branches
Large orifice, non-clog nozzles
Grommetted for easy maintenance
3. Coil
Coil according to European Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC
Continuous serpentine, steel tubing
Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication (HDGAF)
Pneumatically tested at 34 bar standard coil
Sloped tubes for free drainage of fluid
4. Drift Eliminators
UV resistant non-corrosive material, impervious to rot, decay and
biological attack
Three distinct changes in air direction to reduce drift loss significantly
Assembled in easy to handle sections, which can be removed for
access to the equipment interior
5. Fan Drive System
V-belt drive
Heavy-duty bearings and fan motor
6. Centrifugal Fan(s)
Quiet Operation
7. Recirculating Spray Pump
Close coupled, bronze fitted centrifugal pump
Totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) motor
Bleed line with metering valve installed from pump discharge to
overflow
8. Access Door
Circular access door
9. Strainer (Not Shown)
Anti-vortex design to prevent air entrainment
VCL - E 7
E
v
a
p
o
r
a
t
i
v
e

C
o
n
d
e
n
s
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Custom Features and Options
Construction Options
Standard Construction:
Steel panels and structural elements are constructed of Z600 heavy-gauge hot-dip galvanized
steel protected with the Baltiplus Corrosion Protection on the outside of the unit.
Optional BALTIBOND

Corrosion Protection System:


The BALTIBOND

Corrosion Protection System, a hybrid polymer coating used to extend


equipment life, is applied before assembly to all hot-dip galvanized steel components of the
unit.
Optional Stainless Steel Construction:
Steel panels and structural elements are constructed of stainless steel either type 304 or 316.
Optional Water-Contact Stainless Steel Cold Water Basin:
A cost-effective alternative to an all stainless steel unit. The critical components in the cold
water basin and the cold water basin itself are provided in stainless steel. The remaining
components are protected with the BALTIBOND

Corrosion Protection System.


Note: See section Technical Resources, Material of Construction for more details on the materials described above.
Coil Configurations
Each coil is manufactured according to the European Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) 97/23/
EC (For more details, refer to the Evaporative Condenser "Overview" section)
BAC condenser coils are standard available at a design pressure of 23 bar, and are pneumatically
tested at 34 bar.
Standard Serpentine Coil:
The standard condensing coil is constructed of continuous lengths of all prime surface steel,
hot-dip galvanised after fabrication (HDGAF).
Multiple Circuit Coils (Split Coils):
In general, multiple circuit coils are required primarily on halocarbon refrigerant systems where
it is common practice to maintain individual compressor systems. Also, a circuit can be isolated
to provide cooling of a water or glycol loop for compressor jacket cooling. A wide range of
multiple circuit arrangements are available.
Optional Extended Surface Coil:
Coils are available with selected rows finned at 3 to 5 fins per inch for wet/dry applications. The
coil is hot-dip galvanised after fabrication (HDGAF).
Optional Stainless Steel Coil:
Coils are available in Type 304L or 316L stainless steel for specialised applications.
Optional High Pressure Coil:
Coils are available with a design pressure of 28 bar and pneumatically tested at 40 bar. The Coil
is hot-dip galvanised after fabrication (HDGAF).
All coils are designed for low pressure drop with sloping tubes for free drainage of fluid.
VCL - E 8
V
C
L
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Fan Drive System
The fan drive system provides the cooling air necessary to reject heat from the system to the
atmosphere. Centrifugal fans, forwardly curved, are driven by matched V-belts with taper lock
sheaves.
Baltiguard

Drive System
The BALTIGUARD

Drive System consists of two standard single-speed fan motors and drive
assemblies. One drive assembly is sized for full speed and load, and the other is sized for
approximately 2/3 speed and consumes only 1/3 of the design kilowatt power. This configuration
allows the system to be operated like a two-speed motor, but with the reserve capacity of a standby
motor in the event of failure. As a minimum, approximately 70% capacity will be available from the
low kilowatt motor, even on a design wet-bulb day. Controls and wiring are the same, as those
required for a two-speed, two-winding motor. Significant energy savings are achieved when
operating at low speed during periods of reduced load and/or low wet-bulb temperatures.
Low Sound Operation
The low sound levels generated by BAC Products with centrifugal fans make them suitable for
most installations. For situations when one direction is particularly sound sensitive, the unit can be
oriented so that the side opposite the air inlet faces the sound-sensitive direction. Units with
centrifugal fans are also available with factory designed, tested and rated sound attenuation for
both the air inlet and discharge.
Note: For more information, please refer to the section Technical Resources, Sound Reduction Options.
Remote Sump
The use of an auxiliary sump within a heated space is the most satisfactory way to protect sump
water from freezing. When the circulating pump is shut off, all the water in the water distribution, in
suspension and in the sump will drain freely to the auxiliary sump.
Note: For detailed information on the calculation of the remote sump tank, please refer to the section "Technical Resources, Selection of
Remote Sump Tank".
Baltiguard

Drive System Unit with Sound Attenuation


VCL - E 9
E
v
a
p
o
r
a
t
i
v
e

C
o
n
d
e
n
s
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Accessories
Electric Water Level Control Package
The electric water level control replaces the standard mechanical make-up valve when a more
precise water level control is required. This package consists of a float switch mounted in the basin
and a solenoid activated valve in the make-up water line. The valve is slow closing to minimize
water hammer.
Extended Lubrication Lines
Extended lubrication lines with grease fittings are available for lubrication of the fan shaft bearings.
Basin Heaters
Units exposed to below freezing ambient temperatures require protection to prevent freezing of the
water in the cold water basin when the unit is idle. Factory-installed heaters, which maintain the
water temperature at 4C, are a simple and inexpensive way of providing such protection. The
heater package includes the heaters, a thermostat and a low level cut out switch to protect the
heaters if the water level is too low. Standard electric heaters are selected for -18C ambient
temperature.
N2 Filling of the Coil
For prolonged shipment periods (ocean freight) or extended storage on site it is recommended to
charge the coil(s) with nitrogen.
Desuperheater
Desuperheaters can be used in R-717 systems with reciprocating compressors. They increase the
capacity of the standard model and extend the dry operation capacity. They are also effective in
reducing the occurrence of visible plumes.
Basin Sweeper Piping
Basin sweeper piping provides an effective method of preventing sediment from collecting in the
cold water basin of the unit. A complete piping system, including nozzles, is provided in the unit
basin for connection to side stream filtration equipment.
Note: For more information, please refer to the section "Technical Resources, Filtration".
Steel Eliminators
Steel eliminators with Baltibond

Corrosion Protection System are available for specific


applications.
Model No.
VCL
Heaters -18C
(kW)
VCL 042 - 079
VCL 084 - 119
1 x 3
1 x 4
VCL 131
VCL 133
VCL 140 - 159
1 x 5
1 x 4
1 x 5
VCL 167-235
VCL 239 - 257
VCL 258
VCL 285 - 321
2 x 4
2 x 5
2 x 4
2 x 5
VCL - E 10
V
C
L
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Engineering Data
REMARK: Do not use for construction. Refer to factory certified dimensions & weights. This brochure includes data
current at time of publication, which should be reconfirmed at the time of purchase. In the interest of product
improvement, specifications, weights and dimensions are subject to change without notice. Up-to-date engineering
data and more can be found at www.BaltimoreAircoil.com.
VCL 042 H - VCL 159 M
Model
VCL
Operating
Weight
(kg)
Shipping
Weight
(kg)
H
(mm)
L1
(mm)
L2
(mm)
W
(mm)
Air
Flow
(m
3
/s)
Fan
Motor
(kW)
Water
Flow
(l/s)
Pump
Motor
(kW)
R-717
Charge
(kg)
VCL042-H
VCL048-G
VCL054-H
VCL058-G
VCL065-H
VCL071-J
VCL073-H
VCL079-J
1610
1800
1810
1990
2005
2025
2190
2220
1100
1270
1280
1440
1460
1490
1640
1670
1585
1855
1855
2015
2015
2015
2230
2230
3350
3350
3350
3350
3350
3350
3350
3350
1820
1820
1820
1820
1820
1820
1820
1820
1250
1250
1250
1250
1250
1250
1250
1250
7,9
6,7
7,6
6,4
7,4
8,1
7,2
7,9
(1x) 4,0
(1x) 2,2
(1x) 4,0
(1x) 2,2
(1x) 4,0
(1x) 5,5
(1x) 4,0
(1x) 5,5
5,9
5,9
5,9
5,9
5,9
5,9
5,9
5,9
(1x) 0,55
(1x) 0,55
(1x) 0,55
(1x) 0,55
(1x) 0,55
(1x) 0,55
(1x) 0,55
(1x) 0,55
20
28
28
38
38
38
46
46
VCL084-K
VCL096-J
VCL102-K
VCL111-L
VCL115-K
VCL119-M
VCL133-M
2530
2810
2820
2840
3090
2845
3120
1750
2010
2020
2080
2280
2090
2350
1855
2090
2090
2090
2350
2090
2350
4560
4560
4560
4560
4560
4560
4560
2730
2730
2730
2730
2730
2730
2730
1250
1250
1250
1250
1250
1250
1250
11,4
10,2
11,2
12,3
10,8
12,4
13,0
(1x) 7,5
(1x) 5,5
(1x) 7,5
(1x) 11
(1x) 7,5
(1x) 15
(1x) 15
9,0
9,0
9,0
9,0
9,0
9,0
9,0
(1x) 0,75
(1x) 0,75
(1x) 0,75
(1x) 0,75
(1x) 0,75
(1x) 0,75
(1x) 0,75
42
55
55
55
72
55
72
VCL131-L
VCL140-M
VCL148-L
VCL159-M
3560
3570
3930
3940
2490
2500
2830
2840
2090
2090
2350
2350
5480
5480
5480
5480
3650
3650
3650
3650
1250
1250
1250
1250
13,6
14,8
13,4
14,6
(1x) 11
(1x) 15
(1x) 11
(1x) 15
12,1
12,1
12,1
12,1
(1x) 1,1
(1x) 1,1
(1x) 1,1
(1x) 1,1
74
74
92
92
1. Refrigerant in ND 100; 2. Refrigerant out ND 100; 3. Access; 4. Make-up ND 25; 5. Overflow: ND 50 on VCL 042-119 & 133, ND 80 on VCL
131 & 140-159; 6. Drain ND 50; 7. Spray Pump; 8. Fan Motor.
VCL - E 11
E
v
a
p
o
r
a
t
i
v
e

C
o
n
d
e
n
s
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
VCL 167 K - VCL 321 P
General Notes
1. All models are single coil section units. Fan cycling results only in
on-off operation. For additional steps of control, the Baltiguard

Drive System and two-speed fan motors are available. More


precise capacity control can be obtained with modulating fan
discharge dampers.
2. Make up, overflow, suction, drain connections and access door
can be provided on side opposite to that shown; consult your BAC
representative.
3. Unit height is indicative, for precise value refer to certified print.
4. Shipping/operating weights indicated are for units without
accessories such as sound attenuators, discharge hoods, etc.
Consult factory certified prints to obtain weight additions and the
heaviest section to be lifted.
5. For indoor applications of evaporative condensers, the room may
be used as a plenum with ductwork attached to the discharge only.
If inlet ductwork is required, an enclosed fan section must be
specified; consult your BAC representative for details.
6. Fan kW is at 0 Pa ESP. To operate against external static pressure
up to 125 Pa, increase each fan motor one size.
7. Refrigerant charge listed is R 717 operating charge. To determine
operating charge of R22 refrigerants, multiply by: 1,93. For
R134A, multiply by: 1,98.
8. Refrigerant connections are standard bevelled for welding.
Model
VCL
Operating
Weight
(kg)
Shipping
Weight
(kg)
H
(mm)
L1
(mm)
L2
(mm)
W
(mm)
Air
Flow
(m
3
/s)
Fan
Motor
(kW)
Water
Flow
(l/s)
Pump
Motor
(kW)
R-717
Charge
(kg)
VCL167-K
VCL171-N
VCL185-L
VCL208-N
VCL209-L
VCL219-L
VCL235-N
VCL258-O
5260
4740
5290
5310
5860
6420
5880
6570
3650
3170
3680
3700
4210
4750
4240
4790
2090
1855
2090
2090
2350
2560
2350
2560
4560
4560
4560
4560
4560
4560
4560
4560
2730
2730
2730
2730
2730
2730
2730
2730
2400
2400
2400
2400
2400
2400
2400
2400
17,4
23,3
19,6
22,8
19,3
18,9
22,3
23,0
(1x) 7,5
(1x) 18,5
(1x) 11,0
(1x) 18,5
(1x) 11,0
(1x) 11,0
(1x) 18,5
(1x) 22,0
17,9
17,9
17,9
17,9
17,9
17,9
17,9
17,9
(1x) 1,1
(1x) 1,1
(1x) 1,1
(1x) 1,1
(1x) 1,1
(1x) 1,1
(1x) 1,1
(1x) 1,1
110
84
110
110
144
166
144
166
VCL239-L
VCL257-M
VCL285-O
VCL286-N
VCL299-O
VCL321-P
7270
7280
7300
7990
8010
8110
5030
5040
5060
5690
5710
5810
2350
2350
2350
2560
2560
2560
5480
5480
5480
5480
5480
5480
3650
3650
3650
3650
3650
3650
2400
2400
2400
2400
2400
2400
20,7
22,6
25,6
23,9
25,3
27,5
(1x) 11,0
(1x) 15,0
(1x) 22,0
(1x) 18,5
(1x) 22,0
(1x) 30,0
24,2
24,2
24,2
24,2
24,2
24,2
(1x) 2,2
(1x) 2,2
(1x) 2,2
(1x) 2,2
(1x) 2,2
(1x) 2,2
184
184
184
220
220
220
1. Refrigerant in ND 100; 2. Refrigerant out ND 100; 3. Access; 4. Make-up ND 50; 5. Overflow: ND 80. 6. Drain ND 50; 7. Spray Pump; 8. Fan
Motor.
VCL - E 12
V
C
L
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Sound Attenuation
HS Horizontal Intake Sound Attenuation

HD Horizontal Intake Sound Attenuation
1.Discharge attenuator, 2. Access Door, 3. Intake Attenuator; W & H = Unit Dimensions (See Engineering Data).
1.Discharge attenuator, 2. Access Door, 3. Intake Attenuator; W & H = Unit Dimensions (See Engineering Data).
VCL - E 13
E
v
a
p
o
r
a
t
i
v
e

C
o
n
d
e
n
s
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
VS Vertical Intake Sound Attenuation
Note: All units with HS, VS or HD attenuator ship in 2 pieces.
Remote Sump Data
Refer to the "Technical Resources" section "Selection of Remote Sump" for Remote Sump Data.
Model
No
Dimensions (mm) Maximum Weight (kg)
L2 L1 Intake Attenuator Discharge Attenuator Total
HS HD VS
HS,HD,V
S
HS HD VS HS HD VS HS HD VS
VCL 042-079 2390 3125 2010 1820 430 625 548 210 230 192 640 855 740
VCL 084-133 2640 3375 2010 2730 465 660 541 295 315 264 760 975 805
VCL 131-159 2640 3375 2010 3650 465 660 566 365 385 334 830 1045 900
VCL 167-258 2640 3375 2010 2730 665 980 756 465 500 419 1130 1480 1175
VCL 239-321 2640 3375 2010 3650 665 980 761 565 605 529 1230 1585 1290
1.Discharge attenuator, 2. Access Door, 3. Intake Attenuator, 4. Plenum; W & H = Unit Dimensions (See Engineering Data).
VCL - E 14
V
C
L
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Structural Support
REMARK: Do not use for construction. Refer to factory certified dimensions & weights. This brochure includes data
current at time of publication, which should be reconfirmed at the time of purchase. In the interest of product
improvement, specifications, weights and dimensions are subject to change without notice. Up-to-date engineering
data and more can be found at www.BaltimoreAircoil.com.
The recommended support arrangement for units consists of parallel I-beams running the full length of the unit, spaced as shown in the following
drawing. Besides providing adequate support, the steel also serves to raise the unit above any solid foundation to ensure access to the bottom
of the unit. To support units in an alternate steel support arrangement, consult your BAC Balticare Representative.
Units with and without Sound Attenuation
Notes:
1. The recommended support arrangement for these units consists
of two parallel I-beams extending the full length of the unit.
Supports and anchor bolts are to be designed and furnished by
others.
2. All supporting beams are to be flush and level at top and must be
oriented relative to gage line as shown.
3. Recommended design loads for each unit support beam should
be 70% of the total unit operating weight applied as a uniform load
to each of the unit beams. Beams should be designed in
accordance with standard structural practice. For the maximum
allowable deflection of beams under the unit refer to above table.
4. All mounting holes have a diameter of 22 mm at the locations
shown.
5. If vibration isolators are used, a rail or channel must be provided
between the unit and the isolators to provide continuous unit
support. Additionally the support beams must be designed to
accommodate the overall length and mounting hole location of the
isolators that may differ from those of the unit. Refer to vibration
isolator drawings for these data.
Model No
VCL
A
(mm)
B
(mm)
Maximum
Deflection
(mm)
VCL 042-079
VCL 084-119
2426
3334
1194
1194
10
13
VCL 131
VCL 133
VCL 140-159
4253
3334
4253
1194
1194
1194
13
13
13
VCL 167-235
VCL 239-257
VCL 258
VCL 285-321
3334
4253
3334
4253
2344
2344
2344
2344
13
13
13
13
1. (4) 22 mm mounting holes; 2. Support Beams; 3. Fan Side; 4. Outline of Unit; 5. Outline of Attenuator HS (optional); 6. Outline of
Attenuator HD (optional).
VCL - E 15
E
v
a
p
o
r
a
t
i
v
e

C
o
n
d
e
n
s
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Engineering Specifications
General
A. General: Furnish and install, _____ factory assembled
evaporative condenser(s) of counterflow blow-through design, with
single side entry, conforming in all aspects to the specifications and
schedule as shown on the plans. The condenser shall be of unitary
design with all moving parts factory mounted and aligned.
B. Capacity: The evaporative condenser(s) shall be warranted by the
manufacturer to have condensing capacity of _____ kW heat
rejection, operating with ____ refrigerant and ___C condensing
temperature and ___C entering wet-bulb temperature.
C. Warranty: The manufacturers standard equipment warranty shall
be for a period of one year from the date of startup or eighteen months
from the date of shipment, whichever ends first.
D. Quality Assurance: The manufacture shall have Management
System certified by an accredited registrar as complying with the
requirements of ISO-9001:2000 to ensure consistent quality of
products and services.
Products
1.0 Evaporative Condenser Materials and Components
General: All steel panels and structural elements shall be
constructed from heavy-gauge, Z600 hot-dip galvanized steel, with
cut edges given a protective coating of zinc-rich compound.
2.0 Coil Assembly
The heat transfer section shall be integral to the pan section to
facilitate rigging and shall include the coil below a spray water
distribution system and drift eliminators.
1. The refrigerant condensing coil shall be fabricated of all prime
surface steel at the manufacturers own facility, and hot-dip
galvanized after fabrication.
a. The refrigerant condensing coil shall be tested at 34 bar air
pressure under water.
b. The refrigerant condensing coil shall be designed for low pressure
drop with sloping tubes for free drainage of liquid refrigerant.
c. The refrigerant condensing coil shall be according to European
Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC.
2. Water shall be distributed evenly over the coil at a minimum flow
rate sufficient to ensure complete wetting of the coil at all times by
large-diameter, non-clog, 360 plastic distribution nozzles spaced
across the coil face area in plastic material spray branches. Nozzles
shall utilize a two-stage diffusion pattern to provide overlapping,
umbrella spray patterns that create multiple intersection points with
adjacent nozzles.
Spray branches and nozzles shall be held in place by snap-in rubber
grommets, allowing quick removal of individual nozzles or complete
branches for cleaning or flushing.
3. Removable plastic material drift eliminators shall be positioned to
prevent moisture from leaving the evaporative condenser and
incorporate a minimum of three (3) changes in air direction.
3.0 Pan Assembly
The evaporative condenser shall include a pan assembly consisting
of cold water basin with pump assembly and fan assemblies with
single side air inlet.
1. The cold water basin shall include: a drain/clean-out connection; a
steel strainer; a brass make-up valve; overflow connection; and a
water recirculation pump assembly.
a. Drain/cleanout connection shall be located in the cold water basin
to allow removal of recirculating water.
b. Lift-out steel strainer shall be supplied with perforated openings
sized smaller than the water distribution nozzle orifices and an
integral anti-vortexing hood to prevent air entrainment.
c. Brass make-up valve shall be supplied with a large-diameter plastic
float arranged for easy adjustment.
d. Overflow connection shall be provided in the cold water basin to
protect against recirculating water spillage.
e. Water recirculation pump shall be a close-coupled, bronze-fitted
centrifugal pump equipped with a mechanical seal, mounted on the
basin and piped from the suction strainer to the water distribution
system.
i. The pump shall be installed so that it may drain freely when the
basin is drained.
ii. The pump assembly shall include an integral metering valve and
bleed line to control the bleed rate from the pump discharge to the
overflow connection.
iii. The pump motor shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) type
suitable for _____ V, ____ phase______ Hz electrical service.
f. On installations requiring a remote sump, the evaporative
condenser shall be modified to accommodate the use of an
independent sump and pump for recirculating water (by others)
i. The recirculating water pump, steel strainer, make-up valve, and
integral bleed line assemblies shall be omitted from the evaporative
condenser scope of supply.
ii. The evaporative condenser shall be supplied with a cold water
basin outlet sized and located as indicated on the drawings for gravity
drain to the remote sump.
iii. The water distribution system shall have an operating pressure of
14 kPa at the evaporative condenser spray water inlet connection.
2. Air shall enter the evaporative condenser through the centrifugal
fan assemblies.
a. Fans and motors shall be located in the dry entering airstream to
provide greater reliability and ease of maintenance.
b. Fan housings shall have curved inlet rings for efficient air.entry.
c. Fan(s) shall be heavy-duty, centrifugal flow type mounted on a
steel shaft with heavy-duty, self-aligning, relubricatable bearings with
cast iron housings, designed for a minimum L10 life of 40 000 hours.
d. Fan motor(s) shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) type,
suitable for _____ V, ____ phase, ______ Hz electrical service and
shall be mounted on an easily adjusted, heavy-duty motor base.
Special moisture protection shall be furnished on the windings,
shafts, and bearings.
VCL - E 16
V
C
L
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
4.0 Optional Equipment Specifications
A. Evaporative condenser shall be provided with basin heaters to
prevent freezing of the water in the cold water basin when the
evaporative condenser is idle.
1. The basin heaters shall be selected to maintain +4C basin water
temperature at -18C ambient temperature.
2. Basin heaters shall be electric immersion type controlled by a
remote thermostat with the sensing bulb located in the basin water.
3. Basin heaters shall be provided with a factory-installed low water
level cutout switch to prevent heater operation unless the heater
elements are fully submerged.
B. Evaporative condenser shall be supplied with the Baltiguard
Drive System to improve part load efficiency and provide system
redundancy in case of a motor failure.
1. The Baltiguard Drive System shall include the main fan motor as
listed in the manufacturers published literature and a pony motor
sized for approximately 1/3 of design kW and 2/3 of design fan speed
to optimize energy savings during non-design load conditions.
5.0 Sound
5.1 Sound Level: To maintain the quality of the local environment,
the maximum sound pressure levels (dB) measured 15 m from the
condenser operating at full fan speed shall not exceed the sound
levels detailed below.
Location 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 dB(A)
Discharge
Air Inlet
End
Back
Evaporative Condensers
CXV - E 1
E
v
a
p
o
r
a
t
i
v
e

C
o
n
d
e
n
s
e
r
s
CXV
Product Detail
CXV Evaporative Condensers ................................................................. E2
Benefits ....................................................................................................... E4
Construction Details CXV Models ........................................................... E6
Construction Details CXV-D Models ....................................................... E7
Custom Features and Options .................................................................. E8
Accessories ............................................................................................... E11
Engineering Data CXV Models .............................................................. E13
Structural Support CXV Models ........................................................... E17
Engineering Data CXV-D Models .......................................................... E18
Structural Support CXV-D Models ....................................................... E20
Engineering Specifications ...................................................................... E21
CXV - E 2
C
X
V
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
CXV Evaporative Condensers
Capacity
Single Model Capacity:
CXV: 410-2730 Nominal R717 kWs
CXV-D: 3500-5140 Nominal R717 kWs
General Description
CXV Evaporative Condensers deliver fully rated thermal performance over a wide range of heat
rejection and temperature requirements for various refrigerants. Standard design features directly
address todays environmental concerns by minimizing refrigerant charge and energy
consumption. The Series 1500 minimizes installation costs, provides year-round operating
reliability, and simplifies maintenance requirements.
Key Features
Low energy consumption
Easy maintenance
Reduced refrigerant charge
Low installed cost
Application flexibility
Reliable year-round operation
Long service life
PED 97/23/ EC coil design
CXV - E 3
E
v
a
p
o
r
a
t
i
v
e

C
o
n
d
e
n
s
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
CXV - E 4
C
X
V
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Benefits
Low Energy Consumption
Evaporative Cooling Equipment minimizes the energy consumption of the entire system
because it provides lower operating temperatures. The owner saves money while conserving
natural resources and reducing environmental impact.
Evaporative Condensers provide lower condensing temperatures and can offer significant
horsepower savings over conventional air-cooled and water-cooled condensing systems.
CXV provides heat rejection at the lowest possible energy input and maintenance requirements
via:
- High efficiency, low kW axial fans
- Patented combined flow technology, which reduces evaporation directly off the coil,
minimizing the potential for scaling and fouling
- Parallel flow of air and spray water, which eliminates scale-promoting dry spots
- Multiple Fan Motor System: independent fan motor and drive assembly per fan, which allows
for extra steps of capacity control.
Easy Maintenance
Access - Hinged access doors provide easy
access to the unit interior. In addition, all CXV
models are provided with an internal walkway
as standard. An internal walkway is available
as an option on CXV-D models.
Spacious Interior Provides easy access to
the cold water basin, drift eliminators, fan drive
system and condensing coil.
Access to Spray Distribution Parallel flow
of air and spray water over the coil allows for
inspection and access to the top of the coil
during full operation.
Easy Access to Coil Section
Large, hinged access door Spray Distribution System
CXV - E 5
E
v
a
p
o
r
a
t
i
v
e

C
o
n
d
e
n
s
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Low Installed Cost
Support All models mount directly on parallel I-beams and ship complete with motors and
drives factory-installed and aligned.
Modular Design The modular design minimizes the size and weight of the heaviest lift,
allowing for the use of smaller, less costly cranes.
Coil Connections - Fewer coil connections reduce costs of pipe, valves, purges, and labour.
Application Flexibility
Replacement applications Single air inlet models are designed to mount directly on existing
support steel of both crossflow and counterflow units.
Coil configurations Alternate coil configurations and materials available.
Highest capacity in the industry CXV-D models offer the highest single cell capacity of any
evaporative condenser in the industry. Projects benefit from fewer required cells, lower overall
fan kW, and fewer piping connections.
Reliable Year-Round Operation
Belt Drive System utilizes special corrosion-resistant materials of construction and state-of-
the-art technology to ensure ease of maintenance and reliable year-round performance.
Combined Inlet Shields prevent biological growth from sunlight, act as a filter for air borne
impurities and debris and eliminate water splash out.
Easy Removable Fill (for D-models only)
The fill removal system allows nesting the fill in place for cleaning and replacement. The fill section
can easily be reached after removal of the Combined Inlet Shields / drift eliminators. Telescopic fill
support allow for complete fill removal.
Long Service Life
Materials of Construction Various materials are available to meet the corrosion resistance,
unit operating life, and budgetary requirements of any project.
Note: For more information, please refer to the section Technical Resources, Materials of Construction.
Reduced Refrigerant Charge
Combined flow technology provides maximum
capacity at the lowest refrigerant charge
available in the industry.
Reduced refrigerant charge lowers installation
costs and may help satisfy refrigerant charge
thresholds.
Note: For more information on combined flow technology, refer to
section Evaporative Condenser Product Line Overview
1. CXV, 2. Forced Draft; 3. Induced Draft
CXV - E 6
C
X
V
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Construction Details CXV Models
.
1. Heavy-Duty Construction
Z600 hot-dip galvanized steel panels
2. Fan Drive System
Premium quality belts
Corrosion resistant sheaves
Heavy-duty bearings
Adapted fan motor for operation in saturated conditions.
3. Low kW Axial Fan
Quiet operation
High Efficiency
Corrosion resistant aluminum
4. Water Distribution System
Visible and accessible during operation
Overlapping spray patterns ensure proper water coverage
Large orifice, non-clog nozzles
5. Coil Section (Not Shown)
Coil according to European Pressure Equipment Directive
97/23/EC, standardized at 23 bar design pressure.
Continuous serpentine, steel tubing
Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication (HDGAF)
Pneumatically tested at 34 bar standard coil
Sloped tubes for free drainage of fluid
Multiple circuit coils are possible
6. BACross

Wet Deck Surface with Integral Drift Eliminators


(Not Shown)
Plastic material
Impervious to rot, decay and biological attack
Designed and manufactured by BAC
7. Combined Inlet Shields
Corrosion Resistant
Easily removable
UV resistant plastic material
8. Cold Water Basin
Sloped cold water basin for easy cleaning
Suction strainer with anti-vortex hood
Adjustable water make-up assembly from air inlet side
Integral internal walkway as standard
9. Recirculating Spray Water Pump
Close coupled, bronze fitted centrifugal pump
Totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) motor
Bleed line with metering valve installed from pump
discharge to overflow
10. Hinged Access Doors
Inward swinging door
CXV - E 7
E
v
a
p
o
r
a
t
i
v
e

C
o
n
d
e
n
s
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Construction Details CXV-D Models
.
1. Heavy-Duty Construction
Heavy-gauge Z600 galvanized steel frame
2. FRP Casing Panels
Corrosion resistant
UV resistant finish
Maintenance free
3. Fan Drive System
Premium quality belts
Corrosion resistant sheaves
Heavy-duty bearings
Adapted fan motor for operation in saturated conditions.
4. Low kW Axial Fan
Quiet operation
High Efficiency
Corrosion resistant aluminum
5. Water Distribution System
Visible and accessible during operation
Overlapping spray patterns ensure proper water coverage
Large orifice, non-clog nozzles
6. Coil Section
Coil according to European Pressure Equipment Directive
97/23/EC, standardized at 23 bar design pressure.
Continuous serpentine, steel tubing
Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication (HDGAF)
Pneumatically tested at 34 bar standard coil
Sloped tubes for free drainage of fluid
Multiple circuit coils are possible
7. BACross

Wet Deck Surface with Integral Drift


Eliminators
Plastic material
Impervious to rot, decay and biological attack
Designed and manufactured by BAC
8. Combined Inlet Shields
Corrosion Resistant
Easily removable
UV resistant plastic material
9. Cold Water Basin
Sloped cold water basin for easy cleaning
Suction strainer with anti-vortex hood
Adjustable water make-up assembly from inside the unit
10. Integral Recirculating Spray Water Pumps (Not Shown)
Close coupled, bronze fitted centrifugal pump
Totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) motor
Bleed line with metering valve installed from pump
discharge to overflow
11. Hinged Access Doors (Not Shown)
Inward swinging door on each end wall
CXV - E 8
C
X
V
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Custom Features and Options
Construction Options
Standard Construction:
Steel panels and structural elements are constructed of Z600 heavy-gauge hot-dip galvanized
steel protected with the Baltiplus Corrosion Protection on the outside of the unit.
Optional BALTIBOND

Corrosion Protection System:


The BALTIBOND

Corrosion Protection System, a hybrid polymer coating used to extend


equipment life, is applied before assembly to all hot-dip galvanized steel components of the
unit.
Optional Stainless Steel Construction:
Steel panels and structural elements are constructed of stainless steel either type 304 or 316.
Optional Water-Contact Stainless Steel Cold Water Basin:
A cost-effective alternative to an all stainless steel unit. The critical components in the cold
water basin and the cold water basin itself are provided in stainless steel. The remaining
components are protected with the BALTIBOND

Corrosion Protection System.


Note: See section Technical Resources, Material of Construction for more details on the materials described above.
Coil Configurations
Each coil is manufactured according to the European Pressure Equipment Directive (PED)
97/23/EC (For more details, refer to the Evaporative Condenser "Overview" section)
BAC condenser coils are standard available at a design pressure of 23 bar, and are pneumatically
tested at 34 bar.
Standard Serpentine Coil:
The standard condensing coil is constructed of continuous lengths of all prime surface steel,
hot-dip galvanized after fabrication (HDGAF)
Optional Stainless Steel Coil:
Coils are available in Type 304L and 316L stainless steel for specialized applications.
Optional High Pressure Coil:
Coils are available with a design pressure of 28 bar, with a test pressure of 40 bars. The Coil is
hot-dip galvanised after fabrication (HDGAF).
Multiple Refrigerant Circuit Coils (Split Coils):
In general, multiple circuit coils are required primarily on halocarbon refrigerant systems where
it is common practice to maintain individual compressor systems. Also, a circuit can be isolated
to provide cooling of a water or glycol loop for compressor jacket cooling. A wide range of
multiple circuit arrangements is available.
All coils are designed for low pressure drop with sloping tubes for free drainage of fluid.
CXV - E 9
E
v
a
p
o
r
a
t
i
v
e

C
o
n
d
e
n
s
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Multiple Fan Drive System (not on CXV-D models)
All CXV-models (except CXV-D) are standard equipped with the multiple fan motor system. This
system consists of an independent fan motor and drive assembly per fan with a plenum partition
to allow independent operation of each fan. This standard feature provides 2 steps of capacity
control on dual fan units and 3 steps of capacity control on triple fan units, as illustrated below.
Low Sound Operation
The low sound levels generated by Series 1500 Units, thanks to the use of high efficiency low noise
fans as standard, make them suitable for installation in most environments. For very sound
sensitive installations all models are also available with a Whisper Quiet sound fan option that
significantly reduces the sound levels generated from the tower with minimal impact on thermal
performance.
For extremely sound sensitive installations, factory designed, tested and rated sound attenuation
is available for both the air inlet and discharge.
Note: For more information, please refer to the section Technical Resources, Sound Reduction Options.
Gear Drive System, Externally Mounted Motor (CXV-D models only)
The D-models are available with a gear drive system with external TEFC motor and a non-
corrosive carbon-fiber composite drive shaft with stainless steel hubs is selected with a 2,0 service
factor. The motor and drive shaft ship separately for easy field installation.
Gear Drive System, Closed-Coupled
Motor (CXV-D models only)
The D-Models are available with a close-coupled
gear drive system. Both the gear drive and
couplings are selected with a 2,0 service factor.
Gear construction includes a nickel-alloy steel
shaft, casehardened gears, self-lubrication, and a
single piece, gray iron housing. This drive system
ships completely installed and aligned.
Individual Motor and Drive on each Fan Extra Steps of Capacity Control
Gear Drive System, close-coupled motor
CXV - E 10
C
X
V
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Combined Inlet Shield Technology
Combined Inlet shields prevent biological growth
from sunlight, act as a filter for air borne impurities
and debris and eliminate water splash out.
Remote Sump Execution
The use of an auxiliary sump within a heated
space is the most satisfactory way to protect
sump water from freezing. When the circulating
pump is shut off, all the water in the water
distribution, in suspension and in the sump will
drain freely to the auxiliary sump.
Note: For detailed information on the calculation of the remote sump
tank, please refer to the section "Technical Resources, Selection of
Remote Sump Tank".
Removable Bundled Fill (only CXV-
models)
For installations where it is necessary or
recommended to remove the wet deck surface for
more thorough cleaning and disinfection,
removable bundled fill is available. The fill
bundles can be easily lifted and handled by one
person and therefore provide a simple and secure
method of removing and installing. The bundles
can be dismantled and sheet by sheet can be
removed for inspection and cleaning of both
sides. After cleaning the sheets can be re-
bundled and re-installed.
Combined Inlet Shields
Easy Removable Fill Bundles
CXV - E 11
E
v
a
p
o
r
a
t
i
v
e

C
o
n
d
e
n
s
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Accessories
External Service Platform with Ladder,
Safety Cage and Handrails
In the event the owner requires easy access to
the top of the unit, the unit can be furnished with
a platform and ladders extending from the base of
the unit to the platform, as well as safety cages,
and handrail packages.
Note: Top air inlet screens are recommended with this option.
Internal Ladder(s)
For access to the motor and drive assemblies
internal ladders are available on all models.
Internal Service Platforms
For access to the motor and drive assemblies on models CXV-207 through -481, and all CXV-D
models, an upper service platform with ladder and handrails is available.
Top Air Inlet Screens
The screens protect the air inlet side above the coil section only. Top air inlet screens are always
in Baltibond Corrosion

Protection System.
Basin Heaters
Units exposed to below freezing ambient temperatures require protection to prevent freezing of the
water in the cold water basin when the unit is idle. Factory-installed heaters, which maintain the
water temperature at 4C, are a simple and inexpensive way of providing such protection. The
heater package includes the heaters, a thermostat and a low level cut out switch to protect the
heaters if the water level is too low. Standard electric heaters are selected for -18C ambient
temperature.
Vibration Cut-out Switch
A factory-mounted vibration cut-out switch is available to effectively protect against equipment
failure due to excessive vibration of the mechanical equipment system. BAC can provide a
vibration cut-out switch in an IP65 enclosure to ensure reliable protection.
Model No.
CXV
Heater -18C
(kW)
CXV 074 - 093 1 x 4
CXV 123 - 147 1 x 6
CXV 153 - 193 1 x 6
CXV 207 - 296 1 x 8
CXV 338 - 435 2 x 6
CXV 283 - 327 2 x 6
CXV 416 - 481 2 x 8
CXV D645 - D792 2 x 12
CXV D791 - D944 2 x 14
External Service Platform, Ladder and Safety
Cage
CXV - E 12
C
X
V
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Electric Water Level Control Package
The electric water level control replaces the standard mechanical make-up valve when a more
precise water level control is required. This package consists of a float switch mounted in the basin
and a solenoid activated valve in the make-up water line. The valve is slow closing to minimize
water hammer.
Extended Lubrication Lines
Extended lubrication lines with grease fittings are
available for lubrication of the fan shaft bearings.
Stand-by Pump
A factory mounted stand-by pump is available,
including non-return valves in each pump piping
line. In case of a pump failure, there can be
switched over to the stand-by pump, eliminating
the unit shut down period as much as possible.
Basin Sweeper Piping
Basin sweeper piping provides an effective
method of preventing sediment from collecting in
the cold water basin of the unit. A complete piping
system, including nozzles, is provided in the unit
basin for connection to side stream filtration
equipment.
Note: For more information, please refer to the section "Technical
Resources, Filtration".
N2 Filling of the Coil
For prolonged shipment periods (ocean freight) or
extended storage on site it is recommended to
charge the coil(s) with nitrogen.
Mechanical Equipment Removal
System (Only on CXV-D Models)
The mechanical equipment removal system is a
lightweight, easy to install system for removal and
installation of fan motor or gearbox. (motors up to
22kW)
Extended Lubrication Lines
Basin Sweeper Piping
Mechanical Equipment Removal System
CXV - E 13
E
v
a
p
o
r
a
t
i
v
e

C
o
n
d
e
n
s
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Engineering Data CXV Models
REMARK: Do not use for construction. Refer to factory certified dimensions & weights. This brochure includes data
current at time of publication, which should be reconfirmed at the time of purchase. In the interest of product
improvement, specifications, weights and dimensions are subject to change without notice. Up-to-date engineering
data and more can be found at www.BaltimoreAircoil.com.
CXV 74 - CXV 193
Model No.
CXV
Operating
Weight
(kg)
Shipping
Weight
(kg)
Heaviest
Section
(kg)
H
(mm)
L
(mm)
W
(mm)
Air Flow
(m
3
/s)
Fan Motor
(kW)
Spray Water
Flow
(l/s)
Pump Motor
(kW)
R717
Charge
(kg)
CXV 74
CXV 80
CXV 84
CXV 89
CXV 93
3400
3410
3420
3590
3600
2350
2360
2370
2520
2530
1440
1450
1460
1600
1610
3980
3980
3980
3980
3980
1861
1861
1861
1861
1861
2385
2385
2385
2385
2385
13,0
14,5
16,0
14,3
15,8
(1x) 4,0
(1x) 5,5
(1x) 7,5
(1x) 5,5
(1x) 7,5
12,0
12,0
12,0
12,0
12,0
(1x) 1,1
(1x) 1,1
(1x) 1,1
(1x) 1,1
(1x) 1,1
30
30
30
38
38
CXV 123
CXV 131
CXV 137
CXV 147
4980
5000
5240
5260
3390
3410
3610
3640
2150
2160
2360
2390
3980
3980
3980
3980
2775
2775
2775
2775
2385
2385
2385
2385
23,4
26,0
23,0
25,6
(2x) 4,0
(2x) 5,5
(2x) 4,0
(2x) 5,5
18,3
18,3
18,3
18,3
(1x) 2,2
(1x) 2,2
(1x) 2,2
(1x) 2,2
46
46
57
57
CXV 153
CXV 164
CXV 173
CXV 184
CXV 193
6290
6310
6320
6650
6660
4150
4180
4190
4480
4490
2590
2610
2620
2910
2920
3980
3980
3980
3980
3980
3690
3690
3690
3690
3690
2385
2385
2385
2385
2385
26,2
29,2
32,3
28,8
31,9
(2x) 4,0
(2x) 5,5
(2x) 7,5
(2x) 5,5
(2x) 7,5
31,5
31,5
31,5
31,5
31,5
(1x) 2,2
(1x) 2,2
(1x) 2,2
(1x) 2,2
(1x) 2,2
61
61
61
76
76
1. Refrigerant in ND 100; 2. Refrigerant out ND 100; 3. Make-up ND 15; 4. Overflow ND 80; 5. Drain ND 50; 6. Access.
CXV - E 14
C
X
V
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
CXV 207 - CXV 435
Model No.
CXV
Operating
Weight
(kg)
Shipping
Weight
(kg)
Heaviest
Section
(kg)
H
(mm)
L
(mm)
W
(mm)
Air Flow
(m
3
/s)
Fan Motor
(kW)
Spray Water
Flow
(l/s)
Pump Motor
(kW)
R717
Charge
(kg)
CXV 207
CXV 214
CXV 229
CXV 241
CXV 253
CXV 258
CXV 269
CXV 280
CXV 288
CXV 296
6970
6980
7450
7450
7480
7490
7950
7980
7990
8500
4560
4570
4960
4970
5000
5010
5410
5440
5450
5890
2830
2840
3240
3250
3270
3280
3690
3710
3720
4160
4790
4790
4790
4790
4790
4790
4790
4790
4790
4790
3690
3690
3690
3690
3690
3690
3690
3690
3690
3690
2985
2985
2985
2985
2985
2985
2985
2985
2985
2985
41,8
44,7
35,1
38,9
41,3
44,2
38,6
41,0
43,8
43,5
(2x) 9,0
(2x) 11,0
(2x) 5,5
(2x) 7,5
(2x) 9,0
(2x) 11,0
(2x) 7,5
(2x) 9,0
(2x) 11,0
(2x) 11,0
45,1
45,1
45,1
45,1
45,1
45,1
45,1
45,1
45,1
45,1
(1x) 4,0
(1x) 4,0
(1x) 4,0
(1x) 4,0
(1x) 4,0
(1x) 4,0
(1x) 4,0
(1x) 4,0
(1x) 4,0
(1x) 4,0
69
69
91
91
91
91
114
114
114
136
CXV 338
CXV 354
CXV 369
CXV 379
CXV 396
CXV 411
CXV 424
CXV 435
10810
10820
10870
10880
11590
11640
11650
12410
7070
7090
7140
7150
7760
7810
7820
8490
4670
4680
4730
4740
5350
5400
5410
6090
4935
4935
4935
4935
4935
4935
4935
4935
5520
5520
5520
5520
5520
5520
5520
5520
2985
2985
2985
2985
2985
2985
2985
2985
53,1
58,9
62,5
66,9
58,4
62,0
66,3
65,8
(3x) 5,5
(3x) 7,5
(3x) 9,0
(3x) 11,0
(3x) 7,5
(3x) 9,0
(3x) 11,0
(3x) 11,0
56,8
56,8
56,8
56,8
56,8
56,8
56,8
56,8
(1x) 5,5
(1x) 5,5
(1x) 5,5
(1x) 5,5
(1x) 5,5
(1x) 5,5
(1x) 5,5
(1x) 5,5
136
136
136
136
170
170
170
201
1. Refrigerant in ND 100; 2. Refrigerant out ND 100; 3. Make-up ND 25; 4. Overflow ND 80; 5. Drain ND 50; 6. Access.
CXV - E 15
E
v
a
p
o
r
a
t
i
v
e

C
o
n
d
e
n
s
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
CXV 283- CXV 481
General Notes CXV Models
1. Standard refrigerant in- and outlet connection sizes are ND100.
Consult your local BAC Balticare representative for size and
location. Refrigerant connections are standard bevelled for
welding.
2. Unit height is indicative, for precise value refer to certified print.
3. Shipping/operating weights indicated are for units without
accessories such as sound attenuators, discharge hoods, etc.
Consult factory certified prints to obtain weight additions and the
heaviest section to be lifted. Operating weight shown in the tables
is based on total unit weight, weight of refrigerant operating
charge and basin filled to overflow level.
4. Refrigerant charge listed is R717 operating charge. To determine
operating charge of R22 refrigerants, multiply by: 1,93.
For R134A, multiply by: 1,98.
5. The standard right hand arrangement as shown has the horizontal
air inlet side on the right when facing the coil connection side. Left
hand can be furnished by special order. Water and refrigerant
connections are always located on the opposite ends of the unit.
6. All CXV models will be shipped in two sections.
7. Units have standard Low Noise fans. For units with Whisper Quiet
fans a W is added at the end of the model name.
Model No.
CXV
Operating
Weight
(kg)
Shipping
Weight
(kg)
Heaviest
Section
(kg)
H
(mm)
L
(mm)
W
(mm)
Air Flow
(m
3
/s)
Fan Motor
(kW)
Spray Water
Flow
(l/s)
Pump Motor
(kW)
R717
Charge
(kg)
CXV 283
CXV 297
CXV 309
CXV 327
9050
9080
9100
9650
5850
5880
5900
6380
3960
3990
4010
4490
4790
4790
4790
4790
3690
3690
3690
3690
3610
3610
3610
3610
39,4
43,7
46,4
49,0
(2x) 5,5
(2x) 7,5
(2x) 9,0
(2x) 11,0
45,1
45,1
45,1
45,1
(1x) 4,0
(1x) 4,0
(1x) 4,0
(1x) 4,0
123
123
123
146
CXV 416
CXV 437
CXV 454
CXV 468
CXV 481
13230
13270
13320
13330
14150
8400
8440
8490
8500
9220
5750
5790
5840
5850
6570
4935
4935
4935
4935
4935
5520
5520
5520
5520
5520
3610
3610
3610
3610
3610
59,8
66,3
70,5
75,4
74,4
(3x) 5,5
(3x) 7,5
(3x) 9,0
(3x) 11,0
(3x) 11,0
56,8
56,8
56,8
56,8
56,8
(1x) 5,5
(1x) 5,5
(1x) 5,5
(1x) 5,5
(1x) 5,5
182
182
182
182
216
1. Refrigerant in ND 100; 2. Refrigerant out ND 100; 3. Make-up ND 25; 4. Overflow ND 80; 5. Drain ND 50; 6. Access.
CXV - E 16
C
X
V
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Sound Attenuation CXV Models
Remote Sump Data CXV Models
Refer to the "Technical Resources" section "Selection of Remote Sump" for Remote Sump Data.
Model No. Dimensions (mm) Weight (kg)
CXV D H
t
Intake Discharge
74 - 93 1345 4715 100 140
123 - 147 1345 4715 130 210
153 - 193 1345 4715 175 255
207 - 296 1500 5525 250 270
338 - 435 1500 5665 375 385
283 - 327 2005 5525 250 310
416 - 481 2005 5665 375 440
1. Intake Attenuator; 2. Discharge Attenuator; Ht = H (unit height) + 735 mm; W = Unit Width, see general Engineering data.
CXV - E 17
E
v
a
p
o
r
a
t
i
v
e

C
o
n
d
e
n
s
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Structural Support CXV Models
REMARK: Do not use for construction. Refer to factory certified dimensions & weights. This brochure includes data current
at time of publication, which should be reconfirmed at the time of purchase. In the interest of product improvement,
specifications, weights and dimensions are subject to change without notice. Up-to-date engineering data and more can be
found at www.BaltimoreAircoil.com.
The recommended support arrangement for units consists of parallel I-beams running the full length of the unit, spaced as shown in the following drawing.
Besides providing adequate support, the steel also serves to raise the unit above any solid foundation to ensure access to the bottom of the unit. To support
units in an alternate steel support arrangement, consult your BAC Balticare Representative.
Units with and without Sound Attenuation
Notes:
1. The recommended support arrangement for the units consists of
parallel I-beams extending the full length of the unit. Supports and
anchor bolts are to be designed and furnished by others.
2. All supporting beams are to be flush and level at top and must be
oriented relative to gage line as shown.
3. Recommended design loads for each unit support beam should be
70% of the total unit operating weight applied as a uniform load to each
of the unit beams. Beams should be designed in accordance with
standard structural practice. For the maximum allowable deflection of
beams under the unit see table.
4. All mounting holes have a diameter of 22 mm at the locations shown.
5. If vibration isolators are used, a rail or channel must be provided
between the unit (and optional attenuator) and the isolators to provide
continuous unit support. Additionally the support beams must be
designed to accommodate the overall length and mounting hole
location of the isolators that may differ from those of the unit. Refer to
vibration isolator drawings for these data.
6. All mounting holes have a diameter of 22mm.
Model No.
CXV
Max. Deflection
(mm)
Dimensions (mm)
No of 20 mm
Anchorbolts
W L A B C
CXV 074 - 093 5 2385 1861 2325 - 255 4
CXV 123 - 147 8 2385 2775 2325 - 255 4
CXV 153 - 193 10 2385 3690 2325 - 255 4
CXV 207 - 296 10 2985 3690 2925 - 255 4
CXV 283 - 327 10 3610 3690 3550 - 255 4
CXV 338 - 435 12 2985 5520 2925 2400 270 8
CXV 416 - 481 12 3610 5520 3550 2400 270 8
1. Unit Outline; 2. Air Intake; 3 Mounting Holes; 4. Unit.
CXV - E 18
C
X
V
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Engineering Data CXV-D Models
REMARK: Do not use for construction. Refer to factory certified dimensions & weights. This brochure includes data
current at time of publication, which should be reconfirmed at the time of purchase. In the interest of product
improvement, specifications, weights and dimensions are subject to change without notice. Up-to-date engineering
data and more can be found at www.BaltimoreAircoil.com.
CXV-D 645L - CXV-D 944L Double Sided Units
*Actual shipping dimensions.
General Notes CXV-D Models
1. Standard refrigerant in- and outlet connection sizes are ND100.
Consult your local BAC Balticare representative for size and location.
Refrigerant connections are standard bevelled for welding.
2. Unit height is indicative, for precise value refer to certified print.
3. Shipping/operating weights indicated are for units without accessories
such as sound attenuators, discharge hoods, etc. Consult factory
certified prints to obtain weight additions and the heaviest section to be
lifted. Operating weight shown in the tables is based on total unit
weight, weight of refrigerant operating charge and basin filled to
overflow level.
4. Refrigerant charge listed is R717 operating charge. To determine
operating charge of R22 refrigerants, multiply by: 1,93. For R134A,
multiply by: 1,98.
5. Models with fan motor up to 22 kW have belt drive only; models
between 22 kW and 45 kW have standard belt drive but gear drive as
an option; models with 55 kW have gear drive only. Motorsize for a
specific model is indicated by a letter (x) at the end of the model name.
Fan type is indicated by a letter (y) at the end of the model name.
6. Models supplied with an optional gear drive may have heights up to
130 mm greater than shown.
7. All CXV-D models will be shipped in four sections: 1x lower, 1x fan and
2x coil sections. The heaviest section is the coil section. The weight is
shown for one coil section only.
8. The letter L at the end of the model number refers to the standard
Low Noise fan. W refers to the Whisper Quiet fan.
Model No.
CXV-D
Weight Dimensions
Air flow
(m
3
/s)
Fan
Motor
(kW)
Water
Flow
(l/s)
Pump
Motor
(kW)
R717
Charge
(kg)
Shipping
(kg)
Operating
(kg)
Heaviest
Section
(kg)
H
(mm)
L
(mm)
W
(mm)
A
(mm)
CXV-D645L
CXV-D686L
CXV-D717L
CXV-D729L
CXV-D763L
CXV-D792L
13100
13175
13180
14435
14440
14540
18945
19015
19020
20380
20380
20480
3650
3650
3650
4280
4280
4280
5665
5665
5665
5665
5665
5665
3632
3632
3632
3632
3632
3632
7328
7328
7328
7328
7328
7328
3498
3498
3498
3498
3498
3498
79,4
87,6
94,6
86,6
93,5
99,5
22
30
37
30
37
45
113,6
113,6
113,6
113,6
113,6
113,6
(2x) 5,5
(2x) 5,5
(2x) 5,5
(2x) 5,5
(2x) 5,5
(2x) 5,5
298
298
298
354
354
354
CXV-D791L
CXV-D827L
CXV-D857L
CXV-D876L
CXV-D906L
CXV-D944L
15020
15030
15130
16515
16615
16660
22240
22245
22345
23855
23955
24000
4260
4260
4260
5005
5005
5005
5665
5665
5665
5665
5665
5665
4245
4245
4245
4245
4245
4245
8014
8014
8014
8014
8014
8014
4184
4184
4184
4184
4184
4184
101,1
109,9
117,0
107,6
114,6
124,7
30
37
45
37
45
55
113,6
113,6
113,6
113,6
113,6
113,6
(2x) 5,5
(2x) 5,5
(2x) 5,5
(2x) 5,5
(2x) 5,5
(2x) 5,5
342
342
342
410
410
410
1. Refrigerant in ND100; 2. Refrigerant out ND100; 3. Make-Up ND40, Overflow ND80; 5. Drain ND50; 6. Access at both ends.
CXV - E 19
E
v
a
p
o
r
a
t
i
v
e

C
o
n
d
e
n
s
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Sound Attenuation CXV-D models
Remote Sump Data CXV-D models
Refer to the "Technical Resources" section "Selection of Remote Sump" for Remote Sump Data.
Model No.
CXV-D
Dimensions (mm) Weight (kg)
D Ht Both Intake Sides Discharge
645L - 792L 3510 6477 700 500
791L - 944L 4170 6477 850 600
1. Intake Attenuator; 2. Discharge Attenuator; W = Unit Width, see general Engineering data.
CXV - E 20
C
X
V
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Structural Support CXV-D Models
REMARK: Do not use for construction. Refer to factory certified dimensions & weights. This brochure includes data
current at time of publication, which should be reconfirmed at the time of purchase. In the interest of product
improvement, specifications, weights and dimensions are subject to change without notice. Up-to-date engineering
data and more can be found at www.BaltimoreAircoil.com.
Units with and without Sound Attenuation
Notes:
1. The recommended support arrangement for the units consists of
parallel I-beams extending the full length of the unit. Supports and
anchor bolts are to be designed and furnished by others.
2. All supporting beams are to be flush and level at top and must be
oriented relative to gage line as shown.
3. Recommended design loads for each unit support beam should
be 70% of the total unit operating weight applied as a uniform load
to each of the unit beams. Beams should be designed in
accordance with standard structural practice. For the maximum
allowable deflection of beams under the unit see table.
4. All mounting holes have a diameter of 22 mm at the locations
shown.
5. If vibration isolators are used, a rail or channel must be provided
between the unit (and optional attenuator) and the isolators to
provide continuous unit support. Additionally the support beams
must be designed to accommodate the overall length and
mounting hole location of the isolators that may differ from those
of the unit. Refer to vibration isolator drawings for these data.
Model
CXV-D
Max. Deflection
(mm)
Dimensions (mm)
No of 20 mm
Anchorbolts
A B C
645L- 792L 12 3558 3570 37 12
791L - 944L 12 4171 3913 37 12
1. Unit Outline; 2. Air Intake; 3 Mounting Holes
CXV - E 21
E
v
a
p
o
r
a
t
i
v
e

C
o
n
d
e
n
s
e
r
s
... because temperature matters
Engineering Specifications
General
A. General: Furnish and install, _____ factory assembled
evaporative condenser(s) of induced draft design, with single side air
entry and vertical air discharge. Overall dimensions shall not exceed
approximately _____ mm x _____ mm, with an overall height not
exceeding approximately _____mm. Operating weight shall not
exceed _____ kg. The evaporative condenser shall be Baltimore
Aircoil Model ____________.
(Alternate) General: Furnish and install, _____ factory assembled
evaporative condenser(s) of induced draft design, with dual side air
entry and vertical air discharge. Overall dimensions shall not exceed
approximately _____ mm x _____ mm, with and overall height not
exceeding approximately _____mm. Operating weight shall not
exceed _____ kg. The evaporative condenser shall be Baltimore
Aircoil Model ____________.
B. Capacity: The evaporative condenser(s) shall be warranted by the
manufacturer to have condensing capacity of _____ kW heat
rejection, operating with ____ refrigerant at ___C condensing
temperature and ___C entering wet-bulb temperature.
C. Warranty: The manufacturers standard equipment warranty shall
be for a period of one year from the date of startup or eighteen months
from the date of shipment, whichever ends first.
D. Quality Assurance: The manufacture shall have Management
System certified by an accredited registrar as complying with the
requirements of ISO-9001:2000 to ensure consistent quality of
products and services.
Products
1.0 Evaporative Condenser Materials and Components
1.1 Baltiplus Corrosion Resistant Construction: Unless otherwise
noted in this specification, all steel panels and structural elements
shall be constructed from heavy-gauge, Z600 hot-dip galvanized
steel, with all sheared edges given a protective coating of zinc-rich
compound and the exterior protected with the Baltiplus Corrosion
Protection.
(Alternate 1.1) Baltibond

Corrosion Resistant Construction:


Unless otherwise noted in this specification, all steel panels and
structural members shall be protected with the BALTIBOND


Corrosion Protection System. The system shall consist of Z600 hot
dip galvanised steel prepared in a four-step (clean, pre-treat, rinse
and dry) process with an electrostatically sprayed, thermosetting
hybrid polymer fuse-bonded to the substrate during a thermally
activated curing stage monitored by a 23-step quality assurance
program.
Or for CXV-D models:
General: Casing panels shall be constructed of corrosion resistant,
fiberglass, reinforced polyester (FRP).
2.0 Coil Casing Assembly
The evaporative condenser shall include a coil casing section
consisting of a refrigerant condensing coil, a spray water distribution
system, drift eliminators, fan and drive system as indicated by the
manufacturer.
2.1. The refrigerant condensing coil shall be fabricated of all prime
surface steel at the manufacturers own facility, and hot-dip
galvanized after fabrication.
a. The refrigerant condensing coil shall be according to European
Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC, with design pressure of
23 bar.
b. The refrigerant condensing coil shall be tested at 34 bar air
pressure under water.
c. The refrigerant condensing coil shall be designed for low pressure
drop with sloping tubes for free drainage of liquid refrigerant.
2.2 Spray Water Distribution System: Water shall be distributed
evenly over the coil at a minimum flow rate sufficient to ensure
complete wetting of the coil at all times by large-diameter, non-clog,
360 plastic distribution nozzles spaced across the coil face area in
spray branches. Nozzles shall utilize a two-stage diffusion pattern to
provide overlapping, umbrella spray patterns that create multiple
intersection points with adjacent nozzles.
a. Nozzles and spray branches shall be observable and accessible for
cleaning from the outside of the evaporative condenser during
condenser operation without the removal of other components.
b. Spray branches and nozzles shall be held in place by snap-in
rubber grommets, allowing quick removal of individual nozzles or
complete branches for cleaning or flushing.
2.3. Removable drift eliminators shall be positioned to prevent
moisture from entering the air plenum and incorporate a minimum of
three (3) changes in air direction. The drift eliminators shall be
removable in easy to handle sections for quick access to the coil.
2.4. Fan(s) and Drive System: Fan(s) shall be driven by V-type belts.
a. Fan(s) shall be heavy-duty, axial flow low noise, with aluminium
alloy blades. Air shall discharge through a fan cylinder designed for
streamlined air entry and minimum fan blade tip clearance for
maximum fan efficiency.
(Alternate a) Fan(s) shall be of Whisper Quiet fan design for ultra
low sound consisting of:
i. multiblade aerofoil fan design constructed of fibreglass reinforced
plastic blades (for CXV-D models).
ii. specially shaped aluminium blades with end caps and flexible hub
connection (for CXV-models).
b. Fan(s) and shaft(s) shall be supported by heavy-duty, self-aligning,
grease-packed ball bearings with moisture-proof seals and integral
slinger rings, designed for a minimum L10 life of 40,000 hours.
c. Fan and motor sheaves shall be fabricated from corrosion resistant
materials.
d. Fan motor(s) shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) type,
suitable for ____ volt, ____ phase, ___ Hz electrical service and shall
be mounted on an easily adjusted, heavy-duty motor base.
e. The motor shall be furnished with double-sealed, permanently
lubricated bearings and special moisture protection on windings,
shafts and bearings.
f. Air plenum shall provide a minimum of 1220 mm clearance under
the motor base to provide comfortable working space for service
personnel.
g. Each fan is equipped with an independent motor and drive
assembly to allow independent operation of each fan.
3.0 Pan Assembly
The evaporative condenser shall include a pan assembly consisting
of cold water basin with pump assembly, heat transfer section for
spray water cooling with integral drift eliminators, combined inlet
shields and hinged access door.
3.1 The cold water basin shall be constructed of heavy-gauge steel
panels and structural members either protected by Baltiplus or
Baltibond

. Basin shall include a depressed section with drain/


cleanout connection. The basin area under the wet deck surface shall
be sloped toward the depressed section to facilitate cleaning.
- OR -
(Alternate 3.1) The cold water basin shall be constructed of heavy-
gauge Type 304 or 316 stainless steel panels and structural
members. Basin shall include a depressed section with drain/
cleanout connection. The basin area under the wet deck surface shall
CXV - E 22
C
X
V
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
be sloped toward the depressed section to facilitate cleaning.
3.2 The cold water basin shall include a drain/clean-out connection; a
steel strainer; a brass make-up valve; over flow connection; and a
water recirculation pump assembly.
a. Cold water basin shall be designed so that the strainer, makeup
valve and float, and pump assembly are easily accessible without
removing any of the unit panels.
b. Lift-out steel strainer shall be supplied with perforated openings
sized smaller than the water distribution nozzle orifices and an
integral anti-vortexing hood to prevent air entrainment.
c. Water recirculation pump shall be a close-coupled, bronze-fitted
centrifugal pump equipped with a mechanical seal, mounted on the
basin and piped from the suction strainer to the water distribution
system.
i. The pump shall be installed with adequate drains so that it may
drain freely when the basin is drained.
ii. The pump assembly shall include an integral metering valve and
bleed line to control the bleed rate from the pump discharge to the
overflow connection.
iii. The pump motor shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) type
suitable for _____ volt, ____ phase, ______ Hz electrical service.
d. On installations requiring a remote sump, the evaporative
condenser shall be modified to accommodate the use of an
independent sump and pump for recirculating water (by others).
i. The recirculating water pump, steel strainer, make-up valve, and
integral bleed line assemblies shall be omitted from the evaporative
condenser scope of supply.
ii. The evaporative condenser shall be supplied with a cold water
basin outlet sized and located as indicated on the drawings for gravity
drain to the remote sump.
iii. The water distribution system shall have a design operating
pressure of 14 kPa at the evaporative condenser spray water inlet
connection.
3.3 The heat transfer section shall consist of BACross

wet deck
surface with integral drift eliminators for CXV and BACrossII wet deck
surface with integral drift eliminators for CXV-D for cooling the spray
water leaving the coil to optimize the thermal performance of the
evaporative condenser.
a. The wet deck surface and integral drift eliminators shall be formed
from plastic material.
b. The wet deck surface and integral drift eliminators shall be
impervious to rot, decay, fungus, and biological attack.
3.4 Combined Inlet Shields: Combined inlet shields shall be
separate from the wet deck surface and removable to allow easy
access for inspection of the air/water interface at the air inlet side of
the equipment. Combined inlet shields shall prevent UV-light and
debris from entering the unit, as well as prevent water splash out
during fan cycling. They shall be constructed of maintenance free,
corrosion and UV resistant material.
3.5 Plenum Access: A large, hinged access door shall be provided
for access to the coil, drift eliminators and fan plenum section. The
water make-up valve, float ball and suction strainer shall be easily
accessible.
4.0 Optional Equipment Specifications
A. Evaporative condenser shall be provided with basin heaters to
prevent freezing of the recirculating water when the evaporative
condenser is idle.
1. The basin heaters shall be selected to maintain 4C basin water
temperature at 18C ambient temperature 16 km/h wind speed.
2. Basin heaters shall be electric immersion type controlled by a
remote thermostat with the sensing bulb located in the basin water.
3. Basin heaters shall be provided with a low water level cutout switch
to prevent heater operation unless the heater elements are
adequately submerged.
B. Evaporative condenser shall be provided with extended lubrication
lines with standard grease fittings for lubricating the fan shaft bearings
from the outside base of the condenser.
C. Evaporative condenser shall be provided with a factory assembled
field-installed external platform with an access ladder and handrails
to provide access to the top of the evaporative condenser.
1. Optional ladder with safety cage shall be available.
Or for CXV-D Models
C. Evaporative condenser shall be provided with factory assembled,
field installed perimeter safety railings and walking surface above coil
air intake to provide access to the top of the evaporative condenser.
D. Evaporative condenser shall be provided with a moveable ladder
with fixed ladder supports to provide access to the fan drive system
and coil assembly.
E. Evaporative condenser shall be provided with an internal walkway
at the access door to facilitate servicing the unit. (Standard on S1500
only).
F. Evaporative condenser shall be provided with a factory assembled
internal working platform with ladder to provide a permanent working
surface for maintenance personnel (CXV-193 and larger only).
For CXV-D models:
G. Evaporative condenser shall be supplied with a right angle gear
drive designed specifically for evaporative condenser service. All
gears shall have a minimum service factor of 2.0 based on design fan
horsepower. An oil level fill port and sight glass shall be located on the
gear drive to facilitate routine inspection and maintenance.
5.0 Sound
5.1 Sound Level: To maintain the quality of the local environment,
the maximum sound pressure levels (dB) measured 15 m from the
condenser operating at full fan speed shall not exceed the sound
levels detailed below.
Location 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 dB(A)
Discharge
Air Inlet
End
Back
(not on D-models)
Thermal Storage Products
TSU - F 1
T
h
e
r
m
a
l

S
t
o
r
a
g
e

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
TSU
Product Detail
ICE CHILLER Thermal Storage Products .......................................... F2
Benefits ........................................................................................................ F4
Proven Technology ..................................................................................... F7
Construction Details TSU-M - Internal Melt Application ..................... F9
Engineering Data TSU-M ........................................................................ F10
Engineering Specifications TSU-M ........................................................ F18
Construction Details TSU-C/D - External Melt Application ............... F19
Engineering Data TSU-C/D ..................................................................... F20
Engineering Specifications TSU-C/D ..................................................... F27
Engineering Considerations ICE CHILLER Products ..................... F28
TSU - F 2
T
S
U
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
ICE CHILLER Thermal Storage
Products
General Description
Cooling with ice thermal storage can be the most cost-effective, reliable system approach to
cooling offices, schools, hospitals, malls and other buildings, and provides a steady source of low
temperature fluids for process cooling applications. These systems are environmentally friendly
because they help lower energy consumption and reduce greenhouse gas emissions. With
thousands of successful installations worldwide, BAC is the global leader in the application of ice
thermal storage.
Key Features
Lowest first cost
Reduced energy cost
Variable capacity
Improved system reliability
Reduced maintenance
Environmentally friendly
Proven technology
TSU - F 3
T
h
e
r
m
a
l

S
t
o
r
a
g
e

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
... because temperature matters
TSU - F 4
T
S
U
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Benefits
Lowest First Cost
Systems with ice thermal storage can be installed
at the same or lower first cost than traditional
systems when designed with the colder supply
water available from ice. The savings that result
from the use of smaller chillers and cooling
towers, reduced pump and pipe sizes and less
connected horsepower, offset the cost of the ice
thermal storage equipment. Additional savings
can be found when using lower temperature air
distribution, which allows reduced ductwork and
fan sizes.
Smaller Chillers and Heat Rejection
Equipment: By designing the system around
24-hour per day chiller operation, the size of
the chillers and cooling towers or air-cooled
condensers required for an ice system is
significantly reduced, when compared to
conventional chillers and heat rejection
equipment sized for the instantaneous peak
load. A typical thermal storage design includes
chillers that provide 50 to 60% of the peak
cooling load. The balance of the cooling
requirement is provided from the ice storage
system.
Reduced Pump and Pipe Sizes: Pump and
pipe sizes are also reduced in a properly
designed ice storage system. Substantial
savings in the chilled water distribution loop are
realized when the system design incorporates
reduced flow rates that result from using a
larger temperature range in the water loop. Use
of a larger temperature range, for example
10C instead of the more traditional 5.5C
temperature range results in a reduction of pipe
size. Condenser water pipe sizes are reduced
due to lower flow requirements for the smaller
chiller. Pump savings due to reduced chilled
water and condenser water flow rates are also
realized.
Reduced Cooling Coil and Supply Air Fan Sizes: Cooling coils sized using lower supply
water temperatures and traditional supply air temperatures are generally smaller due to fewer
rows. The reduction in rows leads to lower supply fan kW.
TSU - F 5
T
h
e
r
m
a
l

S
t
o
r
a
g
e

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
... because temperature matters
Reduced Air Handling Equipment: When the air distribution is designed with lower supply air
temperatures, the size of the ductwork, fans and fan motors are reduced.
Reduced Electrical Distribution: Smaller chillers, heat rejection equipment and pumps require
less horsepower than a traditional system, which results in smaller transformers, switchgear,
wire sizes and starter panels.
Reduced Generator Size: If a facility has a generator for daily or back-up power, the size of the
generator will be significantly reduced when the peak electrical load of the facility is reduced
using ice storage.
Reduced Energy Cost
An ice thermal storage system reduces peak demand, shifts energy usage to non-peak hours,
saves energy, and reduces energy costs.
Reduces Peak Demand and Shifts Energy
Usage: With less connected horsepower, ice
storage can lower peak electrical demand for
the HVAC or process cooling system by 50% or
more. Since most electrical rates include
demand charges during peak demand times
and/or higher day versus night kWh charges,
savings on electrical bills can be substantial. In
areas with real time pricing, where the electric
rate varies hour by hour based on the market
price of electricity, day to night kWh costs can
vary by 500 to 1000%. The use of electricity at
night versus peak daytime hours can lead to
large savings on energy bills.
Saves Energy: In addition, total annual kilowatt-hours used are less when the system is
designed taking advantage of the low supply water temperature available from the ice storage
system. Lower kWh consumption is possible for five reasons:
1. Although making ice requires more energy than producing chilled water, the efficiency penalty
is not as large since the ice is made at night when condensing temperatures are lower,
increasing the efficiency of the chiller.
2. Ice systems typically operate the chiller at full load. Chillers are inefficient when run with low
loads during the spring and fall. A typical chiller will operate at less than 30% capacity for half
the year.
3. Reduced pumping horsepower.
4. Reduced fan horsepower due to lower air pressure drop across the cooling coil. A higher
chilled water temperature differential across the cooling coil usually results in fewer rows and
therefore a lower pressure drop.
5. The ability to recover waste heat from the chiller for heating water both night and day.
Additional kWh savings are possible if the air distribution is designed to take advantage of the low
temperatures available from the ice storage system. As the electric industry continues to
deregulate, and time-of-use rates, real time pricing schedules and negotiated power prices
become standard, ice storage can provide even greater future savings in operating costs.
TSU - F 6
T
S
U
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Variable Capacity
The ice thermal storage system will maintain a
constant supply temperature regardless of the
variations in instantaneous cooling demand. The
flow and entering water temperature set the
instantaneous capacity.
Improved System Reliability
Ice storage systems provide the reliability
necessary to ensure air-conditioning is available.
With traditional systems, installing multiple
chillers provides redundancy. In the event of a
mechanical failure of one chiller, the second
chiller provides limited cooling capacity. The
maximum available cooling for the traditional
system would only be 50% on a design day.
Most ice storage systems utilize two chillers in
addition to the ice storage equipment. Two
chillers are designed to provide approximately
60% of the required cooling on a design day while
the ice storage provides the remaining 40% of the
cooling capacity. In the event only one chiller is
available to provide cooling during the day, up to
70% of the cooling capacity is available. The one
operable chiller provides 30% of the cooling
requirement while the ice provides up to 40%.
Based on typical HVAC load profiles and
ASHRAE weather data, 70% of the cooling
capacity would meet the total daily cooling requirements 85% of the time.
Reduced Maintenance
The ice thermal storage coils have no moving parts so very little maintenance is required. Because
the chillers, pumps and heat rejection equipment are smaller, ice storage systems will have less
maintenance than a traditional system. The ice thermal storage system also allows a chiller to
undergo routine maintenance during the day when the ice storage can handle the system load.
Environmentally Friendly
Reducing energy consumption and using electricity at night will reduce global warming. Electricity
generated at night generally has a lower heat rate (lower fuel use per power output), and therefore
lower carbon dioxide and greenhouse gas emissions resulting in less global warming. The
California Energy Commission concluded that the use of electricity at night created a 31%
reduction in air emissions over the use of electricity during the day.
With smaller chillers, an ice thermal storage system reduces the amount of refrigerant in a system.
Most refrigerants in use today are slated to be banned in the future under the Montreal Protocol
because they contribute to global warming. Using smaller amounts of refrigerant helps to save the
ozone and reduce global warming.
TSU - F 7
T
h
e
r
m
a
l

S
t
o
r
a
g
e

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
... because temperature matters
Proven Technology
BAC has successfully applied ice thermal storage technology to thousands of installations
worldwide. BAC has the application and system experience to assist you in the design, installation
and operation of your ice storage system. B.A.C. has supplied ICE CHILLER

Thermal Storage
Products for projects that range in size from 90 to 125,000 ton-hours (0,3 to 441,3 MWh).
Installations include office buildings, hospitals, manufacturing processes, schools, universities,
sports arenas, produce storage facilities, hotels and district cooling applications.
The ICE CHILLER

Product line includes a variety of factory-assembled units. For large


applications, where space is limited or factory-assembled units are not cost effective, ICE
CHILLER

Thermal Storage Coils are available for installation in field-erected tanks.


The BAC product offering provides system design flexibility. Ice can be built using ammonia or
various glycols on steel coils and is used to provide either chilled water or glycol to the cooling
system. This flexibility, combined with a broad range of application experiences, allows B.A.C. to
provide a cost-effective product to meet your specific requirements.
CNES - Toulouse (France)
The cooling plant of the Centre Nationale
dEtudes Spatiales (CNES) in Toulouse,
incorporated 3 centrifugal chillers, each 3 MW
cooling capacity. As the facilities grew in size over
the years, the plant became short of capacity on
peak cooling load days. Rather than adding
another chiller to increase the maximum cooling
capacity, CNES wanted a more energy and cost
efficient solution. An 11 MWh Ice Thermal
Storage System, proved to be the most
economical. During daytime the chillers run
continuously at maximum capacity and thus at
highest efficiency. At night ice is built to take
advantage of the lower off-peak electricity costs.
CSELT - Turin (Italy)
Designing a high quality and reliable climate
control system with a low first cost and a low
operating cost for the new CSELT (Centro SIP
Elaborazione Telecomunicazioni) Research
Centre was an ambitious goal. This requirement
however was fully met by using standard glycol
chillers with a 13 MWh BAC Thermal Storage
System. During the night ice is built to provide
part of the cooling capacity for the next day. In the
daytime the water from the cooling load is first
cooled by the chillers and then further cooled to
the design temperature by the BAC Thermal
Storage System. This series arrangement, with
the chiller upstream in the most favourable
position, is only possible due to the high melt off capacity offered by the BAC ICE CHILLER

which
guarantees a constant low leaving water temperature from the Thermal Storage System.
CNES
CSELT
TSU - F 8
T
S
U
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Academic Hospital - Groningen
(Netherlands)
The cooling for the HVAC system in the new
Academic Hospital in Groningen is provided by a
standard 650 kW glycol chiller and a 6 MWh BAC
ICE CHILLER

Thermal Storage System. The


system design makes full use of the low leaving
water temperatures available from the ICE
CHILLER

Thermal Storage System by placing
the chiller upstream and in series with the ICE
CHILLER
.
This provides the most economical
solution, an overall low energy cost and a great
flexibility in the cooling plant operation.
KBC - Leuven (Belgium)
This new 90.000 m
2
building for the KBC bank
headquarter has a total daily cooling load of 26
MWh with a peak of 3 MW. The HVAC system
selected by the owner included a Thermal
Storage System because of its low first cost,
economical operating cost and high system
reliability. A 1 MW chiller combined with a 10
MWh BAC Thermal Storage System can easily
satisfy the 3MW peak cooling load. Energy costs
are lower than with a conventional system
because electrical demand charges and
expensive day rates are reduced to a minimum.
Granada Centre - Riyadh (Saudi
Arabia)
The designers of the Granada Centre in Riyadh,
Saudi Arabia were confronted with a limited
electrical power supply to the new site. This
forced the client to consider all possible load
shifting alternatives. After careful review of the
available options it was decided to limit the power
demand of the chillers and shift the generation of
cooling to off-peak periods. From the maximum
cooling demand, being 14.250 kW, about 8.000
kW is delivered directly by the chillers. The
remaining cooling will come from the ice storage
units. The ice storage plant includes 22 ice
storage tanks model TSU 761 M with a total ice
storage capacity of 58.800 kWh.
Academic Hospital
KBC Bank
Granada Centre
TSU - F 9
T
h
e
r
m
a
l

S
t
o
r
a
g
e

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
... because temperature matters
Construction Details TSU-M - Internal
Melt Application
1. Covers
Watertight
Heavy-gauge Z600 Hot-dip galvanized steel panels
Insulated with 50 mm extruded polystyrene insulation
2. Coil Support Beams
Prevent contact between coil and primary liner
3. Glycol Connections
Threaded connections
Flanged connections (optional)
4. Galvanised Steel Coil
Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication (HDGAF)
Steel tubing, encased in a steel framework
Pneumatically tested at 13 bar
Rated for 10 bar operating pressure
5. Primary Liner
Single piece
48-hour integrity test before shipment
6. Extruded Polystyrene Insulation
110 mm of total insulation
20 mm of insulation between primary and secondary liner
Contributes to total insulating value of 3,1mC/W
7. Secondary Liner/Vapor Barrier
Prevents moisture from penetrating through the insulation
8. Wall Panel
Heavy-gauge glavanised steel with double brake flanges
Extruded polystyrene insulation
Contributes to total insulating value of 3,1mC/W
9. Sight Tube
Visual indicator of the amount of ice remaining in unit
10. Ice Inventory Sensor (Optional) - Not Shown
Mechanical Water Level Difference Transmitter provides an
electrical 4-20 mA output signal which is proportional to the
amount of ice in inventory
TSU - F 10
T
S
U
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Engineering Data TSU-M
TSU-M & TSU-LM Units
REMARK: Do not use for construction. Refer to factory certified dimensions & weights. This brochure includes data
current at time of publication, which should be reconfirmed at the time of purchase. In the interest of product
improvement, specifications, weights and dimensions are subject to change without notice. Up-to-date engineering
data and more can be found at www.BaltimoreAircoil.com.
General Notes
1. All dimensions are in mm. Weights are in kg.
2. Unit should be continuously supported on a flat level surface.
3. All connections are threaded
4. H
1
, H
2
= installed height. Coils are capped for shipping and
storage. Add 75 mm for shipping height.
Model
TSU-M
Latent
Capacity
(kWh)
Approx.
Sh. Weight
(kg)
Approx.
Op. Weight
(kg)
Tank Water
Volume
(l)
Coil Glycol
Volume
(l)
Connection
Size ND
(mm)
Unit Width
(mm)
Unit
Length
(mm)
Unit
Height
(mm)
H
1
Tank
Height
(mm)
H
2
TSU-237M 834 4420 17730 11320 985 50 2400 3240 2440 2390
TSU-476M 1674 7590 33530 22110 1875 80 2400 6050 2440 2390
TSU-594M 2087 9150 42200 28250 2320 80 2980 6050 2440 2390
TSU-761M 2676 10990 51610 34640 2990 80 3600 6050 2440 2390
Model
TSU-LM
Latent
Capacity
(kWh)
Approx.
Sh. Weight
(kg)
Approx.
Op. Weight
(kg)
Tank Water
Volume
(l)
Coil Glycol
Volume
(l)
Connection
Size ND
(mm)
Unit Width
(mm)
Unit
Length
(mm)
Unit
Height
(mm)
H
1
Tank
Height
(mm)
H
2
TSU-L184M 647 3760 14360 8820 770 50 2400 3240 2000 1950
TSU-L370M 1301 6400 27060 17250 1460 80 2400 6050 2000 1950
TSU-L462M 1625 7710 34030 22030 1810 80 2980 6050 2000 1950
TSU-L592M 2082 9200 41560 27020 2280 80 3600 6050 2000 1950
1. Outlet; 2. Inlet; 3. Sight Tube; 4. Access Hatch.
TSU - F 11
T
h
e
r
m
a
l

S
t
o
r
a
g
e

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
... because temperature matters
Custom Coils for Internal Melt
Application (TSU-M)
BAC will manufacture custom ICE CHILLER


Thermal Storage Coils to meet project specific
requirements. BAC has done extensive research
and testing on the build and melt characteristics
of ice storage. This research and testing has
resulted in selection capabilities unmatched by
any other company in the industry.
BAC can predict the temperatures required on an
hour by hour basis for building ice on custom
coils, over a variety of conditions and build times.
The physical space available, load profile,
discharge temperatures, chiller capacity and operating sequences can be evaluated to find the
design that best meets the application.
The ICE CHILLER

Thermal Storage Coils are constructed of continuous 26,7 mm O.D. all prime
surface serpentine steel tubing. The coils are assembled in a structural steel frame designed to
support the weight of the coil stack with a full ice build. After fabrication the coils are tested for leaks
using 13 bar air pressure under water, then hot-dip galvanized for corrosion protection.
The coils are configured to provide countercurrent glycol flow in adjacent circuits for maximum
storage capacity.
Individual coils can be factory-assembled into modules of two (2) coils for optimization of transport
cost and reduction of site assembly time. Glycol manifolds are coated with zinc-rich, cold
galvanizing finish at the factory. Necessary support steel and lifting lugs are provided on the
modules to allow for lifting into and final positioning within the storage tank.
Load Profile
A daily load profile is the hourbyhour
representation of cooling loads for a 24hour
period. Most HVAC applications use a daily load
profile to determine the amount of storage
required. Some HVAC systems apply a weekly
load profile. For conventional airconditioning
systems, chillers are selected based on the peak
cooling load. For ice storage systems, the chillers
are selected based on the kWh of cooling
required and a defined operating strategy.
Thermal storage systems provide much flexibility
for varying operating strategies as long as the
total kWh selected are not exceeded. This is why an accurate load profile must be provided when
designing an ice storage system.
Load profiles take many different shapes based on the application. The figure above illustrates a
typical HVAC load profile for an office building with a 1750 kW peak cooling load and a 12hour
cooling requirement. The shape of this curve is representative of most HVAC applications. For
preliminary equipment selections, BAC's ICE CHILLER


Thermal Storage Unit Selection Program
can generate a similar load profile. Information required is the estimated building peak cooling load
and duration of the cooling load.
Installation of Coil Module
Typical HVAC Load Profile
TSU - F 12
T
S
U
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
The AirConditioning & Refrigeration Institute (ARI) has published Guideline T, "Specifying the
Thermal Performance of Cool Storage Equipment." The purpose of Guideline T is to establish the
minimum user specified data and supplier specified performance data. Design data provided by
the engineer includes: System Loads, Flow Rates and Temperatures.
Operating Strategies
Once the load profile is generated, the next step in selecting Thermal Storage equipment is to
define an operating strategy or in other words, determine the hours per day during which the glycol
chiller is allowed to operate.
Which operating strategy to use is dependent upon the load profile (application), the utility rate
structure, the energy cost and the equipment first cost. In other words, the economical balance
between the system installation and operating cost or the payback period must be calculated.
There are 2 different operating strategies, either full or partial storage.
Full Storage Systems store all the cooling capacity required during the off peak periods and
eliminate the need to operate the chiller(s) during the utility on-peak period. This strategy shifts the
largest amount of electrical demand and results in the lowest operating cost. However, the
equipment first cost is considerably higher than partial storage systems due to larger chiller and
storage requirement and full storage is therefore seldom used.
Partial Storage Systems require that the chiller(s) operate also during the on-peak period. The
partial storage system allowing the glycol chiller to run for 24 hours per day at its full capacity is
most commonly used as it results in the smallest chiller selection. In many cases, the smaller chiller
selection is the driving force for an ice storage system because of lower installed electrical kW,
smaller refrigerant charge, smaller cooling towers or other heat rejection equipment (lower noise),
smaller standby chillers (if required), lower capital and maintenance cost, ...
Other partial storage operating strategies stop the chiller a few hours per day when electricity cost
are high and/or where non-cooling electricity usage are important (so when the chiller operation
would increase the electrical demand). It is however important to know that the more hours the
chiller is stopped during the day, the larger its size will be. Furthermore, if the chiller is stopped
during the cooling period, the size of the storage equipment needs to be increased. If the chiller is
stopped during the non-cooling period, the ice build time is reduced and therefore lower glycol
temperatures are required and the chiller COP is reduced.
Besides determining when the chiller should run or be stopped, an other aspect of operating
strategy is if during melt-out, priority is given to the chiller or to the ice to cover the presented
cooling load.
In a chiller priority system the chiller always operates at full capacity. When the cooling load
exceeds the chiller performance, the excess is covered by the melting ice. A constant portion of
the load is covered by the chiller while the variation in load is covered by the ice.
In an ice priority system, a constant part of the load is covered by the ice, where the variation in
load is taken by the chiller. Because the chiller does not continuously operate at its maximum
capacity, it will be oversized versus the chiller priority system. Ice priority systems result in
oversized ice and chiller selections and are therefore seldom used.
Normal practice is that partial storage systems using chiller priority with 24h chiller operation are
most commonly used.
TSU - F 13
T
h
e
r
m
a
l

S
t
o
r
a
g
e

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
... because temperature matters
Modes of Operation
The modular ICE CHILLER

Thermal Storage Unit can operate in any of five distinct operating


modes. These modes of operation provide the flexibility required by building operators to meet their
daily HVAC cooling requirements.
Ice Build: In this operating mode, ice is built by
circulating a 25% solution (by weight) of inhibited
ethylene glycol at negative temperatures through
the coils contained in the ICE CHILLER

Thermal
Storage Unit. During this operating mode, the
chiller's operating conditions are monitored and
the chiller is turned off when the minimum supply
glycol temperature off the chiller is reached.
Optionally, the ICE LOGIC Ice Quantity Meter is
available to control the chiller operation. The
figure illustrates typical chiller supply
temperatures for 8, 10 and 12 hour build cycles.
For a typical 10hour build time, the supply glycol
temperature is never lower than -5,5C. As the graph illustrates, for build times exceeding 10
hours, the minimum glycol temperature is greater than -5,5C. For build times less than 10 hours,
the minimum glycol temperature will be lower than -5,5C at the end of the build cycle. This
performance is based on a chiller flow rate associated with a 3C range. When a larger
temperature range is the basis of the chiller selection, the chiller supply temperatures will be lower
than shown in the figure above.
Ice Build with Cooling: When cooling loads exist during the ice build period, some of the cold
ethylene glycol used to build ice is diverted to the cooling load to provide the required cooling. The
amount of glycol diverted is determined by the building loop set point temperature. BAC
recommends that this mode of operation be applied on systems using primary/secondary pumping
(See further for system schematic). This reduces the possibility of damaging the cooling coil or
heat exchanger by pumping cold glycol, lower than 0C, to this equipment.
Cooling Ice only: In this operating mode the chiller is off. The warm return ethylene glycol
solution iscooled to the desired set point temperature by melting ice stored in the modular ICE
CHILLER

Thermal Storage Unit.
Cooling Chiller only: In this operating mode the chiller supplies all the building cooling
requirements. Glycol flow is diverted around the thermal storage equipment to allow the cold
supply glycol to flow directly to the cooling load. Temperature set points are maintained by the
chiller.
Cooling Ice with Chiller: In this operating mode, cooling is provided by the combined operation
of the chiller and thermal storage equipment. The glycol chiller pre-cools the warm return glycol.
The partially cooled glycol solution then passes through the ICE CHILLER

Thermal Storage Unit


where it is cooled by the ice to the design temperature.
Chiller Supply Temperatures
TSU - F 14
T
S
U
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
System Schematics
Two basic flow schematics are applied to select
ICE CHILLER

Thermal Storage Units. The figure


illustrates a single piping loop with the chiller
installed upstream of the thermal storage
equipment. This design allows the thermal
storage system to operate in four of the five
possible operating modes. They are Ice Build,
Cooling-Ice Only, Cooling-Chiller Only and
CoolingIce with Chiller.
For this figure the following control logic is
applied:
Valve V-1 modulates in response to temperature sensor, TS-1. Valve V-2 could be positioned to
either maintain a constant flow, less than P-1, or modulate in response to the return glycol
temperature from the cooling load.
When the building loop contains chilled water, a heat exchanger must be installed to separate the
glycol loop from the buildings chilled water loop. On applications where an existing water chiller is
available, it can be installed in the chilled water loop to reduce the load on the thermal storage
system.
This design should not be used when there is a requirement to build ice and provide cooling.
This would require the cold return glycol from the thermal storage equipment be pumped to the
cooling load or heat exchanger. Since the glycol temperature is below 0C, the cooling coil or heat
exchanger is subject to freezing. The flow schematic illustrated in the figure details a primary/
secondary pumping loop with the chiller located upstream of the thermal storage equipment. This
design allows the system to operate in all five operating modes.
For this figure the following control logic is applied:
MODE CHILLER P-1 V-1 V-2
Ice Build On On A-B C-B
Cooling Ice Only Off On Modulate A-B
Cooling Chiller Only On On C-B A-B
Cooling Ice with Chiller On On Modulate A-B
MODE CHILLER P-1 P-2 V-1 V-2
Ice Build On On Off A-B A-C
Ice Build with Cooling On On On A-B Modulate
Cooling - Chiller Only On On On C-B A-B
Cooling Ice Only Off On On Modulate A-B
Cooling Ice with Chiller On On On Modulate A-B
Single loop Chiller Upstream
TSU - F 15
T
h
e
r
m
a
l

S
t
o
r
a
g
e

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
... because temperature matters
Valve V-1 and Valve V-2 modulate, depending on
the operating mode, in response to temperature
sensor, TS-1. The benefit provided by the
primary/secondary pumping loop is that the
system can build ice and provide cooling without
fear of freezing a cooling coil or heat exchanger.
This system design also allows for different flow
rates in each of the pumping loops. When the flow
rates in the pumping loops are different, the glycol
flow rate in the primary loop should be greater
than or equal to the glycol flow rate in the
secondary loop. If not, colder supply glycol
temperatures from the primary loop are needed to
guarantee the design TS-1 set point (because
there is always a mix with warm return glycol from the secondary loop. This reduces the chiller
COP. At very large flow rate differences, negative glycol temperatures out of the TSU would be
needed to obtain TS-1 (which is impossible)
As in the single loop schematic, a heat exchanger and a base water chiller can be added to the
system schematic.
Variations to these schematics are possible but these are the most common for thermal storage
systems. One common variation positions the chiller downstream of the thermal storage
equipment. This design is used when the glycol temperatures off the ice cannot be maintained for
the entire cooling period. By positioning the chiller downstream of the ice, the chiller is used to
maintain the required supply temperature. In both of the above figures, the chiller is installed
upstream of the ice. This offers two significant advantages compared to system designs that locate
the chiller downstream of the ice. First, the chiller operates at higher glycol temperatures to pre-
cool the return glycol. This enables the chiller to operate at a higher capacity, which reduces the
amount of ice required. Second, since the chiller is operating at higher evaporator temperatures,
the efficiency of the chiller is improved.
Primary/Secondary Pumping Loop Chiller
Upstream
TSU - F 16
T
S
U
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Chiller Performance
Most packaged chillers can provide a wide range of glycol discharge temperatures and are suited
for thermal storage applications. Chiller types applied to thermal storage applications include
reciprocating, rotary screw and centrifugal. The chiller type used depends on capacity, glycol
discharge temperature, efficiency, condenser type, and refrigerant. Chiller capacity and glycol
discharge temperature must be evaluated when designing a thermal storage system. Different
glycol discharge temperatures are required for various operating modes that affect the chiller
capacity. The chiller capacity provided at -5,5C is considerably less than the chiller capacity with
a 6C glycol discharge temperature.
Chillers selected for use with the BAC's ICE CHILLER

Thermal Storage Units should be able to


provide -5,5C glycol when applied to a 10-hour build cycle. Longer build times result in higher
glycol temperatures at the end of the build period while shorter build times require the chiller to
supply glycol colder than -5,5C.
The chiller capacity required could limit the use of a specific chiller type on small applications. The
nominal capacity range for each chiller type is shown in the table below.
Centrifugal and rotary screw chillers have the highest efficiencies with COPs from 5,9 to 4,7 at 6C
chiller discharge temperature and 4,0 to 3,2 when providing -5,5C glycol. Reciprocating chillers
are less efficient and have COPs ranging from 4,1 to 3,2 when providing 6C glycol and 3,2 to 2,7
when making ice at -5,5C.
The heat rejection function of an ice storage system can be handled by any of three types of
refrigerant condensers: aircooled, water-cooled or evaporative.
An aircooled condenser removes heat from the refrigerant and condenses it by forcing air over
an extended surface coil through which the refrigerant vapour is circulated. The latent heat of the
refrigerant is removed by sensibly heating the air. The condenser capacity is determined by the
ambient dry bulb temperature.
A water-cooled condenser with a cooling tower rejects heat from a refrigeration system in two
steps. First, the refrigerant is condensed by the water flow in the condenser. Second, heat is
rejected to the atmosphere as the condenser water is cooled by a cooling tower.
The evaporative condenser combines a watercooled condenser and cooling tower in one piece
of equipment. It eliminates the sensible heat transfer step of the condenser water. This allows a
condensing temperature substantially closer to the design wetbulb temperature.
Variations in condensing temperatures should be considered when evaluating chiller performance.
Reduced night-time ambient dry bulb and wet bulb temperatures offer lower condensing
temperatures which help offset the reduction in chiller capacity and chiller efficiency.
Chiller Type Nominal Capacity (kW) Range
Reciprocating 50 850 kW
Rotary Screw 450 4200 kW
Centrifugal 600 7000 kW+
TSU - F 17
T
h
e
r
m
a
l

S
t
o
r
a
g
e

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
... because temperature matters
The percent of nominal chiller capacity at various glycol discharge temperatures are shown below.
Note: * Nominal capacity of the chiller is based on cooling water to 6
o
C.
Nominal capacity ratings are based on:
30C condenser water or 46C condensing temperature for cooling operation
26,5C condenser water or 40,5C condensing temperature for ice build operation
The refrigerant types for chillers also vary. Centrifugal chillers are available for use with R-134a,
R-123 and R-22. Reciprocating and rotary screw chillers are available for use with R134a, R-22
and R-717 (ammonia).
Glycol Discharge Temperature Percent of Nominal Capacity*
6,0 C 97 %
2,0 C 85 %
-5,5 C 66 %
TSU - F 18
T
S
U
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Engineering Specifications TSU-M
1.0 ICE CHILLER Thermal Storage Unit
1.1 General: The ICE CHILLER

Thermal Storage Unit shall be
Baltimore Aircoil Model TSU-______. Overall unit dimensions shall
not exceed approximately _____ m by ____ m with an overall height
not exceeding ____ m. The operating weight shall not exceed
_______ kg
1.2 Thermal Capacity: Each unit shall have a latent kWh storage
capacity of _______ kWh to be generated in ____ hours when
supplied with _______ l/s of a 25% (by weight) solution of industrially
inhibited ethylene/propylene glycol. The minimum glycol temperature
required during the ice build operating mode shall be _______ C.
Rated system performance shall be provided in the format
recommended by the Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute (ARI)
Guideline T. The thermal storage units shall be modular in design.
Unit design shall allow units of different sizes to be installed in order
to optimize unit selection and minimize space requirements. Tanks
sizes can be mixed due to internal piping arrangements that create a
balanced flow due to uniform pressure drop through the coil circuits.
2.0 Construction Details
2.1 Tank: The tank shall be constructed of heavy-gauge Z600
galvanized steel panels and include double brake flanges for
structural strength. The tank walls shall be supplied with a minimum
of 110 mm of insulation that provides a total insulating value of 3,1 m
C/W. The tank design shall utilize two liners. The 1,5 mm E.P.D.M.
liners shall be of single piece construction and be suitable for low
temperature applications. Liners shall be separated from each other
by 20 mm of extruded polystyrene insulation. The tank bottom shall
be insulated with 70 mm extruded, polystyrene insulation.
2.2 Covers: The ICE CHILLER

Thermal Storage Unit shall be


provided with watertight, sectional covers constructed of Z600 hot-dip
galvanized steel. The covers shall be insulated with a minimum of 50
mm of extruded polystyrene insulation.
2.3 Heat Transfer Section: Contained within the tank shall be a steel
heat exchanger that is constructed of 26,7 mm O.D., all prime surface
serpentine steel tubing encased in a steel framework. The coil, which
is hot-dip galvanized after fabrication, shall be tested at 1300 kPa air
pressure under water and rated for 1000 kPa operating pressure. The
coil circuits are configured to provide maximum storage capacity.
Each unit shall be supplied with threaded connections.
2.4 Sight Tube: Each ICE CHILLER

Thermal Storage Unit shall be
provided with a sight tube mounted on the end of each unit. . The sight
tube, which shall be fabricated from clear plastic pipe, displays the
tank water level and corresponding ice inventory. Optionally, the
exclusive BAC ICE LOGIC Ice Quantity Controller is available for both
manual and automatic chiller control.
2.5 Heat Transfer Fluid System: The heat transfer fluid shall be an
industrially inhibited, 25% by weight, ethylene glycol solution
specifically designed for HVAC applications. The 25% (by weight)
solution is designed to provide freeze/burst and corrosion protection
as well as efficient heat transfer in water based, closed loop systems.
Corrosion inhibitors shall be provided to keep pipes free of corrosion
without fouling.
TSU - F 19
T
h
e
r
m
a
l

S
t
o
r
a
g
e

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
... because temperature matters
Construction Details TSU-C/D -
External Melt Application
1. Tank
The tank is constructed of heavy-gauge, Z600 hot-dip
galvnised steel, reinforced with full-length structural
steel angles beneath and on all four sides. All seams
are welded to ensure watertight construction. A zinc rich
coating is applied to all exposed edges and welds.
2. Insulation
Extruded polystyrene insulation is provided between
the tank and the exterior panels. The insulation is 80
mm thick on the tank sides and ends, and 50 mm thick
on the bottom and inside the covers
3. Exterior Panels
Exterior panels sealed at all seams provide a complete
vapor barrier and protect the insulation. They are
furnished with BACs exclusive BALTIBOND


Corrosion Protection System.
4. Air Pump
Centrifugal regenerative blower for field mounting to
supply low pressure air for agitation of the water. Pump
is complete with a weather protected inlet air filter and
is suitable for outdoor applications.
5. Covers
Sectional insulated tank covers are proided with BACs
exclusive BALTIBOND

Corrosion Protection System.


6. Galvanised Steel Coil
Hot-dip galvanised after fabrication (HDGAF)
Steel tubing encased in a steel framework
Pneumatically tested at 15 bar (31bar) for glycol
(ammonia) applications
Rated for 10 bar (22 bar) operating pressure
7. ICE-LOGIC Ice Thickness Controller
(Not Shown)
An electronic, multi-point ice thickness control is
mounted on the unit. A control relay is provided to
deactivate the refrigeration system when a full build of
ice is reached.
8. Air Distribution
Low pressure air from the air pump is distributed below
the coils through multiple perforated PVC pipes.
TSU - F 20
T
S
U
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Engineering Data TSU-C/D
TSU-95C - TSU-225C & TSU-185C - TSU-450C
REMARK: Do not use for construction. Refer to factory certified dimensions & weights. This brochure includes data
current at time of publication, which should be reconfirmed at the time of purchase. In the interest of product
improvement, specifications, weights and dimensions are subject to change without notice. Up-to-date engineering
data and more can be found at www.BaltimoreAircoil.com.
Model
TSU
Op. Weight
(kg)
Sh. Weight
(kg)
Air Pump
(kW)
Water
Volume
(l)
Pull Down
Volume
(l)
Coil
Volume
(l)
R-717
Charge
(kg)
Water
Conn. In
ND
(mm)
Water
Conn. Out
ND
(mm)
H
(mm)
H
1
mm
L
(mm)
W
(mm)
TSU-95C 9370 2550 0,75 6520 165 297 128 80+2x40 80 2160 2311 3073 1308
TSU-115C 10560 2780 0,75 7440 208 340 147 80+2x40 80 2160 2311 3683 1308
TSU-120C 10980 2860 0,75 7760 227 368 159 80+2x40 80 2160 2311 3073 1600
TSU-145C 13070 3270 0,75 9390 265 453 196 80+2x40 80 2160 2311 3683 1600
TSU-170C 15240 3860 0,75 11020 303 510 220 80+2x40 80 2160 2311 4293 1600
TSU-200C 17460 4225 1,1 12640 341 566 244 100+2x50 100 2160 2311 4877 1600
TSU-225C 19550 4635 1,1 14270 379 657 281 100+2x50 100 2160 2311 5486 1600
TSU-185C 16935 4045 1,1 12270 341 595 257 100+2x50 100 2160 2360 3073 2400
TSU-230C 20205 4635 1,1 14880 416 680 294 100+2x50 100 2160 2360 3683 2400
TSU-270C 23475 5180 1,1 17450 454 821 354 100+2x50 100 2160 2360 4293 2400
TSU-310C 26970 5950 1,5 20020 530 906 391 100+2x50 100 2160 2360 4877 2400
TSU-350C 30240 6495 1,5 22640 606 1020 440 150+2x80 150 2160 2360 5486 2400
TSU-290C 25105 5495 1,5 18700 492 878 379 150+2x80 150 2160 2360 3683 2982
TSU-340C 29145 6130 1,5 21960 606 1020 440 150+2x80 150 2160 2360 4293 2982
TSU-400C 33505 7085 1,5 25120 681 1161 501 150+2x80 150 2160 2360 4877 2982
TSU-450C 37545 7765 1,5 28470 757 1275 550 150+2x80 150 2160 2360 5486 2982
1. Coil Connections; 2. Make-up ND50; 3. Overflow ND50; 4. Water Out; 5. Water In; 6. Drain ND50; 7. ICE LOGIC

.
TSU - F 21
T
h
e
r
m
a
l

S
t
o
r
a
g
e

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
... because temperature matters
TSU-480C - TSU-1050C & TSU-790D - TSU-1440D
REMARK: Do not use for construction. Refer to factory certified dimensions & weights. This brochure includes data
current at time of publication, which should be reconfirmed at the time of purchase. In the interest of product
improvement, specifications, weights and dimensions are subject to change without notice. Up-to-date engineering
data and more can be found at www.BaltimoreAircoil.com.
Model
TSU
Op.
Weight
(kg)
Sh. Weight
(kg)
Air Pump
(kW)
Water
Volume
(l)
Pull Down
Volume
(l)
Coil
Volume
(l)
R-717
Charge
(kg)
Water Conn.
In ND
(mm)
Water
Conn.
Out ND
(mm)
H
(mm)
H
1
(mm)
L
(mm)
W
(mm)
TSU-480C 42180 8945 1,5 31610 833 1529 660 150+2x80 150 2160 2360 6096 2982
TSU-590C 50260 10355 3,0 38000 1022 1784 770 150+2x80 150 2160 2360 7290 2982
TSU-700C 58450 11670 3,0 44670 1173 2067 892 150+2x80 150 2160 2360 8509 2982
TSU-800C 67195 13620 3,0 51140 1363 2322 1002 200+2x80 200 2160 2360 9703 2982
TSU-910C 75365 14985 3,0 57610 1514 2605 1125 200+2x80 200 2160 2360 10922 2982
TSU-1050C 87805 17210 3,0 67300 1779 3115 1345 200+2x80 200 2160 2360 12725 2982
TSU-790D 68450 13790 3,0 51860 1510 2750 1187 200+2x80 200 2415 2757 7290 3582
TSU-940D 79380 15470 3,0 60570 1630 3115 1345 200+2x80 200 2415 2757 8509 3582
TSU-1080D 91270 17920 3,0 69650 1780 3455 1492 200+2x80 200 2415 2757 9703 3582
TSU-1220D 102970 19550 4,0 78360 1890 3795 1638 200+2x80 200 2415 2757 10922 3582
TSU-1440D 118940 22090 4,0 91230 2230 4330 1869 200+2x80 200 2415 2757 12725 3582
1. Coil Connections; 2. Make-up ND50; 3. Overflow ND50; 4. Water Out; 5. Water In; 6. Drain ND50; 7. ICE LOGIC

.
TSU - F 22
T
S
U
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
TSC-95C - TSC-1050C & TSC-790D - TSC-1440D
REMARK: Do not use for construction. Refer to factory certified dimensions & weights. This brochure includes data
current at time of publication, which should be reconfirmed at the time of purchase. In the interest of product
improvement, specifications, weights and dimensions are subject to change without notice. Up-to-date engineering
data and more can be found at www.BaltimoreAircoil.com.
General Notes
1. All dimensions are in mm. Weights are in kg.
2. Unit should be continuously supported on a flat levelsurface.
3. All connections are threaded
4. H
1
= installed height. Coils are capped for shipping and storage.
Add 75 mm for shipping height.
5. Refrigerant charge listed is operating charge for pump re-
circulated bottom feed. For other feed systems, consult your BAC
Balticare Representative.
Model
TSC
No Coils
Data Per Coil
Sh. Weight
(kg)
Coil Volume
(l)
R-717 Charge
(kg)
H
(mm)
H
1
(mm)
L
(mm)
W
(mm)
TSC-95C
TSC-115C
TSC-120C
TSC-145C
TSC-170C
TSC-200C
TSC-225C
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1065
1205
1315
1500
1635
1950
2135
297
340
368
453
510
566
651
128
147
159
196
220
244
281
1912
1912
1912
1912
1912
1912
1912
2260
2260
2260
2260
2260
2260
2260
2654
3258
2654
3258
3861
4464
5070
1055
1055
1350
1350
1350
1350
1350
TSC-185C
TSC-230C
TSC-270C
TSC-310C
TSC-350C
2
2
2
2
2
1065
1205
1340
1590
1725
297
340
410
453
510
128
147
177
196
220
1912
1912
1912
1912
1912
2260
2260
2260
2260
2260
2654
3258
3861
4464
5070
1055
1055
1055
1055
1055
TSC-290C
TSC-340C
TSC-400C
TSC-450C
2
2
2
2
1500
1635
1950
2135
453
510
566
651
196
220
244
281
1912
1912
1912
1912
2260
2260
2260
2260
3258
3861
4464
5070
1350
1350
1350
1350
TSC-480C
TSC-590C
TSC-700C
TSC-800C
TSC-910C
TSC-1050C
4
4
4
4
4
6
1365
1545
1680
2000
2180
1680
380
462
519
574
660
520
164
199
224
248
285
225
1912
1912
1912
1912
1912
1912
2260
2260
2260
2260
2260
2260
2721
3327
3928
4534
5137
4030
1350
1350
1350
1350
1350
1350
TSU-790D
TSU-940D
TSU-1080D
TSU-1220D
TSU-1440D
4
4
4
4
4
2065
2315
2720
2950
3310
687
779
864
950
1084
297
336
373
410
468
2102
2102
2102
2102
2102
2448
2448
2448
2448
2448
3327
3931
4534
5140
6045
1645
1645
1645
1645
1645
TSU - F 23
T
h
e
r
m
a
l

S
t
o
r
a
g
e

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
... because temperature matters
Custom Coils for External Melt
Application (TSU-C/D)
BAC will manufacture custom ICE CHILLER


Thermal Storage Coils to meet project specific
requirements. B.A.C. has done extensive
research and testing on the build and melt
characteristics of ice storage. This research and
testing has resulted in selection capabilities
unmatched by any other company in the industry.
BAC can predict the temperatures required on an
hour by hour basis for building ice on custom
coils, over a variety of conditions and build times.
The physical space available, load profile,
discharge temperatures, chiller capacity and
operating sequences can be evaluated to find the design that best meets the application.
The ICE CHILLER

Thermal Storage Coils are constructed of continuous 26,7 mm O.D. all prime
surface serpentine steel tubing. The coils are assembled in a structural steel frame designed to
support the weight of the coil stack with a full ice build for glycol (ammonia) application. After
fabrication the coils are tested for leaks using 15 bar (31bar) air pressure under water, then hot-
dip galvanized for corrosion protection.
The coils are configured to provide countercurrent glycol flow in adjacent circuits for maximum
storage capacity.
Individual coils can be factory-assembled into modules of two (2) coils for optimization of transport
cost and reduction of site assembly time. Glycol manifolds are coated with zinc-rich, cold
galvanizing finish at the factory. Necessary support steel and lifting lugs are provided on the
modules to allow for lifting into and final positioning within the storage tank.
Modes of Operation
The ICE CHILLER

Thermal Storage Unit operates in two main operating modes or cycles. A
possible combination of these cycles of operation provides the flexibility to meet the daily HVAC or
cooling requirements. Long periods of simultaneously circulating glycol or ammonia through the
coil tubes and circulating water through the ICE CHILLER

should however be avoided to optimise


system performance.
Ice Build: In this operating cycle, ice is built by circulating ammonia or a 30% solution (by weight)
of inhibited ethylene/propylene glycol through the coils contained in the ICE CHILLER

Thermal
Storage Unit. The below table illustrates typical temperatures for 8, 10, 12 and 14 hour build cycles.
At the start of the ice build cycle, the temperature will be higher while at the end of the ice build
cycle, the temperatures will be lower.
Coils installed in Concrete Tank
TSU - F 24
T
S
U
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Unit Capacity & Average Temperatures for Glycol Applications
Model
TSU
Nominal
Capacity
(kWh)
Flow
(l/s)
p
Build Time (h) & Glycol Temperature (C)
8 h 10 h 12 h 14 h
In Out In Out In Out In Out
TSU-95C 325 2,4 111,0 -8,8 -4,4 -6,9 -3,4 -5,8 -2,8 -5,0 -2,4
TSU-115C 404 2,4 130,3 -9,4 -3,8 -7,4 -2,9 -6,2 -2,4 -5,3 -2,1
TSU-120C 422 2,8 100,7 -9,0 -4,2 -7,1 -3,2 -5,9 -2,7 -5,1 -2,3
TSU-145C 510 2,8 117,9 -9,5 -3,7 -7,5 -2,8 -6,3 -2,4 -5,4 -2,1
TSU-170C 597 2,8 134,4 -10,0 -3,2 -7,9 -2,4 -6,6 -2,1 -5,7 -1,8
TSU-200C 703 5,4 71,0 -8,7 -4,4 -6,9 -3,4 -5,8 -2,9 -4,9 -2,5
TSU-225C 791 5,4 78,6 -9,0 -4,2 -7,1 -3,2 -5,9 -2,7 -5,1 -2,3
TSU-185C 650 4,7 111,0 -8,8 -4,4 -6,9 -3,4 -5,8 -2,8 -5,0 -2,4
TSU-230C 808 4,7 130,3 -9,4 -3,8 -7,4 -2,9 -6,2 -2,4 -5,3 -2,1
TSU-270C 949 8,5 63,4 -8,4 -4,8 -9,6 -3,7 -5,6 -3,1 -4,8 -2,7
TSU-310C 1090 8,5 71,0 -8,7 -4,5 -6,8 -3,5 -5,7 -2,9 -4,9 -2,5
TSU-350C 1230 8,5 78,6 -8,9 -4,3 -7,1 -3,3 -5,9 -2,8 -5,1 -2,4
TSU-290C 1020 5,7 117,9 -9,5 -3,7 -7,5 -2,8 -6,3 -2,4 -5,4 -2,1
TSU-340C 1195 5,7 134,4 -10,0 -3,2 -7,9 -2,4 -6,6 -2,1 -5,7 -1,8
TSU-400C 1406 10,7 71,0 -8,7 -4,4 -6,9 -3,4 -5,8 -2,9 -4,9 -2,5
TSU-450C 1582 10,7 78,6 -9,0 -4,2 -7,1 -3,2 -5,9 -2,7 -5,1 -2,3
TSU-480C 1688 10,7 93,8 -9,2 -4,1 -7,2 -3,1 -6,1 -2,6 -5,2 -2,2
TSU-590C 2075 10,7 108,2 -9,7 -3,4 -7,7 -2,6 -6,4 -2,2 -5,6 -1,9
TSU-700C 2462 11,4 135,8 -10,1 -3,1 -8,0 -2,3 -6,7 -1,9 -5,8 -1,7
TSU-800C 2813 21,5 72,4 -8,7 -4,4 -6,9 -3,4 -5,8 -2,9 -4,9 -2,5
TSU-910C 3200 21,5 79,3 -9,0 -4,2 -7,1 -3,2 -5,9 -2,7 -5,1 -2,3
TSU-1050C 3692 17,0 137,3 -10,1 -3,1 -8,0 -2,4 -6,7 -2,0 -5,7 -1,7
TSU-790D 2776 27,4 73,1 -8,2 -5,0 -6,5 -3,8 -5,4 -3,2 -4,7 -2,8
TSU-940D 3303 27,4 82,7 -8,6 -4,6 -6,7 -3,6 -5,7 -3,0 -4,8 -2,6
TSU-1080D 3795 27,4 91,7 -8,8 -4,4 -7,0 -3,3 -5,8 -2,8 -5,0 -2,4
TSU-1220D 4287 27,4 100,7 -9,1 -4,1 -7,2 -3,1 -6,1 -2,6 -5,2 -2,3
TSU-1440D 5060 27,4 114,5 -9,6 -3,6 -7,6 -2,7 -6,3 -2,3 -5,4 -2,0
Unit Capacity for Ammonia Applications
Model
TSU
Pump Recirculation
Refrigerant Feed
Gravity Flooded
Refrigerant Feed
Model
TSU
Pump Recirculation
Refrigerant Feed
Gravity Flooded
Refrigerant Feed
Nominal Capacity
kWh
Nominal Capacity
kWh
Nominal Capacity
kWh
Nominal Capacity
kWh
TSU-95C 318 270 TSU-400C 1322 1164
TSU-115C 389 331 TSU-450C 1470 1322
TSU-120C 404 344 TSU-480C 1656 1417
TSU-145C 492 425 TSU-590C 2015 1737
TSU-170C 580 506 TSU-700C 2356 2018
TSU-200C 661 583 TSU-800C 2683 2366
TSU-225C 735 668 TSU-910C 2982 2680
TSU - F 25
T
h
e
r
m
a
l

S
t
o
r
a
g
e

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
... because temperature matters
Ice Melt: In this operation cycle the warm return water is cooled by direct contact between the
water and the ice, melting ice stored in the modular ICE CHILLER

Thermal Storage Unit.


System Schematics
The basic ice storage system includes an ICE CHILLER

Thermal Storage Unit, a refrigeration


system and ice water pump as shown below. The ICE CHILLER

Unit consists of a multiple tube


serpentine coil submerged in an insulated tank of water. Both the coil and tank are constructed
from hot-dip galvanized steel for corrosion protection.
When no cooling load exists, the refrigeration system operates to build ice on the outside surface
of the coil. This refrigeration effect is provided by feeding refrigerant directly into the coil. To
increase the heat transfer during the ice build cycle the water is agitated by air bubbles from a low
pressure distribution system beneath the coil. When the ice has reached design thickness, BACs
exclusive ICE-LOGIC Ice Thickness Controller sends a signal to turn off the refrigeration system.
When chilled water is required for cooling, the chilled water pump is started, and the melt out cycle
begins. Warm water returning from the load circulates through the ICE CHILLER

tank and is
cooled by direct contact with the melting ice. During this cycle, the tank water is also agitated to
enhance heat transfer and typically provides a constant supply water temperature of 1C or less.
TSU-185C 636 545 TSU-1050C 3576 3116
TSU-230C 777 668 TSU-790D 2704 2281
TSU-270C 910 798 TSU-940D 3170 2692
TSU-310C 1037 921 TSU-1080D 3615 3073
TSU-350C 1157 1041 TSU-1220D 4040 N.A.
TSU-290C 984 847 TSU-1440D 4639 N.A.
TSU-340C 1160 1009
Temperatures for Ammonia Applications
Design Evaporator Temperature
Pump Recirculation Refrigerant Feed
C
Design Evaporator Temperature
Gravity Flooded Refrigerant Feed
C
Storage
Factor
Build Time
Storage
Factor
Build Time
8 h 10 h 12 h 14 8 h 10 h 12 h 14 h
1,00 -6,1 -4,9 -4,1 -3,6 1,00 -5,8 -4,8 -4,2 -3,7
1,05 -5,7 -4,6 -3,9 -3;4 1,05 -5,5 -4,6 -3,9 -3,5
1,10 -5,3 -4,3 -3,7 -3,2 1,10 -5,2 -4,3 -3,7 -3,3
1,15 -5,0 -4,1 -3,5 -3,0 1,15 -5,0 -4,1 -3,6 -3,2
1,20 -4,7 -3,9 -3,3 -2,8 1,20 -4,7 -3,9 -3,4 -3,0
1,25 -4,5 -3,7 -3,1 -2,7 1,25 -4,5 -3,8 -3,3 -2,9
1,30 -4,3 -3,5 -3,0 -2,6 1,30 -4,3 -3,6 -3,1 -2,8
Unit Capacity for Ammonia Applications
Model
TSU
Pump Recirculation
Refrigerant Feed
Gravity Flooded
Refrigerant Feed
Model
TSU
Pump Recirculation
Refrigerant Feed
Gravity Flooded
Refrigerant Feed
Nominal Capacity
kWh
Nominal Capacity
kWh
Nominal Capacity
kWh
Nominal Capacity
kWh
TSU - F 26
T
S
U
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
For a closed chilled water loop see figure below. With this system, warm return water from the load
is pumped through a heat exchanger and cooled by the ice water circuit from the ICE CHILLER


Unit.
For more detailed information on the design and operation of BAC ICE CHILLER

Thermal
Storage Units, contact your local BAC Balticare Representative.
Basic Scheme External Melt Scheme with Intermediate Heat Exchanger
TSU - F 27
T
h
e
r
m
a
l

S
t
o
r
a
g
e

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
... because temperature matters
Engineering Specifications TSU-C/D
1.0 ICE CHIILLER Thermal Storage Unit
1.1 General: The ICE CHILLER

Thermal Storage Unit shall be
Baltimore Aircoil Model TSU-______. Overall unit dimensions shall
not exceed approximately _____ m by ____ m with an overall height
not exceeding ____ m. The operating weight shall not exceed
_______ kg
1.2 Thermal Capacity: Each unit shall have a thermal storage
capacity of _______ kWh operating with ___________refrigerant and
a build time of _______ hours at a _______ C nominal evaporator
temperature.
1.3 Experience: Manufacturers submitting bids for equipment in this
specification shall have a standard production model of this unit,
which has been manufactured and in use for 3 years. The
manufacturer shall offer evidence that the equipment has been
successfully operated on a minimum of 50 applications, which utilize
the same refrigerant and meltout arrangement specified.
2.0 Construction Details
2.1 Tank: The tank shall be constructed of heavy gauge Z600 hot-
dip galvanized steel and reinforced with full-length structural angles
underneath and on all four sides. All seams shall be welded to ensure
watertight cnostruction. A zinc rich coating shall be applied to all
exposed edges and welds.
2.2 Coil: The coil shall be constructed of prime surface serpentine
steel circuits and shall be tested at 15 bar (31 bar for ammonia
applications) air pressure under water. The coil shall be encased in a
steel frame and the entire assembly hot-dip galvanised after
fabrication. For use with Ammonia refrigerant, the coil shall be
complete with purge connection for oil maintenance.
2.3 Insulation: Extruded polystyrene insulation shall be provided
between the tank and the exterior panels. The insulation shall be 80
mm thick on the tank sides and ends, and 50 mm thick on the bottom
and inside the covers.
2.4 Exterior Panels: Exterior panels sealed at all seams provide a
complete vapour barrier and protect the insulation. They are
furnished with B.A.C.s exclusive BALTIBOND

Corrosion Protection
System.
2.5 Covers: The ICE CHILLER

unit(s) shall be provided with


sectional insulated steel covers provided with the BALTIBOND


Corrosion Protection System.
2.6 Ice Thickness Control: A sensing element shall be mounted on
the coil to deactivate the refrigerant compressor at a full build of ice.
2.7 Air pump: Centrifugal regenerative blower for field mounting to
supply low pressure air for agitation of the water. Pump is complete
with a weather protected inlet air filter, and is suitable for outdoor
applications.
2.8 Air Distributor: Low pressure air shall be distributed through
multiple perforated PVC pipes.
TSU - F 28
T
S
U
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Engineering Considerations ICE
CHILLER Products
Installation
ICE CHILLER

Thermal Storage Units must be


installed on a continuous flat level surface. The
pitch of the slab must not exceed 3 mm over a 3
metre span See Figure: Unit Layout Guidelines.
The units should be positioned so there is
sufficient clearance between units and adjacent
walls to allow easy access. When multiple units
are installed, a minimum of 50 cm is
recommended between units.
When installed indoors, the access and slab
requirements described above also apply. The
units should be placed close to a floor drain in the
event they need to be drained. The minimum
height requirement above the tank for proper pipe
installation is 1 metre. The below figure illustrates
the recommended overhead clearance for ICE
CHILLER

Thermal Storage Units. BAC's ICE


CHILLER

Thermal Storage Units are available


unassembled when the units must be installed indoors and access is limited. Erection of
unassembled units will require factory personnel to assist in the field assembly of this equipment.
Contact the local BAC-Balticare Representative for additional details. For large applications, BAC
will provide ICE CHILLER

Thermal Storage Coils for installation in field fabricated concrete tanks.


This product offering demonstrates BAC's product design and flexibility. When coils are required,
BAC's manufacturing capabilities allow coils to be manufactured in the size and configuration
necessary to meet specific site and performance requirements. The concrete tank design is to be
completed by a qualified structural engineer. The below figure illustrates the ICE CHILLER


Thermal Storage Coil layout guidelines. Buoyancy forces due to the density difference between ice
and water require that holddown angles be installed on top of the coils. This will prohibit the coils
from floating in an overcharged condition. For large projects that require ICE CHILLER

Coils,
contact the local BAC Balticare Representative for selection and dimensional information.
Unit Layout Guidelines
Recommended Overhead Clearance Coil Layout Guidelines
TSU - F 29
T
h
e
r
m
a
l

S
t
o
r
a
g
e

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
... because temperature matters
Unit Piping
Piping to the ICE CHILLER

Thermal Storage Unit should follow established piping guidelines. The


coil connections on the unit are galvanized steel and are grooved for mechanical coupling.
For single tank applications, each pair of manifolded coil connections should include a shut off
valve so the unit can be isolated from the system. Below figure illustrates the valve arrangement
for a single unit. It is recommended that the piping include a bypass circuit to allow operation of the
system without the ICE CHILLER

Thermal Storage Unit in the piping loop. This bypass can be


incorporated into the piping design by installing a three-way/modulating valve. This valve can also
be used to control the leaving glycol temperature from the thermal storage unit. Temperature and
pressure taps should be installed to allow for easier flow balancing and system troubleshooting. A
relief valve, set at a maximum of 10 bar, must be installed between the shut off valves and the coil
connections to protect the coils from excessive pressures due to hydraulic expansion. The relief
valve should be vented to a portion of the system, which can accommodate expansion.
CAUTION: The system must include an expansion tank to accommodate changes in fluid volume. Adequately sized air vents must be
installed at the high points in the piping loop to remove trapped air from the system. In cases where the piping to the storage tanks
is at the highest elevation in the loop, purge valves must be installed in the piping on top of the units to remove excess air from the
system.
Below figure illustrates reverse return piping for multiple units installed in parallel. The use of
reverse return piping is recommended to ensure balanced flow to each unit. Shut off valves at each
unit can be used instead of balancing valves.
When large quantities of ICE CHILLER

Thermal Storage Units are installed, the system should
be divided into groups of units. Then, balancing of each unit can be eliminated and a common
balancing valve for each group of units installed. Shut off valves for isolating individual units should
be installed but not used for balancing glycol flow to the unit.
Controls
An inventory control that provides a 4 20 mA signal is available. This control should be used for
determining the amount of ice in inventory and to terminate the ice build cycle. Compolete
operating control details are provided in the Operating and Maintenance Manual.
Glycol
ICE CHILLER

Thermal Storage Units typically use a 25% (by weight) solution of industrially
inhibited ethylene glycol for both corrosion protection and freeze protection. Industrial grade
inhibited ethylene glycol is specifically designed to prevent corrosion in HVAC and heat transfer
equipment. Inhibitors are used to prevent the ethylene glycol from becoming acidic and to protect
the metal components in the thermal storage system. The systems lowest operating temperature
Single Unit Valve Arrangement Reverse Return Piping
TSU - F 30
T
S
U
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
should be 3C to 4C above the glycol freeze point. The freeze point for a system with 25% (by
weight) ethylene glycol is -12C.
CAUTION:
1. Uninhibited ethylene glycol and automotive antifreeze
solutions are NOT to be used on thermal storage
applications.
2. Ethylene glycol solutions are NOT compatible with
galvanised steel parts. Therefore glycol piping should only be
galvanised at the outside.
Water Treatment
In the near freezing temperatures of the ICE CHILLER

Thermal Storage Unit, scale and corrosion


are naturally minimized. Therefore, water treatment for these two conditions may not be required
or may require minimal attention unless the water is corrosive in nature. To control biological
growth, a biocide may be needed to prevent the spread of iron bacteria or other organisms. For
specific recommendations, consult a reputable local water treatment company and follow the
guidelines below:
Notes:
1. A water pH of 8.3 or higher will require periodic passivation of the
galvanised steel to prevent white rust, the accumulation of white,
waxy, non-protective zinc corrosion products on galvanised steel
surfaces.
2. Maximum conductivity of 700 S/cm at 0C is important for proper
operation of the ICE LOGIC ice quantity controller.
If water treatment is implemented to the system, to assure full capacity of the ICE CHILLER


Thermal Storage Unit, the water treatment should not alter the freeze point of water.
Winterization
Precautions must be taken to protect the unit and associated piping from freezing conditions. Heat
tracing and insulation should be installed on all piping connected to the unit. The sight tube,
operating controls and optional inventory sensor must be heat traced and insulated. It is not
necessary to drain the unit during cold weather. Freezing of the water contained in the unit during
the winter will not damage the coil or unit.
Pressure Drop
The ICE CHILLER

Thermal Storage Unit is designed for low pressure drop. Pressure drops, for
different flow rates and for alternative fluids, are available by contacting the local BAC Balticare
Representative.
Warranties
Please refer to the Limitation of Warranties applicable to and in effect at the time of the sale/
purchase of these products.
Property of Water Range
PH 7.0 to 9.0
(1)
Hardness as CaCO
3
30 to 50 mg/l
Alkalinity as CaCO
3
500 mg/l max.
Total Dissolved Solids 1000 mg/l max.
Chlorides 125 mg/l max. as Cl
Sulfates 125 mg/l max.
Conductivity 700 S/cm at 0C
(2)
TR - G 1
Content
Connection Guide ...................................................................................... G2
Materials of Construction ......................................................................... G4
Selection Software ..................................................................................... G5
The Value of Standards ............................................................................. G6
Selection of Remote Sump Tank .............................................................. G7
Filtration Options .................................................................................... G13
Sound Reduction Options ....................................................................... G14
Fundamentals of Sound .......................................................................... G22
Motor Controls ........................................................................................ G47
Plume Abatement .................................................................................... G49
Formulas .................................................................................................. G51
Replacement Parts .................................................................................. G52
Application Guidelines ............................................................................ G53
Glossary .................................................................................................... G61
TR - G 2
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Connection Guide
Introduction
A summary of connection types used by BAC follows. The specific connection type for a particular BAC model can be
found on the unit print drawing or from your local BAC Balticare Representative.
Beveled for Welding (BFW)
This connection type is a pipe stub with a beveled edge. The bevel allows for easier welding in the field and a full
penetration weld. Weld materials fill the trimmed area between two beveled edges as shown here.
Grooved to suit a Mechanical Coupling
This connection type is a pipe stub with a groove to accept a mechanical pipe coupler.
Stud Circle Flat Face Flange
This connection type is a standard bolt and hole pattern at the point of connection to mate to a EN 1092 Flat Face Flange.
When BAC provides this connection type to a hot water basin, mounting bolts are permanently fastened to the
connection plate. All other components (piping, nuts, bolts, flatwashers, etc.) are provided by others unless otherwise
specified.
Male Pipe Thread (MPT)
This connection type is a threaded pipe stub connection designed to mate with a Female Pipe Thread (FPT) fitting.
Side Outlet Depressed Sump Box
This option is offered to facilitate horizontal piping below the cold water basin of a unit, and is a compact alternative to
using an elbow in the piping arrangement, saving installation time and cost.
Weld Details
1. Weld Material, 2. Beveled edge of field-installed piping, 3.Beveled
Edge of BAC connection.
Grooved Connection
1. Grooved for mechanical coupling
TR - G 3
... because temperature matters
Flat Face Flange pattern is shown on this cold
water basin panel to suit a EN 1092 flange
Flat Fac Flange pattern with mounting bolts is
shown on this hot water basin panel to suit a
EN 1092 flange
MPT Connection Side Outlet Depressed Sump Box
TR - G 4
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Materials of Construction
Introduction
Operating environment, desired life expectancy, and budget all influence the materials of construction selected for an
evaporative cooling unit. BAC products are available in a variety of materials and BAC designs focus on long life and
easy maintenance. As a result, owners can maximize their operational goals.
This section describes the materials of construction available for BAC products. To determine the best material options
for your specific project, consult your local BAC Balticare Representative.
Galvanized Steel
Z-600 hot-dip galvanized steel is the heaviest commercially available galvanized steel, universally recognized for its
strength and corrosion resistance. To assure long-life, Z-600 hot-dip galvanized steel is used as the base material for all
steel products and parts, and all exposed cut edges are protected with a zinc-rich coating after fabrication. With good
maintenance and proper water treatment, Z-600 galvanized steel products will provide excellent service life under the
operating conditions normally encountered in comfort cooling and industrial applications.
Baltibond Corrosion Protection
System
The BALTIBOND

Corrosion Protection System is a unique


system approach to evaporative cooling equipment
protection. A special hybrid polymer, formulated for
tenacious bonding, toughness, and impermeability to fluids,
is applied by electrostatic spray to Z-600 hot dip galvanized
steel surfaces. The polymer undergoes a heat-activated,
thermosetting cure process, fuse-bonding it to the
galvanized steel substrate.
The BALTIBOND

Corrosion Protection System can extend


the service life of equipment and alleviates concerns with
white rust, virtually eliminating the need for periodic
passivation of galvanized steel components.
Stainless Steel
In certain critical applications the use of stainless steel is preferred. BAC offers stainless steel as an optional material on
most of its product lines. Two types of stainless steel are available, AISI 304 (DIN Werkst. Nr. 1.4301) or AISI 316 (DIN
Werkst. Nr. 1.4401 or 1.4404). Stainless steel AISI 316 is recommended for applications with chloride concentrations of
more than 500 ppm in the circulating water.
Component Construction
In addition to the various materials available for the structure of its units, BAC carefully selects the materials used for all
components of its products. Additional materials such as corrosion resistant fiberglass reinforced polyester (FRP),
polyvinyl chloride (PVC), aluminum and copper are used for components when necessary to provide the corrosion
resistance required of a unit providing evaporative cooling service.
Which material option is right for my project?
Included within the product section of each open cooling tower, closed circuit cooling tower and evaporative condenser
in this catalog is a discussion on construction options. These sections define the availability of certain materials and
combinations of materials for each product. Refer to these sections for specific product information. Your local BAC
Balticare Sales Representative can guide you on the proper unit construction for your specific project.
TR - G 5
... because temperature matters
Selection Software
Easy-to-Use Selection Software
BAC has developed comprehensive selection software, which simulates the performance of evaporative cooling
equipment for a broad range of climatic and operating conditions. The programme provides all technical data relevant
to the selected model(s).
Cooling Tower Selections
The selection programme provides the ability to make selections for a wide range of operating conditions simultaneously
for different cooling tower product lines and hence allows side by side comparisons of different unit configurations.
Product selections often contain reserve capacity at the design conditions. Selections can be optimised by maximising
flow rates, hot and cold water temperatures, wet bulb temperatures or approach.
Closed Circuit Cooling Tower Selections
The closed circuit cooling tower selection programme provides equipment selections for applications utilizing water,
aqueous ethylene glycol or aqueous propylene glycol as the process fluid.
Evaporative Condenser Selections
The evaporative condenser selection program provides equipment selections for applications utilizing R-717 (ammonia),
R-22, and R-134a.
Accessories
The selection program evaluates the use of accessories that may impact capacity (i.e., low-sound fans, sound
attenuation, etc.)
Alternative Fan Speed
Standard selections at nominal fan speed utilise a standard kW fan motor to meet full load performance. Alternative
selections based on reduced fan speed (and motor kW) are also available.
Performance Curves
The selection program generates performance curves based on flow rates ranging from 80% to 120% of the design flow
rate. Performance curves are a graphical representation of the leaving water temperature versus the entering wet-bulb
temperature, and are typically evaluated at a number of ranges.
Sound Data
The selection program provides sound ratings for standard selections at any distance for your reference. For extremely
sound sensitive installations, sound ratings are also available for units with low sound fans and sound attenuation.
TR - G 6
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
The Value of Standards
Introduction
Baltimore Aircoil strongly believes in the value of standards and independent certification programmes. Through this
philosophy customers can be assured of consistent level of performance and quality when using BAC products and
services.
ISO9001:2000
This fundamental belief is demonstrated first and foremost
by ISO 9001:2000 Certification of BACs design,
engineering, and manufacturing of evaporative cooling
products. Compliance with ISO 9001:2000 standards offers
BAC customers better, more consistent quality, reliable
performance, and confidence that the product can be
delivered on time and per the specifications. Consistent
quality also reduces the potential for installation and operational problems. Any problems reported from the field receive
swift corrective and preventative actions to prevent reoccurrence. This level of performance is assured through frequent
internal training and audits, backed by rigorous external audits by an independent, ISO-accredited Registrar. ISO
9001:2000 also requires demonstrating continuous improvement of products, processes, and systems over time,
benefiting both BAC and its many customers.
European Directives and Standards
The design of BAC products is influenced by European Directives and recognised standards. Examples include the
following:
European Machine Directive 98/37/EC
European Pressure Equipment Directive PED 97/23/EC
ATEX Directive: 94/9/EC
Low voltage directive 73/23/EEC, 93/68/EC
Electromagnetic Compatibility: 89/336/EEC, 92/31/EEC, 93/68/EEC, 2004/10/EC
EN 13741 Thermal performance acceptance testing of mechanical draught series wet cooling towers.
Besides supporting these directives and standards, BAC actively works with industry organisations, such as ASHRAE,
ASME, CEN, ARI, CTI, EUROVENT CECOMAF, and FM to improve their standards and technical documentation, or
develop standards or guidelines where none currently exist. For instance, BAC supported the development of the
Recommended Code of Practice to keep your Cooling System efficient and safe, and the brochure Evaporative
Cooling, how efficient heat transfer technology helps to protect the environment, both published by EUROVENT-
CECOMAF. More recently BAC supported the development of the VDMA Einheitsblatt 24649 Empfehlungen zum
wirksamen und sicheren Betrieb einer Verdunstungskhlanlage. BAC is an active member of numerous trade
associations in the US and in Europe.
BAC strongly encourages customers, suppliers, and competitors to join us developing and supporting recognised
standards and certification programmes for the benefit of the industry and the society as a whole. BAC welcomes
feedback on this subject, which can be send to info-bac@BaltimoreAircoil.be.
Eurovent-Cecomaf Recommended
Code of Practice
Eurovent-Cecomaf
Evaporative Cooling Brochure
TR - G 7
... because temperature matters
Selection of Remote Sump Tank
For an Open Cooling Tower
Remote sump tanks are used on evaporative cooling systems to provide a means of cold water basin freeze protection
during cold weather operation. The remote sump tank is usually located in a heated, indoor space, and may preclude
the need to winterize the evaporative cooling equipment. A remote sump tank must provide sufficient storage volume to
accommodate all the water that will drain back to it during cooling system shutdown, including:
The total volume of water contained within the cooling tower during operation (cooling tower volume). The volume of
water contained in all system piping located above the operating water level of the remote sump tank (system piping
volume).
The volume of water contained within any heat exchanger, or other equipment located above the operating water
level of the remote sump tank that will drain to the tank when the cooling system is shut down (system components
volume).
The maximum volume of water contained within the cooling tower is the volume of water to the overflow level. Besides
the water in the cold water basin during operation, this volume will take into consideration water in the distribution
system, water in suspension in the wet deck, plus an allowance for the external pulldown from piping and other
equipment. This simplified method is a conservative approach as it will not consider any volume reductions based on
flow rates. For specific information for your application, contact your local BAC Representative.
Saf et y Fac t or
When designing a remote sump tank, make sure that your basin has a net available volume that is 5% greater than the
total volume required. The net available volume is the volume between the operating level and the overflow level in the
remote sump tank The minimum operating level must be maintained in the remote sump tank to prevent vortexing of air
through the tank's suction connection.
Ex ampl e
A VTL-059-H will be installed on a cooling tower/heat exchanger system that will utilize a remote sump tank. The tower
side volume contained in the heat exchanger is 95 liters The system has been designed with 10 meter of DN 100 pipe
that will be above the operating level of the remote sump tank. What is the correct remote sump tank volume?
Solution:
From Table 4, the cold water basin volume at overflow for the VTL-059-H is 555 liters.
From Table 6, the DN 100 pipe will contain 8,2 liters of water per linear meter pipe. The total volume contained in the
DN 100 pipe is 82 liters.
The tower side volume of the heat exchanger is 95 liters.
The total volume required is:
Cooling Tower Volume at Overflow (555 liters)
+ System Piping Volume (82 liters)
+ System Components Volume (95 liters)
= Total Volume 732 liters
732 liters x 1.05 (safety factor) = 770 liters required.
From the above calculation the minimum volume of the remote sump tank must be 770 liters.
TR - G 8
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Table 1 : Series 3000 - D
Table 2 : TXV
Table 3 : FXT
S3000-D Cold Water Basin Volumes
Model No.
at Operating Level
(l)
at Overflow Level
(l)
S3 D240L - S3 D299 L 1597 3626
S3 D333L - S3 D379 L 1597 3857
S3 D455L - S3 D527 L 2036 4879
S3 D412L - S3 D436 L 2036 4614
S3 D552L - S3 D672 L 3285 6764
S3 D728L - S3 D828 L 3285 8312
S3 D872L - S3 D970 L 3285 9330
S3 D1056L - S3 D985 L 3285 10121
S3 D473L - S3 D501 L 2710 5863
S3 D583L - S3 D725 L 4201 8282
S3 D1132L - S3 D1301 L 4201 12154
TXV Cold Water Basin Volumes
Model No.
at Operating Level
(l)
at Overflow Level
(l)
TXV 109 - TXV 154 508 2659
TXV 177 - TXV 193 679 3565
TXV 292 - TXV 237 720 4103
TXV 354 - TXV 500 1090 6213
TXV 310 - TXV 425 820 5341
FXT Cold Water Basin Volumes
Model No.
at Operating Level
(l)
at Overflow Level
(l)
FXT 27 - FXT 32 106 428
FXT 43 - FXT 51 155 553
FXT 60 - FXT 68 208 746
FXT 74 - FXT 88 310 1033
FXT 97 FXT 133 477 1590
FXT 160 FXT 173 636 2112
FXT 211 FXT 250 636 2521
FXT 194 FXT 266 954 3180
FXT 320 FXT 346 1272 4224
FXT 422 FXT 500 1272 5042
TR - G 9
... because temperature matters
Table 4 : VTL
Table 5 : VXT
Table 6 : Pipe Capacities
VTL Cold Water Basin Volumes
Model No.
at Operating Level
(l)
at Overflow Level
(l)
VTL 039 VTL 079 290 555
VTL 076 VTL 095 435 815
VTL 086 VTL 137 580 1090
VTL 139 VTL 215 875 1655
VTL 225 1170 2175
VTL 227 875 1655
VTL 238 VTL 272 1170 2175
VXT Cold Water Basin Volumes
Model No.
VXT
at Operating Level
(l)
at Overflow Level
(l)
VXT 10 VXT 25 45 100
VXT 30 VXT 55 100 210
VXT 65 VXT 85 150 325
VXT 95 VXT 135 205 435
VXT 150 VXT 185 275 580
VXT N215 VXT N265 850 1850
VXT N310 VXT N395 1220 2810
VXT 315 VXT 400 1400 2300
VXT N430 VXT N535 1630 3765
VXT 470 VXT 600 2125 3490
VXT 630 VXT 800 2850 4680
VXT 870 VXT 1200 4300 7060
Nominal Pipe Size Inside Diameter Volume per linear meter
Inches mm
mm
Based on Schedule 40 pipe
Liters
3
4
6
80
100
150
77,9
102,3
154,1
4,8
8,2
18,7
8
10
12
200
250
300
202,7
254,5
303,3
32,3
50,9
72,3
14
16
18
350
400
450
333,5
381,1
428,8
87,4
114,1
144,4
20
24
500
600
478,0
574,9
179,5
259,6
TR - G 10
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
For a Closed Circuit Cooling Tower or Evaporative Condenser
Note: This section provides instruction in the selection of a remote sump tank for a closed circuit cooling tower or
evaporative condenser only.
Remote sump tanks are used on evaporative cooling systems to provide a means of cold water basin freeze protection
during cold weather operation. When the recirculating pump of a closed circuit cooling tower or evaporative condenser
is not operating, all of the recirculating water drains by gravity to the remote sump. The remote sump tank is usually
located in a heated, indoor space, and may preclude the need to winterize the cold water basin.
The remote sump must be sized to accommodate the suction head for the pump plus a surge volume to hold all the water
that will drain back to the tank when the pump is shut down. This surge volume (also called drain down volume) includes
water in the evaporative cooling equipment and water held in the piping between the unit and the remote sump. The
volume of water in the evaporative equipment includes the water in suspension (water within the spray distribution
system and falling through the heat transfer section) and water in the cold water basin during normal operation. Tables
1 through 4 provide the volume of water in suspension plus the water in the cold water basin, labeled as "basin volume
at overflow level." Table 4 can be used to calculate the volume of water in the piping between the unit and the remote
sump (includes riser and drain piping) for applications where piping is Schedule 40.
To select a remote sump tank for a particular application, determine the total volume (spray water volume plus piping
volume) and select a remote sump tank with a net available volume that is 5% greater than required.
HFL hybrid closed circuit cooling towers do not require remote sumps. Due to their small water volume and the unique
sump/ plenum design, they can switch from wet to dry operation and vice versa without the need to drain the sump.
Electrical sump heaters will protect the sump from freezing at ambient temperatures as low as -25C, even when the
fan(s) is (are) in operation.
Appl i c at i on Not es
The standard close-coupled centrifugal pump normally furnished with BAC units is designed and selected specifically for
the pump head and flow rate required when the pump is mounted on the unit. This pump cannot be used for remote
sump applications and is therefore omitted. The following factors should be considered when selecting remote
pumps:
Total static head from the remote sump tank operating level to the inlet of the evaporative equipment.
Pipe and valve friction losses.
For all Closed Circuit Cooling Towers and all Evaporative Condensers, 14 kPa water pressure is required at the inlet
of the water distribution system.
Required spray flow rate as shown in Tables 1 through 4.
A valve should always be installed in the pump discharge line so that the water flow can be adjusted to the
proper flow rate and pressure. Inlet water pressure should be measured with a pressure gauge installed in the water
supply riser near the equipment inlet. The valve should be adjusted to permit the specified inlet pressure, which results
in the design water flow rate.
Accurate inlet water pressure and flow rate are important for proper evaporative equipment operation. Higher
pressure (in excess of 70 kPa) can cause leaks in the spray distribution system. Lower pressure or low flow may cause
improper wetting of the coils, which will negatively affect thermal performance, promote scaling, and may also cause
excessive drift.
On remote sump applications, the standard float valve(s) and strainer(s) are omitted from the cold water basin and a
properly sized outlet connection is added. The remote sump outlet connection is located on the bottom of most units. On
smaller Series VL and VX units, the connection is located on the end or back side of the unit. To clarify the location of
the remote sump outlet connection, refer to the appropriate unit print, available from your local BAC Balticare
Representative or at www.BaltimoreAircoil.com.
Another effect of using a remote sump is that the operating weight of the evaporative unit is reduced (design changes,
the omission of the integral spray pump, and/or changes in cold water basin volume can contribute to this deduct).
Ex ampl e
An FXV-422 will be installed on a system that will also utilize a remote sump tank. The system has been designed with
12 meter of DN 150 mm pipe that will be above the operating level of the remote sump tank. What is the correct volume
of the remote sump?
TR - G 11
... because temperature matters
Solution:
From Table 1, the spray water volume for an FXV-422 is 997 liters.
From Table 4, the DN 150 mm pipe will contain 18,7 l/s of water per linear meter. The total volume contained in the DN
150 mm pipe is 12 meter x 18,7 liter/meter = 225 liters.
The total volume required is:
Spray Water Volume (997 liters)
+ System Piping Volume (225 liters)
= Total Volume 1222 liters
1222 liters x 1,05 (safety factor) : 1283 liters required.
From the above calculation the minimum volume of the remote sump tank must be 1283 liters.
Table 1 : FXV - CXV - HXI
Table 2 : VXI - VXC
CXV FXV HXI Cold Water Basin Volumes
Model No.
CXV
Model No.
FXV
Model No.
HXI
at Operating
Level
(l)
at Overflow Level
(l)
Spray Water Flow
(l/s)
Outlet Size
(3)
CXV 74 - 93 FXV 42x HXI 42x 556 997 12 150
CXV 117 - 147 FXV 43x HXI 43x 847 1519 18 150
CXV 153 - 193 FXV (Q)44x HXI 44x 1137 2041 24 200
CXV 207 - 296 FXV (Q)54x HXI (Q)54x 685 2217 45 200
CXV 338 - 435 FXV (Q)56x HXI (Q)56x 1036 3350 54 200
CXV 283 - 327 FXV 64x HXI (Q)64x 785 2852 45 200
CXV 416 - 481 FXV (Q)66x HXI (Q)66x 1187 4311 54 200
CXV D645 - D792 FXV D288 3207 5308 108,5 300
CXV D791 - D944 FXV D364 4259 6587 108,5 300
VXI - VXC Cold Water Basin Volumes
Model No.
VXI
Model No.
VXC
at Operating
Level
(l)
at Overflow Level
(l)
Spray Water Flow
(l/s)
Outlet Size
(3)
VXI 9-x VXC 14 - 28 45 100 2,2 65
VXI 18-x VXC 36 - 65 100 210 4,7 80
VXI 27-x VXC 72 - 97 150 325 7,1 100
VXI 36-x VXC 110 - 135 205 435 9,5 100
VXI 50-x VXC 150 - 205 275 580 13,9 150
VXI 70-x VXC 221 - 265 850 1850 19,2 150
- VXC 357 - 454 1400 2300 30,8 200
VXI 180-x VXC 562 - 680 2125 3490 46,7 250
- VXC 714 - 908 2125 3490 61,6 250
VXI 360-x VXC 1124 - 1360 4300 6420 93,4 300
VXI 95-x VXC S288 - S350 805 1850 25,2 150
VXI 145-x VXC S403 - S504 1220 2810 38,5 200
VXI 190-x VXC S576 - S700 1820 3730 50,4 250
VXI 290-x VXC S806 - S1010 2470 5690 77 300
VXI 144-x VXC 495 - 516 1795 3410 39,1 200
VXI 215-x VXC 715 - 804 2725 5175 56,8 250
VXI 288-x VXC 990 - 1032 3655 6935 78,2 250
VXI 430-x VXC 1430 - 1608 5515 10475 113,6 300
TR - G 12
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Table 3 : VFL - VCL
Table 4 : Pipe Capacities
Notes:
1. The overflow level is the spray water volume and based on the
maximum operating water level in the cold water basin with no net
drop leg included in the piping system below the unit outlet.
2. All remote sump unit volumes are based on bottom outlets sized
as noted, except those models with an asterisk, which are based
on an end outlet sized as noted.
3. Drain connection size is for remote sump applications only. For
location of drain connection, please refer to unit certified print or
contact your local BAC Balticare representative.
VFL - VCL Cold Water Basin Volumes
Model No.
VFL
Model No.
VCL
at Operating
Level
(l)
at Overflow Level
(l)
Spray Flow
(l/s)
Outlet Size
(3)
VFL 24X VCL 042-079 290 555 5,9 100
VFL 36X VCL 084-133 435 815 9,0 100
VFL 48X VCL 131-159 580 1090 12,1 150
VFL 72X VCL 167-258 875 1655 17,9 150
VFL 96X VCL 239-321 1170 2175 24,2 200
Nominal Pipe Size Inside Diameter Volume per linear meter
Inches mm
mm
Based on Schedule 40 pipe
Liters
3
4
6
80
100
150
77,9
102,3
154,1
4,8
8,2
18,7
8
10
12
200
250
300
202,7
254,5
303,3
32,3
50,9
72,3
14
16
18
350
400
450
333,5
381,1
428,8
87,4
114,1
144,4
20
24
500
600
478,0
574,9
179,5
259,6
TR - G 13
... because temperature matters
Filtration Options
Separators
Feat ur es
Available in flow rates from 2,5 to 76 l/sec.
Automatic purge complete with electrically actuated
industrial grade ball valve and adjustable purge timer.
Close coupled, end suction centrifugal pump & TEFC
motor.
Cast iron pre-strainer with removable SST basket.
Control Panel - IP65 fibreglass enclosure with motor start/
stop, circuit breakers, door disconnect switch, 3-position
pump motor switch, adjustable 24 hours purge timer.
Skid - fusion bonded polyester coated carbon steel.
Polyester powder coated carbon steel interconnecting
piping, includes flow controller and isolation ball valves.
Options: package recovery system.
Appl i c at i on
BAC's package separators are designed specifically to remove dirt, sand, silt, precipitates, and suspended solids from
process fluids. The solids in suspension are separated using the centrifugal forces and moved in an accumulation
chamber. The clean fluid is returned to the process. The system utilises an automatic purge to drain the separated
solids. The separator will remove unwanted contaminates resulting in increased system efficiency and decreased
operating costs. In conjunction with evaporative cooling equipment it is recommended to provide this equipment with a
sump sweeper piping system.
Media Filters
Designed for high pressure open applications - 700 kPa.
Feat ur es
Available in flow rates ranging from 1 to 12 l/sec.
Positive filtration down to 10 micron (5 micron optional).
Fusion bonded epoxy lined /polyester coated carbon steel
vessel rated at 700 kPa (optional higher pressure ratings
and ASME code stamp available).
Industrial grade brass 3-way valves and polyester powder
coated carbon steel face piping.
Closed coupled, end suction centrifugal pump and TEFC
motor with cast iron pre-strainer and SST basket.
Skid - fusion bonded polyester coated carbon steel.
Automatic control cabinet IP 65 fibreglass enclosure
including door disconnects switch, circuit/breaker
protection, electric actuator, step-down transformer, 3-
position pump motor switch, pressure differential switch,
adjustable solid state timer and 24 hours backwash clock.
Source water back wash.
Appl i c at i on
BAC's filtration systems are designed specifically to handle a wide variety of industrial water filtration applications. The
permanent media filters use a silica sand media that easily backwashes for cleaning. The filter provides an excellent
method for removing dirt, precipitates and suspended solids. In conjunction with evaporative cooling equipment it is
recommended to provide this equipment with a sump sweeper piping system.
Ser vi c e
Technical field service representatives are available to provide guidance for application, installation and repair.
TR - G 14
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Sound Reduction Options
VX Sound Attenuation
Sound Ef f i c i ent and Fl ex i bl e VX desi gn
Sound is an important consideration in the selection and application of evaporative
cooling equipment. Depending on actual site conditions acceptable sound levels can differ
greatly. The inherently quiet VX-line design and extensive range of VX sound attenuation
options provide economic solutions for a wide variety of acoustical requirements.
Sound reductions shown are expressed as sound pressure data at 15 m from the air intake.
Daytime : full fan speed. Night-time : derated to half speed.
I ndoor Appl i c at i ons
Directional free field sound data or overall sound power
levels are not normally the best way to describe the
acoustical behaviour of VX evaporative cooling equipment
when installed indoors. In these cases Partial Sound Power
levels are the best method to define the sound emission.
Partial Sound Power levels represent the sound energy
radiated from the sound source over a single directional flat
surface (air intake and discharge).
Partial Sound Power data for VX models are the result of
extensive sound testing using the parallelepiped test
methodology and describe the sound radiation for indoor
environments.
VX Sound At t enuat i on Al t er nat i ves
Arrangement Day Night Typical Noise Criteria and NC Range
Standard VX unit Base - 8 dB (A)
Light industrial & commercial areas.
NC-45 to NC-55
VX unit + XA - 9 dB (A) - 17 dB (A)
Business premises, laboratories occupied work areas
. NC-40 to NC-45
VX unit + XB - 17 dB (A) - 25 dB (A)
Large offices, retail shops needing acceptable listening conditions.
NC-35 to NC-40
VX unit + XC - 21 dB (A) - 29 dB (A)
Rural or residential environment.
NC-30 to NC-35
Sound Testing VX
TR - G 15
... because temperature matters
Sc ope of Suppl y
Intake attenuator with access plenum and access door at both unit ends.
Discharge attenuator with access plenum and access door at the back of the unit.
Acoustical baffles at both intake and discharge with flex tissue protection and encased in a galvanized steel frame
with the Baltibond Corrosion Protection System.
Acoustical material that is resistant to water, biological and chemical attack.
Acoustically insulated solid bottom panels mounted under the full length of the unit.
Lubrication lines extended to the air intake side of the attenuator to facilitate lubrication of the fan shaft bearings.
Internal fan screens at the air intake side of the unit to guard the fan and drive system.
All steel parts are Z600 galvanized steel with BALTIPLUS Protection.
VX Sound At t enuat i on Opt i ons
All VX sound attenuator options can be supplied with
BALTIBOND

Corrosion Protection System.


The sound attenuators can be fitted with mesh screens at
the intake and/or discharge.
Optional perforated steel sheet is available for additional
baffle protection.
VL Sound Attenuation
Combi nat i on of Low Hei gt h w i t h Low Sound
The Low Profile Series VL provides optimal solutions for sound sensitive installations requiring low equipment height.
Different sound attenuation packages are available to meet specific sound and lay-out requirements.
For Horizontal Air Intake, BAC offers two Sound Attenuation alternatives:

1. XA Attenuator 2. XB Attenuator 3. XC Attenuator
Discharge attenuator with vertical baffles Discharge attenuator with vertical baffles Double discharge attenuator with vertical baffles.
Intake attenuator with angled baffles
Intake attenuator with additional baffles and not
angled
Double intake attenuator with baffles not angled
Approximate distance between baffles is 300 mm Approximate distance between baffles is 120 mm Approximate distance between baffles is 120 mm
VX Standard acoustical baffle
HS-Type HD-Type with Double Intake Attenuator
TR - G 16
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Ver t i c al Ai r I nt ake Conf i gur at i ons
In certain lay-out situations it may be desirable to install Low
Profile Series VL products with VS vertical air intake and
discharge sound attenuation. Such situations are usually
limited to indoor installations where the equipment cannot be
located at the perimeter of the building.
VS attenuators incorporate the installation of discharge
deflectors which guide the discharge air stream away from
the air intake. Recycling of discharge air under all weather
and wind conditions cannot however entirely be avoided, in
particular for larger multi cell installations.
Sound Reduc t i ons
Sound reductions shown are expressed as sound pressure data at 15m from air intake.
Daytime: full fan speed. Nighttime: derated to half fan speed
I ndoor Appl i c at i ons
Due to its low height, VL evaporative cooling equipment is
the preferred choice for indoor applications. In such cases
the sound emission and evaluation procedure is significantly
different to open installations with free field sound radiation.
For indoor applications Partial Sound Power levels are the
best method to describe the sound emission. Partial Sound
Power levels represent the sound energy radiated by the
sound source over a single directional flat surface (air intake/
air discharge). All sound attenuators for Low Profile Series
VL products can be applied for indoor use.
Partial Sound Power data for VL models are the result of
extensive sound testing using the parallelepiped
methodology and describe the sound radiation in indoor
environments.
Arrangement Day Night Typical Noise Criteria & NC Range
Standard VL unit Base - 8 dB (A)
Acceptable working conditions in light industrial & commercial areas.
NC-45 to NC-55
VL units + HS or VS - 17 dB (A) - 25 dB (A)
Large offices, retail shops needing acceptable listening conditions.
NC-35 to NC-40
VL unit + HD - 21 dB (A) - 29 dB (A)
Good listening conditions, residential environment.
NC-30 to NC-35
VS-Type
Sound Testing VL
TR - G 17
... because temperature matters
Easy Mai nt enanc e
With evaporative cooling equipment ease of maintenance is linked to ease of access. All VL sound attenuators have
been designed to provide spacious access to the interior areas and components of the unit requiring maintenance.
1. Discharge attenuator access door : The access door in the discharge attenuator provides easy access to the spray
system and discharge attenuation baffles.
2. Pan access door : Circular door for access to the float ball adjustment and strainer
3. Intake attenuator access doors : Large twin access doors are located at both sides at the air intake attenuator.
When removed, access is available to the fan motor and fan drive as well as the spray water pump.
Sc ope of St andar d Suppl y
Intake attenuator with access plenum and large size access doors on both sides of the unit.
Discharge attenuator with access plenum and access door.
Bottom panel with drain (under fan section).
Acoustical baffles with flex tissue protection and encased in a galvanized steel frame with BALTIBOND Corrosion
Protection System.
Acoustical material that is resistant to water, biological and chemical attack.
Lubrication lines extended to the air intake side of the attenuator to facilitate lubrication of the fan shaft bearings.
All steel parts are Z600 galvanized steel with BALTIPLUS Protection.
TR - G 18
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Avai l abl e Opt i ons
All VL sound attenuator options can be supplied with the
BALTIBOND Corrosion Protection System.
Relocation of the spray pump to the pipe connection end
of the unit is available for easy access to the spray pump.
The sound attenuators can be fitted with mesh screens at
the intake and/or discharge.
Optional perforated steel sheet is available for additional
baffle protection.
Axial Fan Sound Reduction Options
Qui et Ener gy Ef f i c i ent Sol ut i ons
Inherently quiet axial fan products are BAC's Series 3000D cooling towers, FXV-D and CXV-D coil products, as well as
the Series 1500 product lines.
The induced draught crossflow and combined flow configuration of these product lines have a number of distinct
advantages in terms of energy efficiency and sound radiation.
The waterborne noise is minimised by the gravity water distribution and crossflow fill arrangement, which leads the
water down into the cold water basin without the typical splash noise of counterflow arrangements. This eliminates
the need for installing expensive water silencers in the pan section of the equipment.
The mechanical drive arrangement is inside the cooling tower casing.

St andar d Low Noi se Fans
All SERIES 3000-D Cooling Towers, FXV-D and CXV-D coil
products as well as Series 1500 and HXI/HXC hybrid
products are fitted with highly efficient low noise fans as
standard. These fans have a special blade cord width and
trailing edge arrangement. Due to their low tip speed extra
low sound emissions are achieved.
Relocation of spray pump on VL unit
Series 3000-D, FXV-D, CXV-D product lines Series 1500 product lines
Standard Low Noise Fan on S3000-D, FXV-D
and CXV-D
TR - G 19
... because temperature matters
Opt i onal " Whi sper Qui et " f ans
For extremely sound sensitive applications "Whisper Quiet" fans can be used in lieu of the standard Low Noise fans.
Series 3000-D cooling towers, FXV-D and CXV-D coil products :
The "Whisper Quiet" fan option on Series 3000D, FXV-D and CXV-D coil products consists of a multi-blade aerofoil fan
design with an exceptionally wide cord resulting in optimum high solidity for whisper quiet operation.
Series 1500 product lines :
On the Series 1500 product lines the "Whisper Quiet" fan option consists of a hub of one piece steel block with specially
designed aluminium hinged blades and allowing individual adjustment or removal at standstill.
The high solidity specially shaped blades with unique end caps result in whisper quiet operation.
Specially shaped aerofoil blade design Allowing individual adjustment or removal at
standstill
Unique end cap design for further sound
reduction
Allowing individual adjustment or removal at
standstil.
TR - G 20
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
I nduc ed Dr af t At t enuat or Pac k age
To optionally match the most stringent acoustical requirements, the Induced Draft Attenuation Package is available for
Series 3000D cooling towers, FXV-D and CXV-D coil products and Series 1500 products.
The package consists of an acoustical enclosure of the fan discharge cowl and intake attenuation on each air inlet side.
Intake attenuators have unique circular acoustical baffles in a staggered arrangement. Intake and discharge attenuators
are always fitted together to obtain optimal acoustical performance.
The attenuator package is available for standard low noise fans and on specific models fitted with the optional whisper
quiet fans.
Ax i al Fan Ef f i c i enc y f or Low Noi se Appl i c at i ons
Typical sound emission reductions achieved by BAC's axial fan product lines (Series 3000-D cooling towers, FXV-D &
CXV-D coil products and Series 1500 product lines) are shown in the table below.
* Available only for certain models.
Sc ope of Suppl y
Standard products have low noise axial fans comprising cast iron hub and multiple aluminium fan blades with
adjustable pitch. Fan blades have a special blade cord width and trailing edge arrangement to optimise airflow and
minimise noise.
Optional "Whisper Quiet" fans on Series 3000D, FXV-D and CXV-D models are constructed of fibreglass reinforced
plastic blades of specially shaped aerofoil design. The blades are fixed on a steel, plastic coated, fan hub by
aluminium blade supports and fastened through U-bolts for simple field assembly.
Optional "Whisper Quiet" fans on Series 1500 (TXV, FXV, CXV) products consist of one piece steel block hub and
specially shaped aluminium hinged blades allowing simple field assembly and unique end caps.
Factory assembled acoustical discharge enclosure (shipped loose for installation on site) is constructed of Z600
heavy-gauge hot-dip galvanised steel protected with the Baltiplus Corrosion Protection (exterior painting)
Arrangement Day Night Application
Standard Low Noise Fans Base - 8 dB(A) Urban & light industrial
Standard Low Noise Fans
with Sound Attenuation
- 5 dB(A) - 13 dB(A) Suburban & laboratories
"Whisper Quiet" Fans - 12 dB(A) - 18 dB(A) Residential & commercial
"Whisper Quiet" Fans
with Sound Attenuation*
- 15 dB(A) - 20 dB(A) Domestic & rural
1. Discharge attenuator encloses fan section; 2. Intake Sound Attenuator (at each air inlet side)
TR - G 21
... because temperature matters
Factory assembled and installed intake attenuator comprising of a Z600 heavy gauge hot-dip galvanised steel
protected with the Baltiplus Corrosion Protection (exterior painting). Circular acoustical baffles designed to minimise
air pressure drop with acoustical materials resistant to water, biological and chemical attack.
Opt i ons
Air discharge screens fitted on the discharge attenuator.
Air intake screens fitted on the intake attenuators.
Sound attenuation with the Baltibond Corrosion Protection System: All galvanised steel parts, baffles, are protected
with the Baltibond Corrosion Protection System.
Research and Development
Thermal and acoustical properties are partners in the performance of evaporative cooling equipment and hence must
be established and evaluated together. The thermal performance of BAC equipment is verified at the BAC Research and
Development Centre, the most advanced in the industry. Large environmental test chambers and refrigeration systems
are able to simulate a wide range of climate and system test conditions on full size equipment. Sound tests are
conducted for equipment, with and without sound attenuation, at various directions, distances and fan speeds. At BAC
thermal and sound test programmes go hand in hand, providing reliable data for a wide range of environmental and
operating conditions.

BAC' s Sound Dat a Sheet s
For product type units, BAC provides sound pressure data
per octave band and sound power data for all four sides and
the top of the unit. For indoor applications BAC provides
partial sound data at both air inlet and discharge. For more
information on acoustics please refer to the chapter
"Fundamentals of Sound".
Thermal rating test Acoustical test
TR - G 22
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Fundamentals of Sound
Introduction
Sound is an important consideration in the selection of mechanical equipment. The purpose of this article is to present
a procedure for evaluating the sound levels created by evaporative cooling equipment to determine if these levels will
be acceptable to the neighbors* who live or work near the installation. In addition, sound levels must comply with local
code requirements. While most often these levels are found to be acceptable, certain situations may call for sound levels
lower than those produced by the equipment. It is then the task of the manufacturer, engineer, and owner to determine
the best way to decrease the sound levels for the particular installation. This article presents a means for assessing the
impact of the evaporative cooling equipments sound on a neighbor and possible means to reduce that impact should it
be a potential problem.
The procedure consists of three steps, followed by a fourth step if necessary:
1. Establish the noise criterion for the equipment: i.e., determine the sound levels that will be considered acceptable by
the neighbors who will be exposed to them. Also consult local codes for appropriate sound levels. For a general idea
of how sound levels produced by a cooling tower compare to sound from other common sound sources, see the
graph below.
2. Estimate the sound levels that will be produced by the equipment, taking into account the effects of equipment
geometry, the installation, and the distance from the equipment to the neighbor.*
3. Compare the noise criterion with the expected sound levels to determine if the sound levels from the equipment will
be acceptable.
4. In the event that the equipment sound levels are excessive for the particular site conditions, a method should be
determined to modify the neighbors perception of the sound. There are three ways to change the effects that any
undesirable sound has on the receiver of that sound:
- Modify the source of the sound
- Control the path of the sound
- Adjust the receivers expectation or satisfaction, keeping in mind that sound can be very subjective and is highly
dependent on perception
Note: *In this article, the term neighbour is used to denote the person or group of persons to be protected against excessive sound levels
created by the evaporative cooling equipment. It is intended that this include not only the occupants of other buildings, but also the occupants
of the building served by the equipment.
Some ways that sound from BAC equipment can be adjusted for a more favorable impact on the receiver include:
TR - G 23
... because temperature matters
Modify equipment location or position
If possible, simply do not run the equipment at the critical time (at night for residential areas and during the day for
office parks)
Install a second motor, two-speed motor, or VFD so that the unit can run at lower speeds when the full capacity is not
required
Use a low sound fan
Oversize the equipment and run the fan at lower speed and power level
Construct sound barriers (sound walls, etc.) or use existing barriers (trees, other buildings, etc.) when planning the
location of the equipment
Install sound attenuation (available on the air intake and air discharge of the equipment)
The article also includes several appendices to lend assistance in understanding and performing some aspects of a
sound analysis. Contact your local BAC Representative with questions on sound analysis or sound issues specific to
your installation.
Terminology and Units of Measurement
The following terms and units of measure are used in this article, in accordance with accepted U.S. Standards:
Decibel (dB) the unit of measurement used in sound control (dimensionless, used to express logarithmically the ratio
of a sound level to a reference level).
dB(A) the A-weighted sound pressure level.
Evaporative cooling equipment used in this article to represent all BAC product lines in the sound analysis (includes
open cooling towers, closed circuit cooling towers, and evaporative condensers).
Frequency the number of repetitions per unit time (the unit for frequency is the Hertz (1 cycle/s)).
Hertz abbreviated Hz, is the unit of frequency, defined as cycles per second.
Noise unwanted sound.
Noise Criteria the maximum allowable sound pressure level(s) (Lp) at a specific location. Criteria may be expressed
as a single overall value or in individual octave bands. The NC values and curves are further explained throughout this
article.
Octave Band a range of sound frequencies with an upper limit twice its lower limit. The bands are identified by their
center frequencies (identifying frequencies), which is the square root of the product of the upper and lower cutoff
frequencies of a pass band. These center frequencies and band widths are shown on page J23. In some sound data
tables, these eight octave bands are also called by their Band Numbers; hence, the Band Numbers are also listed as
such in this article, in addition to the BAC Sound Rating Program and BAC Selection Software.
Sound the sensation of hearing; rapid, small fluctuations to which our ears are more or less sensitive; small
perturbation of the ambient state of a medium (ambient air in most cases) that propagate at a speed characteristic of the
medium.
Sound Pressure Level (Lp) in dB a ratio of a sound pressure to a reference pressure and is defined as:
Lp = 20LogP/0.002(dB), reference 0.0002 microbar.
TR - G 24
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
The reference pressure used in this article is the long-used and accepted value of 0.0002 microbar. Another way to
describe the same value, which may be used in other publications, is the value of 20 x 10
-6
Pascals (N/m2).
Sound Power Level (Lw) in dB the measure of the total acoustic power radiated by a given source and is defined by:
Lw = 10Log (W/10
-12
)dB, reference 10
-12
.
The standard reference power used in the BAC literature is 10
-12
watt. To eliminate any possible confusion, the reference
power should always be quoted, as in a sound power level of 94 dB reference 10
-12
watt.
Unit a single cell of evaporate cooling equipment.
Establishing the Noise Criterion
I nt r oduc t i on
At the beginning of any sound analysis, it is necessary to establish the sound level at a particular site that would be
considered acceptable by those who might be affected. This acceptable sound level is called the noise criterion for that
situation, and it is important to realize that it may vary widely for different situations.
The procedure for developing the noise criterion involves consideration of the following:
1. The type of activity of those people in the vicinity of the evaporative cooling equipment who will be affected
2. The amount of attenuation from acoustic barriers or walls that lie between the equipment and the people who may
hear it
3. The outdoor background noise that might help mask the sound from the equipment
From these factors, we can arrive at the final noise criterion for the particular installation.
The noise that humans hear covers a frequency range of about 20 Hz to about 20,000 Hz. Of course, there are
exceptions to this, but this range has come to be accepted for most practical purposes. Furthermore, for most
engineering applications, most of this audio range is subdivided into eight frequency bands called octave bands which
cover the range of frequency somewhat as the octaves on a piano cover the range of pitch. The eight octave bands used
in this article have the following identifying center frequencies and ranges:
When sound levels are plotted on a graph, they are most often divided into these eight octave bands. In this way it is
possible to observe the variation of a sound level with change in frequency. This variation is important in any situation
since humans display a different sensitivity and a different response to low frequency sounds as compared with high
frequency sounds. In addition, engineering solutions for low frequency sound issues differ markedly from those for high
frequency sound issues.
I ndoor Nei ghbour Ac t i vi t y
From earlier studies of real-life situations where people have judged sounds all the way from comfortable to
acceptable to disturbing and even to unacceptable for various indoor working or living activities, a series of Noise
Criterion Curves (NC curves) has been developed. Figure 1 is a graph of these NC curves. Each curve represents
an acceptable balance of low frequency to high frequency sound levels for particular situations, and is keyed into the
listening conditions associated with the sound. The lower NC curves describe sound levels that are quiet enough for
resting or sleeping or for excellent listening conditions, while the upper NC curves describe rather noisy work areas when
even conversation becomes difficult and restricted. These curves may be used to set desired sound level goals for
almost all typical indoor functional areas where some acoustic need must be served.
Band Number Identifying Frequency (Hz) Approx. Frequency Range (hz)
1 63 44-88
2 125 88-176
3 250 176-353
4 500 353-707
5 1000 707-1414
6 2000 1414-2828
7 4000 2828-5656
8 8000 5656-11312
TR - G 25
... because temperature matters
Note that the curves of Figure 1 have as their x-axis the eight octave frequency bands; and as their y-axis, sound
pressure levels given in decibels (dB) relative to the standard reference pressure of 0.0002 microbar. For convenience,
Table 1 lists the sound pressure levels at each octave band center frequency, for each Noise Criterion.
Table 1: Octave Band Sound Pressure Levels (dB re 0.0002 microbar) of indoor Noise Criterion (NC) Curves of
Figure 1
Table 2 is used with the NC curves and lists some typical activities that require indoor background sound levels in range
of NC-15 to NC-55. Certain unusual acoustical requirements may not easily fall into one of the Table 2 groups. It may
be necessary to apply specific criteria for those special situations or to assign a criterion based in similarity to one of the
criterion given in the table.
It is emphasized that the NC curves are based on, and should be used only for, indoor activity.
The first step in the development of the evaporative cooling equipments noise criterion is to select from Table 2 the
particular activity that best describes what the indoor neighbors in the vicinity of the equipment will be doing when the
equipment is operating. Where two or more neighbor conditions may be applicable, the one having the lowest NC value
should be selected. The corresponding NC values of Figure 1 or Table 1 give the eight octave band sound pressure
levels, in decibels, for that selection. The goal is to keep the sound heard by the neighbor, inside his home or building,
at or below these sound pressure levels.
Noise Criterion
Octave Band Center Frequency in Hz
63 125 250 8500 1000 2000 4000 8000
NC-15 47 36 29 22 17 14 12 11
NC-20 51 40 33 26 22 19 17 16
NC-25 54 44 37 31 27 24 22 21
NC-30 57 48 41 35 31 29 28 27
NC-35 60 52 45 40 36 34 33 32
NC-40 64 56 50 45 41 39 38 37
NC-45 67 60 54 49 46 44 43 42
NC-50 71 64 58 54 51 49 48 47
NC-55 74 67 62 58 56 54 53 52
NC-60 77 71 67 63 61 59 58 57
NC-65 80 75 71 68 66 64 63 62
Figure 1 - Noise criterion "NC" Curves. The octave band sound pressure levels associated with the noise
criterion conditions of Table 2.
TR - G 26
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Table 2: Suggested Schedule of Noise Criteria for Indoor Neighbour Activities*
Note: * The ASHRAE Guide usually lists a 10 dB range of NC values for each situation leaving it to the option of the user to select the specific
NC value for his own need. In the interest of more assuredly achieving satisfactory neighbour conditions, Table 2 listings are the more
conservative lower 5 dB range of the ASHRAE value.
Sound Reduc t i on Pr ovi ded by Bui l di ng Const r uc t i on
Neighbors who are either indoors in their own building or outdoors on their property may hear sound from outdoor
equipment. If they are outdoors, they may judge the sound against the more-or-less steady background sounds in the
area. If they are indoors, they may tend to judge the sound by whether it is audible or identifiable or intrusive into the
surroundings.
When outdoor sound passes into a building, it suffers some reduction, even if the building has open windows. The actual
amount of sound reduction depends on building construction, orientation, wall area, window area, open window area,
interior acoustic absorption, and possibly some other factors. The approximate sound reduction values provided by
several typical building constructions are given in Table 3.
For convenience in identification, the listed wall constructions are labeled with letters A through G and are described in
the notes under Table 3. Note that A represents no wall, hence no sound reduction, and the use of A indicates that the
selected NC curve would actually apply in this special case to an outdoor activity, such as for a screened-in porch, an
outdoor restaurant, or an outdoor terrace.
By selecting the wall construction in Table 3 which most nearly represents that of the building containing the neighbor
activity, and adding the amounts of sound reduction from Table 3 to the indoor NC curves, band-by-band, the outdoor
sound pressure levels that would yield the desired indoor NC values when the equipment sound passes through the wall
and comes inside, are obtained. This second step, then, provides a tentative outdoor noise criterion based on hearing
the sound indoors in the neighbors building.
Table 3: Approximate Sound Reduction (in dB) Provided by Typical Exterior Wall Construction
ACTIVITY
SUGGESTED RANGE OF NOISE
CRITERIA
Sleeping, Resting, Relaxing
Homes, apartments, hotels, hospitals, etc.
Suburban and rural
Urban
NC-20 to NC-25
NC-25 to NC-30
Excellent Listening Conditions Required
Concert Halls, recording studios, etc. NC-15 to NC-20
Very Good Listening Conditions Required
Auditoriums, theaters
Large meeting and conference rooms
NC-20 to NC-25
NC-25 to NC-30
Good Listening Conditions Required
Private offices, school classrooms, libraries, small conference rooms, radio and television listening in the
home, etc. NC-30 to NC-35
Fair Listening Conditions Desired
Large offices, restaurants, retail shops, and stores, etc. NC-35 to NC-40
Moderately Fair Listening Conditions Acceptable
Bussiness machine areas, lobbies, cafeterias, laboratory work areas, drafting rooms, satisfactory telephone
use, etc. NC-40 to NC-45
Acceptable Working Conditions with Minimum Speech Interference
Light to heavy machinery spaces, industrial areas, commercial areas such as garages, kitchens, laundries,
etc. NC-45 to NC-55
Octave
Frequency Band
Wall Type (See Notes Below)
(Hz) A B C D E F G
63 0 10 13 19 14 24 32
125 0 10 14 20 20 25 34
250 0 10 15 22 26 27 36
500 0 10 16 24 28 30 38
TR - G 27
... because temperature matters
A: No wall; outside conditions
B: Any typical wall construction, with open windows covering about 5% of exterior wall area
C: Any typical wall construction, with small open-air vents of about 1% of exterior wall area, all windows closed
D: Any typical wall construction, with closed but operable windows covering about 10%-20% of exterior wall area
E: Sealed glass wall construction, 6 mm thickness over approximately 50% of exterior wall area
F: Approximately 100 kg/m
2
solid wall construction with no windows and no cracks or openings
G: Approximately 250 kg/m
2
solid wall construction with no windows and no cracks or openings
Out door Bac k gr ound Sound
In a relative noisy outdoor area, it is possible that the outdoor background sound is even higher than the tentative
outdoor noise criterion. In this case, the steady background sound in the area may mask the sound from the evaporative
cooling equipment and take over as the controlling outdoor noise criterion. Determining whether or not this situation does
exist is the third step in developing the noise criterion.
The best way to judge this is to take a few sound pressure level measurements to get the average minimum background
level during the quietest intervals in which the equipment is expected to operate, or during the intervals when noise
complaints are most likely to be caused; for example, at night in residential areas where cooling equipment is operating
at night, or during the day in office areas exposed to daytime cooling equipment sound.
In the event that background sound measurements cannot be made, Tables 4 and 5, and Figure 2 may be used to
estimate the approximate outdoor background noise. In Table 4, the condition should be determined that most nearly
describes the community area or the traffic activity in the vicinity of the evaporative cooling equipment during the quietest
time that the equipment will operate. For the condition selected, there is a curve in Figure 2 that gives an estimate of the
average minimum outdoor background sound pressure levels. The sound pressure levels of the Figure 2 curves are also
listed in Table 5.
It is cautioned that these estimates should be used only as approximations of background sounds, and that local
conditions can give rise to a wide range of actual sound levels.
Table 4: Estimate of Outdoor Background Sounds Based on General Type of Community Area and Nearby
Automotive Traffic Activity
1000 0 10 17 26 29 33 42
2000 0 10 18 28 30 38 48
4000 0 10 19 30 31 43 53
8000 0 10 20 30 33 48 58
CONDITION CURVE No in FIGURE 2 or TABLE 5
1. Nighttime, rural; no nearby traffic of concern
2. Daytime, rural; no nearby traffic of concern
1
2
3. Nighttime, suburban; no nearby traffic of concern
4. Daytime, suburban; no nearby traffic of concern
2
3
5. Nighttime, urban; no nearby traffic of concern
6. Daytime, urban; no nearby traffic of concern
3
4
7. Nighttime, business or commercial area
8. Daytime, business or commercial area
4
5
9. Nighttime, industrial or manufacturing area
10. Daytime, industrial or manufacturing area
5
6
11. Within 100 m of intermittent light traffic
12. Within 100 m of continuous light traffic
4
5
13. Within 100 m of continuous medium-density traffic
14. Within 100 m of continuous heavy-density traffic
6
7
15. 100 to 300 m from intermittent light traffic
16. 100 to 300 m from continuous light traffic
3
4
Octave
Frequency Band
Wall Type (See Notes Below)
(Hz) A B C D E F G
TR - G 28
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
(Determine the appropriate conditions that seem to best describe the area in question during the time interval that is most critical, i.e., day or
night. Then refer to corresponding Curve No. in Figure 2 or Table 5 for average minimum background sound levels to be used in sound analysis.
Use lowest Curve No. where several conditions are found to be reasonably appropriate.)
17. 100 to 300 m from continuous medium-density traffic
18. 100 to 300 m from continuous heavy-density traffic
5
6
19. 300 to 600 m from intermittent light traffic
20. 300 to 600 m from continuous light traffic
2
3
21. 300 to 600 m from continuous medium-density traffic
22. 300 to 600 m from continuous heavy-density traffic
4
5
23. 600 to 1200 m from intermittent light traffic
24. 600 to 1200 m from continuous light traffic
1
2
25. 600 to 1200 m from continuous medium-density traffic 3
CONDITION CURVE No in FIGURE 2 or TABLE 5
Figure 2 : Approximate average minimum outdoor background sound pressure levels associated with the
conditions of table 4.
TR - G 29
... because temperature matters
Table 5: Octave Band Sound Pressure Levels (in dB) of Outdoor Background Noise Curves of Figure 2
Fi nal Noi se Cr i t er i on
The measured or estimated average minimum background sound levels should now be compared, band-by-band, with
the tentative outdoor noise criterion determined previously. The larger of these values, in each frequency band, now
becomes the octave band sound pressure levels that comprise the final outdoor noise criterion for the equipment
installation.
Any new intruding sound is generally judged in comparison with the background sound that was already there. If the new
sound stands out loudly above the existing sound, the neighbors will notice it, be disturbed by it, and object to it. On the
other hand, if the new sound can hardly be heard in the presence of the old sound, it will pass relatively unnoticed.
Therefore, if the sound coming from the equipment is below or just equal to the final noise criterion, it will not be noticed
and our objectives will have been satisfied.
If there are two or more different criterion for a particular installation, the analysis should be carried out for each situation
and the lowest final criterion should be used.
Muni c i pal Codes and Or di nanc es
Where local sound codes or ordinances exist, it is necessary to check the expected sound levels of the unit to be
installed, including any sound control treatments, to determine if they comply with the code requirements. Depending on
the form and language of the code, it may be necessary to introduce the code sound levels into the noise criterion
analysis.
Ex ampl e
To summarize this procedure, consider a cooling tower installation located near the edge of a college campus,
approximately 91 m from a classroom building. The college is located within a large city, and two main streets pass by
one corner of the campus about 450 m from the classroom building. The cooling tower will be used both day and night
during warm weather. The classroom must rely on open windows for air circulation. Determine the noise criterion for the
cooling tower.
The steps for this example are given in the sample Sound Evaluation Work Sheet, included as Appendix D in
this article.
Step 1 Determine the neighbor activity condition from Table 2. For good listening conditions inside a typical classroom,
select NC-30 as the noise criterion.
Step 2 In the indicated spaces under Item 2 of the Sound Evaluation Work Sheet, enter the sound pressure levels for
the octave frequency bands of the NC-30 curve as taken from Figure 1 or Table 1.
Step 3 Determine the wall condition of Table 3 that best describes the exterior wall of the classroom. Wall B can be
selected for normally open windows during the summer time. Insert the Wall B values in the Item 3 spaces.
Step 4 Add the values of Steps 2 and 3 together and insert the sums in the Item 4 spaces. This is the tentative outdoor
noise criterion.
Step 5 In the Item 5 spaces, enter either the measured average minimum background sound pressure levels or the
estimated background levels obtained from the use of Figure 2 and Tables 4 and 5. In this example, we estimate that
the traffic activity is best represented by 305 m - 610 m from continuous heavy-density traffic. This leads to Curve 5 of
Figure 2 and Table 5, whose values are then inserted in the Item 5 spaces.
CURVE No. in
FIGURE 2
OCTAVE BAND CENTER FREQUENCY In Hz
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
1 40 37 32 27 22 18 14 12
2 45 42 37 32 27 23 19 17
3 50 47 42 37 32 28 24 22
4 55 52 47 42 37 33 29 27
5 60 57 52 47 42 38 34 32
6 65 62 57 52 47 43 39 37
7 70 67 62 57 52 48 44 42
TR - G 30
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Step 6 In the Item 6 spaces insert the higher value, in each frequency band, of either the Item 4 or Item 5 values. This
is the final noise criterion.
In this example, note that the Item 4 values are equal to or higher than the Item 5 values in all bands. Thus, the final
noise criterion is based essentially on the classroom noise criterion and the wall condition. However, the outdoor
background noise estimate equals the tentative outdoor noise criterion in the 250 and 500 Hz bands. If they had been
higher, in this example, those higher values would have been used in setting the final noise criterion in those bands.
We will attempt to keep all octave band sound pressure levels of the selected cooling tower equal to, or below, the values
of Step 6. Should a sound code exist, this would be an appropriate point in the analysis to check agreement between
the code and the Step 6 final outdoor noise criterion. If the criterion developed here is lower than the sound code levels
at the specified distance, the sound analysis will yield results that will comply with the code.
The remaining steps of this sound evaluation example are explained in later sections of this article as we progress with
the entire sound evaluation procedure.
Sound Levels for Evaporative Cooling Equipment
I nt r oduc t i on
Now that we have established an acceptable noise criterion, the next step is to study the source of the sound and develop
equipment sound levels at the neighbor location, in the same sound pressure level terms used to express the noise
criterion. It will be the aim of this section to discuss the actual sound pressure levels of BAC evaporative cooling
equipment, and to show how these levels can be corrected for various distances and certain geometric arrangements.
The orientation of the equipment and distance from the equipment to the most critical neighbor will be our primary
concern. Where possible, the distance from the equipment to the neighbor should be kept as large as possible, and the
equipment should be oriented so that its lowest sound levels are radiated toward the neighbor.
Evaporative cooling equipment sound ratings can be stated in terms of both sound pressure levels and sound power
levels, and both may be necessary to permit thorough sound analysis in a given situation. However, in any sound
evaluation, octave band sound pressure levels for the proposed equipment are essential, and it is important to have a
fairly accurate indication of the directivity characteristics of the equipments sound.
For general use, sound pressure levels measured in the four different horizontal directions (one from each side) of the
unit, plus the vertical direction above, will yield the desired directivity data. The primary requirements for obtaining the
outdoor equipments sound levels are:
1. Accurate calibrated sound measurement equipment should be used.
2. Octave band sound pressure levels are mandatory.
3. The sound level data should indicate the true directivity effects of the units sound (there should be no nearby
buildings or obstructions to distort the true radiation pattern of the unit test).
4. The measurement distance should be specified.
Some equipment is rated in terms of the total sound power radiated, expressed as sound power level. Sound power level
is a valid index for comparing the sum of sounds radiated by evaporative cooling equipment, but has the serious
disadvantage of not revealing the directivity effects of the radiated sounds. Where only sound power level data are given,
the resulting conversion to sound pressure level at a particular location will give less accurate results than if directional
sound pressure level data are used. Sound generated by evaporative cooling equipment is directional, and sound
pressure level ratings are necessary in order to determine the actual sound in any direction around the installation.
Si ngl e Number Rat i ng Syst em
Many attempts have been made to express the frequency content and pressure level (intensity) of sounds using a single
number system. The most common method used is the A-B-C weighting network of sound level meters.
Sound meters with A-B-C weighting networks attempt to simulate the ears response to sound at different pressure
intensities. At a relatively low sound pressure level, the human ear is considerably more sensitive to high frequency than
to low frequency sounds. This difference, however, becomes less noticeable at higher sound levels where the ear
approaches more nearly equal sensitivity for low frequency and high frequency sounds.
The A-scale weighting network is designed to simulate the ears response for low pressure sounds (below about 55 dB).
The B-scale weighting is designated to simulate the ears response for medium pressure sounds (about 55 dB to 85 dB).
The C-scale weighting tends to provide nearly equal response in all frequencies and is used to approximate the ears
response at higher sound pressure levels (above about 85 dB).
TR - G 31
... because temperature matters
A-B-C scale ratings have been used in some sound ordinances and equipment sound ratings because of their simplicity
of statement. They may have value in some sound comparison situations, but such data are of little value in making an
engineering evaluation of a sound issue caused by evaporative cooling equipment, because no indication of the
frequency content of the sound is apparent. For example, two different types of cooling towers could have the same A
scale rating, but one could have most of its energy in the low frequency bands while the other could have its energy
concentrated in the high frequency bands. A single number rating will give no indication of this and its use could lead to
less than optimal and sometimes costly decisions.
Compar i son of Evapor at i ve Cool i ng Equi pment empl oyi ng a Cent r i f ugal Fan ver sus an
Ax i al Fan
Based on extensive studies of field data from several cooling tower installations, it has been found that overall sound
pressure levels of centrifugal fan cooling towers are about 5 to 7 dB lower than those of axial fan cooling towers for the
same cooling capacity even though the axial towers use about half the kW. As a comparison, this means that an axial
fan cooling tower would have to be twice as far away from the neighbours as a centrifugal fan tower in order to be just
as quiet (6 dB reduction for each doubling of distance, see Table 6). The frequency distribution and the radiation patterns
also differ for these two types of units. For any specific comparison of cooling towers, the manufacturers actual
measured data should be used.
BAC Sound Rat i ngs
BAC has measured the sound levels radiated by its products at 1,5 m and 15 m distances for the five principle directions,
(four horizontal and one vertical). The sample sound rating data sheet indicates the five principle directions and the type
of sound data available for a BAC cooling tower. As the data sheet suggests, the data given in the five blocks pertain to
the sound pressure levels measured at 15 m distances from the five principle directions of the cooling tower. Where it
might be desired to estimate the sound pressure levels at some intermediate direction, such as halfway between the
right end and the air inlet, levels can be averaged or interpolated from the data actually presented.
In addition to the five sets of sound pressure levels at each of the two distances, the data sheets contain the calculated
sound power level values for the reference power level 10
-12
watt. Current sound data for all BAC equipment is available
from BAC Balticare Representative.
Since sound power levels are being mentioned here, it is appropriate at this point to note that Appendices A, B, and C
are given at the end of this article to supply basic information related to sound power levels and to other calculations that
may be required from time to time in a sound evaluation. Appendix A describes a simplified method for calculating the
sound power level of a unit where the five sets of sound pressure level readings are known. Appendix B gives a
procedure for calculating the average sound pressure level at a given distance if the sound power level is known.
Appendix C gives a simple procedure for adding decibel values. This is required, for example, in converting sound
pressure levels into sound power levels, or in calculating an overall sound pressure level from the eight individual octave
band levels, or in adding two or more sound sources.
Octave Frequency Band (Hz) Correction for A weighting
63 -26
125 -16
250 -9
500 -3
1000 0
2000 +1
4000 +1
8000 -1
TR - G 32
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Ef f ec t i ve Di st anc e beyond 15 m
In any actual situation, it is usually necessary to determine the sound pressure levels of the equipment at some distance
other than the 1,5 m and 15 m distances given in the BAC rating sheets. In this section, distance corrections are given
for estimating sound pressure levels at distances beyond 15 m.
For distances that are large compared to the dimensions of the unit, the inverse square law holds for sound reduction
with distance: i.e., for each doubling of distance from the unit, the sound pressure level decreases 6 dB. Thus, for
distances beyond 15 m the inverse square law applies and the distance correction is quite straightforward. Table 6
presents the reduction of sound pressure level for distances from 15 m out to 76 m. The values given in Table 6 are to
be subtracted from the sound pressure levels at the given distance of 15 m in order to arrive at the sound pressure levels
at the distance of interest.
For relatively short distances (less than 30 m), the same correction value applies to all eight frequency bands. For the
larger distances (greater than 30 m), high frequency sound energy is absorbed in the air and the correction terms have
larger values in the high frequency bands. For distances greater than about 150 m, wind and temperature of the air may
further influence sound propagation; but because these are variables, they are not considered in this article and the
correction figures of Table 6 represent more or less average sound propagation conditions.
If the critical distance falls between the specific distances given in the left-hand column of Table 6, interpolate the sound
reduction value to the nearest 1 dB. Do not attempt to use fractions of decibels.
TR - G 33
... because temperature matters
Table 6: Reduction of Sound Pressure Level (in dB) for Distances beyond 50 feet
Ef f ec t Di st anc e bet ween 1,5 m and 15 m
In this section, distance corrections are given for estimating sound pressure levels in the close-in range of 1,5 m to 15
m. When the distance from a sound source is small or comparable to the dimensions of the source, the inverse square
law does not necessarily hold true for variations of sound level with distance. So, for the relatively short distances of 1,5
m to 15 m, it might be necessary to accept some sound pressure level variations, which do not follow the straightforward
trends that hold for distances beyond 15 m. Table 7 permits us to estimate the sound pressure levels at these close-in
distances, provided the 1,5 m and 15 m sound pressure levels are known.
To illustrate the use of Table 7, suppose the sound pressure level of a unit in a particular frequency band is 68 dB at 1,5
m and 54 dB at 15 m distance. The difference between these two values is 14 dB. In Table 7, we find the column of
values under the heading If the difference between the 1,5 m and 15 m levels is 13 15 dB. The numbers in this column
are the values (in decibels) to be added to the 15 m sound pressure level of 54 dB to obtain the sound pressure level at
some desired shorter distance. If, for instance, we wish to know the sound pressure level of this unit at 1,5 m, we find
that we must add 8 dB to the 15 m level of 54 dB to get 62 dB as the sound pressure level at the desired distance of 1,5 m.
Now, for these close distances, the difference values between the 1,5 m and 15 m sound pressure levels may not be
constant for all frequency bands so it is necessary to follow this procedure for each octave band. For example, in one
frequency band the difference may be 12 dB but in another band it may be 15 or 16 dB.
Close-in interpolation of sound pressure levels is inherently somewhat unreliable; so do not be surprised if some oddities
or discrepancies in the data begin to appear at very close distances. The method used here at least gives some fairly
usable data to work with.
Distance (m)
Octave Band Center Frequency in Hz
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
15 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
20 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
25 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
30 6 6 6 6 6 6 7 7
37,5 8 8 8 8 8 8 9 10
50 10 10 10 10 10 10 11 12
60 12 12 12 12 12 13 14 15
75 14 14 14 14 14 15 16 18
100 16 16 16 16 16 17 18 21
120 18 18 18 18 19 19 21 24
150 20 20 20 20 21 22 24 27
200 22 22 22 22 23 24 27 31
240 24 24 24 25 25 26 30 35
300 26 26 26 27 27 29 34 40
400 28 28 28 29 30 32 38 46
480 30 30 30 31 32 35 43 53
600 32 32 32 33 35 38 47 61
800 34 34 34 36 38 42 53 70
TR - G 34
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Table 7: Interpolation Terms for Obtaining Sound Pressure Levels (in dB) Between 1,5 m and 15 m
* This column of values is based on the "Inverse Square Law" variation with distance from 15 m all the way in to 1,5 m. All other columns
represent variations with distances that do not follow the "Inverse Square Law."
Ref l ec t i ng Wal l s and Encl osur es
Discussion so far has been concerned with what might be considered simple installations from an acoustic point of
view, where only distance to the neighbor and relative orientation of the unit have been required points of consideration.
Frequently, the geometry of an installation involves some nearby reflecting walls or buildings, which adds to the acoustic
complexity of the site. Let us consider this for three typical situations:
Cases in which reflecting walls modify the radiation pattern of the sound from the unit to the neighbor
Cases in which close-in walls confine the unit and cause a build-up of close-in sound levels
Cases in which the unit is located in a well and all the sound radiates from the top of the wall
Effect of Reflecting Walls
Several factors that influence the amount of reflected sound are the following:
1. The sound radiation pattern (directivity) of the equipment
2. The radiating area of the equipment
3. The orientation of the equipment
4. The distance of the unit to the neighbors
5. The distance of the equipment to the reflecting wall
6. The area of the reflecting wall
7. Various angles of incidence and reflection between the equipment, the wall, and the neighbors
Because so many variables are involved, we will not attempt to develop a rigorous procedure for estimating the influence
of a reflecting wall. Rather, we caution that if a large reflecting surface is located near the equipment, it should be
considered as a potential reflector of sound. If the equipment is oriented such that its loudest side is already facing
toward the neighbour, the influence of the reflecting wall can be ignored! However, if this is not the case, these conditions
must be met for the reflected sound to be of concern:
The area of the reflecting wall is at least three times the area of the side of the equipment that faces that wall
The distance from the unit to the reflecting wall is less than half the distance from the equipment to the neighbor
If a simple optical ray diagram is drawn from the center of each unit to all parts of the reflecting wall and the reflecting
rays are then drawn away from the wall, the neighbor is located within the angular range of the reflected rays (see
sketch below)
If each of these three conditions is met, then the sound pressure levels at the neighbor may be higher than if the wall
were not there.
Distance et
which SPL is
desired (m))
If the difference between the 5 ft and 50 ft levels is:
4-6 dB 7-9 dB 10-12 dB 13-15 dB 16-18 dB 19-21 dB* 22-24 dB
Add the following values to the 15 m sound level to obtain sound level at desired distance:
15 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
13,5 0 0 1 1 1 1 1
12 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
10,5 1 1 2 3 3 3 3
9 2 2 3 4 4 4 5
7,5 2 3 4 5 5 6 7
6 2 4 5 6 7 8 9
4,5 3 5 6 8 9 10 12
3 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
1,5 5 8 11 14 17 20 23
TR - G 35
... because temperature matters
In Figures 3 and 4, a few representative reflecting walls are shown for various orientations, and approximate sound
pressure level adjustments are suggested for A, B, C, and D directions away from the equipment. These adjustments
should be made using the 15 m levels. Figure 3 applies to units having one air intake, while Figure 4 applies to units
having two air intakes.
As an example, for Case 1, if the neighbor is located off the A side of the unit, apply the A adjustment to the A side 15
m sound pressure level rating of the unit and then correct as necessary to the neighbors distance. If the situation is that
of Case 9 and the neighbor is located in the direction D, then the D adjustment would be utilized to arrive at a 15 m
sound pressure level for the unit.
Figure 3 : For Single Air Inlet Units
Neighbour Area Influenced by the Reflecting Wall
1. Neighbour area influenced by the reflecting wall; 2. Cooling Tower; 3. Air Intake.
Case 1
A. Use Average of A and C Levels, B. Use average of B and C
levels, C. Not applicable, D. Use average of D and C levels.
Case 2
A. Not applicable, B. Use greater of B level or average of B and A
levels, C. No change to C levels, D. Use greater of D level or
average of D and A levels.
Case 3
A. Use greater of A level or average of A and B levels, B. Not
applicable, C. No change to C levels, D. Add 2 dB to D levels.
Case 4
A. Use average of A and C levels, B. Not applicable, C. Not
applicable, D. Use average of D and C levels.
TR - G 36
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Figure 4 : For Dual Air Inlet Units
These figures and their associated adjustment values are to be used to correct base 15 m sound pressure level ratings
in the neighbour direction of the effect of the reflecting surface conditions shown.
Build-Up of Close-in Sound Levels
Evaporative cooling equipment is sometimes located very close to a building wall, inside a court formed by two or three
surrounding walls, or even in a specially provided room or space in the mechanical equipment area inside a building. In
these installations, the principal concern may be the sound in the immediate vicinity (within 1,5 m- 3 m) of the unit(s),
rather than the sound levels radiated and reflected away to some neighbor location.
Case 5
A. Not applicable, B. Not applicable, C. No change to C levels, D.
Use average of A, C, D levels.
Case 6
Four sound levels out the open end of a 3-sided enclosure, add 3 dB
to the sound pressure levels of the air intake side of the unit.
Case 7
A. Add 2 dB to A levels, B. Use average of B and C levels, C. Not
applicable, D. Use average of C and D levels.
Case 8
A. No change to A levels, B. Not applicable, C. No change to C
levels, D. Add 3 dB to D levels.
Case 9
A. Not applicable, B. Not applicable, C. Add 2 dB to C levels, D. Add
3 dB to D levels.
Case 10
For sound levels out the open end of a 3-sided enclosure, add 3 dB
to the sound pressure levels of the air intake side(s) of the unit.
TR - G 37
... because temperature matters
For these situations, we may use Table 7 to determine approximately the sound pressure levels for the close-in distances
of interest, and then add an increment to account for the build-up of sound levels. Here also, the geometry of the layout
controls the problem and it is not possible to give a general solution that will cover the multitude of possible layouts. As
an approximate acknowledgement of this situation, we suggest that the close-in sound pressure levels be increased by
5 dB, recognizing that the range of increase could be as little as 2 or 3 dB (in a fairly open courtyard) and as much as
10 to 15 dB (in a fairly confined mechanical room enclosure). This adjustment should be applied to all eight-octave band
readings.
Sound Radiation from a Four-Sided Enclosure or " Well"
Evaporative cooling equipment is sometimes located inside a four-sided enclosure or well, where all the sound radiates
more-or-less vertically out the top of the well and then spills over the sidewalls of the well. A simple generalized solution
to this problem is not possible, but a reasonable approximation can be made.
While the sidewalls serve as barrier walls against normal sound radiation in horizontal directions, the four-sided
enclosure tends to average-out any free-field directional characteristics of the unit and causes an average sound
pressure level to be radiated from the top of the well in all directions in which sound is free to radiate per the geometry
of the situation. Appendix B provides a procedure for calculating sound pressure levels for a given sound power level,
at various distances and with several radiation patterns.
In the typical case illustrated, where the sound from the well radiates over a hemisphere, the sound pressure levels of
the unit at a 15 m distance would be determined by subtracting 32 dB from the sound power levels of the unit.
It should be recognized that this method of sound evaluation is an approximation. Actual sound levels may be somewhat
lower in the higher frequency bands, and could be slightly lower in the lower frequency range depending upon the
neighbor location relative to the equipment. If the sidewall of the well clearly serves as a barrier wall for the radiated
sound, barrier wall attenuation values can be applied to the problem in the same manner as the sound evaluation
procedure of this article subsequently permits for the non-well type installation.
Ex ampl e Cont i nued
Let us now summarize Step 2 in the sound evaluation process, looking at the source of sound and correcting it for
distance and path. This will yield equipment sound pressure levels for the same point, which the final noise criterion was
calculated in the earlier example.
We are now interested in Items 7-11 in the sample Sound Evaluation Work Sheet (see Appendix D) which pertain to the
cooling tower sound pressure levels as extrapolated to the 90 m distance. We continue the step-by-step procedure on
the Sound Evaluation Work Sheet where we left off earlier.
Step 7 Decide on the preferred orientation of the cooling tower at the site. From the BAC Sound Rating Data Sheet,
determine the sound pressure levels at the 15 m distance for the side of the cooling tower facing the college classroom.
Assume one of the end sides here (the blank-off sides), since they are the quietest. Insert these sound pressure level
values in the Item 7 spaces of the Sound Evaluation Work Sheet.
Step 8 Insert the distance 90 m in the appropriate space under Item 8 and refer to Table 6 for the distance correction
values corresponding to 90 m. Insert these values in eight spaces of Item 8.
Step 9 The sound pressure levels at 90 m will be lower than at 15 m, hence subtract the Item 8 values from the Item 7
values and insert the remainder in the Item 9 spaces. These then are the sound pressure levels that will exist just outside
the college classroom, 90 m from the cooling tower.
Step 10 Had there been a sound increase due to the presence of a reflecting wall that met one of the conditions
illustrated by Figures 3 or 4, corrections would be inserted now in the Item 10 spaces. Had this been a close-in problem
involving a build-up of sound levels due to some nearby enclosing walls around the tower, +5 dB would have been
inserted in the Item 10 spaces. Since neither of these conditions applied in this example, we insert 0 in each of the Item
10 spaces.
Step 11 Item 11 is the sum of Items 9 and 10. This is the sound pressure level of the cooling tower at the 90 m distance.
TR - G 38
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Comparison of Noise Criteria and Evaporative Cooling Equipment Sound
Levels
Ex ampl e Cont i nued
From the material given in the two preceding sections, it is now possible to determine if a particular cooling tower will be
satisfactory (from a sound point-of-view) in a given location for a given set of circumstances. The analysis now consists
of comparing the estimated cooling tower sound levels with the noise criterion developed for the neighbor situation. The
comparison may be made by plotting the sound levels and the noise criterion on a graph, as show in Figure 5, or merely
by comparing the two groups of values on a band-by-band basis. We are now interested in Items 12-13.
Step 12 Merely as a means of simplifying the next step, copy in the Item 12 spaces the values taken from Item 6, which
was the Final Noise Criterion.
Step 13 By subtracting the Final Noise Criterion (Item 12) from the Resultant Cooling Tower Sound Pressure Levels
(Item 11), we determine if there is any excess of cooling tower sound above the criterion. Any positive-valued remainder
represents sound excess above the criterion. Any negative-valued remainder means that the cooling tower level is below
the criterion and no sound reduction is required in the frequency bank; hence, 0 is inserted in that space.
If the cooling tower levels in all eight octave bands are below the criterion values, there should be no sound problem. If
two or three of the cooling tower levels exceed the criterion values by only 1 or 2 or 3 dB, there will probably be no sound
problem. If several octave band sound levels exceed the criterion by 5 to 10 dB, or more, a sound problem should be
anticipated the higher the sound excess the more assured is the problem if suitable measures are not taken.
Judgement Fac t or
At this point, some remarks should be made on the overall reliability of this approach, and an opportunity should be
provided for inserting a judgment factor. In as much as the original criterion selection was based mostly on lower range
NC values for the various environments considered, the derivation presented here may be somewhat conservative.
Because of this, decisions based on this approach will usually lead to acceptance of the sound from the equipment. As
explained throughout the procedure, several approximations are made (such as for the sound reduction of various
general types of walls, and the sound estimates of community or traffic background sounds, and others). These
approximations may lead to some variability from one installation to the next, although it is believed that a small amount
of variability can be accommodated by the procedure without changing the results unreasonably.
Figure 5 - Comparison of Final Noise Criterion and Equipment Sound Levels
TR - G 39
... because temperature matters
Experience shows that where the criterion is based on sleeping at night, the criterion should not be exceeded, and
therefore, the conclusions reached by this procedure should be followed. However, where the criterion is based on
somewhat less critical daytime activities, and the background sound frequently ranges considerably above the average
minimum conditions used here, then the risk is not too great if the criterion is exceeded by about 5 dB. In such cases the
criterion should not be exceeded by more than 5 dB for fear of serious objections. If it is decided to permit the sound to
exceed the criterion by as much as 10 dB or more, sound reduction steps should be considered for future addition to the
installation, even though they may not be included in the initial installation.
In view of the above, if the equipments owner, architect or engineer chooses to follow a conservative approach or even
to allow for some excess sound on a particular project (that is, permit the equipments sound to exceed the background
sounds slightly and thus be identifiable and possibly disturbing to the neighbors), this opportunity is afforded in Items 14
and 15 of the Sound Evaluation Work Sheet.
Step 14 Insert the cooling tower owners Judgment Factor. For a conservative approach insert 0 dB in the Item 14
spaces of the Work Sheet. To purposely allow the cooling tower sound to exceed the acceptable levels slightly, insert 5
dB in the Item 14 spaces.
Step 15 The Final Sound Reduction Requirement for the cooling tower is the difference, in each band, obtained by
subtracting Item 14 from Item 13. These are the attenuation values in each octave band necessary to reduce the cooling
tower sound to an acceptable level. A brief discussion of sound control for evaporative cooling equipment is given in the
next section.
Step 16 Sound reduction can be accomplished in several ways, and quantitative values for possible sound reduction
steps are discussed in the next section. Step 16 of the Sound Evaluation Work Sheet should include the attenuation
obtained from the use of two-speed fan motors, Baltiguard drives, VFD, low sound fans, barrier walls, and from any
special acoustic treatments to be provided. Other situations that may apply are oversizing the equipment and utilizing
strategic layout.
Evaporative Cooling Equipment Sound Control
I nt r oduc t i on
The sound reduction required for evaporative cooling equipment is simply the excess of the equipments sound pressure
levels over the applicable noise criterion levels. This is shown numerically by the dB values found in Item 15 of the Sound
Evaluation Work Sheet when the particular calculation is carried out. The clue as to whether it will be a simple or complex
sound reduction problem lies largely in the amount and frequency distribution of the required sound reduction.
Job conditions may allow some quieting to be obtained by strategically positioning the equipment, controlling the fan
motor, installing a low sound fan option, or constructing barrier walls located between the equipment and neighbor.
Additional sound reduction needs may be met with packaged attenuators or other acoustic treatments, which, in general,
can achieve high frequency noise reduction rather easily but usually involve larger weight and space requirements to
accomplish low frequency quieting.
St r at egi c Posi t i oni ng
The first and most economical strategy in reducing sound pressure levels from evaporative cooling equipment involves
considering the layout of the equipment. Strategic Positioning includes two aspects. First, make sure to position the
quietest side of the equipment towards the sound sensitive direction. This option should always be a first consideration
with single side air inlet products. Next, take advantage of any existing sound barriers that may aid in muffling the sound
from the equipment to the neighbor. For example, if a building or shed exists on the job site, position the equipment so
that the structure blocks the direct path between the equipment and the neighbor, thus acting as a sound barrier. Trees
and bushes are also good examples of barriers that greatly reduce sound exposure at neighboring properties.
Fan Mot or Cont r ol
Operating the equipment at various speeds by utilizing a VFD, Baltiguard drives or a two-speed motor is a practical
option of sound control if reduced equipment loads can be made to coincide with periods when low sound pressure levels
are required. This is a normal nighttime situation for many air conditioning installations.
TR - G 40
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
An 1500-750 rpm fan motor operating at 750 rpm would provide about 60% of full-load capacity on a BAC unit and would
give approximately the following octave band dB noise reductions:
In as much as these are average dB reductions that can be anticipated for half-speed operation, these figures can apply
to both sound power and sound pressure levels. Also, these approximations are sufficiently accurate to be used for both
centrifugal and axial fan towers.
In addition to running the equipment at a lower speed during noise-critical hours, it is beneficial to investigate whether
or not the equipment could be turned off completely during these hours. This would completely negate any sound created
by the unit; however, the system and its loads must be researched to understand if this option is feasible.
In some cases what people find objectionable is not the steady sound of the equipment, it is the abrupt stopping and
starting of the fan system. Properly setting the tower control sequence to avoid excessive cycling of fan motors is
important in this regard, as well as to protect the motor from overheating. VFDs solve this issue by allowing for a soft
start of the fans, followed by a gentle ramping up and down of the fan speed in line with the load requirement. Simply
stated, VFD's allow the fan motor to run at the speed required to meet leaving water temperature requirements rather
than running at full speed all the time. Decreasing the motor speed, and therefore the fan rpm, can decrease sound levels
significantly. VFD's also minimize harsh sounding on-off cycles by providing a gradual start.
Over si zi ng Equi pment
If space and budget allow, it may be beneficial to oversize the equipment and run the larger capacity equipment at a
lower fan speed rated for the specific job. As discussed in the previous section, reducing the motor speed reduces the
fan speed and because fan speed is directly proportional to sound, reduces sound.
Frequency Band - Hz
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
4 6 8 10 8 8 6 4
Figure 6 - BAC axial fan cooling tower utilizing
the Baltiguard drive.
Figure 7 - If applicable, turn towers off at night
to eliminate sound
Figure 8 - VFD with Integrated Bypass Figure 9 - Axial Fans
TR - G 41
... because temperature matters
Low Sound Fans
Another option for reducing the sound that the equipment produces is to select a low sound fan. Low sound fans provide
greater solidity than regular fans and so are able to move the same amount of air, while operating at a slower speed.
Bar r i er Wal l s
Barrier walls can be used to provide sound attenuation. In some cases barrier walls may exist due to the architectural
treatment of the site, while at other times they are constructed specifically to provide needed sound reduction.
Taking the first case, a wall used to shield a unit from view can also act to reduce the sound radiated by the tower,
particularly high frequency sound (broadly considered here as the upper four octave frequency bands). However, such
barrier walls must cover by line-of-sight the entire sound source as observed from the neighbors position. Louvered,
latticed or slotted openings will render negligible the attenuation abilities of a barrier wall. A solid wall of height equal to
a unit and located close to it will provide the following approximate attenuation:
When greater attenuation is required, a larger specially constructed barrier wall may be designed and installed. Care
must be taken, though, in locating the wall because of the many geometric and material considerations involved.
As an example, a barrier wall that (1) extends at least 1 to 1,5 m beyond the line-of-sight in both the horizontal and
vertical directions, (2) that is located within 1,5 to 2,5 m of the cooling tower and (3) that is made of a solid impervious
material having a surface weight of at least 85 g/m
2
will have approximately the following attenuation:
A still larger and heavier barrier wall will provide still greater attenuation. To be most effective, however, a barrier wall
must be located as close as possible to the sound source and there must be no reflecting surfaces in the area that can
reflect sound around the barrier.
Design details of barrier walls and other acoustic treatment such as customengineered plenum chambers and acoustic
mufflers are best left to acoustical engineers or consultants and acoustical treatment manufacturers.
FREQUENCY BAND - Hz
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
4 5 5 5 5 6 7 8
FREQUENCY BAND - Hz
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
5 5 6 8 10 12 14 16
Figure 10 - Architectural walls being constructed around Closed Circuit Cooling Towers
TR - G 42
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Sound At t enuat i on
A significant feature of both axial and centrifugal fan equipment is that its noise, if it is a problem at all, can be treated
with relatively simple package attenuation. Figure 11 is a photograph of a BAC Series 3000 Cooling Tower (axial fan),
with sound attenuation on both the intake and discharge of the unit. The fan intake attenuator is an array of parallel
baffles and the discharge treatment is a lined plenum chamber.
Lined plenum chambers, to be effective, (1) must be fairly large, (2) should contain a thick absorbent lining, and (3)
should be arranged such that the sound path through the plenum includes does not allow line-ofsight. Depending on the
degree to which the plenum chamber conforms to these three requirements, its sound reduction may range in the order
of 5 to 10 dB for low frequency noise up to 10 to 20 dB for high frequency noise.
BAC sound attenuation packages are
designed, tested and rated by BAC,
hence ensuring single source
responsibility. They provide
reductions in the horizontal
direction up to 25 dB in the mid
frequency bands. Many sound
attenuation alternatives are available
from BAC to optimally and economically
meet a large variety of sound requirements.
Sound attenuation packages are available for centrifugal and
axial fan models. Exact values of the attenuation obtained
from these packages are available from your local BAC
representative.
Ef f ec t s of Sound Reduc t i on Opt i ons on Equi pment Per f or manc e
The cost of sound attenuation, including the effect on performance, must be evaluated versus simpler methods such as
oversizing the unit(s) to meet the sound criteria for a project. Note that with either low sound fans or add-on attenuation,
lower sound levels often come at the expense of lower airflow. The system designer must ensure that the manufacturers
ratings are adjusted to account for any decrease in thermal performance from this reduction in airflow.
Another caution is for the use of sound barrier walls. It is necessary for barrier walls to be far enough away from the tower
so as to prevent recirculation of the moist discharge air. If this practice is not followed, the warm air can be introduced
to the air intake, increasing the wet bulb temperature of the unit, and in turn decreasing the cooling capacity of the tower.
Summary
This article provides a simple and direct evaluation method for determining whether or not a given evaporative cooling
equipment installation is producing, or will produce, excess sound. It also offers some general information on methods
that can be used to reduce the sound.
BAC can provide reliable sound level data on its open cooling towers, closed-circuit cooling towers, and evaporative
condensers through their representatives. Consult your local BAC Balticare Representative for specific project
applications.
Acknowledgement:
BAC extends its sincere appreciation to Mark E. Schaeffer, P.E. (President of Schaffer Acoustics Inc. of Pacific
Palisades, CA) for his contributions to this article.
Figure 11 - Intake and discharge sound
attenuation on a BAC Series 3000 Cooling
TR - G 43
... because temperature matters
Appendix A
The Cal c ul at i on of Sound Pow er Level (Lw ) f r om Measur ed Sound Pr essur e Level s (Lp)
Sound power is a measure of the total acoustic power radiated by a sound source. Sound power level is the sound
power, expressed in decibels, relative to the reference power quantity 10
-12
watt.
Sound power is not directly measured as such. Instead, it is a calculated quantity and is obtained from the measurement
of sound pressure levels at a suitable number of measurement positions. Even in indoor testing with reverberant or semi-
reverberant rooms and a standard reference sound source, sound power level is calculated from sound pressure level
measurements. In this discussion, no technical detail is given for the derivation of sound power level; instead, a very
simple procedure is provided for establishing the approximate sound power level of evaporative cooling equipment for
the case in which the sound pressure level is measured at four horizontal positions (each position at a specific distance
from each of the four sides) plus one vertical position above the unit. The measurement positions may be at any distance
between 2 and 4 times the units largest dimension, which is usually its length.
The measured sound pressure levels must be obtained with accurate, calibrated equipment, and the sound data must
be in the conventional eight octave bands of frequency. The measurements should be made under essentially free-field
conditions: i.e., outside in an area free of any nearby reflecting surfaces. The unit is assumed to be located on the ground
or on a platform reasonably close to ground level.
The approximate sound power level in each of the eight octave bands is the sum, by decibel addition, of the individual
five sound pressure level readings in each octave band plus a correction term (K) which is a function of the number of
measurements positions, the measurement distance and the reference power. In equation form, this can be expressed
as
Lw = Lp + K
The decibel summation of a number of sound pressure levels is determined from the material given in Appendix C and
the correction terms are given below in Table A for the appropriate conditions. The use of the five measurement positions
and the decibel addition of the five readings automatically introduce the directivity characteristics of the unit into the
calculated sound power level. No further provision for directivity is required in this simplified method.
To illustrate this procedure, suppose we wish to estimate the sound power level (Lw) in one octave band for the case of
the five-position measurements 15 m from a cooling tower. Assume the five sound pressure levels measured in the
particular frequency band are 56, 53, 59, 53 and 47 dB (re 0.0002 microbar).
By the decibel addition method shown in Appendix C we find that the decibel sum of these five sound pressure levels is
62 dB. From Table A we then find that for the 15 m measurement distance, the correction term is 25 dB re 10-12 watt. For
this example,
Lw = Lp + K
= 62 + 25
= 87 dB
The same procedure could be followed for all octave bands to get the complete Lw of the cooling tower. The procedure
given here is for the specific five measurement positions noted and may not be applicable generally to other situations.
The procedure is not accurate to less than 1 dB, so fractional values of decibels should not be used or relied upon.
Correction term K to be used in converting Sound Pressure Levels (Lp) into Sound Power Level (Lw) for special five-
position procedure given
Table A
Measurement Distance (to Acoustic Center) (m) Correction Term K for Lw re 10
-12
Watt (dB)
7,5 19
9 20
10,5 21
12 23
13,5 24
15 25
TR - G 44
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Appendix B
The Cal c ul at i on of Aver age Sound Pr essur e Level (Lp) f or a gi ven Sound Power Level
(Lw )
For comparative purposes it may occasionally be necessary to estimate the approximate average sound pressure level
radiated by a unit for which only the sound power level is given. There are also some applications that are best appraised
by converting sound power back to average sound pressure levels. The procedure outlined in this Appendix will provide
this estimate.
It is important to realize that the resulting value is an average sound pressure level that theoretically would be radiated
the same in all directions from the unit. In practice, the unit probably would not radiate the same levels in all directions;
but, when only the sound power level is given it is not possible to know the directivity characteristics of the unit.
The average sound pressure level at a desired distance is obtained by subtracting from the sound power level in any
given octave frequency band the appropriate correction term (C) from Table B. In equation form, this relationship is
expressed as
Lp
Avg.
= Lw C
As an illustration, suppose we wish to know the average sound pressure at a 15 m distance for a cooling tower that is
stated to have a sound power level 87 dB re 10-12 watt. (Note that this is the counterpart of the example given in Appendix
A.) From Table B, for a 15 m distance, we see that the correction term is 32 dB.
Lp
Avg.
= Lw C
= 87 32
= 55 dB
By comparing this value with the five levels fed into the illustration in Appendix A, we see that although this is an average
value, it actually does not equal any of the levels from the five measured directions. Note again that the average value
does not pretend to show the directivity characteristics of the sound source.
If two competitive cooling towers are being compared for a particular site condition, a comparison of the sound power
level or the average sound pressure level may be a general clue to the relative sound from the two units, but a more
careful comparison should take into account the actual sound levels to be radiated in the particular critical direction(s).
Table B
Correction terms C to be used in converting Sound Power Level into average Sound Pressure Level for special five-
position procedure given.
18,5 26
21 27
24 29
27 30
30 31
Measurement Distance (to Acoustic Center) (m) Correction Term K for Lw re 10-12 Watt (dB)
7,5 26
9 27
10,5 28
12 30
13,5 31
15 32
18,5 33
Measurement Distance (to Acoustic Center) (m) Correction Term K for Lw re 10
-12
Watt (dB)
TR - G 45
... because temperature matters
Note: The correction term C is based on the sound radiating uniformly over a hemisphere. This would apply for a typical ground level
installation or for a unit located on a large roof. If there are conditions such that the sound will radiate over a large angle, say a 3/4 sphere, add
3 dB to the above C. Subtract 3 dB from the above C for a 1/4 sphere radiation.
For distance beyond 30 m calculate the average Lp for 15 m using the method here; then extrapolate to the desired
distance using the Lp reduction values of table 6 in section "Effect of Distance beyond 15 m"
Appendix C
Addi t i on of Dec i bel s
Since decibels are logarithmic values it is not proper to add them by normal algebraic addition. For example, 63 dB plus
63 dB does not equal 126 dB but only 66 dB.
A very simple, but adequate schedule for adding decibels is as follows:
When several decibel values are to be added, perform the above operation on any two numbers at a time, the order does
not matter. Continue the process until only a single value remains.
As an illustration let us add the five sound levels used in the example of Appendix B.
Or, suppose we arrange the same numbers in a different order, as in:
Sometimes, using different orders of adding may yield sums that might differ by 1 dB, but this is not too significant a
difference in acoustics. In general, the above simplified summation procedure will yield accurate sums to the nearest 1
dB. This degree of accuracy is considered acceptable in the material given in this article.
21 34
24 36
27 37
30 38
When two decibel values differ by: Add the following amount to the higher value
0 or 1 dB 3 dB
2 or 3 dB 2 dB
4 to 8 dB 1 dB
9 dB or more 0 dB
Measurement Distance (to Acoustic Center) (m) Correction Term K for Lw re 10-12 Watt (dB)
TR - G 46
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Appendix D
BAC Sound Eval uat i on Wor k sheet
Job Name______________________________ Date_____________________________________
Address _______________________________ Engineer ________________________________
Architect ______________________________ BAC Model_________________________________
Items Center Frequency - Hz
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
Step : Noise Criterion
1. Determine appropriate "NC" Criterion for neighbour activity
from Table 2
2. Insert sound pressure levels (Lp) for selected "NC" Crite-
rion. (Obtain values from Figure 1 or Table 1)
3. Tabulate sound reduction provided by wall construction.
(Obtain values from Table 3)
4. Establish tentative outdoor Noise Criterion for the unit. (Item
2 plus Item 3)
5. List average minimum outdoor background sound levels.
(measured or estimated from Figure 2 and Tables 4 and 5)
6. Set final outdoor background Noise Criterion. (High value,
by octave band, of Items 4 and 5)
Step : Sound Levels
7. Enter unit sound pressure level rating at 15 m.
8. Insert distance correction to adjust unit ratings to distance of
_ m in direction toward critical neighbour. (For distance greater
than 15 m use Table 6; for distances less than 15 m use Table
7)
9. Establish outdoor unit Lp at neighbour location. (Item 7
minus Item 8 for distances greater than 15 m. Item 7 plus Item
8 for distances less than 15 m.
10. Apply reflection adjustment to meet condition existing at
unit site. Refer to Figures 3 and 4 for effect of reflecting walls;
or add 5 dB for close-in build up of noise; 0 dB if no reflection
effects.
11. Tabulate resultant unit Lp at critical neighbour location.
(Item 9 plus Item 10)
Step : Comparison, Criteria vs Levels
12. Copy Item 6 levels from above. This is the outdoor noise
criterion for the critical neighbour.
13. Ascertain tentative sound reduction required for unit. (Item
11 minus Item 12. Insert "0" for negative values)
14. Apply judgement factor. (For conservative approach, use
"0" in all bands. To permit unit noise to exceed background
levels slightly , insert "5")
15. Tabulate final sound reduction requirement for the job.
(Item 13 minus item 14)
16. Indicate estimated or rated attenuation of all sound reduc-
tion treatment if used. (Should at least equal Item 15)
TR - G 47
... because temperature matters
Motor Controls
Introduction
The BAC motor control panels, incorporating Variable
Frequency Drives (VFD), are specially designed seamlessly
with BAC units and are engineered to meet specific
application needs related to evaporative cooling equipment.
BAC motor controls offer :
Single Source Responsibility: BAC has designed the
controls taking into consideration the exact specifications of
the fan motor, and providing you with a single source
solution.
Indoor / Outdoor Applications: BAC offers enclosures with
location flexibility; whether in a mechanical equipment room
or outdoors next to the equipment.
Industrial Grade Components: While satisfying the industrys demands for a top performance variable frequency drive,
the BAC motor controls are hailed as a truly environmentally friendly drive. The careful selection of the latest technology
industrial grade components provide full motor protection for the evaporative cooling tower.
Easy Installation: The BAC motor control is a compact, minimum maintenance reliable AC3 drive, allowing ease of
installation due to the pre-engineered concept.
Energy Savings: Evaporative water-cooled systems, whether for comfort cooling or process applications, offer
substantial year-round system energy savings compared to air-cooled alternatives. Proper system control is crucial to
fully utilising this advantage and operating your system at peak efficiency under all combinations of atmospheric and
load conditions. BACs technical expertise in this field can show you how saving energy can also save you water when
using BAC motor controls for a truly green solution.
Construction Details
Epoxy painted steel cabinet
- IP 54 insulation class
- Fan cooled with independent thermostat
- Anti-condensation heaters
- Rain shield for cold/warm weather protection
3-Pole Main Disconnect Switch
- Suitable for AC3 operation
- Lockable operator handle in OFF position
- NO / NC contacts for auxiliary control panel
Variable Frequency Drive (VFD)
- Including EMC filters according EN50081 and EN50082
- Removable keypad with rotary knob
- Ready, run and fault indicators
- Programmable buttons & lights
- Monitors motor speed, actual temperature or set point water temperature.
- CE compliance to EN 61800 & EN 20178
- RS 485 communications
BAC-TPU-01 Controller
- Used as temperature controller / signal converter
- Sensor input 0 10 Volt
BAC Type OT-EMM Sensing Elements
- PT 100 element
- 0 10 Volt output
Manual 3 Pole Bypass Switch
- Automatic VDF or manual control switch
Manual Star-Delta Starter
- Bypass operator for manual control of fan motor
Keypad Setting
TR - G 48
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Custom Features and Options
Var i abl e Fr equenc y Dr i ves (VFD' s)
VFDs offer many benefits including :
1. Precise leaving fluid temperature control provides a more
efficient and durable method to vary airflow compared to
fan cycling, fan dampers, or mechanical speed changers.
2. Soft-starts, stops, and smooth accelerations prolong the
mechanical system (fans, motors, belts, bearings, etc.)
life while reducing maintenance.
3. The soft-start feature minimises start-up noise and
smooth acceleration make the tower sound less
noticeable to the neighbours.
Standard VFD includes an enclosure, 24VDC power supply,
control power transformer, main circuit breaker, disconnect
switch with lockable operator handle, manual bypass, cooling fan and a detachable, programmable VFD keypad.
Circuit Breaker Protection, which allows for quick reset, is standard on all BAC VFDs. The circuit breaker is
mechanically linked to the rotary disconnect switch mounted on the front of the panel.
User Interface Keypad controls auto modes. The multi-monitor display shows fan speed, set point, measured
temperature, and fault codes.
Fan Dr i ve Cont r ol s
The BAC motor controls are an energy saving capacity control to close monitor the leaving fluid temperature of your
cooling tower.
The BAC motor controls are perfect for cooling tower operation where reliability, energy savings and low first cost are
critical.
Engineering Specifications
Equipment controls (optional)
Variable Frequency Drive(s): A variable frequency drive (VFD) shall be provided for each tower. The supplier of the VFD shall be the
manufacturer of the evaporative cooling equipment. The VFD shall have a manual bypass, a removable keypad, and a circuit breaker
disconnect. Fuse protection will not be accepted.
VFD shall be provided in an IP 54 enclosure.
The heavy-duty, non-fusible safety disconnect switch shall be provided by the manufacturer of the evaporative cooling equipment. Switch shall
be single-throw, 3-pole design. Switch shall have triple padlocking capability and a clear visible On/Off handle
A temperature sensor shall be provided with the enclosed controls and a temperature controller shall be provided with the enclosed VFD.
Option: A vibration cut-out switch input shall be provided
Note: For availability of the BAC motor controls on a specific product line, contact your local BAC Balticare
representative.
Typical VFD Arrangement
TR - G 49
... because temperature matters
Plume Abatement
Evaporative Cooling & Plume
Air enters at condition A.
Air picks up heat and water in the evaporative fluid cooler
( discharge condition B ).
Ambient air serves as heat sink for the discharge air ( line
AB ).
Intersection of saturation line leads to visible plume.
Large intersection area : more plume, small intersection
area : less plume.
Note: Plume is the condensation of water vapour and is harmless to the
environment.
Condition of the Ambient Air
Temperature and relative humidity of the entering air
influence the condition of the discharge air. Depending on
the entering air condition the discharge air IS NOT ALWAYS
100 % SATURATED.
Dry ambient air : discharge air has low relative humidity
and high temperature.
Wet ambient air : discharge air has high relative humidity
and lower temperature.
Warm ambient air : discharge air has lower relative humidity and higher temperature.
Cold ambient air : discharge air has higher relative humidity and lower temperature.
Discharge air of open cooling towers is generally higher saturated than discharge air of evaporative coil products.
EVALUATION OF PLUME FORMATION REQUIRES:
Knowledge of climatic conditions (ambient air) in which the equipment will operate. In depth knowledge of evaporative
heat transfer to determine the relative humidity and temperature of discharge air in prevailing climate conditions.
Plume Influencing Factors
High humidity of ambient and discharge air enhance plume potential and vice versa.
Large temperature difference between discharge and ambient air increases plume potential and vice versa.
High heat load/ air flow ratio provides large temperature difference and high plume potential and vice versa (Typically
heat load/ air flow ratio for evaporative coil products is smaller.).
Next to equipment selection plume formation is a function of the actual heat load and climatic conditions and needs to
be evaluated over a wide band of operating conditions. BAC provides the methodology to make such an evaluation.
Plume Abatement Coils
Large surface area plume abatement coils are installed in the air discharge of the evaporative coil products and piped
in series with the wet coil. To be effective they must have low air and fluid side pressure drops. This results in:
TR - G 50
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Significant extension of dry operation capacity.
Effective increase of discharge air temperature to reduce / eliminate plume during wet operation.
Additional sensible heat transfer during wet operation which saves water and treatment costs.
Plume abatement coil sizing and performance prediction require a thorough evaluation of thermodynamic and airside
behaviour as well as an understanding of climate condition influences. BAC can provide properly sized plume abatement
coils and accurate performance data.
Capacity Control Strategy
Capacity control of the evaporative cooling equipment has a considerable influence on plume formation.
No capacity control results in the lowest heat load / air flow ratio and low plume potential.
Dual drives ( BALTIGUARD ) and two speed motors result in higher heat load / air flow ratio; acceptable plume
elimination is achieved with plume abatement coils.
Modulating capacity control results in highest heat load / air flow ratio which gives the highest plume potential.
Operating and capacity control strategies are an integral part of the plume evaluation process. Consult your local BAC
Balticare Representative for guidance and assistance.
TR - G 51
... because temperature matters
Formulas
Fan Laws
The fan laws can be used to approximately predict the performance of equipment with a different fan speed:
Flow 2 = Flow 1 (kW2/kW1)
1/3
Formulas
Range = Entering Temperature Leaving Temperature
Approach = Leaving Temperature Wet Bulb Temperature
Heat Rejected:
Heat Rejection (kW) = Flow (l/s) x range (C) x 4,186
Temperature conversions:
Fahrenheit to Celsius : Temp (C) = 0.5556 5temp (F) 32
Celsius to Fahrenheit : Temp (F) = 1.8 Temp (C) + 32
Basic Electrical:
E = I x R
E = Voltage (Volts), I= current (amps), R = resistance (Ohm)
TR - G 52
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Replacement Parts
BAC parts are the Perfect Fit for your cooling tower. These parts are specifically designed, engineered and
manufactured to work in a cooling tower environment. They are the right parts, at competitive pricing levels, and BAC
offers the best deliveries in the industry.
BAC stocks most common repair and retrofit parts in our Central Parts Distribution Center and can ship other parts, often
overnight, from any of three manufacturing facilities strategically located in Europe.
Even with this fast delivery capability, it is still recommended that certain essential, emergency repair parts be maintained
in your local inventory, to minimize any potential downtime.
Basic Recommended Spare Parts
Bearing set
Float valve or repair kit
Float ball
Solenoid valve (if unit equipped with electronic water level control)
Powerband or set of belts
Spray nozzle kit with grommets
Sump heater and low water cut-out
Door gasket
Strainer (inlet and suction)
Fan and drive bushings
Parts to Consider if Extended Downtime is a Concern
Spray pump for coil products
Fan or fan wheels
Fan shaft
Drive sheaves
Fan motor
TR - G 53
... because temperature matters
Application Guidelines
Introduction
The satisfactory performance of evaporative cooling equipment is dependent on correct selection and proper attention
to overall system design, installation, water care and maintenance. The purpose of this document is to highlight the major
points, which should be considered when designing a system with BAC evaporative cooling equipment.
Equipment Configurations
BAC evaporative cooling equipment is available in following configurations:
Thermal Duty
The selection of a particular model is based on a thermal duty and the wet bulb temperature. Thermal ratings are based
on the wet bulb temperature of the air entering the equipment and do not take into account any recirculation of warm and
humid discharge air, which may occur under certain weather and wind conditions. Verification of ratings assumes a test
according to a recognised test standard and the application of tolerances as recorded during the test and applied to the
test results.
Operating Conditions
(1) BACount (PVC or CPVC) fill has spacing of 14 mm and is used on all counterflow cooling towers except IMT and RCT. For these product
lines fill spacing std. options are 12 mm or 19 mm. Other options are available upon request. PP fill spacings are 12 mm for VXT and VTL and
12 mm or 19 mm for IMT or RCT.
(2) It must be ensured that adequate make up water supply is available for proper operation of the equipment within the supply pressure range
suitable for the make up valve. Alternative valve selections are available for such cases.
Cooling Towers Closed Circuit Cooling Towers Evaporative Condensers
Counterflow VXT, VTL, RCT, IMT VXI, VFL VXC, VXC-C, VCL
Crossflow Series 3000D, FXT, TXV
Combined Flow FXV, HXI CXV, HXC
Cooling Towers
Evaporative. Closed Circuit
Cooling Towers
Evaporative . Condensers
Counterflow Crossflow Counterflow
Combined
Flow
Counterflow
Combined
Flow
Design pressure std. coil (bar) NA NA 10 10 22 22
Design pressure high press. coil (kPa) NA NA NA NA 28 28
Spray pressure, max. at inlet (kPa) 50 NA 14 14 14 14
fill spacing std(mm)
(1)
14 19 NA 19 NA 19
Inlet temperature, max. (C) 55 50 80 60 120 120
Inlet temperature CPVC. max. (C) 65 58 NA NA NA NA
Inlet temperature, PP, max. (C) 80 NA NA NA NA NA
Outlet temperature, min. (C) 5 5 10 10 -20 -20
Make up pressure mechanical valve (kPa)
(2)
100-500 100-500 100-500 100-500 100-500 100-500
TR - G 54
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Construction Materials Compatibility
Cool i ng Tower s Fi l l Pac k i ng
The heat transfer surface is of the film type and compatible with water found in most cooling tower applications. For
cooling applications, where the water is contaminated by solids of large size, oil or grease or organic contaminants,
alternative heat transfer surfaces with larger spacing must be considered.
Cl osed Ci r c ui t Cool i ng Tow er s and Condenser Coi l s
The standard coil is all prime surface continuous serpentine steel tubing. It is designed for low pressure drop with sloping
tubes for free drainage. The coil is encased in a steel framework and the entire assembly is hot dip galvanised after
fabrication.
Fluids circulated through the inside of the coils must be compatible with the coil construction material, i.e.
black steel, for std. hot dip galvanised coils
stainless steel AISI 304L or 316L (option)
galvanised steel for cleanable coil option (VXI, FXV)
Standard coils may contain certain contaminants, such as carbon iron oxide or welding particles. The interior condition
of the coil including humid air must be considered, when using halocarbon (or HFC) refrigerants and sensitive system
components, such as electronic expansion devices or semi-hermetic compressors. The installer must take the
necessary precautions on site, including complete clean up and evacuation and the installation of filter/dryers to
safeguard the operation of these components in conjunction with the condenser coils. It is not uncommon that in the first
year of operation filter cartridges have to be replaced more frequently.
Water Quality
Evaporative cooling is accomplished by the evaporation of a small portion of water. As water evaporates, the dissolved
solids originally present in the water remain in the system. The concentration of dissolved solids increases rapidly and
can reach unacceptable levels. In addition, airborne impurities and biological contaminants are often introduced into the
recirculating water, since the evaporative cooler is washing the air.
If impurities and contaminants are not effectively controlled, they can cause scaling, corrosion, sludge or biological
fouling, which reduce heat transfer efficiency and increase system operating costs.
For optimal heat transfer efficiency and maximum equipment life, the quality of the make-up and recirculating water
should be maintained within the limitations listed below.
Make-Up Wat er
Make-up water to the evaporative cooler should be between 30 and 70 ppm hardness as CaCO
3
.
Where use of a softener is necessary to achieve this, the supply to the evaporative cooler should not be totally softened,
but blended with the incoming unsoftened water to achieve the minimum hardness between 30 and 70 ppm as Ca CO
3
.
Maintaining a minimum hardness in the make-up water offsets the corrosive properties of totally softened water and
reduces the reliance on corrosion inhibitors to protect the system.
Ci r c ul at i ng Wat er Qual i t y (Cycl es of Conc ent r at i on)
The quality of the recirculating water is related to the make-up water by the Cycles of Concentration.
For example: If a given make-up water had 45 ppm of Chlorides, it would be possible to run the system at 150 / 45 equals
3.33 Cycles of Concentration without exceeding the 150 ppm of Chlorides allowed for a galvanised steel/Zinc Aluminium
or Baltiplus unit.
Note that this calculation process needs to be repeated for all of the Guideline parameters (Sulphates, Alkalinity, etc),
and the lowest resultant Cycles of Concentration used.
TR - G 55
... because temperature matters
Table 8: Circulated Water Quality Guidelines
for Baltiplus Protection
Table 9: Circulated Water Quality Guidelines
for Baltibond Corrosion Protection System
Table 10: Circulated Water Quality Guidelines for FRP
Baltiplus Protection
pH 7.0 to 9.0
Hardness as (CaCO
3
) 30 to 500 mg/l
Alkaline as (CaCO
3
) 500 mg/l max.
Total Dissolved Solids 1000 mg/l max.
Chlorides 125 mg/l max.
Sulfates 125 mg/l max.
Conductivity 1200 S/m
Chlorination (as free chlorine): con-
tinuous
1 mg / l max.
Chlorination (as free chlorine):
batch dosing for cleaning & disinfec-
tion
5-15 mg / l max. for 6 hours max.
BALTIBOND
Corrosion Protection System
pH 6.5 to 9.0
Hardness as (CaCO
3
) 30 to 500 mg/l
Alkaline as (CaCO
3
) 500 mg/l max.
Total Dissolved Solids 1500 mg/l max.
Chlorides 250 mg/l max.
Sulfates 250 mg/l max.
Conductivity 1800 S/m
Chlorination (as free chlorine): con-
tinuous
2 mg / l max.
Chlorination (as free chlorine):
batch dosing for cleaning & disinfec-
tion
5-15 mg / l max. for 6 hours max.
FRP
pH 6.5 to 9.0
Hardness as (CaCO
3
) 30 to 500 mg/l
Alkaline as (CaCO
3
) 500 mg/l max.
Total Dissolved Solids 1500 mg/l max.
Chlorides 250 mg/l max.
Sulfates 250 mg/l max.
Conductivity 1800 S/m
Chlorination (as free chlorine): con-
tinuous
2 mg / l max.
Chlorination (as free chlorine):
batch dosing for cleaning & disinfec-
tion
5-15 mg / l max. for 6 hours max.
TR - G 56
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Table 11: Circulated Water Quality Guidelines
for Stainless Steel
Bl ow Dow n
To prevent an excessive build-up of impurities in the recirculating water, a small amount of water must be bled from the
recirculating water. In many localities, this constant bleed and replacement with fresh make-up water will keep the
concentration of impurities in the system at an acceptable level.
The Bleed Rate will depend on the Cycles of Concentration required to maintain recirculating water quality and the
Evaporation Rate.
After the Cycles of Concentration has been determined, the Bleed Rate can be calculated using the following equation:
B = E / (N 1)
Where B = Bleed Rate in l/s; E = Evaporation Rate in l/s; N = Number of Cycles of Concentration.
The maximum Evaporation Rate can be determined by one of the following methods:
1. The Evaporation Rate is approximately 1,8 litres per 1000 kcal of heat rejection.
2. The Evaporation Rate is approximately 1,8 litres per 4180 kJ.
3. Evaporation Rate = Water Flow Rate (I/s) x Range (C) x 0,0018
4. Evaporation Rate = Total Heat Rejection kW / 2322 = l/s
Examples :
Method n 2: At a flow rate of 10 I/s and a cooling range of 10 C the evaporation rate is 0.18 l/s
(10 l/s x 10 C x 0,0018 = 0,18 I/s)
Method n 4: Duty calculates to 418kW, therefore the evaporation rate is 0.18 l/s (418 / 2322 = 0.18 l/s)
Note: The calculation method described above should not be used to determine the water consumption of evaporative cooling equipment. Next
to heat load and water quality the water consumption depends on climatic conditions, the capacity control strategy and the equipment
configuration. Water consumption calculations are therefore complex and therefore should not be based on the maximum evaporation rate,
which occurs at dry ambient conditions. The calculation method here is only suitable for the purpose of sizing a proper blow down.
Tot al Wat er Make-Up Rat e
Water Make-up rate = Evaporation Rate + Bleed Rate + Drift Loss
The Evaporation and Bleed Rates are calculated as above. Provided the equipment is correctly fitted with well
maintained high efficiency drift eliminators (as per standard Baltimore Aircoil supply), the Drift Loss can be considered
as insignificant when compared with the Evaporation and Bleed Rates.
Note that if other system components require adherence to more stringent recirculating water quality guidelines, the
more stringent guidelines must be followed.
SST AISI 304 SST AISI 316
pH 6.5 to 9.0 6.5 to 9.0
Hardness as (CaCO
3
) 50 to 500 mg/l 50 to 500 mg/l
Alkaline as (CaCO
3
) 500 mg/l max. 500 mg/l max.
Total Dissolved Solids 1500 mg/l max. 1500 mg/l max.
Chlorides 250 mg/l max. 500 mg/l max.
Sulfates 250 mg/l max. 500 mg/l max.
Conductivity 2500 S/m 2500 S/m
Chlorination (as free
chlorine): continuous
2 mg / l max. 2 mg / l max.
Chlorination (as free
chlorine): batch dosing
for cleaning & disinfec-
tion
5-15 mg / l max. for 6
hours max.
5-15 mg / l max. for 6
hours max.
TR - G 57
... because temperature matters
Wat er Tr eat ment
The water treatment guidelines below should be followed:
1. Water treatment chemicals or non-chemical systems need to be compatible with the materials of construction used
in the cooling system including the evaporative cooling equipment itself.
2. Water treatment chemicals should be added to the recirculating water by an automatic feed system on a
continuously metered basis. This will prevent localised high concentrations of chemicals, which may cause
corrosion. Preferably the water treatment chemicals should be fed into the cooling system at the discharge of the
recirculation pump. The chemicals should not be fed in concentrated form, nor batch fed directly into the cold water
sump of the evaporative cooling equipment.
3. Acid water treatment is not recommended. Acid treatment can be considered for open cooling towers furnished with
the BALTIBOND

Corrosion Protection or constructed from stainless steel, provided the requirements specified
above are followed.
4. A competent water treatment company should be consulted for the specific water treatment programme to be
applied. Next to the supply of dosing and control equipment and chemicals, the programme should include regular
monthly monitoring of the circulating and make up water quality.
Control of Biological Contamination & Water Treatment
The growth of algae, slimes and other micro-organisms, if uncontrolled, will reduce heat transfer efficiency and may
contribute to the growth of potentially harmful micro-organisms, such as Legionella, in the recirculating water.
Accordingly a treatment programme specifically designed to address biological control should be initiated when the
system is first filled with water and administered on a regular base thereafter in accordance with any regulations
(national, regional) that may exist or in accordance with accepted codes of good practice, such as EUROVENT 9 - 5 & 6.
It is strongly recommended to monitor the bacteriological contamination of the recirculating water on a regular base (for
example TAB test with dip slides on a weekly base) and record all results. (TAB = Total Aerobic Bacteria)
In addition to the control of biological contamination, which must be done at all times, it may be necessary to install a
water treatment regime to prevent the formation of scale or corrosion.
To ensure recognition of any risk and the implementation of protective measures, it is recommended to conduct a risk
analysis by a specialised risk assessor. It is also recommended to develop an operations plan for the cooling system.
Location
Each cooling tower, evaporative cooler or condenser should be located and positioned to prevent the introduction of the
discharge air and the associated drift, which may contain contaminants, such as Legionella, into the ventilation systems
or open windows of buildings. To yield full thermal performance, equipment location must be chosen in a way that there
is unimpeded supply of air to the entire air intake surface. In addition access to all maintenance and inspection points
must be safeguarded. Located in enclosures or close to adjoining building walls, the top of the equipment must be level
with or higher than the top of the adjacent walls in order to reduce the possibility of recirculating warm and humid
discharge air back to the air intake(s).
To accomplish this, in some cases the equipment needs to be installed elevated or equipped with discharge hoods or
ductwork. In case of elevated locations (more than 300 mm above surface), it is necessary to equip VX equipment with
a solid bottom panel, to provide protection from moving parts and ensure that the air is drawn horizontally into the cooling
tower and not from the bottom (bottom air entry can be considered but requires reduction of nominal fan speed to avoid
fan motor overload).
For indoor locations with forced draught centrifugal fan equipment it is common practice to apply ductwork to air entry
and discharge. Such ductwork must be designed for even air distribution and minimum pressure drop and access doors
must be foreseen to allow access to the interior of the duct and from there to the equipment itself. In some cases the
equipment room may be used as an intake plenum, in which case only discharge ductwork is needed. In such cases
measures need be taken to prevent erratic air distribution when switching fans and/or cells, for example by the sue of
positive closure discharge dampers.
TR - G 58
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Piping
Gener al
Piping should be sized and installed in accordance with rules of good practice. Dead legs and stagnant water conditions
in the piping should be avoided. If more than one inlet connection is required, balancing valves should be installed to
properly balance the flow to each inlet. Depending on the design of the hydraulic circuit, it may also be necessary to
install balancing valves at the suction connections of the towers. The use of shut off valves is dictated by the necessity
to (automatically or manually) isolate cells or towers for capacity control or servicing. If the equipment is installed on
vibration rails, compensators must be installed in the connecting piping.
Open Cool i ng Tow er s
Since the sump capacity of any cooling tower is limited, it can only accumulate a certain amount of water draining from
the system into the tower, when the circulating water pump stops. Therefore install all heat exchangers and as much
tower piping as possible below the operating level of the tower. The BAC Balticare Representative can advise the
available sump capacity for system drainage for a given model and operating conditions.
When multiple cooling towers are used on a common system, install equalising lines between the sumps of the towers
to ensure a balanced water level. Standard equalising lines are designed for a maximum water level differential (between
sumps) of 25 mm and an equalising flow of 15% of the circulating water flow for the largest tower in the system based
on the cooling towers being located in close proximity to each other. The connecting pipework (by others) should
maintain the same diameter along their length for proper operation. If hydraulical isolation of individual cells is desired a
shut off valve in the equalising piping is needed.
Cl osed Ci r c ui t Cool i ng Tow er s
Fluid piping should allow flexibility for expansion and contraction between component parts of the system. All fluid piping
should be supported separately from the equipment by pipe hangers or supports. In a completely closed system, an
expansion tank should be installed for purging air from the system and to allow for fluid expansion.
A vacuum breaker or air vent at the high point and a drain at the low point should be installed in the piping system to
permit complete drainage of coils.
Evapor at i ve Condenser s
Refer to BAC Evaporative Condenser Engineering Manual. For installations with high pressure float valves, ensure that
liquid piping from condenser outlet to valve(s) is sized for low refrigerant velocity (0.5 m/s) so that valve operation is not
disturbed by flash gas and that an equalising line is properly installed. For systems with thermosyphon oil cooling ensure
adequate equalising and sufficient height difference between condenser(s) and receiver.
Capacity Control
Gener al
Most cooling systems are subject to substantial changes in heat load and ambient temperature conditions during the
operating season. The capacity of evaporative cooling equipment varies greatly as the wet bulb temperature changes.
To prevent freezing inside the equipment at subfreezing ambient conditions and/or when a reasonably constant
temperature of the cooling water is desired, some form of capacity control is required. The preferred control method is
to reduce the airflow through the equipment to adapt to heat load and ambient conditions. It is not recommended to
modulate the water (fluid) flow for capacity control reasons. Regardless the type of capacity control chosen, it is
necessary to start the circulating pump first and the fan motor(s) thereafter. At the same time prolonged operation of
circulating pump(s) only without fan(s) running should be avoided during subfreezing conditions.
Fan Cycl i ng
Fan cycling is the simplest method of capacity control, suitable for multiple cell installations. The number of control steps
available for fan cycling is generally determined by the number of fan motors, however on certain models two fan motors
must be cycled simultaneously to prevent erratic air distribution. Consult your BAC Balticare Representative for more
details. The more steps for fan cycling are available the better the control of the cooling water temperature is. Rapid on-
off cycling can cause the fan motor to overheat. It is recommended that controls be set to allow a maximum of 6 on-off
starts per hour.
TR - G 59
... because temperature matters
Mul t i -Speed Dr i ves
The number of steps available for fan cycling can be increased by using multi-speed drives. These can either be
accomplished by the installation of multi-speed motors (Dahlander/Two speed separate windings) or the BALTIGUARD

Drive system.
At half of the nominal fan speed (Dahlander/two speed, separate windings) the nominal capacity of the tower will be appr.
60%; at 2/3 of nominal fan speed (BALTIGUARD) the nominal capacity of the tower will be appr. 70%. When switching
from high to low speed a time interval of min. 15 s must be foreseen, before the low speed drive can be activated to allow
the fan(s) to slow down.
Modul at i ng Capac i t y Cont r ol
Modulating capacity control is recommended when a closer control of the cooling water temperature or condensing
pressure is desired and in particular if free cooling at subfreezing ambient conditions is anticipated. Modulating capacity
control can be accomplished with modulating fan discharge dampers (only for centrifugal fan models). Fan discharge
dampers vary the airflow to match tower capacity to system heat load and ambient condition. The damper motors switch
to low speed and shut off the fan motor(s) when the dampers reach minimum position.
Alternatively to modulating fan dampers variable speed control devices can be installed. In such cases steps must be
taken to avoid operating at or near the fans critical speed. Consult with the B.A.C. representative or B.A.C. Balticare
of any application utilising variable speed control to determine whether any critical speed may be encountered and
whether the anticipated fan motor selection is suitable for this application. Fan motors must be equipped with PTC
Thermistors for these applications to facilitate protection against motor overheating. Where isolation rails are used in
conjunction with variable fan speed controls, the isolation springing should be high deflection, and the minimum
continuous running fan speed limited to avoid resonant frequencies with the springing.
Modulating capacity control is the best way to closely control cooling water temperatures, however even with modulating
control some variation of the cooling water temperature or condensing pressure will occur, in particular at light heat load
or start-up conditions. In applications with open or closed circuit cooling towers where such variations cannot be tolerated
(start-up of absorption chiller) an additional bypass to stabilise temperatures must be foreseen.
Winter Safety
Gener al
Unless the system is shut down and drained during winter, measures must be taken to protect the system from freezing
during the winter during operation and standstill. Freeze protection during operation is achieved by selecting an
adequate method of capacity control. For reasonably constant loads and cooling water or condensing temperatures
above 15C step control is usually adequate. For variable loads, in particular when combined with free cooling
modulating controls are recommended.
When the equipment is shut down in freezing weather the sump water must be protected. This can be accomplished by
the installation of electrical sump heaters. The standard electric heaters are sized to maintain +4C sump water when
the ambient temperature drops to 18C.
All sump heaters have six power terminals and one earth terminal. Heaters with six terminals can be wired in Star for
400 Volt; 3 phase supply; or in Delta for 230 Volt, 3 phase supply. All heaters can alternatively be used with a 230 Volt
single-phase supply, if the terminals are wired in parallel. Sump heaters need to be sized to maintain a sump water
temperature of 4C at an applicable ambient temperature (for example: - 18C). They are installed together with a heater
thermostat and a low level cut out switch to prevent heater operation, when the sump is drained.
Draining the sump water into a separate tank installed in an area protected from freezing, is an alternative to auxiliary
heating of the integral sump. Remote sump sizing must include the water draining from external piping, the tower water
distribution system, water suspended in the fill pack or coil and sump as well as water needed to prevent vortexing inside
the remote sump.
In addition to the sump all exposed water piping, pumps and make up lines, including mechanical or electrical valves
that do not drain at shutdown should be traced with electrical heater tape and insulated.
Cl osed Ci r c ui t CT Coi l Pr ot ec t i on
Where the system will permit, the best protection against coil freeze up is the use of an anti- freeze solution. When this
is not possible the system must be designed to meet the following conditions:
TR - G 60
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
1. Maintain the recommended minimum flow (refer to BAC product engineering data) through the coil(s) at all times.
2. Maintain a heat load on the circulating fluid, so that the temperature of the fluid leaving the cooler will not fall below
10C. (refer to "Engineering Data" for heat loss data)
Draining of the coil(s) is not recommended as a normal method of freeze protection unless the coil(s) are constructed
from stainless steel or are of the cleanable type. For standard hot dip galvanised coils draining is acceptable as an
emergency method of freeze protection. For this purpose an automatic drain valve and air vent needs to be installed to
drain the coil(s) if flow stops or the fluid temperature drops below 10C when the ambient temperature is below freezing.
Plume and Plume Abatement
At the air discharge water droplets can be formed by condensation of warm humid discharge air by contact with the
colder ambient air upon leaving the equipment. This type of condensation is the visible plume that often can be seen
rising above evaporative cooling equipment during the winter season. The water vapour caused by condensation
contains droplets of pure water and is harmless. In some instances visible plumes are considered as a hinder, in which
case measures must be taken to minimise or eliminate the occurrence of plume. Consult the BAC Balticare
Representative for such requests.
Electrical Wiring & Controls
Wiring to electrical components should be via suitable weatherproof cable glands. Unused electrical entries should be
plugged with a weatherproof plug.
Where motors are supplied with PTC Thermistors they should be incorporated into the control circuit as means of motor
overheat protection. Also the use of anti condensing heaters is strongly recommended.
Starting of Fan Motors
Fan motors up to 5.5 kW nameplate rating can normally be started direct on line 5DOL). Above these ratings the motor
should be started using star delta starter and not DOL. DOL starting imposes requires high starting currents and imposes
a large staring torque on the fan drives. Alternatively a soft starter or a variable speed frequency drive may be used
instead of star delta starting, according to the project requirements. In all cases, precautions should be incorporated into
the control circuitry to protect against motor overloading.
Sound
BAC provides sound data as sound pressure levels in 5 directions, in 1,5 m and 15 m from the equipment as well as
overall sound power levels. Data are available for equipment with and without sound attenuation and should be the base
of any acoustical specification and guarantee for outdoor locations. For indoor locations it is preferable to specify partial
sound power levels for the air intake and discharge areas. For sound pressure specifications relating to indoor locations,
consult the BAC Balticare Representative.
Maintenance
Regular maintenance in accordance with the appropriate BAC Operating and Maintenance instructions and with
prevailing local regulations and Codes is essential for the efficient and safe operation of a cooling tower, evaporative
cooler or condenser. A programme of regular maintenance and inspections needs to be set up, executed and
documented. For proper execution of maintenance and inspections and depending on site conditions ladders, safety
cages, stairways, access platforms with handrails and toe-boards must be installed as appropriate for the safety and
convenience of authorised service and maintenance personnel.
Safety
For safe operation of unshielded equipment exposed to wind speeds above 120 km/h installed at a height above 30 m
from the ground, contact your local BAC Balticare Representative.
For safe operation of equipment installed in moderate and high hazard areas contact your local BAC Balticare
representative.
TR - G 61
... because temperature matters
Glossary
Air-Conditioning: The control of the temperature, humidity, cleanliness (quality) and movement of air in a confined space.
Airflow: The distribution or movement of air through a space; generally measured in cubic feet per minute (cfm).
Air Handling Unit: The central component of an HVAC system that distributes conditioned air to a variety of destinations.
Algae: Small, usually aquatic plants which require light to grow.
Ambient: The surrounding atmosphere.
Ambient Air Temperature: The surrounding air temperature, such as the outdoor air temperature around a building.
Approach: The difference between the leaving water temperature and the ambient wet-bulb temperature.
ARI: Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute.
ASHRAE: American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers.
Biocide: A chemical capable of killing living microorganisms.
Biological Contaminants: Living organisms or agents derived from those organisms (e.g., viruses, bacteria, fungi, and mammal and bird
antigens) that can be inhaled and can cause many types of health effects including allergicreactions, respiratory disorders, hypersensitivity
diseases, and infectious diseases. Also referred to as "microbiologicals" or "microbials.
Bleed: Water deliberately removed from evaporative cooling equipment to control the concentration of dissolved solids in the system.
BTU (British Thermal Unit): The amount of heat required to raise or lower the temperature of one pound of water one degree Fahrenheit.
BTUH (British Thermal Unit Per Hour): Establishes a time reference to BTU input or output. A BTUH is how many BTUs are used per hour.
Bypass Connection: An inlet connection provided in the cold water basin of a unit that allows recirculating water to bypass the heat transfer
media when system pumps are running but evaporative cooling is not required.
Capacity: The output or producing ability of a piece of equipment. Evaporative cooling capacity is normally referred to in BTUHs; the capacity
at a standard set of conditions is often referred to as "tons of cooling."
Carryover: Excessive drift.
Casing: The exterior panels of an evaporative cooling unit.
Cell: The smallest subdivision of a unit that can operate independently; often multiple cells are used together to form one unit of a greater
capacity.
Celsius (C): A temperature scale based on the freezing (0 degrees) and boiling (100 degrees) points of water. Also known as Centigrade.
Conversion to Fahrenheit: F = 1.8(C) + 32
CFM (Cubic Feet per Minute): A standard measurement of airflow that indicates how many cubic feet of air pass by a stationary point in one
minute.
Charge: The amount of refrigerant placed in a refrigeration unit.
Chiller: A device that produces chilled water to provide cooling for HVAC and industrial applications.
Circulating Water: See Reirculating Water.
Cogeneration: Simultaneous production of two or more forms of useable energy from a single fuel source, e.g., heat energy and electrical or
mechanical power, in the same facility.
Coil: A tube, often including fins, through which gas or liquid is passed, exchanging thermal energy with air or water surrounding it for heating
or cooling purposes.
Cold Water Basin: The collection pan that houses the cold water processed by the evaporative cooling unit.
Combined Flow: The use of both a coil and wet deck surface for heat transfer in a closed circuit cooling tower or evaporative condeser.
Combined flow designs reduce evaporation in the coil section.
Comfort Cooling: The process of treating air to control its temperature to meet the comfort requirements of the occupants of a conditioned
space.
TR - G 62
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Commercial: The commercial sector is generally defined as non-manufacturing business establishments; this classification includes hotels,
restaurants, office buildings, retail stores, educational institutions, etc.
Commissioning: The start-up of a building that includes testing and adjusting HVAC, electrical, plumbing, and other systems to assure proper
functioning and adherence to design criteria. Commissioning also includes the instruction of operating personnel in the use of the building
systems.
Compressor: The pump of a refrigerating mechanism that draws a low-pressure gas on the cooling side of the refrigerant cycle and compresses
the gas into the high-pressure side of the cycle. The compressor maintains adequate pressure to cause refrigerant to flow in sufficient quantities
to meet the cooling requirements of the system.
Conduction: The transfer of heat through a solid material. The transfer of heat energy through a material (solid, liquid or gas) by the motion of
adjacent atoms and molecules without gross displacement of the particles.
Contactor: A switch used to make or break an electrical circuit.
Convection: The movement of heat by airflow.
Cooling Tower: Any device in which atmospheric air and water are distributed together over a heat transfer medium in order to lower the
temperature of the water through evaporative cooling.
Corrosion Inhibitors: Chemicals designed to prevent or slow down the waterside corrosion of metals.
Counterflow: The flow of air is in the opposite direction of the flow of water.
CRN: Canadian Registration Number. This registration is sometimes required on coils shipping into Canada.
Crossflow: The flow of air is at a right angle to the direction of the flow of water.
CTI: The Cooling Technology Institute (CTI) is an organization comprised of evaporative cooling equipment owners and operators, equipment
manufacturers and component suppliers, and water treatment specialists, which advocates and promotes the use of environmentally responsible
Evaporative Heat Transfer Systems for the benefit of the public through education, research, standards development, government relations, and
technical information exchange.
Current: A flow of electrons in an electrical conductor. The strength or rate of flow is generally measured in amperes.
Damper: A series of movable plates that can be opened or closed to control the flow of air through a space.
Decibel (dB): A decibel describes the relative loudness of a sound. The dimensionless unit of measurement used in noise control.
Logarithmically expresses the ratio of sound level to a reference level (0.0002 microbar).
Defrost Cycle: The process of removing ice or frost buildup from a piece of equipment during the winter months.
Delta (or Delta T or T): A difference in temperature. Often used in the context of the difference between the entering water temperature and
the leaving water temperature of a cooling tower or closed circuit cooling tower.
Demand (Utility): The rate at which electricity or natural gas is delivered to or by a system, part of a system, or piece of equipment at a given
instant or averaged over any designated period of time. Electricity demand is typically expressed in kilowatts.
Demand Billing: The electric capacity requirement for which a large user pays. It may be based on the customer's peak demand during the
contract year, on a previous maximum or on an agreed minimum. Measured in kilowatts.
Demand Charge: The sum to be paid by a large electricity consumer for its peak usage level.
Design Conditions: A set of conditions specific to the local climate and expected building usage, used to calculate the cooling load for a
building.
Dewpoint: The temperature at which air becomes saturated with water and begins to condense, forming a dew.
Drift: The water aerosol carried out of an evaporative cooling unit by the discharge air.
Drift eliminator: A component of most evaporative cooling units that is designed to remove water droplets from the air passing through it.
Dry-Bulb Temperature (DB): The temperature measured by a standard thermometer. A measure of the sensible temperature of air.
Efficiency: The ratio of the output to the input of any system.
Electric Resistance Heater: A device that produces heat through electric resistance.
Energy: Broadly defined, energy is the capability of doing work. In the electric power industry, energy is more narrowly defined as electricity
supplied over time, generally expressed in kilowatts.
TR - G 63
... because temperature matters
Energy Management System: A control system designed to regulate the energy consumption of a building by controlling the operation of
energy consuming systems, such as the heating, ventilation and air conditioning (HVAC), lighting and water heating systems.
Entering Water Temperature (EWT): The temperature of the fluid as it returns to the evaporative cooling equipment from the system heat
source.
Enthalpy: A thermodynamic function of a system, equivalent to the sum of the internal energy of the system plus the product of its volume
multiplied by the pressure exerted on it by its surroundings.
Equalizer Connection: A connection in the cold water basin of a unit that allows piping (the piping is called an equalizer line) to be run from
that unit to the basin of another unit; equalizer lines serve to correct any difference in water levels that may develop during operation.
Evaporative Cooling: Cooling accomplished through the exchange of latent heat in the form of evaporation.
External Pulldown Volume: The volume of water in any external piping and heat exchangers that will drain back to the unit when the pump is
shut down, which is equal to the total pulldown volume minus the water suspended in the unit and its distribution system.
External Static Pressure: The pressure imposed on cooling equipment by external sources such as ductwork and sound attenuation.
Fahrenheit (F): A temperature scale in which the boiling point of water is 212 degrees and its freezing point is 32 degrees at normal atmospheric
pressure. Conversion to Celsius: C = (F 32)/1.8
Fan, Axial: An air moving device consisting of impeller blades oriented around a central shaft, usually with an aerodynamic inlet housing; axial
fans typically move large volumes of air at low pressures as compared to centrifugal fans for the same fan horsepower.
Fan, Centrifugal: An air moving device consisting of impeller blades radially oriented parallel to a central shaft, bound with a rim and hub;
centrifugal fans typically move smaller volumes of air than axial fans but at a higher pressure for the same fan horsepower.
Fan Coil Unit: A terminal unit that delivers conditioned air directly to the occupied space.
Fan Deck: The finished surface adjacent to a horizontally mounted axial fan, sometimes used as a working surface to perform maintenance
when the proper safety precautions are taken (handrails, ladder, etc.).
Fiberglass Reinforced Polyester (FRP): A non-corrosive composite material comprised of a plastic resin matrix, glass fiber reinforcement and
other additives.
Fill: See Wet Deck.
Filtration: The process of separating solids from a liquid by means of a filter media through which only the liquid passes.
Flume Box: A short channel that runs between two cooling towers, allowing water to flow from one cold water basin to another; a flume box
serves to correct any difference in water levels that may develop during operation and generally has a greater capacity of water flow than an
equalizer line.
Forced Draft: Refers to the location of the fan(s) on evaporative cooling equipment. On forced draft equipment, the fans are located at the air
inlets to force or push air through the unit.
Fouling: Organic growth or other deposits on heat transfer surfaces causing loss of efficiency.
Frequency: The number of cycles that an alternating current moves through in each second. Standard electric utility frequency in the United
States is 60 cycles per second (60 Hertz).
Full Load Amps (FLA): The current draw of a motor under full load.
GPM: Measure of liquid flow rate (Gallons Per Minute). Typically based on U.S. gallons, sometimes clarified as USGPM.
Heat Exchanger: A device for the transfer of heat energy from the source to the conveying medium.
Heat Pump: A device that is capable of both heating and cooling space, depending on user comfort requirements. Heat pumps are generally
individually controlled and therefore a heat pump in one room may be heating, while a heat pump in an adjacent room may be cooling.
Heat Transfer: Moving heat from one location to another.
Hertz (Hz): A unit of electromagnetic wave frequency that is equal to one cycle per second.
Hot Water Basin: The collection pan that houses the hot water in an evaporative cooling unit with a gravity distribution system.
Humidity: The amount of moisture in the air.
HVAC: Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning.
TR - G 64
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l
Induced Draft: Refers to the location of the fan(s) on evaporative cooling equipment. On induced draft equipment, the fans are located on the
air discharge side of the equipment to induce air through the unit. Industrial: The industrial sector is generally defined as manufacturing,
construction, mining, agriculture, fishing, and forestry establishments (Standard Industrial Classification [SIC] codes 01-39).
Interference: The reintroduction of warm discharge air from one evaporative cooling unit into the air inlet of an adjacent unit. To avoid
interference, layout guidelines provided by equipment manufacturers should be closely followed.
Inverter: See Variable Frequency Drive.
ISO 9001: 2000: A comprehensive, internationally recognized standard which is concerned with all aspects of quality management in the design,
engineering and manufacturing of a product.
Latent Heat: Heat that causes a change in state when added or removed, but does not cause a change in temperature. For example, heat that
evaporates a substance from a liquid to a vapor but does not increase its temperature.
Leaving Water Temperature (LWT): The temperature of the fluid as it leaves the evaporative cooling equipment to return to the system heat
source.
Legionella: A genus of bacteria; most species of this genus are capable of causing disease in humans. LD, Legionnaires Disease, is a
pneumonia like disease caused by one genus of Legionella
Life-Cycle Cost: The amount of money required to own, operate and maintain a piece of equipment over its useful life.
Load: The demand for services or performance made on a machine or system, i.e. amount of heat rejection required by the evaporative cooling
equipment
Louver: A series of sloping vanes that allow the entrance of air but prevent the escape of water droplets.
Make-Up Water: Water added to the recirculating water to compensate for losses from evaporation and bleed.
NEMA: National Electrical Manufacturing Association.
Nozzle: A device used for regulating and directing the flow of a fluid.
Parts Per Million (PPM): A unit which represents a comparison of mass to mass, volume to volume, mass to volume, etc.; commonly used to
represent the concentration of dissolved solids in the recirculating water of evaporative cooling equipment.
Plenum: The open area of a crossflow evaporative cooling unit through which air is pulled before being discharged to the atmosphere.
Plume: Saturated discharge air that forms a visible cloud over evaporative cooling equipment under certain temperature and humidity
conditions.
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC): A polymer of vinyl chloride often used for a heat transfer media surface (film) and piping on factory-assembled
evaporative cooling equipment.
Power: The rate at which energy is transferred. Electricity for use as energy is also referred to as power.
Preventive Maintenance: Regular maintenance implemented to reduce the possibility of sudden or unexpected equipment failures.
Pulldown: Water that collects in the cold water basin of a unit when the system pumps shut off.
Pump, Spray: A water moving device on a closed circuit cooling tower or evaporative condenser for transporting the spray water from the basin
to the water distribution system in order to wet the heat transfer surface.
Pump, System: A flow moving device for transporting the fluid to be cooled (water in a cooling tower; water, glycol, or other fluid in the case of
a closed circuit cooling tower) to the tower and back to the system in a continuous loop.
Range: The difference between the entering water temperature and leaving water temperature of an evaporative cooling unit. See also Delta.
Recirculating Water: The water being circulated over the coil or fill in an evaporative cooling unit.
Recirculation: Situation that occurs when the warm discharge air flows back into the air inlets of the evaporative cooling equipment. To avoid
recirculation, layout guidelines provided by equipment manufacturers should be closely followed.
Reclaiming: Processing or returning used refrigerant to the manufacturer or processor for disposal or reuse.
Refrigerant: A chemical that condenses from a vapor to liquid and, in the process, decreases in temperature.
Refrigerant Charge: The amount of refrigerant in a system.
Retrofit: Broad term that applies to any change after the original purchase, such as adding equipment or accessories to an existing installation.
TR - G 65
... because temperature matters
Saturation Temperature: Also referred to as the boiling point or the condensing temperature. This is the temperature at which a refrigerant will
change state from a liquid to a vapor or vice versa.
Scale: The accumulation of solids from the minerals contained in water, most often referred to as hardness deposits, i.e. calcium and
magnesium.
Scale Inhibitor: Chemical added to water to inhibit formation of scale.
Sensible Heat: Heat that causes a change in temperature when added or removed, but does not cause a change in state.
Separator: A device which uses centrifugal force to separate particles from a suspension; used to remove sediment from evaporative cooling
systems.
Setpoint: The temperature to which a thermostat is set to result in a desired heated space temperature.
Sound Attenuator: Component used on the air inlet or air discharge of an evaporative cooling unit to reduce airborne noise.
Specific Heat: In English units, the quantity of heat, in BTU, needed to raise the temperature of one pound of material one degree Fahrenheit.
Strainer: A filter used to remove large, suspended solids from a liquid.
Subcooled Liquid: Liquid refrigerant that is cooled below its saturation temperature.
Suction Connection: The outlet connection through which leaving water is pumped back to the chiller.
Sump: The cold water basin of the evaporative cooling equipment.
Superheated Vapor: Refrigerant vapor that is heated above its saturation temperature.
Thermal (Energy) Storage: A technology that lowers the amount of electricity needed for comfort conditioning during utility peak load periods.
A buildings thermal energy storage system might, for example, use off-peak power to make ice at night, then use the ice for cooling during the
day.
Thermostat: A temperature control device that consists of a series of sensors and relays that monitor and control the functions of a heating and
cooling system.
Total Pulldown Volume: The sum of the water suspended within the unit and its distribution system during operation, plus the water in any
external piping and heat exchangers draining back to the unit when the pump is shut down.
Valve: Any device used to control the flow of a fluid through piping.
Variable Frequency Drive (VFD): An electronic device that controls the speed of a motor by controlling the frequency of the voltage supplied
to that motor. Also known as an inverter.
Wet-Bulb Temperature (WB): The temperature at which water, by evaporating into air, can bring the air to saturation at the same temperature.
Wet Deck: A heat transfer surface where air and water interface; also known as fill.
Bal t i mor e Ai r c oi l

Baltimore Aircoil International nv, 2009
All rights reserved by Baltimore Aircoil International nv
No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored or transmitted in any form or by any means whether
graphic, electronic or mechanical; including photocopying, recording or any other information storage system,
without the prior written permission from Baltimore Aircoil International nv
This edition of the EU - Product and Application Handbook was published in Belgium by
Baltimore Aircoil International nv
Industriepark, Zone A, B-2220 Heist-op-den-Berg
Baltimore Aircoil International N.V. has used all reasonable efforts to ensure the data and information contained
in this book are as accurate and up to date as possible at the time of publication. However, they make no
representation that it is absolutely accurate or complete. Errors and omissions can occasionally occur. Baltimore
Aircoil International N.V. does not accept responsibility, and expressly disclaim any liability to any party, for any
loss or damage, financial or otherwise, caused by any errors or omissions in this edition of the EU - Product and
Application Handbook, whether they result from negligence or any other cause.
... because temperature matters
Baltimore Aircoil International nv,Industriepark, 2220 Heist-op-den-Berg, Belgium
info@baltimoreaircoil.be - www.BaltimoreAircoil.com

You might also like